JP6796324B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a rotating body game machine (slot machine).

In pachinko machines and other game consoles, obstacles that change the direction in which the game ball falls, and a winning opening, starting opening, and variable winning opening where the game ball can win are provided in the game area of the game board. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out the prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and the like).

Further, such a game table is known to be provided with a determination means for determining the occurrence of an error.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the determination means.

In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic as a determination means.

The game console of the present invention that solves the above object is
The game area and
A plurality of winning means provided in the game area and
With multiple game ball detection means,
A counting means that can count the number of game balls,
Judgment means that can execute error judgment,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is the first winning means,
The first winning means is a winning means that is easy to win when the game ball is launched toward the left side of the game area.
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is the first game ball detecting means.
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a third game ball detecting means.
The first game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "first game ball") that has won a prize in the first winning means.
The third game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (hereinafter, referred to as "third game ball").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the first game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "first number").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the third game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "third number").
It is possible to take one of multiple gaming states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball toward the left side of the gaming area.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area.
The counting means is a means capable of counting the third number for each gaming state.
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the first number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console of the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console having a feature in the determination means.

FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which saw the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows an example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect which entwined the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing about the effect which entwined the operation means A and the effect which entwined the operation means B. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing about the production which entwined the operation means. It is a figure which shows an example about the production which entwined the operation means A (chance button 136) step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the production involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through the weak SP reach effect, and a big hit is made step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 16 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the case where the effect which entwined the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed through the strong SP reach effect, but is lost. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example stepwise in the case where the effect which entwined the operation means B (transmission part 191) is executed through the strong SP reach effect, and becomes a big hit. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 21 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example in which the chance button 136 which is operation means A starts vibration in response to the operation of the transmission part 191 which is operation means B. It is a figure which shows an example in which the chance button 136 which is operation means A is also operated after operating the transparent part 191 which is operation means B. It is a figure which shows the example in the case where the timing of operating the transparent part 191 which is operation means B is later than the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which the transmission part 191 which is the operation means B vibrates by vibrating the housing. It is a figure which shows the example which the transmission part 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. It is a figure which shows a stepwise example of a case where a scene where an enemy role wins after a strong SP reach production is displayed once, but a big hit is achieved by a resurrection production. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 28 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the third production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the advance notice effect which starts in response to the operation of the transmission part 191 stepwise. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example described so far. It is a figure which shows the example different from the example described with respect to FIG. 32. It is a figure which shows an example of the production which entwined a pseudo-ream step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of other productions entwined with pseudo-ren step by step. It is a figure which shows one example in which the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed from the sway fluctuation display, and the effect involving the operation means is executed during the jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 36 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th production and the 5th production step by step. It is a figure which shows the example in the step when the timing of operating a button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39. It is a figure for demonstrating further the relationship between button A (first chance button 136) and button B (second chance button 137). It is a figure which showed three examples of promotion production. It is a figure which showed two other examples about promotion production. It is a figure for demonstrating a general timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example in which the timer notice display T may be displayed stepwise according to a button operation. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the timing of the back button operation and the timing of the hold increase. It is a figure which shows two examples about a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display method including the timer notice display T. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the timer notice overlaps with other effects accompanied by the countdown of the remaining time. It is a figure which shows another example of a timer notice. It is a figure which shows the example which the timer notice display T is displayed on the device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a figure which shows the state of the variable display of a decorative symbol in which the animation of the hold icon is executed step by step. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon stepwise while the symbol is stopped. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon stepwise when there is a hold increase while a symbol is stopped. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon stepwise when the hold increases by two during a symbol change. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon stepwise when the hold increases by two while the symbol is stopped. It is a figure for demonstrating the change in the order of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the simultaneous change of the hold icon step by step when the hold increases in the change of the winning order. It is a figure which shows the example when the hold increases and the hold becomes full during the stop display in the change of the winning order. It is a figure which shows the example which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is performed depending on the type of the display hold icon. It is a figure explaining the simultaneous change production when the hold is full in the change of the winning order. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine to which this invention is applied seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2, and (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect of another case following FIG. 78 (q) step by step. (A) is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, (b) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408, and (c) is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area. It is a figure explaining an example of the digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a notice icon before the change, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 96 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the increase effect of a notice icon step by step. It is a figure which shows the production example in which the notice icon changes step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example step by step when the power is cut off and is restored while the notice icon is displayed. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon increase effect and digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon increase effect and digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 109 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon digestion production step by step. It is a figure which shows the production example using the movable means applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of a notice icon increase effect and digestion effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the increase effect and the digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining the lottery table related to a notice item. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other production example which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is schematic explanatory drawing which shows an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows one example of the hold change notice effect as the look-ahead notice effect by the hold icon applicable to an embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 139 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. It is a figure which shows another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. It is a figure which shows one example of the super reach effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of hold change notice production. It is a figure which shows one example of the symbol variation display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure which shows the production example of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example of the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 5-9 of this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows one example of the production of a mini-game applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production of a mini-game step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 171. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol mode of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU of the 1st sub-control unit. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 64, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation key unit 137. It is a figure which shows the display example on a menu screen. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the display example in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211. It is a figure explaining an example of pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye production. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a pending change notice. It is a figure explaining an example of the production using the production movable body. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by one-shot operation of the production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by one-shot operation of the production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by one-shot operation of the production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by the continuous hitting operation of the production button. It is a figure which shows the state that the long press auto continuous hitting is performed in the directing operation by the continuous hitting operation of an effect button. It is a figure which shows the state that the long press auto continuous hitting is performed in the directing operation by the continuous hitting operation of an effect button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by the continuous hitting operation of the production button. It is a figure which shows the state that the hold change notice is performed during the production by the continuous hit operation of the production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect by long-pressing the effect button. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect by long-pressing the effect button. It is a figure which shows the state that the continuous hit operation is performed in the effect by long-pressing the effect button. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production which operates the production button according to a rhythm. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the concrete effect example using two effect buttons. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection effect executed in the symbol variation display. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by the continuous hitting operation of the production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the back button production. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect by long-pressing the effect button. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye production. It is a figure explaining another display example of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows the state that the initial setting of a movable object is performed. It is a figure which shows one example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 248. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 251. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the pseudo-continuous production step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pseudo-continuous production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a button continuous press operation effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a button continuous press operation effect step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the hold consecutive villa notice production which is executed during a big hit game. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the hold consecutive villa notice production executed during a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the hold consecutive villa notice production executed during a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of a button continuous press operation effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 271. (A) is a diagram showing another example of the decorative symbol, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that is a chance of pre-reading notice. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 274. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 277. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the concrete production example shown in FIG. 278. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a pseudo-continuous production step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. (A) is a diagram showing another example of a button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and (B) is a pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is a schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 1000 as a game table by a modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 equipped with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) is a home television equipped with a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100. An example of a display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure X, (b) shows an example of a stop display symbol of special figure Y, and (c) is a decorative symbol. An example is shown, and FIG. 1D is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead result storage part for special figure X and special figure Y. It is a figure explaining the content of the hit / fail determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 1st sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of the process, and (c) is the flowchart of the 1st sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the process flow in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of a pachinko machine 100, (a) is the flowchart of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, and (b) is the 2nd sub-control unit command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of processing, (c) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is the flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effect device 206, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effect device 206. It is a figure explaining the effect example applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 304 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 305 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the effect shown in FIG. 306. It is a figure which shows an example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of a timer notice effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the production using a chance up meter step by step. It is a figure explaining the mode of change of the remaining time display meter in a button effect. It is a figure which shows the other example of a button effect step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other production example of a timer notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the production centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another display example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 346 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 350 step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the effect which continues from FIG. 350 (24) step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 353. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 357. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 361. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 361. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 363 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 363 to 364. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 360 to FIG. 361. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 366 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 368 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 368 to 369. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 370 stepwise. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 341. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 373 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 to 374. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 375 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 375 to 376. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 377 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 379 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the production which continues from FIG. 379 (18). It is a figure which shows stepwise about another example of the timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 379 to 380. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 385 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 386 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the production in the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise the display example when the error display is displayed in the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a timer notice display. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the display example in the tutorial display part TT1 which can apply to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated hitting effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the explanatory display applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the other effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 409 step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 412. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect applicable to this embodiment step by step. It is a figure explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 154 (b-1) to FIG. (B-5). It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows the display example of the ball removal error display. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 425 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 426 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 428 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 430 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 432 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 437 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 439 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 441 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 445 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 447 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 449 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 452 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows step by step another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 455 step by step. It is a figure which shows one example of the hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 458 step by step. It is a figure which shows step by step another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 460 stepwise. It is a figure which shows step by step another example of the timer notice effect executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the hold icon applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows one example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 464 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about the other example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 466 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 468 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 472 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 475 step by step. It is a figure which shows stepwise about another pattern of the effect following FIG. 465 (25). It is a figure which shows stepwise another example of the advance notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 478 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 479 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 480 step by step. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 which concerns on 5th Embodiment from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the out-ball detection process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the display monitor switching process, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the state display STDP in a normal state, and (C) is a state display in an error state. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the instrument STDP, (D) is the figure which shows another example of the display aspect of the state indicator STDP in an error state, (E) is the accessory ratio and the accessory ratio in the state indicator STDP. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the continuous accessory ratio, (F) is the figure which shows another example of the display mode of the state indicator STDP in an error state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of error determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an error determination table, (B) is a diagram showing a first modification of the error determination table, and (C) is a second diagram of the error determination table. It is a figure which shows the modified example of, (D) is the figure which shows the 3rd modified example of the error determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of the out ball detection processing. It is a figure which shows one example of the operation when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal in the pachinko machine which concerns on this embodiment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of the operation shown in FIG. 489 step by step. It is a front view of the enclosed type pachinko machine to which this invention is applied. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine applicable to this invention as seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the machine 2000 of the holding, (b) shows the mobile phone 3000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. , (C) show a portable game machine 4000 including a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) includes a storage unit that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. A home-use video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a ball game machine (including an enclosed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The enclosed type as used herein refers to an enclosed game machine or the like that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3) as external structures. .. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 to serve as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in the present specification, a lamp having an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, or the like is referred to as a lamp if it emits light. The one that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 can rotate in the front-rear direction about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the bottom. Further, the transmission unit 190 has a built-in light emitting diode (LED). The transmission unit 191 of the transmission unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transparent portion 191 functions as an operating means (button) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launch handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136. And. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation means. Further, the chance button 136 is also an example of the movable means, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, this chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 has a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided on the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod (not shown) that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod. Equipped with a launching mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games according to this configuration. Pay out the ball to the person.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 for accommodating the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 for processing, and the second sub for performing control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 172 that houses the payout board 170 including 168, the launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed game board. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength with which the game ball is launched by the operation of the player, the normal drawing start port 228 and the second special figure start port 232, which will be described later, and the second It can be divided into 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area) provided with the first special drawing start port 230 by arranging the game nail 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124 is the second. A game ball that is configured to make it difficult or impossible to enter the special figure start port 232 and, conversely, rolls in a second area (right side in the game area) provided with the second special figure start port 232. 1 It is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special figure starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board of the right-handed machine, but can be widely applied to the pachinko machine provided with the general game board.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) here. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 is also a kind of symbol display means.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and here, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and here, a predetermined number of special figure changing games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high probability state. Turns on when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won). , The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, the ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Sometimes called a ball (game ball).

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is on the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged. Therefore, it is expected that the game ball will enter the starting port 228 by hitting the right side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Only one first special figure start port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

Only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special drawing start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and it is expected that the ball will enter by hitting the right side. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special figure start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). A variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. The central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is arranged below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, the right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to the second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is arranged under the second special figure starting opening 232, and the ball is entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are sometimes called an attacker. The central variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game in the case of a big hit in the non-electric support state is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 keeps the closed state until the big hit game when the big hit is started in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. That is, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first open / closed state (here, closed state) and a second open / closed state (here, open) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first open / closed state. It is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one of the states) to the other, and when the special figure variable game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol. The door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variable game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. It should be noted that, in any of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the closed state does not necessarily have to be a completely closed state, and even if the ball is slightly opened, it may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball. .. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. Discharge to 126. Both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

According to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235 described above, in the electric support state, the right side. Hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player, and in a non-electric support state, left hitting is a hitting method that is advantageous to the player.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, central variable winning opening 234, right variable) Win a prize at the winning opening 235) or the starting port (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting port 232), without winning any winning opening or starting port, or at the normal drawing starting port 228. The out port 240 is reached only by passing through.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front surface side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a translucent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The above-mentioned chance button 136 capable of executing the forward / backward operation and the transmissive portion 191 capable of rotating in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect movable body.

Further, as the effect movable body, a family crest accessory 247 (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) and a pair of combined accessories 248 (see FIG. 22 and the like) to be combined with the family crest accessory 247 are prepared. The family crest accessory 247 corresponds to an example of the first effect movable body, and the combined accessory 248 corresponds to an example of the second effect movable body. The family crest accessory 247 is arranged at an initial position above the decorative pattern display device 208. When the family crest accessory 247 starts to operate, it falls from the initial position to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined accessories 248 are arranged at the initial positions on the left side and the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the combined accessory 248 starts to operate, the left and right sides of the combined accessory 248 advance to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the initial position, and overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pair of combined accessory 248 sandwiches the family crest accessory 247 from each of the left and right sides, and is combined with the family crest accessory. Whether it is the family crest accessory 247 or the pair of combined accessories 248, in the state where they are in the initial positions, it is more difficult for the player to see than the state where they overlap the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is in.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is controlled by the control means (for example, the main control means (300), the first sub control means (400), and the second sub control means (500). ))), One of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means, and the main control unit 300 is used as the first control means. A combination of the 1 sub-control unit 400 and the 2nd sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as the second control means.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, or the like. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. To control the display of a symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) for display control. Various solenoids 332 that open and close the drive circuit 330 and predetermined movable members such as the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234, and the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a random number seed, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by utilizing white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive communication confirmation commands when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both are capable of two-way communication. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. , The first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 has been pressed, a shielding device sensor 430 and a chance. The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 that detects the operation of the detection unit 710 of the button 136 and the operation key unit 181 to the basic circuit 402, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads data or the like, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 is used to drive and control various movable bodies (chance button 136 capable of performing forward / backward movement, transmission unit 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, family crest accessory 247, and coalescence accessory 248). Drive circuit 516, various movable body sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, and a sensor circuit that outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502. 518 and are connected. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248. However, the second sub-control unit 500 may control the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit 400 may control various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248, or any of them. One sub-control unit may perform both controls.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 also controls the display of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Further, when a payout error occurs, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. The door opening sensor 609 may transmit a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply the voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The launch control unit 630 may supply a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is set so that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub control unit 500 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V) is further reduced. ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted into a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12V drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, in which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Corresponds to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the input 24V alternating current as it is, or converts it into a 36V direct current and outputs it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a programming error or a voltage drop due to a lightning strike or fraudulent activity. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT3141. The start-up signal from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT3141 are input to the CPU 304 by a common signal line, but they may be input by a dedicated line. The start-up signal output from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT314, which have been described here, correspond to an example of a predetermined start-up signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately recovers, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and WDT3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to see if the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the verification code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a fixed time plus a randomly selected random time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, even when the user reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" that repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of symbol variation display. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. After that, a definite display is performed to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec).

Therefore, after starting the "variation display of special figure 1" until the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 is stopped and displayed and the final display is completed, or after starting "variation display of special figure 2", the special figure The period from the stop display of the stop symbol mode of 2 to the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. FIG. 5A shows 10 types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure J” as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is turned on.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is also provided with a symbol other than the “special figure A” as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns here, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in each symbol display area of area 208c. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. At the beginning of the variable display of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed (scroll display) for each symbol display area. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot correspond to the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are arranged. 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change, or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure I" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure, "Public figure A" which is a hit symbol and "Public figure B" which is a missed symbol. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the sphere has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of normal map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal-figure variable game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the normal-figure variable game. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 6A. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, for each of the special figures 1 and 2, a counter for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining a special figure at the time of a big hit, a random number counter for determining a special figure at the time of a big hit, and a random number at the time of a small hit Special figure determination random number counter Initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. Further, in the RAM 308, the number of holds, the random value for determining the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure at the time of big hit, the random value for determining the special figure at the time of small hit, and the special figure at the time of loss are determined for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Random value, hit / miss pre-judgment result, special figure pre-judgment result, hit / fail judgment result, special figure decision result, and special figure timer decision result are stored. Further, in the RAM 308, the reserved storage units of the special figures divided into the maximum number (4 in this example) areas where the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be held are separately set in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is prepared. In the hold storage unit of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 1 determination random value, the small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and the special figure 1 determination random value at the time of loss These four random value values are set as one set, and one set of each set of these four random value values is stored in each area in the winning order (holding order). Further, in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 determination random value, the small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and the lost special figure 2 determination are stored. The four random values of the random values are set as one set, and these four random values are stored in each set in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, first, as the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, and various types are stored in the RAM 308. Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT314, setting of initial values, etc. are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT314. Next, the value of the counter of the WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 has the power supply management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500 as the main control unit. When the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power cutoff), the process returns to the WDT process, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power cutoff), the initial process is performed. Make setting 2. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, the first 1 Output port to the sub-control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to RAM 308, and the like.

Next, in step S103, after setting interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value update process here, there are three initial values for generating the initial values of the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of big hit, the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of small hit, and the random number counter for determining the special figure at the time of loss. Update the value generation counter. After the completion of the basic random number initial value update process, the process proceeds to step S105.

In step S105, the effect random number update process is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for determining timer numbers for special figures and normal figures, and all of these counters determine timer numbers that can take values in the range of 0 to 99. Generate a random number value for. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After the completion of this effect random number update process, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during the timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 6B. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every about 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of this timer interrupt processing, the value of each register of the CPU 304 is temporarily saved in the stack area, and the WDT314 is periodically (for example, once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt). ) Restart.

First, in step S201, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined prize determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before the previous time, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal). If it matches with the general winning opening 226, the central variable winning opening 234, the right variable winning opening 235, the first special figure starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the general Figure It is determined that the start port 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the values of the counters for generating various random number counter initial values are updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. It is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and for example, every time the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the random number counter for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit. The same process is applied to other random number counters.

In step S207, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for clocking, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

Subsequently, the winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value of the ball number storage area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the number of special figure variable games held at the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If, the predetermined start information is stored. That is, if the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, the jackpot determination random value and various special figure determination random values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) obtained from the random value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a processed value of the software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the random number counter for determining a special figure provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information derivation means. Various random number values (starting information) are stored as one set of starting information in a vacant area according to the winning order (holding order) of the holding storage unit of the special figure provided in the RAM 308. The hold storage unit of this special figure has a predetermined upper limit number of start information derived based on the entry of the game ball into the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232 (here, four). It corresponds to an example of a start information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the hold storage unit of the special figure. The information storage means may be used, or the reserved storage unit and the temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reserved special figures is incremented by 1. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding means.

In addition, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal figure start port 228 and the number of reserved normal figure variable games is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the normal figure winning random number at that timing The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in the random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308, which is different from that for the special figure, as the normal figure winning random number value which is the starting information.

Further, in this winning determination process, a predetermined ball detection sensor is used to reach the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232, the normal drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning opening 234, or the right variable winning opening 235. When the winning (winning ball) is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the central variable. Winning reception information indicating whether or not there is a winning (winning ball) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

If the number of reservations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of the start information of the special figure or the start information of the normal figure, the process proceeds to step S211 without storing the start information.

When the winning determination process (step S209) is completed, the look-ahead process is called. In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the previously executed look-ahead processing. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds so far (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt processing, which is called the old hold number), and the CPU 304 stores the number of holds. The number of holds at the time of executing the current look-ahead process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the number of old holds, and it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased. If the number of holds has not increased, this look-ahead process ends without pre-reading the start information. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is increasing, the increase in the random number value for determining the jackpot of special figure 1 in the holding storage unit of special drawing 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the special feature in the holding storage unit of special drawing 2 is read. Fig. 2 Pre-read the increase in the random value for jackpot determination. As for the look-ahead here, only the increase is read ahead, but all may be read ahead. Note that the look-ahead here means that the start information is read before the hit / fail judgment (final lottery), but in the subsequent look-ahead processing, the word look-ahead is used as the result of the win / fail judgment (main lottery). ) May be used to mean reading.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in a control state of either a special figure low probability state in which the probability of winning a big hit is relatively low or a special figure high probability state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. Being in a special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability change flag. When this probability fluctuation glag is set to on, the special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to off, the special figure low probability state is set.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a table for pre-determining whether or not the result is used in the look-ahead processing. In this hit / fail pre-determination table, a random number range is defined separately for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is completed, this time, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random number value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value is pre-determined. Determine which random number range in the table to belong to. That is, with reference to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit judgment random value or the special figure 2 big hit judgment random value is in a predetermined numerical range. Occasionally, the hit / miss pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "big hit", and in other cases, the hit / miss pre-judgment result is pre-determined as "miss". In the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variation game is performed again using the hit / miss judgment table having the same contents as the hit / miss pre-judgment table. The determination result here is only the result of the preliminary determination.

If the result of the pre-judgment is "big hit", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of big hit in the hold storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or in the hold storage unit of the special figure 2. Special figure 2 at the time of big hit Pre-read the random value for determination. If the result of the pre-judgment is "small hit", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the hold storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the hold storage of the special figure 2 Special figure 2 at the time of small hit in the department Pre-read the random value for determination. If the result of the pre-determination of whether or not the result is "missing", the random value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is pre-read, or the random value for determining the special figure 1 in the special figure 2 is stored. Special figure 2 at the time of loss Pre-read the random value for determination. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure pre-determination table used in the look-ahead processing. The special figure pre-judgment table defines a random number range corresponding to each of the 10 types of stop symbol modes (“special figure A” to “special figure J”) shown in FIG. 5 (a), and the read-ahead special figure. The special figure pre-determination result (which stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained depending on which random number range the drawing determination random number value belongs to. It should be noted that the determination result of the special figure here is also the result of the preliminary determination to the last, and the determination of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure-related processing (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. ..

The pre-reading of the start information described above and the pre-judgment using the pre-read start information are executed before the pass / fail judgment (final lottery) of the special figure-related process (S213) described later is performed. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 jackpot determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random values corresponds to an example of the first start information look-ahead means, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination random value and various types. The main control unit 300 that pre-reads the random value for determination in FIG. 2 corresponds to an example of the second start information pre-reading means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs the pre-determination based on the special figure 1 jackpot determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random values corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination is performed. The main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the random number value and various special figure 2 determination random value values corresponds to an example of the second pre-determination means.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a look-ahead information temporary storage unit for special figure 2 which is also divided into areas for each hold. Has been done. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (also referred to as information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as look-ahead information) is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit.

If the number of holds has not increased, the look-ahead information "no hold" is stored in the corresponding hold area of the look-ahead information temporary storage unit. Further, in the look-ahead processing, when the jackpot game is in progress, or when the current control state is the electric support state (the time saving flag is on), the look-ahead and advance judgment of the start information of the special figure 1 are performed. However, in these cases, the "undetermined" information indicating that the pre-determination of the stop symbol based on the start information of the pre-read special figure 1 has not been performed is stored in the corresponding hold area of the pre-read information temporary storage unit. Remember in. That is, it is acquired during the big hit game and during the electric support based on the fact that the ball enters the starting port (the first special figure starting port 230 in which the state is a fixed starting area) in which the pair of blade members 2321 is not provided. The preliminary judgment based on the start information is not performed, and the notification of the preliminary judgment result (pre-reading notice) is not performed. By doing so, the fairness of the player is guaranteed. It should be noted that the start information itself may not be pre-read, but the pre-reading may be performed and the pre-judgment and the result notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed. (Pre-reading notice) may not be given.

In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the winning determination process in step S209 is followed by the general diagram-related process (step S211). In this normal map-related process, first, as the normal map state update process, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state is performed. For example, in the process during the normal symbol variation display (the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the normal symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are processed. (The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is performed so as to have one of the display modes of the normal figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal drawing-related processing here but also in various processing. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a definite display of one of the hit symbol and the lost symbol. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed winning symbol is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening / closing of the blade, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is lost, the normal map loss flag is turned on. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive.

Subsequently, in this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure fluctuation game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure is on hold. When the number of fluctuating games is 1 or more, the result of the fluctuating game is won or not won by a random number lottery based on the random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area. A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and when winning, the hit flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random number value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, a special figure-related process (step S213) is performed following the normal figure-related process in step S211 described above. In this special figure-related process, first, the special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then the special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update process). Processing). The special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), in the special figure related lottery process described later. Based on the special figure determination result (the stop symbol mode of the special figure), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is controlled to turn on / off, and the special figure 2 stop display is being displayed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate that. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). FIG. D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first lost symbol (special symbol) A definite display of any one of the symbol I) and the first lost symbol (special diagram J) is performed. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In that case, the time reduction flag is turned off unless the special figure probability is changing. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state) or the small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is set to the non-electric support state (first approach rate control state) when it is in the big hit game state and the small hit game state (during the special game state).

In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S215) described later is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and a symbol for stopping the variable display is displayed. The processing is terminated after the special figure 2 identification information indicating that the special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later.

The RAM 308 also has a jackpot flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the jackpot flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233), 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the 2351, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 or the right side of the central variable winning opening 234 is used. A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 351 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable winning opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and is provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration. The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information.

As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning opening 235 during the jackpot gaming state (during the special gaming state). It corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing pattern of the door members 2341 and 351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the ROM 306 to store the opening / closing pattern according to the determination of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful. get.

Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to on at the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol mode represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON when the special figure determination result is "special figure A" or "special figure C" in the special figure lottery process described later. .. When the special figure determination result is "special figure E", only the probability change flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to on. Further, when the special figure determination result is "special figure B" or "special figure D", only the time saving flag among the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is set to ON, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is used. Set the number of electric support times to 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the approach rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure start port 232 (variable start area) is controlled. It corresponds to an example of the approach rate changing means for changing between the non-electric support state which is the approach rate control state and the electric support state which is the second approach rate control state.

Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, the RAM 308 is also provided with a loss flag, and if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next process without doing anything.

When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process described above is completed, the special figure-related lottery process is performed this time. In the special figure-related lottery process, the process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the winning determination process in the main control unit timer interrupt process started at the same timing (a predetermined trigger). When the start information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 in S209) and the start information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure start port 232. Or, when the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied. Even if there is, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize in the second special figure start port 232. The notification of the result of the lottery based on is given priority over the notification of the result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230, and the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure are provided as the start information in which the lottery is not performed. If only the start information of special figure 1 remains among the start information of 2 and the start information of special figure 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of special figure 2. The notification of the lottery result is performed before the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of the special figure 1. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the lottery means (win / fail determination means).

In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the lottery (win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped and displayed is determined, and the timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined winning / failing determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is displaying the special figure fluctuation display or the stop display, and if either display is being performed, the main control unit timer interrupt processing is performed. Return, if it is not in any of the displays, it is determined whether it is set while the special figure is operating or not, and if it is set while the special figure is operating, the timer interrupt process of the main control unit If it is set while the special figure is not operating, it means that the hit / fail judgment prohibition condition has not been satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not the predetermined pass / fail judgment condition is satisfied. The determination here refers to the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether or not the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game is greater than 0. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the timer interrupt process of the main control unit, and if it is 1 or more, a predetermined hit / fail determination condition is satisfied.

If a predetermined hit / fail judgment condition is satisfied, a set of random values (special figure 2 jackpot judgment random value), which is the start information stored in the past, is stored in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , The random value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit, the random value value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and the random value value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss) are taken out, and the start information (random value) still stored in the hold storage unit is taken out. Move the set of numbers) from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the start information stored in the past is taken out from the hold storage unit of special figure 2 and the start information is further stored in the hold storage unit of special figure 2, the Nth oldest start information is held in special figure 2. This means that it is set as the N-1th oldest start information in the storage unit. In addition, the number of holds stored in the RAM 308 is subtracted by 1. One set of random numbers from the hold storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (special figure 2 big hit judgment random value, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and loss The main control unit 300 that performs the process of extracting the special figure 2 determination random value) corresponds to an example of the second start information acquisition means.

Next, a hit / fail determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a winning / failing determination table. The contents of the pass / fail determination table are the same as the contents of the pass / fail pre-determination table described above. In this hit / fail judgment process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the random number value for the special figure 2 jackpot judgment is set in the hit / fail determination table according to the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which random number range of the above, a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" is derived as a winning / failing determination result. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Derivation of "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" corresponds to a win / fail determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the win / fail determination process here corresponds to a lottery means (win / fail determination means). Corresponds to one example. In addition, the "big hit" corresponds to an example of a specific hit / fail judgment result.

When the execution of the pass / fail judgment process is completed, the process proceeds to the symbol determination process of the special figure. A special drawing determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure pre-determination table described above. In the symbol determination process of this special figure, when the hit / fail determination result is "big hit", the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of big hit belongs to which random number range in the special figure determination table. The special figure determination result is determined to be one of "special figure A" to "special figure F". In addition, when the winning / failing determination result is "small hit", the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the special figure 2 determination random number value at the time of small hit belongs. Determined to be "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the result of determining whether or not the result is "missing", the result of determining the special figure is set to "special" based on which random number range in the table for determining the special figure belongs. Determined to be "Fig. I" or "Special figure J". The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the symbol determination process of the special symbol corresponds to an example of the symbol determination means.

Following the symbol determination process of the special figure, the variation display period in the variation stop display of the special figure is determined in the variation time determination process. In this fluctuation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the random number for determining the timer number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation, but it may be the timing for acquiring the start information. The timer number determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In this timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special figure display device 214 or the first special figure display device 212 starts to change the symbol to when the stop symbol indicating the result of the hit / miss judgment is displayed, that is, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner. Although it represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time), it may be the fluctuation table time period of the decorative symbol.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 2 seconds, which is a super-shortened special figure fluctuation time, and timer 2 is that the special figure fluctuation stop period is 5 seconds, which is a shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents to be. It should be noted that determining the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 has no reach.

The timer 4 indicates that the special symbol variation stop period is 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal reach, a decorative symbol whose two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are the same is generally stopped and displayed (strictly speaking, a temporary stop) (first stop and second stop are performed). ), The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is in a variable display state, that is, the variable display symbol display area is a specific symbol (stop-displayed symbol display area). It is a state in which a predetermined combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed when the stop display (third stop or final stop) is displayed. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and the timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. Super reach is a normal reach with a special variation display added to improve the effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The special variation includes a special multi-line reach, a full rotation reach, a special full rotation reach, and the like, and when the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208. The probability that the timer 8 will be selected is much lower than the probability that another timer will be selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to the premier reach.

The term "reach" simply means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

This reach is performed after the hit / fail judgment is performed so that the result of the hit / miss judgment (final lottery) in the special figure-related processing becomes a specific hit / fail judgment result (a predetermined result with a high advantage of the player). It is a notice effect that notifies the player in advance before notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment, and whether or not to perform the reach is determined after the hit / miss judgment is made.

In the fluctuation time determination process here, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired random number for determining the timer number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of holds, the number of holds in the current special figure 2 can be used in addition to the random number for determining the timer number. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

The timer number representing the special figure fluctuation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

Before the special figure lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-mentioned winning determination process S209), the special figure pre-determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers which are one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on or by a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and here, the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for determining the timer number), or the timer number may be uniquely determined even if the lottery is not performed. .. Further, the timer selection table may be selected in this special figure lottery-related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may select the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the timer selection table.

When the fluctuation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special figure 2 related lottery process ends.

Subsequently, in the special figure-related processing, the special figure 1-related lottery process is performed. Since each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process of replacing "special figure 2" with "special figure 1" in the content explained in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, the explanation thereof is described. Omit.

With the above, the special figure-related processing (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6B is completed, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission processing (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are commands. Types (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of winning rounds specified command, large winning opening opening command, large winning opening closing command, power recovery command, RAM The command type can be specified, such as a clear command, a special figure hold increase command, and a normal figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start command, the command data includes information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control status (information indicating the setting status of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and information indicating the timer number. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the information indicating the special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), the information indicating the control state, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect start command and the end effect start command. , Information indicating the control state, etc., and in the case of a command for specifying the number of hit rounds, information indicating the control state, the number of hit rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the central variable winning port 234 has been won. Includes whether or not there is a prize, and whether or not there is a prize in the right variable winning opening 235.

Further, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, the information representing the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), the information indicating the control state, the information indicating the timer number, and the hold, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being played is set. In the above-mentioned general command rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data. In the above-mentioned general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of reserved first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, and the like. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command referred to here corresponds to the jackpot game start command. In the above-mentioned general command end effect setting transmission process, the command data represents the effect control information and the control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information, information indicating the number of reserved first special figure variable games or second special figure variable games, etc. is set. Upon receiving the end effect start command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits the end effect control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Upon receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image notifying the player that the jackpot is completed for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), and the jackpot game. Is finished. The end effect start command referred to here corresponds to the jackpot game end command. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as the command data of the large winning opening opening command. .. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the reserved first special figure variable game are used as the command data of the large winning opening closing command. Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games and the like is set.

Further, in this step S215, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, the special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, and the control state. Information representing the above, and information representing the stop symbol of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary judgment result) are set.

Further, in this step S215, the general command general command hold increase process is also performed. In this general command hold increase process, information indicating the control status is set in the command data of the hold increase command. Further, from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as a command related to the normal map, a normal map fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal map has started is also transmitted. From the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a command to stop the fluctuation of the normal figure indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal figure has stopped (or) and a pair of blade members 2321 have started (to) open. It is also possible to send an electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the winning rounds based on the number of winning rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

Further, in this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, and the bit 7 is the strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that the data is set), and the bit 6 is the power-on information. (If it is on, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), bits 4 to 5 are the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 are after encryption processing. The number of withdrawal requests is shown.

Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error, and the front frame door is opened. When an error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, device information indicating the presence / absence of the front frame door opening error or the presence / absence of the lower plate full tank error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special drawing start port 232, the central variable winning opening 234, and the right variable winning opening 235, or via the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

When the device monitoring process in step S219 is completed, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A, but before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to the original register. Set or set interrupt permission. Also, before returning, it monitors whether the low voltage signal is on, and if the low voltage signal is on (when it detects that the power supply is cut off), it returns to the state at the time of power failure when the power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for this purpose is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, power cut processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed, and then the main control unit main processing is restored. May be good.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. The effect involving the operating means, which will be described below, is also controlled by this effect control process. That is, when a symbol variation start command including information on the symbol variation time is received, whether or not to execute an effect involving the operation means according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined by the lottery process and executed, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. The image display control in the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed in step S313 according to the effect data read out here, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the movable body according to the effect data read out here. A command is transmitted, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs the command in step S713 described later.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 is pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. When the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected as a result of the determination here, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or pressing the chance button 136. When the operation is valid, a process of preparing the effect data corresponding to the operation reception effect described later is performed.

In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if there is a control command (for example, a control command related to various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, 248) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, this Set to output the control command, and return to step S303. If a door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with the timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random value value update process, and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the movable body control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable body control process here, from the first sub-control unit 400, various movable bodies (chance button 136 capable of executing forward / backward movement, transparent unit 191 rotatable in the front-rear direction, family crest accessory 247, and coalescing combination) When a control command related to the object 248) is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and operation control of each of the various movable bodies 136, 191, 247, and 248 is performed.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Subsequently, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the button effect step by step. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of the alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise specified). In addition, the time interval between the alphabet etc. written in parentheses and the alphabet etc. written in parentheses next may be equal intervals or different intervals in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following figures).

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided in the central portion of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-shaped image showing the position of the variable icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the variable icon display area 208e. This frame-shaped image is always displayed, but when the display conditions are satisfied (for example, when the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, and a reach effect is performed. It may be displayed only when it is not displayed. It should be noted that only one of the variable icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

One or more hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9A displays four hold icons h1 to h4. All of these four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed as black circles, and the display of the white circles by the dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure or the start of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure is suspended, and the number of hold icons displayed is basically that of the special figure variation game. It is the same number as the number on hold. However, before and after the hold digestion, there may be a timing when the number of hold icons displayed does not represent the hold number. The hold icon includes a hold icon of special figure 1 and a hold icon of special figure 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to be a display area for each of both icons. In addition, the hold icon can give a pre-reading notice as to whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. Animations related to the hold icon include, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the hold rank changes due to the previous hold being exhausted, and the hold is held. The movement animation executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position next to the left), the change animation executed when the display mode of the hold icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc., the hold is digested. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and save animation executed when the hold icon of the special figure on the non-priority side is saved when the hold of the special figure on the priority side increases in the priority variable machine. And so on. In addition to the above animation, a standby animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the above animation during execution (for example, a period during which there is no increase / decrease in hold or change in the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the above animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repetitive animation of a fixed length animation) can be given as an example. Note that the increase, move, change, erase, save, and wait animations of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

One variable icon can be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variable icon c is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9B. The variable icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game, which is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon at the same time as the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. Strictly speaking, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the variable icon display area 208e, the moving icon is called a variable icon, or the variable icon is expressed as moving. You may. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. This variable icon is displayed in a display size different from that of the hold icon (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. In addition, the variable icon may consist of a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can give a notice of whether or not the change is correct (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variable icon can be seen as an icon related to hold, and can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of winning or failing the special figure variable game is held. The erasing timing may be a timing earlier than the timing at which the result of the change is notified, the same timing, or a later timing.

Animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon include the hold icon with the oldest start winning timing displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and the variable icon display area 208e when the hold is exhausted. There are a movement animation that moves the icon as a variable icon and a change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and performed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variable icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

Animations related to the variable icon include a standby animation executed during the execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the variable icon is deleted after the special figure variable game ends, and a variable icon. There is a change animation or the like that is executed when the display mode of is changed in the middle. These animations may be combined with each other and performed at the same time. In addition, the standby animation of the variable icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the moving animation or the changing animation.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed on the upper right. The fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular display. In each of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is in the stop display (confirmed display), and white indicates that the lost symbol is in the stop display (confirmed display). Represents that.

Further, in FIG. 9, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 are shown. ing.

In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 has a white display indicating the white lighting state or the extinguishing state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Indicates a red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red is a state in which the chance button 136 is urged to be pressed. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. Further, although "lighting" is used here, it may be "blinking" (hereinafter, the same applies).

The background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of the castle town. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes prepared. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

In FIG. 9A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" is displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed in white while stopped. Four of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 9B, the first special symbol display device 212 has started the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is continuously updated (variable display) in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and there are only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is not displayed, and the star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. Of the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in the figure (a), the hold icon h1 having the earliest start winning timing becomes a variable icon, and the variable icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 208f. This is the result of moving to the area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to the changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (c), the reach effect is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced to the left corner and is in the reach state by the number 3. ..

In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is a production that predicts the development to super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that predicts the type of super reach that is developing. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and an operation (pressing) of the chance button 136 are performed. ) As a promotion display, the arrow display 136b and the character display "press", and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. One is displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9 (d) starts to light in red to encourage pressing.

In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a short time (see FIG. 9 (f)). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which had been lit in red until then, is switched to lit in white or turned off.

When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in notice suggesting whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display “CHANGE” interrupts the background image so as to overlap, and then develops into Super Reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). There is. The character "Super Reach A" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 9H, indicating that the effect of Super Reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the production display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Further, when the effect display of Super Reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and become invisible. On the other hand, the frame-shaped image showing the positions of the fourth symbol 2081, 2082, the variable icon c, and the variable icon display area 208e continues to be displayed. The fourth symbol 2081, 2082, the variable icon c, and the frame-shaped image may also be erased to make them invisible. Super Reach A is not a super reach with a confirmed jackpot, and just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean that it will be a jackpot. In addition, even if a display called "CHANGE" that is expected to develop into a super reach is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. In some cases. Further, the display "CHANGE" shown in FIG. 9 (g) may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g') showing another example following from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as "sorry", and then the same figure. As shown in (h'), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 without developing into super reach. Has been done. Even if the message "Sorry" is displayed, it may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation valid period of the pachinko machine 100 is a state in which the execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated (operation valid state). However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control may be performed to accept only the acceptance period.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operating means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of executing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission unit 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 10A shows that the chance button 136 and the transmission unit 191 are in their respective initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission portion 191 is also in a state of being substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be able to vibrate only at the pushed position.

FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 rotates about a drive shaft (not shown) provided at the lower part from the initial position and tilts forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission unit 191 may also vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in the state of being inclined forward as shown in FIG. 10B, it is possible to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction. Further, the transmission portion 191 may rotate in small steps in the front-rear direction as a strong vibration having a large vibration width. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state of the transmissive portion 191 (second state) shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state at the initial position (first state) shown in FIG. 10A. The player can operate the transparent unit 191 so as to push it toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent unit 191 corresponds to an example of the operating means. Even when the transmissive unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmissive unit 190 lights up or blinks, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission unit 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

FIG. 10C shows how the chance button 136 has begun to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, FIG. 3D shows how the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can also be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in multiple stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and vibrates in the lateral direction or the vertical direction in the advanced (protruded) state. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a directing sound can be output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. When the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or blinks, and a sound effect or a directing sound is output from the speaker 120. Further, the chance button 136 may be one that automatically retreats toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

The vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission unit 191 may be functions that are exhibited only in a certain set state. For example, the function may be expressed by the setting by the effect customization function by the player or the setting of the switch on the game clerk side. That is, depending on the set state, it may not vibrate at all, or it may vibrate only partially.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

Here, as the operating means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. 10 will be referred to as the operating means A, and the transparent portion 191 will be described as the operating means B. Comparing the operating means A and the operating means B here, the operating means B is an operating means larger than the operating means A (an operating means having a large operating surface), and the operating means A can be operated even at the initial position, but the operation is performed. There is a difference that the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, but the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, and both may be operating means of the same size, or the initial position may be the same. It may be an operating means that can be operated together, or it may be an operating means that cannot be operated together. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the operation means listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be good.

Further, the operating means described as the transparent unit 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operating means such as the second chance button 137 described later.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is a big hit than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectations are high. Further, although both functions A are provided, function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at the operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating even at the initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operating means B is inferior in the number of functions to the operating means A.

However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. An example of the function C is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

The number of functions may be the same in the operating means A and the operating means B.

FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data in the decorative pattern display device 208 is "liquid crystal", the operation data in the family crest accessory 247 and the combined accessory 248 is "movable body", the audio output data from the speaker 120 is "sound", the frame lamp 122 and the like. , The light emission data of the LED and various built-in lamps is displayed as "LED", and the vibration data of the operating means A is displayed as "vibe". “...” in the figure indicates omission of data. Production No. The data of "vibe" in 1 is "E0", and this "E0" indicates that it does not vibrate. Production No. The data of "vibe" in 2 is "E1", and this "E1" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated before the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each of the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" in 2 becomes the effect data after the operation of the operation means A, and the operation means A vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, according to each of these effect data, the effect after the operation is started. Production No. The data of the "vibe" in No. 3 is "E2", and this "E2" indicates that the operating means A is vibrated after the operation of the operating means A (chance button 136). Production No. Each of the effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" in 3 becomes the effect data after the operation of the operation means A. Production No. 2 data and production No. The data of 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent unit 191) is operated. This is because each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" can be used as the effect data after the operation of the operation means B. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the effect No. 2 data or production No. The effect according to each effect data of "liquid crystal", "movable body", "sound", and "LED" in the data of 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data of "E1" or "E2". That is, the production No. The data of 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before the operation of the operating means A, and other data such as "liquid crystal" is data after the operation of the operating means A, but the operating means B By the operation of, the production No. When reading the data of 2, the data of the "vibe" is also executed after the operation of the operation means B in accordance with other data such as the "liquid crystal". In addition, the production No. Data of 2 and production No. When the data of "liquid crystal" is different from the data of 3 at least as "A1" and "A2", and the data of "liquid crystal" of "A1" is used after the operation means B is operated. Is the production No. Not the data of No. 3, but the production No. It is necessary to read the data of 2.

The effect data relating to the operating means B may also be called when the operating means A is operated, and after the operating means A is operated, the "liquid crystal", "movable body", and the effect data related to the operating means B The effect according to each effect data of "sound" and "LED" is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of "vibe". However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an execution timing relating to an effect involving the operation means A and an effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right of the figure. In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (c), the “operation means B-related effect” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transparent unit 191), and the operation means B operates in order from the top. When the operation means B related effect is started, the "operation means B operation enabled state", the "operation means B operation" indicating that the operation means B has been operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136) "Operation means A-related effect" started in response to the operation, "operation means A operation enabled state" in which the operation means A-related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated. An "operation means A operation" indicating that is shown. The "operation means B-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and also includes an effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. Further, the "operation means A-related effect" includes an effect in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and also includes an effect display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. However, the "operation means A-related effect" may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. Note that the notification prompting the operation of the operation means B may or may not be performed during the "operation means B operation valid state", and the operation may be performed even during the "operation means A operation valid state". A notification prompting the operation of the means A (operation promotion notification) may or may not be performed. If these notifications are given, the player can know that the operation is enabled, but if not, each operating means becomes a so-called back button.

In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B was not operated while the operation means B operation was enabled, but the operation means B-related effect was started at the same time as the end of the operation means B operation enable state. As described above, the "operation means B-related effect" may be started even if the operation means B is not operated. The "operation means B-related effect" may be an effect that is always started even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the "operation means B-related effect" may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operating means A, the operating means A-related effect is started at the same time as the operation means B-related effect is started without going through the "operation means A operation enabled state" and without operating the operation means A. .. As described above, the "operation means A-related effect" may also be started even if the operation means A is not operated. The "operation means A-related effect" may also be an effect that is always started even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the "operation means A-related effect" may be different depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Start at the same time and end at the same time.

In the example shown in FIG. 12B, when the operating means B is operated and the operating means B is operated while the operating means B operation is enabled, the operation means B related effect is executed from the operating means B operation enabled state. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts at the same time as the operation means B-related effect starts without going through the "operation means A operation enabled state" and without operating the operation means A. Has been done. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Start at the same time and end at the same time.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the operation means B is operated and the operation means B is operated while the operation means B operation is enabled, the operation means B related effect is executed from the operation means B operation enable state. Switch. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts at the same time as the operation means B-related effect starts without going through the "operation means A operation enabled state" and without operating the operation means A. Has been done. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B-related effect is longer than the execution period of the operation means A-related effect. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) and the operation means. The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but the vibration of the operating means A ends first, and after the vibration of the operating means A ends, the vibration of the operating means B ends.

The start time may be the same, and the execution period of the operation means A-related effect may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B-related effect. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, the operation means A-related effect ends first, and then the operation means B-related effect ends. You may. On the contrary, even if the operation means A-related effect starts first, then the operation means B-related effect starts, the operation means B-related effect ends first, and then the operation means A-related effect ends. Good. Further, the end time may be the same, the operation means B-related effect starts first, then the operation means A-related effect starts, and the operation means B-related effect and the operation means A-related effect end together. On the contrary, the operation means A-related effect may start first, then the operation means B-related effect may start, and the operation means A-related effect and the operation means B-related effect may end together. ..

Further, when the operation means B-related effect is executed without operating the operation means B as described with reference to FIG. 12A, for example, the operation means B-related effect is effective for the operation means B operation. In the mode in which the operation means is executed from the start of the state until the first time elapses, the operation means B may be operated at an earlier stage so that the execution time of the operation means B-related effect becomes longer. become able to.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an execution timing related to an effect involving the operating means. The arrows in each of FIGS. 13 (a) to 13 (c) represent the vibration period of the operating means A.

The example shown in FIG. 13A is an example during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is being performed, the operation is performed. The vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the judge effect. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the shaking variable display of the three decorative symbols as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the shaking fluctuation display. Eventually, the shaking fluctuation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13A, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the entire decorative symbol has already been determined, so that the fluctuation fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. The execution period of the operation means A is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the execution period of the shortened shaking fluctuation display.

As shown in FIG. 13A, before the notification of the result related to the profit of the player such as the confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is terminated so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during the big hit game, and when the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission unit 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and the judge effect is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The judge in the judge production here is a judge who is linked to whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the specific winning opening (for example, the V winning opening) is aimed at in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of this notification. Eventually, the next round will start, and it will be notified again that the specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed at.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, if the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum permissible time for one round has already been determined, so that a specific winning opening is aimed at in the next round. The execution period for notifying the fact is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened execution period for the notification.

As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should be aimed at the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, it will shift to the probabilistic state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim at the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the production such as the vibration of the operation means A is finished, and the player I am trying to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

Further, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operating means A does not change and is constant even if the operating timing of the operating means B changes.

The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the operation means B operates while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transparent unit 191) is being performed. Then, the operation means A (chance button 136) is started to vibrate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to stop the pseudo-continuous symbol. The vibration of the operating means A continues until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol ends, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol ends, the vibration of the operating means A also ends. Then, the next pseudo-variation display is started, the number of pseudo-reams becomes the nth time, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this nth pseudo-variation display.

Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (c), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. , The vibration of the operating means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbol ends.

In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B changes, the vibration period of the operation means A also changes.

In summary, including the above description, the operating means A can vibrate at least during the period when the judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. Further, the operating means A may be vibrable during at least a part of the period during which the judge effect corresponding to one example of the first effect is being executed. For example, the vibration may end at the same time as the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even after the end of the judge effect, or the vibration may end before the end of the judge effect. Further, the vibration period during which the operating means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on the presence or absence of operation of the operating means B and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means A. The final judge effect is a judge who decides whether or not a big hit will occur in the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or a judge who indicates the end of the reach effect (the final stage reach effect such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is the period during which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid, and when the operating means A is operated, the vibration ends and the final judge effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes long, and the period during which the operating means A vibrates becomes long. Further, even if the operating means A is not operated, the final judge effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started according to the operation of the operating means B, and the vibration of the operating means A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are the same, and the period length between the two becomes zero. However, the period during which the operating means A is vibrating can be secured for a certain period of time. In addition, while the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operating means B, the vibration of the operating means A is upward when it is started by operating the operating means A after the operation of the operating means B. If the operation of the operating means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judge effect and the vibration start timing of the operating means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operating means A vibrates becomes longer.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136), and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14 stepwise.

The matters described above in the example of the button effect shown in FIG. 9 will be omitted. In each figure of FIG. 14, on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, in addition to the chance button 136 which is the operation means A, the transparent portion 191 which is the operation means B is also shown. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, is in the initial position at any stage, and the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B is also in the initial position at any stage.

In FIG. 14A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" is displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed in white while stopped. Four of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 14B, the first special symbol display device 212 has started the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is continuously updated (variable display) in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 14B are lit, and there are only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed, the variable icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to the changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14C, the reach effect is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced to the left corner and is in the reach state by the number 3. ..

Here, as in FIG. 9, an example is shown in which the button effect is started when the reach effect is started. The button production here is a kind of judge production, and is a preliminary production that judges whether or not it will develop into super reach. The button effect may be an effect that judges the type of super reach that is developing. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 14D, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red, prompting the user to press the button. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light in red, an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and The character display "PUSH" and the remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding the period (operation valid period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. This initial position display 136X corresponds to an example of the second notification. It should be noted that the initial position display 136X may be used even if all of the above three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "PUSH" are not included. For example, the initial position display 136X may not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

FIG. 14 (e) is within the operation valid period, and the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is operated at the timing of FIG. 14 (e). When the chance button 136 is operated, it is switched from being lit in red to being lit in white, or is turned off.

When the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is operated within the operation valid period, the family crest accessory 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (see FIG. 14 (f)). The family crest accessory 247 covers the middle symbol display area 208b, also covers a part of the variable icon display area 208e, and also covers a part of the variable icon c. The fall of the family crest accessory 247 is a manifestation of the judge's result of developing into super reach, and as shown in FIG. 14 (g), the decorative pattern display device 208 starts the super reach effect and the background image changes. .. Since the chance button 136 was operated within the operation valid period, it remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 14 (h), the family crest accessory 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image is further changed to the background image of the sliding door. The super reach effect includes the first super reach effect (weak SP reach effect), which has a relatively low possibility of a big hit, and the second, which has a relatively high possibility of a big hit, in the currently performed symbol variation display. Super reach production (strong SP reach production) is prepared, and the background image of the sliding door corresponds to the background image of the weak SP reach production. Even in this weak SP reach production, a judge production is performed. The judge production here is a production that judges whether or not it will be a big hit, and corresponds to the final judge production, and if the sliding door opens and the princess character appears from inside, the pattern variation display that is currently being performed It is a sign of the judge's result that it is confirmed that it will be a big hit. In FIG. 14 (i), the cloud-like effect display e1 is displayed. Although it is not clear from the figure of FIG. 14 (j), in the figure (j), some shadow is faintly visible in the effect display e1 like a cloud, and in the figure (k), the effect display is shown. e1 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the character display "Rescue the princess" is displayed on the upper right. The character display "Rescue the princess" may be displayed from the timing of FIG. 14 (h). The shadow of something described in the explanation of FIG. (J) is the shadow of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 14 (i) and 14 (j) corresponds to a precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is displayed from FIG. 14 (k) when the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification starts to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production has started from FIG. 14 (i).

FIG. 14 (l) is within the operation valid period, and at the timing of FIG. 14 (l), the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is operated again, and the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (m) following FIG. 14 (l), there is no one in the open sliding door, and the judge result here is likely to be lost. .. Even during the execution of the final judge effect described above, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is located at the initial position and does not vibrate.

Even if the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is not operated within the operation valid period, the judge result of the final judge may be displayed, or the chance button 136 is not operated and the chance button 136 is not operated. The final judge result may be displayed even when a different operating means (for example, the second chance button 137 described later) is operated (the same applies to the following example). This may be the same in the production that judges whether or not to develop into the previous super reach, or may be limited to the production that judges whether or not to develop into the super reach. It may be limited to the final judge production, which is a direct judge for the jackpot.

When the final judge effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation display of the three decorative symbols as the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (n), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is swayed and displayed.

Eventually, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol ends on the first special symbol display device 212 and is confirmed and displayed, the decorative symbol is also confirmed and displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (n), "decoration 3" "-" Decoration 4 "-" Decoration 3 "is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where an effect involving the operation means A (chance button 136) is executed after a weak SP reach effect to make a big hit, and FIG. 17 is an example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of.

Hereinafter, the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

Also in FIG. 16D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here will also be a production that judges whether or not it will develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

As shown in FIG. 16E, when the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is operated within the operation valid period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 16F, the decorative symbol display device 208 On the front side, the family crest accessory 247 will fall, and the judgment result of developing into super reach will be notified.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 16H, the family crest accessory 247 returns to the initial position, the background image is further changed to the background image of the sliding door, and the weak SP reach effect is started. Here, too, as shown in FIG. 16 (i), the effect display e1 like a cloud is displayed, and in the figure (j), some shadow is faintly visible in the effect display e1. .. Further, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, starts to advance from the initial position. When the chance button 136 starts to advance, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red and the chance button 136 itself starts to vibrate. That is, the chance button 136 executes an advance operation (protruding operation) while vibrating. The vibration may be started after the protrusion. The chance button 136 reaches a position exactly intermediate between the initial position and the maximum advance position, and stops at the intermediate position. Further, at the timing of FIG. 16 (k), the effect display e1 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red with the chance button lamp 138 advanced to an intermediate position is displayed. The imitated button image 136a1, the arrow display 136b, and the remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as an intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification. This intermediate position display 136Y also corresponds to an example of the second notification. It should be noted that the intermediate position display 136Y may be used even if all of the above three images 136a2, 136b and 136c are not included. For example, the intermediate position display 136Y may not include the remaining period meter display 136c. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate even after stopping at the intermediate position, and continues to vibrate until the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid becomes zero or the chance button 136 is pushed in. The advance start timing of the chance button 136 may be any time during the weak SP reach effect, for example, before the effect display e1 is displayed, or the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification is displayed. It may be at the same time as, or after that. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples regarding the advance start timing of the chance button 136 listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all of them. The type may be applied. Further, the timing of the completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136 may be any time during the weak SP reach production, and may be simultaneous with the display of the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification, or after that. May be good. Further, the vibration start of the chance button 136 may not coincide with the start of advancement of the chance button 136, and may be before or after the start of advancement. If it is later, for example, the vibration may be started at the same time as or after the completion (stop) of the advance operation of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 may end the vibration if it is pushed in even a little, or may continue to vibrate until it is pushed in to the initial position. The effect display e1 in FIGS. 16 (i) and 16 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is displayed from FIG. 16 (k) when the intermediate position display 136Y of the operation promotion notification starts to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production has started from FIG. 16 (i), it can be seen that the final judge production has started from the time when the chance button 136 starts to advance, and the chance button 136 can be seen. It can also be seen that the final judge production started when the player reached the intermediate position.

FIG. 16 (l) is within the operation valid period, and at the timing of FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136, which is the operation means A and has advanced (protruded) to the intermediate position, is pushed to the initial position and operated to be the final judge. The judgment result of the production is displayed. In FIG. 17 (m) following FIG. 16 (l), the chance button 136 is in the initial position and does not vibrate, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character GC in the back of the sliding door. , It is certain that the judge result here will be a big hit. The effect in which the princess character GC appears in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (m) is a notice effect and corresponds to an example of the second effect. That is, this effect (second effect) is an effect that is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, which is the operation means A. The notice effect (second effect) in which the princess character GC appears may be started at the same time as the operation of the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is started, or the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. It may be started at the same time, it may be started at the same time when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position, and the first condition is that the chance button 136 is operated, and other second conditions (for example, for example). It may be started when the first time elapses after the start of the weak SP reach effect) is satisfied.

The effect (second effect) started in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a liquid crystal display or lighting or blinking of an LED. Further, the second effect may be an effect including N (plurality) of the plurality of types of effects, and the chance button 136 may vibrate before the second effect is started. It may be configured to be there, or the chance button 136 may be configured to vibrate without fail.

In this example, although the chance button 136 is advanced, it may be in a mode of staying at the initial position and vibrating, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

When the final judge effect is completed, the decorative pattern display device 208 shakes and displays "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" as shown in FIG. 17 (n), and then shows FIG. 17 (o). ), "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it becomes a big hit. In the example shown in FIG. 15, from the shaking fluctuation display to the final display, the background screen was unpatterned, but in the case of a big hit, the background screen is a gathering of lords. Further, in the case of a big hit, a promotion effect of the type of the big hit (for example, a promotion effect from a big hit without a probability change to a big hit with a probability change) may be performed during the shaking fluctuation display (the same shall apply hereinafter).

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.

The numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. 18 correspond to the numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIGS. 16 and 17. Hereinafter, the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 18 is an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 16 (d) to 16 (g)). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (i) displays the effect display e1, and in FIG. 18 (j), some shadow is faintly visible in the effect display e1. Further, also in this example, after the effect display e1 is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, lights up in red from the initial position and starts to advance while vibrating. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the chance button 136 advances to the maximum advance position and stops at the maximum advance position. In addition, after advancing to the maximum advance position, it may be stopped after returning by the first amount toward the initial position. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (k), a button image 136a2 imitating the chance button 136 in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit in red when the chance button lamp 138 is advanced to the maximum advance position and an arrow are displayed. 136b and the remaining period meter display 136c are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a2, 136b, and 136c are collectively referred to as the maximum advance position display 136Z of the operation promotion notification. This maximum advance position display 136Z also corresponds to an example of the second notification. It should be noted that the maximum advance position display 136Z may be used even if all of the above three images 136a2, 136b and 136c are not included. For example, the maximum advance position display 136Z may be used, which does not include the remaining period meter display 136c.

Since the button image 136a2 is large in the maximum advance position display 136Z of this operation promotion notification, a part of the character display "Rescue the princess" is hidden. Since the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position display 136Z, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it advances only to the intermediate position or when it does not advance at all and stays at the initial position. ..

FIG. 18 (l) is within the operation valid period, and at the timing of FIG. 18 (l), the chance button 136, which is the operation means A and has advanced (protruded) to the maximum advanced position, is pushed to the initial position and finally operated. The judge result of the judge production is displayed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (m) displays the princess character GC in the back of the sliding door, and it is confirmed that the judge result here will be a big hit. Further, in FIG. 18 (m), the chance button 136 continues to vibrate at the initial position. That is, in this example, the chance button 136, which was vibrating at the maximum advance position, vibrates during the pushing operation and even after returning to the initial position, and the vibration continues. However, the vibration of the chance button 136 may be temporarily interrupted by the pushing operation. For example, the chance button 136 may suspend the vibration once and then resume the vibration after returning to the initial position if it is pushed in even a little, or suspend the vibration at the same time as returning to the initial position and then vibrate. May be restarted. Also, regardless of whether the chance button 136 has advanced (protruded) or not, and regardless of the amount of advance of the chance button 136, at least a part of the period (all) during the advance notice production in which the princess character GC appears. The chance button 136 vibrates during a period (which may be a period or only a partial period such as the first). In the example shown in FIG. 18 described above, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, vibrates in the advance notice effect in which the princess character GC appears, which corresponds to an example of the second effect.

In this example as well, the chance button 136 is advanced, but it may be in a mode of staying at the initial position and vibrating, and the chance button 136 may be replaced with a second chance button 137 described later.

In addition, the display mode of the princess character GC in the advance notice production may change according to the type of jackpot and the degree of expectation of the jackpot with probability variation. For example, when the expectation of the jackpot with probability variation is high, the display mode in which the fan is spread and danced (second display mode) may be used.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the operation means A (chance button 136) is entwined with the operation means A (chance button 136) after the strong SP reach effect, but the effect is lost. FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 19 step by step.

Hereinafter, the differences from the examples described so far will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

Also in FIG. 19D, the button effect is started in the reach state. The button production here will also be a production that judges whether or not it will develop into super reach. When the button effect is started, the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification.

As shown in FIG. 19E, when the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is operated within the operation valid period, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 19F, the decorative symbol display device 208 On the front side, the family crest accessory 247 will fall, and the judgment result of developing into super reach will be notified.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 19 (h), the family crest character 247 returns to the initial position, and the background image changes to a duel scene between the main character and the enemy. The background image of this duel scene corresponds to the background image of the strong SP reach production. Even in the strong SP reach production, the final judge production of whether or not it will be a big hit is performed, and if the hero's lord wins, the judgment result that it is confirmed that it will be a big hit in the current symbol variation display is shown. become. As shown in FIG. 19 (i), the flash-like effect display e2 overlaps with the display in which the lord and the villain are slashing each other. Even after the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains in the initial position. In FIG. 19K, the effect display e2 disappears, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position. However, the chance button 136 does not vibrate. The effect display e2 in FIGS. 19 (i) and 19 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is displayed from FIG. 19 (k) when the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification starts to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge production has started from FIG. 19 (i).

FIG. 19 (l) is within the operation valid period, and at the timing of FIG. 19 (l), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed, and the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20 (m) displays a scene in which the enemy role has won, and the judgment result here is likely to be lost. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 20 (m) is off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

When the final judge effect is completed, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 20 (n), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is swayed and fluctuated on the unpatterned background screen. Next, as shown in FIG. 20 (o), the combination of loss, "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, resulting in loss.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where an effect involving the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is executed after a strong SP reach effect and a big hit is obtained, and FIG. 22 is shown in FIG. 21. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example step by step.

Hereinafter, the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

After a duel effect (FIGS. 21 (d) to FIG. 21 (g)) as to whether or not to develop into a super reach, a strong SP reach effect is started in FIG. 21 (h), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a strong SP reach effect. The background image of the duel scene is displayed. Next, in FIG. 21 (i), the effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed.

In FIG. 21, even when the display of the effect display e2 is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates forward from the initial position and falls down toward the player. The transmissive unit 191 may rotate forward at the same time as the effect display e2 is displayed, or the transmissive unit 191 may rotate forward before the effect display e2 is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 21 (k), the effect display e2 disappears, and in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a transmission unit rotation image 191a imitating a pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission unit 191 is rotated forward, and a transmission unit The arrow display 191b and "push" suggesting that the 191 is pushed in, and the remaining period meter display 191c indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the transmissive unit 191 are displayed as a set. .. Hereinafter, these three images 191a, 191b, 191c and the character display of "push-in" are collectively referred to as a transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. The transparent portion display 191X corresponds to an example of the first notification. It should be noted that the transparent portion display 191X may be used even if the above three images 191a, 191b, 191c and all of the character display of "push-in" are not included. For example, the transmission unit display 191X may not include the remaining period meter display 191c. The transmission unit 191 may rotate forward at the same time as the transmission unit display 191X is displayed, or the transmission unit 191 may rotate forward after the transmission unit display 191X is displayed. Even if the transparent unit display 191X is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. Further, although the transmissive portion 191 rotated forward does not vibrate, it may be vibrated. The effect display e2 in FIGS. 21 (i) and 21 (j) also corresponds to the precursor effect of the final judge effect, and the final judge effect is displayed from FIG. 21 (k) when the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification has begun to be displayed. Although it is started, it can be seen that the final judge effect is started from the time when the effect display e2 is started, or it can be seen that the final judge effect is started from the time when the transparent portion 191 is rotated forward. ..

FIG. 21 (l) is within the operation valid period, and the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is pushed to the initial position at the timing of FIG. 21 (l). In this example, when the transmissive portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the family crest accessory 247 falls again on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in FIG. 22 (m) following FIG. 21 (l). As it comes, the background image changes. Further, a pair of combined accessories 248 advance toward the family crest accessory 247 from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. 22 (n), the pair of combined accessories 248 sandwich the family crest accessory 247 from each of the left and right. Combined with the family crest. The fact that the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates forward may be an effect suggesting that it is a big hit, or an effect suggesting that the family crest accessory 247 is a big hit. It may be an effect suggesting that the combination of the pair of combined accessory 248 with the family crest accessory 247 is a big hit. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the effects suggesting a big hit listed here may be applied, or a plurality of types of examples may be applied. All types may be applied. After that, first, the pair of combined accessory 248 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (o), then the family crest accessory 247 returns to the initial position (FIG. 22 (p)), and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The judge result of the final judge effect is displayed in a state where there is no obstruction. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (q) displays the scene in which the lord won, and the judge result here. Is confirmed to be a big hit. In this scene where the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed, the variable display of the decorative pattern reduced in the upper left is still in the reach state in FIG. 22 (q). However, it may be a combination of jackpots of decorative symbols (for example, "333"). That is, the combination of jackpots of decorative symbols is displayed small together with the display of the final judge result, and then the decorative symbol jackpot combination is displayed. The combination of jackpots may be displayed in a large size.

The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 22 (q) is in a state of being turned off at the initial position and does not vibrate.

When the final judge effect is completed, in the decorative pattern display device 208, as shown in FIG. 22 (r), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" fluctuates on the background screen where the lords are gathering. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it becomes a big hit.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 described above, the family crest accessory 247 (first effect movable body) operates before the start of the final judge effect (FIGS. 21 (f) to (g)). In the final judge production, the family crest character 247 also operates (Fig. 22 (m) to Fig. (O)), but before the start of the final judge production, the family crest character 247 does not operate and is final. The operation may be performed only by the judge effect.

In this example, there was a scene in which the transparent unit 191 was operated (FIGS. 21 (j) to 21 (l)), but instead of the transparent unit 191, another chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. The operating means may be operated.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, starts to vibrate in response to the operation of the transmissive unit 191 which is the operating means B. The numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. 23 correspond to the numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 23 is an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (j)). After the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 23 (k) is displayed, that is, after the final judge effect is started, when the transparent portion 191 is pushed to the initial position as shown in FIG. 23 (l). , Even if the chance button 136 is not operated, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate without permission (see FIG. 23 (m)). In this example, the chance button 136 also starts vibrating at the same time as the start of the final judge effect, and the chance button 136 ends the vibration before the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed (see FIG. 23 (p)). That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 is executed only during the period shown in FIGS. 23 (m) to 23 (p), which is a part of the execution period of the final judge effect, and the judge result of the final judge effect is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 23 (q), there is a case where the judgment result can be noticed without vibrating. However, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate until the final judge effect is completed. In this case, the vibration of the chance button 136 is always the entire execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the chance button 136 may continue to vibrate even after the final judge effect ends, and the initial position of the operation promotion notification to the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the vibration continues after the final judge effect ends. The display 136X may or may not be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, it can be seen that the chance button 136 is vibrating as part of the final judge effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 described above, the final judge effect of FIGS. 23 (m) to 23 (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect, and the advance notice effect is started in response to the operation of the transparent unit 191. Is.

In the example shown in FIG. 23, the vibrating chance button 136 was not operated, but when the vibrating chance button 136 is operated during the execution of the final judge effect, the final judge effect is continued. Depending on the operation, the family crest accessory 247 and the combined accessory 248 first return to the initial positions, and then the judge result is displayed. Therefore, the earlier the timing of operating the chance button 136, the sooner the judge result can be seen. When the vibrating chance button 136 is operated, the effects shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m), which are the same judge effects, are not started. That is, even if the chance button 136 is operated while the chance button 136 (second operating means) is vibrating during the execution of the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. 23, FIG. 17 The effect (second effect) shown in (m) and FIG. 18 (m) is not started. Further, the effect (second effect) shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) is configured not to be executed at the same time as the final judge effect (first effect) described with reference to FIG. 23. It is a production.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example in which the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is also operated after the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B is operated. The numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. 24 correspond to the numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 23 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 24 is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at a relatively early timing (FIG. 24 (l)). That is, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

In this example, after pushing the transparent portion 191 to the initial position, the chance button 136 corresponding to the operating means A is pressed this time. Then, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 indirectly starts vibration in response to an operation of the transmission unit 191 and directly starts vibration in response to a pressing operation. Further, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being pressed, but when a predetermined maximum vibration time elapses from the start of vibration, the chance button 136 ends vibrating even if it is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate even when the final judge effect is finished and the shaking fluctuation display is started (see FIG. 24 (r1)), but the shaking fluctuation display is started. After a while, the maximum vibration time was reached, and the vibration was completed even when the button was pressed (see FIG. 24 (r2)). The maximum vibration time corresponds to 6 frames in FIGS. 24 (m) to 24 (r1). The shaking fluctuation display continues for a while after that (FIGS. 24 (r3) to (r4)), and the first time after the chance button 136 stops vibrating (FIGS. 24 (r2) to (r4) 3). After continuing (the time corresponding to the frame), as shown in FIG. 24 (s), "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and a big hit is obtained. As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the shaking fluctuation display is executed for a period corresponding to four frames of FIGS. 24 (r1) to 24 (r4).

In the example of FIG. 24, it can be seen that the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the transparent unit 191 which is the operating means B. That is, when the final judge production is started, the family crest accessory 247 falls. Further, when the final judge effect is started, the chance button 136 vibrates in response to the pressing of the chance button 136.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 described above, the final judge effect of FIGS. 24 (m) to 24 (q) corresponds to an example of the first effect.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the timing of operating the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B is later than the example shown in FIG. 24. The numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIG. 25 correspond to the numbers in the alphabet in parentheses in FIGS. 21 and 22. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 25 is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (j)). In the example shown in FIG. 25, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing when the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the transmission unit 191 is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 24 (see FIG. 25 (l2)). As a result, as compared with the example shown in FIG. 24, the start of the final judge effect is delayed by one frame, the vibration period of the chance button 136 is also shifted backward, and the timing at which the predetermined maximum vibration time elapses is also 1. It shifts behind the frame. In the example shown in FIG. 25, the maximum vibration time corresponds to 6 frames of FIGS. 25 (m) to (r1), and the chance button 136 ends the vibration at the timing of FIG. 25 (r1). The shaking fluctuation display is displayed in FIG. 25 (s) after the second time (time corresponding to two frames of FIGS. 25 (r2) to (r3)) continues after the chance button 136 stops vibrating. As shown, "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3"-"Decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it becomes a big hit. As described above, the shaking fluctuation display has a period corresponding to four frames in the example shown in FIG. 24, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 25, FIGS. 25 (r1) to 25 (r3). ) Is executed for a period corresponding to three frames, and the execution period of the shaking fluctuation display is shortened by the amount of delay in operating the transparent unit 191 which is the operating means B.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates due to the vibration of the housing. The number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 26 corresponds to the number of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 24. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 24 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

The example shown in FIG. 26 is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (j)). In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (k), the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates at the second position (forward inclined position) which is rotated forward from the initial position (first position). There is. The transmission unit 191 vibrates due to vibration of the housing to which the transmission unit 191 is directly or indirectly attached, even if the transmission unit 191 itself does not vibrate. The housing referred to here may be the main body 104 (inner frame) or the front frame door 106 provided with the transmissive unit 190. In this example, in addition to the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification shown in FIG. 26 (k), the vibration of the transmission unit 191 can also prompt the operation of the transmission unit 191. In FIG. 26 (l), the vibrating transmission The portion 191 is pushed to the initial position. When the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position, the vibration of the housing ends, and this time, when the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is pressed, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate.

The vibration of the housing, and thus the vibration of the transmission portion 191 may start when the transmission portion 191 reaches the forward inclined position from the initial position, or the transmission portion 191 starts to rotate forward from the initial position. It may be started from a certain point in time, or when the transmission unit 191 is not operated even after the first time has elapsed after the transmission unit 191 reaches the forward inclined position. Further, the vibration of the housing, and thus the vibration of the transmission portion 191 may be terminated when the transmission portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, or may be terminated when the transmission portion 191 is pushed even a little from the forward inclined position, or may be terminated at the initial position. Even if it is pushed in, it may continue to vibrate for the first vibration period after the vibration starts or returns to the initial position, and there may be a period of vibration together with the chance button 136.

Further, as in the transmissive portion 191 of this example, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, also has a housing (for example, a housing to which the chance button 136 is directly or indirectly attached, for example, even if the chance button 136 itself does not vibrate. , The door with a ball storage plate 108) may vibrate to vibrate.

Further, the transmission portion 191 itself may be configured to vibrate in the front-rear direction or the lateral direction.

23 (m) to the same figure (q), 24 (m) to the same figure (q), 25 (m) to the same figure (q), and 26 (m) to the same figure (q) described above. ) Is different from the mode of the final judge effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m) described above. The different aspects of the effect mean that the background screen is different, the characters that appear are different, and the colors of the displayed characters are different.

Further, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 23 to 26, the transparent unit 191 is operated, but instead of the transparent unit 191, another operating means such as the second chance button 137 described later is operated. It may be an example.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example in which the transmission portion 191 itself rotates in the front-rear direction and vibrates strongly. In FIG. 27, different examples are shown on the left side and the right side, respectively.

First, an example on the left side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (g)). The state of FIG. 27 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 19 (k), the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position.

FIG. 27 (a) is within the operation valid period, and at the timing of FIG. 27 (a), the chance button 136 (operation means A) at the initial position is pressed. Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 19, the judge result of the final judge effect is not immediately displayed, and the family crest accessory 247 falls on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 as in FIG. 24 (m) and the like. As it comes, the background image changes. Further, in this example, as the family crest accessory 247 falls, the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates from the initial position to the forward inclined position (see FIG. 27 (c)). Next, as shown in FIG. 27 (d), the family crest accessory 247 is sandwiched between the pair of combined accessories 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of combined accessories 248 and the family crest accessory 247 are combined and the transparent portion. 191 returns from the forward tilted position to the initial position. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the transmission portion 191 rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position with the pair of combined accessory 248 returning to the initial position and the family crest accessory 247 remaining. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (f), the family crest accessory 247 returns to the initial position, and the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward inclined position to the initial position again.

As described above, in the example on the left side of FIG. 27, at the same time as the final judge effect is started, the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B repeatedly rotates between the initial position and the forward tilted position. I do. This strong vibration can be seen as being performed as part of the final judge production, or it can be seen as a production different from the final judge production.

Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 27 will be described. The example shown on the right side is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (j)). The state of FIG. 27 (a) is the same as the state of FIG. 24 (k), and the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, and the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B rotates to the forward tilted position. doing. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position.

Although FIG. 27 (I) is within the operation valid period of the transparent unit 191. In FIG. 27 (I), the chance button 136 that remains off at the initial position is operated instead of the transparent unit 191.

Even when the chance button 136 is operated, the final judge effect is executed and the transparent portion 191 is set to the initial position and the forward tilted position as in the example in which the transparent portion 191 is operated on the left side of FIG. 27. A strong vibration that repeats rotation between the two is performed. That is, the transmission portion 191 returns from the forward tilted position to the initial position in FIG. 27 (U), rotates from the initial position to the forward tilted position in FIG. 27 (E), and is initially tilted from the forward tilted position in FIG. It returns to the position again, and in the figure (or), it rotates again from the initial position to the forward inclined position. Therefore, the chance button 136 is a so-called back button. However, after the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 27 (i), the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains extinguished at the initial position.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the scene in which the villain wins after the strong SP reach effect is displayed once, but the revival effect causes a big hit. FIG. 29 is shown in FIG. 28. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example step by step.

The example shown in FIG. 28 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 21, and is shown in FIG. 28 (h) after a judge effect (FIGS. 28 (d) to (g)) as to whether or not the product develops into super reach. , The strong SP reach effect is started, and in the figure (i), the effect display e2 like a flash is displayed.

Also in FIG. 28 (j), while the effect display e2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates from the initial position to the forward tilted position, and FIG. 28 (k) shows. At the timing of, the effect display e2 disappears, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the transparent portion 191 remains positioned at the forward inclined position.

In FIG. 28 (l), the transmission unit 191 is pushed in. In FIG. 29 (α) following FIG. 28 (l), a scene in which the same enemy role as in FIG. 20 (m) wins, which seems to be the result of the judgment of the final judge effect, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and then FIG. As shown in 29 (β), the shaking fluctuation display of the combination of “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 3” is started once.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (γ), a precursory display is made when the revival effect is started, and the revival effect is executed from FIG. 29 (m) to FIG. 29 (p). The revival effect here is the same effect as the final judge effect shown in FIGS. 22 (m) to 22 (p), and in front of the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 247 and a pair of combined accessory 248 Appears.

When the revival effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29 (r), the shaking fluctuation display of the jackpot combination of "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is immediately started, and in the figure (s). In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown, the jackpot combination of "decoration 3"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed as it is.

In the example described above, the display of the duel result displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 29 (α), which was thought to be the judge result of the final judge effect, is a false display. Further, neither the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, nor the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B vibrates, but the display of the duel result (display of the judge result of the final judge effect) is displayed regardless of whether it is true or false. If it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit at the displayed timing or the timing after that, if the chance button 136 and / and the transmission unit 191 vibrate, it will be a big hit for advanced users. It is possible to convey that the fact is confirmed, and the interest of the game may be improved. That is, the vibration of the chance button 136 and / and the transmission unit 191 may be used to notify the judge result (true result) of the final judge effect.

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent portion 191 was operated (FIGS. 28 (j) to (l)), but instead of the transparent portion 191, another chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. The operating means may be operated.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of the third effect step by step. The figure numbers of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 30 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 14 and the like.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30C, the reach effect is started. In this example as well, when the reach effect is started, the effect involving an operation, which is a kind of button effect, is started. The production involving the operations here is also a kind of judge production, and it is a preliminary production that judges whether or not it will develop into super reach. In FIG. 30D, as an effect involving the operation, the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B rotates from the initial position to the forward tilted position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification. 'Is displayed. The transparent portion display 191X'shown in FIG. 6D is a display having the same function, although it is slightly different from the transparent portion display 191X described so far. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, does not vibrate and remains extinguished at the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 30 (e), the transparent unit 191 is pushed in within the operation valid period of the transparent unit 191. In FIG. 30 (f), the family crest accessory 247 is placed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It will fall. Further, while the background image is unpatterned in FIG. 14 (f) and the like, the effect display e3 with a shadow is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (f). A part of the effect display e3 is hidden by the family crest accessory 247. Here, too, the fall of the family crest accessory 247 is a manifestation of the judge's result of developing into super reach, and then develops into super reach. The effect of FIG. 30F described above corresponds to an example of the third effect, and is a notice effect started in response to the operation of the transparent unit 191.

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent unit 191 was operated (FIGS. 30 (d) to (e)), but instead of the transparent unit 191, another chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. The operating means may be operated.

FIG. 31 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice effect started in response to the operation of the transparent unit 191. The figure numbers of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 31 correspond to the figure numbers of the alphabet written in parentheses in FIG. 21.

The example shown in FIG. 31 is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (f)). The judge production of whether or not to develop into super reach ends in FIG. 31 (g), and the super reach production starts from the same figure (h'). This super reach production is different from the strong SP reach production and the weak SP reach production described so far, and is the production selected by the production lottery. However, the remaining period meter display 191c of the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification remains for 1/2 or more of the transmission unit 191 rotated to the forward tilted position shown in FIGS. 21 (j) to 21 (k). When the operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 23, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 is executed, and when the operation is performed at the timing when less than 1/2 remains, the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is executed. May be good. That is, even if it is configured so that one of the final judge effect shown in FIG. 23 and the final judge effect shown in FIG. 31 is started in response to the operation of the transparent unit 191 which is the operation means B. Good.

The decorative pattern display device 208 of FIG. 31 (h') displays a background image in which the hero's lord is chasing a bad merchant, and in the figure (i'), an effect display e2 such as a flash is displayed. To. Even when the display of the effect display e2 is started, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position and does not vibrate. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (j'), the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B is rotated from the initial position to the forward inclined position, and at the timing of FIG. 31 (k'), the effect display e2 is displayed. Instead, the transparent unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed. FIG. 31 (l') shows the operation valid period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position.

The final judge effect corresponding to an example of the third effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191. In FIG. 31 (m'), the townscape of the castle town is different from the background image shown in FIG. 22 (m). The background image of the above is displayed, and the family crest accessory 247 falls on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208 as in FIG. 22 (m). Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (n'), in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, the family crest accessory 247 is sandwiched between the pair of combined accessories 248 that have advanced from the left and right, and the pair of combined accessories 248 The family crest character 247 is united. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 31 (o'), the pair of combined accessories 248 returned to the initial position, and the family crest accessory 247 remained in front of the background image of the townscape of the castle town, and further, FIG. 31 As shown in (p'), the family crest accessory 247 returns to the initial position from the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the background image of the castle townscape is displayed, and there is nothing to block the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the judge result of the final judge production is displayed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 31 (q') displays a scene in which the lord has caught a bad merchant, and it is certain that the judge result here will be a big hit. During the execution period of the final judge effect of FIGS. 31 (m') to (q'), which corresponds to an example of the third effect, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and remains extinguished at the initial position. .. The modes of the final judge effect of FIGS. 31 (m') to 31 (q') are shown in FIGS. 23 (m) to 23 (q), 24 (m) to 24 (q), and 25 (m). -Unlike the mode of the final judge effect shown in FIGS. (Q) and 26 (m) to (q), the final judge effect is not executed at the same time. Further, unlike the mode of the judge effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m), it is not executed at the same time as the judge effect.

Further, in FIGS. 31 (m') to 31 (q'), the chance button 136 that remains off at the initial position is operated, but the operation here is not accepted, and the chance button 136 here is not accepted. , It is not a so-called back button. The operation means different from the chance button 136 (for example, the second chance button 137 described later) may be a so-called back button.

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent unit 191 was operated (FIGS. 31 (j') to (l')), but instead of the transparent unit 191, a second chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. Other operating means may be operated.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example different from the examples described so far. In FIG. 32, different examples are shown on the left side and the right side, respectively.

First, an example on the left side of FIG. 32 will be described. The example shown on the left side is also an effect that is not executed until after passing through a certain effect (the effect of FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (j)). In this example, the LED lamp 139 is provided in the vicinity of the chance button 136. The LED lamp 139 is a light emitting means different from the chance button lamp 138.

In FIG. 32 (a), similarly to FIG. 24 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transmission unit display 191X of the operation promotion notification, and the transmission unit 191 which is the operation means B is rotated to the forward tilted position. It's moving. Further, in FIG. 32A, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, does not vibrate and remains turned off at the initial position, but the chance button 136 is operated. Even if the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and the chance button lamp 138 does not light or blink, but the LED lamp 139 lights or blinks. Further, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the final judge effect is not executed.

In FIG. 32 (a), the final judge effect is started in response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191. The family crest accessory 247 falls on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image changes. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position without vibrating until just before the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191 is performed, but after the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191 is performed, the chance button 136 remains off. When the chance button 136 is operated, it starts to vibrate. The chance button 136 may continuously vibrate during the execution period of the final judge effect, or may vibrate only while being pressed during the execution period of the final judge effect. Further, the vibration of the chance button 136 may end at the same time as the end of the final judge effect, or may end before the end of the final judge effect. When the chance button 136 starts to vibrate, the chance button lamp 138 is still off. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated, the LED lamp 139 also lights up or blinks here. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG. 32 (a).

In FIG. 32 (c), the final judge effect is completed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the shaking fluctuation display. Even if the chance button lamp 138 is operated after the final judge production is completed, the chance button lamp 138 does not vibrate. However, here as well, the LED lamp 139 is lit or blinking. The lighting or blinking of the LED lamp 139 may be continued from FIG. 32 (a).

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent portion 191 was operated (FIG. 32 (a)), but instead of the transparent portion 191, another operating means such as the second chance button 137, which will be described later, is operated. It may be.

Next, an example on the right side of FIG. 32 will be described. In the example shown on the right side, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), instead of the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification, a button image 136a3 imitating the chance button 136 that is lit in red and vibrates is included. The initial position display 136X'is displayed. In addition, the actual chance button 136 also lights up in red and vibrates. Even if the button image 136a imitating the non-vibrating chance button 136 is displayed, the actual chance button 136 may vibrate.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example different from the example described with reference to FIG. 32. In FIG. 33, four examples are shown on the left side, and one example is also shown on the right side. The examples shown in the upper two on the left side (the example shown in FIG. 33A and the example shown in FIG. 33A) also go through a certain effect (the effect shown in FIGS. 21 (d) to 21 (g)). It is a production that can only be executed from the body.

First, in FIG. 33 (a), which is the first example, the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B is located at the initial position, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background image of the duel scene and lower left. Is displayed a transmission portion rotation image 191a that imitates a pachinko machine 100 in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated forward. In addition, a character display indicating that the glass button indicating the transparent unit 191 is waiting is also displayed. The transparent portion rotation image 191a and the character display in standby are subsequent notice indications that the transparent portion 191 which is a glass button rotates to the forward inclined position. When this notice is displayed, the transparent portion 191 which is a glass button always rotates to the forward inclined position.

In FIG. 33 (A), which is the second example, the background image of the duel scene is displayed as in FIG. 33 (a), and the remaining period is displayed by digital display at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, it is displayed that the remaining period is 19.89 seconds. This remaining period display is also a warning display that the transmissive portion 191 rotates to the forward tilted position, and when the remaining period by the remaining period display reaches 0.00 seconds, the transparent portion 191 which is a glass button moves to the forward tilted position. Be sure to rotate until.

In FIG. 33 (a), which is a third example, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to the first display means, and a second display means 209 different from the first display means is also provided. The second display means 209 is a liquid crystal display device having a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the first display means, and movable in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the second display means 209 is a position lower than the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be raised from the initial position. When the transparent unit 191 which is the operation means B is operated by the button effect such as the final judge effect, the movable accessory such as the family crest accessory 247 and the pair of combined accessory 248 operates, and the second display means 209 is in the initial position. The second display means 209, at least in part, overlaps a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The second display means 209 may completely overlap a part of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may only partially overlap a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136, which is the operation means A, may vibrate, or the transmission unit 191 may vibrate during the period during which the second display means 209 is operating, or after the operation is completed. Alternatively, the second display means 209 may be a touch panel and may correspond to an example of the third operation means. In this case, the second display means 209 may be a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may vibrate in an overlapping state.

FIG. 33 (A), which is a fourth example, is also an example provided with the same liquid crystal display device as the second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33 (A). The second display means 209 shown in FIG. 33 (A) can display the stock of the button image B, and six button images B are displayed here. One button image B indicates that one button effect is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 33 (A), the final judge effect is performed with the button effect corresponding to the third button image B. The button effect corresponding to the remaining three button images B is executed during the jackpot game. The three button effects during the jackpot game may be, for example, three promotion effects of the number of jackpot rounds. Further, as the button effect corresponding to the six button images B, the button operation may be promoted in each of the six cut-in effects.

The second display means 209 displays the hold icon instead of the button image B, sets the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the button image B, and trusts the pre-reading notice from the display mode of the button image B by operating the button. The display mode may be changed according to the degree. At this time as well, the operating means for receiving the button operation (for example, the chance button 136 or the transmission unit 191) may be vibrated.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 33, an effect involving a long press operation of the chance button 136 is executed. That is, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 33 (α), a button image 136a4 imitating the chance button 136 in the extinguished state and an arrow display 136b as a promotion display for prompting a long press operation of the chance button 136 And the text display "Save the meter by pressing and holding" and the remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "hold down the meter to save the meter" are collectively referred to as a long press display 136L of the operation promotion notification. It should be noted that the three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "Save the meter by long-pressing" may not be included, but the long-pressing display 136L may be used. For example, the long press display 136L that does not include the remaining period meter display 136c may be used. In addition, the level display L1 is also displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L1 is a display in which the level is raised according to the long press time of the chance button 136, and the level display L1 shown in FIG. 33 (α) is 0 level.

After that, the chance button 136 is operated, the level display L1 reaches the full tank level before the remaining period of the operation valid period is exhausted, and the button effect is started according to the level display L1 reaching the full tank level. Here, the transmissive portion 191 which is the operation means B (not shown) rotates to the forward inclined position, and as shown in FIG. 33 (β), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transmissive portion display 191X for the operation promotion notification. It is displayed. Originally, the operation of the chance button 136 is required to be a long press operation, but here, even if it is an operation (single press) in which the press for a short period that cannot be said to be a long press is slowly repeated (single press), it is called a long press operation. Even if it is a so-called repeated hit operation, which is handled or repeatedly pressed for a short period of time, it is treated as a long press operation. Even when a continuous striking operation is required, a long press operation or a single press operation may be treated as a continuous striking operation (the same applies to the following examples). Then, although not shown, if the transmission unit 191 is pushed in within the operation valid period, the judge effect is started.

Next, a production involving so-called pseudo-ren will be described. The effect involving the pseudo-ream is also executed when "execute" is won by the execution enablement / non-execution lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. The decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the symbol variation display of the special symbol, but in the pseudo-continuous production, the symbol variation display of the special symbol for one time (that is, one start winning) is Temporarily stop the variable display of the decorative symbol in a part or all of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208 (the update of the decorative symbol has been stopped but has not been confirmed and is shaken. After that, the re-variable display for displaying all the decorative symbols in a variable manner is executed once or a plurality of times. For example, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is updated (variable display), and in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and then re-displayed. The variation display may be started, or the variation display of the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in all the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then the re-variation display may be started. When the temporary stop is performed, a design or a design other than the decorative design may be temporarily stopped. In this pseudo-continuous production, the number of times the re-variation display is executed for one special figure symbol variation display (that is, one start winning) is also determined by a lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. Will be done. The pseudo-ream effect may be a big hit notice effect (so-called normal notice effect) of the change, which announces that a big hit will be made by displaying the symbol change of the special figure currently being performed, or the special effect currently being performed. It may be a reach notice effect for notifying the development of super reach by displaying the symbol variation in the figure. Alternatively, it may be a pre-reading notice effect that announces that a big hit will be made in the symbol variation display of the special figure that is started after the symbol variation display of the special figure that is currently being performed. In any of the notice effects, the higher the number of re-variable displays, the higher the expectation (reliability of the notice), and the hotter the effect. When the revariation display is performed the first number of times (for example, four times), the jackpot may be confirmed or the super reach may be confirmed. Further, in the case of the look-ahead notice effect, a step-up notice may be incorporated in which the number of re-variation displays increases as the start of the symbol change table of the special figure to be notified is approached. For example, when the symbol variation table of the special figure after three times is targeted for advance notice, one re-variation display is performed in the pseudo-continuous production in the symbol variation table of the first special figure, and the second special figure is displayed. In the pseudo-continuous production in the symbol variation table of, the re-variation display is performed twice, and in the pseudo-continuous production in the symbol variation table of the third special figure, the re-variation display is performed three times. In the pseudo-continuous production in the symbol variation table, the re-variation display is performed four times.

In the pseudo-continuous production, the first pseudo-continuous notification is started at the same time as the temporary stop. The first pseudo-continuous notification referred to here is to notify that the pseudo-continuous production is started or that the pseudo-continuous production is continued. For example, any one or more combinations of symbols temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 or all symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "pseudo-continuous symbols") correspond to an example of the first pseudo-continuous notification. To do. That is, the pseudo-continuous pattern is a decorative pattern (for example, "decoration 7") shown in FIG. 5 (b), or a combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 2"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 6" or , So-called chance eyes), or other patterns or patterns. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that has been finally stopped (third stop) in the temporary stop, a middle symbol, or a combination of a left symbol and a right symbol. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the pseudo-continuous symbols listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may. Further, the first pseudo continuous notification may be a character display, a lamp lighting, or a sound output, which is started at the same time as the temporary stop. Only one of a plurality of types of examples of the first pseudo-continuous notification listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect involving a pseudo-ream.

In the example of FIG. 34, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b which continues the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. 34 (a). At the same time, the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates to the forward inclined position. At this stage, the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, remains off at the initial position.

FIG. 34 (c) shows the operation valid period, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the transparent unit display 191X disappears in response to the operation of the transparent unit 191. This time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance button lamp 138 begins to light red, and the chance button 136 begins to vibrate at the initial position. In FIG. 34 (d), the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol N is also displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, the initial position display 136X whose display is started at the timing of FIG. 34 (d) is displayed so as to overlap with the pseudo-continuous symbol N whose display is also started at the timing of FIG. 34 (d). As a result, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol N is displayed. The chance button 136 continues to vibrate during the operation valid period, and when the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the initial position display 136X disappears, the pseudo-continuous symbol N remains, and a temporary stop is performed. There are cases where it is performed, and there are cases where the pseudo-continuous symbol N disappears together with the initial position display 136X and the temporary stop is not performed. That is, the effects of FIGS. 34 (d) to 34 (f) are judge effects of whether or not the temporary stop is executed. In FIG. 34 (f), the pseudo-continuous symbol N remains, and the first temporary stop is performed. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 34 (f) and the fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 are being displayed during change, and the change icon c is still displayed.

In FIG. 34 (g), the pseudo-continuous symbol N disappears, and the update (re-variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in all three symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It should be noted that the symbol variation display of the special figure is still continuing, and both the first special symbol display device 212 and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 are in the changing display, and the variation icon c is still displayed. However, the start of the re-variation display here seems to have started the symbol variation display of the special figure. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 34 (g) is displayed with the characters "x2". Here, the re-variation display is the first time, but when viewed as the symbol variation display of the special figure, it looks like the second special figure symbol variation display due to the start of the pseudo-continuous production. The character "x2" is displayed to represent it. That is, the character display of "x2" is a notification indicating the number of times related to the start of the pseudo-continuous production. The character display of "x2" corresponds to an example of the second pseudo-continuous notification.

In FIG. 34 (i), the symbol variation display in which the first temporary stop was performed in FIG. 34 (f) continues, the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed again, and the transparent portion 191 is displayed. When the transmission portion 191 is rotated to the forward inclined position and the transmission portion 191 is pushed to the initial position, the judge effect of the second temporary stop is started.

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent portion 191 was operated (FIGS. 34 (b) to (c)), but instead of the transparent portion 191, another chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. The operating means may be operated.

FIG. 35 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of another effect involving a pseudo-ream.

In the example of FIG. 35, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b which continues the variable display in the reach state shown in FIG. 35 (a). At the same time, the transmissive portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates to the forward inclined position. Further, the transparent portion display 191X whose display was started at the timing of FIG. 35 (b) overlaps with the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N'which was also started to be displayed at the timing of FIG. 35 (b). As a result, in FIG. 35 (b), a part of the gray tentative pseudo-continuous symbol N'is also displayed.

FIG. 35 (c) shows that when the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position within the operation valid period, the judge effect is started in response to the operation of the transmission unit 191. The judge effect here is that when the transparent unit 191 is operated, the transparent unit display 191X disappears and the gray temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N'changes to the white pseudo-continuous symbol N to perform a temporary stop. Even if the transparent part display 191X disappears, the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N'does not change to the pseudo-continuous symbol N, and even the temporary pseudo-continuous symbol N'disappears, and the temporary stop may not be performed. In FIG. 35 (d), the pattern changes to a white pseudo-continuous symbol N, and the first temporary stop is performed. The change from the tentative pseudo-continuous symbol N'to the pseudo-continuous symbol N is a change in the display mode, but it may be changed to a completely different symbol. Both the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 35 (d) and the fourth symbol 2081 of special figure 1 are displayed during change, and the change icon c is still displayed.

In this example, even if the transmissive unit 191 is operated, that is, even if the result of the judge effect shown in FIG. 35 (d) is displayed, the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, is turned off at the initial position without vibrating. However, depending on the operation of the transmission unit 191, the chance button 136 may start vibration at the initial position, may start vibration while advancing, or may start advancing. It may vibrate after reaching the advance position. Further, the chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking.

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent portion 191 was operated (FIGS. 35 (b) to (c)), but instead of the transparent portion 191, another chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. The operating means may be operated.

35 (b') to 35 (d') are modified examples of FIGS. 35 (b) to (d). FIG. 35 (b') and FIG. 35 (c') are fanning effects in which the temporary stop has not yet been started and the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol N is displayed above the temporary stop position, and the pseudo-continuous symbol N is not displayed at the temporary stop position. As shown in FIG. 35 (b'), the chance button 136 which is the operation means A is vibrating, and the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of the figure (c'). The chance button 136 may start vibrating before FIG. 35 (b'). In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the pseudo-continuous symbol N is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d'), and the temporary stop is performed. On the contrary, the pseudo-continuous symbol N may disappear in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and in this case, the pseudo-continuous effect is not started. As described above, the staging of FIGS. 35 (b') to 35 (d') involving the chance button 136, which is the operation means A, is a kind of judge staging and corresponds to an example of the second staging.

35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″) are modified examples of FIGS. 35 (b ″) to FIG. 35 (d ″). In FIGS. 35 (b') and 35 (c'), the chance button 136, which is the operating means A, vibrates, but in FIGS. 35 (b''') to 35 (d''), the chance button 136 is shown. Does not vibrate, and the transmitting portion 191 which is the operating means B rotates to the forward inclined position. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the transparent portion display 191X of the operation promotion notification. Further, in FIGS. 35 (b'') to 35 (d''), as in FIG. 35 (b') and FIG. 35 (c'), a fanning effect in which a pseudo-continuous effect may be started is executed. ing. Then, the transmission unit 191 is pushed in at the timing shown in the figure (c ″). In response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191, the second pseudo-continuous symbol N2 is displayed at the temporary stop position as shown in FIG. 35 (d ″), and the temporary stop is performed. The second pseudo-continuous symbol N2 is a symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol N. On the contrary, also here, the pseudo-continuous symbol N may disappear in response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191. In this case, the pseudo-continuous effect is not started. In this example as well, when the judge effect is executed and the pseudo continuous effect is started, if an operation means (transparent unit 191) different from the chance button 136 is operated, it is provisionally responded to the operation of the chance button 136. A pseudo-series symbol (second pseudo-series symbol N2) different from the pseudo-series symbol to be stopped is temporarily stopped.

The description of the specific example of the effect so far has been an example in the symbol variation display of the special figure, but the same applies to other than the symbol variation display of the special figure.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a stepwise example in which a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed from the shaking fluctuation display, and an effect involving operating means is executed during the jackpot game. FIG. 37 is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows step by step.

In FIG. 36 (a), the fluctuation display of the combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" without probability change (normal jackpot) is performed in the central area of the background screen where the lords are gathered. ing. In this example, the promotion effect is started during the execution of the shaking fluctuation display. The promotion effect here is a jackpot type promotion effect (probability change promotion effect), and as shown in FIG. 36 (b), the shaking fluctuation display is temporarily reduced to the upper left on the background screen where the lords are gathering. At the same time, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification is displayed in the central region, and the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position. The probabilistic promotion effect here is a kind of button effect and also a kind of judge effect.

FIG. 36 (c) shows the operation valid period, and when the chance button 136 is operated, the initial position display 136X disappears and the fluctuation display of the combination of decorative symbols is redisplayed in response to the operation. In this example, the probabilistic promotion fails, and as shown in FIG. 36 (d), there is no probabilistic jackpot (normal jackpot) of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" which is a combination of even-numbered decorative symbols. The fluctuation display of the combination of is displayed. On the other hand, if the probabilistic promotion is successful, the fluctuation display of odd-numbered combinations of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", etc.) is redisplayed. To. However, whether or not it is a big hit with probability change is determined by the winning or failing judgment (lottery) at the time of winning, and whether the success or failure of the probability change promotion here is based on the winning or failing judgment (lottery) at the time of winning. The same applies to the probabilistic promotion effect during the jackpot game described later. After that, the combination of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, which is fluctuated and displayed in FIG. 36 (d), is confirmed and displayed (see FIG. 36 (e)).

In the figure (f) following FIG. 36 (e), the big hit start effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the big hit game is started. In the jackpot game, it is suggested that right-handed hitting is performed, and a hitting method suggestion notification 110X is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the number of consecutive villas of the big hit is displayed in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed as "first time" in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 36 (g). Further, at the timing of FIG. 36 (g), the probabilistic promotion effect is started again. The probabilistic promotion effect here is also a type of button effect and a type of judge effect. In FIG. 36 (h), the chance button lamp 138 starts to light in red at the initial position, prompting the user to press the lamp. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 that has begun to light in red, an arrow display 136b and "continuous hitting" as a promotion display for prompting the repeated hitting operation of the chance button 136. The character display "white" and the remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid are displayed as one set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "continuously hit" are collectively referred to as a continuous hit display 136R of the operation promotion notification. It should be noted that the continuous hit display 136R may be used even if the three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display "Repeat hit" are not included. For example, the continuous striking display 136R may not include the remaining period meter display 136c.
In addition, a level display L2 is also displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level display L2 is a display in which the level is increased according to the number of repeated hits, and the level display L2 shown in FIG. 36 (h) is a 0 level.

After that, the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit, and in FIG. 36 (i), the remaining period of the operation valid period disappears. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 36 (i), the chance button lamp 138 is turned off, and the level display L2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 has reached the 3rd level, but has not reached the MAX level, and is shown in FIG. 36. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6J following (i), the continuous hit display 136R and the level display L2 disappear, and the character display “defense failure” indicating the failure of probabilistic promotion is displayed.

Further, during the jackpot game started in FIG. 36 (f), as shown in FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 36 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a transparent unit display 191X for the operation promotion notification. Along with the display, the text "Push in and survive" is also displayed, and the transparent portion 191 which is the operating means B is rotated to the forward tilted position, and the button effect is also started here. This button effect is an effect of judging whether or not a specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening) can be aimed at in a specific round, that is, whether or not the specific winning opening V is in a winning state. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, remains off at the initial position.

FIG. 37 (l) shows the operation valid period of the transmission unit 191, and the transmission unit 191 is pushed to the initial position. The chance button 136, which is the operating means A, starts to vibrate at the initial position in response to the pushing operation of the transmission unit 191. The chance button lamp 138 may be lit or blinking in red, or may remain off. Further, although the chance button 136 has started vibration, it may not start vibration.

Further, the effect movable body (movable accessory) operates in response to the pushing operation of the transparent portion 191. That is, the family crest accessory 247 falls to the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, then the pair of coalesced accessory 248 advances from the left and right, and as shown in FIG. 37 (m), the family crest accessory 247 is paired. It is sandwiched by the accessory 248, and the pair of combined accessory 248 and the family crest accessory 247 are combined.

Next, the family crest accessory 247 and the pair of combined accessories 248 return to the initial positions, and the result of the judge effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The text display "Successful survival" is displayed to indicate that the prize can be won. Although the chance button 136 does not vibrate at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (m), it may vibrate at this timing. In addition, a star mark with the characters GET is also displayed at the lower right of the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 37 (o) following FIG. 37 (n) suggests that the next round is a specific round and aims at the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Characters are displayed. In FIG. 37 (q), the specific round is started, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the character display of "V aim", and the game ball passes through the specific winning opening V (for example, V winning opening). Then, as shown in FIG. (Q), the letter "V" is displayed in large size on the decorative symbol display device 208, the specific winning opening V is won, and the privilege (for example, the probability change state is entered after the jackpot game is completed). That) is notified. Then, the end effect of the big hit game is executed (see FIG. 37 (r)), and the big hit game ends.

In this example as well, there was a scene in which the transparent portion 191 was operated (FIGS. 37 (k) to (l)), but instead of the transparent portion 191, another chance button 137 or the like, which will be described later, was used. The operating means may be operated.

In the above description,
"First operating means [for example, transparent unit 191 and cross key 181a, OK button 181b, cancel button 181c, button B (second chance button 137), etc.]
A second operating means [for example, chance button 136, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
The first effect is a notice effect [for example, FIGS. 23 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 24 (m) to FIG. (Q), FIG. 25 (m) to FIG. (M) to final judge production shown in Fig. (Q)]
It is configured so that the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operating means.
In the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIGS. 23 (m) to 24 (p), 24 (m) to 24 (p), FIG. 25 (m) to the same figure (r1), FIG. 26 (m) to the same figure (r2), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Whether it is the first operating means or the second operating means, it may be a lever, a touch sensor, a touch panel, as well as button-shaped ones such as a chance button, another chance button, a cross key, and a glass button. Good. That is, if the first operating means and the second operating means are different operating means, these buttons, keys, levers, and the like may be appropriately combined. The operating means includes those that are operated by direct contact and those that can be operated by holding a hand even if they cannot be directly touched.

Further, the first operating means includes a chance button (for example, chance button 136), another chance button (for example, button B (second chance button 137)), a cross key (for example, cross key 181a), and a transparent key. It may be one of the button-shaped ones such as the part 191 and the lever, the touch sensor, and the touch panel, or only one of them is applied, and the other ones are not. It may be applied. For example, a chance button (for example, chance button 136) may be applied to the first operating means, and the remaining other chance buttons, cross keys, or the like may not be applied.

Further, if the first operating means and the second operating means are different operating means, these buttons, keys, levers, and the like may be appropriately combined. The operating means includes those that are operated by direct contact and those that can be operated by holding a hand or the like even if they cannot be directly touched (for example, non-contact type).

Further, even if each operating means has the same function (for example, vibration), the mode may be different depending on the operating means such as vibration strength, vibration time, stroke and pitch. For example, the first operating means may be capable of performing vibration according to the first aspect, and the second operating means may be capable of performing vibration according to the second aspect.

The notice effect may be one of a plurality of types of notice effects. The notice referred to here may be a big hit notice, a development notice to super reach, a pseudo-ream start notice, or a pseudo-ream count notice. .. Alternatively, one or more of these plurality of types of advance notice effects may be applied, and the other may not be applied. Furthermore, only one of these plurality of types of notice effects may be applied, and all others may not be applied.

Further, the execution period of the advance notice effect, which is the first effect, may be from the start of displaying the image displayed for the first time after the button operation to the temporary stop (sway fluctuation) of the decorative pattern, or the determination of the decorative pattern. It may be up to the display. Alternatively, the movable means may start moving from the first position to the second position until it returns to the first position, or until it starts moving to the first position. May be good. Further, only one of the plurality of types of execution periods listed here may be used, a plurality of types of execution periods may be applied, or all types of execution periods may be applied. You may. Further, specifically, when the first effect is the final judge effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation) in a combination of the jackpot symbol modes from the start of the notification or the like that is performed for the first time after the button operation. The execution period of the first effect may be up to or until the end after the button operation (particularly the result when it succeeds) is displayed.

Further, the second operating means vibrates in a state where the movable means is located at a second position (for example, a final reaching position) when the first effect is a final judge effect or the like. It may vibrate while the effect display or the like that is executed with the movement of the movable means is displayed, or the movable means is located at the second position and the effect. It may vibrate while the image is displayed. Further, only one of the plurality of types of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

Further, "the first effect is started in response to the operation of the first operating means" may mean that the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operating means. Then, the first effect may be started depending on the satisfaction of the operation of the first operating means and other conditions (operation of other operating means, etc.). Further, the first effect may be started only when the operation of the first operating means is performed, and even if the first operating means is not operated, if other conditions are satisfied, the first effect may be started. The first production may be started. For example, after a certain period of time has elapsed, the first effect may be started even if the first operating means is not operated, and conversely, if there is no operation of the first operating means, a certain time is required. Even after the lapse of time, the first effect may not be started.

Further, the first effect may be configured so that it can be started in response to the operation of the first operating means. In this case, it may or may not be started without fail, or it may be started other than the operation of the first operating means, or only by the operation of the first operating means. It may be started.

Further, when the operation of the first operating means is performed in the first state, the first effect may be executed. The first state referred to here may be a state in which a notification prompting the operation of the first operating means is performed, or conversely, a state in which such a notification is not performed.

Alternatively, the first effect may be executed when the first condition is satisfied. The establishment of the first condition referred to here includes the fact that the first operating means has been operated.

Further, "in the first effect" may or may not extend to the first effect.

Further, "in the first effect, the second operating means vibrates" includes that the vibration is started without permission, and also includes that the vibration is started when the condition is satisfied.

Further, the second operating means may be one that does not vibrate unless it is continuously operated, or one that vibrates continuously even if it is not pressed, and is not continuous and intermittent. It may vibrate in a positive manner. Further, only one of the plurality of types of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

Further, even after the first effect is completed, the second operating means may be vibrable, and in this case, the second operating means may always vibrate or vibrate. It may not be performed, it may be one that executes other than vibration, or it may be one that executes only vibration.

Further, it may vibrate continuously from the first effect, or it may be stopped and then restarted. Alternatively, conversely, after the first effect is completed, the second operating means may not vibrate.

Further, when the first effect can be divided into a plurality of effects, even if the second operating means is configured to vibrate during the execution of at least one of the plurality of effects. Alternatively, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate during the execution of the effect executed at intervals among the plurality of effects, or the first of the plurality of effects. The second operating means may be configured to vibrate.

Further, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect. Further, "the second operating means is configured to vibrate during the execution of the first effect" means that the vibration in the second operating means is related to the first effect. It may or may not be configured to be done.

Also,
"One of the multiple types of production is the second production,
The second effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 17 (m) and 18 (m)].
The mode of the second effect is different from the mode of the first effect.
The second effect is configured to be started in response to an operation of the second operating means [for example, a pressing operation shown in FIGS. 16 (l) and 18 (l)].
Before the second effect is started, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [for example, FIGS. 16 (j) to (k), 18 (j) to 18 (j) to FIG. (K) etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a mode different from the mode of the first effect" may be a mode in which at least a part is different, or a mode in which all are different. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be a mode in which the second movable means also moves, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is It may be in a different manner.

Further, the second operating means may be configured to start vibration after the start of displaying an image prompting the operation, or to start vibration after the start of the operation acceptance state. May be good.

Further, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate at least before the second effect is started, and may be configured to vibrate at the same time as the second effect. , It may be configured to vibrate even after the end of the second effect.

Further, an effect (second effect) that is started in response to the operation of the second operating means is prepared, and the second effect is an N (plural) effect among a plurality of types of effects. It may be configured so that the second operating means may vibrate before the second effect is started.

Further, everything performed by the operation of the second operating means may correspond to the second effect, and may include, for example, a liquid crystal display, lighting or blinking of an LED, and the like. However, the second effect may be targeted only at the effect executed by the liquid crystal display means.

Further, the vibration of the second operating means performed in the first effect continues even when the second operating means is operated until a predetermined vibration time elapses, and the vibration time elapses. Then, it may end, it may end when the second operating means is operated, it may end together with the end of the first effect, or the first effect ends. However, it may be continued until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (it may be terminated immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed at the same time as the decorative symbol is stopped).

On the other hand, the vibration of the second operating means performed before the second effect is started may end when the second operating means is operated, or the second effect starts. It may end at the same time as it is done. In these cases, even if the vibration of the second operating means is the same, there are cases where the vibration is performed in the first effect and cases where the vibration is performed before the second effect is started. Will be different.

On the other hand, the vibration of the second operating means performed before the second effect is started continues until a predetermined vibration time elapses even if the first operating means is operated. However, it may end when the vibration time elapses, or it may continue even when the first effect is finished, and it may continue until the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed (immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol). Alternatively, it may end at the same time as the stop display of the decorative pattern). In these cases, the vibration end condition is the same when the first effect is performed and when the second effect is performed before the start of the second effect.

Also,
"A second display means capable of displaying an image [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect is an effect by displaying the image.
The second effect is an effect by displaying the image.
If the second operating means is operated while the second operating means is vibrating during the execution of the first effect, the second effect is not started, but the first effect is It is configured to run continuously,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the second operating means is operated while the second operating means is vibrating during the execution of the first effect, no new effect may be started. The second effect may be present, but a seventh effect (for example, for music output from a speaker) different from the second effect may be started.

Further, the second display means may always display an image.

Further, the second operating means may not vibrate before the start of the second effect.

Further, the second effect may be an effect configured not to be executed at the same time as the first effect.

Further, the first effect may be an effect only by displaying the image, and the second effect may be an effect only by displaying the image.

Also,
"In the second effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate [eg, FIG. 18 (m), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The second operating means may be vibrating before the start of the second effect and may be continuously vibrated in the second effect, or may be interrupted and then restarted. Alternatively, the mode of vibration (for example, vibration intensity, vibration time, stroke, pitch, etc.) may be different before and after the start of the second effect. More specifically, the vibration of the second operating means before the start of the second effect may be executed during the reception state period of the second operating means.

Further, the game console is provided with the first operating means and the second operating means, and is configured to be capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the effect. , The first effect, one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect, the first effect is the advance notice effect, and the second effect is the advance notice effect. Yes, the first effect is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operating means, and in the first effect, the second operating means is configured to vibrate. Therefore, in the second effect, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate.

Also,
"When the second operating means vibrates [for example, FIGS. 16 (j) to 16 (l), etc.] rather than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIGS. 14 (j) to (l)]. Fig. (L), etc.] is configured to facilitate the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player [for example, a jackpot game state, a subsequent probability change state, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The "advantageous state for the player" is the game state of the big hit (small hit) and the big hit of the loss, the state of the probability change of the probability change and the time saving, and the 15R big hit and the 4R big hit. The 15R jackpot (the jackpot with the larger number of rounds) may be in the gaming state, or 100 times out of 100 times and 50 times of electric support may be given.

Further, "to facilitate the transition" may mean that if the advantageous state is the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the jackpot gaming state is always made.

Further, the vibration of the second operating means in the first effect may be a big hit, or the second operating means may always vibrate in the first effect.

Further, it is provided with a first display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a symbol variation display.
When the second operating means vibrates rather than when the second operating means does not vibrate [for example, FIGS. 14 (j) to 14 (l)] [for example, FIGS. 16 (j) to 16 (l)]. (L), etc.] may be configured so that the result of the symbol variation display can be easily linked to the jackpot, and further, it may be configured to be easily linked to the jackpot with probability variation.

Also,
"One of the multiple types of production is the third production,
The third effect is a notice effect [for example, a judge effect shown in FIGS. 31 (m') to (q')].
The third aspect of the effect is different from the first aspect of the effect.
The third effect is configured to start in response to the operation of the first operating means.
In the third effect, the second operating means is configured so as not to vibrate [for example, FIGS. 31 (m') to 31 (q'), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a mode different from the mode of the first production" may be a mode in which at least a part is different, a mode in which all is different, or a mode in which only a part is different. You may. For example, the movement of the first movable means may be the same, but the other effect may be a mode in which the second movable means also moves, or the movement of the first movable means is the same, but the effect is It may be in a different manner.

Further, the second operating means vibrates before the start of the third effect, does not vibrate during the third effect, and resumes vibration when the third effect ends. It may be a thing.

Also,
"The third effect is an effect configured not to be executed at the same time as the first effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that during the period in which one of the third effect and the first effect is being executed, the other effect may not be executed.

Further, it may be configured so that one of the first effect and the third effect is started in response to the operation of the first operation means.

Also,
"It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications.
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the first notification, and is
The first notification is a notification that prompts the operation of the first operating means [for example, FIGS. 23 (k) and 24 (l), 24 (k) and (l), 25 (k). -Transparent part display 191X, etc. of the operation promotion notification shown in each of the figure (l2), the figure 26 (k), and the figure (l)].
The first effect is the first period [for example, the period of FIGS. 23 (k) to (l), the period of FIGS. 24 (k) to (l), and the period of FIGS. 25 (k) to 25 (l). The effect is started when the first operating means is operated in the period (l2), the period of FIG. 26 (m) to the period of FIG. 26 (l), etc.].
The first notification is configured to be performed during the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the first period is a period during which the first notification is performed.

Also,
"The second operating means is at least a part of the period during which the first effect is executed [for example, the entire period in the examples of FIGS. 24 to 25 and 26, and the example of FIG. 23. Since it does not vibrate in the figure (q), it is a means configured to vibrate during a part of the period, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first operating means is a means [for example, a cross key 181a] configured so as not to vibrate.
The second operating means is a means that is oscillated [for example, a chance button 136].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The “vibration” means a direct vibration that the operating means itself vibrates, and does not include an indirect vibration when the other member vibrates indirectly. However, in some cases, indirect vibration may be included.

It should be noted that even in the state in which the first effect is not executed [for example, the state in which the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 34 (d) to 34 (e) is being executed instead of the final judge effect], the second effect is also performed. The operating means of the above may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to vibrate without fail.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a slot machine [for example, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

Next, a back button effect in which the start timing changes depending on the operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

FIG. 38 (A) is a diagram conceptually showing a configuration of a pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. In the following description, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as those given so far. In addition, explanations may be omitted for items that overlap with the items described so far.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 (A) has two chance buttons. Hereinafter, the chance buttons described so far are referred to as button A or the first chance button 136, and a chance button different from the first chance button 136 is referred to as button B or the second chance button 137. Button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the ball launch handle 134 than button A (first chance button 136). That is, the button A (first chance button 136) is provided at a position LA away from the ball launch handle 134 by a linear distance (shortest distance), whereas the button B (second chance button 137). Is provided at a position LB away from the ball launch handle 134 by a straight line distance (shortest distance), and LA is longer than LB. From another point of view, the button B (second chance button 137) is provided at a position farther from the center position in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100 than the button A (second chance button 136). There is.

The positional relationship between the button A (second chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) is not limited to the relationship described above. Further, the button B (second chance button 137) is also a kind of movable means like the first chance button 136, and may be vibrable and may be able to advance (protrude). On the contrary, only the button B (second chance button 137) is not a movable means, and may not vibrate and may not advance (protrude). Further, the chance button lamp may or may not be built in the button B (second chance button 137). Further, a plurality of chance buttons such as a third chance button and an operation means different from the chance buttons may be further provided.

In each of the examples described up to FIG. 37, the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 (A) can be applied instead of the transparent portion 191 described as an example of the operating means B. Similarly, the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied instead of the transmission unit 191. However, since the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 does not have a vibration function, it is necessary to add a vibration function. There is.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a button effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 (A).

In FIG. 38 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" is displayed.

In FIG. 38 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 has started the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the same figure (c) shows the reach effect. Has been started. When the reach effect is started, the operation shifts to the operation valid state in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is accepted as valid. However, the notification that the operation is in the valid state (for example, the red lighting or blinking of the chance button lamp 138) or the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) (for example, the initial position display 136X) ) Has not been performed, and the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, a person who knows from information such as a bachinko magazine that the operation may be enabled when the reach production is started, tries to operate the button A (first chance button 136). Then, in response to the operation of the button A (first chance button 136), the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button A (first chance button 136) is displayed. , Corresponds to the so-called back button.

Not only the button A (first chance button 136) but also the button B (second chance button 137) and the transparent unit 191 are operated, the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is displayed. It may be done.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the fourth effect and the fifth effect step by step.

In each of the drawings in FIG. 39, the button A (first chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137) are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208s. , The actual positional relationship between the two is the positional relationship described with reference to FIG. 38.

In FIG. 39 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (a), four hold icons of black circles, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1, are displayed, and the change icon is not displayed in the change icon display area 208e. ..

In FIG. 39B, the first special symbol display device 212 starts the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the number of hold icons is reduced by one to three (hold icons h1 to h3), and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 39 (c), the reach effect is started. Here, the button effect is started according to the start of the reach effect. Button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 39 (d) has begun to light in red. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (d) has a button image 137a imitating the button B (second chance button 137) that has begun to light in red, and the button B (second chance button 137). ), The arrow display 137b and the character display "PUSH" as a promotion display for prompting the operation (pressing), and the remaining period meter display 137c as a display regarding the operation validity period of the button B (second chance button 137). Are displayed as a set of three. Hereinafter, these three images 137a, 137b, 137c and the character display of "PUSH" are collectively referred to as the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is displayed, the button B is operated at a relatively early timing (FIG. 39 (e)). That is, the buttonon B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 1/5.

When the button B is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord instead of the button B display 137X in response to the operation (see FIG. 39 (f)). ). When the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, it returns to the extinguished state. The effect of displaying the image C of the cut-in notice in response to the operation of the button B is the button effect, which corresponds to an example of the fifth effect. The display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord is an effect display displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification corresponds to an example of the third notification, and the period during which the button B display 137X is displayed (the period from FIG. 39 (d) to FIG. It corresponds to an example of the three periods.

The display of the cut-in notice image C (fifth effect) by the character of the lord may be an effect that is not started unless the button B (second chance button 137) is operated, but the button B (fifth effect) may be displayed. Even if the second chance button 137) is not operated, the effect may be started when the period in which the button B display 137X is displayed, that is, the operation valid period of the button B elapses, or after the elapse. It may be a production to be started. Further, only one of the plurality of types of examples listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied.

In addition, the second period starts after the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord displayed by the button effect from the reach effect is displayed. That is, the second period is a period started in connection with the operation of the button B (second chance button 137), and here, the time for one frame after the operation of the button B is performed. Is started), and is started from FIG. 39 (g). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (g) still displays the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord, and prompts the operation of the button A (first chance button 136). The initial position display 136X of is not displayed. Further, the button A is in a state of being turned off at the initial position. However, the button A is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 39 (g). In response to the operation of the button A here, the image G of the characters "super heat" is displayed so as to overlap the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord. The image G of the characters "super heat" is an image of a cut-in notice that it is confirmed that a big hit will be made in the symbol variation display currently being performed, and is an expression of the judge result of the final judge production. Further, since it is an effect involving the button A, it is also a button effect, and corresponds to an example of a fourth effect started in response to the operation of the button A. The display mode of the image G of the characters "super heat" is different from that of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord. In addition, the image of the cut-in notice that there is a high possibility of being lost in the pattern variation display currently being performed is an image of the characters "sorry".

The second period started from FIG. 39 (g) is the operation valid period of the button A, but the initial position display 136X is not displayed, and the notification that the operation is valid is not performed. The button A here corresponds to a so-called back button. The display of the image G of the characters "super heat" (fourth effect) is an effect that is not started unless the button A (first chance button 136) is operated. That is, the display of the image C of the cut-in notice by the character of the lord (fifth effect) may start even if the button B is not operated, whereas the button A corresponding to the back button If is not operated, the fourth production will not start. The end timing of the second period is the earlier of the timing at which the button A is operated and the timing at which the operation valid period ends.

In this example, the execution period of the button effect of FIGS. 39 (d) to 39 (g) and the execution period of the back button effect of FIGS. 39 (g) to (i) partially overlap. All may be duplicated. More specifically, the effect period after the button operation of the button effect and the operation valid period of the back button effect overlap in at least a part of the period. On the contrary, the effect period after the button operation of the back button effect and the operation valid period of the button effect may overlap for at least a part of the period.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the timing of operating the button B is later than the example shown in FIG. 39. The timing of the alphabetical figure numbers in parentheses in FIG. 40 coincides with the timing of the alphabetical figure numbers in parentheses in FIG. Hereinafter, the differences from the example shown in FIG. 39 will be mainly described, and the same points may be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the button B is operated at the timing when the remaining period meter display 137c of the button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification is reduced by about 2/5. That is, the button B is operated one frame later than the example shown in FIG. 39 (see FIG. 40 (f)). As a result, as compared with the example shown in FIG. 39, the start of the button effect (fifth effect) started in response to the operation of the button B is also delayed by one frame, and the operation of the button B is performed for one frame. The start timing of the second period, which starts after the lapse of time, also shifts one frame back. In the example shown in FIG. 40, as shown in FIG. 40 (g), the button A is operated following the operation of the button B, but at the timing of the figure (g), the second period is started. The operation of button A here is accepted, but is not treated as valid. Since the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not change at all even if the button A is operated at the timing of FIG. 40 (g), the player operates the button A again at the timing of FIG. 40 (h). .. In response to this second operation, the image G of the characters "super heat" is cut in and displayed, and the fourth effect is started.

As described above, the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 39 (FIG. 39 (g) corresponding to an example of the first period) is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 39 (b)). ) To 4 frames (corresponding to an example of the first time), whereas the start timing of the second period in the example of FIG. 40 (corresponding to an example of the second period) (H)) is after the lapse of 5 frames (corresponding to an example of the second time) from the start timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (FIG. 40 (b)), and the start timing of the second period is It is variable (indefinite).

It should be noted that both the example of FIG. 39 and the example of FIG. 40 were examples of effects related to the operation of the two types of chance buttons, but these effects are different from the two types of chance buttons. For example, it may be replaced with an effect related to the operation of the transparent unit 191 or the third chance button).

FIG. 41 is a diagram for further explaining the relationship between the button A (first chance button 136) and the button B (second chance button 137).

Two examples are shown in FIG. 41. In the example shown above, the chance button lamp of button A (first chance button 136) is lit in red, and button B (second chance button 136) is lit in red. The chance button lamp of the chance button 137) is lit in blue. The lighting of the chance button lamp prompts the operation. In this example, the button A has a vibrating function (first function), and the button B has a rotating function (second function).

In FIG. 41 (a), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When the button A is operated, it exerts its first function and starts vibrating. The non-operated button B remains lit.

In FIG. 41 (b), of the buttons A and B, only the button B is operated. When the button B is operated, it exerts a second function and starts rotating. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exerts the first function and starts vibration in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, only one operation (here, the operation of the button B) can be used to enjoy the function (first function) of the other (button A). Further, in this example, even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates and the operated button B rotates.

In the example shown at the bottom of FIG. 41, both the button A136 and the button B137 are lit. In this example, the button A136 has a vibrating function (first function) and a rotating function (second function).

In FIG. 41 (A), of the buttons A and B, only the button A is operated. When the button A is operated, it exerts the first function and starts vibration, and at the same time, also exerts the second function and starts rotating. As a result, the button A vibrates while rotating in response to the operation. The non-operated button B remains lit.

In FIG. 41 (B), of the button A and the button B, only the button B is operated. Even if the button B is operated, it remains lit and neither vibrates nor rotates. On the other hand, the non-operated button A exerts the first function and starts vibration in response to the operation of the button B. In this example, with only one operation (here, the operation of the button B), only a part of the plurality of functions (the first function) of the other (button A) can be enjoyed. Further, in this example, even if the button B137 is operated while the operation promotion notification of the button A136 is being performed, the button A136 vibrates.

In the above description,
A game console equipped with a second operating means [for example, button A (chance button 136), etc.]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, a notice of cut-in of "super heat" shown in FIGS. 39 (h) to (i) and 40 (i)]. And
The fourth effect is configured to start in response to the operation of the second operating means.
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a second notification, and is
The second notification is a notification that prompts the operation of the second operating means [for example, the initial position display 136X of the operation promotion notification].
The fourth effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display of decorative symbols [for example, 3 ↓ 3 etc. displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 39 and 40]. ,
The fourth effect is an effect that starts when the second operating means is operated in the second period [for example, FIG. 39 (g), FIG. 40 (h), etc.].
The second notification is configured not to be performed during the second period.
The second period is a period that may start at the first period in the variable display [for example, the period of FIG. 39 (g)].
The second period is a period that may start at the second period in the variation display [for example, the period of FIG. 40 (h)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

It should be noted that a plurality of types of effects may or may not be executed without fail, other than the plurality of types of effects may be executed, or only a plurality of types of effects may be executed. ..

Further, the fourth effect may be an effect that is always executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Also,
"A third operating means [for example, button B (second chance button 137), etc.] is provided.
The second period is a period that is started in connection with the operation of the third operating means [for example, after the button B is operated, after the cut-in notice by the character display of the lord is started, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effects is the fifth effect [for example, a cut-in notice by displaying the character of the lord starting from FIGS. 39 (f) and 40 (g)].
One of the plurality of types of notifications is a third notification, and is
The third notification is a notification for prompting the operation of the third operating means [for example, button B display 137X of the operation promotion notification].
The fifth effect is configured to start in response to the operation of the third operating means.
The fifth effect is the third operating means in the third period [for example, the period of FIGS. 39 (d) to (e), the period of FIGS. 40 (d) to (f), etc.]. Is an effect that is started when [for example, FIG. 39 (e), FIG. 40 (f), etc.] is operated.
The third notification is configured to be performed during the third period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the third period is the period during which the third notification is performed.

Also,
"The fifth aspect of the effect is different from the fourth aspect of the effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect when it is executed in a variable display of a decorative pattern [for example, FIG. 39 (f), FIG. 40 (g), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect that cannot be started unless the third operating means is operated in the third period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The fifth effect is an effect that is started even when the third operating means is not operated in the third period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In this case, the fifth effect may be an effect started after the lapse of the third period, or may be an effect started after the lapse of the third period.

Also,
"The fourth effect is an effect that cannot be started unless the second operating means is operated in the second period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

By doing so, the fifth effect is clearly different from the case where the third operation means is started even if the third operation means is not operated in the third period, and the operation means can be changed. It will be possible to give a wide range to the entwined production.

Also,
"The first time is a time after the first time [for example, the time for four frames] has elapsed from the start of the variation display [for example, FIG. 39 (b)].
The second period is a period after the lapse of the second time [for example, the time for 5 frames] from the start of the variation display [for example, FIG. 40 (b)].
The second time is a time different from the first time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Next, an example of the icon change display different from the icon change notice will be described by taking a promotion effect as an example.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing three examples of promotion effects.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 42, the promotion effect is started at the same time as the reach effect is started or after the reach effect is started in the variable display of the decorative symbol in FIG. 42 (a). That is, the promotion effect is started during the reach state. In the promotion effect here, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), a notable item display AT (first display) appears in the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display AT of notable items shown in FIG. 42 (a), it is notified that attention is paid to the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed on the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the state of the variable display (“2 ↓ 2”) of the decorative symbol in the reach state, which is currently being performed, is directly displayed to notify that attention is paid. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), the display AT of the noteworthy item disappears, "decoration 7" is displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and high-speed fluctuation continues in the middle symbol display area 208b. The state of doing is displayed. The symbol combination (“Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2”) in which three of the same even-numbered decorative symbols are lined up is a normal jackpot symbol combination with no probability change, whereas the symbol combination in which three same odd-numbered decorative symbols are lined up Since the combination ("decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is a special jackpot symbol combination with probability variation, it is likely to succeed in promotion with probability variation here. In the example shown on the left of FIG. 42, the object of interest in the display AT of a noteworthy item and the one that has changed thereafter coincide with each other in a decorative pattern. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (a)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) match. In an effect in which a design such as a decorative design changes, the advance notice display regarding the design may be configured so that the actual change display always matches.

In the display AT of notable items, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the reach state (“2 ↓ 2”) that is currently being performed is directly displayed, but the variable display of the decorative symbol after the change is displayed. The state (“7 ↓ 7”) may be directly displayed as a notice display of the production.

In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, in the display AT of notable items in the promotion effect, it is notified that the rightmost icon among the four displayed icons is paid attention to. Display of noteworthy items The four icons displayed by the AT are icons corresponding to the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are not displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. , Can be seen as a type of hold icon. Therefore, in the display AT of the noteworthy matter shown in FIG. 42B, it is notified that the fourth hold icon h4 on the rightmost side of the four hold icons displayed is paid attention to. In the display AT of notable items shown in FIG. 42B, four hold icons are displayed, but the variable icon is not displayed. On the other hand, only the hold icons h1 to h3 of the three black circles (default display mode) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208, but the black circles (default display mode) are displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. The variable icon c of the display mode) is displayed. Further, in the notable item display AT shown in FIG. 42B, the notable display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 is changed to the hatch display mode (the first display mode and the look-ahead notice display mode). It's changing. Next, in FIG. 42 (c), while the reach state is still in effect, the display AT of the noteworthy matter disappears, and in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, only three black circle hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. Not displayed. However, in the variable icon display area 208e, the variable icon c of the hatching display mode (normal notice display mode) is displayed. The display mode of this hatching is the same display mode as the display mode of the fourth hold icon h4 in the display mode of the noteworthy item in FIG. 42 (b), but in this example, the attention in the display mode of the noteworthy item The target (fourth hold icon h4) and the one changed after that (variable icon c) are different. That is, while giving a notice that the hold icon (fourth hold icon h4) changes in FIG. 42 (b), the variable icon c actually changes in FIG. 42 (c), depending on the type of icon. Are different. Moreover, the variable icon itself is not displayed in the display AT of the remarkable item in FIG. 42B, while the fourth hold icon h4 is displayed in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is also caused by inconsistencies such as not being displayed. This example corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) do not match. In the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of notable matters corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual variation shown in FIG. 42 (c). Icon c corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of a noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (c) corresponds to an example of the second display. In addition, in FIG. 42 (d), the variable display of the decorative pattern is completed, and the combination of the loss of "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed. In the variable icon display area 208e of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the variable icon c returns from the hatched display mode to the display of black circles. In addition, there is no prize in the first special drawing start port 230, and the fourth hold icon h4 is not displayed.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the display AT of notable items of the promotion effect (FIG. 42 (B)) is the same as the example shown in the center of FIG. 42, and one of the four icons displayed. It is informed that attention is paid to the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4). Further, the notable icon (fourth hold icon h4) is displayed in a hatching display mode (first display mode). This hatching display mode (first display mode) is a look-ahead notice display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h1 to h4 of the four default display modes and the variable icon c of the default display mode are displayed. In this example, the number of hold icons is the same between the display AT of the noteworthy matter of the promotion effect and the actual hold icon display area 208f. In FIG. 42 (C), while the reach state is still in effect, the display AT of the noteworthy matter disappears, and only three hold icons h1 to h3 are still displayed in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 has changed to the display mode of the face of the lord (second display mode). The display mode (second display mode) of the face of the lord is a look-ahead notice display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high. In this example, not only the object of interest (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of notable matters and the one changed after that (first hold icon h1) are different, but also the change content is the display mode of hatching. (The first display mode) and the display mode of the face of the lord (second display mode) are different. In the variable icon display area 208e, the variable icon c in the default display mode is displayed.

FIG. 42 (C') is a modification of FIG. 42 (C), and is a diagram showing a state in which the display AT of a noteworthy item shown in FIG. 42 (B) disappears. Further, the figure (D') is a diagram showing a state when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, following the figure (C'). The display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIGS. 42 (C') and 42 (D') is no different from the display state of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 42 (B). The display state of the variable icon in the variable icon display area 208e shown in 42 (C') and (D') is not different from the display state of the variable icon in the variable icon display area 208e shown in FIG. 42 (B). Following FIG. 42 (D'), FIG. 42 (E') shows that the hold corresponding to the hold icon, which has been the first hold icon h1, has been digested, and a new variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. It is a figure which shows. When a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the movement animation of the shift display of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h1 moves toward the change icon display area 208e. , Displayed as a variable icon c. Further, the hold icon that has been the second hold icon h2 so far is displayed as the first hold icon h1, but at the same time as the start of the movement animation, during the movement animation, or at the same time as the end of the movement animation. Or, after the movement animation ends, the display mode changes to the display mode (second display mode) of the face of the lord. That is, the execution timing of the promotion display is different from the examples described so far, and the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) is started after the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) in which the display AT of the noteworthy matter is made (the first symbol variation display). The promotion display is executed in the second symbol change display). The first hold icon h1 that has changed to the display mode of the face of the lord may be displayed in that display mode while the second symbol variation display is being executed (for example, the reach effect is being executed), and the display mode is further changed. It may be used, or it may disappear when the super reach effect is executed.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 42 also corresponds to an example in which the advance notice display (FIG. 42 (B)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E')) do not match.

In the example shown on the right side of FIG. 42, the rightmost icon (fourth hold icon h4) in the display AT of notable matters corresponds to an example of the first icon, and FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E). The actual first hold icon h1 shown in') corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of notable items corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 42 (C) and (E') is an example of the second display. Corresponds to.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing two other examples relating to the promotion effect.

In the example on the left side of FIG. 43, a mini icon such as a mini item is displayed above the hold icon. This mini-icon is a smaller icon than the hold icon, and it is a notice of the effect to be executed in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the displayed hold icon is digested, and the jackpot in the symbol variation display. It represents a look-ahead notice, etc. In any of the decorative symbol display devices 208 shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B), the mini icon of A display is placed on the first hold icon h1 on the leftmost of the three hold icons displayed. Two mAs are piled up. The mini icon mA of the A display, for example, foretells that the pseudo-continuous production will be started once. In the display AT of notable items shown in FIG. 43 (B), one C display mini icon displayed above the leftmost icon (first hold icon h1) among the four displayed icons. It has been reported to pay attention to mC. The C-display mini-icon mA is, for example, a look-ahead notice suggesting that a big hit is confirmed. In FIG. 43 (C), the display AT of the noteworthy matter disappears while the reach state is still in effect, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini icons mA and C of the A display are displayed on the first hold icon h1. Mini icons mC are piled up. That is, as a promotion display, the upper mini icon has changed from the A display mini icon mA to the C display mini icon mC, but the lower mini icon has not changed and the A display mini has not changed. The icon mA remains. As a result, although the number of pseudo-reams is reduced from 2 to 1, it is foretold that the symbol variation display will be a big hit, and the promotion has been successful. In this example, the object of interest in the display AT of notable items was a mini icon in which only one was displayed, but in reality, two mini icons were displayed after that. Display of notable items There is a change between the first-stage mini-icon (C-display mini-icon mC) that was the focus of attention in AT and the first-stage mini-icon (A-display mini-icon mA) displayed after that. The content is also different. In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 43, the mini icon mC of C display in the display AT of notable matters corresponds to an example of the first icon, and the actual mini icon of A display in the first stage shown in FIG. 43 (C). The icon mA corresponds to an example of the second icon. Further, the display AT of a noteworthy item corresponds to an example of the first display, and the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (C) corresponds to an example of the second display.

In the example on the right side of FIG. 43, the promotion effect selected from the three types of promotion effects is executed in the reach state. The three types of promotion effects referred to here are the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to (c), the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to (d), and the promotion effects shown in FIGS. 42 (A). The promotion effect shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (A) to FIG. (C') to FIG. (E') may be used. In addition, all of the plurality of types of effects (here, three types of promotion effects) in which one effect is selected are displayed in advance as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (c) (FIG. 42 (a)). )) And the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be the same type of effect, or the advance notice display (as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) to (d)). FIG. 42 (b)) and the actual change display (FIG. 42 (c)) may be a mismatch type effect, or both a matching type effect and a mismatch type effect are included. May be good.

In FIG. 43 (b), the notable item display AT1 marked as “promotion chance A” as the promotion effect A and the notable item display AT2 described as “promotion chance B” as the promotion effect B. As the promotion effect C, the display AT3 of notable items marked "promotion chance C" is displayed, and one of the promotion effects is selected and executed by the internal lottery. It should be noted that the selection operation may be performed by operating the button A (first chance button 136) or the button B (second chance button 137).

In the above explanation, the promotion effect is taken as an example, but the icon change display different from the icon change notice is not limited to the promotion effect.

In the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons.
One of the plurality of types of icons is the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b), the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (B), and FIG. 43 (B). ) Shown in the mini icon mC, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of icons is the second icon [for example, the variable icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c), the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E'). , Mini icon mA, etc. shown in FIG. 43 (C)].
The second icon is an icon different from the first icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
It is configured so that the second display may be displayed after the display of the first display is started.
The first display is a display indicating that the display mode of the first icon changes [for example, noteworthy shown in FIGS. 42 (b), 42 (B), and 43 (B), respectively. Display of matters AT, etc.],
The second display is a display in which the display mode of the second icon changes [for example, in FIGS. 42 (c), 42 (C), 42 (E'), and 43 (C), respectively. Actual display in the decorative icon display device 208 to be shown],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying the plurality of types of icons, a means for displaying the plurality of types of icons, or a means for displaying other than the plurality of types of icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of types of icons may be displayed.

Further, the second display may be configured to be always displayed after the display of the first display is started.

Also,
"The second icon [for example, the variable icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)] is an icon of a different type from the first icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b)]. is there,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"Equipped with a symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
The first icon is a hold icon [for example, the fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (b)].
The hold icon is an icon representing the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display by the number displayed.
The one said hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one said hold.
The second icon is a variable icon [for example, the variable icon c shown in FIG. 42 (c)].
The variation icon is an icon displayed as an icon corresponding to the symbol variation display when the hold represented by the hold icon is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the symbol display means may be a means for always displaying the symbol variation display, a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or a means for executing other than the symbol variation display. Alternatively, only the symbol variation display may be executed.

Also,
"A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a special diagram 2 display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first icon is a first hold icon [for example, a fourth hold icon h4 shown in FIG. 42 (B)].
The second icon is a second hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 42 (C) or FIG. 42 (E')].
The hold icon is an icon representing the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display by the number displayed.
The one said hold icon is an icon indicating that there is one said hold.
The first hold icon and the second hold icon are icons at different times when the hold is made.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first icon is a display of the first type of mini-item [for example, a pre-reading notice mini-icon mC that suggests that a big hit is confirmed].
The second icon is a display of a second type of mini item [for example, a mini icon mA that announces that the pseudo-continuous production will be started once].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first display is a display displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second display is a display displayed during the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The second display is a display displayed during the execution of the reach effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Subsequently, a timer notice for starting the notification by the button effect will be described.

FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a general timer notice.

In each of the figures in FIG. 44, a button A (first chance button 136) and a button B are displayed next to the decorative symbol display device 208. The operation surface of the button B (second chance button 137) shown in FIG. 38 or the like was circular, but the operation surface of the button B here is a quadrangle. Button B is referred to as button B (operation button 137'), but the shape of the operation surface is not limited, and the name may be a chance button.

In FIG. 44A, both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" is displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed in white while stopped. Four of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44A are lit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays four black circle hold icons, which are the hold displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 44B, the first special symbol display device 212 has started the variable display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is continuously updated (variable display) in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, only three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 44B are lit, and there are only three hold icons (hold icons h1 to h3) in the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208. Not displayed, the variable icon c in the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to the changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (c), the reach effect is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced to the left corner and is in the reach state by the number 3. ..

The first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol change start command for a special figure or a special figure hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The symbol variation start command includes information indicating the variation time of the symbol variation display to be started. Further, even when the information representing the fluctuation time is not included, the information representing the stop symbol is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines the fluctuation time from the information representing the stop symbol. The special figure hold increase command includes information indicating the pre-read fluctuation time when the main control unit 300 pre-reads up to the fluctuation time, but even if it is not included, information representing the pre-read stop symbol. Is included, and the first sub-control unit 400 can know the fluctuation time from the information representing the pre-read stop symbol. When the fluctuation time is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery for whether or not the timer notice can be executed.

Whether or not the timer notice can be executed If the lottery is won (when the lottery result is the result of execution), the timer notice is started when the reach effect is started. The timer notice includes a display indicating the remaining time until the new effect is started, and is also a kind of notice effect suggesting that the new effect is started. The new effect referred to here may be a notice effect of a big hit, or a notice effect of whether or not a certain effect (for example, a super reach effect) is started. The big hit notice effect includes a normal notice effect that announces that a big hit will be made on the currently performed symbol variation display, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces that a big hit will be made on the next and subsequent symbol change display. Further, the display indicating the remaining time may be a meter display, a level display, or a number display, but in this example, it is a numerical display. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the display representing the remaining time listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be applied. In FIG. 44 (d), the timer notice display T is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e, and it is notified that the remaining time is 30:00 seconds until the start of a new effect. The remaining time displayed here is displayed as a countdown with the passage of time, and is 0:00 seconds in the figure (e). When the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the first effect display is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (f), the character of the lord is displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. In the variable icon display area 208e of FIG. 44 (f), the variable icon c of the black circle display mode (default display mode) is still displayed. Further, the timer notice display T at 0:00 seconds is still displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e, and the first effect display (character display of the lord) here is the end of the timer notice. It is a production. However, the first effect display (character display of the lord) can also be seen as the start effect of a new effect whose start is announced by the timer notice. In particular, the timing at which the timer notice display T disappears at 0:00 may be the moment when it reaches 0:00, or it may disappear at the timing shown in FIG. Alternatively, although the timer advance notice has ended at 0:00 seconds, the timer advance notice display T may be in a mode in which the timer advance notice display T continues to be displayed for a certain period of time even when a new effect is started.

In FIG. 44 (g) following FIG. 44 (f), although the timer notice display T disappeared, the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) was still displayed on the variable icon display area 208e. As a new effect announced by the timer notice, the normal notice effect has been started. In this normal notice effect, the variable icon c, which was the default display mode until then, has changed to the display mode of the princess's face, and there is a possibility of a big hit with the symbol variable display that is currently in the reach state. Is foretold.

In FIG. 44 (h), the first effect display (character display of the lord) disappears, and the variable icon c of the display mode of the princess's face continues to be displayed in the variable icon display area 208e, and the normal notice effect is displayed. continuing. After this, it evolved into a super reach production, and the variable icon c disappeared (became invisible) along with the hold icon, and it became a big hit, or it became a loss, and even it became a loss without developing into a super reach production. To do. Even when the super reach effect is developed, the variable icon c of the display mode of the princess's face may continue to be visible without disappearing.

FIG. 45 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the timer notice display T may be displayed in response to a button operation.

The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a counter timer, and when the lottery for whether or not to execute the timer notice is won, the internal count by the counter timer is started. The start time of the internal count may be after the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol or before the start of the symbol variation display, but in the example shown in FIG. 45, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display. Internal counting is started. A count value is set in the counter timer before the start, and the counter timer is counted by a countdown method. The time represented by the count value is less than the fluctuation time of the special figure, but may be longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure. In FIG. 45, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 4 is shown in a pseudo manner. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the value at 40:00 seconds is set in the counter timer 412, and the internal count is started from the figure (b) when the symbol variation display is started.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 shifts to a state (operation valid state) in which the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is effectively received at the same time as the start of the internal count or immediately after the start. However, even when the operation is enabled, the chance button lamp 138 of the button A (first chance button 136) remains off, and the operation promotion notification of the button A (for example, the initial position display 136X) is also performed. It is not, and the player does not know that the operation is valid. However, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is displayed according to the operation. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after a while from the start of the reach effect (see FIG. 45C). The display of the timer notice display T was related to the reach effect in the example shown in FIG. 44, but is irrelevant in this example. Further, the button A (first chance button 136) here corresponds to a so-called back button. Even if the button B (operation button 137') is operated, the timer notice display T is not displayed, but it may be displayed. The timer notice display T is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e), and it is notified that the remaining time is 20:00 until the start of a new effect. In this example, when the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, the timer notice display T is immediately displayed, so that the player can start the countdown of the remaining time as if the button A was operated. It looks like this, but internally, the countdown of the remaining time has started before the button is operated.

In this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponds to the so-called back button, but the operation promotion notification for promoting the operation of the button A may be performed, and the operation promotion notification is the button A. It ends when is operated. Therefore, if a certain period of time is provided between the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) and the display of the timer notice display T, the operation promotion notification is sent within that period. It will not be done.

Further, since the timer notice display T is displayed in response to the button A operation, the length of the remaining time at which the display starts to be displayed differs depending on the timing of the button A operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), if the button A operation is performed a little earlier, the timer advance notice display T will be displayed from the state where the remaining time is 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), even if the button A operation is performed after the remaining time of the counter timer 412 by the timekeeping becomes equal to or less than the first remaining time (here, 5 seconds or less), the timer notice display is displayed. You may not display T. In this case, the operation enabled state of the button A (first chance button 136) is before the first remaining time. Alternatively, when the remaining time due to the timing of the counter timer 412 reaches the second remaining time (for example, 6 seconds), the timer notice display T is displayed from the second remaining time even if the button A operation is not performed. You may. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the operation effective state of the button A (first chance button 136) is continuous, but it may be intermittent. For example, if the operation enabled state continues for 5 seconds, the transition to the operation disabled state for 3 seconds may be repeated until the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

Since FIGS. 45 (f) and later are the same as those after FIG. 44 (e), the description thereof will be omitted. The remaining time may elapse. Even in this case, after the remaining time elapses, the display mode of the variable icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face without performing the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord). , The display mode of the variable icon c may be changed to the display mode of the princess's face after the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed as in the case of the operation.

FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the timing of the back button operation and the timing of the hold increase.

At the time when the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 46B, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, and the internal count is also started at the same time as the symbol variation display is started here. That is, it is determined that the timer advance notice is executed when the symbol variation display is started, and the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is valid.

In FIG. 46 (c), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated, and the timer notice display T is displayed. In the state where the timer notice display T is displayed (the remaining time is 5:00 seconds), one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230, and the number of holdings of special figure 1 is increased by one. As shown in 46 (d), three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed. All of these three hold icons h1 to h3 are display modes of black circles (default display mode).

Eventually, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds (see FIG. 46 (f)), and as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed above the variable icon display area 208e. ) Is displayed. Even in this state, the three hold icons h1 to h3 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this example, on the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord), a suggestion is made about a new effect to be started, that is, a new effect for which the start is announced by the timer notice, and the look-ahead notice is given. It has been notified that the display mode of the target hold icon will change. In this example, the target of the look-ahead notice is also determined in a controlled manner at the stage of determining whether or not the button notice can be executed. Therefore, if the second hold of the special figure 1 is increasing during the execution of the symbol change display one time before the currently performed symbol change display, the pre-reading notice target is controlledly this. It is unlikely that the winning amount (here, the third hold) will be subject to the look-ahead notice after the second hold and the execution of the timer notice is decided, but from the player's point of view, before the start of the new production. It seems that all three hold icons h1 to h3 displayed on the screen may be subject to pre-reading notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 46 (h), the display mode of the second hold icon h2 out of the three hold icons h1 to h3 is changed from the display mode of the black circle (default display mode) to the display mode of the face of the lord. (Display mode of look-ahead notice) has been changed, and the look-ahead notice effect has been started as a new effect announced by the timer notice. In this example, the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) continues to be displayed until the currently performed symbol variation display is completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (c'), at the stage where the remaining time is 5:00 seconds, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 When the button A (first chance button 136) is operated after the timing of FIG. 46 (d) in which is increased by one (see FIG. 46 (e')), it is the button operation after the hold increase. Therefore, players tend to expect that the third hold, which had increased before the button operation, will also be subject to the look-ahead notice, but even before the button operation, the hold will increase after the timer notice is decided to be executed. In control, the third hold cannot be the target of the look-ahead notice, and in this example as well, the display mode of the second hold icon h2 changes to the look-ahead notice display mode.

If the first hold is increasing along with the second hold of the special figure 1 during the execution of the symbol change display one time before the currently performed symbol change display, the first hold icon h1 is displayed. There is a possibility that the display mode may change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and in this case, it is not known in advance whether the look-ahead notice target is the first hold, the second hold, or both. ..

Further, if a control is adopted in which the pre-reading notice target is determined according to the operation of the button A, the number of the pre-reading notice targets changes according to the operation timing of the button A (first chance button 136). Become. That is, in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (c), only the first hold and the second hold are subject to the look-ahead notice, but in the button operation at the timing of FIG. 46 (e'), from the first hold to the third hold. Is subject to pre-reading notice, and the expected target will differ depending on the timing of button operation.

Further, the pre-reading notice target may be determined immediately before the start of a new effect, that is, when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds.

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing two examples of the button effect step by step.

The example on the left side of FIG. 47 corresponds to an example of a general button effect, and the counter timer 412 does not operate. In this example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 47 (a) to FIG. 47 (d) is in the reach state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Image 136a4, arrow display 136b and the character display "press" as a promotion display for prompting the operation of the chance button 136, and the remaining period meter display 136c indicating the remaining period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid. One is displayed as a set. Hereinafter, these three images 136a, 136b, 136c and the character display of "press" are collectively referred to as a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. In FIG. 47 (c), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated while the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is being performed, and the decoration shown in FIG. 47 (d) is performed in response to this operation. The symbol display device 208 displays the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed as a chance.

The example on the right side of FIG. 47 is an example in which the start of the timer notice is waited for. Since FIGS. 47 (A) to 47 (C) are the same as FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the description thereof will be omitted. Even in this example, the counter timer 412 is not operating, and the timer advance notice is not executed in the symbol variation display currently being performed. However, at the stage of receiving the special figure hold increase command when each of the three holds held here is held, the fluctuation time of each is calculated from the information representing the pre-read stop symbol included in each command. If there is a hold whose fluctuation time is longer than the first time among these three holds, the timer notice is stocked until the hold is exhausted and the symbol change display is started. I will do it. As shown in FIG. 47 (C), when button A (first chance button 136) is operated during the operation valid period, the timer advance notice is not started in the currently performed symbol variation display, but after that, As a display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the symbol variation display to be started, as shown in FIG. 3D, the display T'that says "waiting" is set to the position where the timer notice display T is displayed. It is displayed, and when the timer notice starts, the remaining time is displayed instead of "waiting".

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a modified example of the display method including the timer notice display T. In FIG. 48, three examples are shown on the left side and two examples are shown on the right side.

First, in FIG. 48A, which is the first example, in the reach state, a display similar to the timer notice display T (hereinafter referred to as time display T1) is displayed at the display position of the timer notice display T, and the button A is displayed. (First chance button 136) It has already been displayed before the operation. This time display T1 is also displayed as a countdown with the passage of time, but in FIG. 48A, 10:00 seconds is displayed. On the other hand, the counter timer 412 shown in FIG. 48A is 30:00 seconds, and the two do not match. Button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated at the timing of FIG. 48 (b) when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the time display T1 is displayed. The timer notice display T is displayed. At the timing of FIG. 48B, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, and the timer notice display T is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412.

In FIG. 48 (A), which is the second example, as in FIG. 48 (a), which is the first example, the time display T1 is placed at the display position of the timer notice display T, and the button A (first). Chance button 136) It has already been displayed before the operation. After that, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds, and in response to this operation, the timer notice display T is displayed instead of the time display T2. The timer notice display T shown in FIG. 48 (B) is 25:00 seconds, which is the same as the counter timer 412. Further, above the timer notice display T, the difference between the time of the time display T1 that has been displayed so far and the time of the newly displayed timer notice display T is displayed. That is, at the timing of FIG. 48 (B), the time of the time display T1 displayed so far should have been 5:00 seconds, whereas the remaining time displayed on the timer notice display T is Since it is 25:00 seconds, the difference display T2 of "+20" is made.

In FIG. 48 (a), which is the third example, as in FIG. 48 (a), which is the first example, the time display T1 is placed at the display position of the timer notice display T, and the button A (first). Chance button 136) It has already been displayed before the operation. After that, also in this example, the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. The operation timing of the button A is the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), which is also the timing when the counter timer 412 reaches 25:00 seconds. On the other hand, at the timing of FIG. 48A, the time display T1 is 5:00 seconds, which is 20:00 seconds ahead of the remaining time of the counter timer 412. In this example, the character "LOCK" is displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the time display T1, and the countdown on the time display T1 is temporarily stopped. Even if the countdown on the time display T1 is paused, the countdown on the counter timer 412 continues, and the character "LOCK" is displayed until the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds on the time display T1. The countdown in the time display T1 is paused. Eventually, when the remaining time of the counter timer 412 reaches 5:00 seconds, the character display "LOCK" disappears, the time display T1 is replaced with the timer notice display T, and thereafter, the countdown as the timer notice display T continues. To. In this example, if the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated, the time display T1 continues the countdown, and eventually it becomes 0:00 seconds, and the timer is announced. It ends without being replaced with the display T.

In FIG. 48 (α), which is the fourth example shown in the upper right, an arrow indicating the passage of time is displayed, indicating the state in which the symbol variation is displayed. In general, the longer the count value (remaining time) initially set in the counter timer, the higher the expectation of a big hit. In addition, when the timer notice announces the start of the final cut-in notice in the currently performed symbol variation display, the longer the timer notice execution time (remaining time) is, the more various effects are executed. Becomes possible. For example, in the first half, it is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon and start the pseudo-ream. In addition, after the normal reach is started, it is possible to develop into a super reach (SP) and change the title color of the reach. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a chance-up effect during reach, which raises the expectation of a big hit. For these reasons, internally, the countdown of the counter timer 412 continues to be executed, but the display of the remaining time on the timer notice display T is initially displayed to be small, and the countdown is apparently temporary. By stopping the game or adding the remaining period later, the fun of the game may be improved. Further, as the number of remaining time displays such as the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48A is displayed, the number of times that the change in the effect when the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds is expected increases. The interest of the game may be improved. Then, in the final cut-in notice, a character that is confirmed to be a big hit may appear. Even if the timer notice display T becomes 0:00 seconds when the counter timer 412 becomes 0:00 seconds, a new effect is not started, and even if a fake timer notice is configured to be executable. Alternatively, it may be configured not to give a fake timer notice.

In FIG. 48 (A), which is the fifth example shown in the lower right, button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here). Then, the timer notice display T in which (30:00 seconds) is displayed is displayed. In FIG. 48 (i), the operation of the button A (first chance button 136) is performed again. Button A, which corresponds to the back button, is in a state of accepting the second operation as valid, and the timer notice display T previously displayed in the first mode (for example, a single frame) is changed to the second operation. Correspondingly, it is displayed in a second aspect (for example, a double frame). The timer notice display T, which has been displayed in the first color (for example, blue), may be displayed in the second color (for example, blue) in response to the second operation.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example in which the timer notice overlaps with another effect accompanied by a countdown of the remaining time.

Two examples are shown in FIG. 49, and the example shown above is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the island simultaneous production. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), "25 seconds to the simultaneous production of the islands" is largely displayed. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not. It is a display. In FIG. 49B, the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (b), "20 seconds until the simultaneous production of the islands" is displayed in the same size as the previous one. In this example, the difference between the time when the remaining time of the timer notice is 0:00 seconds and the time when the island simultaneous production is started is only 5 seconds, but the timer notice is affected by the countdown of the island simultaneous production. The remaining time is displayed according to the countdown of the counter timer 412 without receiving any.

The example shown at the bottom of FIG. 49 is an example when the timer notice overlaps with the mission effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 49 (a), the mission display M on the diagonally upper right side of the variable icon display area 208e is made, and it is displayed that the remaining time is 10:00 seconds. On the other hand, the remaining time of the internal counter timer 412 is 30:00 seconds, but the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is not operated at this stage, and the timer notice display T is not. It is a display. In FIG. 49 (a), the button A (first chance button 136) is operated, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 25:00 seconds) is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. The timer notice display T is displayed. In the mission display M shown in FIG. 49 (a), it is displayed that the remaining time is 5:00 seconds. In this example, both the mission display M and the timer notice display T are displayed in a similar display mode surrounded by a single frame, so at first glance, there is a risk of misunderstanding, but be careful. It also has the effect of being seen.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of timer notice.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 50, the timer notice display is not a numerical display but a meter display. In this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification is not displayed, but the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red. And encourages you to operate. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 50B has a tutorial-like description about the display of the chance up meter, which is a kind of timer notice display. In FIG. 50 (c), the button A is operated by being prompted to light in red, and the chance up meter CM is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the operation. In the chance up meter CM, the left end is the start S and the right end is the goal G, and the arrow mark moves from left to right with the passage of time. This arrow mark represents the current time point, and when the arrow mark reaches the goal G at the right end, the remaining time becomes 0:00 seconds. Therefore, the distance from the arrow mark to the goal G corresponds to the length of the remaining time. Further, this chance-up meter CM not only shows the remaining time, but also various kinds such as change of pseudo-ream and hold icon, change of reach title color, and chance-up effect during reach as shown in FIG. 48 (α). The execution timing of the production is also marked. It should be noted that only the execution timing of the effect is marked, and what kind of effect is executed may be hidden.

The example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 is an example in which the effect to be executed changes according to the operation timing of the operation means. In this example, the chance button lamp 138 built in the button A (first chance button 136) lights up in red to prompt the user to operate the button A, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification. Is displayed. Further, a mark JI is attached to the remaining period meter display 136c of the displayed normal display 136N, and when the remaining period meter operates the button A when the mark JI is approached, a special aspect of the effect is produced. To be started. In FIG. 50 (A), the operation of the button A is too slow and the effect of the special mode is not started, and as shown in FIG. 50 (B), the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the chance is displayed. Has been done. In FIG. 50 (a), the operation timing of the button A exactly matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (a), the image C2 of the cut-in notice displayed in gray letters and the chance is displayed. ing. The image C2 of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. 50 (a) is the same as the image C1 of the cut-in notice shown in FIG. 50 (B), although the typeface and the type of the background are the same and only the color of the characters is different. The typeface and the type of the base may be different, and an image such as a character may be added. In FIG. 50 (A), the button B (operation button 137') for which the operation promotion notification is not performed is operated. Further, the button B here corresponds to the back button. The operation timing of the button B also exactly matches the timing of the mark JI, and as shown in FIG. 50 (i), the image C3 of the cut-in notice of the special mode in which the character of the princess is displayed is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the effect differs depending on the operation timing, and the display mode of the effect differs depending on the operating means to be operated. The type and start timing of the effect may be different, not limited to the display mode of the effect. Further, even if the operating means to be operated is the same, the display mode of the effect, the type of the effect, and the start timing may be different depending on whether the button is the back button or not.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which the timer notice display T is displayed on a device different from the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the example shown in FIG. 51, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a timer advance notice display means 209'with a shutter, which is separate from the decorative symbol display device 208. The panel display unit 183 shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the timer advance notice display means 209'. In the timer advance notice display means 209'with a shutter shown in FIG. 51 (a), the shutter is closed, and as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the button A (first chance button 136) corresponding to the back button is operated. Then, the shutter is opened, and the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (here, 20:00 seconds) is displayed on the timer advance notice display means 209'.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the remaining time displayed on the timer advance notice display means 209'is 0:00 seconds. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first effect display (character display N1 of the lord) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the timer advance notice display means 209', and then the decorative symbol display device. In the variable icon display area 208e of 208, the variable icon c is changed to the display mode of the princess's face, and the normal advance notice effect is started. After the remaining time reaches 0:00 seconds, the timer advance notice display means 209'does not close the shutter and continues to display 0:00 seconds as it is.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (A) has the same display as “waiting” shown in FIG. 47 (D). The "waiting" shown in FIG. 47 (D) is a display for notifying that the timer notice will be started in the symbol variation display started after this, but the "waiting" shown in FIG. 51 (A) is , Corresponds to the display for notifying that the timer notice is started in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 51 (B), the “standby” of the decorative symbol display device 208 disappears, the shutter of the timer advance notice display means 209'opens, and the remaining time is the same as the remaining time set in the counter timer 412 (not shown here). (Here, 20:00) is displayed. The release of "waiting" may be automatically released when the release time comes, or may be released by operating the button A or the button B again.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a) is in the reach state, and the remaining time (here, 25:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 208e. The notice display T is displayed. Then, in the timer advance notice display means 209', the shutter is opened and the character "chance" is displayed. As described above, the timer advance notice display means 209'can display a display other than the display indicating the remaining period. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 51 (a) has developed into a super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the timer notice display T disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208, and instead, the remaining time (here, 20:00 seconds) of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is set to the timer notice display means 209'. Is displayed in. By doing so, a part of the super reach effect executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is not overlapped by the timer notice display T, and on the other hand, the remaining time of the timer notice can be clearly displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 51 (A), the remaining time of the counter timer 412 (not shown) is displayed on the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and also on the timer notice display means 209'. However, while the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays 25:00 seconds, the timer notice display means 209'displays 24:95 seconds, both of which are not shown, the counter timer 412. Although it should display the remaining time of, there is a slight difference. This is because the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer advance notice display means 209'are different devices, so that some time lag occurs in the display control or the like, and this is a difference caused by this time lag. A difference may be intentionally generated between the timer notice display T of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer notice display means 209'as part of the effect.

Although the timer notice display means 209'is used here, the second display means 209 capable of operating (elevating) as shown in FIG. 33 may be used instead of the timer notice display means 209'. The second display means 209 may always operate (elevate), may not operate (elevate), may operate in addition to the elevating operation, or perform only the elevating operation. It may be a thing.

In the above description,
"The second operating means [for example, chance button 136, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, timer notice display means 209', etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is the first notice display [for example, timer notice display T, etc.].
The third display is a display according to the operation timing of the second operating means [for example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e), 25:00 shown in FIG. 45 (A), and FIG. 50 (B). ) And the image C1 of the cut-in notice displayed in black letters and the chance shown in FIG. 50 (a) and the image C of the cut-in notice of the special aspect displayed in gray letters]. Is a display,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The third display indicates the operation timing of the second operating means [for example, whether the remaining time is equal to or less than the first remaining time and whether the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 50 matches. Display mode according to [whether or not] [For example, 20:00 shown in FIG. 45 (e), non-display shown in FIG. 45 (a), chance shown in FIG. 50 (B), and cut-in notice displayed in black letters. The display may be started with the image C1 and the chance shown in FIG. 50 (a) and the image C of the cut-in notice of the special aspect displayed in gray letters].

Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, may not display the displays, may display other than the plurality of types of displays, or may display a plurality of types of displays. It may display only.

Also,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the fourth display.
The fourth display is a display prompting the operation of the second operating means [for example, a normal display 136N of the operation promotion notification].
When the display of the third display is started by operating the second operating means [for example, when the operation is within the operation valid period] and when it is not started [for example, the operation valid period]. In the case of an operation before or after the operation validity period has passed, etc.]
In the second case, the fourth display is a display that is not displayed between the time when the second operating means is operated and the time when the display of the third display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The fourth display may be a display that is not displayed in the second case.

Also,
"The first notice display is a timer notice display,
The timer notice is a notice including a display [for example, timer notice display T or the like] indicating the first remaining time [for example, the remaining time of the counter timer 412 or the like].
After the first remaining time becomes zero, the advance notice effect [for example, the normal advance notice effect in which the display mode of the variable icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) changes to the display mode of the princess's face, or FIG. 46 (g)). The display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in the above changes to the display mode of the face of the lord, etc.] is configured to start.
The above-mentioned "display according to the operation timing of the second operating means" is a display indicating the first remaining time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first remaining time may be the remaining time until the advance notice effect is started.

Also,
"The advance notice effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display that is performed when the display of the third display is started [for example, the display mode of the variation icon c shown in FIG. 45 (h) is the display of the princess's face. It is a production of [normal notice etc. that changes to the mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

More specifically, as the advance notice production, it is suggested that the so-called pseudo-continuous production, the second reach production developed from the first reach production [for example, super reach production, etc.], and the improvement of the expectation of the jackpot in the reach production are improved. Examples include effects to be performed [for example, changes in the character color of the title and dialogue] and cut-in effects [for example, cut-in effects immediately before the symbol is stopped].

Also,
"The display of one of the plurality of types of display is the fifth display.
The fifth display is the display of the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display indicating the number of holds depending on the number of the hold icons to be displayed.
The advance notice effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the look-ahead notice [for example, the look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 46 (g) changes to the display mode of the face of the lord. Notice production, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, the display means may always display the display indicating the number of holds, may not display, may display other than the number of holds, and may display only the number of holds. It may be something to do.

Also,
"When the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the hold icons representing the number of holds before the increase is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. [For example, a change in the display mode of the second hold icon shown in FIG. 46 (h), etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

If a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plurality of hold icons") are displayed at the time when the display of the third display is started, one of the plurality of hold icons or one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed. The display mode of the plurality of hold icons may change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

Also,
"When the number of holds increases during the display of the third display, the display mode of one or more of the hold icons representing the number of holds after the increase is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. May change to
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

If a plurality of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plurality of hold icons") are displayed at the time when the advance notice effect is started, one or a plurality of hold icons among the plurality of hold icons is displayed. The display mode of the above may be changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [for example, the time display T1 shown in FIG. 48].
The sixth display includes a display indicating a second remaining time different from the display indicating the first remaining time [for example, 25:00 seconds at the timing of FIG. 48 (b)] [for example, At the timing of FIG. 48 (b), it is 5:00 seconds].
The third display is a display that may be displayed together with the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third display may be a display that is always displayed together with the sixth display.

Also,
"A counting means [for example, a counter timer 412, etc.] is provided.
The display representing the first remaining time is a display corresponding to the count value of the counting means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

It should be noted that a symbol display means [for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display, a first control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.], and a second The second control means is a control means capable of executing control according to a command from the first control means, and includes the control means [for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the like]. The first control means is a control means capable of controlling the symbol display means [for example, a control means for executing a special figure state update process], and the second control means is a control of the display means [for example, , Production control processing, etc.], and the second control means may be a means provided with the counting means. Further, the second control means may be a control means composed of a plurality of control means [for example, the basic circuit 402 and the VDP 434 and the VRAM 436].

It should be noted that the symbol display means may be a means for always displaying the symbol variation display, a means for displaying the symbol variation display, or a means for executing other than the symbol variation display. Alternatively, only the symbol variation display may be executed. Further, the second control means may be a means that always executes control according to a command from the first control means, or may be a means that may execute the control. It may execute the control other than the control according to the command from the first control means, or may execute only the control according to the command from the first control means.

Also,
"The third display is the third when the operation timing of the second operating means coincides with the first timing [for example, the timing of the mark JI in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 50]. It is a display in which the display is started in the display mode [for example, the special mode displayed in gray letters and the chance shown in FIG. 50 (a)].
When the operation timing of the second operating means does not match the first timing, the third display is displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the chance shown in FIG. 50 (B) and black characters. It is a display that starts to be displayed with [Image C1 etc. of the cut-in notice].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A third operating means [for example, button B (operation button 137') shown in FIG. 50 (A), etc.] is provided.
The third display is a display in which the display may be started even when the third operating means is operated [for example, a special mode in which a princess character is displayed as shown in FIG. 50 (i)). Display of image C3 of the cut-in notice of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"A third display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing variable display of a decorative pattern is provided.
The display means [for example, timer notice display means 209'etc.] is a means separate from the third display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The third display means may or may not always execute the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may execute other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Only the variable display of the decorative symbol may be executed.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Finally, an example will be described in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons start to change.

FIG. 52 is a diagram stepwise showing a state of variable display of the decorative symbol in which the animation of the hold icon is executed.

In FIG. 52 (a), both the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 display (confirmed display) the lost stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has a disjointed pattern. "Decoration 3"-"Decoration 4"-"Decoration 1" is displayed. Further, both the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are displayed in white while stopped. Three first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (a) are lit, and three black circle hold icons, which are hold displays of special figure 1, are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

FIG. 52B shows a state immediately after the first special symbol display device 212 starts the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the update (variable display) of the decorative symbol is continuously started in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. While only two of the first special symbol hold lamps 218 shown in FIG. 52 (b) are lit, the hold icon display area 208f in the decorative symbol display device 208 has three hold icons (hold icons). h1 to h3) are displayed, and the variable icon is not yet displayed in the variable icon display area 208e. This is the result of the time lag caused by the fact that the fluctuation has just started. Further, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display has changed to the changing display (gray).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (c), the movement animation of the hold icon is started. The movement animation here is an animation in which the hold icon moves diagonally to the upper left and then diagonally to the lower right, and the hold icon, which has been the first hold icon h1 until now, moves toward the variable icon display area 208e. The hold icon that has been moved and was the second hold icon h2 moves toward the position where the first hold icon h1 was displayed, and the hold icon that was the third hold icon h3 until now is the second. Move toward the position where the hold icon h2 was displayed.

In FIG. 52 (d), the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Further, only two hold icons (hold icons h1 and h2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f.

Here, one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, the number of holdings of special drawing 1 is increased by one, and the number of holding lamps 218 of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 52 (e) is increased by one to 3. It is lit individually. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the increase animation of the hold icon is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (e), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi is beginning to be seen from the bottom of the display screen.

Also in FIG. 52 (f), the increase animation of the hold icon continues, the increase hold icon hi is about to reach the position where the third hold icon h3 is displayed, and in FIG. 52 (g), the increase of the hold icon The animation is finished, and the black circle third hold icon h3 is displayed.

In FIG. 52 (h), the lost stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212, and the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1, which is a round display, changes to a stopped display (white). doing. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 52 (h), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, but the variable icon display area is displayed. The variable icon c still remains in 208e. In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 52 (i), the definite display of the lost stop symbol is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is also performed. The combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is confirmed and displayed, and the variable icon c also disappears.

In FIGS. 52 (j) to 52 (l), the symbol variation display of the following special figure 1 is performed, in the figure (m), a stop display is performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (n). Then, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 4"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed.

From FIG. 52A to FIG. 52N described above, the stage is a castle town stage, and the background image of the decorative pattern display device 208 is the townscape of the castle town. Here, a stage change occurs. The stage change is started at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure, and at the same time when the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started in the figure (o), the background image is meshed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The background image changes to a background image in which the princess character is displayed in the center of the tonal background image. This background image is a background image dedicated to stage change that does not belong to any stage. When the background image dedicated to the stage change is displayed, the hold icon that was displayed until then, the frame of the variable icon display area 208e, and the variable icon c itself disappear, and the reduced display of the decorative symbol changes in the upper left. At the same time, the fourth symbol 2081 and 2082 are displayed only in the upper right corner. In this state, the player does not know which stage to change to, and the player is interested in paying attention to the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 52 (p), the background image is switched to the dark background image, and the stage change is completed. Here, it means that the castle town stage has been switched to the dark stage. When the stage change is completed, the hold icon, the frame of the variable icon display area 208e, and the display of the variable icon c itself are restored, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is also the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right. This is done in the symbol display area 208c. On the castle town stage, the default display mode is a round hold icon or variable icon, but on the dark stage, the default display mode is a rectangle. In FIG. 52 (p), the black square first hold icon h1 And the same black square variable icon c is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon may change depending on the stage. Further, the decorative design and the fourth design may also be changed according to the stage.

In addition to the castle town stage and the dark stage, the stages described above have multiple stages, and the stage changes according to the control state (for example, probabilistic state / non-probable change state, electric support state / non-electric support state). Is performed, and the stage is changed according to the number of times the symbol variation is displayed.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a simultaneous change of the hold icon while the symbol is stopped.

During the symbol change of the special figure 1, after the movement animation is completed, one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one to three. That is, the third hold has increased here. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is increased by one and three are lit. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, although not shown, the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 53 (b) has three hold icons h1. ~ H3 is displayed. The increased third hold is subject to the look-ahead notice, but is displayed in the default display mode (display mode of black circles) during the symbol change in FIG. 53 (b). Although the increase animation of the hold icon may be omitted in the following figures, the increase animation is executed unless otherwise specified.

In FIG. 53 (c), the stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. (D) to (f), the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" are lost. The combination of is confirmed and displayed. During this confirmation display, the effect of the pre-reading notice of the third hold (corresponding to an example of the first effect display) increased during the symbol variation display is executed. In this effect, the display mode changes along with the increased third hold icon h3 and the hold icons (first hold icon h1, second hold icon h2) displayed when the third hold increases. The first hold icon h1, the second hold icon h2, and the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 53 (d) are all display modes of black circles (default display mode), but in FIG. 53 (e), The effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, the effect display e4 overlaps with these three hold icons h1 to h3, and the three hold icons h1 to h3 become invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, as shown in FIG. 53 (f), all three hold icons h1 to h3 are changed to the display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) of the face of the lord. Here, the changes in the display mode are simultaneous and the changes in the same display mode, but they may be changed one by one in order or may be changed to different display modes (hereinafter). The same applies to the simultaneous changes described).

In FIG. 53 (g), the symbol variation display of the next special figure 1 is started, and in FIG. 53 (h), the hold icon of the display mode of the face of the lord has started the movement animation, and the figure (i) Then, the movement of the hold icon is completed, and the change icon c of the display mode of the face of the lord is displayed in the change icon display area 208e, which is the same as the hold icon. Further, in the hold icon display area 208f, two hold icons h1 and h2 of the display mode of the face of the lord are displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the movement animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period, and when there is a hold increase in this first period, the hold increases. Within one period, a simultaneous change effect of the display mode of the hold icon (hereinafter referred to as a simultaneous change effect) is performed. On the other hand, when there is no hold increase in this first period and there is a hold increase in the second period after the end of the first period (the period from FIG. 53 (a) to immediately before FIG. 53 (c)). Is not performed in the second period during the symbol change, but is performed in the period during the final display (FIGS. 53 (d) to (f)). The end of the first period may be the beginning of the second period.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a simultaneous change of the hold icon when there is a hold increase while the symbol is stopped.

In FIG. 54 (c), the stop display is performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. (D) to (f), the decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" are lost. The combination of is confirmed and displayed. In addition, since the confirmation display is also displayed during the stop display, in the following description, the confirmation display is also referred to as a stop display. During this stop display, one ball is won at the first special drawing start port 230, and the number of reservations of special drawing 1 is increased by one to three. That is, the third hold has increased here as well. The first special symbol holding lamp 218 shown in FIG. 53 (f) is increased by one and three are lit. The third hold that has increased here is also subject to pre-reading notice. When the hold is increased during the stop display, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not execute the hold icon increase animation described with reference to FIG. 52. That is, the execution of the augmentation animation has been cancelled. However, only a part of the augmentation animation may be executed, or the whole may be executed.

In FIG. 54 (f), the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f, and the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to see. That is, the effect display e4 overlaps with the first hold icon h1 and the second hold icon h2 that have been displayed so far in the black circle display mode (default display mode), and includes the two hold icons h1 and h2. It becomes invisible for a moment. When the effect display e4 disappears, the third hold icon h3 increases, as shown in FIG. 54 (g). The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is a display mode of the face of the lord (display mode of the look-ahead notice). In addition, both the display mode of the first hold icon h1 and the display mode of the second hold icon h2, which have been the display modes of black circles (default display mode), are the display modes of the face of the lord (pre-reading notice display mode). Is changing at the same time. That is, all three hold icons h1 to h3 including the increased third hold icon h3 are displayed in the display mode (pre-reading notice display mode) of the face of the lord. In FIG. 54 (g), the symbol variation display is started, and the following description is omitted because it is the same as the example in FIG. 53.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, the hold is increased while the symbol is stopped, and the simultaneous change effect using the effect display e4 is executed before the increased hold icon is displayed. That is, the simultaneous change effect is executed immediately after the hold increase or with the hold increase.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a simultaneous change of the hold icon when the hold is increased by two during the symbol change.

The symbols from FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c) are changing, and among these, one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230 at the timing of FIG. 55 (b) after the movement animation ends. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is increased by one to three. That is, here, the third hold has increased, and this third hold becomes the target of the look-ahead notice as a result of the lottery for whether or not the look-ahead notice can be executed in the first sub-control unit 400. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (b) is increased by one and three are lit, and the third hold icon h3 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased to three hold icons. h1 to h3 are displayed. Further, even at the timing of FIG. 55 (c) thereafter, one ball is won at the first special drawing start port 230, and the number of reservations of special drawing 1 is further increased by one to four (full tank). That is, although the fourth hold has increased here, as a result of the lottery for whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed in the first sub-control unit 400, the fourth hold is not subject to the pre-reading notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 55 (c) is increased by one to four lights, and the fourth hold icon h4 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increased to four hold icons. h1 to h4 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 55 (d) to 55 (g), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 2"-"decoration 1"-"decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. During this stop display, the simultaneous change effect is executed as the effect of the pre-reading notice of the third hold that increased during the symbol change display, and the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f as shown in FIG. 55 (f). After the entire hold icon display area 208f becomes difficult to see, the effect display e4 disappears and the hold icon display resumes, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 55 (g), along with the third hold icon h3 to be read ahead, the hold icons (first hold icon h1, second hold) that were already displayed when the third hold increased. The icon h2) has also changed to the display mode of the face of the lord (display mode of the look-ahead notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold that increased after the third hold increased is displayed. The mode has not changed, and the display mode of the black circle (default display mode) remains. In this way, even if it is called a simultaneous change effect, not all of the displayed hold icons always change.

Also in this example, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the movement animation of the hold icon corresponds to an example of the first period, and if there is a hold increase in this first period, the first Simultaneous change production will be performed within the period. On the other hand, when there is no hold increase in this first period and there is a hold increase in the second period (the period from FIG. 55 (a) to immediately before FIG. (D)) after the end of the first period. Is not performed in the second period during the symbol change, but is performed in the period during the stop display (FIGS. 55 (d) to (g)).

In addition, the period of the first half from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the period before the start of the reach effect) is set as the first period, and the period of the latter half until the end of the variable display (for example, the first period). The second half of the period following) may be the second period. The end of the first period may be the beginning of the second period.

Further, the first period may be a period from the start of display of the variable display to the display of the variable icon, that is, the period from the start of the display of the variable display to the movement of the first hold icon h1 to the variable icon display area 208e. It may be a period until one of the plurality of decorative symbols temporarily stops (so-called first stop, or the first temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous production), or a combination of decorative symbols from the start of display of the variable display. May be the period until is in the reach state. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples for the first period listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. You may.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a simultaneous change of the hold icons when the number of holds increases by two while the symbol is stopped.

From FIG. 56 (c) to FIG. 56 (g), the symbols are stopped, and among these, one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230 at the timing of FIG. 56 (f), and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is held. Increases by 1 to 3. That is, here, the third hold has increased, and this third hold is subject to the look-ahead notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (f) is increased by one and three are lit. However, the effect display e4 appears in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon is displayed. The entire display area 208f is difficult to see. The increase animation of the hold icon due to the increase of the third hold has been cancelled.

Further, even at the timing of FIG. 56 (g), one ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figures 1 is further increased by one to four (full tank). That is, the fourth hold is increased during the execution of the simultaneous change effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, but this fourth hold is not subject to the look-ahead notice. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 shown in FIG. 56 (g) is increased by one and four lights are lit. However, the effect display e4 is continuously displayed in the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is held. The entire icon display area 208f is still difficult to see. The animation of the increase of the hold icon due to the increase of the fourth hold has also been cancelled.

In FIG. 56 (h), the effect display e4 disappears and the hold icon display resumes. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 56 (h), the third hold icon h3 to be pre-read notice is displayed in the display mode of the face of the lord (pre-read notice display mode), and the first hold icon h1 and the second hold are held. The icon h2 has also changed to the display mode of the face of the lord (the display mode of the look-ahead notice), but the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold that increased after the third hold increased has a black circle display mode. (Default display mode) is displayed. In this way, if the hold increases while the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately started as the look-ahead notice effect, but if the hold increases during the execution of this simultaneous change effect, the hold is increased. The increase is excluded, and the hold icons before the simultaneous change effect is executed are changed all at once. While the symbol is stopped, the simultaneous change effect is immediately executed when the hold of the special figure increases, but even if the fourth hold increases before the start of the simultaneous change effect, the third hold is a look-ahead notice. If it is a target, the fourth hold icon h4 corresponding to the fourth hold is not displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode. If the fourth hold is the target of the look-ahead notice, both the third hold icon h3 and the fourth hold icon h4 will be displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode.

As described above, in both FIG. 56 (f) and FIG. 56 (g), the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, but the hold increase after the start of the simultaneous change effect, which is the look-ahead notice effect, is reserved. You may perform an icon augmentation animation. In FIG. 56 (f'), as in FIG. 56 (f), the effect display e4 appears due to the start of the simultaneous change effect accompanying the third hold being targeted for the look-ahead notice, and the entire hold icon display area 208f is covered. It is difficult to see. In this state, there is an increase in the fourth hold, but since it is after the start of the simultaneous change effect, the increase animation of the hold icon is started. In FIG. 56 (g1'), the upper end portion of the increase hold icon hi begins to be visible from the bottom of the display screen. Since the layer on which the increase hold icon hi is displayed is behind the layer on which the effect display e4 is displayed, the increase hold icon hi is overlapped by the effect display e4. In the figure (g2') following FIG. 56 (g1'), the increase hold icon hi of the display mode of the black circle, which is partially hidden by the effect display e4, is shown.

As an animation of increasing the number of hold icons accompanying the increase of the third hold, the increase hold icon hi of the display mode of the face of the lord (display mode of the look-ahead notice) may appear together with the effect display e4.

Next, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon in the winning order variable machine will be described.

The explanation so far has been the explanation in the special figure 2 priority change. That is, it was an explanation about the pending increase of the special figure 1 in the case where the symbol change of the special figure 2 is given priority. It should be noted that the same applies to the pending increase in Special Figure 2.

Here, regarding the case of a winning order variable machine that starts the symbol variation display from the one whose winning timing is earlier than the winning of the first special figure starting port 230 and the winning of the second special drawing starting port 232. explain.

FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the variation in the winning order.

In the hold icon display area 208f of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57, eight hold icons including four hold icons of special figure 1 and four hold icons of special figure 2 can be displayed. Further, the variable icon display area 208e is provided in the lower left corner.

In FIG. 57A, six hold icons h1 to h6 are displayed. All of these six hold icons h1 to h6 are display modes of black circles (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the six hold icons h1 to h6 and the first hold icon h1 is the hold shown in FIG.

In FIG. 57 (b), the hold of the special figure 2 increases during the symbol change, and the seventh hold icon h7 is added to the hold icon display area 208f. Here, too, an increase animation similar to the increase animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 is executed, but the illustration is omitted. Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the symbol is stopped (FIGS. 57 (c) to (d)). In this example, the lottery for whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice for the 7th hold is lost, and the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started.

Next, the hold of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 57 (e), the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is started. The device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started, and in FIG. 57 (g), the movement of the hold icon is started. Is completed, and the variable icon c having the same display mode as the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 208e.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a simultaneous change of the hold icons when the hold increases due to the change in the winning order.

In FIG. 58 (a), seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed. All of these seven hold icons h1 to h7 are display modes of black circles (default display mode). Further, the hold corresponding to the seven hold icons h1 to h7 and the first hold icon h1 is the hold shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 58A is a state after the end of the movement animation.

In FIG. 58 (b), the hold of the special figure 2 increased during the symbol change after the end of the movement animation, the hold icon display area 208f was added with the eighth hold icon h8, and the hold was full. As a result, a full tank display F called Hold MAX is also made. In this example, the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery for the eighth hold is won, and the hold icon simultaneous change effect is executed after that.

Eventually, the symbol variation ends and the stop display is displayed (FIGS. 58 (c) to 58 (d)). In this example, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is not started during the stop display.

Next, the hold of the special figure 2 corresponding to the first hold icon h1 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the symbol change display of the special figure is started in the second special figure display device 214, and the decorative symbol display is started. The device 208 also starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 58 (f), a movement animation similar to the movement animation of the hold icon described with reference to FIG. 52 (c) is started, and in FIG. 58 (g), the movement of the hold icon is started. Is completed, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area 208f, and the change icon c is displayed in the change icon display area 208e. Regardless of whether the seven hold icons h1 to h7 or the variable icon c, the display mode is a black circle display mode (default display mode).

When the movement of the hold icon is completed, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started. That is, the simultaneous change effect is started at the end of the movement animation of the hold icon. The effect display e5 also appears in this simultaneous change effect, but the effect display e5 here is a display that overlaps the variable icon display area 208e together with the hold icon display area 208f, as shown in FIG. 58 (h). Yes, in addition to the seven hold icons h1 to h7, the variable icon c also becomes difficult to see. The effect display e5 shown in FIG. 58 (h) does not overlap the position where the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, but may overlap to this position. Further, the effect display may not overlap with the variable icon display area 208e.

In FIG. 58 (i), the effect display e5 disappears, the hold icon becomes visible, and the variable icon c also becomes visible. The simultaneous change effect here was a look-ahead notice for the eighth hold when the hold increased (Fig. 58 (b)), but because one hold was exhausted, the eighth hold was the seventh. It is on hold, and the eighth hold icon h8 is not displayed in the first place. Therefore, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variable icon c are displayed, and the display modes of all the displayed icons are changed. Moreover, in the simultaneous change effect here, the display mode is not changed to one type in common, but is changed to a plurality of types of display modes. In addition, the display mode of all the hold icons that have changed all at once may be different.

Further, the simultaneous change effect may be executed at the timing when the movement animation of the hold icon is executed. FIG. 58 (d') is in the same stop display as in FIG. 58 (d), and in FIG. 58 (e'), the symbol variation display of the special figure is started and the decorative symbol is displayed as in FIG. 58 (e). The variable display of the decorative symbol is also started in the device 208. In the previous example, the movement animation of the hold icon was started immediately after this, but in this example, the effect display e5 appears at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Simultaneous change production has started. In FIG. 58 (f'), the effect display e5 disappears, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variable icon c are displayed, and all of them are displayed. FIG. 59, in which the display mode of the icon is changed, is a diagram showing an example when the hold is increased during the stop display and the hold is full due to the change in the winning order.

The stop display is performed from FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (b), and one ball is won at the first special figure start port 230 at the timing between the figure (a) and the figure (b). The number of holds in FIG. 1 is increased by one, and the number of holds is eight (full tank). Regarding the increase in hold during the stop display, the increase animation of the hold icon is canceled, and as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the hold icon is increased. The first special symbol hold lamp 218 is increased by one and four lights are lit, and the eighth hold icon h8 in the black circle display mode (default display mode) is increasing. In this way, the hold is held during the stop display. When the number is increased and the hold is full, the full tank display F described with reference to FIG. 58 is not displayed. That is, the full tank display F is displayed only during the symbol change. This is the period length of the stop display. Is short and is due to the inability to display the full tank display F for a certain period of time. Thus, the next symbol variation display is started without the full tank display F being displayed (see FIG. 59 (c)). Although not shown, the movement animation of the hold icon is executed, and then the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon is started, the effect display e5 appears (see FIG. 59 (d)), and the effect is shown in the figure (e). The display e5 disappears, the seventh hold icon h7, the first hold icon h1 to the sixth hold icon h6, and the variable icon c are redisplayed, and the display mode of all the redisplayed icons changes. There is.

Even for a short time, the full tank display F may be displayed during the stop display. Also, the moving animation of the hold icon may be omitted. Further, the simultaneous change effect of the hold icon may not be started unless the hold is increased during the symbol change or the hold is not full.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example in which the simultaneous change effect is not executed or is performed depending on the type of the displayed hold icon.

In the example shown on the left side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60B, the second hold icon h2 changes to the hold icon in the display mode (second display mode) of the character “heat”. This display mode (second display mode) may be a look-ahead notice display mode having the highest reliability (expected jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are not displayed at the same time. , It may be a rare display mode having the lowest appearance rate. It should be noted that only one of a plurality of types of examples of the second display mode listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be applied. Even if the number of holds increases while the hold icon in such a display mode is displayed, the simultaneous change effect is not executed.

On the other hand, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 60, in FIG. 60B, the second hold icon h2 changes to the hold icon in the shining display mode (first display mode). This display mode (first display mode) may be a look-ahead notice display mode having the lowest reliability (expected jackpot), or may be a display mode in which two or more are displayed at the same time. , The display mode may have the next highest appearance rate after the default display mode. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the first display mode listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be applied. When the hold is increased while the hold icon in such a display mode is displayed (see the third hold icon h3 in FIG. 60 (C)), if the increased hold is subject to the look-ahead notice, it changes all at once. The effect is executed (see FIG. 60 (E)).

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a simultaneous change effect when the tank is full on hold due to the change in the winning order.

The third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61A has changed to the display mode of the character of the Bancho. The display mode of the third hold icon h3 is changed by an effect different from the simultaneous change effect. For example, there is a case where the character of the Bancho appears from the beginning at the time of winning, or a case where only this hold icon changes to the display mode of the character of the Bancho at the start of the next fluctuation. In FIG. 61 (d), the eighth hold icon h8 increases during the symbol change, and the hold is full. When the hold is full during the symbol change, the full tank display F is displayed from the time when the full tank is filled to the stop display of the symbol change display currently being performed (FIGS. 61 (c) to (d)). Is displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the full tank display F disappears when the final display is reached. Then, even when the display mode of the hold icon is changed by another effect, when the hold is full, after the movement animation of the hold icon in the next fluctuation (see FIG. 61 (g)) is completed, the figure is shown. As shown in 61 (i), the simultaneous change effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 61 (j), the display modes of all the icons of the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon c are changed. .. In this example, regardless of the display mode of the hold icon as described with reference to FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (e), the simultaneous change effect is executed according to the hold full tank. .. Therefore, here, the third hold icon h3 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is the display mode of the character of the bancho, but even in the display mode of the character “heat” shown in FIG. 60 (b). When the hold is full, the simultaneous change effect will be executed. However, even if the hold is full, if the hold icon of the display mode (second display mode) of the characters "heat" is displayed, the simultaneous change effect may not be executed.

In FIG. 61 (A), the display mode of all the hold icons h1 to the 7th hold icon h7 has already been changed to the display mode of the face of the lord by the simultaneous change effect. Even in this case, the full tank display F is displayed when the pending full tank is reached during the symbol change. Then, even after the simultaneous change effect has already been executed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again in response to the pending full tank (see FIG. 61 (C)). That is, if the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by the simultaneous change effect is fully filled before all the hold icons are consumed, the simultaneous change effect is executed again.

The example of the winning order variable machine described with reference to FIGS. 58, 59, and 61 can be applied even in the case of the special figure 2 priority variable machine and the alternating variable machine when the hold is full. This is an example.

In the above description,
"A game table equipped with an effect display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold icons according to the number of holds.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern [for example, immediately before FIGS. 52 (b) to 52 (h)].
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the multiple types of effect display is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change.
The first effect display may be started in the first period of the variation display [for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the end of the movement animation of the hold icon]. Yes,
If the first effect display is not started in the first period of the variation display, the second period of the variation display [for example, from FIG. 53 (a) to immediately before FIG. 53 (c)). The period, the period from FIG. 55 (a) to immediately before FIG. 55 (d)] is also configured so that the first effect display is not started to be displayed.
The second period is the period after the first period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

The "effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change" may be an effect display in which the display modes of all the plurality of hold icons change all at once, or the effect display changes one by one. It may be, or it may be an effect display that changes one by one. It should be noted that only one of the plurality of types of examples of the effect display listed here may be applied, a plurality of types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. May be good.

Further, for example, when the number of holds increases during the first period, the first effect display may start to be displayed during the first period. Further, when the hold is increased during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first effect display is started to be displayed in the first period of the variable display that is started following the stop display of the decorative symbol. May occur.

Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of hold icons, a means for displaying a plurality of hold icons, or a means for displaying other than the plurality of hold icons. Alternatively, only a plurality of hold icons may be displayed.

Also,
"The first period is a period in which the start time is the start time of the variation display [for example, the period of the first half including FIG. 52 (b)].
The second period is a period in which the end time is the end time of the variation display [for example, the period of the latter half until immediately before FIG. 52 (h)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, if the first effect display is not started at the start of the display of the variation display, the first effect display is not started during the display of the variation display. That is, the first effect display is started to be displayed only at the start of fluctuation among the display of the fluctuation display.

Also,
"The end of the first period is the beginning of the second period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the stop display of the decorative pattern.
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display is started during the display of the stop display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e), the case shown in FIG. 55 (f), etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

For example, if the number of holds increases during the display of the stop display, the first effect display may start to be displayed during the display of the stop display. Further, even when the hold is increased during the display of the variable display before the stop display, the first effect display may be started to be displayed during the display of the stop display.

Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the stop display of the decorative symbol, a means that may display the stop display, or a means other than the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be a means, or it may be a means for displaying only the stop display of the decorative symbol.

Also,
"The first effect display is when the number of holds increases during the display of the variation display and the display is started after the variation display [for example, the case shown in FIG. 53 (e) or FIG. 55 ( When shown in f), etc.] is an effect display,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The first effect display is the first period in the variation display that is started after the variation display in which the number of reservations is increased (hereinafter, referred to as" first variation display ") [for example, FIG. 58. It is an effect display that may be started to be displayed in the first half period including (h)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first effect display may be an effect display that is always started to be displayed during the first period in the variation display that is started after the first variation display.

Also,
"The number of the plurality of hold icons whose display mode is changed by the first effect display is the number before the increase of the hold number increased during the display of the first variable display [for example, shown in FIG. 55. Example]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"One of the plurality of types of effect display is the second effect display.
The second effect display is a movement animation of the hold icon [for example, an animation shown in FIG. 52 (k)].
The moving animation is an animation whose display is completed before the second period is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Also,
"The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in the first display mode [for example, the shining display mode of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (B)].
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the character "heat" of the second hold icon h2 shown in FIG. 60 (b)].
Even if the hold icon of the first display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the first effect display is started to be displayed during the first period.
When even one of the hold icons of the second display mode is included in the plurality of hold icons, the display of the first effect display is not started even during the first period. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first display mode is a look-ahead notice display mode, and the second display mode may be a look-ahead notice display mode, the first display mode and the second display mode. The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different from that of the above, and the second display mode may be a display mode in which the jackpot reliability (expectation) is higher than that of the first display mode. On the contrary, the display mode may be low.

Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the first display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon in the first display mode. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or it may be a means for displaying the hold icon only in the first display mode.

Further, the effect display means may be a means for always displaying the hold icon in the second display mode, a means for displaying the hold icon, or a means for displaying the hold icon in the second display mode. It may be a means for displaying other than the display mode, or it may be a means for displaying the hold icon only in the second display mode.

Also,
"The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it should be noted
"A game table equipped with an effect display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold icons according to the number of holds.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the multiple types of effect display is the first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started in the first period [for example, the period from the start of the symbol change to the end of the movement animation of the hold icon].
When the first effect display is not started in the first period, the second period [for example, the period from FIG. 53 (a) to immediately before FIG. 53 (c), FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (a) to The period up to immediately before (d) in the figure] is also configured so that the first effect display does not start to be displayed.
The second period is the period after the first period,
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

further,
"It is a game table equipped with a directing display means,
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of hold icons.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the number of hold icons according to the number of holds.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a stop display of a decorative pattern.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display in which the display modes of the plurality of hold icons change.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display.
The first effect display is an effect display that may not be started during the execution of the variable display.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

The first effect display may be an effect display that is always displayed during the execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display may be an effect display that is not always started to be displayed during the execution of the variable display.

further,
"The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display if the hold is increased during the execution of the stop display.
The first effect display is an effect display that may be started during the execution of the stop display displayed next to the variation display if the hold is increased during the execution of the variation display.
A game table characterized by that. "
Was also explained.

It should be noted that the first effect display may be an effect display that is always started to be displayed during the execution of the stop display when the hold is increased during the execution of the stop display. Further, the first effect display is an effect display that is always started to be displayed during the execution of the stop display displayed next to the variation display when the hold increases during the execution of the variation display. May be good.

9 to 61 described above may be an example in one pachinko machine, or may be an example executed by different pachinko machines.

FIG. 62 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 62, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

FIG. 63 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 63), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame member to form each reel 1010 to 1012. .. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a backlight (not shown in FIG. 63) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 1031 is pressed, and two are inserted when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are to be thrown in. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal slot 1034 is a slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medals can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion port 1034, and the insertion means that both are included. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1034 or the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed in which a lottery is performed to determine which of the plurality of types of combinations is won, and the slot machine 1000 is operated. It is decided whether to make the state relatively advantageous or relatively disadvantageous to the player.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002. The effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 composed of two right doors 1063a and a left door 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and the left door 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). It has a structure that appears on the side). Even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information, and may include, for example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. It may be a display device or the like. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but it may be a square flat surface. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. Further, the display screen may have a curved surface.

In the slot machine 1000 described above, the operation means include the bet button 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop button 1037 to 1039, and the like, as well as the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And the effect button 1091 (an example of the second operating means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 63, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device or the like can be projected toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 63 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, a pushing operation can be performed, and the display panel 1070 functions as an operating means (button) in the same manner as the transparent portion 191 and is an example of the operating means (for example, the first). It corresponds to an example of one operating means) and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, each button of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game consoles that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 200. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 64 to 200 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 64 to 200, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 200, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 64 to 200 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 has been opened is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 66) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that instructs the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store to lend the ball, and the card unit that instructs the card unit to return the balance of the player. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the gaming area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 64, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

FIG. 65 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 64 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 67) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 67). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error canceling switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 67) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball (FIG. 67). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 67), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

FIG. 66 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 65 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the normal figure start port 228. That is, the second special figure start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special figure start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). A variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 66, as long as the variable winning opening is one that wins the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate a human right arm and a forearm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a translucent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 64, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 66, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 67. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. It is equipped with a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit shall have two counters built-in), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and an opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the normal symbol display device 210. Display control of the drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, the normal drawing hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing the operation, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the start port 232 of the special figure 2 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234. , Are connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number value generation circuit 318 also latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the machine.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that a signal can be transmitted, it is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the sensor 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamps 138). Output from the drive circuit 432 for driving control of the shielding device 246, the shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, the chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be adjusted, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors are output to the basic circuit 402. VDP (video) that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. -Display processor) 434 and is connected.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518, a sensor circuit 518 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the circuit 540, the game board lamp drive circuit 530, and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. The ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is open and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 68A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 68A shows nine types of special figures, from “special figure A” to “special figure I”. In FIG. 68A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as stop symbols for the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, which is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in one round, but not in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, four of the 15 rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds. It is a symbol, and is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, in which the acquisition of balls cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the subsequent big hit game, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum for each operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this is done, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 68 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 68 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 68 (b), six types of special figures "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 68 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns with the same number other than "3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.), which is a decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 68 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal drawing display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 68 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 for storing the reserved number of special figures may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for the special figure stores a plurality of types of start information as one set, and stores the start information in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 69 according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 65 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 65 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 70. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 67 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 67 stores prize determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the start port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the subsequent processing associated with winning the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read out, add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 67 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 68 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 68 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 68 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. The door member is attached to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of Special Figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. (Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command that includes information indicating a number, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 69 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, pre-determines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and pre-determines the stop symbol (special figure). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (c)) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 71, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 72A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (a), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (a), "special figure I" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Off) is remembered.

FIG. 72B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 72 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 72 (c) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 72 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and the pre-reading result. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, refer to FIG. 73 for the hit / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 70. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 73 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability table for winning / failing, and FIG. 73 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability table for winning / failing. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 73 (a) is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 73 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, in the case of the special figure high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 73 (a) is referred to, and the special figure low probability state is obtained. In this case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 73 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 73 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is out of order, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 73 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 70. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 74. Here, FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 74 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 74 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 75A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 75A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 75B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 75C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S603, which is next to step S601, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value for other effects is updated. And so on.

FIG. 75 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP434 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. If not (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S705, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP434 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 of FIG. 76A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. .. In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S809 following step S807, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 and effect data by the lamp) corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S811 following step S809, the lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S813 following step S811, the movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. After that, the process returns to step S803.

FIG. 76B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 76 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 77 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 77, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a general drawing are shown. Hold lamp 216 is shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (a), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, the default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the symbol changing notification area of the normal symbol and the symbol changing notification area of the special figure 1. , It becomes the notification area during the symbol change of the special figure 2. While the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the quadrangle figure is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is changing, the quadrangle figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the round figure is lit and displayed, but while the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the round figure is blinking or turned off. The triangular figure is lit and displayed while the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, but the triangular figure is blinked or turned off while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing. As described above, not only the display position of the fourth symbol is different, but also the display mode (here, the shape) is different, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special drawing 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

The hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. .. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 in addition to the number of lighting of special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is the number of lighting of special drawing 2 holding lamp 220. In addition, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, the hold icon on the right side becomes the old hold icon, and in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons are displayed vertically. , The lower the hold icon, the older the hold icon.

In FIG. 77A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both displayed. , It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 77 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. ..

On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 77 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. The hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the hold icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display the line defining the area, but in FIG. 77 (a), the area is shown. Is shown by a dotted line for the sake of clarity. A line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the hold icon display area of the other special figure is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of special figure 2 is displayed. The area 282 is displayed at the right end. When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is displayed at the right end.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and not only the display position is different from that of the hold icon of the special figure 1, but also the display mode ( The shape) is also different here, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → blinking start or turn off of the fourth symbol → movement animation start or erase of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol. However, this order may change.

In FIG. 77 (b), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet.

In FIG. 77 (c), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In the movement animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 77 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 77 (e), the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but it is still displayed at this stage. The variable display of decorative icons has not started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

Then, in FIG. 77 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 77 (g), the operation promotion notification image 136P urging the effect button 136 to be pressed within the valid period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 from which the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variable display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 77 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 77 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, as shown in FIG. 77 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the reach state entry notice image 2071 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. .. In the reach state entry notice image 2071, the characters "It's a chance" are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

In FIG. 77 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 77 (l). Even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, it may not enter the reach state, but it may be made to enter without fail.

As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the symbol variation display currently being performed.

In FIG. 77 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner and reduced to be displayed, and in FIG. 77 (n). , Has developed into Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (n) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (o) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation of the scene is displayed.

It should be noted that the reach state entry notice image 2071 is not limited to the notice of entering the reach state, but may be a notice of development to super reach.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 77 step by step.

In FIG. 78 (p) following from FIG. 77 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 78 (s). In FIG. 78 (s), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 78 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Instead of hiding, a different background image may be displayed. Eventually, as shown in FIG. (U), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a background image different from the conventional one. Further, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 78 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" for which the 15R probability variation jackpot is confirmed is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 78 (v) is lit. In FIG. 78 (v), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 78 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of "probability change big hit" is made together with a background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit.

On the other hand, when a different decorative symbol (substantially 5R probability variation jackpot, 5R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot, and symbol combination) is reached in FIG. 77 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 78 (t). In 78 (u'), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in FIG. 78 (v') following FIG. 78 (u'), "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration" is displayed. The combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "6-Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 78 (w') following FIG. 78 (v'), the characters "big hit" are displayed together with the background image (omitted here) celebrating the big hit as the big hit game start effect.

FIG. 79 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect in another case following FIG. 78 (q).

In FIG. 79 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 77 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 79 (b). In FIG. 79 (b), the hero's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 79 (c), as in FIG. 78 (t), all are temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 79 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is started. Here, the display of the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is restored, and the variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 are displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 79 (e), the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the period of the final display of the special figure 1, the erasure animation of the variable icon h0 is executed in the variable icon display area 280. In the figure (f), the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started, the erasing animation continues in the figure (g), and the variable icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). It should be noted that the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 may be executed before the final display of the special figure 1 is performed.

Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. Here, FIG. 80A is a diagram for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 80B is a diagram for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. (C) is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. (D) is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. Further, FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 81 (b) is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80A, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 is further displayed). Is 8 in total), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area are different. The number of notice icons that can be displayed and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to any number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the notice icon I6 of the hat composed of the pattern of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 has a thousand-car box. The notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box consisting of the symbols is displayed, the notice icon I10 of the fan consisting of the symbols of the fan is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 The notice icon I7 of the back sword consisting of the design of the back sword is displayed, and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon consisting of the design of the ribbon is displayed in the notice icon 5th display area YA5, and the notice icon 6th display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 80 (b). It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (c), for example. It is controlled to be done. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, and is appropriately read and executed according to the progress of the game. That is, when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 80 (a), the notice icon I8 of the ribbon is digested, and then the notice icon I8 of the digested ribbon is displayed. Corresponding effects may be performed. After that, when the fluctuation is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the change display of the decorative symbol (the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 (in FIG. 80 (a), the hold icon h12 is moved to the hold icon h11) moves toward the change icon display area 280. When the decoration symbol variation display (symbol variation corresponding to hold 2) is started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested 4 seconds after the symbol variation is started, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. Further, when 10 seconds have passed from the start of SP reach, the notice icon I9 of the 1000-car box may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested 1000-car box notice icon I9 may be executed. After that, when 2 seconds have passed since all the decorative symbols were temporarily stopped, the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested fan notice icon I10 may be executed. .. In this way, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is, for example, the timing shown in FIG. 80 (d). Is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400, and is appropriately read and executed according to the progress of the game. That is, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 80 (a), the palace effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. Will be done. In this lord's production, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken are increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the change is completed and the symbol change corresponding to the hold 1 is started, a DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a DJ effect of increasing the notice icon is executed. In this DJ effect, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is increased to the notice icon display area 285 and displayed. After that, after the symbol variation corresponding to hold 1 is completed and the symbol variation corresponding to hold 2 is started, 4 seconds have passed from the start of the second pseudo-continuous production, the lord effect is executed, and the fan The notice icon I10 is increased to the notice icon display area 285 and displayed. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the big hit symbol variation display may be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the outlying symbol variation display. For example, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is out of order may be set to a maximum of 1, and the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be set to at least 2.

Next, the types of the notice icons displayed in the present embodiment and the corresponding effect contents will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The notice icons include those in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear as shown in FIG. 81 (a) and those in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear as shown in FIG. 81 (b).

The notice icons (notice icons before change) for which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear include, for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord, as shown in FIG. 81 (a). There are a third lord's notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon showing the silhouette of the lord's face in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. The second lord's notice icon I2 is a notice icon that shows the silhouette of the lord's face in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third lord's notice icon I3 is a notice icon in which the silhouette of the lord's face is represented in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is either weak to strong. When the notice icon I1 of the first lord, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord come to the predetermined change display timing (for example, the timing of the increase display of the notice icon), the figure. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 81 (b). Further, the first button notice icon I4 changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 81B at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. The first button notice icon I4 may be changed to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 are started to be read ahead. It may be displayed before the icon, and it may function as a look-ahead notice. Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the character notation may be displayed accompanying the notice icon I1, When the notice icon I2 of the second lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord are displayed, a "question mark" may be added and displayed.

On the other hand, as the notice icon (notice icon after change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is clear, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the back sword, and the ribbon There are a notice icon I8, a notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 for a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

The notice icon I6 of the hat is a notice icon that imitates the hat worn by the character of the bancho, and the reliability of the jackpot is about strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed only once. Here, there are a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a ghost pattern in the pseudo-continuous production. In the pseudo-continuous production of a strong pattern, for example, as will be described later, the character of the bancho appears when the pseudo-continuous production starts, but the display mode of the character of the bancho is different from the usual (for example, the bancho becomes an aura). The display mode is wrapped) to notify that the reliability is high. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, it may be notified that it is the third pseudo-continuous production to indicate that the reliability is high. In addition, the pseudo-continuous effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is low by displaying the character of the appearing Bancho in the normal display mode. Further, as will be described later, the pseudo-continuous production of the Gase pattern is an production in which the pseudo-continuous production is pretended to be performed and the display is off. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the reliability is high, "Continue" is displayed in red or black as the A pattern. May occur. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as "continuation" in black letters with "continuation" or "question mark". Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon that imitates the shuriken thrown by the character of Oniwaban (ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the notice effect being executed may be switched to the highly reliable strong notice effect after the freeze effect. There is (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be given to notify a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, if the reliability is high, "freeze" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, it may be displayed as "Chan-me" as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is exhausted, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon that imitates the ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the reliability of the jackpot is high or low. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the effect of shifting to a special stage such as the look-ahead mode or the fluctuation notice mode may be executed (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, an effect of changing the displayed background from a plurality of types of backgrounds used in a normal gaming state may be executed (stage change weak). Direction). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, if the reliability is high, "Stechen" is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. May occur. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, "Stechen" may be displayed in black as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is exhausted, either the stage change strong effect or the stage change weak effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is a notice icon that imitates the Senryo box thrown by the character of the lord toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is confirmed as a jackpot, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand-car box is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box is digested during the execution of the weak reach effect with low reliability, and undergoes the reach transition effect. Later, a production that shifts (promotes) to a highly reliable strong reach production is performed (reach transition production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested after executing the weak cut-in notice with low reliability, and then the strong cut-in notice with high reliability is executed (notice promotion). Direction). If the jackpot is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the advance notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed along with the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, if the big hit is confirmed, "Large board behavior" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is high, "promotion" may be displayed in red or black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. Further, if the reliability is weak, "promotion" may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, as the B pattern, a "question mark" may be added and displayed, and then the display may change to the A pattern. When the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is exhausted, one of the final effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance promotion effect may be executed without fail. Further, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon that imitates the fan worn by the princess character, and the reliability of the big hit is confirmed. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, a premier notice that notifies in advance that the big hit is confirmed appears, or a premier reach that the big hit is confirmed is executed (premier production). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach loss is displayed, and a big hit revival effect is executed (revival effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the fan notice icon I10, it may be displayed as "blessing". When the notice icon I10 of the fan is exhausted, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed without fail. Further, in the present embodiment, the content to be produced differs depending on the timing at which the fan notice icon I10 is digested, but the digestion timing may be the same.

The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon that imitates the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is either the weakest to the big hit confirmation. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect is performed to urge the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digestion display of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, the back sword notice icon I7, and the ribbon. The notice icon I8 of the above, the notice icon I8 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan may be changed to the digestion display, and the corresponding effect may be executed. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing to any of the notice icons.

In the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned notice icon before change changes to the notice icon after change, the change display of the notice icon is performed, but the change display of the notice icon before the change is performed. It is also possible to display to erase the notice icon (notice icon "none" shown in item 5 of FIG. 81 (b): erasure effect). In this production, it is notified that the fluctuation will be out of order. That is, it is a false notice indicating that it is an out-of-order confirmation pattern. Naturally, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, it may be a big hit.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 82 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 82, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a normal figure display device 210, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, and a normal figure display device 210 are shown. The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 77, and displays, for example, the display result of the fourth symbol depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 200, for example, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a symbol changing notification area of a normal figure, a symbol changing notification area of special figure 1, and a symbol changing notification area of special figure 2. When the symbol of the normal figure is stopped, the LED in the area where the square figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the normal figure is changing, it is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 1 is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but when the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinking or turned off. As described above, not only the display position of the fourth symbol is different, but also the display mode (here, the shape) is different, so that the player can distinguish at a glance. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 82 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 82 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variation display of the decorative symbol accordingly. At the same time, the fourth symbol display device 284a performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special figure 1. The notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

Further, in FIG. 82 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two special figure 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icons h0 of these two special drawings 1 are both displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this production example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (2), the number of lights on the first special figure hold lamp 218 increases by one to three, and is held. It is shown that the number is now three. Further, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display the notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is shown by hatching, but in reality, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1. It is a display mode (a round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 7", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 82 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 82 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280. The variable icon h0 is changed, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special figure. It becomes the second hold icon h12 of 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 82 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 82 (10). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the player expects that the effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it is foretold that the pseudo continuous effect will be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 82 (11) to 82 (12), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 step by step.

In FIG. 83 (14) following from FIG. 82 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol are not changed. It hasn't happened yet.

In FIG. 83 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The icon h0 is set, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 83 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (17), after the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and displays, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (18), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession and the notice of the Senryo box An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is the notice icon third display area. It is displayed on YA3, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4. After that, the same effect display as in FIGS. 82 (10) to (12) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 83 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 83 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 83 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 83 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 being displayed, for example, on the left side. Although it is set in advance to give priority to the displayed notice icon for digestion, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right side may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order of digesting the notice icons is limited to those described above and can be appropriately set.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (24), and then enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 83 (25). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 83 (26), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "continue", and then as shown in FIG. 83 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown to be in a non-reach state.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 83 step by step.

In FIG. 84 (28) following from FIG. 83 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative pattern display device 208, and is stopped and displayed on the right. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same decorative symbol as the left symbol (for example, " It may become decoration 1 ”) to form a reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the character of the lord is displayed. There is a display that moves at a low speed from the top to the bottom.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (30), as shown in FIG. 84 (31), the character of the lord and "continuation" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed. In this embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. If the pseudo-ream symbol is not displayed as a stop and the frame is out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the combination of the decorative symbols that is out of alignment is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has started is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. .. At this time, the reach production has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (34). That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed to move from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (35), and then enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (36). Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased with the character display of "continue" at the timing of FIG. 84 (37), and then, in FIG. 84 (38), the hat In response to the digestion of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the Bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display is performed to push up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the second pseudo-continuous production is performed. Notifies the player that there is a possibility that

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is changed from "decoration 1" to "decoration 1". It has been changed to "decoration 2" to form a non-reach state, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display is performed in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from above to below at a low speed. At this time, the character information of "pseudo x 2" is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be displayed in another area. Further, the display mode of the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be changed while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. In this effect example, after the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again to maintain the reach state, and the reach effect may be started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 84 (40), as shown in FIG. 84 (41), the character of the lord and "continuation" are displayed. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, the more the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested in one symbol variation display, the more likely it is to become a big hit. That is, there is a case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and a case where two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice. It is easier to get a big hit if two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested, and there are cases where only two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-continuous production is performed only twice, and three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested. In the case where the pseudo-continuous production is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win a big hit if three notice icons I6 of the hat are digested.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts variable display of the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo × 3” indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has started is displayed.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 step by step.

In FIG. 85 (43) following FIG. 84 (42), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. Here, the reach production will be started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (44), it develops into the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach). The variation display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (44) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (45) follows the duel between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. The animation display of the scene starts.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (46), the display that the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed to move from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (47), and above the enlarged notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. The text display of "promotion" is added to announce that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box together with the character display of "promotion" at the timing of FIG. 85 (48), and then the figure. At the timing of 85 (49), the above-mentioned reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (49), the reach effect display that has been executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display. The display for cutting off the reach effect display during execution is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 85 (50).

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a highly reliable strong reach effect (button reach effect). When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "Is it too hot?" On the darkened background, and then FIG. 85 (52). The character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in. After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (53), the character display of "blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter to notify the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 85 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a as shown in FIG. 85 (56). It is shown that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 85 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1".

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 step by step.

In FIG. 86 (58) following from FIG. 85 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 86 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the provisional symbol stop display, the display that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (60). .. That is, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I10 of the fan moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (61). At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged or displayed before the enlarged display. , May be done after enlarged display.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased at the timing of FIG. 86 (62), and the notice icon display area 285 is framed out upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 86 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbol that had been swaying and fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. It should be noted that the notice icon display area 285 may continue to be displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. To.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 86 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 86 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot is confirmed in "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop display of the 15R probability variation jackpot "special figure A", and the fourth symbol display device 284a displays the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1. Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above-mentioned jackpot game start effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, so that the re-variation effect is executed and a big hit is obtained. However, the notice icon I10 of the fan is the notice icon display area. If it is not displayed on the 285, the display result of the deviation may be derived without performing the re-variation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect executed by digesting the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is performed and is out of order, this reach shift effect can be said to be a fake notice effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested and a reach transition effect as a kind of fake notice corresponding to the digested Senryo box notice icon I9 is executed, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of the question. This also applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the advance notice effect can be executed according to the number of the advance notice icons displayed in the advance notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.

In the present embodiment, the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed, but the look-ahead notice is the target. Even in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice and the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display subject to the look-ahead notice are different. It may be the same or the same.

Next, another effect example of the above-mentioned increase effect of the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. Here, FIGS. 87 to 89 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 87 to 89, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

87 (8a) to FIG. (10a) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 87 (8a), instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9a-1), the thrown notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (9a-2), after the display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon display area 285 explodes is displayed, the timing shown in FIG. 87 (10a) is displayed. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who exploded changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the character YM of the lord succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Even with this production example, the player expects that the production corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future.

87 (8b) to FIG. (9b) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8b), the effect display is performed in which the first button notice icon I4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. When the effect button 136 is operated between the time when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the time when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the first lord It changes to one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. As described above, in this effect example, it is difficult to recognize the reliability of the jackpot indicated by the notice icon until the effect button 136 is operated. Therefore, there is an incentive to operate the effect button 136 in order to know the reliability of the jackpot. May work to enhance the effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until it is digested may be the valid period for the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol may be invalidated. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Further, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was planned to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated during the digestion effect of the notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display may be performed, or when the button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that was planned to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is exhausted, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the first button notice icon may be configured so as not to change to another notice icon.

87 (8c) to FIG. (9c) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (8c), as in FIG. 82 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 87 (9c), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left side of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the number of Gase, which fails to increase the number of notice icons. It should be noted that the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat may be used to increase the gap. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult it is to perform the increase effect.

87 (7d) to FIG. (9d) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7d), as in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of the lord holding the notice icon I6 of the hat is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position. After that, in FIG. 87 (8d), not only one notice icon I6 of the hat but also three notice icons I6 of the hat are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the notice icons I6 of the three thrown hats are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for an increase in the number of times the notice is executed may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, whereby the pseudo-ream Since it is guaranteed that the production will be executed three times, it may be announced that the jackpot will be confirmed. Further, the notice icon with high reliability is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and the notice icon with low reliability is easy to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easy to be stocked). It may be vice versa.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9d'), part or all of the notice icon I6 of the three thrown hats did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left side of the display area. It is also possible to execute a partial loss increase effect or a total loss increase effect that causes the frame to be out.

87 (7e) to FIG. (9e) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 87 (7e), unlike the production example shown in FIG. 82 (7), the character YM of the lord who has the notice icon I6 of one hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan. Is shown to be moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two notice icons out of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or a randomly selected notice icon may be displayed. You may want to display only. After that, in FIG. 87 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other, and for example, the same notice icon may be included more than once.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3. Each is displayed. As described above, even in this effect example, the increase of a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of times the notice is executed can be increased, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of types of notices can be increased, so that the effect of the effect can be further enhanced. In some cases.

Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 87 (9e'), part or all of the three thrown notice icons did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol display device 208 was displayed. It is also possible to execute a partial slack increase effect or a total slack increase effect that frame out from the left side of the area.

87 (12f-1) to FIG. (12f-2) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in FIG. 87 (12f-1), as in FIG. 82 (12), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (12f-2), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot ends.

FIG. 88 (8 g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8 g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), the character YM of the lord displays the hat notice icon I6 as the notice icon display area 285. There is a production display that throws at. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 88 (8h) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 82 (8). That is, in FIG. 88 (8h), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, for example) of the game board 200. It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208) to display the number of holds. The effect holding lamp 286 is provided with, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. Drive control is possible depending on the mode (for example, lighting while switching 7 colors). In FIG. 88 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the object of pre-reading is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 1, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is also lit by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 88 (8i) to (9i-2) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 88 (8i), as in FIG. 82 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I6 of the hat toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 88 (9i-1), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (9i-2), the notice icon I6 of the hat acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the look-ahead notice. The effect display (holding change effect) that changes to is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I6 of the hat may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but may appear as an opportunity to start the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult it is to execute the hold change effect.

As shown in FIG. 89 (9i-2'), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and holds the display using the effect hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the hold lamp of the first special figure 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the look-ahead notice.

88 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 82 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8j), it is different from FIG. 82 (8). , It is shown that the DJ character BY with the notice icon appears from the right side of the display area on the flying carpet instead of the character YM of the lord (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat notice icon I6. After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and holds the notice icon I6 of the hat on the notice icon display area 285 of the notice icon first display area YA1. The production display to be placed in is performed. The number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285 in one time of increasing the number of notice icons by the DJ character BY. In this way, a plurality of types of notice icon increase effects (for example, the first notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and the second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY) may be prepared. Depending on the configuration, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

88 (8k) to FIG. (9k) show other production examples of the production shown in FIGS. 82 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 82 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 88 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. It is shown that the character BY appears from the right side of the display area on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 88 (8k), the DJ character appears with the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (9k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is displayed. While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if passing through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k'), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if it were. Further, as shown in FIG. 88 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is placed on the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord and displayed in the first display area YA1 of the notice icon. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, the notice icon may be overwritten. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect.

FIG. 88 (12l) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 82 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is accompanied by the corresponding character notation. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is additionally displayed with the characters "continue", and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. The word "promotion" is added to the sign, and the word "blessing" is added to the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YA3, and the notice icon 4th display. The notice icon I7 of the back sword displayed in the area YA4 is additionally displayed with the characters "Chan eyes", and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the fifth display area YA5 of the notice icon is "Stechen". Characters are additionally displayed, and the characters of "question mark" are additionally displayed together with "continue" on the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon 6th display area YA6. As a result, the content of the advance notice effect whose execution is announced after that may become easier to understand.

As shown in Fig. 88 (12l') and Fig. 88 (12l'), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are set as “question marks” to clarify the corresponding notice effect. It may not be displayed in. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, which may improve the interest.

Further, it may be announced that the effect display in which the big hit is confirmed is executed depending on the combination of the plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and the number of the displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. 88 may be used. As shown in (12l ″ ″), when three notice icon I6s of the hat with the character notation of “continue” are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the jackpot is confirmed four times. It is also possible to give notice that the effect display including the continuous effect will be performed. If the characters added to the notice icon do not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the word "promotion" is added to the hat notice icon I6), the hat notice icon I6 It may be a premier notice display that announces that the result of the symbol variation display when is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

In the above-mentioned production example, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the character YM of the lord and the character BY of the DJ, but in the production example shown in FIG. 89, the notice icon is increased by displaying the decorative pattern. It is something to do.

In FIG. 89 (A1), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

After the reach effect is started, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (A2). In the example shown in FIG. 89 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped and displayed. The character notation of "stock" is added near the lower part of the notice icon symbol of this hat, and when the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the notice icon is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285. doing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (A3), the notice icon symbol of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in (A4), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is off. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this way.

In FIG. 89 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 89 (A1), the decorative symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. , Normal reach production starts.

After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the notice icon symbol of the first lord imitating the notice icon I1 of the first lord is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the production example shown in FIG. 89 (B2), the character notation of "stock" is added on top of the notice icon symbol of the first lord, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed to display the notice icon display area. It is informed that the notice icon is increased and displayed on 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (B3), the notice icon symbol of the first lord changes to the notice icon I1 of the first lord and moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 89 (B4), the decorative symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of alignment. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the hat notice icon I6, and may be another type of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol change display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the execution of the symbol change display from the next time onward, or the notice may be changed. It may not change until the timing when the icon is digested. In the present embodiment, the effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this way.

Next, another example of the above-mentioned notice icon digestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. Here, FIGS. 90 to 93 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In FIGS. 90 to 93, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

90 (38 m) to FIG. 90 (40 m-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 84 (38) to (40). 90 (38 m) to FIG. 90 (39 m) have the same effects as those of FIGS. 84 (38) to (39), but in FIG. 90 (40 m-1), at a low speed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Pseudo-continuous symbols appear after variable display, but after that, as shown in FIG. 90 (40 m-2), the variable display becomes high speed and the pseudo-continuous symbols become high-speed just before the pseudo-continuous symbols reach the stop display position of the decorative symbol. Is scrolled out to the lower part of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 90 (40m-3), a temporary stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", and then the shaking fluctuation is displayed. , The stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is off. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed.

90 (23n) to FIG. (24n) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23n), the display that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started, but as shown in FIG. 90 (24n), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is enlarged and displayed. It may be displayed that the display is erased as it is, and it may be notified that the digested effect is not performed.

90 (23o) to FIG. (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (23o), the display that the hat notice icon I6 is digested is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (24o-1), but the hat is displayed as it is. The notice icon I6 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 90 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of alignment without starting the pseudo-continuous production (in FIG. 90 (24o-2), "decoration 1-decoration 2" -The combination of the decorative symbols in "Decoration 2") causes a temporary stop display to display the shaking fluctuation, and then the stop display is displayed to notify that the result of the disconnection. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed.

90 (22p) to FIG. (23p) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the variable display of the decorative symbol started, in FIG. 90 (23p), the leftmost side (notice icon) of the notice icon display area 285 Instead of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1), other notice icons may be digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 90 (23p), the effect of digesting the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notice icons may not be digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stock order), but the notice icons stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, if the notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be difficult to be a big hit. Further, the digestion order of the notice icons may be determined regardless of the stock order. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected, or the reliability of the jackpot changes depending on the digestion order of the notice icons. You may try to do it. Further, by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, it may be possible to give a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat and the shuriken A rule may be set such that the jackpot is confirmed when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order. This may give the player an incentive to find the law of the digestion order of the notice icons that will be a big hit, and may improve the motivation to play.

90 (24q-1) to FIG. 90 (24q-2) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 83 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and becomes the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy is created, as shown in FIG. 90 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left. It may be. At this time, for example, a movement animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left side may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing of changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. However, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is finished.

FIGS. 91 (Aa) to 91 (Ae) show an example of an effect when an increase effect of the advance notice icon is performed after the digestion effect of the advance notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed, and FIG. At the timing shown in 91 (Ab), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and it is notified that the display result is off. After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ad), the notice icon is increased by the character YM of the lord. When the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 91 (Ae), the notice icon I7 of the back sword is digested and becomes blank. The notice icon I9 of the Senryo box thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases as the notice icon is digested may be displayed in the blank notice icon display area.

FIG. 91B shows an example of an effect in which the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are created in the notice icon display area due to the plurality of notice icons being digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM of the lord When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3, which are blank, are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left side. In this way, the notice icon may be displayed to be increased. When there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to the above, and may be any other order, and the first sub-control unit may be used. It may be set in advance in 400. In addition, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, but the jackpot is hit depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of notice icons displayed are different. For example, if an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon 6th display area YA6 among the blank display areas in the notice icon display area 285, at least 6 notice icons are the notice icons. It may be suggested that it is displayed in the display area 285, or it may be suggested that the jackpot has the highest reliability.

FIG. 91C shows an example of an effect in which the digestion effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), while the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being digested, the lord The notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the character YM. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is an increased notice icon in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display is executed. In this way, the digestion effect of the notice icon and the increase effect of the notice icon may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, the period in which the notice icon digestion effect is performed and the period in which the notice icon increase effect is performed may overlap. Further, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the digestion effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon may be started. The digestion effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area where the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be an area that will be blank before it is started.

FIG. 91 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 86 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), before the digestion effect of the notice icon is started, the effect of inciting whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon that is the target of digestion is digested by shaking and fluctuating. I try to fan it. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. If it is not digested, the notice icon may be deleted without being digested, or the notice icon may be displayed and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. In the production example shown in FIG. 91 (59r), when the fan notice icon I10 is erased without being digested, it is then stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of the way, which is the display result of the out of place. You may notify that.

91 (59s) to FIG. (60s) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 86 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 91 (59s), the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Of these notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, after the shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1", the notice icon of the fan is different from the above. When I10 is digested, it becomes a notice that it will be a big hit, and as shown in FIG. 91 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, hat notice icon I6) are digested, it is removed as it is. It is also possible to notify that the combination of the decorative symbols of the above is stopped and displayed and the icon is out of alignment.

91 (23t) to FIG. (32t) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 91 (23t), in this production example, in the notice icon display area 285, a digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIGS. 91 (23t) to (25t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the digested hat notice icon I6 Is displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIGS. 91 (28t) to (32t), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is continuously displayed even after being digested, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is displayed. ) Is displayed continuously until the end. The timing at which the notice icon display in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 starts may be after the notice icon digestion effect starts, or even before the notice icon digestion effect starts. It may be at the same time as the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is deleted may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is completed or before the digestion effect of the notice icon is completed. It may be at the same time as the end of the digestion effect of the notice icon, it may be after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon has started, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, it may be before the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or it may be the digested notice icon. It may be deleted at the same time as the end of the corresponding effect, or it may be deleted at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure), or the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion. Is deleted at the timing when is deleted (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased at FIG. 85 (44), or only the digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased). You may. When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol change display, the notice icon a in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the first digested notice icon A is the digestion of the notice icon A. It may be in a state where no notice icon is displayed in the digestion notice icon display area YA0 after or at the end of the effect, or the digestion effect of the next digested notice icon B is started. It may be erased at the same time as or after it is started, or it may be erased at the same time as or after the notice icon b displayed in the digestion notice icon display area corresponding to the next digested notice icon B is displayed. Alternatively, during the digestion effect of the notice icon B, for example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or at the end of the symbol change in which the notice icon A and the notice icon B are digested (for example, special). It may be erased at the symbol stop timing in the figure). If the notice icon display area 285 is deleted when a specific effect display (for example, during super reach effect, big hit effect, island simultaneous effect, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted and the notice is being digested. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted.

FIGS. 92 (Aa) to 92 (Ae) show an example of an effect in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are digested at the same time. That is, in FIG. 92 (Aa), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. The notice icon I8 of the ribbon is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Then, among these notice icons, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested. The production starts. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be the order corresponding to the execution order of the effect.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed with additional characters as shown in FIG. 92 (Ab). .. Specifically, the character display of "continue" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "Stechen" is added near the lower part of the notice icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ac), the shoji is closed, and after the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side thereof, the shoji is opened and the moon is opened as shown in FIG. 92 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. It should be noted that, during the execution of the stage change effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Go to and zoom out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ae), the decorative design that was reduced and displayed is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area, and then corresponds to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, and the character BC of the chief is Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display is performed to push up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed, and then the player is notified that a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. ..

In this production example, a plurality of productions corresponding to the digested notice icons are started at different start timings, but they may be started at the same time.

92 (66u-1) to FIG. (66u-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 86 (66). That is, in FIG. 92 (66u-1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed. It is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-2), after the jackpot start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 92 (66u-3), even after the jackpot round game is started, the undigested A notice icon is displayed. In this production example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during the execution of the jackpot game, but it may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a jackpot (for example, an effect of notifying that a probability variation jackpot is confirmed), for example, FIG. 92 (66u). In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the execution of the big hit game, the notification that the probability change big hit is confirmed is given, and when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested. May notify that the 15R jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when other notice icons are digested, for example, they may have a meaning suggesting that they may be promoted. In this way, even if the same notice icon is used, if it is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect such as giving a different meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be different. That is, a notice icon peculiar to the jackpot may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. ..

FIGS. 92 (Ba) to 92 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and then the hold is digested and the symbol changes. When the display is started, the stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 92 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 92 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when the stage change is performed. After the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or the notice icon may not be deleted. Good.

92 (22v-1) to 92v (23v) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 83 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 92 (22v-2), the character YM2 of the lord holding the placard appears and is digested. Notice The type of icon is notified in advance. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (23v), the digestion effect of the advance notice icon in which the advance notice type notice icon (hat notice icon I6) is digested is started. Even when the advance notice of the type of the advance notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, and the notice icon of a type different from the advance notice icon is digested. May be done. When a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 92 (22w) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 83 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 92 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the digestion of the notice icon. May be good.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the character BC of the Bancho appears, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. The effect corresponding to is executed, and the other effects are not executed. For example, although the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the chief character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. When an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as when the big hit is fixed, the big hit may be fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the notice icon to be digested is determined and is configured so that it cannot be selected by the player. However, for example, the notice icon to be digested can be obtained by operating the effect button 136 or the like. It may be possible to select.

In addition, if a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probabilistic state or a time saving state. It may be configured so that it is not. In addition, when a big hit is made while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is temporarily hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned and displayed after the probability change state or the time saving state is completed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, it may be configured so that it will not be carried over even after the probability change state or the time saving state ends.

Next, an example of an effect that announces the content of the reach effect that will be transferred thereafter depending on the type of the advance notice icon to be digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 93 (Aa), when "Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, and the reach state is reached, the advance notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-1), the enlarged character BC2 of the bancho is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the Bancho reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-2), when the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-2), the enlarged display of the character YM3 of the lord is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the lord reach corresponding to the appearing character. Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ab-3), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 93 (Ac-3), the enlarged princess character HM is displayed. Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In this production example, it corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach productions is configured in the order of princess reach> lord reach> bancho reach. There is. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a character of the lord who is enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called law breakage occurs). May be configured so that the jackpot is fixed. Further, a plurality of notice icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may appear in response to the combined digestion to execute the combined notice. In addition, a unique effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (a special effect for multiple digestion) may be executed, and it is a big hit if a plurality of notice icons are digested rather than one notice icon is digested. It may be configured to increase the reliability of.

Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 93 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. 93 At the timing shown in (Bb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 is digested is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter as shown in FIG. 93 (Bc), and the effect button 136 Notifies that the operation can be accepted and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136.

Next, another effect example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

As shown in FIG. 93 (Ca), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the button reach effect described above, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. After that, at the timing of FIG. 93 (Cb), the display that the second button notice icon I11 is digested is started. That is, the display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps with the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 93 (Cc). As described above, the effect button 136 changes to the protruding button image 136b represented in the protruding mode. In other words, it is shown that the jackpot has been promoted to a button reach production with higher reliability.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 94 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 95 stepwise, and FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 96 stepwise. 98 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 97 step by step.

In addition, in FIGS. 94 (1) to 95 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon was changed from the hat notice icon I6 to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Since it is the same as FIGS. 82 (1) to 83 (14) except for points, the description thereof is omitted here. Also, regarding the effect performed between FIGS. 95 (14) and 95 (20), all the advance notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon have been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. It is the same as FIG. 83 (15) to FIG. (19) except that.

In FIG. 95 (20), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of the detachment is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, in FIG. 95 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and the decorative symbol have not yet changed.

In FIG. 95 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 95 (23), when the same notice icon is displayed more than once in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is preset to give priority to the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon to use may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 95 (25), below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 95 (26), the character display of "continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon After the I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In this way, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be redisplayed at the original position. When the digested notice icon is redisplayed in the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed so as to be recognizable. For example, the display area in which the digested notice icon is displayed may be displayed. It may be displayed in gray out, or the character information of "done" may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

After that, in the effect contents shown in FIGS. 95 (27) to 96 (33), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon. It is the same as in FIGS. 83 (27) to 84 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icons I1 of the first lord. The description of is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (34), the display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is displayed to move from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown in 96 (36), below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed.

After that, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (37), the character display of "continue" attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is deleted. After I6 is reduced and displayed, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as for the effect contents shown in FIGS. 96 (38) to (45), the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice is given. Icon 3rd display area YA3 and notice icon The notice icon displayed in the 4th display area YA4 has been changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, but FIGS. 84 (38) to 85 (Fig. Since it is the same as 45), the description here will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (46), the display in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is displayed to move from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box at the timing shown in FIG. 96 (47) and is enlarged and displayed. Above the displayed notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, a character display of "promotion" is additionally displayed to notify that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It should be noted that this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or may be performed after the enlarged display. May be good.

After that, in the decorative design display device 208, the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is erased, and the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 96 (48). The display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, at the timing of FIG. 97 (49), the above-mentioned reach transition effect is started. In this production example, when the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect display as if a power failure has occurred, and then has a highly reliable strong reach. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 96 (50-1), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "Is it a chance?" On the darkened background. , The character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (50-2). After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (51), the character "Is it too hot?" Is displayed, and then the character "No" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (52). After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (53), the character display of "blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter to notify the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received, and informs the player. The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (55), as shown in FIG. 97 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a. It is shown that the button reach production failed.

Eventually, in FIG. 97 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1".

In FIG. 97 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 97 (59), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" (temporary symbol stop display) is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed from the provisional symbol stop display, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (60). To be started. That is, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the notice icon I1 of the first lord moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the notice icon I10 of the fan at the timing shown in FIG. 97 (61) and is enlarged and displayed. At this time, for example, a character display of "blessing" may be added below the enlarged notice icon I10 of the fan to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, when the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged or displayed before the enlarged display. , May be done after enlarged display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the notice icon I10 of the fan is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 98 (62), the original display position, that is, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285. The display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 98 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbol that had fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. .. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is still displayed.

In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variable display of the decorative symbol, which has been performed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. To.

Eventually, as shown in FIG. 98 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the jackpot is confirmed in "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 displays the stop display of the 15R probability variation jackpot "special figure A", and the fourth symbol display device 284a displays the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1. Is lit. After that, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above-mentioned jackpot game start effect is executed.

Next, another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. Here, FIGS. 99 to 101 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 99 to 101, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

FIGS. 99 (8a) to 99 (9a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8a), the effect display is performed in which the notice icon I3 of the third lord is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the notice icon I1 of the first lord. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

FIGS. 99 (8b) to 99 (9b) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8b), as in FIG. 94 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I1 of the first lord toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9b), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the amount of waste using the notice icon of the lord.

FIGS. 99 (8c) to 99 (9c) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8c), not only one notice icon I1 of the first lord but also three notice icons I1 of the first lord are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. It should be noted that the effect display may be one by one, not at the same time.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (9c), the notice icons I1 of the three first lords thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, the increase of the plurality of notice icons can be executed by one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for an increase in the number of times the notice is executed may be improved, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced. Further, the notice icon with high reliability (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord) is difficult to be displayed (hard to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon with low reliability (for example, the first lord) is difficult to be displayed. The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (notice icon I1 of the first lord) is increased by three, but a plurality of types of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example. , The notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I3 of the third lord may be increased at the same time.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 99 (9c'), a part or all of the notice icon I1 of the three thrown first lords did not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative design. It is also possible to execute a partial throw-up effect or a full throw-out increase effect that frame out from the left side of the display area of the display device 208.

FIG. 99 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode by the Sabohani character), the lord's character YM gives the first lord's notice icon I1 a notice icon. An effect display is performed in which the character is thrown toward the display area 285. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect of increasing the notice icon even during the execution of the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the pre-reading notice by the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

FIG. 99 (8f) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 94 (8). That is, in FIG. 99 (8f), the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number is displayed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 99 (8f), for convenience of explanation, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the object of pre-reading is hatched, but in reality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Like the hold lamp of No. 1, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is also lit by the default light emission mode.

FIGS. 99 (8 g) to (9 g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 99 (8 g), as in FIG. 94 (8), the effect display of throwing the notice icon I1 of the first lord toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

However, in the case of FIG. 99 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (9g-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to give a look-ahead notice. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode of is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord may not be displayed as a notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, but may appear as an opportunity to start the look-ahead notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the notice icon I1 of the first lord. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, the more difficult the hold change effect is to be executed. Good.

FIGS. 99 (12h-1) to (12h-2) show other production examples of the production shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in FIG. 99 (12h-1), as in FIG. 94 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Fluctuation display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (12h-2), the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. To. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even when the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach effect, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the jackpot ends.

FIGS. 100 (8i) to 100 (9i) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8i), it is different from FIG. 94 (8). It is shown that the DJ character BY with the notice icon appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the flying carpet instead of the character YM of the lord. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (9i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner and holds the notice icon I1 of the first lord who holds the notice icon I1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display placed in the display area YA1 is performed. The number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285 in one time of increasing the number of notice icons by the DJ character BY. In this way, a plurality of types of notice icon increase effects (for example, the first notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and the second notice icon increase effect by the DJ character BY) may be prepared. Depending on the configuration, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

100 (8j) to FIG. (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. It is shown that the character BY appears from the right side of the display area on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9j), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged on a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if passing through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 100 (9j'), the DJ character BY is arranged on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to make the back side of the notice icon. It may be displayed as if it is passing.

100 (8k) to 100 (9k) show other production examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 100 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further formed. It is shown that the character BY appears from the right side of the display area on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I3 of the third lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (9k), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then the DJ While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I3 of the third lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of. That is, the promotion may be performed by overwriting the notice icon with low reliability of the big hit with the notice icon with high reliability of the big hit. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this promotion effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

FIG. 100 (12l) shows another production example of the production shown in FIG. 94 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 100 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is accompanied by the character notation of "question mark". For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4, and the notice icon 5th display area YA5 of the third lord. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon 6th display area YA6, and the character notation of "question mark" is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l'), the type of the notice icon after the change may be announced in character notation for some of the notice icons before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the first display area YA1 of the notice icon, the notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the second display area YA2 of the notice icon, and the notice icon 4th. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has the character notation of "question mark" added and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA3 is annotated to change to the notice icon I7 of the back sword with the character notation of "Chan eyes" added, and is displayed in the notice icon 5th display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the character "continue" to announce that it will change to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the notice icon 6th display area YA6 is displayed. It is foretold that the notice icon I1 of the lord of No. 1 will be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat by adding the character notation of "question mark" together with "continuation". These character notations may be notified at once for all or part of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (12l ″), all or part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the changed notice icons, and the changed notice icons are displayed. The corresponding character notation may be added only for the thing.

FIGS. 101 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101 (8 m-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8m-2), the notice icon I1 of the first lord thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 101 (9 m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box that he has is thrown by the character YM of the lord, and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this effect example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten with the notice icon after the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this overwriting effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwrite effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

FIGS. 101 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 94 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 94 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon into the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the notice icon is further provided. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on a flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 101 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 101 ( As shown in 9n), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord who has it is thrown by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the notice icon I1 of the first lord in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten with the notice icon before the change. In this way, the execution times of the increase effects of the plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, and this may further enhance the effect. It should be noted that this overwriting effect may be performed while the same symbol variation display is being executed, or may be performed in a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the overwrite effect may be executed every time the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Further, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change becomes the notice icon before overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box). May be another notice icon. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher when the notice icon after overwriting is digested than when the notice icon before overwriting is digested, or the reliability of the jackpot may be lower. It may be configured so that the reliability of the jackpot does not change.

Next, an example of the effect in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. 102. Here, FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect in which the notice icon changes. In FIG. 102, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the character YM2 of the lord holding the placard appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. This placard is marked with the words "It will change", foretelling that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon will change.

After that, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, it is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 102 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box. The display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 102 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode displays the look-ahead notice display mode. Changes to. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may be changed, the display mode of any of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may be changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed. May change. As described above, in this production example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the above-mentioned effect, the notice icon is held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

Further, as shown in 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but it is reduced and displayed in the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The aspects are the same. Further, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the Chibihime chance production. The Chibihime chance production is a production that may be started when the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation game is executed. The Chibihime chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery, in which the character of the Chibihime selects one from the five start points, moves along the Amida route from the selected start point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the indicated icon will be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it is announced that the blade member 2321 of the second special figure start port 232 will be opened for a long time, and the "super hot" When the goal point indicated by the character notation is reached, it is suggested that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and when the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached. Foretells that the variable display result of the general map is out of order.

Further, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by the notice icon of the lord is reached, among the notice icons before the change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 102 (D1). At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box. The display mode of the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

Further, when the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 102 (D2), at least one of the hold icons in the default display mode in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 The display mode of the look-ahead notice changes. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 102 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the look-ahead notice display mode. The display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may be changed, the display mode of any of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may be changed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed. May change.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the above-mentioned effect, the notice icon is held without being changed. It can be said that the icon may change. It should be noted that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

Next, a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 103. Here, FIG. 103 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example when the power is cut off or restored while the notice icon is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 of special figure 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1, indicating that the start of the two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. Further, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, respectively, and the notice icon third display area YA3 has a thousand boxes. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

FIG. 103 (B) shows a power failure for some reason, and FIG. 103 (C) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the power is instantly restored. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 103 (C) is displayed with the characters "Please wait for a while during restoration", which is a restoration display. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the symbol variation display ends, and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays "special figure I" which is a display result of the detachment. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is completed, the display is stopped at "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. Then, when the power is cut off or restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. Further, when the power is cut off or restored, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, also becomes the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when the power is cut off or restored, the look-ahead result information stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit or the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308 is "undetermined" information. It may be configured to be. Here, if there is at least one hold that includes "undetermined" information in the subcommand including the look-ahead result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, the "undetermined" information is included. The look-ahead notice including the digestion effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may not be performed until all the pending reservations are exhausted. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for the newly increased hold (hold where the look-ahead result is saved) after the power is cut off or restored, and the look-ahead notice is given after all the holds containing "undetermined" information are exhausted. However, with respect to the newly increased hold after the power is cut off or restored, the look-ahead notice may be given before the hold containing the "undetermined" information is exhausted.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise shows another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon and the digestion effect. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 104 step by step. In FIGS. 104 to 105, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 104, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIG. 104 (1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 82 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in large size in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the center of the display screen. It differs from FIG. 82 (5) in that a second decorative symbol display area is formed above the hold icon display area 281 and the three-digit second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size. The second decorative symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol display area is configured so that after the fluctuation starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the determination is stopped.

At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, unlike FIG. 82 (6), the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I21 of the "house" in which the characters "house" are surrounded by a circle.

After the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (3), the notice icon I21 of the possessed "house" is displayed as a notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (4). An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (5), the notice icon I21 of the thrown "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then as shown in FIG. 104 (6). In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of the "house" is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, at least suggesting that the family crest effect described later may be executed in the future.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104 (7) to 104 (8), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special diagram 1 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is special drawing 1. It becomes the first hold icon h11 of. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

At the timing shown in FIG. 104 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. This is also an effect executed when it is decided to display the notice icon based on the result of pre-reading the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest" in which the characters of the "crest" are surrounded by a circle.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (12), the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and displays the movement, and then at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display of throwing toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (14), the notice icon I22 of the thrown “crest” is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. After that, the same effect display as in FIG. 104 (6) is performed, and then the same effect display as in FIGS. 104 (7) to (8) is performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 104 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I21 and the notice icon of the "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (19) following FIG. 104 (18). The display that the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and The notice icon is displayed to move from the second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" have been digested. The timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is deleted may be deleted when the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started, or the effect corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued after that. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 may be the same, or the start of the movement of the "house" notice icon I21 may be the "crest" notice icon I22. The movement start of the "crest" notice icon I22 may be earlier than the movement start of the "house" notice icon I21.

After that, when the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in 21), the family crest accessory 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image to that effect. A fall effect is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (22), it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach). The contents of the swordsman reach are as described above in FIGS. 77 to 79, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

In the present embodiment, when two specific notice icons (for example, "house" notice icon I21 and "crest" notice icon I22) are digested, the corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured in. Even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or other effects may be performed. In addition, when the family crest drop effect is performed, it may be guaranteed that the symbol variation display will be a big hit, or it may result in a loss. In addition, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured so that the big hit is easier than when the family crest drop effect is not performed. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is a loss. In addition, it is easier to digest two specific notice icons (for example, "house" notice icon I21 and "crest" notice icon I22) in the big hit symbol change display than in the lost symbol change display. It may be configured in.

106 and 107 are diagrams showing stepwise examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. In FIGS. 106 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

In FIG. 106 (a1), unlike FIG. 104 (5), the notice icon I22 of the “crest” appears before the notice icon I21 of the “house” and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. , As shown in FIG. 106 (a2), the notice icon I21 of the “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a3), the "crest" notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display that the notice icon I21 of the "house" that had been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I21 of the "house" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and The notice icon is displayed to move from the second display area YA2 to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach state by the "decoration 1" is formed, and the reach effect is started.

After that, when the "crest" notice icon I22 and the "house" notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1). To. At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of "house" and "crest") instead of the order of "crest" and "house". Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the notice icon I22 of the "crest" and the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be enlarged and displayed in the order of the "crest" and "house". In this production example, regardless of whether it is shown in FIG. 106 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 106 (a4-2), the family crest drop effect described above is subsequently performed. For example, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "house" and "crest" (that is, the correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed and the order of "crest" and "house" (that is, that is). If the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the wrong order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. Also, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", it is more difficult to start the family crest drop effect than when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "Crest". It may be configured in.

FIGS. 106 (b1) to 106 (b6) show another form of the family crest drop effect.

First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b1), only the notice icon I21 of the “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “crest” is displayed. It is shown that the notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon I22 to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b2), when only the notice icon I21 of the “house” is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 106 (b3), the family crest combination The object 224B descends slightly from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and moves up and down while overlapping the front side of a part of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it is vibrating in the direction (fanning operation). At this time, in the upper right portion of the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "Preparing for family crest" are displayed to indicate that the family crest drop effect may be performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of "house" is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the production of the lord has started. At this time, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I22 of the "crest". Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b4), when the character YM of the lord moves to a predetermined throwing position and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 Notice icon is displayed in the second display area YA2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of the "crest" is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the family crest accessory 224B is temporarily retracted to the initial position to make it easier to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but it is not retracted to the initial position and the fanning operation is continued. May be good. On the other hand, the character display of "Preparing for family crest" is continuously displayed.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 106 (b6), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At this time, the evacuated family crest accessory 224B descends again and resumes the fanning operation. In this production example, after that, for example, when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest accessory 224B is lowered, and FIG. 105 The family crest fall effect shown in (21) is performed. In some cases, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, in FIG. 106 (b2), the notice icon I21 of the “house” may be displayed in an enlarged display until the notice icon I22 of the “crest” displayed later is digested. At that time, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be stocked, but it may be digested as it is without being stocked.

FIGS. 106 (c1) to 106 (c2-3) show other examples of the advance notice icon digestion effect. In this production example, it is shown that the background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 106 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I31 of the “Den” surrounded by the characters “Den” in a circle is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon I32 of the "princess" that encloses the letters "princess" in a circle is displayed in the second display area YA2 of the notice icon, and the notice icon I33 of the "grandfather" that encloses the letters "old man" in a circle gives a notice. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

FIG. 106 (c2-1) shows the background display after the three notice icons I31 of the “Den”, the notice icon I32 of the “princess”, and the notice icon I33 of the “old man” have been digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image in which the grandfather's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and the face of the lord. A background display is displayed in which the uploaded image and the image with the princess's face uploaded are divided into three equal parts. In the present embodiment, when all three notice icons of "Den" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "old man" notice icon I33 are digested, the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. Is configured to display a background display indicating that is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested at the same time or one by one. Here, when the three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. For example, the notice icon I31 of "Den"> "Princess" The reliability may be the highest when digested in the order of "notice icon I32"> "old man" notice icon I33, but the relationship between the digestion order and the reliability of the jackpot can be appropriately set. ..

Further, in FIG. 106 (c2-2), among the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33, the "princess" notice icon I32 and The state of the background display after only the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and the grandfather's face. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33 are digested, the symbol variation display is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, but the background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, "Den". The notice icon I31 of the "princess" and the notice icon I32 of the "princess" may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of the "den" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are digested, "Don" Notice icon I31 and "Grandfather" notice icon I33, "Princess" notice icon I32 and "Grandfather" notice icon I33 are more reliable than when the big hit is digested, and "Den" notice icon I31 And when the "old man" notice icon I33 is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the "princess" notice icon I32 and the "old man" notice icon I33 are digested. These can be set as appropriate.

Further, in FIG. 106 (c2-3), of the three notice icons I31 of the "Den", the notice icon I32 of the "princess", and the notice icon I33 of the "old man", only the notice icon I33 of the "old man" The state of the background display after the icon is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 106 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background display in which the image with the grandfather's face up is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, when one of the three notice icons of the "Den" notice icon I31, the "princess" notice icon I32, and the "old man" notice icon I33 is digested, the symbol variation display is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot in is configured to display a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the two notice icons are digested. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the notice icon I33 of "old man" is digested among the three notice icons has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested. Alternatively, the "princess" notice icon I32 may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or the notice of "Grandfather" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and when the notice icon I32 of the "princess" is digested, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested. However, these can be set as appropriate.

Further, in this production example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the displayed notice icon. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is displayed, the notice icon I32 of "Princess" or "Grandfather" The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "Princess" is displayed, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" is displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I32 of "Princess" are displayed, the notice icon I31 of "Den" and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notice icon I32 of "princess" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are displayed, and the notice icon I31 of "den" and the notice icon I33 of "old man" are displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of the "princess" and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" are displayed, but these can be set as appropriate.

Further, in this production example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but the background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change, and in this case, as a so-called breaking of the law, it may be notified that the big hit is confirmed.

Further, when displaying the three notice icons, the three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol change display, or one notice icon may be displayed each time the symbol change display is performed. You may do it. In this case, the reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on the display order.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon I31 of "Den" is digested, the character of the lord appears and the reach of the lord is started, and when the notice icon I32 of "Princess" is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started and the notice icon I33 of the "old man" is digested, the old man character may appear and the old man reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I33 of the "old man" and the notice icon I32 of the "princess" are digested, the character of the old man and the character of the princess appear, the old man & princess reach is started, and the notice icon of the "lord" When I31 and "Princess" notice icon I32 are digested, the character of the lord and the character of the princess will appear and the lord & princess reach will start, and the notice icon I31 of "the lord" and the notice icon of "old man" When I33 is digested, the character of the lord and the character of the grandfather may appear and the lord & grandfather reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of "Den", the notice icon I32 of "Princess", and the notice icon I33 of "Grandfather" are digested, the character of the lord, the character of the princess, and the character of the grandfather appear. The princess & grandfather reach may be started. In this way, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

Further, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned notice of reach effect and background display, and for example, the effect mode in the jackpot game and the mode during symbol change are changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as characters that increase the notice icon) may be given. Further, the effect performed by digesting the notice icon is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music, etc.) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed, or the digested notice icon may be used. The effect may be performed by the corresponding light emission pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 107, an example in which an effect may be performed for each of the time when the notice icon I21 of the “house” is digested and the time when the notice icon I22 of the “crest” is digested. explain.

First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 107 (d1), the notice icon I21 of the "house" is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of the "crest". I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state by the "decoration 1", and the reach effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (d2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, only the "house" notice icon I21 of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested. It is shown that it is. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), the notice icon I21 of the "house" is enlarged and displayed as the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested to change to the chance symbol which is a special symbol.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in connection with the display of the chance symbol, or as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. In some cases, a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the above-mentioned swordsman reach may be performed. In addition, it is possible to shift to the swordsman reach after performing the effect of dropping the family crest character 224B without displaying the effect image, or to the swordsman reach without dropping the effect image or the family crest character 224B. You may want to migrate. Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (d4-3), the normal reach effect may be started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of the “house”.

In addition, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the stop display is performed by the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1", at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (d4-4). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters of "family crest challenge" indicating that the family crest challenge reach has been started are displayed. The first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated while maintaining the combination of "decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1" at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 107 (d5-4), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the character YM of the lord pulls the "crest" notice icon I22 with a rope, and the "crest" notice. It is suggested that the attraction of the icon I22 raises the expectation for the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4), when the character YM of the lord succeeds in attracting the notice icon I22 of the "crest", the family crest accessory 224B falls as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is performed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I22 of the "crest" was successfully digested. In addition, after the family crest fall production is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above will be performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4a), the rope pulled by the character YM of the lord may break and the "crest" notice icon I22 may fail to be attracted. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach may be started as described above. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower than that in the case where the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is successfully attracted. Further, as shown in FIG. 107 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by the character YM of the lord is broken and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" fails to be attracted, it is shown in FIG. 107 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied when the notice icon I22 of the "crest" is digested first. Further, it may be configured so that the family crest drop effect is more likely to occur when the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested than when the "house" notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be true.

In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "crest" notice icon I22, "den" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "old man" notice icon I33, these There may be a Gase notice icon that resembles an icon, for example, a "U" notice icon, a "shark" notice icon, an "old" notice icon, a "minister" notice icon, or an "auntie". You may prepare a notice icon or the like. For example, even if the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "shark" are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or the notice icon of "house" and the notice icon of "crest" are digested. The family crest drop effect may be performed less frequently when the "house" notice icon and the "shark" notice icon are digested than when the notice icon is displayed. In addition, the notice icon of Gase such as "shark" may be changed to the notice icon such as "crest".

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, one word is formed by the two characters "house" and "crest", and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirements for forming the word. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be applied to this production example. For example, a "suspicious" notice icon, a "similar" notice icon, and a "ream" notice icon may be applied. When the three icons of the icons are digested, the pseudo-continuous production may be performed.

Further, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest", when there is only one stock space in the notice icon display area 285. , The notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may not be displayed. Further, only one of the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not be displayed may be displayed as the notice icon. When there is a vacancy in the area 285, the display may be increased, or when there is no vacancy in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon displayed in the first place may not be digested. Further, even if the notice icon display area 285 becomes empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of them is not displayed by the time the notice icon I21 of the "house" and the notice icon I22 of the "crest" are exhausted, for example, "house". When the notice icon I21 of the "house" is digested, the notice icon I22 of the "crest" may be digested together, or only the notice icon I21 of the "house" may be digested.

FIG. 108 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is an increase effect of a notice icon and a digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification step by step. In FIG. 108, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 108 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice, and its display mode is another hold icon (for example, the first hold icon). It is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. The first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in a manner in which the decorative symbol is displayed in large size in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed small at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, shows how various parts are added. In FIG. 108 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows. The second hold icon h12, which is set, constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image imitating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen, and the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is the first. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 of is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image imitating the head of a snowman.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image imitating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

At the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed out, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the character YM of the lord moves to the predetermined throwing position and displays, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e4), the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, it can be said that the present embodiment has a function of stocking the notice parts constituting the hold icon in the notice icon display area 285. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 104 (6) to 104 (8).

FIG. 108 (e6) shows how the display result of the loss is derived, one of the pending variation displays of the special figure 1 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. The chance roulette display area 287 notifies, for example, that the hold icon is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, or the hold icon display mode, which is already the look-ahead notice display mode, is more reliable. Notifies that the display mode is changed to a higher degree. In addition, a big hit notice display in the running symbol change display is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that the notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e7), the variable display of the symbol is started in the chance roulette display area 287.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the third notice part P3 is digested. The third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon, which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses the fourth notice part P4. This fourth notice part P4 is an image imitating a muffler wrapped around the neck of a snowman.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 imitates the head constituting the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the snowman. The DJ character BY is placed on the upper part of the notice part P2, and while flying toward the upper left corner of the display screen, the fourth notice part P4 in possession is placed on the notice icon display area 285. 2 The effect display placed in the display area YA2 is performed. In the chance roulette display area 287, the variable display of the symbol is still performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e10), a display result in which the characters “Get” are displayed together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived in the chance roulette display area 287. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image imitating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is the first model that imitates the body forming the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 108 (e11'), the first notice icon in the notice icon display area 285 on which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. It may be displayed (stocked) once in the display area YA1. In this case, the notice icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1 but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notice icon third display area YA3 or the like).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 108 (e12), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and is removed. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". In this production example, the variable icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but it may be deleted. The fourth notice part P4 is still displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 108 (e13), the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the variable icon h0, which is a display mode of the snowman. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wrapped around the neck of the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the snowman, and the variable icon h0 (or the hold icon), which is the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot in the symbol variation display is high. When the display mode of the completed snowman is a hold icon, it is displayed as a look-ahead notice, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot in the fluctuation is high.

Further, the fourth notice part P4 may be attached not only during the normal symbol variation display but also when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 108 (e14-2). As shown in FIG. 108, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth notice part P4 is digested in the swordsman reach, and is attached to the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (e15-2). You may do so. Here, as the variable icon h0 shifts to super reach, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed out downward, and the display position is displaced downward accordingly.

In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. The display may be made. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of look-ahead, functions as a look-ahead notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not the target of look-ahead. , It may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

FIG. 109 is a diagram stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment, and is an increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the digestion effect stepwise, and FIG. 110 is the figure which shows the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. In FIGS. 109 to 110, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 109, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h12 is the target of the look-ahead notice. However, the display mode is, for example, 1. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default. Further, FIGS. 109 to 110 are different from the above-described embodiment in that the first decorative symbol display device 208A as the main display device and the second decorative symbol display device 208B as the sub display device are provided. .. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

As shown in FIG. 109 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A performs the second. Variable display of decorative patterns is performed. As shown in FIG. 109 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the character YM of the lord. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second display area is displayed. When the notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208B, the display area is increased and the notice icon can be stocked. Often, for example, each time the display area being displayed is full with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are full with the notice icon. May display all the remaining four display areas that were hidden. Further, when the character YM of the lord appears, the display area may be increased by the number of the notice icons possessed by the character YM of the lord. Specifically, for example, when the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icons. In the case where the character YM of the lord possesses one notice icon when the production of the lord is started, one display area is displayed when the character YM of the lord throws the notice icon. It may be increased by the amount, or all the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. In addition, when the character YM of the lord possesses three notice icons, the display area may be increased by only three when the character YM of the lord throws the notice icon. , The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, but in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, when four display areas less than eight are displayed, the second display area is displayed. When the notice icon is displayed in all four display areas displayed on the decorative design display device 208B, the notice icon display area (first notice) consisting of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed is displayed. The icon display area) is reduced, and the notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) consisting of four new display areas where the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed, and this second notice icon is displayed. A new stock notice icon may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing for displaying the second notice icon display area may be the timing when the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing when the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the notice icon display area 285 may be reduced and displayed, or the number of stocks of the notice icon may be displayed instead of the notice icon display area 285. , The notice icon display area 285A may be erased. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

After the character YM of the lord moves to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (3) and displays the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (4), the notice icon display area 285A An effect display is performed to throw at. In this production example, the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lord is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. When displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B may not be straddled. For example, the first decorative symbol display device may be displayed. The notice icon displayed on the 208A that has entered the predetermined warp entrance may be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 109 (6), In the first decorative pattern display device 208A, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, foretelling that there is a possibility that the pseudo continuous effect effect will be executed in the future. After that, the character YM of the lord is framed out toward the lower side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

FIG. 109 (7) is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, as a result of performing the symbol variation display based on the hold of the variation display of the first special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 109 (8), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, "decoration 7-decoration 6" -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the off display is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued as usual, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 109 (9), on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the hold icon h11 of the special diagram 1 is moved by the movement animation. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 109 (10), the notice icon first of the notice icon display area 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The display that the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is digested is started. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed to move from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. When the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, at this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (11), the digested hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (12). Will be done. The digested notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (11) indicates the timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display on the first decorative symbol display. It may be the timing when the device 208A is moved to the center, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 109 (12) is enlarged and displayed.

In FIG. 110 (13), which continues from FIG. 109 (12), the character display of "continuation" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat. The timing of switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the character display of "continue" is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed, or the timing before the character display of "continuation" is additionally displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing of FIG. 110 (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased together with the character display of "continue", and the second decorative symbol display device 208B gives a notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed over two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left symbol, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown to be in a non-reach state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (16), the enlarged character BC2 of the Bancho appears, is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and then is displayed in FIG. 110. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the Bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed is displayed. It is performed and informs the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production is started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the character BC of the Bancho is displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 110 (16), the character BC2 of the Bancho does not have to be displayed straddling the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, "displaying across" is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Further, the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be used for integrated display. Further, the display moving from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed in from above the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the display is performed so as to move downward at a low speed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

Then, as shown in FIG. 110 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (19). After that, for example, the pseudo-continuous production is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 84 (31) and later.

111 and 112 are diagrams showing stepwise another modification of the notice icon increasing effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect step by step. In FIGS. 111 to 113, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 111 and 112, the hold icon, which is the target of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon display area 281, is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

In FIGS. 111 (a1) to 111 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 109 to 110, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The difference is that when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered, it is configured so that it can overlap the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size over the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the symbol is variablely displayed. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above as shown in FIG. 108, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 111 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps substantially the center of the front surface side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B switches from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image that surrounds the periphery of the second decorative symbol display device 208B to make the second decorative symbol display device 208B stand out. Since the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 111 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG. 109 (2) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (a4), after the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. 111 As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and the stop display is stopped by the combination of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2" which is the result of the loss. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not deleted, but it may be deleted at a timing before the variation display of the special figure 1 ends. Further, in FIG. 111 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol is not displayed, but the first decorative symbol is displayed and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this production example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during the symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during the symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without interruption regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is in progress.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised even after the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A are exhausted is completed, but at what timing 2 Whether to raise the decorative symbol display device 208B can be appropriately set. At the timing shown in FIG. 111 (a5-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are lost as a result of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2". The stop is displayed by the combination of. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 111 (a6-2) shows that after that, two holds are exhausted and the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. Specifically, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the variation of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display is being made.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 expands as shown in FIG. 111 (a7-2). Then, it is displayed so as to extend from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Further, below the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat, the character display of "continue" for notifying that the pseudo-continuous production will be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It is displayed over. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that the player can easily see it. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then rise and return to the initial position, or may maintain the lowered state until the symbol variation is completed.

In FIGS. 111 (b1) to 111 (b4), the number of notice icon displays is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 208) instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. An example in which the device 288 is provided is shown. The notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) on which the notice icon is displayed.

FIGS. 111 (b1) to 111 (b3) have the same effect contents as those of FIGS. 83 (17) to (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, It is shown that the numerical value changes according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. That is, in FIG. 111 (b1), since only one notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, "01" indicating the number is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. There is. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b2), the character YM of the lord throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10). However, since it has not yet been displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. The value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM of the lord throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called ghost is displayed). Then, when the above-mentioned three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (b3), the value is updated and "04" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (b4), when the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the notice icons is reduced by one, the value is updated and "03" is displayed on the notice icon display number display device 288. The timing for reducing and displaying the value of the notice icon display number display device may be the timing before the notice icon is digested, may be at the same time as the notice icon is digested, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be the timing after digestion. As shown by the broken line, the value does not decrease even if the notice icon is digested, and the total number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (4 in this example) is counted and displayed. You may do so. In this effect example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments, but for example, an operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, for example, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, or a sound, a decorative symbol display device (a decorative symbol display device on which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other decorative symbol display devices) The number of notice icons displayed may be notified by a decorative pattern display device or the like).

The production example shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c9) uses two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 109 to 110. However, they differ in that they use the same size display device. In FIG. 112, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 112 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The mode is, for example, the default display mode as in the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are They are arranged so as to substantially overlap. The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second hold number display H1 and the special figure 2 second hold number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are held. "2" and "0" are displayed corresponding to the numbers, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 112 (c1). At the timing shown in, the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-mentioned chance roulette display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed. It is shown. Further, the background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

As shown in FIG. 112 (c1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the second decorative symbol display device 208D is the first decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 112 (c2). It descends to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display was performed was switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B, and was derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously performed, but the size of the symbol becomes smaller and is displayed only in the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

In FIG. 112 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon 1st display area YA1 and the notice icon 2nd display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YA3. .. Since the number of holdings is one at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c3), "1" indicating that is displayed in the special figure 1 second holding number display H1.

FIG. 112 (c4) shows the state when the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the notice icon I7 of the shuriken. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 112 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1" which is the result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of this loss is an opportunity, and it is informed that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by displaying this chance eye.

FIG. 112 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol change of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is foretelling that the second pseudo-ream notice will be made. Since the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And, it will be displayed on the entire two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (c9), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the second hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the stop display is displayed. An effect display is performed to push up the right symbol, and the player is notified that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the character BC of the Bancho is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 112 (c9), when the decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a number symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying a decorative symbol in a small size, a small symbol consisting of only a number symbol is displayed, and the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed in different display modes, but the large symbol and the small symbol are displayed. It is also possible to make the display mode the same by changing only the size.

In this production example, when the notice icon display area 285B is displayed, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. , Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved in the directions in which they are separated from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display When the devices 208D are separated from each other, the accessories arranged on the back side thereof may be visible, and further, the accessories may be moved so as to project forward. You may. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are exhausted.

FIG. 112 (d) shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, in FIG. 112 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208E arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. It should be noted that all three decorative symbol display devices may have the same size.

The variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed over three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (d), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively. In particular, the notice icon second display area YA2 The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed on the above is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. Further, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3, and the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device for each symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display area 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display. It is displayed on the device 208G. In addition, there may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Further, there may be a decorative design display device in which the effect display related to the notice icon is not displayed. This is applicable both in the examples described so far and in the examples described below.

FIG. 113 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, in FIG. 113, the first decorative symbol display device 208H arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display device 208I arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. , The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction as compared with the first decorative symbol display device 208H, but are slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with frame portions protruding from the upper end side, the lower end side, and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J has the upper end side, the lower end side, and the right end side. Each frame is provided so as to project. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, respectively, and when they are closest to each other, they are positioned. It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The whole can be covered.

Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done.

FIG. 113 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 85 (47), and covers the entire display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. It is shown that the swordsman reach is being carried out. That is, in FIG. 113 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the Senryo box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, and it is announced that the production will shift to a more reliable production. It is shown that it is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start moving in directions close to each other. At this time, both ends of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, so that the display state is difficult to see. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digesting the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 113 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to the positions closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is almost invisible. It becomes a state. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J perform the reach transition effect as shown in FIG. 85 (49). That is, the reach effect display that was being executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J became slightly darker, and the character of the lord appeared in the cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed The display is cut off. This display is rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e3) to 113 (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrally formed on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise along. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect starts before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to accept the operation of the effect button 136. Notifies that this is possible and encourages the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol reduced and displayed is performed at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 113 (e7), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are covered with "decoration 1-decoration 2-". The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1".

After that, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e8) to 113 (e9), all of them are temporarily hidden, and in that state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. The first decorative symbol display device 208H is rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface.

Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e10), Along with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display of the fluctuation variation (temporary symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (e11-1), the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1" that has fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of the loss.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the display that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (e11-2). That is, the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed to move from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate even if the notice icon is digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (e12-2), the effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed, and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbol is reduced and displayed and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the revariable display is performed. After that, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" 1-A combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 1") is derived and displayed.

FIG. 113 (e7') shows an example in which a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in the figure (e6) is performed. It is a figure. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in a direction away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (e7'), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the grandfather's character is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

FIG. 113 (e7 ″) is configured so that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. An example of the production when it is done is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e3) to 113 (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also has these. It is also possible to rotate it together with. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be integrally configured or separately. It may be configured as a body and may be configured to be driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be rotated in a state where it is difficult to see by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player after the display shown in the figure (e6) is performed, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, and unlike FIG. 113 (e7'), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208I. It is possible to display in a state where the widths of the display screens of the decorative pattern display device 308J are the same.

FIG. 114 is a diagram stepwise showing another modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 114, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative design display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative design display device 208 via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. A light emitting means such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the first layer panel arranged on the front side is provided with a lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is arranged on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is provided with a lens cut that imitates a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 114, the light guide plate IL is shown surrounded by a broken line. Further, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL panel is not limited to two, and may be one layer or three or more layers. Here, when it is composed of one layer, for example, by changing the lens cut pattern, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when the light is emitted may be different. Further, in FIG. 114, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 114, the hold icon, which is the target of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon display area 281, is hatched for the preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and the variable icon display area 280 and the variable icon display area 280 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and the chance roulette display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. The content displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is as described above as shown in FIG. 108, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 114 (f1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a dark display as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-1). At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. That is, in FIG. 114 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the darkening display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. After that, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (turns off), and the blackout display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The blackout display of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be ended after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat derived and displayed in the chance roulette display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. While displaying the movement toward, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be asked.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 114 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display and guides. The stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. You may do so. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured separately by the panel of the first layer and the panel of the second layer. In this case, for example, only the panel of the second layer is rotated and the first layer is rotated. The layer panel may not be rotated, or the first layer panel may be rotated along with the second layer panel.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, thereby pseudo in the future. It is foretold that the continuous production will be executed.

FIG. 114 (g) shows how the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 has been digested. As shown in FIG. 114 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing. The warning icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the warning icon I6 of the hat.

FIG. 114 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the stock effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows that it has been announced in advance. As shown in FIG. 114 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the symbol is performed in the chance roulette display area 287 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL is made to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat. Notice The notice that the icon I6 will be derived.

FIG. 114 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (i), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate is erased. A pattern imitating the warning icon I6 of the hat is formed by emitting light of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of IL, and the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer is also emitted to imitate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer and the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer are different, the pattern formed on the panel of the first layer and the second layer In some cases, the patterns formed on the panels of the above can be made to stand out.

FIG. 114 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 114 (j), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The display is enlarged to fill the screen, and at that timing, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL is made to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, and the notice icon digestion effect is performed. At this time, although the notice icon display area 285 is erased, it may be in the displayed state.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect of the notice icon digestion effect. In addition, in FIGS. 115 (1) to 115 (11), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon 4th display area YA4 is replaced with the fan notice icon I10 and is replaced with the drink notice icon I31. Since it is the same as FIGS. 85 (44) to 85 (54), only the parts different from the above description will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85, and the common parts will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is configured to be able to project upward by an actuator such as a motor, and its position can be displaced according to the content of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed to a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

As shown in FIG. 115 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I31 of this drink is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

At the timing shown in FIG. 115 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 115 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon I31 is digested. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is enlarged and displayed, and the button image 136a is sprinkled with the contents of the drink.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is the state before the start of operation acceptance of the effect button 136.

Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (17), as shown in FIG. 115 (18), the button reception time meter is reduced in the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. The timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 115 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. It may be the timing before the display of, or it may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Further, in the period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, the light is turned on in a manner of notifying that the period is other than the operation reception period (for example, it lights in blue), and when the operation reception period is reached, the operation reception period is reached. It may be lit (for example, lit in red) in a manner of notifying that fact.

FIG. 116 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect using a movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 116 (a1) to 116 (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the stock of the notice icon. There is. FIG. 116 (a1) has the same display as that of FIG. 104 (1), but the effect movable body 224C imitating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect device. It is arranged so as to be hidden behind the 206.

FIG. 116 (a2) shows how the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden in the effect device 206 to the visible position which is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that one of the plurality of types of notice icons will be stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified. For example, the type of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the notice may be given by voice, a lamp, or the like. , A plurality of types of the effect movable body 224C may be prepared according to the type of the advance notice icon, and the type of the advance notice icon stocked depending on the type of the effect movable body 224C that appears may be notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, the stock notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 116 (a3) shows how the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

In FIG. 116 (b), effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate with the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the upper and lower neighborhoods of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first effect movable body 224 Da with the letters "Large", the fifth effect movable body 224 De with the asterisk symbol, and the "board". The second effect movable body 224Db with the characters of is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc with the characters of "shake" is attached. The sixth effect movable body 224Df with the asterisk symbol and the fourth effect movable body 224Dd with the characters "Mai" are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The first effect movable body 224Da to the sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate according to the number of (stocked) notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd are displayed. Rotates. When the notice icon is digested, the rotation of the digested number of effect movable bodies may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of stocked notice icons may be rotated. May be good.

FIGS. 116 (c1) to 116 (c6) show that the pre-reading mode is notified by operating the effect movable body 224. In this production example, the special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the mode shifts to the look-ahead mode for notifying that the variable display of the special figure, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended.

FIG. 116 (c1) shows how the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. On the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 224 imitating an arm is arranged. The effect movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the base end portion of the upper arm portion 224a is rotatably attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation shaft ax1. .. Further, the forearm portion 224b is rotatably attached to the tip end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation shaft ax2 at its base end portion.

When the notice icon I41 of the special training is digested and the look-ahead mode is started, as shown in FIG. 116 (c2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "preparing for special training" is displayed on the right in the strip-shaped scroll display area. It is scrolled to the left from. As a result, the player is notified that the read-ahead mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, the initial position where the upper arm portion 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the position covering the front side of the upper right corner portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position). A reciprocating operation (look-ahead operation) is performed between the two. The look-ahead operation by the effect movable body 224 is set to temporarily return to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but the operation may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, during the execution of the look-ahead operation, only the upper arm portion 224a operates and the forearm portion 224b does not operate, but the forearm portion 224b may also operate in addition to the upper arm portion 224a, or the forearm portion 224a does not operate and the forearm portion 224a does not operate. Only part 224b may operate.

FIG. 116 (c3) shows a state in which two “decorations 1” are aligned to form a reach state during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading. Here, too, the look-ahead operation is continuously performed.

FIG. 116 (c4) shows how the special training reach as a super reach effect has started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of "preparing for special training" is finished, and the characters "start of special training" indicating that the special training reach has been started are displayed. Further, in the effect movable body 224, after returning to the initial position once, the upper arm portion 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 116 (c5), and then as shown in FIG. 116 (c6). In addition, the forearm portion 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum moving position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, and notifies that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

FIG. 117 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing another effect example of the increase effect of the notice icon stepwise. Is. In FIG. 117, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 117, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h12 is the target of the look-ahead notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

Since FIG. 117 (1) has the same display as that of FIG. 104 (1) described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 117 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat.

In this production example, the character YM of the lord moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (3), but the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses has not yet thrown, and FIG. 117 (4) As shown in the above, while the character YM of the lord is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 117 (5), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special diagram 1 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is special drawing 1. It becomes the first hold icon h11 of. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The character YM of the lord is still waiting at the throwing position.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (6), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, the advance notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display that is being executed, but the advance notice icon is stocked. Instead, the notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts. In addition, when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, a notice is given that the notice icon will be displayed during the running symbol change display, but the notice icon is not displayed. You may. In this case, for example, the character YM of the lord may end the display by the time the variable display of the symbol to be read ahead starts, for example, one before the variable display of the symbol to be read ahead. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is completed. For example, the super reach performed during the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is started. The display of the character YM of the lord may be terminated before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of the lord may be continuously displayed even after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character of the lord is on standby and a big hit occurs in the symbol fluctuation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example). , During the shaking fluctuation display), the standby display may be continued with the character of the lord holding the notice icon, or may be deleted.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are performed, and the effects shown in FIGS. 117 (7) to (10) are shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to 82 (10). Since it is the same as (12) except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 117 (11) shows how the result of the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be read ahead is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 117 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. There is. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In FIG. 117 (12), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 117 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. The notice icon digestion effect is performed.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of another effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIG. 118, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 118, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

In FIGS. 118 (a1) to 118 (a6), the notice icon is stocked after the effect of notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

FIG. 118 (a1) shows that when the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanatory display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 118 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, the character display of "Item Get by strike" indicating that the item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, if a strike is won in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a bowling effect by the character of the lord has started. The contents of the mission and its success reward displayed on the explanation display unit 288 are related to the stock of the notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice, and are being executed. It may be related to the notice about the symbol variation display of. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display displayed only on the notice regarding the stock of the notice icon. In this production example, it can be said that the notice notification that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing the bowling effect as shown in FIG. 118 (a1). In addition, this bowling effect may be a dedicated effect performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the running symbol change display, or may be used as another look-ahead advance notice. May be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect is not finished, and the character display of "following the next fluctuation" is displayed indicating that the bowling effect is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. In addition, "Strike item Get" indicating the mission and its success reward is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the ball thrown by the character of the lord rolls on the lane and heads toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , Fueling the expectation that notice icons may be stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the scene where the strike was taken is displayed together with the character display of "strike", and it is assumed that the mission has been achieved, as shown in FIG. 118 (a5). As shown, the character display of "GET" is displayed together with the enlarged notice icon I6 of the hat to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. You will be notified that it has been stocked. As described above, in this effect example, the notice item is displayed without displaying the notice item (stock) during the symbol change display that is being executed when the symbol change display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. Has been announced.

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-mentioned bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display devices 208K are arranged side by side on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The notice icon display area 285C that displays the display area WP2 and displays the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-mentioned boring effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the stock notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. It may be displayed in.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 118, when a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, when the bowling effect is started at the timing of displaying the big hit symbol derived after the super reach (for example, during the shaking fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a background display different from this may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 118 (a2) may be displayed.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 118 (b), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. .. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 118 (c), if a big hit occurs during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub-display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. You may.

FIG. 119 is a diagram stepwise showing another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, the variable display of the special figure 2 is given priority over the special figure 1, but in this production example, either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game is prioritized. However, it is applied to the game in which the special figure variation game related to the holding of each of the special figures 1 and 2 is started in the starting opening winning order, and the starting opening winning order is changed. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to a special figure 2 priority variation. Further, in FIG. 119, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 119, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold icon h13 is the target of the look-ahead advance notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1. Similar to the second hold icon h11, the display mode is the default. Further, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h11, the third hold icon h12, and the fifth hold icon h13 are located at the first special figure start port 230. It is a hold icon indicating the variable display of the special figure 1 which has been won and held, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been held by winning the second special figure start port 232. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2.

The effect shown in FIG. 119 is an effect that may be started after the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg and reaches the destination. It is a production (Amida production) to acquire notice items and the like.

First, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2", and displays the variation of the special figure 2. It has been reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Amida effect has started. Specifically, when the Amida production is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1), the Sabohani character SB is assigned to any one of the starting points of the three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Is arranged, and a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a loss icon IX are placed at each end point of each of the three horizontal lines. In addition, a number of vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central portion of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined according to, for example, the number of reservations at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited to this. In this Amida production, when the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the Amida rule and reaches the end point where the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 is placed, the notice icon is stocked. When the end point where the lost icon IX is placed is reached, it is notified that the notice icon will not be stocked. Then, each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. In addition, the character SB of Sabohani may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged every time the pseudo-ream is performed. For example, when the pseudo-ream occurs, it advances to the vertical line two ahead. Etc. In addition, one symbol variation display may be advanced to two or more vertical lines ahead. It should be noted that the effect as shown in FIG. 119 can be performed, for example, in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K as described above in FIGS. 118 (c) and 118 (d). is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue to display the effect even during the execution of Super Reach. Then, for example, it may be possible to simultaneously perform an effect in which the notice icon increases during super reach.

Then, when the variable display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon is moved. The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the other hold icons move to the right one by one. On the other hand, the decorative design starts to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the character SB of Sabohani starts moving from the start point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is started. When it reaches the line, the smoke that was hiding the vertical line is erased, and it is displayed that the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are connected by the vertical line, and the character SB of Sabohani moves on the vertical line. At the timing shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1), the character reaches the middle of the horizontal line in the middle row.

After that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is completed, the variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. Will be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the second vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the lower row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, it was found that this vertical line was cut off in the middle, and the vertical line could not be moved from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the character SB of Sabohani was in the middle. Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

Then, when the variation display of the special figure 2 is completed, the variation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation, respectively. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), when the character SB of Sabohani reaches the third vertical line connecting the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. .. As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the horizontal line in the middle row and the horizontal line in the upper row. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the character SB of Sabohani reaches the end point of the horizontal line in the upper row where the notice icon I6 of the hat is arranged, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the display indicating that the acquisition is performed, the Amida effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Will be done.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-1) and described above, any one of the plurality of different types of notice icons was selected. For example, in FIG. 119 (a1-a1-). As shown in 2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line, and as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the notice icon I10 of the fan is placed at all the end points of the horizontal line. May be good. By arranging the same type of notice icons at all the end points of the horizontal lines in this way, it is possible to notify the player that it is confirmed that the displayed notice icons will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3), the fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the jackpot will be confirmed is performed as described above. In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be further increased. The production as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-3) is a kind of premier production that rarely appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), the loss icon IX is not arranged, and the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 are placed at the end points of each horizontal line. You may make sure that one of the notice icons is always in stock. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the Amida production with peace of mind.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), the Sabohani character SB is arranged at all the start points of the horizontal lines, and the notice icons (hat notice icon I6, fan notice icon I10) are placed at the end points of each horizontal line. And it may be confirmed that all of the notice icons I9) of the Senryo box are stocked. Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 119 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is guaranteed that the effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed will be performed, so that the player goes to the big hit. It may be possible to further raise the expectation of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-6), the notice icon of the lord whose type of notice icon is not clear at the end point of each horizontal line (notice icon I1 of the first lord, notice icon I2 of the second lord, second The notice icon I3) of the lord of 3 may be placed, and in this way, the player does not know what kind of notice icon will be stocked until the end point is reached. It may be possible to improve expectations. In addition, as mentioned above, the color of the notice icon of the lord differs depending on the type, and the reliability of the jackpot differs depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the notice icon after the change from the notice icon of the lord, depending on which color of the notice icon of the lord is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is the notice icon of the red lord, is more likely to be changed to the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ren" is confirmed than the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ren" is not confirmed, and the white lord. On the contrary, the notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon of the above, can be easily changed to the notice icon in which the "pseudo-ream" is not fixed.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke to make it difficult to identify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. For example, FIG. 119. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be hidden by smoke, and the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida effect is started. As a result, the player can recognize in advance which notice icon will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the Amida effect with peace of mind. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the start point of the horizontal line on which the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to make the effect more exciting.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the Amida production is displayed so as to be recognizable. , As shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2), during the execution of the Amida effect, the area where the notice icon placed at the end point of each horizontal line is displayed is hidden by smoke, and then FIG. 119 (a2-2a). ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a2-2a), the lost icon IX is changed to the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, and the content of the Amida production is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons placed at the end points of each horizontal line will be changed to the lost icon IX or the lower rank notice icon, so that the contents of the Amida production will be demoted. It may be.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), the central portion of the vertical line is hidden by smoke so that the traveling route of the character SB of Sabohani can be predicted to some extent. As shown in a4-2), the smoke hiding a part of the vertical line extends in the vertical direction during the execution of the Amida effect, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a). The vertical lines may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 119 (a4-2a), it was suggested that either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 could be obtained before the smoke was extended, but after the smoke disappeared. Then, the third vertical line disappears, and it is guaranteed that the fan notice icon I10 will be stocked.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a4-1), since the second vertical line is cut off in the middle, the loss icon IX was not selected. As shown in 119 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut, so that after the loss icon IX is selected and the Amida production is completed, FIG. 119 (a4-3a) As shown in the above, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any of the display areas of the notice icon display area 285.

In the above-mentioned Amida effect, a look-ahead notice for the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead may be given depending on the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect stepwise. is there. In FIG. 120, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 120, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display to be read ahead, and the hold display is the display mode of the look-ahead notice (hold icon of Sabohani). It differs from the above-described embodiment in that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the upper part. In FIG. 120 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 120 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 responds to the first decorative symbol and the second decoration. The variable display of the design is performed.

Further, in FIG. 120 (1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area 280, and the two special figure 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the variable icons h0 of these two special drawings 1 are both displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (2), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. It is displayed and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed not in the default display mode but in the look-ahead notice display mode (sabohani display mode).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280 to become the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The icon h11 is set, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 120 (5) shows how the symbol variation display is continuously performed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the lord appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lord effect is started. Here, the character YM of the lord possesses the notice icon I6 of the hat. In this way, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is being performed when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. A certain lord production has started.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (7), the character YM of the lord moves and displays the character YM to the predetermined throwing position, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (8), the notice icon I6 of the hat in possession is displayed as a notice icon. An effect display of throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then, as shown in FIG. 120 (10). In the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect display is performed in which the character YM of the lord succeeds in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 120 (11) to 120 (12), the character YM of the lord is displayed to be framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 120 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 2", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (14), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 is moved to the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. ..

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2" at the timing shown in FIG. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 120 (16), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon display area 280 is moved to the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is started.

Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 120 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notice icon in the first display area YA1. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested. The notice icon digestion effect is performed. As described above, according to this production example, it can be said that the look-ahead notice by the hold icon is performed at the same time as the look-ahead notice by the notice icon.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and stepwise shows another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect. It is a figure which shows. In FIG. 121, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 121, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 121 (a1) to 121 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is performed to notify in advance that the notice icon will be stocked. As shown in FIG. 121 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1", and the display is out of alignment. The result is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the movement is displayed by the movement animation, and the hold is held at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The icon moves to the variable icon display area 280 and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the third hold icon h13. The hold icon at the display position becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 that announces that the notice icon will be stocked in the next symbol variation display to be started. Specifically, on this placard PL1, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed following "at the next fluctuation", and then "is stock" is displayed, and a hat notice icon I6 is displayed. Is informed that it will always be stocked during the next symbol change display.

After that, when the variation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the variation display ends and the next variation display of the special figure 1 is started, for example, a lord effect is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the figure is shown. As shown in 121 (a3-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. As a result, the player can recognize in advance that the notice icon I6 of the hat will be stocked, so that the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In the above-mentioned production example, the notice icon is always in stock when the placard PL1 is displayed. For example, the placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 121 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on this placard PL2, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed after "in the next fluctuation", and "is stock" is displayed following this, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the notice icon I6 of the hat may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

If the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked during the next symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 121 (a3-2), no effect regarding the stock of the notice icon is performed. It should be noted that the effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, the effect of the lord) may be performed, but in this case, the so-called stock stock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

FIGS. 121 (b1) to 121 (b3) show a pre-reading mode, which is one of the pre-reading notices, during the running symbol variation display at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. It is shown.

As shown in FIG. 121 (b1), the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230, and the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended, and the pre-reading notice is displayed as the display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode of is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special figure 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the look-ahead mode, which is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display, which is likely to be a big hit, is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "approaching intense heat" scroll from right to left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Is displayed.

After that, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the variation display ends, and the next variation display of the special figure 1 starts, as shown in FIG. 121 (b3), during the execution of the symbol variation display. The lord's production is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. As described above, according to this effect example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon, as well as a look-ahead notice by changing the background display.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 121 (c1) to 121 (c2), during the symbol variation display that is being executed at the time when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended, a lord-like effect or the like is performed and a notice icon is displayed. May be stocked.

FIGS. 121 (d1) to 121 (d3) show how the advance notice icon is stocked and digested during the execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, the stock and digestion of the notice icon relating to the advance notice effect during the symbol variation display are also feasible.

As shown in FIG. 121 (d1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by the direction of the lord, the notice icon I6 of the hat displays the notice icon as shown in FIG. 121 (d2). The notice icon in the area 285 is temporarily stocked in the first display area YA1. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 121 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

As shown in FIGS. 121 (e1) to 121 (e2), the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown into the notice icon display area 285 by the direction of the lord, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may do so.

FIG. 122 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and is different from the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of. In FIG. 122, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in FIG. 122, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held, but the display mode is as follows. For example, like the first hold icon h11, the display mode is the default.

FIGS. 122 (a1) to 122 (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are also used.

As shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is a “castle town”. There is. In addition to displaying the current stage name, the stage display area 289 may display tutorials such as the content of the notice and the explanation of the characters appearing, or the notice may be displayed. May be good. In this way, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanatory display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a1), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the above-mentioned lord effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a2), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the character display of "stock" is added, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked. Is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is given. The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

As shown in FIGS. 122 (b1) to 122 (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice icon I6 of the hat that appears due to the production of the lord is not stocked as it is. You may try to digest it. As a result, it is possible to perform the digestion effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol change display.

FIGS. 122 (c1) to 122 (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and a notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 122 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first notice icon display area 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and the second notice icon display area is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this production example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area in which a notice icon other than the button notice icon is displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E is provided with four display areas (notice icon first display area YAL1, notice icon second display area YAL2, notice icon third display area YAL3, notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon 1st display area YAL1 and the notice icon 2nd display area YAL2, respectively, and the notice icon I7 of the back sword is displayed in the notice icon 3rd display area YAL3. It is displayed. In addition, the second notice icon display area 285F also has four display areas (notice icon first display area YAR1, notice icon second display area YAR2, notice icon third display area YAR3, notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and the notice icon is not displayed in any of the display areas. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the substantially center of the display screen, and it is shown that these second button notice icons I11 are stocked. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F, respectively. In this production example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4, respectively. After that, that is, when the second button notice icon I11 is filled up in the second notice icon display area 285F and then these second button notice icons I11 are exhausted, the number is smaller than this. Even if the reliability of the jackpot is different from the case where the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F and then these second button notice icons I11 are digested. Often, for example, the larger the number of the second button notice icon I11 in stock, the more likely it is to be a big hit. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 need to be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two may be digested. In this case, In, the remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display, or may be erased without being digested. Further, the first notice icon display area 285E may also be configured so that the reliability for the jackpot differs depending on the number of stocked notice items.

FIGS. 122 (d1) to 122 (d3) show other examples of the increase effect of the notice icon.

As shown in FIG. 122 (d1), the notice icon I6s of the hat is displayed small on the variable icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the notice icon I7s of the shuriken is the first hold. It is displayed small on top of the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which the hold icon may be displayed including the notice icon is shown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (d2), the notice icon I6s of the reduced hat, which was displayed on the variable icon h0, pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, and the character display "stock" is added to notify that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Will be done. In this production example, every time the hold of the symbol variation display is exhausted, the effect of stocking the notice icon displayed on the change icon h0 is performed, but the timing of stocking the notice icon is set to this. Not limited.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 122 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the variable icon and the hold icon, but may be displayed only on some of the variable icon or the hold icon.

FIGS. 122 (f1) to 122 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon h0.

FIG. 122 (f1) shows the same figure (d1) as described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, after that, the erasing animation of the variable icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (f2), and then the variable icon is started as shown in FIG. 122 (f3). Although h0 is erased, at this time, along with the variable icon h0, the hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variable icon h0 is also erased, and it is notified that the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked. In this way, even if the notice icon is displayed on the variable icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

FIGS. 122 (g1) to 122 (g3) show that when a certain notice icon is digested, the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 122 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I51 of the bouquet includes two or more of the above-mentioned plurality of types of notice icons with reference to FIG. 81 (b), but it is not possible to determine which of the notice icons is included. It is a difficult aspect to identify.

Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is enlarged and displayed after moving from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen. To.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (g3), the display of the bouquet notice icon I51 changes to the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8, and the type of the notice icon included in the bouquet notice icon I51. Becomes recognizable. Therefore, the player may be able to have the pleasure of stocking the notice icon and have a sense of expectation as to which type of notice icon is included.

In the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be continued to be displayed even after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display may be suspended. Not only when the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, but also when the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and displayed without holding the symbol fluctuation display, the stock status even during the demo display. May be maintained. Further, as long as the notice icon is stocked, the stock state may be maintained regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display is held.

Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be noticed.

Further, the stocked notice icon may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to the fan notice icon I10. , When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of chance eyes while the hat notice icon I6 is in stock, the hat notice icon I6 may be changed to the notice icon I9 of the 1000-car box. .. On the contrary, the stocked notice icon may be demoted (leveled down).

Further, the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (level up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The effect of changing to the notice icon I10 of the fan may be performed while the notice icon I10 of the hat is being used, or the number of pseudo-reams may be increased in the pseudo-ream effect executed by digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat. Good. On the contrary, the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed, but it may not be displayed.

When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed, but it may not be displayed.

Further, it may be decided whether or not to give a notice to stock the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

Further, the length of the variation display time when the advance notice for stocking the notice icon is not performed between the symbol variation display that is a big hit and the symbol variation display that is a loss may be the same or different.

Further, as the variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, a variation time having a length that does not stock the notice icon may be selected.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the advance notice of stocking the notice icon may be regulated in a controlled manner.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the effect data table may be set so as not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, the variation time of the length for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stock notice icon may be digested in the interrupted symbol variation display of the special figure 1, or may be digested during the interrupted symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Further, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed, it is stocked in the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is performed before the interruption. The notice icon may remain in stock and not be digested, or it may be configured to be digested.

Further, the type of the notice icon is not limited to the one described above or the one described later, and various types can be adopted.

For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon, and when this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player's selection. It may be possible to increase the possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode).

Further, for example, an item for production selection may be displayed, and when the item for production selection is exhausted, for example, BGM can be changed, the production mode can be changed, volume setting, and the like. The brightness may be set.

Further, for example, an item for clearing user settings may be displayed, and when this item for clearing user settings is exhausted, for example, the user settings may be made clear, or the user settings may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

Further, for example, the effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is exhausted, for example, the look-ahead mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. It may be possible to end after confirming the end of the look-ahead mode or the end of the effect mode.

In addition, for example, points earned items and level-up gift items may be displayed, and when these items are digested, for example, points can be presented and the level can be raised. You may do it.

Further, for example, the reach effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started, and for example, when the icon of the lord is digested, the lord VS swordsman reach may be performed.

Further, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, the icon "next notice" is displayed, and the notice effect of "next notice" is displayed. May be started.

Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune-telling icon) in which fortune-telling is started when digested. In this case, the fortune-telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demo production, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demo production.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that displays information about the simultaneous island production when digested. For example, the countdown to the start of the simultaneous island production may be started, the time until the start of the simultaneous island production may be displayed, or the content of the next simultaneous island production may be displayed. May be good.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that can be customized on the store side when it is digested. For example, even if it is possible to set the production to be performed according to the area of the game store to be installed (for example, the Tohoku region mode, the Chubu region mode, etc.) and the name of the game store to be installed. Good. For example, depending on the setting, the group notice character that appears in the Tohoku region mode (for example, Namahage group) and the group notice character that appears in the Chubu region mode (for example, Shachihoko group) can be made different. In some cases.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the tutorial display when it is digested.

Also, for example, there may be an icon that starts the roulette effect when it is digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, or a result indicating that a notice about the symbol variation display is performed may be displayed.

Further, for example, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state when it is digested.

Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. Here, FIG. 123 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table related to notice items. Is.

FIG. 123 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. The normal figure display device 210, the normal figure holding lamp 216, and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (a), the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to each other on the left and right below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as if. In FIG. 123 (a), the number of reservations for both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment, is stopped and displayed. Further, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2, and the notice icon Ih of the princess is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icon is displayed left-justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as needed.

FIG. 123 (b) shows how two game balls have won a prize at the first special drawing start port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side left-justified. All of these hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special figure 1, since the first hold is exhausted, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is moved to the left side as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the game ball has won a prize in the second special figure start opening 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed left-justified in the hold icon display area 282A of the special figure 2. The hold icon h21 is the default display mode.

Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 123 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special figure 1 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice (the display mode displayed as "heat"). ).

After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, when the timing shown in FIG. 123 (e) is reached, the notice icon It of the lord and the notice icon Ih of the princess are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. To. That is, the notice icon is displayed to increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (f), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI appears with a balloon with the characters "Atari" and "Question mark". The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is the result of the deviation. Is notified.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, so that the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (h). To. In the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, if the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, a notice icon is displayed. Is not digested, and the notice icon is not increased. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit, it is possible not to perform either the digestion and the increase display of the notice icon, or when the digestion and the increase display of the notice icon are performed. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, and the hold icon display of the special figure 2 may be hidden. Only the area 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is interrupted, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When the dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (i), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 3", and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2 is out of order. ..

Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (j), after the pending symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the notice icon It of the lord is digested, and the "Atari" and "question mark" are displayed. The character YI of the lord appears with a balloon of character notation. The timing of the appearance of the character YI of the lord may be before, after, or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 123 (j), the notice icon Id of the villain is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, the notice icon is displayed to increase. Here, the timing at which the villain's notice icon Id is additionally displayed may be before, after, or at the same time the digestion display of the lord's notice icon It is started. It may be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the villain character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. Further, the appearance timing of the princess character HI may be before, after, or at the same time as the appearance timing of the villain character DI.

Then, at the timing of FIG. 123 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , It is notified that it was a big hit.

Subsequently, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for deciding whether or not to execute the increase display and the digestion display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a jackpot, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 There is a 1/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be increased, a 3/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be increased, and a 2/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be increased. .. On the other hand, there is a 40/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 35/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 25/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of. In addition, since the execution lottery for these increase display and digestion display is performed for each notice icon, when the increase display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time, or the digestion display is performed for two or more notice icons at the same time. There is.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is incorrect, the symbol variation display which is a jackpot is suspended as a result of the pre-reading of the hold of FIG. 64. There is a 3/50 chance of increasing the lord's notice icon, a 2/50 chance of increasing the princess' notice icon, and a 1/50 chance of increasing the villain's notice icon. Perform the display. On the other hand, there is a 1/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 10/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 15/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a jackpot, regardless of the pre-reading result of the hold of the special figure 1. , 25/50 chance to increase the lord's notice icon, 20/50 chance to increase the princess' notice icon, and 7/50 chance to increase the villain's notice icon. Execute. On the other hand, there is a 20/50 chance that the lord's notice icon will be digested, a 15/50 chance that the princess' notice icon will be digested, and a 5/50 chance that the villain's notice icon will be displayed. Perform a digestive display of. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not supposed to win a prize in the second special figure start port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, anytime The increase display may not be performed on the notice icon of, and the digestion display may not be performed on any of the notice icons.

In addition, if the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of order, the increase display is displayed for all the notice icons regardless of the pre-reading result of the hold of the special figure 1. No, and no digestion display is performed for any of the notice icons.

In addition, for example, when the electric support state ends and one or more holds remain for the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the hold of the special figure 2. Alternatively, the notice icon may be increased and displayed according to the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 137.

FIGS. 125 to 137 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 125 to 137, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 125 to 137 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 125 to 137, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion to which the light is irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 125 to 135 and 137, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the advance notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 125 stepwise. Is.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is located in the center of the UI portion. It is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, and various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), "Den-sama is the eighth shogun" is displayed, and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol, but is a display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage name is displayed in red when the stage is moved to a certain stage, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. To put it the other way around, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not as hot as the red stage name display, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 125 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed at all times.

Further, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (b), the hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) instead of the default display mode. At this time, a voice output of "pon" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice has been given by the hold display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (d) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" are still displayed. As described above, the explanatory display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord displays the icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It is shown trying to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the production when thrown by the character of the lord. The throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed with an animation in which the notice icon to be displayed can be specified or cannot be specified. In this case, it may be identifiable from the middle of throwing, or it may be identifiable from the beginning. In addition, the animation related to the notice icon (high expectation notice icon) with high expectation of big hit when digested and the animation related to the notice icon with low expectation of big hit when digested than the high expectation notice animation. , The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (f), it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (g), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...", and something happens when the notice icon is digested. There is an explanation of what will happen. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the bomb icon I61. It may be a timing after the move to. As described above, in the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of explanatory displays may be displayed in one symbol variation display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (i). .. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is an icon that announces the transition to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. Further, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" to notify the effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of 1 to 1 to many to many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 125 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the character of the lord. The animation ends. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Here, "difficult to see" means that it is more difficult to see than when the notice icon does not overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display section TT1 to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the tutorial display section TT1 display and the swordsman's notice icon I62 display. May be possible. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The position of the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be arranged in a position close to the tutorial display unit TT1 in addition to a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and the same effect can be obtained in this way. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the content having nothing to do with the swordsman's notice icon I62. The content may be related to the current production, or may have nothing to do with the content currently being produced. In FIG. 125 (j), the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is a display related to the notice icon, which is related to the swordsman's notice icon I62, but the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed. Although it is not displayed in relation to, but happens to be related to the content of the explanation, the content of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is decided according to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display according to the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and the notice icon may be displayed. It may be displayed at the same time. The swordsman's notice icon I62 arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, as will be described later. In addition, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be digested in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started. In this production example, the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display unit ST1.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the off display result is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "By digesting the notice icon ..." to "Panda is the master of the lord". , The relationship between the character of the lord and the character of the panda is explained. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content while the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The timing may be later than the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the timing of the display change of the tutorial display unit TT1 is earlier than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the explanation a plurality of times in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

FIG. 125 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is completed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6". Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "When General Yatsushiro moves ...". It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 125 (n), and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 125 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Will be done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (p), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging, fueling expectations as to whether or not the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. By doing so, the player may be eager to use the notice icon as soon as possible. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62. It is not necessary to display the effect. This effect display depends on the character display portion of the tutorial display unit TT1, and therefore, the explanation display may be noticeable.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested. As a result, the overlapping state due to the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the player may be able to easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (a) following FIG. 125 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that it will develop into a super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the development to the swordsman reach is announced by digesting the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, and it is produced that the reliability of the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.

FIG. 126 (c) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (c), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, and therefore the display position of the variable icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be framed out after the hold icon is deleted, or the UI unit may be framed out together with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation is displayed, the UI may be framed out after the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted at the same time. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are deleted may be different.

In FIG. 126 (d), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (e), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and prompts the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emitting mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (f), as shown in FIG. 126 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L “goes” with the up of the lord. A cut-in image with the characters "ze" is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene.

After that, as shown in Fig. 126 (h), the hero's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role, and in Fig. 126 (i), both the first decorative design and the second decorative design were "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" The combination of decorative symbols is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 126 (j). -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols, and the display result of the off display is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". If a notice icon (for example, the above-mentioned fan notice icon I10) is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town, which is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing stepwise other examples of the notice icon increase effect and the digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 127 stepwise. Is. Since FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (l), the description thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 127 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display targeted for pre-reading is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as "decoration C") displayed as "C" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" is displayed. The temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "6". The notice icon symbol CS has a function of notifying that the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance, which will be described later, will be stocked when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance-up notice icon I63 may be stocked, or the chance-up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. Further, the notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance (including the enlarged / reduced image itself), and may move to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the notice icon acquisition animation by the design may be displayed so that the notice icon can be identified. In addition, there may be something that does not correspond to the notice icon symbol CS and the chance-up notice icon I63. Further, the types of the notice icons displayed by the symbols may be more or less than the types of the notice icons not displayed by the symbols. The type of notice icon displayed in the wake of the animation related to the character of the lord (for example, the throwing animation) is the notice displayed in the wake of the animation related to the symbol (for example, the animation performed by displaying the notice icon symbol CS). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be the icons displayed at the trigger of both animations. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-continuous notice icon may be displayed at two triggers, and may or may not be stocked at two triggers with one fluctuation. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in any of the symbol rows. Although the variable icon h0 is deleted here, it may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "When General Yashiro moves ...".

As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 127 (n), the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. 127 (o) ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and is moved to the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 and placed (stocked). Then, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance-up notice icon I63 has been stocked. At the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, the notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but the voice notification may be performed. As described above, in this production example, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be made difficult to see by the plurality of notice icons. Further, according to this production example, a plurality of notice icons can be stocked. Further, in this production example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 have different opportunities to be stocked, and therefore, the production contents until they are stocked are different.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 127 (p), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6".

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 127 (q), and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11. The hold icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 127 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (a) following FIG. 127 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (b), the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts swinging. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed according to the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. It also depends on the chance-up notice icon I63 stocked in, and therefore, it may be possible to pay attention to the chance-up notice icon I63 being stocked in addition to the explanation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 128C, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested. In this production example, the overlap state of the swordsman's notice icon I62 on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is still in a state of overlapping with the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman's notice icon I62 to make the swordsman's notice icon I62 stand out. FIG. 128 (c) shows. As shown, this effect display depends on the tutorial display unit TT1 and the chance-up notice icon I63, and the explanation display and the chance-up notice icon I63 may also attract attention.

At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the player will reach the swordsman. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. In addition, the pattern formed on this light guide plate also overlaps with the chance-up notice icon I63, which was not digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance-up notice icon I63. May be difficult to see. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 128 (e), a part of the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. There is. Here, since a predetermined space is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate depending on the position viewed by the player. In some cases, the chance-up notice icon I63 can be made easy to see.

FIG. 128 (f) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (f), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed out downward, so the display position of the variable icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance-up notice icon I63 is not affected by that, and the display position is Not changed.

In FIG. 128 (g), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (h), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. .. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 has begun to swing, fueling expectations as to whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 will be digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect is displayed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (i), as shown in FIG. 128 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. The cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display "ze" is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the swinging chance-up notice icon I63 is moved upward and digested.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of the lord is different and the displayed image extends in the upper right direction is displayed superimposed on the first cut-in image, and is a big hit. It has been reported that the reliability of the product has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the notice icon I63 of the chance up. The first cut-in image may be deleted when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. You may. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed, if another notice icon is stocked, the notice icon in which the second cut-in image is stocked may be overlapped. , The second cut-in image may overlap with the stocked notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not overlap with the stocked notice icon. The second cut-in image may not overlap the stock notice icon. In the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. It may be the timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or it may be the timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. Further, in this production example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, but any display is displayed when the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Does not overlap. That is, the stocked notice icon has a predetermined display area, and may overlap with another image at a certain moment, but may not overlap with another image at a certain moment. Can be done. When the chance-up notice icon I63 is used for promotion of the button display shown in FIG. 128 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of the cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It may or may not have disappeared.

After that, as shown in Fig. 128 (m), the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role, and in the same figure (n), both the first decorative design and the second decorative design were "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination of the decorative symbols of is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes "decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (o). -Decoration 2-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols, and the display result of the big hit is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

FIG. 129 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 129, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the displayed notice icon is moved to the stock position by sliding the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is shown how it is going.

As shown in FIG. 129 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and as will be described later, an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown to pop out downward from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from "By digesting the notice icon ..." to "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord." The timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR, or at a timing before the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure chest image TR. It may be present, or it may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a3), the bomb icon I6 that jumped out of the treasure box image TR bursts. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a4), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, a voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as if it were not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N (as if to go). At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a6), it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman's notice icon I62 completely moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman's notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (a7).

Next, another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect performed across the plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 (b1) to (b8).

As shown in FIG. 129 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" is displayed as an explanatory display. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 129 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR may be performed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 129 (b2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the lid of the treasure box image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 is shown to pop out upward from the inside.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out of the treasure box image TR changes to the enlarged swordsman's notice icon I62, and then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, a voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. The timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be the timing before, the timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62, or the timing before the treasure box image TR is erased. It may be the same timing as the treasure chest image TR is erased, or it may be a timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI unit displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see. May be.

After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as if it were not moving at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N (as if to go). At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (b6), it is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. After that, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide to the right toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 129 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is eliminated, and the player can see the player. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be easy to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see.

In this production example, for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (b5'), the height of the lower end edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is at least the height of the first decorative symbol display device. When the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the 208L is higher than the displayed position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a state in which they do not overlap, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N on which the notice icon is displayed is in the vicinity of the tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Since the slide is moved with, the effect of the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be seen while visually recognizing the display state of the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the production example shown in FIG. 129, when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid and moved, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be overlapped, and an effect display may be performed such that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that the overlapping state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

FIG. 130 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the advance notice icon increasing effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 130, the tutorial display unit TT1 is normally out of the frame, and when the explanation is displayed, the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown to be in the frame from below.

As shown in FIG. 130 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 130 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a4), "The lord is Shogun Yatsushiro" is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 130 (a5) to 130 (a6), and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or may be framed out. It may be erased at a timing after the animation starts, or it may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a7), for example, as shown in FIGS. 125 (e) to 125 (j) and described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked and then shown in FIG. 130 (a8). As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then in FIG. 130 (a10). At the timing indicated, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (a11), the explanation display "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, but the tutorial display unit TT1 is overlapped by the swordsman's notice icon I62. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to see.

After that, when the tutorial display unit TT1 displays is performed for a predetermined time, the animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 frames out starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman's notice icon I62 starts. The overlapping state with TT1 is eliminated. If the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the explanation display may be easier to see by eliminating the overlapping state. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frame-outs from the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

Further, also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 130 (b1) to (b2), even if the notice icon is digested and rises during the period when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlapping state with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. FIGS. 130 (b1) to 130 (b2) are as described above in FIGS. 125 (p) to 125 (q), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 131 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 131 shows how the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation production of the character.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Further, in this production example, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that "gold is hotter than red", and an explanation is given regarding the notice given in the pachinko machine 100. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon portion TT2 may overlap with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the balloon unit TT2 or the balloon unit TT3 described later. Further, the display that is exactly the same as the display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger display area or a smaller display area than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the fonts of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be the same or different. Further, the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured so as not to overlap in the display area where the other explanatory display is performed, but they may overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation less frequently or may be higher than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, both the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloon units TT2 and TT3 may be display areas defined by lines, or one or both of them may be display areas not divided by lines.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the character CH of Princess Chibi. In addition, the decorative design is still being displayed in a variable manner. As described above, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon portion TT2 may also be configured to be displayable across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1". In the tutorial display section TT1, "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is still displayed.

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 131 (a4), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 131 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" are still displayed. As described above, the explanatory display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed again together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation that "the swordsman reach is hot", and the specific super reach is explained. The timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, the timing may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. Further, as shown in FIG. 131 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon unit TT3 as the third tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a6), the balloon portion TT3 is provided with an explanatory display stating "when a panda intrudes", and an explanation regarding the advance notice effect is given. Here, the balloon portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. The timing at which the blowout portion TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. It may be the timing after the timing when the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the display of the balloon portion TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. The timing may be earlier than the timing, or the timing may be later than the timing when the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has burst may be positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (a9), the exploding bomb icon I61 changes to the swordsman's notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon portion TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon portion TT3 may be difficult to see. Further, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "Don" to notify the effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effect displays (speech balloon TT2 and balloon TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is reduced and displayed, and is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. As described above, the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap with a plurality of display units (tutorial display unit TT1 and balloon unit TT3) on which the explanation is displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 131 (a1) to 131 (a10), an explanatory display (tutorial display) for explaining the effect is displayed on the balloons (speech balloon TT2 and balloon TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (b), the display mode of the blowing portion TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the blowing portion TT2 is changed to red), and the characters "extreme heat" are added. In some cases, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed, such as by displaying.

FIGS. 131 (c1) to 131 (c3) show other examples of the contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

As shown in FIG. 131 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. It is shown that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is starting to swing. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the explanation display "Panda is the master of the lord" is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman's notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (c3), the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is a master of the lord" to "Development into a swordsman reach", and an explanation display (live broadcast) about the event that will occur in the future. Display) is made. With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is digested. At the timing of FIG. 131 (c3), the voice "pakin" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been digested.

In the above-mentioned production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the production. For example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display unit TT1 to red), the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed to display a notice or look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display. May be good.

FIG. 132 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 132 shows that the UI unit is displayed at the bottom of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display unit TT4, and the stage name display unit ST2 are integrated. Has been done. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, in the case of super reach, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, it is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is.

As shown in FIG. 132 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit shown in FIG. 132 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on the frame formed by the UI unit. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display unit ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224F and general accessory are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a2), the hold icon of the third special figure 1 (third hold icon h13) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. In this production example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode (for example, a display mode with a blue circle) instead of the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1", and the display result of the deviation is lost. Is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1".

After that, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 132 (a4), the throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 125 (e) to 125 (k) and described above.

In FIG. 132 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts, the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to the princess's notice icon I64, and while being reduced and displayed, it moves to the stage name display unit ST2. At the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a5), it is shown that the stage name display unit ST2 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2 but does not reach a predetermined display position (stock position). .. In this case, the princess notice icon I64 is not yet displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, so the explanation display of the "castle town stage" is displayed, and at least a part of the princess notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. It should be noted that the explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2. Further, in the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 127), the explanation display is deleted before overlapping with the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display is based on the opportunity of acquiring the notice icon. May be configured so that the timing at which is deleted is different. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display unit. Further, a pattern (so-called ghost) in which the notice icon is not acquired may be provided after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display unit ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, even if the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, the explanation display may not be erased (that is, in the case of the Gase pattern, the explanation display is not erased and is really In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be erased when the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2. Is enabled, and when the UI part is hidden during this darkening effect, at least part of the process from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the disappointment is executed while the darkening effect is being executed. Specifically, when the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started, the darkening effect is started, and the darkening effect is finished and the UI part is redisplayed, a notice is given. It may be configured so that the icon is acquired (the state in which the explanation display is displayed to the state in which the explanation display is disappeared). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect is performed. It may be in a state where both are not performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (a6), when the princess notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed until now on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of "Stage" is erased, and it functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters "STOCK" are displayed on the upper part of the stage name display unit ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, the stage name is not displayed. It should be noted that the scene in which the notice icon is digested and the execution of the above-mentioned darkening effect may be configured to overlap. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) is moved to move the movable means. Or to overlap at least a part of the already acquired notice icons (such as the entire notice icon of at least one of multiple notice icons, a part of one notice icon, etc.) You may. In addition, the movable means is moved during at least a part of the period from before the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the movable means. May be good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (a7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". The combination is stopped and displayed, and the off display result is confirmed. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2".

Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a8), the stage is changed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this effect example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is hidden, and when the stage name display unit ST2 is hidden, the changed stage name is displayed. It is not displayed either. When the stage is changed, the stage name after the change may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and then the stage name may be deleted and the notice icon may be displayed.

FIG. 132 (a9) shows that five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is deleted, and the area functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (explanatory display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are first stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and then the tutorial display unit. The swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked in TT4.

In this production example, for example, when the notice icons are digested in order from the left side, an animation may be performed to change the display position of the notice icons other than the digested notice icons. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 132 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-ream notice icons I65 are moved to the left one by one, and the tutorial display is displayed. The swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by teleporting or the like.

Then, when all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 have been digested, the explanation display is restarted on the tutorial display unit TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 have been digested. In that case, the stage name display unit ST2 restarts the display of the stage name. It is not necessary to restart the explanation display and the stage name display. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, restart after the super reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the exact same display may be resumed, or the telop type (scroll type) display may be restarted from the display of a different part.

Further, the type of the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the type of the notice icon displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 may be predetermined. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, it may not move with respect to other notice icons.

Further, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, may be shorter than the execution time of the movement animation of the hold icon, or may be held. It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked in the stage name display unit ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is stored in the tutorial display unit. Up to 3 more can be stocked in TT4, but if the tutorial display part TT4 is stocked first and the number of stocked is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is further 3 in the stage name display part ST2. Up to one may be configured to be stockable.

Further, in this production example, a part of the notice icon is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 (a part of the notice icon is displayed in a part of the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4). In the state), the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Immediately after the notice icon is completely settled in the stage name display unit ST2 or the tutorial display unit TT4, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the explanation display may or may not be displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when the notice icon is digested. In addition, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display unit ST2 and the tutorial display unit TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when the notice icon is digested. It may not be done.

Further, in this production example, the above-mentioned one shown in FIG. 125 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it goes without saying that it is naturally possible to combine the modes shown in other figures.

Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested, such as a variable icon display area.

Further, the notice icons do not have to be displayed in the order of being digested. For example, even if a plurality of notice icons are digested in a toothless manner and other notice icons are moved so as to fill the vacant place. You don't have to move.

In addition, one starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning opening and a second special drawing winning opening, and eight symbol variation displays can be held in a normal game state, so-called MAX 8 machines (8). The hold icon display area is prepared in advance for four hold icons, and when there are four hold icons, the display area expands to five hold icon display areas. Or may be expanded up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display unit ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

FIGS. 132 (b1) to 132 (b2) show a state in which the stocked notice icon is digested.

As shown in FIG. 132 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, it is time to digest the chance-up notice icon I63, and as shown in FIG. 131 (b2), the chance-up notice icon I63 is shown to move upward. In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display unit ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps with the stage name display unit ST2, it is used as an explanatory display. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. This also applies to the tutorial display unit TT4. The display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position on the stage name display unit ST2.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing stepwise another production example according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1) displays "By digesting the notice icon ...". Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

FIGS. 133 (a1) to 133 (a3) show how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

FIG. 133 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. The display mode of the castle town stage is the same as that shown in FIG. 125 (a), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 133 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L in the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that the UI portion is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. That is, in the UI section of the space stage, the variable icon display area is arranged in the lower center of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and the hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged side by side. The display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage described above as shown in FIG. 125. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), since the three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The display modes of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage are pentagonal, unlike the display modes of the variable icons and the hold icons on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, , A white pentagonal display mode, and a look-ahead notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagonal display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (a2), the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are the default display modes, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. It has become. Further, in the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon and the display position of the tutorial display area TT1 are different, so that the tutorial display area TT1 does not overlap with the notice icon.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

FIG. 133 (a3) shows the state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and remains hidden until a new explanation is displayed. Will be done. As shown in FIG. 133 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 which is in the hidden state. The explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition is performed. Further, when the tutorial display area TT1 is hidden in a certain stage (for example, a castle town stage) and the stage is moved to another stage (for example, a space stage), the explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

FIGS. 133 (b1) to 133 (b2) show that the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the notice icon is stocked. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 133 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 133 (b1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are displayed in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 133 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 133 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it will be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case, the third The tutorial display unit TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is erased. Here, the button icon IBT can be stocked in a plurality of sizes, and is, for example, an icon that notifies in advance the number of times the effect of operating the button is generated during a specific effect. For example, the number of times the button operation effect is generated is large. It can be said that the higher the reliability of the jackpot, that is, the larger the number of button icon IBT stocks, the easier it is to win the jackpot.

As described above, according to this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that the other display is sacrificed.

FIG. 134 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 134 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned character of the lord.

FIGS. 134 (a1) to 134 (a6) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation.

As shown in FIG. 134 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both displayed in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 134 (a1), the Hatena notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens even if it is digested, so-called Gase It may also function as a notice icon for. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 134 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative pattern display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb Is placed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a3), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as "Den-sama is Shogun Yashiro" has been changed to "By digesting the notice icon ...".

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of Hatena's notice icon I66, and at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover Hatena's notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (a6), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62. Then, the voice "Pakin" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the notice icon I66 of Hatena has been changed to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. At this time, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 134 (a6), what was displayed as "By digesting the notice icon ..." has been changed to "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord." The timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. It may be the timing before, or it may be the timing after the timing when the display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is started. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 134 (b1) to 134 (b3) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 134 (b1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4) and FIG. 134 (b3) is the same as FIG. 134 (a6), the description of these drawings will be omitted. In the tutorial display unit TT1 in FIG. 134 (b3), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed.

After the effect shown in FIG. 134 (b1) is performed, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts, as shown in FIG. 134 (b2). At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping on the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than that of the effect image shown in FIG. 134 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the stocked notice icon.

FIGS. 134 (c1) to 134 (c3) show how the already-stocked notice icons change due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 134 (c1) is the same as FIG. 134 (b1) and FIG. 134 (c2) is the same as FIG. 134 (b2), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the bomb icon I61 bursts at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (c2), the effect image of the burst bomb icon I61 is erased as shown in FIG. 134 (c3), and Hatena's notice icon I66 is the swordsman's notice. It has changed to icon I62 and chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are performed at the same time by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stocked notice icon and stocking a new notice icon.

FIGS. 134 (d1) to 134 (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes depending on the throwing animation. Since FIG. 134 (d1) is the same as FIG. 134 (a4), the description of this drawing will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 134 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord after the effect shown in FIG. 134 (d1) is displayed on the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is at least large enough to cover the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (d3), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is erased, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )doing. Then, a voice "pon" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 134, at least a part of the animation at the time of acquiring the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when the display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is displayed. The same applies to the animation performed on the display device 208N).

FIG. 135 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In FIGS. 135 (a1) to 135 (a7), it is shown that a specific notice icon has been stocked and that the mission has been completed by displaying the fact. Since FIGS. 135 (a1) to 135 (a3) are the same as those of FIGS. 125 (h) to 125 (j), the description of these drawings will be omitted.

After the effect shown in FIG. 135 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord ends as shown in FIG. 135 (a4). Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 as an explanatory display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. On the achievement display unit KM1, "swordsman stock" indicating that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked is displayed. That is, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed and the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to that effect to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in order to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who announces that the production with extremely high expectation for the big hit will be performed. May be good. The timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be a timing before the end of the throwing animation, or may be after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62, it may be possible to draw attention to the achievement display unit KM1. In addition, the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed so as to overlap with the achievement display unit KM1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, "decoration C" as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 1-decoration C-decoration" is displayed. The temporary stop is displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "6". Although the variable icon h0 is deleted here, it may be displayed.

As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a6) to (a7), the notice icon I63 for increasing the chance is generated from the notice icon symbol CS. It pops out toward the display position to the right of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 135 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display unit KM1, making at least a part of the explanatory display on the achievement display unit KM1 difficult to see.

In this production example, for example, when the notice icon is stocked and the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the type of the notice icon to be digested. The overlap with may be eliminated. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked and the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at predetermined intervals due to the digestion of the notice icons, among the plurality of notice icons. When a predetermined number of notice icons are exhausted, the overlap of the notice icons with the achievement display unit KM1 may be eliminated.

In FIGS. 135 (b1) to 135 (b3), for example, an example of the operation mode of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate at the time of development to super reach or when it becomes a big hit is shown. It is shown.

FIG. 135 (b1) shows how super reach is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b1), the background screen of the super reach is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. .. As described above, the UI unit is framed out downward during super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variable icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed above the display screen, and the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part thereof overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In some cases. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation by the decorative symbol display device and the explanation display are hidden, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving a feeling of expectation for a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are close to each other, are integrated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Further, the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is rectangular. An image with the characters "celebration" in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of special figures 1 and 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as shown in FIG. 135 (b3), the family crest accessory 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward and overhangs the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the general accessory 224Fb, which were wrapped and arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, moved downward and overlapped with the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part thereof overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In some cases. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may overlap with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa or the general character 224Fb. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may overlap with the family crest accessory 224E. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable movement and the explanation display are hidden by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body, it may be possible to draw attention to the explanation display while giving a feeling of expectation for the big hit.

In FIGS. 135 (c1) to 135 (c4), the effect button 136 is displayed by displaying the button image 136a at all times or at least for a certain period of time in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and changing the display state of the button image 136a. It is shown that the state is being notified.

FIG. 135 (c1) shows how the duel scene in the swordsman reach is being animated. FIG. 135 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 126 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The difference is that the button image 136a is always or at least for a certain period of time displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

In FIG. 135 (c2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c2), the button reception time meter is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208L, and the button image is displayed. The display mode of 136a is displayed in a display mode for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136. By this display, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting red light) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (c3), as shown in FIG. 135 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L "goes" with the up of the lord. A cut-in image with the characters "ze" is displayed overlaid on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode on the assumption that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has expired. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-mentioned button notice icon (first button notice icon I4 or second button notice icon I11) becomes effective, as described above. In some cases, the player can be encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

FIG. 135 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, Hatena's notice icon I66, pseudo-ream notice icon I65, chance-up notice icon I63, princess's notice icon I64, swordsman's notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68, for example. , Panda notice icon I69 is available. Here, the hold promotion notice icon I67 is an icon that gives a notice that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon will be changed to a display mode with higher reliability for a jackpot when it is digested. Further, the pseudo-ream notice icon is an icon that announces that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye will be derived as a result of displaying the decorative pattern when digested. In addition, the princess's notice icon is an icon that announces that it will move to the look-ahead zone when it is digested. In addition, the panda's notice icon I69 is an icon that announces that when the panda is digested, the panda will intrude into the effect and it will surely be a big hit (correct).

FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

FIGS. 136 (a1) to 136 (a7) show that the explanation display (for example, the display of "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is scrolled. The left side of the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 136 overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62.

FIG. 136 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanatory display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" is scrolled in sequentially from the right side of the tutorial display unit TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a2), only the part of "Swordsman is" is scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a3), only the part of "Swordsman is a lord" is scrolled in. There is. In these cases, none of the characters overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62, so that the explanation display may be clearly recognizable.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a4), the entire characters "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord" are displayed. In this case, at least the character portion of "swordsman" overlaps with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is difficult to see.

Next, at the timing shown in Fig. 136 (a5), the part "Swordsman is" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part "I am the nemesis of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character part of "Den-sama" overlaps with the swordsman's notice icon I62, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a6), the part "Swordsman is a lord" scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the part "I am a nemesis" is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. .. In this case, at least the character portion of "at the nemesis" overlaps with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display ends. As described above, in this production example, the characters overlapped by the notice icon are changed over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling of the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display overlaps with the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display does not overlap. When the explanation display is repeatedly scrolled, these periods also occur repeatedly.

FIGS. 136 (b1) to 136 (b7) are shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 while scrolling the explanation display (for example, "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The state when the display (for example, the notice display of "super heat") is performed is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 136 (b1) to (b3) and 136 (b6) to (b7) are shown in FIGS. 136 (a1) to 136 (a3) and 136 (a6) to 136, respectively. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the explanatory display is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 136 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice as shown in FIGS. 136 (b4) to 136 (b5). As for the notice display, the background color of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed to red, and the characters "extreme heat" are displayed to display the notice and the look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display. During the notice display, the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted. For example, the above-mentioned notice display may be overlapped with the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to see, or the scroll display of the explanation display may be switched to the notice display.

After that, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 136 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period when the notice display is being performed, and the display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after proceeding in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanatory display at the time when the display of the explanatory display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (b7), the scroll display of the explanation display ends. Although the notice display has been described as an example to interrupt the scroll display of the explanation display, the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

FIGS. 136 (c1) to 136 (c5) show the explanation display (for example, "The swordsman is the nemesis of the lord") displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 when a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are exhausted.

In FIG. 136 (c1), the chance-up notice icon I63, which is the first notice icon to be digested, and the swordsman's notice icon I62, which is the second notice icon to be digested, are the chance-up notice icons I63. Arranged side by side on the right side of, the swordsman's notice icon I62 is shown to overlap on the left side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see.

After that, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested as shown in FIG. 136 (c2), the swordsman's notice icon I62 has a chance-up as shown in FIGS. 136 (c3) to (c5). An animation of moving the notice icon I63 to the position where the notice icon I63 was displayed is performed. As a result, after the range of overlap with the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easy to see. May become. That is, in this production example, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 depending on the number of stocked notice icons. When the explanation display is scrolled on the tutorial display unit TT1, the movement display of the notice icon in the movement animation of the notice icon and the scroll display of the explanation display may overlap.

FIG. 137 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the advance notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 137, when the notice icon is stocked, the stocked notice icon is enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 137 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In this UI unit UI1, a hold icon display area in which four hold icons can be displayed in the abbreviated display frame is formed on the left side, and four notice icons are in the abbreviated display frame on the upper right side. The notice icon display area that can be displayed is formed in the upper right, and the tutorial display unit TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed above the UI unit UI1 and at a position close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame on which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (a), three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all displayed in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. There is. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT5 shown in FIG. 137 (a), "The lord is Shogun Yashiro" is displayed. Further, in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (a), two pseudo continuous notice icons I65 are stocked, and both are referred to as a normal display mode (in this production example, the "first display mode"). In some cases.) Is displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative symbol, it does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol does not overlap. Does not overlap. In addition, the notice icon of the normal display mode may overlap with the decorative symbol, or may overlap with the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 137 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display mode is configured to change when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed at all times or may not be displayed for a period of time. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224F and general accessory are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been done.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (c), it is shown that the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (d), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Although the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol in the variable display, the bomb icon I61 may overlap with the decorative symbol in the variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded overlaps with the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least a part of the display frame to be displayed is difficult to see. The size of the effect image of the exploded bomb icon I61 is such that it at least covers the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. As a result, a notice is given that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 137 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT5 and the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 burst. If a notice icon is stocked in the display frame to be displayed and this display frame, the notice icon overlaps with the notice icon.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (f), the effect image of the exploding bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode is changed to the flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with a flame. Therefore, along with the notice icon displayed on the UI unit UI1, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display unit TT5 are also difficult to see. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed so that the entire UI unit UI1 is overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1 so that at least a part of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 can be visually recognized, or the notice icon display area. Only may be difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (g), the advance notice icon enlargement animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 has a flame effect. The appearance from the EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. The swordsman's notice icon I62 is newly displayed in the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is displayed. , Each is enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed, and the first notice is displayed. A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icon is stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. To. Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also further enlarged and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. As a result, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is difficult to see. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other on the front side of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is considered to be more difficult to see. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, making it difficult to see. Further, since the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, it may be possible to make it easier to understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the enlarged notice icon may overlap with the decorative pattern. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Further, in this effect example, when the effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other displays (for example, the notice display) (overlap). ), But the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may overlap with other notice displays.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon with the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. In addition, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged to the maximum size and displayed. That is, the stocked swordsman's notice icon I62 and the already stocked pseudo-ream notice icon I65 are enlarged display modes (in this production example) that are larger in size than the normal display mode (first display mode). It may be referred to as "two display modes"). At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are , Each is displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is difficult to see. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other on the front side of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is considered to be more difficult to see. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. In other words, it can be said that a part of the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is visible in the state where the third notice icon is in the enlarged display mode. Since all of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is displayed. The pseudo-ream notice icon I65 is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (j), the advance notice icon reduction animation is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed at a position. There is a display that moves toward. Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is completely displayed. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and the state is easy to see. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-ream displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is made visible. That is, in this production example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increasing due to the notice icon reduction animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed at a position. There is a display that moves toward. Further, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed according to the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire notice icon display frame YF is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icon displayed on the notice icon display frame YF (two pseudo continuous notice icons I65). The swordsman's notice icon I62) is all visible. That is, it can be said that all of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are visible, although they are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode.

After that, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). That is, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased, and the flame effect EF1 that overlaps the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. , UI part UI1 is displayed again. At this time, in the notice icon display area, it is shown that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is stocked in addition to the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "Den-sama is the 8th Shogun" has been changed to "Panda is the master of the lord". Here, the flame effect EF1 may be erased after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, or the notice icon display frame YF may be erased after the flame effect EF1 is erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be erased at the same time. Further, the display change of the tutorial display unit TT5 may be the timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased, or may be the timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Further, the display of the tutorial display unit TT5 may not be changed. Further, the variable icon and the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. 137 (l). In this case, the configuration may be such that when the number of holds increases, it is reflected firmly.

In this production example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the above-mentioned notice icon enlargement animation ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible. The background display appears in the area on the left side of the left end of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this case, since there is no notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon that is difficult to see does not occur.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, the flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (i) without going through the notice icon enlargement animation. For example, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed in FIG. 137 (i). After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (l) without going through the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. May be displayed.

Further, in this production example, the stock notice icon is enlarged and then displayed in a normal display mode by a reduced animation. For example, the notice icon is digested in the enlarged display state. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in the normal display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to enlarge the stock notice icon, but when the notice icon is digested, the procedure described above is used. The notice icon to be digested may be enlarged and displayed (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the notice icon may be enlarged and displayed (displayed in the second display mode) when digested. You may do so.

Further, in this production example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation performed when the notice icon is stocked may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in the stock of the notice icon by the action of the character (for example, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part is canceled (for example, the latter half part). May be canceled), or may not be canceled, for example, in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

Further, the enlarged display mode may differ depending on the number of the notice icons already in stock and the number of the notice icons in stock. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of notice icons.

In addition, if the hold increases while the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the start port) blinks, or the effect sound is output. Etc. may be present. This may be done, for example, when the hold is increased, which is the target of pre-reading at the time of starting winning. In addition, even if the hold is increased when the notice icon is enlarged, the effect image is displayed, the LED (for example, the LED provided at the start port) is blinked, and the effect sound is output. Etc. may not be performed, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. By doing so, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It may be easier to do.

Further, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

Further, in the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, "chance", "super heat", "SP", "pseudo-ren", etc.), it may be called a notice text.

Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 138. Here, FIG. 138 is a schematic explanatory view showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 138 (a-1), in the game board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protective member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and a rib RB is formed at the upper end thereof, and is projected forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about one-third below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. There is. The rib RB prevents the game ball that has jumped into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent a problem from colliding with an effect movable body or the like arranged in.

FIG. 138 (a-2) shows a state in which the effect display device 206 shown in the figure (a-1) is applied and the effect display is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 138, a family crest accessory 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. It is configured so that it can be displaced with. As shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is held in a square shape in the center of the UI unit. It is displayed in a mode housed in the frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is blinking and pre-read. It is a display mode of the notice. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. The tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2) is in a non-display state. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol, but is a display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-2), the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed together with the balloon portion TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the character GY1 of the grandfather is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The balloon part TT3 is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 displays the line "Where is the old man?", And the balloon section TT3 displays the line "Here". The balloon portions TT2 and TT3 overlap with the decorative symbol during the variable display, and are in a state of being difficult to see as compared with the state where the decorative symbol during the variable display does not overlap. In addition, a part of the UI part (variable icons h0 and hold icons h11, h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 and the hold display frame FL1) and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi overlap with the transparent protective member CL and are transparent. Visibility may be lower than when it does not overlap with the protective member CL.

In FIG. 138 (a-3), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is expanded so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion. At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the family crest character 224E.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), the family crest accessory 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlapping state with the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 138 (a-4), it is shown that the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the vertical direction on the extended display hold display frame FL1. Has been done. It should be noted that the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1 and is difficult to see as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the expanded portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1. Since the balloon portion TT3 is displayed above the hold display frame FL1, it does not overlap. Further, the decorative symbol during the variable display overlaps with the hold display frame FL1 and is partially difficult to see as compared with the case where it does not overlap with the hold display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, since the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display the hold display frame FL1 above the transparent protective member CL, so that the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

FIG. 138 (b-1) shows the above-mentioned state as shown in FIG. (A-2), and FIG. 138 (b-1a) is a cross section taken along the line AA of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b-1a), between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, in addition to the family crest accessory 224E described above, the size is substantially the same as the size of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light guide plate IL is arranged. The light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest accessory 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (b-1), the family crest accessory 224E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part is through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. Since the configuration of the light guide plate IL is as shown in FIG. 114 and described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 138 (b-2) shows the above-mentioned state as shown in FIG. (A-3), and FIG. 138 (b-2a) shows a cross section taken along the line BB of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b-2a), the family crest accessory 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest accessory 224E is the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative pattern display device 208 is more difficult to see than the case where there is no intervening space.

FIG. 138 (b-3) shows the above-mentioned state as shown in FIG. (a-4), and FIG. 138 (b-3a) is a cross section taken along the line CC of FIG. The situation is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 138 (b-3a), since the family crest accessory 224E has moved below the decorative symbol display device 208, the player can see that the family crest accessory 224E is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easily visible via the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL as compared with the case where the display state is interposed in the display device.

138 (c-1) and (c-2) are diagrams for explaining an example of a layer configuration in which an image to be displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 138 (c-1), the above-mentioned hold display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 138 (c-2), the upwardly expanded portion (extended portion) of the reserved display frame FL1 is a second layer arranged behind the first layer layer LY1. It is arranged on layer LY2. The ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, for example, a dialogue notice, a decorative pattern, and a notice display (for example, a display in which an arrow flies). ) Etc., it is possible to display any display. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that the parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. It may be.

The display mode of the UI unit may be configured to be different depending on the effect stage and the effect mode according to each game state (hereinafter, referred to as “effect stage and the like”), or may be common.

Further, at least a part of the production stage and the like may be selectable by the operation of the player, or may change according to the progress of the game (for example, for each fluctuation number of times). May be good.

Further, the operation of "the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward", which is a characteristic operation of the present invention, is at least a part of the effect stage or the like (for example, the effect stage in the non-electric support state or the like, or a design. It may be performed at a part of the production stages or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is being displayed during the fluctuation, or may be performed at all the production stages or the like.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 154.

139 to 154 are diagrams that stepwise show a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 139 to 154, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 139 to 150, 152 and 154 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 139 to 154, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 139 to 150 and 152 to 154, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a hold change notice effect as a look-ahead notice effect by a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 139 stepwise. It is a figure shown in.

As shown in FIG. 139 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is located in the center of the UI portion. It is displayed in a form housed in the rectangular hold display frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as the pedestal of the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (a), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, and various information related to games and productions is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), "The lord is the eighth shogun" is displayed, and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI unit is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol, but is a display area of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, here, the explanation display unit (or the explanation display area) may be a place where something is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, in a configuration in which the stage name is displayed and the stage name is displayed in red when the stage is moved to a certain stage, the display may be an explanation display instead of a notice. To put it the other way around, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not as hot as the red stage name display, so this may also be a kind of notice.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 139 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the display mode is configured to change when the operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed at all times or may not be displayed for a period of time. In addition, the UI unit may be displayed at all times, or may not be displayed for a period of time. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed at all times.

Further, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Subsequently, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the hold icon h13 (third hold icon) of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of pending numbers has reached three. Here, the third hold is the hold of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. However, in this production example, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (b), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, the display mode blinking in white). At this time, a voice output of "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the pre-reading notice has been given by the hold display. The audio output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 changes, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 may change before the audio output from the speaker 120. You may. In this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. Further, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon part TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 139 (c), an explanatory display "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed on the balloon portion TT2, suggesting a notice to be performed in the pachinko machine 100. Although the balloon portion TT2 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, it may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon portion TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi may be displayed and then the balloon portion TT2 may be displayed, or the balloon portion TT2 may be displayed. After that, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi may be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which a plurality of arrows fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen is shown. These multiple arrows appear as a notice display and overlap with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon portion TT2 has been changed to an explanatory display of "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows is started may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. It may be the same timing as the timing when the explanation display of the balloon part TT2 is changed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, although the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon portion TT2 overlap with a plurality of arrows, they may be overlapped with a plurality of arrows. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed may be the same. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (e), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the left symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6". The left design stopped and displayed in "Decoration 6" is displayed so as to overlap a part of the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the balloon portion TT2. Further, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the right symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 2". The plurality of arrows and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi have been erased. The timing at which the plurality of arrows are erased may be after the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is erased, before the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is erased, or the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is erased. It may be the same timing as the timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 139 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 2", the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed. After the shaking fluctuation is performed in, the display result of the loss is confirmed. Further, at the timing of the fixed stop display of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". .. At this time, the variable icon h0 may be deleted or may remain displayed. Further, it may be configured to be erased before the shaking fluctuation state of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the symbol is stopped and displayed, continuing from FIG. 139 (g).

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the characters "Panda is a master of the lord" are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol. The timing may be before the start of the display. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, along with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, a balloon unit TT2 as a second tutorial display unit (explanatory display unit) is provided. It is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a line saying "Where is the old man?", And the conversation notice has started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows fall again from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in a plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays. In this production example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi is displayed as in FIG. 139 (c), but other characters may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon part TT3 as the third tutorial display part (explanatory display part) is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1 on the right side of the display screen. ing. The grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a dialogue effect) is performed, and a tutorial display (explanatory display), a notice display, or the like is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (d), in response to the dialogue display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the speech balloon TT3 is displayed with the dialogue "here", and the conversation notice continues. Here, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at positions that do not overlap with the first decorative symbol. Further, the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, the balloon portion TT3 may be displayed after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the balloon portion TT3 is displayed. The grandfather character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation notice by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather may be given by operating the effect button 136. Further, it is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden may be the timing after the grandfather character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the grandfather character GY1 is displayed. May be good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and the timing at which the grandfather character GY1 is displayed may be the same timing. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, a plurality of arrows are displayed so as to be pierced on the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (e), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after moving, and also has a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the family crest accessory 224E It is shown that it appears above. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the blowing portion TT2 and overlaps with the blowing portion TT2, but does not overlap with the blowing portion TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this production example, the dialogue notice (speech balloon portion TT3) displayed later may not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the hold display frame FL1 after expansion may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the figure of the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion is shown, but the expansion animation includes the one in which the hold display frame FL1 is gradually expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the case where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 140 (h) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. The production display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side of the conversation notice displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character GY1 of the grandfather, or may be displayed on the rear side. .. It can be said that the production by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the expanded portion of the reserved display frame FL1 after the expansion. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1 which is an example of the effect display is displayed in the expanded part of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. You can also say that. The effect of the ninja character NJ1 may function as a pre-reading notice or a change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL1 (the effect by the ninja character NJ1), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

After that, FIG. 140 (i) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 140 (i), the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode is increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. As a result, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may be changed to increase the reliability of the jackpot.

After that, FIG. 140 (k) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notice that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green is announced. In other words, prior to the change of the hold hold icon that is the target of pre-reading, a predetermined light emitting means (LED built in the family crest accessory 224E, LED provided at the special drawing start port, etc.) is set as the hold icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily visually. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. The audio output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the audio output is performed, or the hold icon h12 may be displayed. The mode change and the audio output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is displayed in the same figure (a). An animation display (reduced animation) is performed to reduce the shape to the indicated shape. In addition, the reduced animation may be performed without erasing the ninja character NJ1. In this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward according to the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the variable icon h0 It may be overlapped with and finally erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

In the above-mentioned production example, the start timing of each production such as the character CH1 of Princess Chibi, the character GY1 of the grandfather, the notice display of a plurality of arrows, the family crest accessory 224E, the decorative pattern variation display, and the expansion operation of the hold display frame FL1. And the end timing can be performed in any combination.

Further, in this production example, a character for changing the hold icon (for example, the ninja character NJ1) is displayed in the hold display frame FL1 after the expansion, but an image substantially the same as the hold icon after the change is displayed. It may be configured to display an image reminiscent of the changed hold icon (corresponding to the changed hold icon).

Next, in the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an example of the effect when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

FIG. 140 (i') corresponds to FIG. 140 (i), and has the same effect content as that of FIG. 140 (i). After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (j'), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed and the shuriken SH1 is held for the second time. After passing through the icon, as shown in FIG. 140 (k'), the shuriken SH1 failed to change the display mode of the hold icon by frame-out below the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. I am directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the mode of blinking in white.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 141 shows how the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the decorative symbol with the character display of “change” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. That is, the decorative pattern of "change" can be said to be a display suggesting the content of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 141 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed in the center of the UI unit on the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 141 (a), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and displays a look-ahead notice. It is displayed in the mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Change-Decoration 1" sways and fluctuates. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 141 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

After that, FIG. 141 (b) shows that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest accessory 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 and covers a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of "change", respectively. Covering. The family crest accessory 224E may not overlap the decorative patterns.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and appears above the family crest accessory 224E. At this time, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the medium symbol of "change"). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the medium symbol of "change") overlaps the reserved display frame FL1 after expansion. The expanded hold display frame FL1 may not overlap with the decorative symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and it is difficult to see the character NJ1 as compared with the case where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 141 (e) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display (decorative pattern of "change") suggesting the effect content is overlapped.

After that, FIG. 141 (f) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. ing. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

After that, FIG. 141 (h) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol is easier to see than the state in which the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 140. In FIG. 142, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of the frame in the normal state, and it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in from below when the explanation is displayed. It should be noted that FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (n) are the same as those in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs frame-in and frame-out animations. Only the part will be described, and the description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (n) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 142 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started from below the frame on the right side of the display screen, and then, after that, At the timing shown in FIG. 142 (c), the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The timing at which the character display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" in the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed until the frame-out animation (frame-out animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (f) (for example). It is displayed continuously (for 5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), when the family crest accessory 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display unit TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. May overlap.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 142 (f) to 142 (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation is performed to frame out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at the timing after it is done, or it may be displayed until the frame-out of the tutorial display unit TT1 is completed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, or may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the start timing of the extended animation. The timing may be later than the start. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is similar to the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this production example, it may be referred to as an example of the first extended display) in that it does not overlap with the decorative pattern, but the dialogue is It can be said that they differ in that they do not overlap with the notice, that there are few overlapping areas, and that they overlap infrequently.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 140. In FIG. 143, after the explanation is displayed by the tutorial display unit TT1 and the frame is out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice. In addition, in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (n), after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out, the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed in again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a notice. Since it is the same as in FIGS. (a) to (n), only the different parts will be described, and the same contents as those in FIGS. 142 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

After the effects shown in FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (h) are performed, at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a tutorial from the bottom of the right frame of the display screen. The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (j), and the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The display is displayed. That is, there is a display suggesting that a pseudo-ream may be performed. That is, in the tutorial display unit TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a notice display can also be performed. In addition, the character display of this "pseudo-ren" may be a notice of the change or a look-ahead notice. The timing of the completion of the frame-in animation of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or at a timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be present, or it may be at the same timing as the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. After that, as shown in FIGS. 143 (j) to 143 (n), the tutorial display unit TT1 is continuously displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is configured so that the display time is longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed, but even if the display time is the same. Alternatively, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to have a longer display time when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. Further, the color of the characters may be different between the case of the explanation display and the case of the notice display. As described above, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a success / failure pattern are displayed, and when the success pattern of the mini-game is performed, at the same time as or after the display indicating success. , Display that changes other effect displays such as hold change (for example, change in display mode of hold icon, change in display mode of variable icon, stop of pseudo-ream pattern, occurrence of pseudo-ream, display mode of dialogue notice Change (for example, change the blue line or blue background line to red line or red greeting line), step up the line notice (for example, in the state where the line notice display of character A is performed, then the line of character B It may be configured to display a notice, etc.)).

FIG. 144 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 144, for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode has been changed as described above is executed after the effect display shown in FIG. 140 is performed. It is shown that it is.

As shown in FIG. 144 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed in the center of the UI unit on the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 144 (a), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is a display mode of the look-ahead notice that is lit in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are the default display modes. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is erased. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. In addition, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows that the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed and the explanation is displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 144 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. The family crest accessory 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the variable icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays to notify that it will develop into a super reach (swordsman reach).

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which indicates that the reliability of the big hit in this swordsman reach is high. .. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon, and the hold icon, and the tutorial display unit TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon, and the hold icon. These displays may be more difficult to see than when they do not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted, and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. The timing of erasing the character display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be before the timing of erasing the hold icon or may be after the timing of erasing the hold icon. , The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Although the variable icon h0 has not been deleted, the variable icon h0 may also be deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 144 (d) to 144 (g), the UI unit is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E. That is, as described above, it is displayed by performing the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1. Even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is housed is hidden, it may be possible to confirm the display mode after the change of the hold icon.

FIG. 144 (h) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach, and the second decorative symbol display. In the stage name display unit ST1 of the device 208M, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation of a duel scene is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (h), a state in which the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman confront each other is displayed.

After that, for example, after the animation display of the duel scene by the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman shown in FIGS. 126 (c) to 126 (h) is performed, the first decoration is performed as shown in FIG. 144 (i). In the symbol display device 208L, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and as a result, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is derived for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the shaking fluctuates. Is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach was changed to the background of the castle town. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIGS. 144 (j) to 144 (n), an animation in which the UI unit frames in from the lower part of the display screen (UI unit FI animation) is performed. The hold icon is redisplayed after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed, but it may be displayed from the time when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the display of the UI part FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed as soon as it is completed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is decorated with "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The stop display is made by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the outlier is confirmed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In addition, the family crest accessory 224E changes from a green light emitting mode to a default light emitting mode (white light emitting mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be deleted when the stop display is displayed. Further, the timing at which the family crest accessory 224E changes to the default light emitting mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be a timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be decorative. The timing may be later than the stop display of the symbol. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the variable icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode and then deleted before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be changed to the default display mode after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode may be erased after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased without changing, or may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, in the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 which is being expanded, expanded, or reduced may be displayed. In this configuration, after expansion. The reserved display frame FL1 may be configured so as not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in the configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, a cut-in of a ally character or a cut-in of an enemy character) may be displayed. The display mode of the above, or the display mode of the lines displayed in blue, the display timing of the lines displayed in red, etc.) may be changed.

Further, in addition to the above configuration or by replacing the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured so that it can be framed in during super reach, and the display mode at each of the above timings may be changed. One of a plurality of types of displays indicating the above may be displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 145 (a-1) to 145 (a-4), it is shown that the effect display of stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 145 (b-). 1) to FIG. 6 (b-6) show that the display mode of the hold icon is changed while the notice icon is stocked, and FIGS. 145 (c-1) to FIG. FIG. (C-6) shows how the display mode of the notice icon is changed by the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the effect that is partially common to the effect.

The production example shown in FIG. 145 (a-1) is the same as that of FIG. 140 (g) except that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed instead of the ninja character NJ1. Omit. As shown in FIG. 145 (a-1), the notice icon BX of the treasure box is partially overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E, and partly not overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is difficult to see by comparison. Further, in this production example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is used as an example of the notice icon, but it can also be applied to display various notice icons shown in FIGS. 81 and 136 (d), for example. Needless to say.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the notice icon BX of the treasure box, the part that does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see.

After that, FIG. 145 (a-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the notice icon BX of the treasure box is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is displayed in a reduced size, but it may be displayed without being reduced or may be displayed in a larger size. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon BX of the treasure box is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the second hold icon h12, and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. It is suggested that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol change display based on the hold. That is, a look-ahead notice is given by the notice icon BX of the treasure box.

The production example shown in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to 145 (b-6) is shown in FIG. 140 (g), except that the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. -Since it is the same as the figure (l), detailed description thereof will be omitted. The notice icon BX shown in FIG. 145 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed as described above in FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4), and for example, other effects. It may be displayed by (for example, an effect performed by stopping the chance symbol). Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 145 (b-3) shows that the shuriken SH1 overlaps the notice icon BX of the treasure box. Here, the shuriken SH1 may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box, or may be overlapped with the notice icon BX of the treasure box. That is, for example, even if the treasure chest notice icon BX is displayed as described above in FIGS. 145 (a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the treasure box notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side or may be displayed on the back side.

FIG. 145 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps all of the treasure chest notice icons BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. As a result, it may not be possible to know whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes, and the player may have a sense of expectation.

Since the production examples shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to 145 (c-5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 145 (b-1) to (b-5), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 145 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12, but the light emission of the family crest accessory 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the hold icon after the change. No change in aspect is seen. That is, it can be said that the change display of the hold icon is not performed due to the unchanged emission color of the family crest accessory 224E.

FIG. 145 (c-6) following FIG. 145 (c-5) shows the state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is erased, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes. , The player may be able to give unexpectedness to the production and further raise the expectation for the big hit by changing the advance notice icon BX of the treasure box instead of changing the display mode of the hold icon. is there. The mode of change of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to the change of size, for example, the shape may be changed, the color may be changed, or the combination thereof may be used. .. As shown in FIG. 145 (c-6), the speaker 120 outputs a voice to notify that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but the voice is not output. It may be.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 146 (a-1) to 146 (a-6), the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, blinking in white). In FIGS. 146 (b-1) to (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 to show the display mode of the hold icon. It is shown that the effect of changing is performed, and in FIGS. 146 (c-1) to (c-5), the effect of changing the display mode of all the displayed hold icons is performed. It is shown that it is.

The effect example shown in FIG. 146 (a-1) is the same as that of FIG. 140 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 146 (a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode.

In FIG. 146 (a-2) following FIG. 146 (a-1), a state in which the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position is shown. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice.

After that, FIG. 146 (a-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the third hold icon h13.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the third hold icon h13, and the effect EF2 in which the third hold icon h13 explodes is displayed. It is done. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. The second hold icon h12 remains in the pre-reading notice display mode (blinking in white).

After that, FIG. 146 (a-5) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notice that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green is announced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. The audio output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the audio output is performed, or the hold icon h13 may be displayed. The mode change and the audio output may be performed at the same time. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged from the display mode of the look-ahead notice. According to this effect example, the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h12 is changed instead of the second hold icon h12, so that the effect can be made unexpected and the second While maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13. .. Although this effect example has been described for the third hold icon adjacent to the second hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, it may be performed for the first hold icon. However, if there is a fourth hold, it may be performed for the fourth hold icon h14.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 146 (b-1) to (b-4), the chief character BC1 is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1 in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the thrown object is displayed. Is the same as in FIGS. 140 (g) to 140 (j) except that is changed, so only the different points will be described in detail, and the other details will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, not the ninja character NJ1 but the chief character BC1 appears at the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. It should be noted that the character BC1 of the Bancho has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and it is difficult to see the character BC1 as compared with the state where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

FIG. 146 (b-2) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, the portion of the Bancho character BC1 that does not overlap with the family crest accessory 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the character BC1 of the Bancho is throwing the Qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a throwing object. This Qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. The Qigong wave KK1 effect display may be displayed on the front side of the conversation notice displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character GY1 of the grandfather, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

After that, FIG. 146 (b-3) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the Qigong wave KK1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the display of the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes. Is being done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the Qigong wave KK1. Further, at this time, the character BC1 of the Bancho is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. As described above, in this production example, by making it possible to display characters other than the ninja character NJ1, for example, it may be possible to change the reliability of the jackpot depending on the characters that appear.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 146 (c-1) to 146 (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. 146 (b-1) to FIG. 146 (b-3) are the same except for the above, so only the differences will be described in detail, and the other details will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146 (c-4) following FIG. 146 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, this effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but also in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are subject to the change in the display mode. This may give the expectation that all holds may be more credible. At the timing shown in FIG. 146 (c-4), the character BC1 of the Bancho is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be in the displayed state. Further, the effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect performed only when the Bancho character BC1 appears, and may not be performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. Further, when the character BC1 of the Bancho appears, the effect EF3 may be used to produce the effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 146 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 to the third is compared with the state in which the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 of is displayed again easily visually. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this effect example, not only the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons is changed, so that the effect can be made unexpected and for all the holds. In some cases, the expectation for a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may try to do it.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 147 (a-1) to 147 (a-5), it is shown that the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased, and FIGS. 147 (b-1) to 147 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), it is shown that the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and the character related to the hold change notice effect appears there. FIGS. 147 (c-1) to 147 (c-4). Shows how the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is being performed.

Since the effect example shown in FIG. 147 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (g) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 147 (a-2) following FIG. 147 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. In addition, the ninja character NJ1 has also moved further upward in response to the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1 upward. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is easier to see than the state where it is overlapped with the family crest character 224E. Further, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the blowing portion TT3, and the display of the blowing portion TT3 is difficult to see as compared with the state in which the holding display frame FL1 does not overlap with the blowing portion TT3. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E is descending toward the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing three shurikens SH1. All of these three shurikens SH1 are moving toward the second hold icon h12, which is giving a look-ahead notice. The effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the balloon portion TT2. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 147 (a-3), the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap with the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 explodes in the effect EF2. The display is being made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the lord. At this time, the speaker 120 may output a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. At this time, the light emitting mode of the family crest accessory 224E has not changed, but it may change. As described above, in this effect example, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 140, and the effect contents are also partially different. Even if the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 is increased, the effect content may be the same. Further, the expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. As a result, it may be possible to change the feeling of expectation for a big hit depending on the amount of change in the hold display frame FL1.

The expansion range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only upward but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 147 (a-3'), in addition to expanding the hold display frame FL1 upward, the hold icon may be expanded in the width direction to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Good. Further, the extension range of the hold display frame FL1 in the vertical direction may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 140 (g), and the extension range in the width direction may be set to a range overlapping the hold icon to be read ahead. Further, when the third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of pre-reading is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. It may be configured as. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap with the third hold icon.

In FIG. 147 (b-1), the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1, but the character does not appear in the expansion portion, and then. It is shown that the family crest character 224E has moved to the initial position. Other production contents are the same as those shown in FIG. 140 (g), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started so that the back side of the background can be visually recognized. It is shown that the display of various aspects is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, and the ninja character NJ1 appears. It should be noted that a plurality of types of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 in which the background is fully opened may be prepared, and the colors may be different depending on the degree of expectation of a change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be later than the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, and is the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. It may be the timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. It is done. At this time, the closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 descends like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. The start timing of the background closing operation of the hold display frame FL1 may be earlier than the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started, or may be the same as the timing at which the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

The production example shown in FIG. 147 (c-1) is the same as that of FIG. 140 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0. The details will be described, and the description of others will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 147 (c-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the variable icon h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the variable icon h0, and the effect EF3 in which the variable icon h0 explodes is displayed. This effect EF3 makes it difficult to see the entire variable icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. The second hold icon h12 has not changed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice. As a result, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the variation icon h0 may change to increase the reliability of the jackpot for the variation. In some cases, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

After that, FIG. 147 (c-3) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the notice that the display color of the variable icon h0 changes from white to green is announced. In other words, the predetermined light emitting means (LED built in the family crest accessory 224E, LED provided at the special drawing start port, etc.) is changed before the notice that the display mode of the variable icon is changed is given. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

After that, as shown in FIG. 147 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased, and the variable icon h0 is displayed again easily visually. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. The audio output may be performed after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the audio output is performed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be displayed. The mode change and the audio output may be performed at the same time.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 148 shows how the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the UI unit is out of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 148 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and a variable icon h0 is placed in the center of the UI unit on the hold display frame FL1. It is displayed in a housed manner, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 148 (a), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side on the balloon TT2, suggesting that the UI section FO animation in which the UI section including the hold display frame FL1 is framed out, which will be described later, is performed. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 148 (a) is related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden by the frame out.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 148 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode above the stage name display unit ST1, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and the special figure of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol of 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

FIG. 148 (b) shows a state in which the UI unit FO animation is performed and the UI unit is framed out to the lower part of the display screen together with the hold display frame FL1. This UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to a darkening effect or SP reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed. Is being done. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed. As shown in FIG. 148 (c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the decorative pattern and also overlaps with the balloon portion TT2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the explosive effect EF2 is displayed. There is.

After that, FIG. 148 (e) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. That is, a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 will change from white to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), the effect EF2 is erased in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but the second hold icon h12 is still displayed because the UI unit is still in the frame-out state. It has not been. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

In FIG. 148 (g), an animation in which the UI unit is framed in (UI unit FI animation) is performed, and a state in which the UI unit FI animation is completed is shown. When the UI unit FI animation is completed, the UI unit is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

In this production example, the UI unit includes the hold display frame FL1 and the UI unit is framed out, and during this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. For example, FIGS. 148 (a') to FIG. As shown in'), the UI unit may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, since the production example shown in FIG. 148 (a') is the same as that in FIG. 148 (a), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the figure (b') following FIG. 148 (a'), it is shown that the UI unit FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 148 (b'), in this production example, when the UI unit FO animation is performed, the UI unit is framed out to the lower part of the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being framed out. The state is maintained.

In FIG. 148 (c'), the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 148 (c'), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed by the second hold icon h12. The production of throwing at the position where it was done is being performed. That is, in this effect example, even when the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode is not displayed, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed by the ninja character NJ1.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 149 (a-1) to 149 (a-7) show that the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are performed at the same time. FIGS. 149 (b-1) to 149 (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the look-ahead notice display mode.

Since the effect example shown in FIG. 149 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (f) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 149 (a-2) following FIG. 149 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. The ninja character NJ1 has a part overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and it is difficult to see the character NJ1 as compared with the state where the family crest character 224E does not partially overlap.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord tries to throw the bomb icon I61.

After that, FIG. 149 (a-3) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice.

On the other hand, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord has thrown the bomb icon I61. The timing of starting the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be the same as the timing of the ninja character NJ1 starting the throwing of the shuriken SH1, or the timing before the throwing of the shuriken SH1. It may be the timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, FIG. 149 (a-4) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The bomb icon I61 overlaps with the first decorative pattern, and also overlaps with the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the bomb icon I61, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 also overlap with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the grandfather character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. It is done.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord bursts. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. It may be the timing of. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, in FIG. 149 (a-6), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (a-6), the exploding bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordsman's notice icon I62, and it is announced that it will shift to the swordsman reach. Here, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, a voice notifying the fact may be output from the speaker 120. Further, the timing of changing to the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be the same as the timing when the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes to green, or before the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes to green. It may be the timing of, or it may be the timing after the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes to green. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a voice "picone" is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149 (a-7), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the left end of the tutorial display unit TT1 while being reduced, and then the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord. The throwing animation ends. It should be noted that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may be notified by voice output that it is arranged on the tutorial display unit TT1. In this way, since the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, compared with the state where the swordsman's notice icon I62 is not arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1. Then, at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to see. In other words, according to this production example, it can be said that the swordsman's notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. As described above, in this production example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, so that the player can easily draw attention to the tutorial display part TT1 display and the swordsman's notice icon I62 display. You may be able to. In addition, it may be possible to notice the existence of the tutorial, or to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

The production example shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) is the same as that of FIG. 139 (a) except that the characters "Panda is a master of the lord" are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. The description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 149 (b-1) following FIG. 149 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the character of the lord is started, and the character of the lord is the bomb icon. It is shown that I61 is about to be thrown.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 149 (b-3), the character of the lord throws the bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown how to do it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the character of the lord reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 bursts. It is shown that it is. The display of the burst bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased, and the second is compared with the state in which the ruptured bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 of is displayed again easily visually. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice (display mode blinking in white). As described above, the mode of changing the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the hold icon is not limited to the time when the hold is increased, but may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold increase. Further, as in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed by another change effect. Further, the effect of changing the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon described above may be performed, for example, in a state where the UI unit is framed out.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIG. 150 shows a state in which the sub-display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) are moved while performing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon.

Since the effect example shown in FIG. 150 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (d) and described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 150 (a-2) following FIG. 150 (a-1), it is shown that the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased together with the stage.

After that, in FIG. 150 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each part of the grandfather character GY1, the balloon unit TT3, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol overlaps with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the grandfather character GY1 and the balloon unit Compared with the state where each part of the TT3, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see each of them.

After that, FIG. 150 (a-4) shows that the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. Then, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the variable icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. .. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an extended display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), the overlap with the grandfather character GY1 was eliminated, but each part of the balloon portion TT3 and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is still displayed as the third decorative symbol. It overlaps with device 208N. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-4), each part of the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 accommodated therein and the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It is said that it is difficult to see when compared with the state in which the hold display frame FL1 and the variable icon h0 housed therein and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-5), the center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the movement is completed. Then, all of the reserved display frame FL1 and the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and together with the middle symbol and the reserved display frame FL1. The variable icon h0 becomes invisible when viewed from the front. Further, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 is also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 is overlapped. Compared with the state in which they are not overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, an expansion animation of the hold display frame FL2 is performed, the hold display frame FL2 expands upward, and the ninja's extension portion is covered by the ninja. It is shown that the character NJ2 appears. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is expanded and displayed is further expanded and displayed. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. It may be made smaller.

Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the ninja character NJ2 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice. The production display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side of the conversation notice displayed by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi or the character GY1 of the grandfather, or may be displayed on the back side. .. It can be said that the production by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the expanded portion of the reserved display frame FL2 after the expansion. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect of the ninja character NJ2 may function as a pre-reading notice or a change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N so as to straddle the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. It is done. A part of this effect EF2 overlaps with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, FIG. 150 (a-10) shows how the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E changes from white to green. In addition, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green by these light emitting means. To do. The timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E may be the same as the timing when the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or the timing may be before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Easy to display. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by an animation framed out from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fading out, or may be erased suddenly.

After that, FIG. 150 (a-13) shows how the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves to the right and moves toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the third decorative symbol. A part of the device 208N is overlapped with the device 208N, and a part of the device 208N is visible together with the variable icon h0. Further, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also in a state of being partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is one comparison with the state of not partially overlapping with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. While the portion is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to see as compared with the non-overlapping state.

After that, FIG. 150 (a-14) shows how the third decorative symbol display device 208N is in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 (a-14), the overlap was eliminated for each display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, which had been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that they overlapped. Compared to the state in which is not resolved, both displays are in a state where they are easy to see.

After that, FIG. 150 (a-15) shows that the LED that was emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N is turned off. It should be noted that the light may be turned on in the default light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode that lights in white) without turning off the light. On the other hand, the family crest accessory 224E still emits green light corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

In this production example, one of the two sub-display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) (third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the first decorative symbol. The display device 208L was moved so as to overlap with each other to change the display mode of the hold icon. For example, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), both of the two sub-display devices were used. It may be moved to change the display mode of the hold icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (b), when the hold icon display mode is changed, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are used as the first decorative symbol. Move to a position close to each other in the center of the display device 208L. Then, the hold display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower part of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The variable icon h00 is displayed on the screen, and the ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variable icon h00. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N provide a balloon portion TT2, a balloon portion TT3, a first hold icon h11, a second hold icon h12, a hold display frame FL1, and a variable icon. All of h0 are overlapped, and a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the character CH1 of Princess Chibi are overlapped.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 151, instead of the two sub-display devices described above, only one sub-display device (only one sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P). It is shown how to do.

FIG. 151 is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub-decorative symbol display device 208P as a sub display device. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper end edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (a), the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is below them. The UI unit in which is formed is displayed, the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and the hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, while the second hold icon h12 is in the look-ahead notice display mode. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the balloon portion TT2 is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi on the left side of the display screen. On the balloon portion TT2, the line "Where is the old man?" Is displayed. Further, on the right side of the display screen, the balloon portion TT3 is displayed together with the grandfather character GY1. The balloon part TT3 is displayed with the words "Here". That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 151 (a), a conversation notice is given. Although the blowout portion TT2 and the blowout portion TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols may be overlapped with the blowout portions TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

After that, FIG. 151 (b) shows that the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the ninja character NJ2 appears in the expanded portion. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended part of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized as compared with the state where it is not overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. It is said to be difficult. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. At the timing shown in FIG. 151 (b), the thrown shuriken SH1 is displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P. It is shown that the player is moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12.

After that, FIG. 151 (c) shows that the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P and heads toward the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (d), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the second hold icon h12, and the effect EF2 in which the second hold icon h12 explodes is displayed. There is. This effect EF2 overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again easily visually as compared with the state in which the effect EF2 is not erased. Will be done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 152 (a-1) to 152 (a-6), it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is changed when the error is displayed. FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect display is performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. (C-1) to (c-3) show that the display mode of the hold icon is changed by operating the effect button 136, and FIGS. 152 (d-1) to 152 (d-1) to FIG. FIG. 3 (d-3) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the effect button effect is being performed, which prompts the operation of the effect button 136.

The effect example shown in FIG. 152 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 140 (d) except that an error is displayed. Therefore, only the different points will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of others will be omitted.

In FIG. 152 (a-1), when the lower plate is full, the characters "Please pull out the ball" are displayed to notify that the lower plate is full and an error has occurred. It is shown that the tongue error display ER is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door opening display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Since it is necessary to promptly notify the player of such an error display, it is displayed in preference to other displays. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the lower plate full tank error display ER overlaps a part of the balloon portion TT2. It should be noted that such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-2), it is shown that the family crest accessory 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 152 (a-2), since the family crest accessory 224E is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E. It is said that it is difficult to see when compared with the state where a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and the family crest accessory 224E It is shown that it appears above. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1. Is difficult to see when compared with the state where the lower plate full tank error display ER does not overlap.

After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state in which the ninja character NJ1 appears in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1 is shown. It should be noted that a part of the ninja character NJ1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see compared with the state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

FIG. 152 (a-5) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E expands. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 still overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER, the ninja character NJ1 is compared with the state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 does not overlap with the lower plate full tank error display ER. Character NJ1 is difficult to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 that gives a look-ahead notice.

After that, FIG. 152 (a-6) shows that the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Then, the overlapping state of the family crest accessory 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the variable icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is eliminated. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continuing, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1. A part of it overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ER. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

In FIG. 152 (b), the notice display YK is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and shows a state of scrolling to the left. Has been done. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, so that the display mode of the hold icon is changed. The situation is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 152 (b), the second hold icon h12 is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the character display of "enemy invades" is displayed, and the content related to the notice display YK is displayed. In this effect example, since the effect display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the extended display frame FL1.

In FIG. 152 (c-1), as an example of the display mode of the look-ahead notice, the second hold icon h12 is shown as a button hold icon which is a display mode imitating the effect button 136. In this production example, the character CH1 of Princess Chibi and the character GY1 of the grandfather are not displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a hidden state. Further, although the button image 136a is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since this button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the display does not overlap even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged and displayed. Further, the display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, the default display mode) after the hold increase.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is changed from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 152 (c-3). It changes to the hold icon of the display mode of the character of the lord. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and it cannot be accepted while the symbol stop display is displayed, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even while the symbol stop display is displayed. May be good.

FIG. 152 (d-1) shows how the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, the button effect is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and displayed, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the expanded portion, and the display mode of the hold icon is changed. .. In this effect example, since the effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon is displayed with priority over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed on the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. Further, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative pattern is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is used as the button effect. It can also be said that the production does not overlap. At this time, when the above-mentioned error display is performed, it is displayed with priority over the button effect and the hold display frame FL1. Further, when the button hold icon described above is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but the button image 136a is displayed. It may be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar, or it may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (d-2), the cut-in in which the character of the lord is displayed up as shown in FIG. 152 (d-3) is displayed. It may be displayed. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, since the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is prioritized over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the expanded display frame FL1. .. At this time, when the above-mentioned error display is performed, the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed with priority. Further, when the button hold icon described above is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display and on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or it may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

FIG. 153 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 153 (a-1) to 153 (a-5) do not include a sub display device, and the effect display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. FIG. 153 (b-1) to FIG. 153 (b-2) show a state in which an error display is performed. Further, FIG. 153 (c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIGS. 153 (d-1) to 153 (d). In -2), it is shown that the hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

FIG. 153 (a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device and does not include the sub display device. Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left of the display screen. In the upper right of the above, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and a Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and a general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

As shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and the fluctuation is performed. In addition, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the UI unit, the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon h0 is housed is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. These variable icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center. In this production example, images imitating the sliding doors are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the wipe display is such that the sliding doors are closed. Here, the wipe refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting the next image to be displayed from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of wipes, but any technique can be applied. In this production example, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the shaking fluctuation is started by the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the shaking fluctuation is completed and the confirmation is displayed. May be done. Further, for example, it may be performed when the stage is changed, or it may be performed when shifting to the super reach effect, and it can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap with the UI unit and the first decorative symbol, while overlapping with the second decorative symbol, the second hold number display, and the fourth decorative symbol. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area do not overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2. The variable icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are displayed. Here, the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed, or at the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. It may be present, or it may be a timing after the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

FIG. 153 (a-3) shows that the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are further moving toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1. , Does not overlap with WP2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and the appearance of the definite display with the lost symbol is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is in a state of being overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed on the upper left of the display screen is a combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The stop display is displayed, and the special figure 1 and 4 symbols are also stopped and displayed with a lost symbol.

After that, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the left-right direction of the display screen, respectively. Wipe. As a result, the UI unit is made visible, and the hold display frame FL1 is also made visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol have started variable display, respectively. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the variable icon h0. Further, the second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the character display of "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed.

FIGS. 153 (b-1) to 153 (b-2) show that the wipe display is performed while the error display is displayed. Note that the production examples shown in FIGS. 153 (b-1) to 153 (b-2) are shown in FIGS. 153 (a-3) to 153 (a-3), except that the lower plate full tank error display ER is displayed. Since it is the same as a-4), only the differences will be described in detail, and the other details will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 153 (b-1) to 153 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the above-mentioned lower plate full tank error display ER overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been done. Since it is necessary to promptly notify the player of such an error display, it is displayed in preference to other displays. Therefore, even in the case shown in FIG. 153 (b-1), the display of the lower plate full tank error display ER is prioritized over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. As shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower plate full tank error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. .. It should be noted that the error display such as the lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

FIG. 153 (c) shows that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 153 (c) is the same as FIG. 140 (i) except that the display positions of the variable icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed. Therefore, only the different points will be described in detail. A detailed description will be omitted. In the production example shown in FIG. 153 (c), for example, when the expansion animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the variable icon h0 moves upward along with the expansion of the hold display frame FL1 from the back side of the variable icon h0. A production will be performed in which the ninja character NJ1 appears. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variable icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

In FIG. 153 (d-1), the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 expands upward, and the ninja's extension portion is covered with the hold display frame FL4. It is shown that the character NJ3 is displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 does not display the hold display frame FL4. Since it is the same as b), only the differences will be described in detail, and the other details will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 153 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12, which is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. The hold display frame FL4 is framed in from the lower part of the display screen and moved to a position surrounding the second hold icon h12 in a default display mode having a size suitable for, for example, the size of the second hold icon h12. After that, the extended animation displays that the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward as described above. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed in the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that the time when both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. May overlap, or the times when both productions are performed may not overlap.

Further, when the symbol is stopped and displayed and the next symbol variation display is started while the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed, as shown in FIG. 153 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the expanded hold display frame FL4 is reduced to change to the default display mode, and then the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 in the default display mode also moves in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the movement animation, and the symbol variation display is started. After that, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded upward by the expansion animation. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such an manner. Further, at the time of the symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be deleted once, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variation display is started. Further, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state even when the symbol is stopped, and the hold display frame FL4 may also be moved according to the movement display by the movement animation of the second hold icon h12.

FIG. 154 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIGS. 154 (a-1) to 154 (a-4) show how the tutorial display unit TT6 as a hold display frame is expanded, and FIGS. 154 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), it is shown that the hold display frame in which the hold icon is housed is expanded and displayed to change the display mode of the hold icon.

As shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is held in the center of the UI unit. It is displayed in a mode housed in FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is the default display mode and does not overlap with the decorative symbol. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is arranged below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. .. Then, on the tutorial display unit TT6, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed, and it is shown that the explanation is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this production example, the button image 136a is not displayed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done.

In FIG. 154 (a-2), the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded upward by pushing up the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, and the range of the tutorial display unit TT6 is expanded. ing. In addition, the extended tutorial display unit TT6 has started the drink confrontation reach production. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this production example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative pattern is not obstructed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area expands. The display performed in the lower area is a display that does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative pattern, for example, the display of lines such as conversation notice, the display of notice, and the effect of changing the display of the hold icon. It can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the characters "SP development by victory" are displayed, and the content of the effect to be performed when the drinker confrontation reach effect is won is notified. In the drink confrontation reach production, a confrontation is performed between the main character and the grandfather, and if the grandfather gets drunk, it is predicted that the main character will win and will develop into SP reach. When the drink confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 may be displayed and the hold icon display area may be hidden. You may.

FIG. 154 (a-3) shows how the drinker confrontation reach production is continuously performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-4), when shifting to SP reach, the grandfather gets drunk and the hero's lord wins the production display. On the other hand, if the result of the loss is displayed without shifting to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 154 (a-4'), the hero's lord is drunk and the hero's lord is defeated by the grandfather. Is done. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) may be configured so that the effect display performed by the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) is not performed. , The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-2) may be configured so that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 154 (a-1) is not performed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the hold icon and the variable icon may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this production example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and is configured such that one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), four hold icons are housed in each frame in the hold icon display area, and among the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The second hold icon h12 is a display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are the default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is housed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variation display. Here, the area where the variable icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7, suggesting that the notice effect is performed. The tutorial display unit TT7 may display the explanation. Neither the variable icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, the stage name display unit and the button image 136a are not displayed.

The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows that the character of the lord is on the stage, and at the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and special figure 1 are shown. And the fourth symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually expands. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is housed is displayed in an expanded manner. At the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-3), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E, which was emitting light in blue, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces the display area. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed in the expanded hold display frame.

Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (a). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 802 are replaced with the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It has a display device 804 and. The first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, but various effects and various games are used even if the display device is not a liquid crystal display device. It suffices if it is configured to be able to display information, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and the like. Other display devices, including projectors, may be employed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 has an effect movable body 806, an effect movable body 808, and an effect movable body 810. The effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 66.

Here, the positional relationship between the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 will be described. .. After that, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as "front", and the position farther from the player than the "front" is described. Notated as "after". Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is described as "front", and the one farther from the player than the "front" is described as "rear". The side closer to the player is referred to as the "front side", and the side farther from the player than the "front side" is referred to as the "rear side". Further, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility, for example, the horizontal left side as seen from the player is "left" (left side, left side, left end, etc.), and the opposite is "right" (right side, right side). , Right end, etc.).

The first display device 800 is arranged substantially in the center of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 66, the second display device 802 is arranged on the left side of the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 is arranged. Is located to the right of the first display device 800. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are arranged in front of the first display device 800. The positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 in the front-rear direction are the same.

The effect movable body 806 is arranged on the upper left side of the first display device 800, and the effect movable body 808 is arranged on the upper right side of the first display device 800. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged adjacent to each other. The positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 in the front-rear direction are the same, and are on the front side of the first display device 800.

The effect movable body 810 is arranged below the first display device 800. The position of the effect movable body 810 in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first display device 800.

From the rear side, these display devices and the effect movable body are the first display device 800, the second display device 802 and the third display device 806, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810. They are arranged in order. The positions of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 in the front-rear direction may be the same, and the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged in front of the effect movable body 810. You may be. Further, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 may be arranged in front of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810.

The first display device 800 has a horizontally long rectangular display area. The first display device 800 has “Decoration 1” → “Decoration 2” → “Decoration 3” → ... “Decoration 9” → “Decoration 10” → “Decoration 1” → as shown in FIG. 68 (c). It is possible to execute variable display of the decorative symbol that switches the display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the order of ... During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first display device 800 displays the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in this order in a horizontal row from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is stopped and displayed on the first display device 800.

A game information display area a is provided below the display area of the first display device 800. The lower end side of the game information display area a coincides with the lower end side of the display area of the first display device 800, the left end side of the game information display area a coincides with the left end side of the display area, and the game information display area. The right end of a coincides with the right end of the display area. A variable icon display area b surrounded by a square frame is provided in the center of the game information display area a. The variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variable icon is an icon displayed in the variable icon display area b when the hold is exhausted and the special figure variable game is started. By changing the display mode of the variable icon, it is possible to notify the success or failure of the special figure variable game with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree) (the variable notice). In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the variable icon f1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is the default display mode, and is the display mode having the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area c is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area b in the game information display area a. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, the number of hold icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holds of the special figure 1 can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is possible to notify the number of holds of the special figure 1 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 1, and the special figure related to the hold depending on the display mode of each hold icon. It is possible to notify (pre-read notice) of the success or failure of one variable game with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree).

The special figure 1 hold icon display area c is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from right to left. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth hold ranks, respectively. That is, the hold icon of the special figure 1 corresponding to the earliest (most previously stored) hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the second to fourth areas are displayed in the second to fourth areas. The hold icon of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold of is can be displayed respectively.

An elliptical pedestal image indicating the display position of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the lower part of each of the first to fourth regions. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of reserved icons in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the reserved icons g1, g2, and g3 are stored in the first, second, and third regions of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Are displayed respectively. The hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is the default display mode, and is the display mode having the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes. In addition, the special figure 1 hold icon indicating the hold in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result is "undetermined" may be displayed in the default display mode. The reliability of the default display mode in this case is not set.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the hold icon is displayed in a display size smaller than that of the variable icon. This may make it easier to distinguish between the hold icon and the variable icon.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area d is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, the number of hold icons of special figure 2 corresponding to the number of hold of special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, it is possible to notify the number of holds of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of hold icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure related to the hold depending on the display mode of each hold icon. 2 It is possible to notify (pre-read notice) the success or failure of a variable game with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree).

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the number of holds of special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed in the hold icon display area d of special figure 2. When the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a horizontally long rectangular display area e is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. Be done. In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display such as a description of how to play a game, a description of the production content, a description of a character, and a notice display as character images. As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the character image is not displayed in the display area e during the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the tutorial display and the notice display are not executed in the display area e. As described above, the tutorial display and the notice display may not be displayed in the display area e during the stop display of the decorative symbol. When the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 1 or more or the game state is the electric support state, the display area e may not be provided, and the display area e may be provided within the display area of the first display device 800. Therefore, the display area e may be provided at a position that does not overlap the hold icon display area d of the special figure 2, or the display area e may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. Good.

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the castle town stage is set as the production stage. On the first display device 800, a background image of the castle town corresponding to the castle town stage (hereinafter, referred to as “castle town background”) is displayed. The background image is displayed on the backmost side of the display area of the first display device 800. The first display device 800 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and game state.

The second display device 802 has a vertically long rectangular display area. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800, and the display area of the second display device 802 is the display area of the first display device 800. Smaller than the display area. A mini decorative symbol having a display size smaller than that of the decorative symbol displayed on the first display device 800 is displayed on the upper part of the display area of the second display device 802. In FIGS. 155 and 155, the mini decorative symbol is shown in a simplified manner as compared with the decorative symbol displayed on the first display device 800. The display mode of the mini decorative symbol may be different from the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the first display device 800. On the second display device 802, three mini decorative symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, can be displayed side by side in this order from left to right. While the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game is being executed, each symbol on the left, middle, and right is "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → The variable display of the mini-decorative pattern that switches in the order of "decoration 1" → ... is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the second display device 802 has a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, similarly to the first display device 800. It is displayed as stopped.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the second display device 802. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the reception count display 850 of the character string image of "0 more times" is displayed, and the reception count of the operation of the chance button 136 is 0 times. A button image 852 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the second display device 850 and below the reception number display 850. The button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the button image 852 is divided into four regions. The button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), all four regions of the button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is 0. The specific contents of the effect using the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 will be described later.

A horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the second display device 802, and information about the current production stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since the production stage is the castle town stage, the character string image of "castle town" is displayed in the frame image.

In addition, a background image of the castle town background is displayed on the second display device 802. The background image is displayed on the backmost side of the display area of the second display device 802. The second display device 802 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and game state.

A full-color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the second display device 802. By causing the full-color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, a predetermined effect, notification, or the like can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 155 (a), the third display device 804 has a vertically long rectangular display area having the same size as the second display device 802. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800. In the upper left part of the display area of the third table device 804, a number indicating the number of reserved special figures is displayed. The number displayed on the left side indicates the number of holdings in Special Figure 1, and the number displayed on the right side indicates the number of holdings in Special Figure 2. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is 0. Therefore, “3” is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804. And the number "0" are displayed.

The fourth symbol is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area of the third display device 804. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special figure variable game is being executed. The square-shaped fourth symbol displayed on the left is the fourth symbol for special figure 1, and the circular fourth symbol displayed on the right is the fourth symbol for special figure 2. The fourth symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in white while the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in black while the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed. Similarly, the fourth symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in white while the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, and the fourth symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in black while the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed. .. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), since both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 variable game are not being executed, both the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 are It is displayed in black. When the special figure 1 of the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol for the special figure 1 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black. Similarly, when the special figure 2 of the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol for the special figure 2 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black.

At the bottom of the display area of the third display device 804, a character image of the lord on a columnar stage is displayed. Predetermined effects and notifications can be executed using the character image of the lord.

In addition, the background of the castle town is displayed on the third display device 804. The background image is displayed on the backmost side of the display area of the third display device 804. The third display device 804 can display a background image corresponding to the current production stage, game state, and production mode.

A full-color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the third display device 804. By causing the full-color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, a predetermined effect, notification, or the like can be executed.

The second display device 802 may display a decorative symbol, a variable icon, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a numerical hold number display, or a fourth symbol, and the third display device 804 may display a decorative symbol or a variable icon. , Hold icon, tutorial display, reception count display, button image, mini decorative design, and information on the current production stage may be displayed. The first display device 800 may display a mini decorative symbol, a display of the number of receptions, a button image, information on the current production stage, a fourth symbol, and a display of the number of holds by numbers.

The display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 67. A control unit (for example, a liquid crystal control unit) that executes display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 may be separately provided. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are respectively located at the initial positions. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and their initial positions are in a plane in front of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area. It is possible to move from side to side. The drive control (movement control) of the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The initial positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are positions that are symmetrical with respect to a virtual straight line extending in the vertical direction through the center of the display area of the first display device 800. Further, the second display device 802 and the second display device 802 are located at positions where a virtual straight line extending in the horizontal direction through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 passes through the center of the display area of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804. Three display devices 804 are arranged. The right end of the second display device 802 located at the initial position overlaps a part of the left end of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front. Similarly, the left end of the third display device 804 located at the initial position overlaps a part of the right end of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front.

In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are located at the initial positions. The effect movable body 806 is arranged relatively on the left side, and the effect movable body 808 is arranged relatively on the right side. The positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 in the vertical direction at the initial positions are the same. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have a horizontally long rectangular plate of the same size, and the plate surface is arranged so as to be orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. The characters "Yatsushiro" are written on the plate surface of the production movable body 806, and the characters "Shogun" are written on the plate surface of the production movable body 808.

The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and move vertically from their initial positions in a plane on the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area. It is movable. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 may operate integrally or individually during operation. Further, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have a full-color LED, and the full-color LED can be made to emit light to execute a predetermined effect or notification. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 emit white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

The effect movable body 810 has a circular shape, and the surface is decorated with a family crest. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 810 is located at the initial position. The effect movable body 810 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and can move in the vertical direction from each initial position in the plane which is the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and is parallel to the display area. Further, the effect movable body 810 has a full-color LED, and the full-color LED can be made to emit light to execute a predetermined effect or notification. In the example shown in FIG. 155 (a), the effect movable body 810 emits white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

The drive control (movement control) of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 67. The light emission control of the LEDs provided on the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 67.

Further, in each of the drawings after FIG. 155 (a), the configuration necessary for explanation is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the area on the paper surface separated by the alternate long and short dash line. As shown in each figure after FIG. 155 (a), the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left of the figure, the chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower left of the figure, and the general prize is given in the lower right of the figure. The mouth 226 is schematically shown.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to each figure of FIG. 155. Each figure of FIG. 155 is a figure which shows this effect example in time series. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “decoration 6-decoration 2 -Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

At the time shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. It is displayed, and the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "3" and "0" in the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804. The variable icon f1 displayed in the variable icon display area b is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted at the same time as the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol.

A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The chance button 136 emits white light (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

FIG. 155 (b), which continues from FIG. 155 (a), shows that the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (first special figure display device 212) (not shown) in FIGS. 155 and later. It shows the state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are indicated by a downward black arrow.

Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, an animation for erasing the variable icon is executed, and the variable icon f1 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon display area b is moved, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon is moved. The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 155 (b), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 has been completed.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, the character string image "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed in the display area e, and the character of the panda is explained.

FIG. 155 (c), which continues from FIG. 155 (b), shows a state immediately before one game ball wins in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155 (d), which continues from FIG. 155 (c), shows a state in which the meter of the button image 852 is increased by one in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. More specifically, the leftmost region of the four divided regions of the button image 852 changes from white to green (indicated by diagonal cross-hatching in the figure). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, each time one game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, one of the four divided areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green and the meter is used. Increases by 1.

The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 155 (e) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (d). In this example, the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (b) is being executed, and two game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 155 (d).

FIG. 155 (f) shows a state after two game balls have won a prize in the general winning opening 226. In response to two game balls winning in the general winning opening 226, two more areas of the button image 852 change from white to green and the meter increases by two. At this point the meter value is 3.

After the time point shown in FIG. 155 (f), one game ball wins in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 155 (g) shows a state continuing from FIG. 155 (f). In response to one game ball winning in the general winning opening 226, one more area of the button image 852 changes from white to green, the meter increases by 1, and the meter becomes full. In this example, when a total of four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the number of acceptances") increases by one. The display content of the reception count display 850 has been updated to the character string image of "one more time", and it is notified that the reception count of the chance button 136 has increased from 0 to 1. In the button image 852, after the meter is full, all four areas change from green to white and the meter value is reset to 0. The meter of the button image 852 may be reset at the same time as the display content of the reception number display 850 is updated, or may be before the display content is updated. It may be after the display content is updated. In this example, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started when the number of receptions of the chance button 136 increases from 0 to 1. When the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the chance button 136 may emit light in red. The red emission of the chance button 136 may start at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, may be after the start of the operation valid period, or immediately before the start of the operation valid period. You may.

The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 155 (h) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (g). In this example, the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (b) is being executed, and eight more game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 155 (g).

FIG. 155 (i) shows a state after eight more game balls have been won in the general winning opening 226. The number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases twice in response to eight game balls winning in the general winning opening 226. The display content of the reception count display 850 has been updated to the character string image of "three more times", and it is notified that the reception count of the chance button 136 has increased to three times. In the button image 852, all four areas are displayed in white, and the meter is reset to 0.

FIG. 155 (j) following FIG. 155 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (b) is completed. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “Decoration 3-Decoration 2 -Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed. During the stop display of the decorative pattern, the character image is not displayed in the display area e and the tutorial display is not executed. The timing for erasing the character image in the display area e may be the same as the start of the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be immediately before the start of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the stop display of the decorative symbol is in progress. You may.

In FIG. 155 (k), which continues from FIG. 155 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. In each figure, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are indicated by a downward black arrow.

Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, an animation for erasing the variable icon is executed, and the variable icon f2 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f3. It moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 155 (k), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f3 and the hold icon g3 has been completed.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, the character string image "Den-sama is the eighth shogun" is displayed in the display area e, and the character of the lord is explained. In this way, the display content of the tutorial display may be changed for each symbol variation display.

Further, on the second display device 802, the reception number display 850 is displayed by the character string image of "three more times". The number of times the operation of the chance button 136 accumulated during the execution of the previous special figure variable game can be carried over to the next and subsequent special figure variable game transitions.

FIG. 155 (l) following FIG. 155 (k) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. FIG. 155 (m) following FIG. 155 (l) shows the state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed). In this example, the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. Since the chance button 136 is operated once, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is reduced to two. As a result, the display content of the reception number display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to "two more times".

The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 155 (n) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 155 (m). In this example, after FIG. 155 (m), the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 155 (k).

FIG. 155 (o) shows the state after the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player. In this example, the effect is not executed regardless of which of the two operations of the chance button 136 is performed. Since the chance button 136 is operated twice, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is reduced to 0 times. As a result, the display content of the reception count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to "0 more times". In this example, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 ends when the number of receptions of the chance button 136 decreases from 1 to 0. For example, if the result of the hit / fail determination related to the symbol variation display being executed is incorrect, the chance button 136 may be operated, but the effect may not be executed in response to the operation.

FIG. 155 (p) shows another pattern of the production example following from FIG. 155 (k). In this pattern, the advance notice effect of the change is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. In FIG. 155 (p), the chance button 136 is operated by the player. Further, the variable icon f3 is displayed in a green circular display mode. When the variable icon or the hold icon is displayed in a predetermined color, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher in the order of white, blue, green, and red. That is, the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability is white, the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is blue, the display mode with the next highest jackpot reliability is green, and the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is green. It is red. Therefore, when the green circular variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (p) is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, the white circular variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (k) is displayed. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case. The display mode of the variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 155 (p) may be changed from white to green during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the display mode may be changed from white to green at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be changed, the display mode may be changed from white to green during the period displayed as the hold icon f2 before becoming the variable icon, or the hold icon f2 is displayed in the green display mode from the beginning. You may be.

FIG. 155 (q) following FIG. 155 (p) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. In this example, the advance notice effect of the change is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As a notice effect of the fluctuation, a notice image including a character image of "celebration" is displayed in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852, and the emission colors of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 are displayed. Changes from white to red (indicated by cross-hatching of vertical and horizontal lines in the figure), and a sound effect of "keen" is output from the speaker 120. The notice image is displayed so as to overlap the entire reception number display 850. The reception number display 850 may be deleted while the preview image is being displayed. Further, the timing at which the notice image is started to be displayed and the timing at which the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 change from white to red may be earlier or at the same time. Good. The effect movable bodies 806 and 608 may execute a moving operation as a notice effect. For example, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may move downward at the same time as the emission color changes to red, may move downward after the emission color changes to red, or the emission color may change to red. You may move down before changing to.

Further, the timing at which the notice image is started to be displayed and the timing at which the sound effect "keen" is output from the speaker 120 may be earlier or simultaneous. Further, the timing at which the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes to red and the timing at which the sound effect "keen" is output from the speaker 120 may be earlier, or at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the notice image including the character image of "celebration" is a notice image of the big hit confirmation, and is displayed only when the hit / fail judgment result related to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. If the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the symbol variation display during execution is incorrect, even if the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIGS. 155 (m) and 155 (o). Alternatively, for example, a notice image including the character string image of "chance" may be displayed as a notice of the change. The notice image including the character string image of "chance" can be displayed even when the hit / fail determination result related to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. The notice image including the character string image of "chance" has a lower jackpot reliability than the notice image including the character image of "celebration", and the notice image including the character image of "celebration" is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. When the display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the preview image including the character string image of "chance" is displayed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the notice effect in which the effect movable body emits light in red is set to be relatively high. The emission color of the effect movable body at the time of the advance notice effect is set with high jackpot reliability in the order of white, blue, green, and red. When the effect movable body emits red light and the advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the symbol variation display, the symbol variation is performed when the effect movable body emits blue light and the advance notice effect is executed. There is a high probability that the jackpot symbol mode will be confirmed and displayed on the display.

In this embodiment, the advance notice effect of the change is executed according to the first operation of the chance button 136, but the advance notice effect of the change may be executed according to the second operation of the chance button 136. However, the advance notice effect of the change may be executed according to the third operation, or the advance notice effect of the change may be executed every time the chance button 136 is operated. In addition. The effect executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a look-ahead notice effect.

In this embodiment, every time four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted increases by one. The number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one every time one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, or every time two or three game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. The number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one, or the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one every time a predetermined number of game balls of 5 or more are won in the general winning opening 226. You may. The upper limit of the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be three times, less than three times, or four times or more.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a chance button 136 as an operating means and a general winning opening 226 as a first area. The number of receptions for the operation of the chance button 136 in the production related to the chance button 136 by the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 (first button production) can be increased or decreased, and when the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 226, the number of receptions is the same. May increase. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226 can be grasped by the player by increasing the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. In some cases.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c). FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (c) are diagrams showing this effect example in chronological order. FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The first display device 800 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the second display device 802 executes the variable display of the mini decorative symbol. On the third display device 804, a white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. Since the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2 and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 is displayed. In the upper left part of, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in a white circular display mode. The variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variable icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

In FIG. 156 (a), a button image 854 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed in the center of the display area of the first display device 800, and a gauge image 856 showing the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is displayed below the button image 854. ing. The button image 854 is displayed in a red display mode. The gauge image 856 displays the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in a predetermined color (light black color in the figure). The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the middle symbol). The button image 854 has a larger display size than the button image 852.

In addition, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is three times in response to the fact that 12 game balls have won the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 156 (a), and the second display device. In 802, the reception number display 850 by the character string image of "three more times" is displayed. The entire area of the button image 852 is white, and the value of the meter is 0.

In this embodiment, the effect related to the chance button 136 by the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 (hereinafter referred to as "button effect A") and the effect related to the chance button 136 by the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 (hereinafter, "button effect"). "B") and are executed in duplicate. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is, for example, 10 seconds, according to the gauge image 856. The remaining time is notified. In this example, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed at the same time as the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 may be displayed after the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, or the button image 854 may be displayed prior to the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. And gauge image 856 may be displayed. Further, in the button effect B, when the chance button 136 is operated once, the advance notice effect is executed according to the operation. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B ends when the chance button 136 is operated once. If the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are deleted at the end of the operation valid period. In this case, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is not executed. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the advance notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is executed. May be good.

FIG. 156 (b) following FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 once. FIG. 156 (c) following FIG. 156 (b) shows a state in which the effect is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In this example, according to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect B. The first notice production and the second notice production are started at the same time. The first advance notice effect is the same as the advance notice effect of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 155 (q), and as the first advance notice effect, it is in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A preview image including a character image of "celebration" is displayed, the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 is changed from white to red, and a sound effect of "keen" is output from the speaker 120. The second notice effect is a notice effect of the change, and as the second notice effect, a cut-in image 858 having a horizontally long parallel quadrilateral shape and including a character image of the lord is displayed on the first display device 800. The cut-in image 858 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable display and variable icon display area b of the decorative symbol. In this example, when the first notice effect and the second notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the second notice effect is output. May be done.

In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B, the second notice effect can be executed. Button effect A and button effect B are separate and independent effects, and even when the reception count display 850 of the character image of "0 more times" is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated in button effect B. Then, the second notice production can be executed. As shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b), the button effect A and the button effect B can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed in parallel. Is.

When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the second notice effect may be started after the first notice effect is started. In this case, when the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit green light as the second advance notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red light as the first advance notice effect and then as the second advance notice effect. The effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit green light. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 156 (b), the first notice effect may be started after the second notice effect is started. In this case, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit light in red as the second advance notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit light in red as the first advance notice effect. In this way, the emission color of the effect movable body may be overwritten with the color corresponding to the advance notice effect started later.

The button effect B of this example is an effect that requires a single operation of the chance button 136, but the button effect B may be an effect that requires a continuous operation of the chance button 136. For example, when the button effect B is an effect that requires the chance button 136 to be repeatedly hit 10 times, the button effect B operates the chance button 136 seven times even after the number of receptions of the button effect A becomes 0. Is accepted, and when the chance button 136 is operated 10 times, the operation valid period of the button effect B ends, and the second notice effect is executed.

The chance button 136 may emit red light only when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B overlap, or in the button effect A. It may emit red light only during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, or may emit red light only during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B.

In the button effect A, a period other than the stop display of the decorative symbol and the execution of the wipe effect display described later in FIG. 158 may be set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. After the jackpot game is completed, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 by the button effect A is accepted may be reset to 0 times.

Next, a modified example of the production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (d) and 156 (e). FIGS. 156 (d) and 156 (e) are diagrams showing an effect example of this modified example in chronological order. FIG. 156 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The first display device 800 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the second display device 802 executes the variable display of the mini decorative symbol. On the third display device 804, a white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. Since the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2 and the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 is displayed. In the upper left part of, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". The hold icon g1 is displayed in a white circular display mode. The variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b. The variable icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

The hold icon g2 is displayed in a display mode of a pattern imitating the chance button 136. The hold icon g2 is displayed in red. The display size of the hold icon g2 is smaller than that of the button image 850. Further, before the time shown in FIG. 156 (d), the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is three times in response to the fact that 12 game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, and the second display device. In 802, the reception number display 850 by the character string image of "three more times" is displayed. The entire area of the button image 852 is white, and the value of the meter is 0.

In this example, the button effect A by the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 and the effect related to the chance button 136 by the hold icon g2 (hereinafter, referred to as “button effect C”) are executed in duplicate. The operation validity period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is the period in which the hold icon g2 is displayed. It continues until the chance button 136 is operated once. In this example, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started at the same time as the display of the hold icon g2 having the pattern imitating the chance button 136 is started. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C may be started after the display of the hold icon g2 is started, or the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started prior to the start of the display of the hold icon g2. May be started.

FIG. 156 (e) following FIG. 156 (d) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the third advance notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect C. The first notice effect is the same as the change notice effect shown in FIG. 155 (q), and as the first notice effect, it is in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , A preview image including the character image of "celebration" is displayed, and the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red. The third advance notice effect is a look-ahead advance notice effect, and the third advance notice effect of this example is a look-ahead advance notice for the special figure variable game related to the second hold of the special figure 1. As the third notice effect, the display mode of the hold icon g2 changes from a pattern imitating the chance button 136 to a character pattern of the lord. In the hold icon, the jackpot reliability of the display mode of the character pattern of the lord is set higher than that of the red circle display mode. When the display mode of the hold icon g2 is changed, the hold icon change animation may be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In this example, when the first notice effect and the third notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the third notice effect is output. May be done.

In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C, the third advance notice effect can be executed. Button effect A and button effect C are separate and independent effects, and even when the reception count display 850 of the character image of "0 more times" is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated in button effect C. Then, the third notice production can be executed. As shown in FIG. 156 (d), the button effect A and the button effect C can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in parallel. In this example, the button effect A and the first advance notice effect are executed as the advance notice effect of the change, and the button effect C and the third advance notice effect are executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect. The button effect B shown in FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) and the button effect C shown in FIG. 156 (d) may be executed in parallel, or the button effect B and the button effect C may be executed. When the chance button 136 is operated while is being executed in parallel, the second advance notice effect and the third advance notice effect may be executed in parallel.

In Examples 1 and 2, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted increases when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, but the special drawing 1 starting opening 230 (first special drawing) Even if it is configured to increase the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted when the game ball enters the starting port 230), the special drawing 2 starting port 232 (the second special drawing starting port), and the normal drawing starting port 228. Good.

In addition, a sensor (for example, a gate or a through chucker) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball at the general winning opening 226, and when the game ball passes through the sensor, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. It may be configured to increase the number of times.

It should be noted that the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased only in a predetermined game state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, a big hit game is not being executed).

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to each figure of FIG. 157. Each figure of FIG. 157 is a figure which shows this effect example in time series. FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “decoration 6-decoration 2 -Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

At the time shown in FIG. 157 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. It is displayed, and the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "3" and "0" in the upper left portion of the display area of the third display device 804. The variable icon f1 displayed in the variable icon display area b is erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol. The variable icon f1 may be deleted at the same time as the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted at the same time as the start of the variable display of the next decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a horizontally long rectangular wipe display screen wpa is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the first display device 800. A still image, a moving image, or the like different from the still image or moving image displayed outside the wipe display area is displayed in the wipe display screen wpa, and a predetermined effect is executed. The wipe display screen wpa functions as a so-called corner wipe. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. For example, the wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is executed. Good. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is executed. Good.

As shown in FIG. 157 (a), the wipe display screen wpa displays a character image of the lord with a disappointed expression. The character image is the default display displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. Further, during the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (upper end in this example) exceeds the decorative symbol (right symbol) in the stop display. Wrapped and displayed.

In FIG. 157 (b), which continues from FIG. 157 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state.

Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, an animation for erasing the variable icon is executed, and the variable icon f1 is deleted. Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon display area b is moved, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon is moved. The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 157 (b), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 has been completed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbol, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (upper end portion in this example) does not overlap with the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol. In other words, a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa and the wipe display screen wpa (in this example, the upper end portion) is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol. The lower end of the variable display of the right symbol of the decorative symbol may coincide with the upper end side of the wipe display screen wpa.

FIG. 157 (c), which continues from FIG. 157 (b), shows a state immediately before one game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 157 (d), which continues from FIG. 157 (c), shows a state in which the mini-game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a mini-game effect display is executed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa in response to a game ball winning a prize in the general winning opening 226. Even if the game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, the special figure is held at 0, the decorative symbol is stopped displayed (the symbol is stopped displayed), or the jackpot game is being executed. , When the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure variation game being executed is, for example, 10 seconds or less, the mini-game effect display may not be executed. In addition, the mini-game effect display may be executed a number of times according to the number of game balls that have won a prize in the general winning opening 226. For example, the mini-game effect display is started in response to one game ball winning in the general winning opening 226 while the mini-game effect display is not being executed, and the game is further played in the general winning opening while the mini-game effect display is being executed. When the ball wins, the start of the mini-game effect display may be suspended. In addition, the mini-game effect display is started only when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 226 while the mini-game effect display is not being executed, and the game ball wins in the general winning opening 226 while the mini-game effect display is being executed. In some cases, the start of the mini-game effect display does not have to be suspended.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (d), a mini-game effect display is executed in which the lord and the grandfather confront each other by drinking alcohol. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which the lord and the grandfather confront each other over drinking alcohol is displayed. The mini-game effect display of this example is executed as a look-ahead notice effect for the special figure variable game related to the second hold of the special figure 1. The mini-game effect display may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect, or may be executed as a notice of the change.

FIG. 157 (e) following FIG. 157 (d) shows a state in which the mini-game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (f) following FIG. 157 (e) shows a state in which the result of the mini-game effect display is displayed. In this example, the lord wins the confrontation by drinking alcohol, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a character string image of "winning" and a moving image of the scene in which the lord won. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, the lord wins the confrontation by drinking alcohol.

FIG. 157 (g), which continues from FIG. 157 (f), shows a state in which the advance notice effect to be executed when the mini game is successful has been started. In this example, as the advance notice effect, a hold icon change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold of the special figure 1 is executed. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves toward the hold icon g3 is displayed from the wipe display screen wpa. A part of the hold icon change animation of this example is displayed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa. The arrows in FIGS. 157 (g) and 157 (h) indicate the locus of movement of the effect image 860.

FIG. 157 (h) following FIG. 157 (g) shows a state in which the effect image 860 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon g3. The entire hold icon g3 is hidden by the effect image 860. The effect image 860 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g2) that is not the target of the hold icon change animation.

FIG. 157 (i) following FIG. 157 (h) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation has ended. When the hold icon change animation ends, the effect image 860 is erased and the entire hold icon g3 becomes visible again. Due to the hold icon change animation, the hold icon g3 is displayed with the display mode changed from white to green.

FIG. 157 (j) following FIG. 157 (i) shows the state after the mini-game effect display is finished. In this example, the mini-game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends. On the wipe display screen wpa, the same default display as in FIG. 157 (b) is executed.

FIG. 157 (k) shows an production example of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. If the mini-game fails, the lord is defeated in the drinking comparison confrontation, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a character string image of "losing" and a moving image of the scene in which the lord was defeated. If the mini-game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini-game effect display ends.

FIG. 157 (l) shows an example in which the mini-game effect display overlaps with other effect displays. A conversation preview image 862 including a character image of Princess Chibi and a balloon image including a character string image is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the first display device 800. A part of the conversation preview image 862 overlaps with the wipe display screen wpa. More specifically, of the conversation preview image 862, the right half of the character image of Princess Chibi, the entire character string image, and other than the upper end and the right end of the balloon image are overlapped on the wipe display screen wpa and visually recognized. It is impossible. In other words, in this example, the wipe screen wpa is displayed on the conversation notice image 862 without overlapping. Further, in this example, the conversation notice image 862 is displayed as a notice image of the change. The conversation notice image 862 may be displayed as a look-ahead notice image.

FIGS. 157 (m) to 157 (r) show another example of the mini-game effect display in chronological order. The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment can execute a plurality of mini-game effect displays. FIG. 157 (m), which continues from FIG. 157 (b), shows a state immediately before one game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 157 (n), which continues from FIG. 157 (m), shows a state in which the mini-game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. In this example, as shown in FIG. 157 (n), a mini-game effect display in which the lord challenges the throwing of a thousand boxes is executed. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of the scene in which the lord is about to throw a thousand boxes is displayed. The mini-game effect display of this example is executed as a look-ahead notice effect for the special figure variable game related to the second hold of the special figure 1. The mini-game effect display may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect, or may be executed as a notice of the change.

FIG. 157 (o) following FIG. 157 (n) shows a state in which the mini-game effect display is being executed. FIG. 157 (p) following FIG. 157 (o) shows a state in which the result of the mini-game effect display is displayed. In this example, the moving image of the scene in which the lord succeeded in throwing the thousand-car box and the lord succeeded in throwing the thousand-car box is displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, the lord wins the thousand-car box throw.

FIG. 157 (q), which continues from FIG. 157 (p), shows a state in which the advance notice effect to be executed when the mini game is successful has been started. In this example, as the advance notice effect, a hold icon change animation that changes the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold of the special figure 1 is executed. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves toward the hold icon g3 is displayed from the wipe display screen wpa. The arrow in FIG. 157 (q) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The hold icon change animation of this example is the same as the hold icon change animation shown in FIGS. 157 (g) to 157 (i). In this example, as in FIG. 157 (j), the mini-game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends.

FIG. 157 (r) shows an production example of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. If the mini-game fails, the lord fails to throw the thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of the scene where the lord failed to throw the thousand boxes. If the mini-game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini-game effect display ends.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of mini-game effect displays. The jackpot reliability may be set according to the type of the mini-game effect display. For example, the mini-game effect display (hereinafter referred to as “mini-game effect display A”) of the drinking comparison confrontation shown in FIGS. 157 (d) to 157 (l) is shown in FIGS. 157 (m) to (r). The jackpot reliability may be set higher than that of the mini-game effect display (hereinafter referred to as "mini-game effect display B") that challenges the throwing of a thousand boxes. In this case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation table to be announced when the mini-game effect display A is executed than when the mini-game effect display B is executed. On the contrary, the mini-game effect display B may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the mini-game effect display A. In this case, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation table to be announced when the mini-game effect display B is executed than when the mini-game effect display A is executed. It should be noted that the case where the mini-game effect display A is executed may be easier to succeed in the mini-game than the case where the mini-game effect display B is executed, or the case where the mini-game effect display B is executed. May be easier to succeed in the mini-game than when the mini-game effect display A is executed. The hold icon change animation may be of only one type or may be provided with a plurality of types. When a plurality of types of hold icon change animations are provided, the hold icon change animation to be executed may be determined in advance for each mini-game effect display, or the hold icon change animation to be executed is determined by lottery each time. May be done.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a general winning opening 226 as a first area, and display means for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804. When the game ball enters the general winning opening 226, the mini-game effect display may be executed, and the mini-game effect display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative pattern. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the prize ball based on the prize in the general prize opening 226 but also the effect display based on the prize in the general prize opening 226 gives the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit. May be possible.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the mini-game effect display as a wipe display in the wipe screen wpa, which is a part of the display area of the first display device 800. The mini-game effect display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a part of the hold icon change animation as a wipe display in the wipe screen wpa. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display a part of the variable icon change animation for changing the variable icon in the wipe screen wpa as the wipe display. It is not necessary to start the mini-game effect display during the execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, the mini-game effect display is executed when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, but the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and the usual The mini-game effect display may be executed when the game ball enters the starting port 228.

A sensor (for example, through) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball at the general winning opening 226 so that the mini-game effect display is executed when the game ball passes through the sensor. It may be configured.

It should be noted that the mini-game effect display may be executed only in a predetermined game state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, a big hit game is not being executed).

The change animation of the hold icon is an animation that only starts the display of the effect image 860 and erases the effect image 860, and the animation in the wipe display screen wpa in FIGS. 157 (g) and 157 (h) is due to the change of the hold icon. It may be an animation of.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to each figure of FIG. 158. Each figure of FIG. 158 is a figure which shows this effect example in time series. FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6", which suggests a deviation during the super reach effect, is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation display). In each figure of FIG. 158, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are not shown.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is held by the mini decorative symbol displayed on the second display device 802 and the number displayed on the third display device 804 in the production example shown in FIGS. 155 to 157. The number display and the fourth symbol are displayed on the first display device 800. The mini decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the first display device 800, and the number of reserved numbers and the fourth symbol are displayed in the upper right portion of the display area. Further, since the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, the wipe display screen wpa is displayed so as to overlap the "decoration 6" of the right symbol.

At the time shown in FIG. 158 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. , The number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0" in the upper right part of the display area of the first display device 800.

FIG. 158 (b) following FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started. The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing an image from the edge of the display area of the display device so as to wipe it off. In this example, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the wipe display wpb1 starts to appear from the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, and the wipe display wpb2 starts to appear from the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb1 and the wipe display wpb2 start to appear at the same time, and the wipe effect display starts when the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 start to appear. The display mode of the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 is a sliding door pattern. The wipe effect display may or may not be executed in the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

The wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 are displayed so as to overlap with the mini-decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols, and the display other than the fourth symbol. As shown in FIG. 158 (b), the wipe display wpb1 is displayed overlapping with the display other than the mini decorative symbol, and the wipe display wpb2 overlaps with the display of the number of pending numbers and the display other than the fourth symbol. Is displayed. In other words, the mini decorative symbol, the numerical hold number display, and the fourth symbol are displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

Further, the variable icon f1 is erased at the same time as the start of the wipe effect display. The variable icon f1 may be deleted before the start of the wipe effect display, may be deleted after the start of the wipe effect display, or may be displayed even after the start of the wipe effect display.

FIG. 158 (c) following FIG. 158 (b) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is being executed. The variable icon f1 may be erased at the time shown in FIG. 158 (c).

FIG. 158 (d) following FIG. 158 (c) shows a state in which the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. The entire display area of the first display device 800 is displayed in a display mode in which the sliding doors are closed by the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this example, the variation display of the mini decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol (symbol variation display) end at the same time as the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. A mini decorative symbol of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, and a black special figure 1 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area. The fourth symbol for use is displayed. The symbol variation display may end after the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. After the end of the symbol variation display, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is executed, and the stop display of the decorative symbol of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6" becomes visible.

FIG. 158 (e) following FIG. 158 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. The withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed prior to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game. In the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the wipe display wpb1 is shrunk toward the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, the wipe display wpb1 is erased from the display area, and the wipe display wpb2 is shrunk toward the right end of the display area. , The wipe display wpb2 is deleted from the display area. The timing of the withdrawal display completion of the wipe display wpb1 and the timing of the withdrawal display completion of the wipe display wpb2 are the same.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. It moves to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 158 (e), the reduction animation of the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the variable icon f2 and the hold icon g2 has been completed.

As shown in FIG. 158 (e), since the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 are erased, the wipe display area wpb, the variable icon f2, the hold icon g2, and the castle town background can be visually recognized. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to refresh the mood of the player by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next fluctuation when the super reach effect is deviated.

FIGS. 158 (f) and 158 (g) show another example of the wipe effect display in chronological order. FIG. 158 (f) shows the same state as shown in FIG. 158 (c) except that the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed.

At the time shown in FIG. 158 (f), the lower plate 128 is full with the game ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. At the lower center of the display area of the first display device 800, a lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error display 852 is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design and the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

FIG. 158 (g) following FIG. 158 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 158 (d) except that the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this way, the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disengagement. In other words, the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection do not overlap with the lower plate full tank error display 864.

FIG. 158 (h) shows another example of the wipe effect display in chronological order. FIG. 158 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 158 (g) except that the hold icon change animation is displayed. FIG. 158 (h) shows a state in which the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The arrow in FIG. 158 (h) indicates the locus of movement of the effect image 860. The moving effect image 860 does not overlap with the lower plate full tank error display 864. In other words, the lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the moving effect image 860.

In this way, the notice effect display may be displayed overlapping with the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection. In this example, the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation as the look-ahead notice effect is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment refreshes the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next fluctuation when the super reach effect is deviated, and the pre-reading notice display is displayed on the wipe effect display. By overlapping, it may be possible to have expectations after the next symbol variation display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 4 of the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158.

(A1)
Operating means (for example, chance button 136) and
The first region (for example, general winning opening 226, special drawing 1 starting opening 230, special drawing 2 starting opening 232, general drawing starting opening 228),
It is a game table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter.
The number of times (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times of reception") that the operation of the operation means is accepted in the first button effect (for example, the effect related to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 155, button effect A) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having this configuration, it may be possible for the player to grasp the number of game balls entering the first area by increasing the number of times the operation of the operating means is accepted and the number of times the operating means are operated.

(A2)
The game console described in A1 above.
A display means (for example, a general term for a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804) is provided.
The display means (for example, a display device of at least one of a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as a "first display" (for example, a notice display including a character image of "celebration" shown in FIG. 155 (d))). ,
In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(A3)
The game console described in A2 above.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, "second display" (for example, the cut-in image 858 shown in FIG. 156 (c) and the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 156 (e)). ) And
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
When the operating means is operated in the second button effect (for example, button effect B, button effect C), the second display may be displayed.
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game table characterized by that.

(A4)
The game console described in A3 above.
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game table characterized by that.

(A5)
The game console according to A3 or A4 above.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display" (for example, a button image 852)) in the first button effect.
The display means is an image imitating the operation means in the second button effect (hereinafter, referred to as a "fourth display" (for example, a button image 854, a hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 156 (d))). Can be displayed,
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(A6)
The game console according to any one of A1 to A5 above.
When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may decrease.
A game table characterized by that.

(A7)
The game console according to any one of A1 to A6 above.
When a plurality of (for example, four) game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(A8)
The game console according to any one of A1 to A7 above.
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226).
A game table characterized by that.

(A9)
The game console according to any one of A1 to A8 above.
It is provided with a second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226).
The second region is a region through which the game ball can pass.
A game ball that has passed through the second region may enter the first region.
When the game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(A10)
The game console according to any one of A1 to A9 above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.

The number of receptions may be increased only when the game ball enters the first area when a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is satisfied.

Even if a game ball enters the first area when a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is not satisfied, the number of receptions may not increase.

In the first button effect, if the operating means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more, the first display may always be displayed.

In the first button effect during execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more.

In the first button effect during non-execution of the symbol variation display, even if the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more, the first display may not be displayed.

When the operating means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed without fail.

The second display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated in the second button effect.

Even when the operating means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may not be displayed.

Even if the number of receptions is 0 when operating the operating means, the second display may always be displayed.

The second display may be displayed only when the number of receptions is 0 when the operating means is operated.

The second display may not be displayed even when the number of receptions is 0 when the operation means is operated when the operation means is operated.

When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.

The number of receptions may be reduced only when the operating means is operated.

Even when the operating means is operated, the number of receptions does not have to be reduced.

When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.

The number of receptions may be increased only when a plurality of game balls enter the first area.

Even if a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions does not have to increase.

A game ball that has passed through the second region may always enter the first region.

Only the game ball that has passed through the second region may be able to enter the first region.

The game ball that has passed through the second region may not enter the first region.

When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.

The number of receptions may be increased only when the game ball enters the second area while certain conditions such as the number of receptions is not full are satisfied.

Even if a game ball enters the second area when a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is not satisfied, the number of receptions may not increase.

Special figure low probability Normal figure In order to raise the base (number of prize balls / number of game balls fired) in the low probability state, it is conceivable to increase the winning rate to the general winning opening, but in the conventional game table, the general winning opening Since there is no way for the player to recognize that the winning rate for 226 has increased, the total number of winning balls will increase even though the jackpot has not been won due to the increase in prize balls based on the winning of the general winning opening 226. There was a risk of distrusting the players about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment increases the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted based on the winning of the general winning opening 226, thereby increasing the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. In some cases, the player may be able to grasp the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 226.

The number of receptions may be increased by 1 each time one game ball is won in the first area.

In a so-called right-handed machine provided with a normal drawing start port and an attacker on the right side of the game area, a game ball wins a prize at the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game area when hitting right (during electric support, big hit game). If this happens, the number of receptions may not increase.

At the time of right-handed hitting, the number of receptions may or may not increase even if the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game area is won, or the number of receptions dedicated to right-handed hitting may increase. Good.

When the game ball enters the first region, the effect of operating the operating means at least once may be started. For example, in a configuration in which a certain effect always involves the operation of an operating means, the number of occurrences of the certain effect (for example, a pseudo-ream effect) may be indicated.

The display of the first display (for example, the first notice effect) may be configured to require a plurality of operations of the operating means even when the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit.

The number of receptions may be configured to increase with other triggers (the number of big hits won or the number of executions of a predetermined reach).

Even during the first display, the number of receptions decreases when the operating means is operated.

When a game ball enters the first area during the first display, the number of receptions may or may not increase.

(B1)
The first region (for example, general winning opening 226, special drawing 1 starting opening 230, special drawing 2 starting opening 232, general drawing starting opening 228),
Display means (for example, a general term for the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804).
It is a game table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter.
The display means (for example, a display device of at least one of a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display" (for example, mini-game effect display)).
When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed.
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the amusement machine equipped with this configuration, not only the prize ball based on the prize in the first area but also the first display based on the prize in the first area gives the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit. You may be able to.

(B2)
The game console described in B1 above.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as a "second display" (for example, a conversation notice image 862)).
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display.
The wipe display does not overlap with the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game table characterized by that.

(B3)
The game console described in B2 above.
The wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means (for example, the wipe screen wpa).
A game table characterized by that.

(B4)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B3 above.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as a "third display" (for example, a hold icon, a variable icon)).
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
The first display (for example, a wipe effect display as a hold icon change animation or a variable icon change animation) is displayed as a display that changes the display mode of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(B5)
The game console described in B4 above.
The third display is a hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(B6)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B5 above.
The first display is not started during the execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol (for example, the wipe effect display is not started during the execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol).
A game table characterized by that.

(B7)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B6 above.
When the game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed (for example, the general winning opening 226 is displayed during the execution of the wipe effect display. If the game ball wins, the wipe effect display will continue to be executed),
A game table characterized by that.

(B8)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B7 above.
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, general winning opening 226).
A game table characterized by that.

(B9)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B8.
It is provided with a second area (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226).
The second region is a region through which the game ball can pass.
A game ball that has passed through the second region may enter the first region.
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(B10)
The game console according to any one of B1 to B9 above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed without fail.

The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the first area during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Even if the game ball enters the first area while the symbol variation display is not being executed, the first display may not be displayed.

A game ball that has passed through the second region may always enter the first region.

Only the game ball that has passed through the second region may be able to enter the first region.

The game ball that has passed through the second region may not enter the first region.

When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed without fail.

The first display may be displayed only when the game ball enters the second area.

Even if the game ball enters the second area, the first display does not have to be displayed. Special figure Low probability Normal figure General prize to raise the base (number of prize balls / number of fired game balls) in the low probability state It is conceivable to increase the winning rate to the mouth, but since there is no means to make the player recognize that the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 has increased in the conventional game table, the general winning opening 226 is used. As the number of prize balls based on the prizes increased, there was a risk of giving the player a sense of distrust about the increase in the total number of prize balls even though the jackpot was not won. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a mini-game effect display based on the winning of the general winning opening 226, thereby notifying the player that the game ball has won the general winning opening 226, and the mini-game. In some cases, the effect display can give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini-game effect display in the wipe screen wpa that displays the mini-game effect display with priority over the decorative design or other effect display (for example, conversation notice image 862). Effect display It may be possible to grasp the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 by the frequency of the effect display so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In addition to the mini-game effect display, the wipe screen wpa may display the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted (for example, the number of times of acceptance display 850) and the button image (for example, the button image 852).

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e). 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e) are diagrams showing this effect example in chronological order. In the states shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 (a) to 160 (e), the gaming state is the non-electric support state. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is in the game information display area a of the display area of the first display device 800, and the digestion icon is to the right of the variable icon display area b. A display area i is provided. The digestion icon display area i is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. In the digestion icon display area i, a variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure variation game (design variation display) can be displayed as a digestion icon. A horizontally long rectangular pedestal image showing the display position of the digestion icon is displayed in the lower part of each of the first to fourth regions.

Further, in each of the drawings after FIG. 159 (a), the configurations necessary for explanation among the configurations of the pachinko machine 100 are extracted and shown in the area on the paper surface separated by the alternate long and short dash line. As shown in each figure after FIG. 159 (a), the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left of the figure, and the chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower left of the figure.

FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has not yet been executed since the pachinko machine 100 was turned on. After the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 displays the default symbol combination "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" on the first display device 800 and the second display device 802. Since the number of holdings of the special figures 1 and 2 is 0 at the time shown in FIG. 159 (a), the holding icon is not displayed on the first display device 800, and the holding icon is not displayed on the third display device 804. The number of holds is indicated by the numbers "0" and "0". Further, on the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special figure 1 and a black fourth symbol for special figure 2 are displayed.

On the second display device 802, a button image 870 imitating the chance button 136 is displayed. The display color of the button image 870 is white. The chance button 136 emits white light. The effect movable bodies 806, 808, and 810 are located at the initial positions, respectively, and all emit white light. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120.

In FIG. 159 (b), which continues from FIG. 159 (a), the hold of special figure 1 is increased by 1 in response to the winning of one game ball at the start port 230 of special figure 1, and the hold of special figure 1 is exhausted. Then, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started. In the variable icon display area b, the variable icon f1 in a white circular display mode is displayed. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

In FIG. 159 (b), when the number of holds of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the hold of special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the increased hold of special figure 1 is exhausted to play the special figure 1 variable game. It has been started. In this case, a command including information that the hold of the special figure 1 has increased by one is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to execute the increase animation of the hold icon. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a manner in which the hold icon gradually rises from below toward the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. In this example, since the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the symbol change from the main control unit 300 during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Receive a command. Upon receiving the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800, stops the increase animation of the hold icon, displays the variation of the decorative symbol, and moves the animation between the hold / variation icons. To execute. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes a change icon and moves to the change icon display area b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command during the execution of the hold icon increase animation, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to perform the hold icon increase animation. Stop in the middle and start the movement animation between the hold / change icons. If the number of holds in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0 and the hold in Special Figure 1 increases by 1, the hold icon increase animation, the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold, and the hold / change Instead of displaying the movement animation between the icons, the variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game (design variable display) started immediately after the hold increase may be displayed in the variable icon display area b. After the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is completely moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c (after the hold icon increase animation is completed), the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is completed. May be executed.

In FIG. 159 (c), which continues from FIG. 159 (b), four game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the hold of special figure 1 is increased by 4, and the hold icon increase animation is executed. Indicates that the icon increase animation has ended. The hold icons g1 to g4 are displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. The display modes of the hold icons g1 to g4 are all white circles. The hold icon increase animation is executed in a mode in which the hold icons g1 to g4 gradually rise from the bottom toward each of the first to fourth regions. Further, the number of holds is displayed on the third display device 804 by the numbers "4" and "0".

FIG. 159 (d) following FIG. 159 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. The first display device 800 and the second display device 802 are equipped with a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is incorrect. -Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 159 (e), which continues from FIG. 159 (d), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons and a reduction animation of the hold icon with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. In the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the icon displayed as the fluctuation icon becomes the digestion icon and moves to the digestion icon display area i. In the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons in this example, the variation icon f1 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game finished in FIG. 159 (e) becomes the digestion icon j1 at the same time as the movement starts, and the digestion icon j1 becomes the digestion icon display area. It gradually moves toward the first region of i. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. The animation of movement between the fluctuation / digestion icon ends when the movement of the digestion icon is completed. Further, the display mode of the digestion icon j1 changes from a white circle to a gray ninja character pattern after the movement is completed. The display mode of the digestion icon j1 may change while the digestion icon j1 is moving, or may change at the same time as the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. In this example, the digestion icon of the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern may be displayed as a look-ahead notice or a notice icon as a notice display of the change. With the digestion icon in the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern, it is possible to execute a notice effect such as a hold change animation. Even if the digestion icon of the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed, the advance notice effect such as the hold change animation may not be executed.

The hold icon reduction animation is an animation that includes a move animation between hold / change icons and a move animation of the hold icon. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the variable icon f2 is completed. The movement animation between the hold / change icon ends when the movement of the change icon is completed. Further, the display size of the variable icon f2 is gradually increased while moving to the variable icon display area b.

The hold icon movement animation is an animation in which each hold icon moves to an area corresponding to a higher hold order. In this example, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area is moved to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the hold icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is special. FIG. 1 Moves to the third area of the hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (e), the movement of the hold icons g2 to g4 is completed. The hold icon movement animation ends when the hold icon movement is complete.

In this example, the movement animation between the fluctuating / digesting icons, the moving animation between the hold / fluctuating icons, and the moving animation of the hold icon are started at the same time. The three animations may be started in any order, or two of the three animations may be started at the same time.

Further, in this example, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold / change icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon end at the same time. The animations of the three may end in any order, or the animations of the three animations may end at the same time.

FIG. 159 (f) following FIG. 159 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. The first display device 800 and the second display device 802 are equipped with a symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 9" other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. -Decoration 5 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 159 (g), which continues from FIG. 159 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the movement animation of the digestion icon when one or more digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i at the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The movement animation of the digestion icon is an animation in which the digestion icon moves only one area to the right. In the movement animation of the digestion icon of this example, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i in FIG. 159 (f) gradually moves toward the second area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the digestion icon j1 is completed. The animation of moving the digest icon ends when the movement of the digest icon is completed.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the variable / digested icons and a reduced animation of the hold icon are executed. In the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f2 corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game finished in FIG. 159 (f) becomes the digestion icon j2 at the same time as the movement starts, and the digestion icon j2 becomes the digestion icon display area i. Gradually move toward one area. The display size of the digestion icon j2 is gradually reduced during the movement so that the display size of the digestion icon j2 becomes the same as the hold icon at the same time when the movement to the first area of the digestion icon display area i is completed. The display size of the digestion icon j2 is the same as the display size of the circular hold icon (for example, the hold icons g3 and g4 shown in FIG. 159 (g)), and the display color of the digestion icon j2 is gray (horizontal line in the figure). (Indicated by a striped pattern). The circular gray display mode is the default display mode of the digestion icon. The digest icon in the default display mode is not used as a notice icon.

As described above, the digest icon in the default display mode has the same display size and shape as the variable icon in Special Figure 1 and the hold icon in Special Figure 1. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the digestion icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game in which the digestion icon has ended.

In this example, by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the digestion icon j1 is moved to the second area as if it were pushed out from the first area of the digestion icon display area i by the digestion icon j2. To do.

In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a reduction animation of the hold icon is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f3 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the variable icon f3 is completed. In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (g), the movement of the hold icons g3 and g4 is completed.

In this example, the animation of moving the digest icon starts at the same time as the animation of moving between the variable / digested icons, the animation of moving between the hold / variable icons, and the animation of moving the hold icon. The four animations may be started in any order, or two or three of the four animations may be started at the same time.

Further, in this example, the movement animation of the digest icon ends at the same time as the movement animation between the fluctuating / digesting icons, the moving animation between the hold / fluctuating icons, and the moving animation of the hold icon. The four animations may end in any order, and two or three of the four animations may end.

FIG. 159 (h) following FIG. 159 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “decoration 6-decoration 3 -Decoration 9 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 159 (i) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159 (g). In this example, after the state shown in FIG. 159 (g), the special figure 1 variable game is executed twice. It is assumed that the game ball did not win the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game twice. In addition, due to the start of the two special figure 1 variable games, the digestion icon movement animation, the fluctuation / digestion icon movement animation, the hold / fluctuation icon movement animation, and the hold icon movement animation are 2 respectively. It is executed once.

The digestion icon j1 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area in FIGS. 159 (g) and 159 (h) is associated with the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The digestion icon is moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by the executed digestion icon movement animation, and then the digestion icon is displayed by the digestion icon movement animation executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variable game that is started. Move to the fourth region of region i.

The digestion icon j2 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area in FIGS. 159 (g) and 159 (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The digestion icon is moved to the second area of the digestion icon display area i by the executed digestion icon movement animation, and then the digestion icon is displayed by the digestion icon movement animation executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variable game that is started. Move to the third region of region i.

The variable icon f3 displayed in the variable icon display area b in FIGS. 159 (g) and 159 (h) was executed with the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons makes the digestion icon j3 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, and then the digestion icon executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variable game started. The movement animation moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i.

The hold icon g3 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIGS. 159 (g) and 159 (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). Due to the movement animation between the executed hold / change icon, the change icon f4 (not shown) was moved to the change icon display area b, and then executed with the start of the second special figure 1 change game that was started. It becomes the digestion icon j4 by the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i.

The hold icon g4 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIGS. 159 (g) and 159 (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The movement animation of the executed hold icon moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and then between the hold / change icons executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variable game started. The movement animation changes the variable icon f5 and moves to the variable icon display area b.

FIG. 159 (j) shows a state in which the second special figure 1 variable game is completed from the state shown in FIG. 159 (h). The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “Decoration 3-Decoration 1 -Decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

The five vertically arranged points shown in FIG. 159 (k) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 159 (j). In this example, it is assumed that one game ball wins in the special figure 1 starting port 230 while the special figure variable game shown in FIG. 159 is not being executed. The number of holds of special figure 1 is increased by 1 according to the winning, the increase animation of the hold icon is started, and the hold icon g5 (not shown) corresponding to the increased hold is the first area of the hold icon c of special figure 1. It is displayed in a manner in which it gradually rises from below toward. In this example, since the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the increase animation of the hold icon is stopped and the movement between the hold and change icons is started. The animation starts. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g5 becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The first display device 800 is executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second display device 802 is executing the variable display of the mini decorative symbol, and the third display device 804 is executing the white special figure 1. The fourth symbol for use is displayed.

Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon and a movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons are executed.

In this example, a maximum of four digestion icons can be displayed in the digestion icon display area i. If the movement animation of the digestion icon is started while the four digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i, it is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i at the start of the movement animation of the digestion icon. The digestion icon moves to the right and is gradually erased in such a manner that the digestion icon moves out of the display area of the first display device 800. In this example, by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area c in FIG. 159 (j) is moved to the right, and the digestion icon j1 is moved. It is gradually erased in a mode of moving out of the display area of the first display device 800. Further, as the movement animation of the digestion icon is executed, the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is moved to the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon display area i is executed. The digestion icon j3 displayed in the second area of i moves to the third area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (l), the digestion icon j1 has been erased, the movements of the digestion icons j2 and j3 have been completed, and the movement animation of the digestion icons has ended. In this example, the digestion icon j1 is deleted without the advance notice effect being executed by the digestion icon j1 in the display mode of the ninja character pattern.

By executing the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f5 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b in FIG. 159 (j) becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (l), the movement of the digestion icon j5 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is completed.

In addition, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, two game balls are won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of holds of the special figure 1 is increased by two, the increase animation of the hold icon is started, and one piece. The hold icon g6 corresponding to the hold increased according to the winning of the eyes is displayed in a manner of gradually rising from the bottom toward the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon c, and according to the second winning. The hold icon g7 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a manner in which the hold icon g7 gradually rises from below toward the second region of the special figure 1 hold icon c. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (l), the movement of the hold icons g6 and g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icons has ended. The display mode of the hold icons g6 and g7 is the default display mode.

FIG. 159 (m) following FIG. 159 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. The first display device 800 and the second display device 802 are equipped with a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is incorrect. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 159 (n), which continues from FIG. 159 (m), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, a movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons, and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j2 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j3 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is replaced with the digestion icon j3. The digestion icon j4 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i is moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by moving to the fourth area of the display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j5 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the digestion icon j2 has been erased, the movement of the digestion icons j3, j4, and j5 has been completed, and the movement animation of the digestion icon has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f6 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b in FIG. 159 (m) becomes the digestion icon j6 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the digestion icon j6 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is completed.

By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g6 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159 (m) becomes the change icon f7 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the variable icon f7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons has ended.

By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g7 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 159 (m) is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To do. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (n), the movement of the hold icon g7 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon is finished.

FIG. 159 (o), which continues from FIG. 159 (n), shows a state in which the display mode of the digestion icon j4 is changed to a gray ninja character pattern. The digestion icon j4 after the display mode is changed is displayed as a notice icon.

FIG. 159 (p) following FIG. 159 (o) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon that changes the display mode of the hold icon is executed. The change animation of the hold icon is a look-ahead notice effect. In this example, the hold of the look-ahead notice target is the hold of the special figure 1 corresponding to the hold icon g7 (the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order), and the change animation of the hold icon corresponds to the hold of the look-ahead notice target. This is executed to change the display mode of the hold icon (hold icon g7 in this example). In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the image k of the shuriken (hereinafter referred to as "shuriken k") toward the hold icon g7 which is the target of the change of the display mode. , The moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the hold icon g7. The arrow in FIG. 159 (p) shows the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (p), the shuriken k is hitting the hold icon g7.

FIG. 159 (q) following FIG. 159 (p) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, after the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon g7. The shuriken k is erased at the same time as the display of the effect image 872 is started. The shuriken k may be erased prior to the display of the effect image 872, or may be erased after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

FIG. 159 (r) following FIG. 159 (q) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon has ended. When the effect image 872 that is displayed overlapping the entire hold icon g7 is erased, the entire hold icon g7 whose display mode has changed to a blue circle becomes visible again. When the effect image 872 is erased, the change animation of the hold icon ends. Further, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue before the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time as the end of the hold icon change animation, or the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue after the end of the hold icon change animation. It may change. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time that the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again, or the effect is produced after the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from white to blue. In this way, when the hold icon change animation is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a look-ahead notice effect. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the hold icon. The effect movable body whose emission color changes as a look-ahead notice effect when the hold icon change animation is executed may be at least one of the effect movable bodies 806, 808, and 810.

In this example, the change animation of the hold icon that changes the display mode of the hold icon g7 is executed by the digestion icon j4 of the display mode of the ninja pattern. In FIGS. 159 (o) to 159 (r), the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a look-ahead notice display. The change animation of the hold icon only starts the display of the effect image 872 and erases the effect image 872, and the animation of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is an animation for changing the hold icon. May be.

FIG. 160 (a) following FIG. 159 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “Decoration 3-Decoration 5 -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed.

The decorative symbol displayed on the first display device 800 is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular frame image, and when the decorative symbol is odd, the inside of the frame image is displayed in red, and the decorative symbol is even. In some cases, the inside of the frame image is displayed in blue. It is assumed that the display mode of the decorative pattern includes the display color in the frame image. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the look-ahead notice by displaying all the stop symbols of the decorative symbols as odd numbers or even numbers. In this example, the pre-reading notice by the combination of odd-numbered decorative symbols is set to have higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice by the combination of even-numbered decorative symbols. In other words, the pre-reading notice by the combination of the red decorative symbols is set to have higher jackpot reliability than the pre-reading notice by the combination of the blue decorative symbols. For this reason, when the odd (red) decorative symbol combination is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display subject to pre-reading notice, as compared with the even (blue) decorative symbol combination displayed. Easy to be. The combination of odd-numbered, even-numbered, and same-colored decorative patterns is a so-called chance.

In FIG. 160 (b), which continues from FIG. 160 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, and a movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons are executed. If only one hold icon is displayed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the hold icon is not executed with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j3 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j4 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is changed to the digestion icon. The digestion icon j5 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i is moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by moving to the fourth area of the display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j6 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (b), the digestion icon j3 has been erased, the movement of the digestion icons j4, j5, and j6 has been completed, and the movement animation of the digestion icon has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, the fluctuation icon f7 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b in FIG. 160A becomes the digestion icon j7 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. .. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (b), the movement of the digestion icon j7 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is completed.

By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g7 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 160A becomes the change icon f8 and becomes the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (b), the movement of the variable icon f8 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons has ended.

FIG. 160 (c) following FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the change animation of the variable icon that changes the display mode of the variable icon is executed. The change animation mode of the variable icon in this example is the same as the change animation mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 159 (p) to 159 (r). As shown in FIG. 160 (c), the digestion icon j4 displayed as a notice icon throws the shuriken k toward the variable icon f8, and the variable icon f8 displays a moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits. The arrow in FIG. 160 (c) shows the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time shown in FIG. 159 (p), the shuriken k hits the variable icon f8.

The change animation mode of the variable icon may be different from the change animation mode of the hold icon. For example, in the change animation of the variable icon, a moving image of a scene in which the digestion icon j4 throws a bomb may be displayed.

FIG. 160 (d) following FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which the change animation of the variable icon is being executed. In the change animation of the variable icon, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping with the variable icon f8 after the shuriken k hits the variable icon f8, as in the change animation of the hold icon. The shuriken k is erased at the same time as the display of the effect image 872 is started. The shuriken k may be erased prior to the display of the effect image 872, or may be erased after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the change animation of the variable icon is completed. When the effect image 872 that is displayed overlapping the entire variable icon f8 is erased, the entire variable icon f8 whose display mode has changed to a red circle becomes visible again. When the effect image 872 is erased, the change animation of the variable icon ends. Further, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red prior to the end of the change animation of the variable icon. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red prior to making the entire variable icon f8 visible again. The emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time as the end of the change animation of the variable icon, or the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red after the end of the change animation of the variable icon. It may change. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time that the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again, or the effect is produced after the entire variable icon f8 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from blue to red. When the change animation of the variable icon is executed in this way, the display color of the variable icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a notice effect of the change. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the variable icon. It should be noted that the effect movable body whose emission color changes as a warning effect of the change when the change animation of the change icon is executed may be at least one of the effect movable bodies 806, 808, and 810. Good.

In this example, the change animation of the variable icon that changes the display mode of the variable icon f8 is executed by the digestion icon j4 of the display mode of the ninja pattern. In FIGS. 160 (b) to 160 (e), the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a notice display of the change. The change animation of the hold icon is an animation that only starts displaying the effect image 872 and erases the effect image 872, and the animation of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is for changing the variable icon. It may be an animation. In this example, the digestion icon j4 is displayed as a look-ahead notice display and then is also displayed as a notice of the change.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. In this example, the first display device 800 can display the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and 159 (f) after the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to 159 (d). Is. The first display device 800 can display the variable icon f1 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to 159 (d), and the icon displayed as the variable icon f1 is displayed in FIG. 159 (e). ), It can be displayed as the digestion icon j1 in the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in (f). The digestion icon j1 is displayed as a notice icon. The digestion icon display area i on which the digestion icon j1 is displayed is an area different from the variable icon display area b. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the out-of-order symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the previous symbol variation display is announced in the next symbol variation display. Since it can be displayed as, it may be possible to have expectations for the symbol variation display immediately after the loss.

In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the variable icon f2 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and 159 (f). The first display device 800 can display both the variable icon f2 and the digestion icon j1.

In this embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the icon displayed as the hold icon as the variable icon f4. The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes, and the display mode of one of the plurality of types of display modes is a gray ninja character pattern as the first display mode. This is a display mode. The digestion icon j4 of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon g7 (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).

The digestion icon j4 of the gray ninja character pattern is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon f8 (for example, a change animation of the variable icon).

One of the plurality of types of display modes of the digestion icon is, for example, a display mode of the character pattern of the Bancho (display mode of the hold icon g1 shown in FIG. 160 (e) described later). The digestion icon of the gray bancho character pattern may be displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon), and is an icon of the display mode of the variable icon. An icon related to a change (eg, a change animation of a variable icon).

The display mode of the character pattern of the Bancho may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja. For example, when the notice icon of the display mode of the character pattern of the Bancho is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is stopped in the symbol variation display of the notice target than when the notice icon of the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja is displayed. It may be easy to display.

In this example, by executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i becomes the second area of the digestion icon displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i. Move as if pushed out from. Similarly, the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is moved to the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i so as to be pushed out from the second area, and digestion is performed. Display of the first display device 800 so that the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the icon display area i is extruded from the second area to the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i. It is erased from the area.

In this example, by executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area is changed to the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area c from the third area. Move as if pushed out. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is moved to the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area c so as to be pushed out from the second area, and hold. The hold icon displayed in the first area of the icon display area c is moved to the variable icon display area b so as to be pushed out from the first area by the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c. ..

As described above, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are common in the animation mode in which the icon is pushed out to the icon in the adjacent area and moves to the area opposite to the adjacent area.

In this embodiment, when the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, and the movement animation of the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons are executed, they are displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. The timing when the digested icon is pushed out and deleted by the digested icon displayed in the third area of the digested icon display area i, the timing when the variable icon becomes the digest icon, and the timing when the hold icon becomes the variable icon. Is the same. The timings of these three may be different, and the order can be set arbitrarily. Two of the three timings may be the same.

In the present embodiment, the hold icon increase animation is executed in a mode in which the hold icon rises from below, but may be executed in a mode in which the hold icon descends from above.

The effect of displaying the variable icon as a digestion icon or a notice icon after the next symbol variable display is executed only in the non-electric support state. Therefore, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons are executed only in the non-electric support state. The movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons may always be executed in the electric support state.

The number of digestion icons whose display mode changes is not limited to one. In this embodiment, the display mode of only the digestion icon j4 is changed in FIG. 159 (o), but the display mode of at least one of the digestion icons j3, j5, and j6 is displayed together with the digestion icon j4. May change. When the display mode of many digestion icons changes at one time, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be notified than when only the display mode of one digestion icon changes. In this case, it may be possible to entertain the player by making the production with relatively high jackpot reliability lively. On the contrary, when only the display mode of one digestion icon changes, the jackpot symbol is confirmed in the symbol variation display to be notified than when the display mode of many digestion icons changes at once. It may be easy to display. In this case, the display mode may change to impress the player with the digestion icon displayed as the notice icon.

In this embodiment, during the symbol variation display in FIGS. 159 (m) to 160 (a), the hold of the notice target is the hold of special figure 1 having the first hold order (hold 1 of special figure 1). When the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is the subject of the notice, the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is displayed as the hold icon in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the variable icon display. There is an opportunity to change the display mode twice (promotion to a display mode with high jackpot reliability) with the case where it is displayed as a variable icon in the area b. In FIGS. 159 (o) to 160 (a), the digestion icon j4 as a notice icon is displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and in FIGS. 160 (b) to 160 (e), as a notice icon. The digestion icon of is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i, and the digestion icon j4 can be displayed over two symbol variation displays. Since the change animation of the hold icon or the change icon is executed only once in one symbol change display, the digestion icon as a notice icon related to the change animation is displayed over the two symbol change displays. In some cases, it may be possible to predict that the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display when the digestion icon is started to be displayed is the target of advance notice.

For example, when the hold of the notice target is the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order (hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Three changes in display mode (display with high jackpot reliability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second and first areas of c and when displayed as a variable icon in the variable icon display area b. Opportunity for promotion to mode). The digestion icon as a warning icon related to the change animation of the icon may be started to be displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. As a result, the digestion icon is displayed over three symbol variation displays, so that the third symbol variation display including the symbol variation display that is being executed when the digestion icon starts to be displayed is subject to advance notice. It may be possible to predict that there is.

In this way, it may be possible to predict the target change of the look-ahead notice depending on the display start position of the digestion icon as the notice icon. The more chances the icon display mode is promoted, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. In some cases, the jackpot reliability can be suggested by the number of opportunities for promotion of the icon display mode.

For example, when the hold of the notice target is the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order (hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Three changes in display mode (display with high jackpot reliability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second and first areas of c and when displayed as a variable icon in the variable icon display area b. Opportunity for promotion to mode). The digestion icon as a notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may be started to be displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. As a result, since the digestion icon is displayed over one symbol variation display, it may be possible to predict that the opportunity for promotion of the icon display mode is once.

It should be noted that the digestion icon as the notice icon can be displayed in the first to fourth areas of the digestion icon display area i regardless of which is the hold of the notice target. The digestion icon as the notice icon can be related to the promotion of the display mode of the icon up to four times when the display is started in the first area of the digestion icon display area i. On the other hand, the hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c has five opportunities for promotion in the display mode, and one digest icon is related to all promotion opportunities. I can't. The hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c does not have to be the target of the change animation of the hold icon (the target of promotion of the display mode).

The display on the first display device 800 in this embodiment may be displayed on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (f). FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The first display device 800 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second display device 802 executes the variable display of the mini decorative symbol, and the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1. It is displayed. A white circular variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b.

In the state shown in FIG. 160 (f), the gaming state is the non-electric support state, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 4, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 2. On the third display device 804, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "4" and "2". In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 to g4 corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 are displayed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is not provided with a display area dedicated to displaying the hold icon of special figure 2 in the non-electric support state, and when the hold of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more in the non-electric support state, The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area c of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 160 (f), the hold icon m1 corresponding to the hold 1 of the special figure 2 partially overlaps the hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 to display the special figure 1 hold icon. The hold icon m2 displayed in the area c and corresponding to the hold 2 of the special figure 2 is partially overlapped with the hold icons g2 and g3 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 and displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Will be done. Therefore, a part of the hold icons m1 and m2 corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 becomes invisible. The hold icons m1 and m2 are displayed in a white square display mode. The display mode of the white square is the default display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed on the back side of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1.

As described above, in the non-electric support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1. In other words, in the non-electric support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed without overlapping with the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2.

The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol change display executed when the corresponding hold is exhausted, and the digest icon or the notice is displayed in the next symbol change display of the symbol change display. Not displayed as an icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is deleted at the end of the symbol variation display. For example, if the hold of special figure 2 remaining at the end of electric support is exhausted after the end of electric support, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 2 is displayed as a variable icon in the symbol variation display. , It is not displayed as a digestion icon or a notice icon in the next symbol variation display.

In the non-electric support state, when the hold of special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the game information display area a is deleted, and the digestion icon and special figure 1 are deleted. The hold icon of is also erased, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area is separately provided in the display area of at least one display device of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, or the third display device 804. May be done. In the non-electric support state, when the hold of the special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the digestion icon and the notice icon may be deleted.

By using a device that distributes the prizes to the game balls to the special figure 1 start port 230 and the special figure 2 start port 232 in the non-electric support state for each ball, the start port prize can be played with a maximum of 8 holdings. In the forward variation configuration, a maximum of 8 hold icons and digest icons can be displayed, so if the digest icon is mistaken for a hold icon, the number of hold icons will appear to be 16, and the maximum number of holds will be. It may be mistaken for 16 pieces. This may give the player a fresh feeling. In the electric support state, the hold icon and the digestion icon of Special Figure 1 are not displayed, so the maximum number of holds may appear to be four.

It should be noted that a maximum of four hold icons and digestion icons of Special Figure 1 can be displayed. For example, the display area of the first display device 800 is divided into two, and the hold icon and the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure variable game are displayed in one area to execute the effect, and the other. A fake effect may be performed by displaying a digestion icon and a fake decorative symbol fluctuating display that does not correspond to the special figure fluctuating game in the area. The false effect may be displayed in the wipe screen wpa shown in FIG. 157.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings 160 (A) to 160 (E). Each of FIGS. 160 (A) to 160 (E) is a diagram showing this effect example in chronological order. In the states shown in FIGS. 160 (A) to 160 (E), the gaming state is the non-electric support state. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “Decoration 3-Decoration 5 -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, the look-ahead notice is executed by the combination of the odd (red) decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7". In this example, the pre-reading notice target is the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order.

On the third display device 804, a black fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed. Digestion icons j1 to j4 are displayed in the digestion icon display area i. The display mode of the digestion icons j1 to j4 is the default display mode of the gray circle. In the variable icon display area b, the variable icon f5 of the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. The variable icon f5 is displayed in color and is not displayed in gray. The icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern may be displayed not only in the digestion icon display area i but also in the variable icon display area b and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. When the icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed in the variable icon display area b or the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is displayed in color. In this example, the variable icon f5 is set as a look-ahead notice display for the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order.

In FIG. 160 (B), which continues from FIG. 160 (A), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon, a movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, a movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons, and a movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

By executing the movement animation of the digestion icon, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i is deleted, and the digestion icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i is changed to the digestion icon. The digestion icon j3 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i is moved to the third area of the digestion icon display area i by moving to the fourth area of the display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i. The digestion icon j4 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the digestion icon j1 has been erased, the movements of the digestion icons j2, j3, and j4 have been completed, and the movement animation of the digestion icons has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, the variation icon f5 displayed in the variation icon display area b becomes the digestion icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the digestion icon j5 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is completed. The digestion icon j5 is displayed in the same display size as the variable icon f5. As described above, the display size of the icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern is the same depending on whether it is displayed as a variable icon or a digestion icon. The digestion icon j5 is displayed in gray. The display color of the digestion icon j5 may be changed to gray at the same time when the digestion icon j5 starts moving to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, or is changed to gray while moving to the first area. It may be changed to gray at the same time as the movement to the first region is completed, or it may be changed to gray after the movement to the first region is completed.

By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g5 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the fluctuation icon f6 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is completed.

By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g6 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (B), the movement of the hold icon g6 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon is finished.

FIG. 160 (C) following FIG. 160 (B) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon that changes the display mode of the hold icon is executed. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (C), the shuriken k thrown by the digestion icon j5 hits the hold icon g6. The icon displayed as the variable icon in FIG. 160 (A) may be used for the advance notice effect after becoming the digestion icon.

FIG. 160 (D) following FIG. 160 (C) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. After the shuriken k hits the hold icon g6, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon g6. The shuriken k is erased at the same time as the display of the effect image 872 is started. The display mode of the icon corresponding to the symbol variation display to be announced (in this example, the hold icon g6) may be changed when it is displayed as the hold icon.

FIG. 160 (E) following FIG. 160 (D) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon has ended. When the effect image 872 that overlaps and is displayed on the entire hold icon g6 is erased, the entire hold icon g6 whose display mode has changed to a red circle becomes visible again. Further, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to red prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon. In this way, when the hold icon change animation is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a look-ahead notice effect.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the fluctuation icon as a warning icon for other than the fluctuation. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed as a notice icon for the hold other than the hold of the corresponding hold order. The icon of the display mode of the ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice display of the change in the change icon display area b, and may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. is there.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings 160 (a) to (e). Each of FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (e) is a diagram showing the present production example in chronological order. In the states shown in FIGS. 160A to 160, the gaming state is the non-electric support state. FIG. 160 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, the decorative design of the combination of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The second display device 802 executes variable display of the mini decorative symbol, and the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1. Further, the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 are displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the digestion icon display area i is not provided in the game information display area a, and the digestion icon is not displayed. Further, unlike the variable icon display area b in the above embodiment, the variable icon display area n of this embodiment is not surrounded by a square frame image, and the display position of the variable icon is located below the variable icon display area n. The horizontally long rectangular pedestal image is displayed. Further, in FIG. 160 (A), the variable icon f1 of the display mode of the ninja character pattern is displayed. The variable icon f1 is displayed in color. The variable icon f1 is displayed as a notice icon for which the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order is set as a notice target.

FIG. 160 (i) following FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display mode of the hold icon g1 has changed from a white circle to a display mode of a character pattern of a bancho. The display mode of the character pattern of the Bancho is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed, the change animation of the hold icon including the scene in which the change icon f1 throws the shuriken to the hold icon g1 may be executed, or the change icon f1 shown in FIG. 160 (i) may be executed. An animation may be displayed in which the ninja character of the ninja faces the hold icon g1. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed, an animation including a moving image of the variable icon f1 may be displayed, and the variable icon f1 may be related to the change in the display mode of the hold icon g1.

FIG. 160 (c) following FIG. 160 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. On the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, “Decoration 3-Decoration 5 -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, the look-ahead notice is executed by the combination of the odd (red) decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7". The hold subject to the look-ahead notice is the hold of special figure 1 having the first hold order.

In FIG. 160 (e), which continues from FIG. 160 (u), the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212. It shows the state. Further, the white fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is displayed on the third display device 804.

With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, in this example, in addition to the moving animation between the changing icons, the moving animation between the hold / variable icons, and the moving animation of the hold icon, the moving animation of the changing icons is executed.

Movement of the variable icon By executing the animation, the variable icon f1 moves from the center of the variable icon display area n to the right side. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the variable icon related to the change display of the display mode of the hold icon is displayed in the variable icon display area n even after the end of the corresponding special figure variable game. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (E), the movement of the variable icon f1 has been completed, and the movement animation of the variable icon has ended.

By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area n. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (E), the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 is completed, and the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons is completed.

By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 160 (E), the movement of the hold icon g2 is completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon is finished.

In this embodiment, two variable icons may be displayed in the variable icon display area n. In the example shown in FIG. 160 (e), the variable icon f1 is displayed in the upper right part of the pedestal image of the variable icon display area n, and the variable icon f2 is displayed in the upper left part of the pedestal image. The variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 are displayed in separate areas within the variable icon display area n so that one of them does not overlap with the other. A part of one icon of the variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 may overlap with a part of the other icon. A character string image of "joint battle" is displayed above the variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2, and the variable icon f1 of the ninja character pattern and the variable icon f2 of the chief character pattern give a notice effect of the change. Will be executed. In this way, the variable icon f1 and the variable icon f2 may be integrally displayed and function as one variable icon. In addition, in FIG. 160 (e), the variable icon f1 may be displayed as a notice icon or a digestion icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 160 (e) may be only the variation icon f2.

As in this embodiment, the two icons may be integrally displayed as one variable icon. When two icons are integrally displayed as one variable icon, it is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the running symbol variable display than when one icon is displayed as one variable icon. May be good.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160 (a). FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The first display device 800 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol, the second display device 802 executes the variable display of the mini decorative symbol, and the third display device 804 displays the white fourth symbol for special figure 1. It is displayed. A white circular variable icon f1 is displayed in the variable icon display area b.

In the state shown in FIG. 160 (a), the gaming state is the non-electric support state, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of reservations is displayed by the numbers "2" and "0". In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons g1 and g2 is the default display mode.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a horizontally long rectangular display area e similar to the example shown in FIG. 155 (a) on the right side of the variable icon display area b in the game information display area a. .. In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display such as a description of how to play a game, a description of the production content, a description of a character, and a notice display as a character string image. In FIG. 160 (a), the tutorial display is executed by displaying the character string image of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the display area e.

The notice icon o is displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the character string image of "notice" in the display area e. The display mode of the notice icon o is a character pattern of a swordsman. The icon displayed as the variable icon is displayed as a notice icon o after the end of the corresponding special figure variable game (design variable display). In this example, the notice icon o is an icon displayed as a variable icon in the special figure 1 variable game one time before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. 160 (a). The notice icon o may be an icon displayed as a variable icon in the special figure 1 variable game two or more times before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. 160 (a). The notice icon o may be a swordsman's character pattern or a circular display mode of a predetermined color during the period displayed as the variable icon. The notice icon of this example is the same as the notice icon I62 shown in FIG. 125 (i). The notice icon of this example may be displayed as the notice icon shown in FIG. 81. For example, when the notice icon of this example is digested, a pseudo continuous effect may be executed. The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment can be applied to the production examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 154.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 5 to 9 of the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160.

(C1)
Display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the generic name of the third display device 804, special figure 1 display device 212).
It is a game table equipped with
The display means (for example, at least one display device among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the special figure 1 display device 212).
Is shown in the symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first symbol variation display" (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation display of the special figure 1, the variation display of the mini decorative symbol, FIGS. 159 (b) to (d)). After the symbol variation display, the symbol variation display finished in FIG. 160 (A), and the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 160 (A) to (U)), the next symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol"). "Variable display" (for example, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of special symbols, variable display of mini decorative symbols, variable display of symbols shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), and FIGS. 160 (B) to 160 (E). It is a means capable of displaying the symbol variation display shown and the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 160 (e)).
In the first symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, “first variation icon” (for example, variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to 159), FIG. The variable icon f5 shown in 160 (A) and the variable icon f1) shown in FIGS. 160 (a) to (c) can be displayed.
The icons displayed as the first variable icons (for example, the variable icons f1 shown in FIGS. 159 (b) to (d), the variable icons f5 shown in FIGS. 160 (A), and FIGS. 160 (a) to (c)). The variable icon f1) shown in the above is the notice icon (for example, the digestion icon j1 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), and the digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)) in the second symbol variation display. , It is configured to be displayable as the variable icon f1) shown in FIG. 160 (E).
The area where the notice icon is displayed (for example, the notice icon display area i) is an area different from the area where the first variable icon is displayed (for example, the variable icon display area b).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, even if the missing symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is displayed in the next second symbol variation display. Since the corresponding variable icon can be displayed as a notice icon, it may be possible to have expectations for the second symbol variable display immediately after the removal.

(C2)
The game console described in C1 above.
In the second symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, “second variation icon” (for example, variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and 159), FIG. The variable icons f6) shown in 160 (B) to (E) can be displayed.
The second variable icon (for example, the variable icon f2 shown in FIGS. 159 (e) and (f), the variable icon f6 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)) and the notice icon (for example, FIG. 159 (e)). ), Both the digestion icon j1 shown in (f) and the digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E) are configured to be displayable (for example, FIGS. 159 (e), (f), FIG. 160 (A)-(E)),
A game table characterized by that.

(C3)
The game console according to C1 or C2 above.
The icon displayed as the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 159 (l) to (r) and 160 (a)) is changed to the variable icon (for example, the variable icon f8 shown in FIG. 160 (b)). Can be displayed and
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes (for example, a gray circular display mode and a gray ninja character pattern display mode).
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode (for example, the display mode of the gray ninja character pattern).
The notice icons of the first display mode (for example, the digestion icons j4 shown in FIGS. 159 (o) to (r), 160 (a) to (e), and the digestion icons shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to (E)). The icon j5) is a display mode of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 159 (l) to (r), FIG. 160 (a), and the hold icon g6 shown in FIGS. 160 (B) to 160 (E)). (For example, see FIGS. 159 (p)-(r), 160 (C)-(E)), which are icons related to the change of (eg, change animation of the hold icon).
A game table characterized by that.

(C4)
The game console described in C3 above.
The notice icon (for example, the digestion icon j4 shown in FIGS. 159 (o) to (r) and FIGS. 160 (a) to 160 (e)) of the first display mode is the variable icon (for example, FIG. 160 (b). ) Is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon f8) (for example, a change animation of the variable icon).
A game table characterized by that.

(C5)
The game console according to C3 or C4 above.
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, a display mode of a gray bancho character pattern).
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon (for example, a change animation of the variable icon).
A game table characterized by that.

(C6)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C5 above.
The display mode of the notice icon (for example, the display color is gray) is different from the display mode of the variable icon (for example, the display color is a color other than gray (white, blue, green, red, color)).
A game table characterized by that.

(C7)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C6 above.
An animation including the movement of the notice icon (for example, a movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, a movement animation of the digestion icon) can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(C8)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C7 above.
The display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is configured to include an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
A game table characterized by that.

(C9)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C8.
The icon displayed as the first variable icon in the non-electric support state is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(C10)
The game console according to any one of C1 to C9 above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

The display mode of the hold icon, the variable icon, and the notice icon may be different from each other, the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon are the same, and the notice icon is different only in color from the hold icon and the variable icon. Alternatively, the notice icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the variable icon.

The display mode of the variable icon and the notice icon is the same, the hold icon may differ only in color from the variable icon and the notice icon, and the hold icon may differ in color and shape from the variable icon and the notice icon. You can.

The display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon is the same, the variable icon may differ only in color from the hold icon and notice icon, and the variable icon may differ in color and shape from the hold icon and notice icon. You can.

An animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon by the hold icon may be executed. The hold icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon. On the contrary, even if the animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon by the hold icon is not executed. The hold icon may be an icon that is not related to the change in the display mode of the digestion icon.

An animation that changes the display mode of the digestion icon other than the digestion icon may be executed by the digestion icon. The digestion icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon other than the digestion icon.

The default display mode variation icon is Ninja after the special figure variation game is being executed (the symbol variation display is being executed) and the display suggesting the loss (for example, the temporary stop display of the missed symbol mode) is executed. It may be changed to a character pattern such as a ninja or a bancho, and may be displayed as a notice icon after the end of the symbol variation display.

The digestion icon may return to the default display mode after the advance notice effect (for example, change animation of the hold icon or change animation of the variable icon) related to the digestion icon is completed. The digestion icon that has finished its role of directing may return to the default display mode. The hold icon of the ninja character pattern does not return to the default display mode even after the effect of changing another hold icon, variable icon, or digestion icon is executed by the hold icon of the ninja character pattern.

At least a part of the effect is the same, and the display mode of the notice icon is changed, or other effects (for example, change of the display mode of the hold icon, acquisition of a mini item (notice icon), stop of the middle symbol) are performed. It is feasible.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described first to ninth embodiments is the first display device 8 as a display means.
Although 00, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 are provided, the pachinko machine 100 may include only the first display device 800 among these display devices. In this case, the display on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 described in the above-mentioned production example may be displayed on the first display device 800. In the first to ninth embodiments, the display on the first display device 800 may be displayed on at least one display device of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. The display on the second display device 802 may be displayable on at least one display device of the first display device 800 or the third display device 804, or the display on the third display device 804 may be displayed. , The display may be possible on at least one display device of the first display device 800 or the second display device 804. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments, as display means, the first decorative symbol shown in FIG. 125 is used instead of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804. The display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be provided. In this case, the display described in the above-mentioned production example is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It should be noted that the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIGS. 125 to 154 is the first display device 800 and the second display device 802. , May be displayed on the third display device 804. The game information display area a corresponds to the user interface (UI) portion in FIG. 125 (a). The game information display area a may be referred to as a user interface (UI) unit.

The items described in Examples 1 to 9 can be combined.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 170.

16 to 170 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 161 to 170, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, FIGS. 161 to 170 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 161 to 170, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. Further, the light guide plate IL may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in FIGS. 161 to 170, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136 is shown.

FIG. 161 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a mini-game effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 161 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) portion is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is located in the center of the UI portion. It is displayed in a form housed in the rectangular hold display frame FL1, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. There is. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as the pedestal of the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 161 (a), three variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are all in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, and various information related to games and productions is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 161 (a), no display is performed and the display is hidden. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", and it is notified that the first decorative symbol is lost. There is. Although the UI unit is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol, it may overlap with the display area of the first decorative symbol. In addition, the UI unit may be displayed at all times, or may not be displayed for a period of time.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 161 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a loss. Has been notified.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed at all times.

Further, below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. ing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Then, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 161 (b), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position of is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Then, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (b) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the characters "Panda is the master of the lord" are displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the character of the lord is explained. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the same timing as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or the variation of the decorative symbol. The timing may be before the start of the display. Further, in this case, it may be configured so that it is always performed at any timing, or it may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (c), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the display mode of the button hold icon. In the present embodiment, the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon may be configured to always be the same timing after the symbol variation display is started, or may be configured so that the timing is different depending on the case. Good. Further, the speaker 120 may output audio at the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon h12 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (c), the operation is not effective even if the effect button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the hold icon h12 is not changed, but the operation of the effect button 136 is effective. The display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (d), the production of the mini game is started on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. When the mini-game is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M stops and displays the dice symbol above the stage name display unit ST1 in a manner indicating a "1" result. The explanation of the mini-game mission is displayed. In the explanation display of the mission shown in FIG. 161 (d), the "button push" is displayed, the dice "3" is displayed, and the "de chance" is displayed, and the mini game is started. It is explained that if the effect button 136 is operated after the dice are rolled and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, something good will happen. In this production example, the mini game is executed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but in other words, the display area where the mini game is executed is a liquid crystal frame configured by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It can be said that it is partitioned by (bezel).

After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the dice symbol, displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter, and accepts the operation of the effect button 136. Is notified and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter may not be displayed. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 161, when the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived in preference to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It is configured.

Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (f) after the mini game starts, as shown in FIG. 161 (g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a dice symbol. Is stopped and displayed, while the display mode of the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. In the example shown in FIG. 161 (g), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a roll of "3", and it is notified that the roll is a mission achievement.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "hold 1UP" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. That is, it is announced in advance that the reliability of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon will be upgraded by one level. In other words, it can be said that the reward for completing the mission functions as a notice of the jackpot notice. Since the reward for completing the mission functions as a notice of the jackpot notice, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the mission is performed than when the mission is not performed. Further, at the timing when the mini-game ends, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the change display of the hold icon is started. At this time, the button reception time meter may be displayed. FIG. 161 (i) shows how the mission achievement reward is still displayed. Further, since the effect button 136 has not been operated yet, the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 remains in the display mode of the button hold icon.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (j), the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon changes to a circular blue display mode as shown in FIG. 161 (k). Change. That is, the display mode of the look-ahead notice has changed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode can be displayed in three display modes of blue, green, and red, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher in the order of red> green> blue. .. That is, when the hold icon in the circular and red display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon in the circular and green display mode is displayed. When the hold icon in the green display mode is displayed in, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end than when the hold icon in the blue display mode is displayed in a circle, and the circle is blue. When the hold icon in the display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the hold icon in the default display mode is displayed. In this effect example, by operating the effect button 136, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the hold icon in the blue display mode, which is the first rank of the look-ahead notice, but is green. The hold icon may change to the display mode of or the display mode of red. In this case, for example, the display mode of the button hold icon may be displayed in an aura-like manner so that the hold icon can be expected to change to a higher rank display mode.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (l), the display of "hold 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves over the first decorative symbol display device 208L and changes to the blue display mode. It is shown that the user is heading toward the second hold icon h12 in the changed special figure 1. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of "hold 1UP" starts moving is set as the timing after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, but it may be any timing. For example, the timing at which the display of "hold 1UP" starts moving may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of "hold 1UP" starts moving is set to be within the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, but the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed. The symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display is being executed.

After that, when the display of "hold 1UP" overlaps with the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to green as shown in FIG. 161 (m). That is, the result of the mini-game is reflected, and the reliability of the look-ahead notice on the hold icon h12 is increased by one level. Even if the display of "hold 1UP" overlaps with the hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 161 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , It is notified that it is a loss. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and hidden.

In the present embodiment, when the mini-game mission is achieved, it is announced that the display mode of the look-ahead notice on the hold icon will be upgraded by one level. For example, the mini-game mission is achieved. As a result, any of the mini-items shown in FIGS. 81 and 135 (d) may be stocked, and the content of the subsequent effect (notice effect) may be announced, or timer stock may be performed. You may. Here, the timer stock is, for example, an aspect of a notice that displays a timer and suggests that a special effect is started when the time indicated by the timer elapses. In addition, as a result of completing the mission of the mini game, it may be possible to acquire rare items that are not related to the result of the winning / failing determination.

Further, in the present embodiment, the mini-game is started at the timing after the hold icon changes to the display mode of the button hold icon and the change effect of the hold icon is started, but the mini-game is started. The change effect of the hold icon may be started later. Further, in the present embodiment, the period in which the hold icon change effect is performed and the period in which the mini game is performed are overlapped, but the periods may not overlap, for example, a certain symbol change. The mini-game may be started after the hold icon is changed in the display and the hold icon is changed to the look-ahead notice display mode (for example, the blue display mode). That is, the mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the hold icon in the blue display mode is displayed. This also applies to the following description.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a reward for completing the mission of the mini game, the hold icon changed to the look-ahead notice display mode is foretold to be ranked up due to the change effect of the button hold icon. As a reward for completing the mission of the mini-game, it may be announced that the hold icon will change to the look-ahead notice display mode due to the change effect of the button hold icon. In this case, the rank of the display mode of the look-ahead notice may be announced. In addition, it may be announced that the change effect of the button hold icon will be performed.

Further, in this production example, the mini game is played on the sub liquid crystal (second decorative symbol display device 208M), but it may be played on the main liquid crystal (first decorative symbol display device 208L).

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 162 (a) to 162 (j) are the same as those of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (j), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (j), as shown in FIG. 162 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed. The display mode is changed to a circular green color, and the display of "hold 1UP" is erased on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As described above, in this effect example, the case where the hold icon display mode of the button hold icon is changed and the hold icon display mode is changed by completing the mission of the mini game is shown by operating the effect button 136 at the same time. .. That is, in this production example, the change of the display mode of the hold icon due to the change effect of the button hold icon to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice and the reflection of the result of the mini game mission achievement. The rank-up of the look-ahead notice of the display mode of the hold icon is being performed at the same time.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Since FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (b) are the same as those of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 163 (c), unlike FIG. 161 (c), the change effect of the hold icon has not been started, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 remains in the default display mode. After that, the production of the mini-game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (d), and the mini-game is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to 163 (h) (FIGS. 163 (d) to 163 (d). The figure (h).

When the timing shown in FIG. 163 (i) is reached without the change effect of the hold icon being started, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 changes to a blue display mode in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the display mode changes to the first stage of the look-ahead notice. That is, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon is not changed by the change effect of the hold icon using the button hold icon, and only the change of the display mode of the hold icon as a reflection of the result of the achievement of the mission of the mini game is performed. It is done.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Since FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (l) are the same as those of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (l), the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing shown in FIG. 164 (l), the display of "hold 1UP" displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves over the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of "hold 1UP" is displayed. When it overlaps with the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, as shown in FIG. 164 (m), the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to red, and the reliability of the look-ahead notice is upgraded by two levels. ing. In this production example, as a result of accomplishing the mission of the mini-game, the reliability of the look-ahead notice was increased by one level, but the result was more advantageous than the announced content (the reliability of the look-ahead notice was increased by two levels). Is shown to be reflected.

After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 164 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , It is notified that it is a loss. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and hidden.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice by the change effect of the button hold icon, and then the result of the mini-game mission achievement. As a reflection, the display mode of the hold icon is further changed, but after the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the display mode of two or more ranks of the look-ahead notice due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the mini game The display mode of the hold icon may be further upgraded to reflect the result of mission achievement. Here, for example, by changing the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is the display mode of the highest rank of the look-ahead notice (for example, the display mode of red, or the display mode of the premiere that announces the confirmation of the jackpot (for example, rainbow). When the color display mode is changed to)), the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed even if the rank-up of the hold icon display mode is announced as a result of the achievement of the mission of the mini game. Further, the display mode may be changed to a unique display mode (for example, a gold display mode) that can be displayed only as a reflection of the achievement result of the mission of the mini game.

FIG. 165 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Since FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the mini-game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (f), as shown in FIG. 165 (g), the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. On the other hand, in this production example, the hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L changes to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the look-ahead notice. .. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the change effect of the button hold icon are performed at the same time by one operation of the effect button 136.

After that, the production is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 161 (k) to 161 (l) (FIGS. 165 (h) to 165 (k)).

FIG. 166 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (c) are the same as those in FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (c), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are connected to the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (d) before the mini game production starts. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the left end side of the display area substantially aligns with the left end side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that the slide movement is started along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The third decorative symbol display device 208N stops at a position where the right end side of the display area substantially coincides with the right end side of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the mini game is performed, as compared with the state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The hold icon h12 is difficult to see. In other words, it can be said that the effect including the button image that promotes the button operation overlaps with the effect including the button image that promotes the button operation. The change effect of the button hold icon is performed by the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1, and the hold icon h14 of the fourth special figure 1. In this case, it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and when it is performed by the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1, it is not overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but 1 Even when the hold icon h11 of the second special figure 1 is used, it may be configured to be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 166 (d), a part of the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, but the second special figure 1 All of the hold icons h12 of the above may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this production example, when only one of the change notice of the display mode of the hold icon and the mini game is performed, the productions of each other do not overlap, and the hold icon Even if the period in which the notice of change in the display mode is performed and the period in which the mini game is performed do not overlap, the effects of each other do not overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display unit is compared with the state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The character display displayed on the TT1 is difficult to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively, and it is difficult to see the first decorative symbol. It is not overlapped by the display device and is visible.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the production of the mini game as shown in FIG. 161 (d) as described above.

After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (f), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the dice symbol.

After the mini-game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (g), as shown in FIG. 166 (h), the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. The display mode of the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has not been changed. That is, also in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the change effect of the button hold icon is not accepted, and only the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (h), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating "3", and it is notified that the result of the mission is achieved.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "hold 1UP" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movements in the directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 166 (j). As shown, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and is compared with the state in which the hold icon h12 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easy to see. The timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial positions may be after the mini-game is finished, or may be returned during the derivation of the result of the mini-game. You may.

After that, the production is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 161 (j) to 161 (n) (FIGS. 166 (k) to 166 (n).

In this production example, the display device in which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed and the display device in which the mini game effect is performed are different, and the button is provided by the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the mini game effect is performed. Although it is shown that the change effects by the hold icon are overlapped, the display device in which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed and the display device in which the mini game effect is performed may be the same. In this case, for example, the effect of the mini game may be displayed so as to overlap with the change effect by the button hold icon.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a change effect by the button hold icon, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M performs a mini game effect. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may perform a change effect by the button hold icon, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L may perform a mini game effect. In this case, the change effect by the button hold icon is performed. The mini-game effects may be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

Further, when the display device in which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed and the display device in which the mini game effect is performed are the same, for example, the change effect by the button hold icon overlaps with the mini game effect. It may be displayed.

Further, in this production example, an example in which the production of the mini game overlaps with other productions is shown, but for example, instead of the production of the mini game, other than the mini game such as the customer waiting demo production and the decorative pattern variation display The production may be performed, and this production may overlap with other productions. More specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is made to display a jackpot effect, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The effect displayed on the display device 208L may be overlapped. According to this, it may be possible to draw more attention to the production by performing the production other than the mini game.

FIG. 167 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (g) are the same as those in FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (g), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the mini-game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (g), the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M as shown in FIG. 167 (h). indicate. On the other hand, in this production example, the display mode of the button hold icon that is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M on which the mini game effect is performed. The hold icon h12 changes to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. That is, in this production example, the button operation reception in the mini-game and the button operation reception in the change production of the button hold icon overlapping with the mini-game production are simultaneously performed by one operation of the production button 136. It is shown that it is.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "hold 1UP" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movements in directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and as shown in FIG. 167 (j). As shown, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap caused by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and is compared with the state in which the hold icon h12 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easy to see.

After that, the production is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 165 (i) to 165 (k) (FIGS. 167 (k) to (l)).

FIG. 168 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Note that FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (g) are the same as those in FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (g), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After the mini-game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (g), in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 168 (h), the line is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The dice symbol in the mini-game production is not stopped and displayed, but is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps with the second decorative symbol display device 208M in which the mini-game production is performed. The hold icon h12 of the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the look-ahead notice. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the button operation in the mini game is not accepted, and only the button operation in the change production of the button hold icon that overlaps with the mini game production is accepted. In other words, in this production example, it can be said that the reception of the button operation in the change production of the button hold icon is performed in preference to the reception of the button operation in the mini game.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding movements in directions away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and in FIG. 168 (i). As shown, both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the initial position. At this time, the production of the mini game is still continuing, and it is shown that the gauge of the button reception time meter is decreasing along with the display of the button image 136a in order to promote the operation of the production button 136. .. On the other hand, the hold icon h12 changed to the blue display mode has the overlap caused by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 is compared with the state in which the hold icon h12 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is easy to see.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (j), as shown in FIG. 168 (k), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol is "3". A stop display is displayed in the manner shown, and it is notified that the mission has been completed.

After that, the production is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 165 (h) to 165 (k) (FIGS. 168 (l) to (n)).

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Since FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (f) are the same as those of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (f), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the mini-game starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (f), as shown in FIG. 169 (g), the dice symbol is stopped in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. On the other hand, the display mode of the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L has not been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 169 (g), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a roll of "1", and it is notified that the roll is not a mission achievement.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays "sorry" notifying that the mission of the mini game has failed. Therefore, in this production example, the big hit notice is not given. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the result of the mission is derived than when the result other than the result of the mission is derived. There is.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (i), the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the default display mode as shown in FIG. 161 (j). .. That is, it is shown that the change effect of the button hold icon is a Gase effect that does not change to the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 169 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". , It is notified that it is a loss. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and hidden.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the production of the mini game. Since FIGS. 170 (a) to 170 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 161 (a) to 161 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 170 (f) shows that the mini-game has started, but the effect button 136 has not yet been operated. Therefore, the variable display of the dice pattern is continuously performed.

After that, when the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (g), the effect of the mini game ends without notifying the result of the mini game as shown in FIG. 170 (h). To do.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (i), the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the blue display mode as shown in FIG. 170 (j). , A look-ahead notice will be given.

After that, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 170 (k), the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2" in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. , It is notified that it is a loss. Further, also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2". At this time, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased and hidden.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 161, in the mini game, if the effect button 136 is operated during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, the mini game mission is achieved and the display mode of the hold icon changes. However, in this production example, it is shown that the mission is not achieved because the production button 136 is not operated in the mini game, and the notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed is not performed. Further, in this effect example, since the mission was not achieved, the effect of raising the display mode of the hold icon by one level is not performed, but for example, the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the second stage. If it is predetermined to do so, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as predetermined regardless of the result of the mini game. For example, the hold icon may be changed up to the second stage. It is decided to change, and after changing the hold icon to the first stage by changing the hold icon of the button, the mini game is directed so that the result of the mini game is the mission achievement, and the mini game is derived. Even if the result of the mini game is not derived when the hold icon is scheduled to be changed to the second stage according to the result, even if the hold icon is finally changed to the second stage. Good. Regarding the mode of the change, for example, in the change effect of the hold icon of the button, the hold icon is displayed in the green display mode from the display mode of the button hold icon in response to the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode may be changed, or the hold icon is changed from the display mode of the button hold icon to the display mode of the first stage, which is the blue display mode, in response to the operation of the effect button 136. After that, the second stage, which is a green display mode, is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, when the symbol variation is stopped, or during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the executing symbol variation display. The display mode may be changed. In other words, the notice corresponding to the result of executing the mini game may be given, or if the result of the mini game is not derived, the notice corresponding to the result to be derived may be given. It may not be done. Even in this way, since the result of the symbol variation display does not change, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon may be configured to be more likely to be displayed in green when the mini-game is played than when the mini-game is not played. That is, it can be said that when the mini-game is started, the advance notice is more likely to be given in an advantageous manner than when the mini-game is not started.

In this production example, if the mini game is started and the result of the mini game is not derived while the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode, the rank of the hold icon display mode is upgraded. Although it is not performed and the status quo is maintained, even if the result of the mini game is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon may be upgraded. In this case, the rank may be increased in the symbol variation display in which the mini game is played, or the rank may be increased in the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the mini game is played.

Further, in this production example, as the mode of the look-ahead notice, an example of changing the display mode of the hold icon has been described, but as the mode of the look-ahead notice, a known mode such as continuous notice can be applied. ..

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 179.

171 to 179 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 171 to 179, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 171 to 179, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 171 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. 171. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (b), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 after the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted. It is displayed, and the variable display of the decorative icon has started. At this time, after the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variable icon may be, for example, the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (c), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (d), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (e), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation, "decoration 2" is performed. -Decoration 5-Decoration 7 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns.

Subsequently, in FIG. 171 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (g) has started the step-up notice. The step-up notice is a notice in which a plurality of types of display modes are sequentially switched and displayed in a predetermined display order. In the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display mode has a number indicating the number of steps in the display mode. It is displayed. The magnitude of the number of steps is a display indicating the degree of reliability of the jackpot. For example, when the display up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed, and the possibility of a big hit increases. However, even if it is displayed up to step 5, it may be off, and the reliability is not 100%. When the display up to step 5, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. As the number of steps increases, so does the size of the display. At the timing shown in FIG. 171B (g), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (h), the step-up notice is updated on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (i), the step-up notice is further updated in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 171 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 is first stopped, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (k), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 forms a mini game display area MN1 in which the mini game is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area. This mini-game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super-reach effect display, and the super-reach effect display is more difficult to see than when the mini-game display area MN1 is not displayed. There is. In the mini-game in this production example, the mission is to repeatedly hit the production button 136 during the operation validity period to finally derive "Daikichi". That is, the mini-game in this production example requires a plurality of operation of the production button 136 in order to derive the result. FIG. 171 (m) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the text "Maybe it's a hot notice in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. The mini-game display area MN1 may not be divided by a frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 171 (n), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (o), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171 (p), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by is started.

FIG. 171 (r) shows how the player is repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

In FIG. 172 (a) following FIG. 171 (r), it is shown that the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, an effect image of a star is displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the number increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but it may not decrease. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (a), four star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1.

FIG. 172 (b) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1, and the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It has been reported that there is a high possibility that "Nakayoshi" or "Daikichi" will be derived as a result of the mini-game. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the production button 136, the once erased "Kokichi" display may be displayed again, but once it is erased, it is not displayed again. May be good.

FIG. 172 (c) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (c), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" are still displayed. , Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of "continuous hit", the character of "2 seconds left" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

FIG. 172 (d) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (d), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" are still displayed. , The display for notifying the operation valid period is "1 second left", and it is notified that the operation valid period is 1 second remaining.

FIG. 172 (e) shows how the player continues to press the effect button 136 repeatedly. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (e), the number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 has not changed, and the display for notifying the operation validity period has not changed, but the effect buttons for a predetermined number of times have not changed. It has been reported that the display of "Nakayoshi" is erased by the operation of 136, and the possibility that "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game has increased. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous striking of the production button 136, the once deleted "Nakayoshi" display may be displayed again, but once it is deleted, it is not displayed again. May be good.

FIG. 172 (f) shows a state in which "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in the mini-game display area MN1 after the player continuously hits the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has been completed. As a result, the player is informed that a super hot notice may appear. In addition, by deriving the display of "Daikichi", it is possible to give notice that the intense hot notice will always be executed.

Subsequently, when the mini-game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (g), the button notice effect is started, and the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and the button image 136a and the "Push" are displayed. Characters are displayed, indicating that the effect button 136 is being promoted once. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or is displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. In this production example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode of vibration and rotation, it is more final than when the button image 136a is displayed in a mode in which at least one of vibration and rotation is not performed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol can be easily fixed and stopped. The button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode in which it does not vibrate or rotate. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini-game and the main effect (effect related to the variable display of the decorative pattern). Further, in this production example, in the mini game, the production is performed by repeatedly hitting the production button 136, and in the main production, the production is performed by operating the production button 136 once. However, in both the mini game and the main production, the production button is performed. The effect by the continuous hitting operation of 136 may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 172 (h), the super reach effect is continuously performed, and it is shown that the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. Here, when the operation valid period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of "Push", and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 172 (i), along with a close-up image of the character of the lord, the word "game" is displayed in the balloon. A cut-in image including a balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, 9) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and this is the mini described above. In the game, the display of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed according to the result of accomplishing the mission.

On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of "Daikichi" is not derived and the mission is not achieved, the weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 172 (i') is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the chief is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even if the mission is not achieved in the mini game. Both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap with the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is higher than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with the decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 172 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 172 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

In this production example, the mini-game requires a continuous operation of the production button 136 in order to accomplish the mission, while the main production requires a single operation of the production button 136 in order to make a notice appear. In the mini-game, one operation of the effect button 136 may be required, and in the main effect, a continuous operation of the effect button 136 may be required.

Further, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice related to the symbol variation display as in this production example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. ..

FIG. 173 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 173 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (b) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini-game in this production example is also performed as described above as shown in FIGS. 171 to 172. FIG. 173 (c) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the text "Maybe it's a hot notice in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur due to the derivation of "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, the button operation effect that requires the operation of the effect button has also started in the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "Push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It is shown that the operation is being promoted. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or is displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation validity period in the main effect has not started, and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relation between the mini-game and the main production in the mini-game display area MN1.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi" in the mini-game. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player sees this notification and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. As described above, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 that overlaps with the main effect is preferentially accepted. It should be noted that the button operation for the main effect overlapping the mini-game display area MN1 may be preferentially accepted.

FIG. 173 (h) shows how the player is repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. In the mini-game display area MN1, it is shown that the number of star effect images increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 173 (i) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (i), the display of "Kokichi" is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times, and "Nakayoshi" or "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been reported that the possibility has increased. The number of star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 173 (j) shows how the player continues to repeatedly hit the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 173 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini-game display area MN1. Further, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the character of "continuous hitting", the character of "2 seconds left" is displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. On the other hand, in the main production, the operation validity period has not started as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

FIG. 173 (k) shows how the player's continuous operation of the effect button 136 is interrupted. Then, the star effect images displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini-game display area MN1 is 0. It is shown that it has become. In addition, although the display of "Daikichi" and "Nakayoshi" is still being performed, the display notifying the operation validity period is "1 second left", and the operation validity period is 1 second remaining. It has been notified.

FIG. 173 (l) shows how the operation valid period in the mini game has passed and "Nakayoshi" is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. That is, it is notified that the mission of the mini game has not been completed. Originally, "Daikichi" was supposed to be derived if the repeated hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved due to the insufficient number of operations of the effect button 136. It is due to that.

After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game ends, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect resumes, and the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is used. The reduction display starts. As a result, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect has started. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 173 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini game was not "Daikichi". At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. When it is decided in advance whether to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b, and when it is decided in advance to display the strong cut-in image CI1a, FIG. 173 ( As shown in o'), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is decided in advance to display the weak cut-in image CI1b, the display of "Daikichi" may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 173 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 173 (q), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed. In this way, the result of winning or failing is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of winning or failing is derived. Therefore, the effect in the middle may be changed as appropriate, and therefore, the operating means ( The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

FIG. 174 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 174 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. .. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the characters "Get out Daikichi and appear super hot in Daikichi" are displayed, and it is said that a highly reliable notice will be generated by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (c), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (d), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of this high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect that requires a continuous operation of the effect button has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (f), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates. It should be noted that the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which it is only vibrating, may be displayed in a mode in which it is only rotating, or is displayed in a mode in which it is neither vibrating nor rotating. There may be cases. As described above, in this effect example, the effect of requesting the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and the effect of requesting the single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that an example is shown in which the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is requested in the mini game is smaller than the number of times the operation of the effect button 136 is requested in the main effect. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge reduction display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are accepted at the same time. It should be noted that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. In this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. As described above, in this effect example, both the main effect and the mini-game effect can be operated by the same operation means (effect button 136). Therefore, for example, when the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect in which the reception of the operation is prioritized and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the effect in which the operation is requested once, the momentum of the continuous hit of the operation means The result may be derived for the non-priority effect, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is prioritized is the effect that requires one operation, and the effect in which the acceptance of the operation is non-priority is the continuous hit operation. In the case of the required effect, since the continuous striking operation is performed from the beginning, it may be possible to reliably derive the result even for the priority effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. It is shown that it is. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been completed is also displayed, and the fact is notified. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini-game effect is received in preference to the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the repeated hitting operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous striking operation effect in the main effect. The button reception time meter MT is overlapped by this cut-in image, and it is difficult to see the cut-in image as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "Mission in progress" notifying that the mission in the mini game has been completed is scrolled from the right end to the left end. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on condition that the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is continued. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing.

After that, as a result of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player, as shown in FIG. 174 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the strong cut-in image CI1a is replaced with the weak cut-in image CI1b. Is displayed. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini-game as described above. In this effect example, a continuous striking gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the continuous striking gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. The strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when it is displayed and the tank is full. At this time, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous striking gauge may not be full no matter how many continuous striking operations are performed.

When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, then, as shown in FIG. 174 (k), in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is changed to "Mission is being completed". "Appearance of super hot notice" is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is a super hot notice, is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 174 (h), the mission of the mini game is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 174 (i'), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. However, after that, when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to the player stopping the continuous striking operation or the like, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (j'). May remain as it is. That is, as in this production example, even though the mission has been achieved, depending on the operation status of the production button 136, there may be a case where the rule breaking that the intense hot notice does not appear may occur. In addition, in order to match the achievement of the mission of the mini game, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation status of the effect button 136, or another strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed instead of the strong cut-in image CI1a. You may want to display a super hot notice. Further, when the continuous striking operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 174 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and when the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in is performed. When the image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed and the number of operations of the effect button 136 exceeds a predetermined number of times, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this production example, it is determined in advance whether the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini is used. It is configured so that the display of "Daikichi" can be derived in the game. Further, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI1b can be displayed, the display of "Daikichi" is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this effect example, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 has not been operated at least as many times as necessary to display the weak cut-in CI1b in the button continuous operation effect in the main effect. It may be. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the button continuous operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image may be displayed. The CI1b can be displayed, but the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

FIG. 175 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 175 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (b) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 175 (c) shows how the mini-game is started, and displays a description of the game in the mini-game. Specifically, the characters "Get Daikichi by hitting repeatedly" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. The button image 136a displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 175 (c) has a size larger than the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171 (m). However, they may be the same size. Further, the small-sized button image 136a and the large-sized button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. .. That is, when the large-sized button image 136a is displayed, it may be easier to accomplish the mission than when the small-sized button image 136a is displayed. In addition, below that, the characters "Daikichi has a strong cut-in" are displayed, and it is foretold that a highly reliable strong cut-in notice will be generated by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission and the result of the mission achievement are explained.

After that, the description of the game of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 175 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of "Daikichi", "Nakakichi", and "Kokichi" is displayed in this order, the display of "Daikichi" overlaps with the display of "Nakayoshi", and the display of "Nakayoshi" is "Kokichi". It is displayed so that it overlaps with the display of.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of "Kokichi", and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been notified that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by is started. Further, on the left side of the mini-game display area MN1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this production example, it is shown that the display related to the mini game is performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

FIGS. 175 (f) to 175 (g) show how the effect button 136 continues to be repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini-game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases according to the number of repeated hits of the effect button 136.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses, the result corresponding to the number of repeated hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 175 (h), "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game, and the characters "mission achieved" are displayed below it to notify that the mission of the mini-game has been completed. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (i), a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a cut-in notice. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the above-mentioned mini-game, in which "Daikichi" is derived and the mission is achieved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 175 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (e), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is as shown in FIGS. 175 (f') to 175 (g'). However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 175 (h'), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game. "Kokichi" is derived, and the words "Mission failed" are displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been completed. The result of the mini-game may be determined in advance based on the result of the winning / failing determination.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (i'), a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as a cut-in notice. As a result, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of this weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the result that "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the above-mentioned mini-game and the mission was not achieved.

After that, as shown in FIG. 175 (j'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. To.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 175 (k'), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Then, one special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 176 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 176 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (d), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7”, which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani, that is, is displayed in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

Subsequently, in FIG. 176 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold display disappears, the first special symbol display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. The variable display has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (c) shows that the mission as the main effect has been started. Specifically, the characters "mission activation" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. In addition, on the lower edge of the display area, "put out a cut-in" and "if it comes out, a big hit" is displayed along with an image of the face of the bancho, and the content of the mission is notified. That is, it is notified that if the image of the face of the Bancho appears during the mission, the mission is completed and the big hit is confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 is first stopped, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Mission in progress" indicating that the mission is continuing is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (e), the second stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. In addition, the display of "in mission" is being continued.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 176 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display that develops into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Even after developing into Super Reach, the display of "Mission in progress" continues.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the mini-game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area and the mini-game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mission as the main production and the mission in the mini game are being performed at the same time. In other words, it shows that the mission as the main production is overlaid with the mission of the mini game. Here, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini-game is started. It should be noted that the effects shown in FIGS. 176 (g) to 176 (l) are shown in FIGS. 175 (c) to 175 (l), except that "in mission" indicating that the mission is in progress is displayed. Since it is the same as h), detailed description will be omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 176 (j) to 176 (k), a part of the "mission in progress" display overlaps with the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT. It is said that the "Mission in progress" display is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

As shown in FIG. 176 (l), after the "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini game and the mission is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a cut-in notice at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (m). The strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the above-mentioned mini-game, in which "Daikichi" is derived and the mission is achieved. The mission continues even while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" is continuously performed, but it overlaps with the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. It is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1a.

As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a balloon in which a large number of Bancho's faces are arranged around the characters of "game". Therefore, due to the achievement of the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (n), the character display of "mission achieved" exceeds the strong cut-in image CI1a. Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot will be confirmed when the mission in the main production is completed. In other words, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 176 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 177 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (k) are the same as those in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 177 (l), when "Kokichi" was derived as a result of the mini-game, the characters "Mission failed" were displayed below it, and the mission of the mini-game was not completed. Is notified. In this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a loss, and therefore, when the mission of the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Therefore, in this production example, the mini game is used. Regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136, it is determined in advance that something other than "Daikichi" is always derived.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini-game described above. The mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image. Although it is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, so the display of "in mission" is the strong cut-in image. It is easier to see when it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when it overlaps with CI1a.

The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the chief, as described above. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 177 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is changed to the weak cut-in image CI1b because the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, is not achieved. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the middle. The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 7"-"decoration 6"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. ..

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 177 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

FIG. 178 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since FIGS. 178 (a) to 178 (i) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (i), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (i), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is increased as shown in FIGS. 178 (j) to 178 (k). When the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses in a state where the number of times is less than the predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 178 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game, "Kokichi" Is derived, and the word "Mission Failed" is displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been completed. In this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived as a result of the mini game. However, since the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number of times determined in advance and the operation valid period has elapsed, "Daikichi" is not derived and "Kokichi" is derived. If the mini-game has started but the effect button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini-game may not be derived even if it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived. .. Further, when it is determined that "Daikichi" can be derived, "Daikichi" may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the effect button 136 is not operated. ..

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as a cut-in notice. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is due to the fact that the mission was not achieved as a result of the mini-game described above. The mission continues even while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of "Mission in progress" continues, but it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image. Although it is said that it is more difficult to see than when it does not overlap with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a, so the display of "in mission" is the strong cut-in image. It is easier to see when it overlaps with the weak cut-in image CI1b than when it overlaps with CI1a. The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the result of the mission is not derived.

The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the chief, as described above. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 178 (n), the character display of "mission failure" is changed to the weak cut-in image CI1b because the appearance of the face of the bancho, which is the mission in the main production, is not achieved. It is displayed in an overlapping manner. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the mission in the main production was not achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

However, in this production example, the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, so as shown in FIG. 178 (o), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role and wins. At the same time, "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" are displayed. It is notified that the stop display is scheduled for the combination of.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 178 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed. That is, in this production example, the number of operations of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mission of the mini game fails. Therefore, even though the mission of the main production related to this cannot be achieved, it is correct or not. It is shown that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the determination.

FIG. 179 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 179, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect movable body 224 is also shown.

FIG. 179 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (b), a button operation effect requesting a continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner of vibrating and rotating, and the characters "continuous hit" are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136, for example, vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge reduction display by the button reception time meter MT is started, and it is shown that the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been done. Then, the player sees this and starts repeatedly hitting the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in this mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting one operation of the effect button 136. In addition, below that, the text "Maybe it's a super hot notice in Daikichi" is displayed, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice will occur by deriving "Daikichi". The contents of the mission in the mini game and the result of the mission achievement are explained. As described above, in this production example, the mission production in the main production is started before the mini game is started. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179 (f), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Nakayoshi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Nakayoshi" display overlaps with a part of the "Daikichi" display. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is movable and overlaps with the mini game display area MN1. In this production example, the effect movable body 224 operates as, for example, a big hit notice, but for example, by operating the effect movable body 224, it is announced that there is a high possibility of accomplishing the mission in the mini game. It may be done, or it may be foretold that the mission is likely to be achieved in the main production. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 179 (g), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Kokichi", which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. This "Kokichi" display overlaps with a part of the "Nakayoshi" display. Further, the display of "Kokichi" overlaps with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is considered to be difficult to see. On the other hand, the effect of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (g), in response to the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. , Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, it is shown that the cut-in image is displayed during the operation valid period in the continuous striking operation effect in the main effect. In this production example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side of the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT so as not to overlap with each other. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (h), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", and "Kokichi" is started. Then, the characters "push" are displayed together with the button image 136a below the effect of this high-speed loop rotation, and it is notified that the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. The display of this mini-game overlaps with the upper arm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, which makes it difficult to see. On the other hand, in the main production, the button operation production that requires the continuous striking operation of the production buttons continues. Further, in this effect example, the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the effect including the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, too, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continuing, but when the acceptance of one operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line. It is configured in. It should be noted that one operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, or may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 179 (i), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, "Daikichi" is derived as a result of the mini-game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. It is shown that it is. Then, the word "achievement" indicating that the mission of the mini game has been completed is also displayed, and the fact is notified. However, since the mini-game display area MN1 overlaps the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, the word "achievement" is difficult to see. At the timing shown in FIG. 179 (i), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has passed, and the player has finished the continuous operation of the effect button 136.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (j), when the mission in the main effect is completed, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main production. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (j), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. Therefore, the overlap with the mini-game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the word "achievement" indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved is also easy to see. The timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main effect is completed may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves to the initial position. Then, after the mission in the main effect is completed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is moved to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 may be moved to the initial position, or the effect movable body 224 may be moved. After the forearm portion 224b of the above has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may be completed and the weak cut-in image CI1b may be moved to the center of the display area.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 179 (k), it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini-game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even if the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a Although it is not displayed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini game is achieved regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 7" to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. .. After that, at the timing when the variation time elapses, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and one special figure variation game ends.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184.

FIGS. 180 to 184 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 180 to 184, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 180 to 184, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 180 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 180, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

FIG. 180A shows how the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this production example, the mini-game is played without being divided by areas. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side in the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, in the center of the display area, "SP reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and it is notified that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). Further, above the display area, "Select with the cross key" and "Enter with the button" are displayed. Select the treasure box with the operation key unit 137 and determine it as the treasure box to open the treasure box selected with the effect button 136. It is informed that it can be done. That is, in this production example, a state in which a mini game using a plurality of operating means is performed is shown. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the mini-game is performed using a wider area than the production related to the decorative symbol variation display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (b), it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 has started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure box image BXL, and it is shown that the treasure box surrounded by the cursor CSL is the selected treasure box. Further, the remaining time of the operation valid period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area, and at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is remaining 3 seconds is displayed. Has been done. Further, FIG. 180 (b) also shows how the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (c), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR, and it is shown that the right treasure box image BXR is surrounded. .. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "2", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (d), as shown in FIG. 180 (e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as the treasure box to be opened, and the right The treasure chest image BXL is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is reduced. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 180 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "1", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 1 second. Further, after the player operates the effect button 136 to determine the treasure box to be opened, the display may be displayed so that the treasure box to be opened is confirmed when the operation valid period elapses. Further, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation by the effect button 136, the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL may be determined as the treasure box to be opened, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation validity period elapses without any action, none of the treasure chests is selected and the treasure chest may not be opened. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (f), the character YSM of the main character, the lord of the hero, appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and it is shown that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. As a result, it is foretold to shift to SP reach. In addition, a look-ahead notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols of "decoration 7" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, to form a reach state. .. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it develops into SP reach. As described above, in this production example, when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined based on the result of the hit / fail judgment shifts to the SP reach, in the mini-game performed before the shift to the SP reach, It is configured to be able to display the character YSM of the main character, who announces the transition to SP reach. As a result, it may be possible to announce the transition to SP reach by making the character YSM of the lord appear in the mini game.

In this production example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord appears regardless of whether the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, and the transition to SP reach does not occur. If it is determined in advance, the character YSM of the lord may not appear regardless of whether the right treasure box image BXL or the left treasure box image BXL is selected. In addition, on the condition that the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be a hit is selected. In this case, the character YSM of the lord may appear. In addition, when the variable time in which SP reach can be executed is selected, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be hit is selected. It is configured so that the character YSM of the lord appears, and if the character YSM of the lord appears, then it develops into SP reach, but if the character YSM of the lord does not appear, then the SP reach It may be configured to perform a reach with a lower reliability than the SP reach such as a normal reach until the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, whether or not to make the character YSM of the lord appear at the timing when the treasure box image is selected may be randomly drawn. Further, even if the character YSM of the lord appears, it may not shift to SP reach. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed as a rule break.

FIG. 181 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 181, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown.

FIG. 181 (a) shows how the mini-game is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side in the lower left and right of the display area. ing. In addition, in the center of the display area, "SP reach if Yoshimune appears" is displayed, and it is notified that when the main character's lord appears from the treasure box, it will shift to super reach (SP reach). Further, above the display area, "Select with the cross key" and "Enter with the button" are displayed. Select the treasure box with the operation key unit 137 and determine it as the treasure box to open the treasure box selected with the effect button 136. It is informed that it can be done. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a), a cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL, and none of the treasure chest images is displayed in a manner selected. Has been done.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (b), the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area. To. At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (b), "3" indicating that the operation valid period is 3 seconds remaining is displayed.

At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (c), the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is "2", indicating that the operation validity period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL has not yet been selected for any treasure chest image, and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL.

At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d), the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is "1", indicating that the operation validity period is 1 second remaining. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected for any treasure chest image and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL.

At the timing shown in FIG. 181 (e), the remaining time of the operation valid period in the decorative symbol display device 208 is not performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display becomes "0", indicating that the operation validity period has elapsed. Therefore, the cursor CSL is still not selected for any treasure chest image and is located between the right treasure chest image BXL and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, as shown in FIG. 181 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the reach state without selecting any treasure chest and opening any treasure chest, that is, without deriving the result of the mini game. Will be migrated to.

In this production example, if the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even if none of the treasure chests are selected, but the result of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable time are Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the hit / fail judgment, if none of the treasure chests is selected, SP reach is not performed, and for example, a reach with a lower reliability than the SP reach such as normal reach is executed. It may be. According to this, it may be possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137.

FIG. 182 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 182, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown. Since FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (d) are the same as those of FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (d), as shown in FIG. 182 (e), the selected right treasure box image BXR is determined as a treasure box to be opened, and the right treasure box image is determined. The BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the unselected left treasure box image BXL is reduced. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 182 (e), an error display (error) of "the game ball is jammed" and "please call the staff" is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. (Notification) is being performed, and it is notified that a ball jam error has occurred, which is a state in which the game ball is jammed in the payout route. Specifically, for example, the payout condition of the prize ball or the rental ball is satisfied, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 65, etc.) is driven, but the payout of the game ball is not detected, and the retry operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example,). (3 times) If the payout of the game ball is not detected even though it is repeated, the ball jam error notification is performed. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. When it is detected that the error that is the target of the error notification has been resolved (for example, when the payout device 152 normally pays out the game ball), the error notification is deleted. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure box image BXR starts the enlarged display. It may be the timing before the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display.

182 (f) to 182 (h) are the same as those of FIGS. 180 (f) to 180 (h) except that an error is displayed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, if the error is such that the game is not interrupted, the mini game is continued.

FIG. 183 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 183, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the state of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown. In this production example, a magnetic detection sensor that detects a magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic force detection sensor detects the magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 inputs the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, it determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, sends a magnetic detection command to the first sub control unit 400, and then stops the game and becomes incapacitated. Control to change. After being deactivated, it is configured so that it cannot be restored until the initialization process of step S113 of the main control unit main process (see FIG. 69) is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetic detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, or uses various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, and a game underframe lamp 542 to determine an error mode. The lamp can be blinked, or a predetermined error display can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, since FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (c) are the same as those of FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (c) shows that the right treasure box image BXR is surrounded. The display of the remaining time of the operation valid period is "2", indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds.

After that, for example, when a player commits an error using a magnet and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 uses a "magnet" on a plain background. The magnetic error display ERR including the characters "Sensor error" is displayed, for example, overlapping the display shown in FIG. 180 (d), and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, after that, as shown in FIG. 183 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even if the effect button 136 is operated, and is shown in FIGS. 180 (d) to 180 (h). However, the magnetic error display ERR will continue to be displayed until the power is cut off without visually recognizing these effect displays (FIGS. 183 (d) to (h)). )). It can be said that the magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 183 has a different area that overlaps with the effect of the mini game as compared with the error display shown in FIG. 182. In other words, it can be said that the area of the mini-game effect display that overlaps the error display differs depending on the type of error that has occurred.

FIG. 184 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 184 (a) is an effect following FIG. 171 (j), in which "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a state in which a reach state is formed is shown. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how it develops into a bowling reach, which is one of the super reach. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as the main production. When shifting to bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and 10 bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape. An effect display is performed in which the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin, and in the upper right part of the display area, the characters "Big hit with strike" are displayed, and if you complete the mission of strike, you can get a big hit. It has been notified.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (c), it is shown that the ball reaches a position close to the ten bowling pins and tries to knock down the bowling pins at any moment. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area, and overlaps at least a part of the bowling reach effect display. .. In the mini-game display area MN1, the explanation display of the mini-game is performed. In the explanation display of the mini-game shown in FIG. 184 (c), the dice "1" is shown and "put out" is displayed below the "mini-game" display. It is explained that a mission is performed in which the effect button 136 is operated after the start of the game to stop and display the roll of "1" on the dice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (d), a state in which the nine bowling pins have fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one bowling pin remains without falling. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of "Push", and it is notified that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini-game has started. At this time, for example, the design of the dice may be changed and displayed.

FIG. 184 (e) shows how the effect button 136 is operated to derive the result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since the strike did not occur in the bowling reach, the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the mission in the bowling reach is not achieved and the game is lost. On the other hand, in the mini-game display area MN1, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result of the mini-game, the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and the mission is completed. As a reward, the bowling pin is further 1 "+1" is displayed to announce that the book will fall.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 184 (f), the mini-game display area MN1 is erased, and the dice “1” derived as a result of the mini-game is rolled, and the mission achievement reward is “1”. After the display of "+1" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 184 (g), it is shown that one bowling pin that remained without collapsing collapsed and became a strike. In other words, it is shown that a production that will be a big hit for the resurrection from the loss is being performed.

After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 184 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). One special figure variable game is completed.

As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game influences the result of the reach production as the main production.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 192.

FIGS. 185 to 192 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 185 to 192, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 185 to 192, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 185 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (a), "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a combination of lost decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 and the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 partitioned in a substantially rectangular shape is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The multifunctional display area MF1 can perform the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (b), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 after the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted. It is displayed, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the variable icon may be displayed as described above.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (c), it is shown that the tutorial display is performed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the display "The mini game will start at various timings" is displayed, and the timing when the mini game starts is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and after the temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), "decoration 2 -Decoration 5-Decoration 7 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (e), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is the first special figure 1. It is displayed as the hold icon h11 of, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (f), it is shown that the tutorial display is performed in the multifunction display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, and information about the main character, the lord, is displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (h), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 1 UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the chief along with the display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will be changed to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode by deriving the result of the dice "1" as the mission. It becomes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (i), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 185 (j), as shown in FIG. 185 (k), in the multifunction display area MF1, the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "1", and "1UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. In this production example as well, the reliability of the jackpot is higher in the order of red> green> blue for the hold icon. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, the fortune-telling game may be started in place of the dice game as the mini-game described in FIGS. 185 (g) to 185 (k). Here, FIG. 185 (g') is another example of the effect following FIG. 185 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 185 (g'), the mini game is played in the multifunctional display area MF1. To be started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. Will be done. In this production example, even when different types of mini-games are started, the image BCH of the face of the same chief is displayed. In other words, in this production example, the same character (image BCH of the face of the bancho) can be made to appear to execute a plurality of types of mini games.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (h'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Nakayoshi" is displayed and "Depended 1UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and "Depended 1UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is explained that when "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the Omikuji of "Nakayoshi" as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will change to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (i'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. The mini-game in this production example is not operated by an operation means such as the production button 136.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open mode, and the fortune-telling of "Nakayoshi" is derived and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol, or the mini game. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 185 (k'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "1UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for completing the mission is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (k'), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped for the second time, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission achievement display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 185 (l'), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the missing decorative patterns of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the first stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and blue display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, the production example shown in FIG. 185 shows an example configured so that different types of mini-games can be played when the start condition of the mini-game is satisfied, and on the other hand, ( The mini-game of the dice game) requires the operation of the effect button 136, while the mini-game of the other (Omikuji game) does not require any operation by the operation means, and further, the display mode in any of the mini-games. The target for changing is the same (in each case, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is changed). That is, FIG. 185 shows an example of an effect in which the target that affects the main effect as a result is the same in all the mini games. In this production example, whether to execute the dice game or the fortune-telling game may be randomly determined or may be determined based on the result of the winning / failing determination. For example, the dice game is executed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the Omikuji game is executed than when the game is executed.

Further, as in this production example, in a mini game, a character smaller than a character (sometimes referred to as a "small character") that appears during execution of a variable display of a decorative symbol, or in a production such as a tutorial display, for example. Characters that appear (sometimes called "navi characters") may appear. If the mini-game is not played, these characters may be displayed in the tutorial display or other notices, or may be configured to appear only in the mini-game. Moreover, these characters may be always displayed. Further, it is preferable that there is a difference in appearance between the character appearing in the mini game and the character appearing during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, the size may be different, and the 3D character and the deformed character. There may be a difference in expression such as the character of.

In this production example, the fortune-telling game (second mini-game) may use a wider area than the dice game (first mini-game). That is, the second mini-game uses at least one display area (multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini-game is performed), and yet another display area (multifunctional display area MF1 is an enlarged display area). ) May also be used.

FIG. 186 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Since FIGS. 186 (a) to 186 (e) are the same as those of FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (f), it is shown that the mini game start notice is displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1. Specifically, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "attention" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is foretold that the mini game will start from now on.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini-game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (h), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the bancho along with the display indicating the roll of "3" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the roll of "3" of the dice as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will change to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode. It becomes. Moreover, in this production example, the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG. 185.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (i), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (j), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 186 (j), as shown in FIG. 186 (k), in the multifunction display area MF1, the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The stop display of the right symbol and the derived display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini game. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of is derived and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (l), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the Omikuji game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 186 (g'), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini-game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 becomes the chief. The "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face, and it is notified that the dice game as a mini game will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (h'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Daikichi" is displayed and "Depended 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and "Depended 3UP" is displayed in the mini game. It is explained that when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, by deriving the Omikuji of "Daikichi" as a mission, it is announced that the hold icon of the default display mode will change to the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode. Moreover, in this production example, the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the fortune-telling game shown in FIG. 185.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (i'), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (j'), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is changed to the open mode, and the fortune-telling of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, indicating that the mission has been achieved. The stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the left symbol, or the mini game. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (k'), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. There is. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 186 (k'), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped for the second time, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of starting the display of the mission achievement reward may be the same, or the display of the mission achievement reward is started after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission achievement display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 186 (l'), a third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the production example shown in FIG. 186, an example configured so that the content of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission can be different even in the same type of mini-game is shown. The mission content may be the same and the mission achievement reward may be different, or the mission content may be different and the mission achievement reward may be the same.

FIG. 187 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 187 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is. It should be noted that the auntie mode and the princess mode are the names of the effect modes, respectively, and each mode is configured to perform a mode-specific effect. In addition, for example, at least one of the auntie mode and the princess mode may be the look-ahead mode. Further, whether to shift to the auntie mode or the princess mode may be randomly determined, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to the auntie mode, and in the hidden probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), it shifts to the princess mode. It may be made easier so that the player can guess the current gaming state.

FIG. 187 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this production example, the dice game is configured to be easier to start than the fortune-telling game in the auntie mode. Here, when the mini-game is executed in the auntie mode, the dice game may be started and the fortune-telling game may not be started. It should be noted that FIGS. 187 (A2) to 187 (A6) are the same as those in FIGS. 186 (h) to (l) except that the auntie mode and the auntie character BA are displayed. , The description is omitted.

FIG. 187 (B1) shows that the production mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 187 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. In this production example, in the princess mode, the fortune-telling game is configured to be easier to start than the dice game. Here, when the mini game is executed in the princess mode, the fortune-telling game may be started and the dice game may not be started. It should be noted that FIGS. 187 (B2) to 187 (B6) are the same as those of FIGS. 186 (h') to (l') except that the princess mode is displayed and the princess character HM1 is displayed. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 188 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 188 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 188 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 188 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started. In this production example, the type of mini-game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main production. For example, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is more likely to be started as a mini game than the Omikuji game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream. If so, the symbol variation display is configured so that the Omikuji game is easier to start than the dice game as a mini game. If it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and if it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream, the said In the symbol variation display, the Omikuji game may be configured to always start as a mini game. Further, in this effect example, the type of the mini-game to be executed is determined without depending on the current effect mode, but the type of the mini-game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A2), in the multifunctional display area MF1, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the chief, along with a display indicating the outcome of "3" on the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF1 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started to be displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (A3), in the multifunction display area MF1, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The timing at which the button image 136a and "press" are started to be displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, or the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF1 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 188 (A4), as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF1. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decorative 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 188 (B1) shows that the production mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B2), it is shown that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3". In this production example, for example, it is notified that a pseudo-ream may be performed by temporarily stopping the combination of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3". That is, a combination of decorative patterns of only "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" may be an opportunity. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream symbol may be displayed to notify the start of the pseudo-ream. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, "Daikichi" is displayed on the right side of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho and "Hold 3 UP" is displayed, and when "Daikichi" is derived and displayed in the mini game, the hold icon is displayed. It is explained that the display mode of is upgraded by three levels. The timing at which the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Depended 3UP" in the multifunctional display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the multifunctional display area MF1 After the display of "Daikichi" and the display of "Hold 3UP" are started, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, "Daikichi" in the multifunctional display area MF1. "And the display of" Hold 3UP "may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (B3), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is displayed together with the image BCH of the face of the chief, and the effect of opening the treasure box is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and it is shown that the first pseudo-ream variable display is performed. Here, the number of times the pseudo-ream has been performed may be displayed. The start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) and the start of the display of the treasure box BXS may be at the same timing, or the display of the treasure box BXS may be performed after the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) starts. May start, or after the display of the treasure chest BXS starts, the variable display (pseudo-ream) of the decorative symbol may start.

After that, as shown in FIG. 188 (B4), in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box changes to the open mode, and the fortune-telling of "Daikichi" is derived and displayed, and the mission is achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops at the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3", and foretells that the pseudo-ream may be further performed. The temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the mini game. The decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped after the result is derived and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 188 (B5), in the multifunction display area MF1, the image BXS of the treasure box is erased, and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the image BCH of the face of the chief is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and it is shown that the second pseudo-ream variable display is performed. The timing of starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) and the start of displaying the reward for completing the mission may be the same, or after the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) is started. The display of the mission achievement reward may be started, or the variable display of the decorative symbol (pseudo-ream) may be started after the mission achievement reward display is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is erased. Has been changed from the default display mode to a circular red display mode as the third stage display mode of the look-ahead notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols is lost. Here, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream may be further performed. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, it was explained that the result of the mini-game affects the display mode of the hold icon, but as a result of the mini-game, it may be announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for completing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times the pseudo-ream is started may be announced, or the number of pseudo-reams may be foretold to increase.

Further, as a result of the mini-game, as a reward for completing the mission, a step-up notice may be announced, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be announced, or the step You may want to foretell that the number will increase.

FIG. 189 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 189 (A1) to (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the auntie mode, and FIGS. 189 (B1) to (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. There is.

FIG. 189 (A1) shows that the effect mode is the auntie mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (A1), the "Auntie mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the auntie is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area. It is informed that the current production mode is the auntie mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this production example, the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed instead of the image BCH of the face of the Bancho, and the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and this display serves as a mini game. It is shown that the dice game is being notified that it will start. The character image SBH of Sabohani is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the dice game and is configured not to be displayed in the fortune-telling game, but may also be displayed in the fortune-telling game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the dice game is more likely to be more advantageous when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed than when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for completing the mission, as compared with the case where the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. More specifically, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the result of "3" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the result of "1" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini game than when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed. Further, when the character image SBH of Sabohani is displayed, the mission may be configured so as to be easier to accomplish than when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed. In addition, FIGS. 189 (A2) to 189 (A6) show FIG. 188 (A2) except that the image BCH of the face of the chief displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the character image SBH of Sabohani. -Since it is the same as the figure (A6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 189 (B1) shows that the production mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 189 (B1), the "princess mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed in the upper left part of the display area. It has been notified that the current production mode is the princess mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 189 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this production example, the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed instead of the image BCH of the face of the bancho, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of this princess, and this display serves as a mini game. It is shown that the Omikuji game is being notified that it will start. The princess character image HM2 is, for example, an image that may be displayed only in the fortune-telling game and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may also be displayed in the dice game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the fortune-telling game is more likely to be more advantageous when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. That is, in this production example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, as compared with the case where the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. It is easy to give a notice that is the third stage display mode (red display mode) of the look-ahead notice, and when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As a reward for achievement, it is easy to give a notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes from the default display mode to the first stage display mode (blue display mode) of the look-ahead notice. More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, "Daikichi" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than when the image BCH of the Bancho's face is displayed, and the image of the Bancho's face is displayed. When BCH is displayed, "Nakayoshi" is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As in this production example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the production mode. That is, in this production example, the character displayed in the princess mode (princess character HM1) and the character displayed in the mini game (princess character image HM2) are the same. Further, when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed, the mission may be configured to be easier to accomplish than when the image BCH of the face of the bancho is displayed. In addition, FIGS. 189 (B2) to 189 (B6) show FIG. 188 (B2) except that the image BCH of the face of the chief displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 is replaced with the character image HM2 of the princess. -Since it is the same as the figure (B6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 190 (A1) to 190 (A6) show an example of an effect performed in a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and FIGS. 190 (B1) to 190 (B6) show. , An example of the effect performed in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the type of mini-game started differs depending on the current gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the dice game is likely to be started as a mini game, and in the probabilistic state, the fortune-telling game is likely to be started as a mini game. In the normal game state, the dice game may always be started as a mini game, and in the probabilistic state, the fortune-telling game may be always started as a mini game. Further, the appearance frequency of the mini-game may be different depending on the game state. For example, in the probabilistic state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit, so that the player has free time until the big hit. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of the mini-game may be higher than that of the normal game state. Further, the probability of occurrence of the mini game may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state. Further, the mini-game may be executed only in the probabilistic state, or the mini-game may be executed only in the normal gaming state. Further, for a certain mini-game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal game state than in the probability change state, the appearance rate may be higher in the probability change state than in the normal game state, and it appears only in the probability change state. It may be used, or it may appear only in the normal game state. Further, regarding a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probabilistic state, the appearance rate may be higher in the probabilistic state than in the normal game state, and it appears only in the probabilistic state. In some cases, it may appear only in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 190 (A1) shows how the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (A1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. It should be noted that FIGS. 190 (A1) to 190 (A6) show FIG. 189 (Fig. Since it is the same as A1) to FIG. 6 (A6), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 190 (B1) shows that the gaming state is a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (B1), the "probability change mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the probabilistic state. ing. Further, in the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a "right-handed" display is performed, and a striking method suggestion display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 190 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2 and the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 and the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 are all in the default display mode. It is displayed and is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this production example, the display position of the multifunctional display area MF1 is changed depending on the game state. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the character image HM2 of the princess, and it is notified that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. In addition, in FIGS. 190 (B1) to 190 (B5), the game state is the production mode of the princess mode, which is a probable change state, and the hold display of the special figure 1 becomes the hold display of the special figure 2. It is the same as in FIGS. 189 (B1) to (B5) except that the number of hold displays is different, the position of the hold display and the display position of the multifunction display area MF1 are exchanged. Therefore, the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 190 (B5), in the multifunctional display area MF1, after the display of “3UP confirmation” indicating that the reward is for accomplishing the mission is performed, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 190 (B6) is displayed. In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been erased. In this production example, the display mode of the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2 is a look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode as the display mode of the third stage of. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols is lost. In this way, the result of the mini-game may affect any hold icon.

FIG. 191 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 191 (A1) to 191 (A6) show an example in which the display area of the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded, and FIGS. 191 (B1) to 191 (B6) show an example in which the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded. An example is shown in which the hold display area for displaying the hold icon is also used. Although FIG. 191 has been described by taking a dice game as a mini game as an example, it can also be applied to the above-mentioned fortune-telling game.

FIG. 191 (A1) shows how the gaming state is the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 190 (A1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, a multifunctional display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the mini game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, showing that the area is enlarged. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, and the visibility is improved. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display indicating the roll of "3" of the dice and a display of "hold 3UP" are performed, and the effect button is displayed after the mini game is started. It is explained that when the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed by operating 136, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Here, the character image SBH of Sabohani and the display showing the roll of "3" on the dice are enlarged and displayed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping with the multifunctional display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. The timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed, or after the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the step-up is performed. The notice SU1 may be started to be displayed, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Further, even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started to be displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF1 may be started. Further, the timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 is expanded and displayed is the same as the timing at which the display of the dice "3" in the multifunctional display area MF1 and the display of "hold 3UP" are started. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the dice "3" in the multi-function display area MF1 and the display of "hold 3UP" may be started. The multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, the multifunctional display area MF1 may or may not be expanded when the mini game is started. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the game state. For example, when the mini-game is started in the probabilistic state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and the mini-game is expanded in the normal game state. The multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded when it is started, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded when the mini-game is started in the normal gaming state, and the mini-game is started in the probabilistic state. In this case, the multifunctional display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this effect example, the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative symbol, but the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be expanded. It may overlap with the function display area MF1. Further, the non-extended multifunctional display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative symbol, or the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the non-extended multifunctional display area MF1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (A3), in the multifunctional display area MF1, together with the button image 136aL displayed in a large size, "press" is displayed on the button image 136aL, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It has been notified that the operation validity period of is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. This step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the multifunctional display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunctional display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 overlaps the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 does not overlap the multi-function display area MF1. It should be noted that the multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the step-up notice only when it is expanded and displayed, or may be overlapped with the step-up notice even when it is not expanded and displayed. Further, the timing at which the display of the button image 136aL and the "press" in the multifunctional display area MF1 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF1. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136aL and "press" is started, or the button image 136aL in the multifunction display area MF1 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multifunctional display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunctional display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 overlaps the multifunction display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 does not overlap the multi-function display area MF1. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. Has been done. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the rate of decrease of the gauge is faster than that when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main production. , The rate of decrease of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main production may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game and the decreasing speed of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be the same speed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (A4), as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), in the multifunction display area MF1, the enlarged dice pattern is the result of the mission achievement. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission is displayed. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF1, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also enlarged and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (A5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (A6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". In addition, the expanded multifunctional display area MF1 has been reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the multifunctional display area MF1 returns to the default size and the timing at which the result of the mini game is erased may be the same, or after the multifunctional display area MF1 returns to the default size, the mini game The result of the mini-game may be erased, or the multifunction display area MF1 may return to the default size after the result of the mini-game is erased.

FIG. 191 (B1) shows how the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 188 (B1), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in this effect example, the multifunctional display area MF2 is formed over the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this multifunctional display area MF2, in addition to the above-mentioned tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like, a hold icon is also displayed. The hold icon of the special figure 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multifunction display area MF2, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multifunction display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 191 (B1), on the left side of the multifunctional display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multifunctional display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon in Special Figure 2, and a "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and the mini game is displayed. It is notified that the dice game will be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B2), in the multifunctional display area MF2, "hold 3UP" is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani along with a display indicating the outcome of "3" of the dice. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game is started and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a step-up notice has been started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. Even if the timing at which the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunctional display area MF2 is started is the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 is started to be displayed. Alternatively, the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunction display area MF2 are started, or the step-up notice SU1 may be started. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the dice "3" and the display of "hold 3UP" in the multifunctional display area MF2 may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 191 (B3), in the multifunctional display area MF2, "press" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. The timing at which the display of the button images 136a and "press" in the multifunctional display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed, or in the multifunctional display area MF2. The step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the display of the button image 136a and "press" is started, or the button image 136a in the multifunction display area MF2 is started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. And the display of "press" may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, in the multifunction display area MF1, the button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 191 (B4), as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), the dice symbol is the result of the mission achievement in the multifunction display area MF2. It is derived and displayed in a manner indicating a result of "3", and "3UP confirmed" is displayed indicating that it is a reward for completing the mission. Further, in the multifunctional display area MF2, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (B5), the step-up notice has been completed. The timing of the stop display of the right symbol and the timing of the end of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice may end. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after is completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 191 (B6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multifunctional display area MF2 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to a circular and red display mode. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the result of the mini game and the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the result of the mini game is erased, or the decoration. The result of the mini-game may be erased after the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 192 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIG. 192 (a) shows that the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (a), the "normal mode" is displayed in the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been done. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode t. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect has been started. At the timing shown in FIG. 192 (a), the step-up notice SU1 of the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern. Therefore, the decorative symbols are more difficult to see when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here, too, the step-up notice SU2 of the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol. Further, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the mini-game display area MN2, the mini-game is started, the "dice game" is displayed together with the character image SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini-game is started. That is, in this production example, a state in which a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed and the timing at which the mini-game is started may be the same, or the mini-game may be started after the step-up notice SU2 is started to be displayed. Then, the step-up notice SU2 may be started to be displayed after the mini-game is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (c), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the display area, the mini game display area MN2 is erased, and the mini game is produced. It is shown that the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, the display of "3" on the dice and the display of "Hold 3UP" are displayed in a greatly enlarged size, which is produced after the mini game is started. It is explained that when the button 136 is operated and the roll of "3" on the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is upgraded by three levels. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased during at least a part of the period during which the mini game is performed. Further, when the mini-game was not started, the step-up notice was scheduled to be displayed up to the step-up notice SU3 of the display mode of step 3, but in the middle of the process due to the enlarged display of the mini-game effect display. It is censored by. Even if the mini-game is started, the step-up notice may be displayed continuously without being interrupted. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap with the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may be displayed overlapping with the effect display of the mini-game, or the effect display of the mini-game may be displayed overlapping with the step-up notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (d), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. It is displayed in the mode of The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed and the timing at which the left symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. , The left symbol may be stopped and displayed, or the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 192 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (e), the enlarged dice symbol is the outcome of the mission. Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of. Further, at this time, the mini-game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this mini-game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with a roll of "3". In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, "3UP confirmed" is displayed to indicate that it is a reward for completing the mission. Further, in the mini-game display area MN2, the character image SBH of Sabohani is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. Here, the stop display of the right symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the stop display of the right symbol is displayed, or the mini. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result of the game is derived and displayed. The timing of the derivation display of the result of the mini game and the timing of redisplaying the mini game display area MN2 may be the same, or after the result of the mini game is derived and displayed, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed. It may be redisplayed, or the result of the mini-game may be derived and displayed after the mini-game display area MN2 is redisplayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192 (f), the third stop is performed, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, " It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decorative 2-Decoration 7-Decoration 7". At this time, the size of the decorative pattern returns from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position also returns to the default display position. At the end of the mini-game, the mini-game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the look-ahead notice from the default display mode. It has been changed to the display mode of. The change in the display mode of the hold icon and the final display of the decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the decorative symbol may be finalized after the display mode of the hold icon has changed, or the decorative symbol may be displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini-game display area MN2 and the timing of confirming the decorative symbol may be the same, or the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the mini-game display area MN2 is erased. , The mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. Further, the timing at which the mini-game display area MN2 is erased and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes may be the same, or the display mode of the hold icon changes after the mini-game display area MN2 is erased. Alternatively, the mini-game display area MN2 may be erased after the display mode of the hold icon is changed.

In the production example shown in FIG. 192, a dice game has been described as an example as a mini game, but the above-mentioned fortune-telling game can also be applied.

Further, as the above-mentioned mini-game, the dice game and the fortune-telling game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variable display is performed, but are configured to be executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be done.

Subsequently, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 200.

FIGS. 193 to 200 are diagrams for stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. Also in FIGS. 193 to 200, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure The holding lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIGS. 193 to 200, a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 193 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (a), a customer waiting demo display is displayed. This customer waiting demo display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and is an effect display for promoting the motivation of the player to play the game. Further, below the display area, a display of "display a menu with a push button" is performed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demo display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 in the standby state. Is operated to notify that the menu screen is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (b), as shown in FIG. 193 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the menu screen. On the menu screen, each item of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini game, and end is displayed side by side in a column, and below that, the character display of "select" is displayed along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, the characters "OK" are displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137, and OK. It is shown that the item indicated by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

Here, when the item of "member registration" is executed, the screen shifts to the member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for acquiring a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the operation server side. In the present embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set the original mode such as recording the game history and customizing the production. The player, for example, uses a mobile terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function to read the two-dimensional code and acquire the URL of the initial registration page. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the mobile terminal. The operation server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify the person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the mobile terminal, or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the operation server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the operation server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

Moreover, when the item of "two-dimensional code issuance" is executed, the two-dimensional code issuance screen is displayed. On the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. Issuance of this two-dimensional code is prepared on the assumption that the player will be selected when ending the game in the state where the original mode is set.
The two-dimensional code referred to here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2KB), and the size on the display is changed in 4-cell increments in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can be done. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. In addition, instead of the two-dimensional code, a one-dimensional bar code or an encrypted character string may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is overwhelmingly larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the character string increases, and humans cannot remember or write it down. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.
In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. In addition, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the store identification information, the information unique to the game console, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. may be included in the special drawing start port (230, 232). The information representing the result of the game, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, the number of winnings, etc. correspond to the history information. Further, the two-dimensional code also includes the URL of the update reception page prepared on the operation server.
The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured so that when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a warning screen is displayed when issuing the two-dimensional code, and the player is warned that the information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.
When the player takes a picture of the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the bar code reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, the personal identification information (ID) and the personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code are displayed in "http: // www. ~ / Jp" indicating the address of the update reception page prepared on the operation server. A URL with an argument representing history information is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the bar code reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information stored in the operation server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument part is displayed. It is updated to the history information included in the argument part.
In this embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the game table as it is, the history information stored in the game table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is deleted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be deleted based on the operation of the player after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not delete the history information, the game can return to the game reflecting the history information. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the item of "game history" is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the game this time, the mission achievement status, the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. Further, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special drawing start port (230, 232) may be displayed.

Also, when the "mini game" item is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini-game will be described later.

When the "End" item is executed, the display of the menu screen is terminated and the customer waiting demo display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 193 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL becomes "" as shown in FIG. 193 (d). When the "two-dimensional code issuance" is instructed and the lower button 137b is operated one more time, the cursor CSL instructs the "game history" and the lower button 137b is operated one more time as shown in FIG. 193 (e). Then, as shown in FIG. 193 (f), the cursor CSL indicates a "mini game".

Then, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (f), the mini game is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 193 (g). Specifically, the title "Today's fortune-telling" is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area, and the direction is on the right side of the display area. The character "select" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "enter" is displayed together with the button image 136a below it. The direction key of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL. It is informed that one of the four treasure chests (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) can be instructed and the treasure chest instructed by the cursor CSL can be opened by operating the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 193 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX1 on the upper left. In this mini-game, the player selects from four treasure chests and notifies the contents of the selected treasure chest. The contents of the treasure box are the result of fortune-telling fortune-telling that suggests fortune (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Kyou, etc.), and multiple types are available. Furthermore, in this production example, a word of advice is added along with the result of fortune-telling. In addition, the results of these fortune-telling and one-word advice have nothing to do with the result of the pass / fail judgment. In other words, it does not at least suggest whether or not the judgment is correct. In addition, which result is associated with each treasure box is randomly determined. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure chest is selected, the contents will change each time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (result of the mini game) change according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

After that, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (h), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX2 at the lower left as shown in FIG. 193 (i).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (i), as shown in FIG. 193 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX2 at the lower left is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right are reduced and displayed in the lower right part. As a result, it is notified that the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 193 (k), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure chest and the result of fortune-telling. "Kokichi" is displayed as "Kokichi", and "Moderately ..." is displayed as a word of advice, showing how to call attention not to be too absorbed in the game. That is, in this production example, "Kokichi" and the auntie's character BA are associated with each other, and it may be understood that the result of the fortune-telling is "Kokichi" by looking at the auntie's character BA.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (l), the character display "This is another result" is displayed, and it is foretold that the contents of the treasure box that has not been opened will be notified. The content of the character display shown in FIG. 193 (l) differs depending on the character that appears. For example, when the princess character HM3, which will be described later, appears, a character display such as "Other results are this" is displayed. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 193 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the image BCH of the face of the chief appears from the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right. An image of a panda's face PND is shown to appear. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the image BCH of the Bancho's face is a character corresponding to Nakayoshi, and the image PND of the panda's face is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the fortune-telling result and the character can be appropriately set, and the combination of the fortune-telling result and the character may be changed each time the mini-game is played.

As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 193 (k1), the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Daikichi" "Is displayed, and as a word of advice," I have a feeling of a big catch today "is displayed to give a feeling of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 193 (k2), the image BCH of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box, and "Nakayoshi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling fortune-telling. "Is displayed, giving a sense of expectation that there may be times when you should sit down and play for a while.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 193 (k3), an image PND of the panda's face appears from inside the treasure box, and as a result of fortune-telling fortune-telling, "bad" is displayed, and as a word of advice, "gauu" and "danger of immersing" "Is displayed, and there is also a state that calls attention not to be too absorbed in the game.

Further, for example, a result of a mini game that can appear depending on the setting contents by the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. For example, the result of appearing by the DIP switch may be a big hit. If a setting is made to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to be, as shown in Fig. 193 (k4), a word of advice "Today is a premonition of a big catch" is displayed and "Today is You may change the display to "It's easy to get a premiere notice." That is, there may be a case where the explanation of the effect related to the result of the hit / miss judgment, such as the suggestion of the appearance rate of the notice, and the result not related to the result of the hit / miss judgment is displayed. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think that he / she is indirectly involved in the influence of the hit / miss judgment. Even if the appearance rate of the notice has not been changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 193 (k4) may be displayed. In this way, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a word of advice, may be changed.

Further, in this production example, a tutorial display such as a game explanation or an explanation of a model character may be displayed instead of a word of advice.

FIG. 194 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 194 (A1) to 194 (A6) are effects following FIG. 193 (f), and show an example of another mini-game effect. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 193 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A1) has "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" at the upper part of the display area. The title is displayed, and a mini-game with the mission of selecting the treasure chest inside "Daikichi" is started. It should be noted that FIGS. 194 (A1) to 194 (A4) are the same as those of FIGS. 193 (g) to (j) except that the titles are displayed differently, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194 (A5) shows how the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is opened. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A5), the treasure chest at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the princess character HM3 appears from the treasure chest and as a result of fortune-telling. "Daikichi" is displayed. Since the mission of the mini game was completed by displaying "Daikichi", the message "Mission achieved" to that effect is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (A6), instead of the display of "mission achievement", a message "premonition of a great condition today" is displayed as a word of advice, and the player gets a ball. I try to give a sense of expectation. It can be said that this one-word advice is also a display that is not related to the result of the pass / fail judgment.

FIGS. 194 (B1) to 194 (B6) are also the effects following FIG. 193 (f), and show how the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 194 (B1) has the same display as that of FIG. 194 (A1).

Then, when the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (B2), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure box BX3 on the upper right as shown in FIG. 194 (B3).

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 194 (B3), as shown in FIG. 194 (B4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is surrounded by the cursor CSL. The treasure chest BX1 on the upper left, the treasure chest BX2 on the lower left, and the treasure chest BX4 on the lower right are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. As a result, it is notified that the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right has been determined as the treasure chest to be opened.

After that, as shown in FIG. 194 (B5), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the treasure chest BX3 on the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure chest and the result of fortune-telling. "Kokichi" is displayed as. Since the mission of the mini-game was not completed because "Daikichi" was not displayed, "Not achieved ..." is displayed to that effect.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (B6), instead of the display of "not achieved ...", a message of "moderately ..." is displayed as a word of advice, and the game is played. It is shown to call attention not to be too absorbed.

FIG. 195 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (a), the above-mentioned customer waiting demo display is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (b), as shown in FIG. 195 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the menu screen. On the menu screen shown in FIG. 195 (c), each item of member registration, customization, mini game, personal data clear, and end is displayed side by side in a column, and below that, "selection" is performed together with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. The character display of "OK" is performed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item instructed by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

Here, when the "customize" item is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of the customizable settings will be described later.

Further, when the item "Clear personal data" is executed, the pachinko machine 100 deletes the result of this game, the mission achievement status, the information indicating the cumulative value of the original mode points, and the like. At this time, in order to prevent the data from being cleared by mistake, the warning screen may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (c), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "member registration", the cursor CSL is shown in FIG. 195 (d). Instructs "customization". Then, when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the screen shifts to the customize menu screen as shown in FIG. 97 (e).

On the customize menu screen, various settings such as auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, premier notice appearance rate setting, and tutorial display on / off are displayed in columns, and below that, the direction. The character "selection" is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and the character "OK" is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q. The upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL in the vertical direction and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

Here, the "auto button mode" is an effect mode in which each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, the timing of the button operation is automatically determined, and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous striking operation effect requesting a continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at appropriate timing intervals (for example, every 200 ms). In this production example, when the "auto button mode" is set to on, the buttons are set to full auto, which is automatically operated without operating the buttons. It may be possible to set to long-press auto, in which the button is automatically operated by long-pressing. Here, the long-press auto means that in an effect (including a mini game) that requires the operation of a plurality of operation means, when the long-press operation is performed by the operation means, the operation is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is a pseudo operation that is supposed to be done. In this case, when the operating means is operated for long pressing, it is treated as if the first manual operation has been performed. For example, when the above-mentioned continuous striking operation effect is executed, by pressing and holding the effect button 136, it is controlled to perform a pseudo continuous striking operation. Further, the fully automatic is an operation in which the operation means is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation means even when the operation means is not operated.

Further, the "eco mode" limits the driving of one or more driving devices, for example, turning off various lamps 418 for the purpose of suppressing power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Alternatively, it is a mode to stop. In the present embodiment, when the eco-mode start condition is satisfied after the eco-mode is turned on, the various lamps 418 are turned off, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced, and the like. The device to be driven is restricted or stopped, and can be appropriately set.

In addition, the "premier notice appearance rate" indicates the appearance rate of the notice that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed by appearing, and when it is set to "normal", the first A lottery for the appearance of the premier notice is performed using the normal probability table where the premier notice appears with a probability, and when it is set to "high", the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first probability. A high-probability table is used to control the appearance of the premier notice.

Further, when "Tutorial" is set to off, the above-mentioned tutorial display is controlled so as not to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 195 (f), when the left button 137c is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates the “auto button mode”, it is “off” as shown in FIG. 195 (g). The setting of "auto button mode" that was instructing is changed to "on".

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once while the "auto button mode" setting is "on", the "auto button mode" setting is "on". Is confirmed to. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once, the screen shifts to the menu screen as shown in FIG. 97 (h). If the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated while the "auto button mode" setting is set to "on", the result of the "auto button mode" setting is not reflected. You may move to the menu screen, or you may move to the menu screen after reflecting (confirming) the result of the "auto button mode" setting.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (h), when the lower button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL is instructing "customize", the cursor CSL becomes "" as shown in FIG. 195 (i). Instruct "mini game".

Then, as shown in FIG. 195 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL is instructing the “mini game”, the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 97 (j). To. Specifically, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the character of the bancho is displayed, and the name of the mini game "bancho awakening game" is displayed, and below that, the mission "break clothes by repeatedly hitting a button" is displayed. Is displayed. That is, in this mini-game, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 and the mission is achieved on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, the clothes of the bancho are broken. Display to notify the achievement of the mission.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT together with the character of the bancho, and the characters "START" are displayed above the button image 136a. , It is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this production example, as described above, the "auto button mode" setting is set to "on" and set to full auto, but in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective and the production button. It is configured so that 136 automatic operations are not performed. In addition, when the setting of "auto button mode" is set to "on" and is set to long press auto, even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, the long press auto setting is not effective and the first Only the amount of one manual operation is valid, and the effect button 136 is not automatically operated after that. In this production example, the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. Also, for example, as in this production example, it is performed during execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display. The rate of change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the speed of change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. The rate of change of the display mode of is the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display is more than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of the default display mode). The number of (for example, four types of default display mode, vibrating display mode, rotating display mode, vibrating and rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. , The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demo display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display. May be the same.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 195 (l) to 195 (n), when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 even once, as shown in FIG. 195 (o), the character of the chief character The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission to break the clothes of the Bancho character has not been accomplished. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (o) displays the "bancho awakening game" and "end" to notify that the mission has ended.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 195 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

In this production example, the configuration may be such that the player can select the execution of the mini game. For example, it is set whether or not the mini game can be executed on the customized menu screen transitioned from the menu screen. It may be possible to select the type of mini-game that can be executed.

In addition, it may be configured so that a customized effect can be easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect is such that an effect having an extremely low appearance rate is normally executed, the willingness to participate in the mini game May be improved.

FIGS. 196 and 197 are diagrams stepwise showing another example of the production of a mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

FIGS. 196 (A1) to 196 (A6) are effects following FIG. 195 (i), and show that the mission has been achieved as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Since FIGS. 196 (A1) to 196 (A2) are the same as those of FIGS. 195 (j) to 195 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A2), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIGS. 196 (A3) to 196 (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations increases, and as the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches. , As shown in FIG. 196 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed and the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A6) is worn by the character of the chief. It is shown that the clothes are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIGS. 196 (B1) to 196 (B6) are effects following FIG. 195 (i), and show an example in which long-press auto is enabled in a mini-game, and the effect button 136 by long-press auto is shown. It is shown that the mission was achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hitting operation. Note that FIGS. 196 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those of FIGS. 195 (j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (B2), the player presses and holds the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous striking operation has not yet started. In the present embodiment, when long-press auto is enabled, a single pressing operation is desired, but in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of pseudo repeated hits, long-pressing the effect button 136 Is configured so that a pseudo continuous striking operation is started when a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) has elapsed from the start of. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is smaller than that of the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 196 (A3), and the effect image of the star is also shown in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (A3). It is less than the display. That is, the way in which the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed may differ depending on whether the player performs a normal continuous striking operation or a pseudo continuous striking operation by long press auto. ..

When a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and the pseudo continuous striking operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 196 (B4) to (B5), the operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of star effect images displayed also increases, and as the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches, a large-sized star effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 196 (B5). After that, a pseudo continuous striking operation is further performed by the effect button 136, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the time the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 196 (B6) is the chief. It is shown that the clothes worn by the character are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIGS. 197 (C1) to 197 (C7) are effects following FIG. 195 (i), and show an example in which long-press auto is disabled in a mini-game. It is shown that no operation was performed and as a result the mission was not completed. Note that FIGS. 196 (B1) to (B2) are the same as those of FIGS. 195 (j) to (k), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C2), the player presses and holds the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 197 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, the pseudo continuous striking operation is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 197 (C4), since the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, not only the effect image of the star does not increase, but also a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after the last operation of the effect button 136. ) Elapses, the number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 197 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 197 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 197 (C7), the display mode of the Bancho character does not change, and the mission of breaking the clothes of the Bancho character is made. It is shown that it was not achieved. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 197 (C7) displays the "bancho awakening game" and "end" to notify that the mission has ended.

FIG. 198 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 198, a fully automatic (or long-pressed auto) function is effective for an effect (including a mini game) that requires one operation or multiple operations of one button, but the operation key unit 137. As for the effects (including mini games) that require selection using, an example is shown in which the full auto (or long press auto) function is disabled.

FIGS. 198 (A1) to 198 (A6) show an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini-game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, which is an effect following FIG. 195 (i). It is shown that the mission has been achieved as a result of the pseudo repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136. Since FIGS. 198 (A1) to 198 (A2) are the same as those of FIGS. 195 (j) to 195 (k), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (A2), the full auto function is activated and the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 198 (A3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of the number of stars corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136. As shown in FIGS. 198 (A3) to 198 (A5), the number of star effect images displayed increases as the number of operations by pseudo operations increases, and when the number of operations to achieve the mission approaches. , As shown in FIG. 198 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations for which the mission is achieved is reached by the elapse of the operation acceptance period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (A6) , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed to inform that the mission has been completed.

FIG. 198 (B1) is a production following FIG. 193 (f), and shows an production example of another mini game. That is, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1) displays the title "Today's fortune-telling-draw Daikichi-" at the upper part of the display area, and the title of "Daikichi" is displayed. A mini-game with the mission of selecting the treasure chest inside is started. In this mini-game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and the effect button 136 is operated to determine the treasure box to be opened. The mini-game is performed by operating a plurality of buttons. Because this is done, the fully automatic function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

On the other hand, the full auto may be made to function even in such a mini game. For example, as shown in FIG. 198 (B1'), the full auto function immediately after the mini game starts, and the effect button 136 Is operated in a pseudo manner, and as shown in FIG. 198 (B2'), the treasure chest on the upper left is automatically selected. That is, in a mini-game in which a treasure box is selected with each button of the operation key unit 137 and then a treasure box to be opened is determined with the effect button 136, when the full auto function is activated, the treasure box first instructed by the cursor CSL. Is arbitrarily decided as a treasure box to be opened, and the player's operation intention may not be reflected at all.

In the present embodiment, a mini-game for deriving a result that is not related to the result of the hit / fail judgment is performed in the standby state. However, for example, in an effect that is started at a predetermined time by RTC (Real Time Clock) (standby state). And at least one of the symbol variation displays), it may be executed in the mini-game to be executed, or it may be executed at any time regardless of the game state for the purpose of killing the player's time. ..

199 and 200 are diagrams stepwise showing another example of the production of the mini-game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, the appearance of the effect movable body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, it is shown that the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game. The mini-game may or may not be started during the execution of the jackpot game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, indicating that a big hit has been achieved. Further, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2, and the fourth special figure 2 The hold icon h24 is displayed in the default display mode. In this production example, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the display of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. ..

FIG. 199 (b) shows how the jackpot game is started and the game shifts to the first round. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Big hit start" to notify that the big hit game has started, and at the upper right of the display area, it is the first round of the big hit game. "1R" is also displayed, and "0GET" is also displayed, which indicates the current number of prize balls won in this big hit. In addition, the total number of prize balls won from the first big hit to the end of the consecutive villa may be displayed. In addition, as for the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls to the variable winning opening 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10), and the winning (over winning) is made just before the variable winning opening 234 is closed. The number of prize balls based on the game balls may or may not be included. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (b), a child panda character may appear to perform a comical operation to entertain the player. When the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, right-handed notification for instructing right-handed may be performed.

FIG. 199 (c) shows how the fifth round of the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "5R" indicating that it is the fifth round of the jackpot game and "735GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls are displayed in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (c) displays that "the mini game will start in the next round", and the mini game will start in the next round (sixth round). I have foretold that.

FIG. 199 (d) shows how the sixth round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "6R" indicating that it is the sixth round of the big hit game and "750 GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning prize balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (d) displays that "the mini game is about to start", and foretells that the mini game will start from now on.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and at the same time, a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "If a roll is obtained, the character moves up" are displayed, and the mini game is played. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is. If the effect movable body 224 operates during the execution of the jackpot game, it is guaranteed that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. That is, the operation of the effect movable body 224 during the big hit game can be said to be an example of the look-ahead notice.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and "press" is displayed above the button image 136a. Character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (g), as shown in FIG. 199 (h), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "3". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission was not completed. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (g) is "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 199 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of 208 indicates "825 GET".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (i), the display indicating the outcome of "3" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is not achieved. "Sorry" is displayed to notify. Therefore, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and the notification of whether or not the hold consecutive villa is performed is not performed. In this production example, if the result of pre-reading is a reserved consecutive villa, the mission may be achieved and the production movable body 224 may be operated in the mini game, or the mission is not achieved and the production is performed. The movable body 224 may not operate. In addition, the effect movable body 224 may or may not operate when the mission is achieved. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 199 (i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display is based on.

After that, when the big hit game is completed, as shown in FIG. 199 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "big hit end" to notify the player that the big hit game is finished. Further, in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, "16R" indicating that it is the 16th round and "2400 GET" indicating that the number of winning prize balls is 2400 are displayed. There is.

In the mini-game of this production example, the production button 136 is operated once. For example, when the "bancho awakening game" shown in FIG. 97 is started and the mission is achieved, a privilege is given. (For example, the operation notice of the effect movable body 224 may be given).

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a state in which a mission is achieved in a mini-game performed during execution of a jackpot game will be described. Note that FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (d) are the same as those in FIGS. 199 (a) to 199 (d), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (e) shows that the mini game has started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and at the same time, a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "If a roll is obtained, the character moves up" are displayed, and the mini game is played. It is explained that when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed, it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Here, the character of the Bancho is displayed in a torn manner, suggesting that the mission is likely to be accomplished. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "765 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 51 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed, and "press" is displayed above the button image 136a. Character display is performed, and it is shown that the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. In this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a rotating and vibrating manner, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be accomplished. Further, the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "780 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 52 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (g), as shown in FIG. 200 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the dice symbol is "1". The stop display is shown in the manner shown, indicating that the mission has been completed. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (g) is "810 GET", and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 200 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of 208 indicates "825 GET".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (i), the display indicating the outcome of "1" derived as a result of the mini game is enlarged and displayed, and the mission of the mini game is notified. "I did it" is displayed. In addition, "Attention to the arm" is displayed below the display, and it is foretold that the effect movable body 224 may operate. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (i) is "840 GET", and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. The display is based on.

FIG. 200 (j) shows how the seventh round has started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "7R" indicating the seventh round of the jackpot game and "900GET" indicating the number of winning prize balls in the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that 60 game balls have won a prize in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit started.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 200 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect images of a large number of stars, and the display is performed as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates "915 GET", and the display is performed based on the winning of 61 game balls to the variable winning opening 234. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 200 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "holding consecutive villas confirmed", and notifies that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of "holding consecutive villa confirmation" in FIG. 200 (l).

In this production example, it may be notified that the pending consecutive villa is confirmed by the achievement of the mission.

In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of the plurality of types of mini-games described above can be executed in combination.

In the embodiments described so far, the buttons (operating means) used in the mission in the main production and the buttons (operating means) used in the mission in the mini game may be different.

Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed by using another display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other effect means (for example, movable means such as effect movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc. Other devices) may be used for notification.

Further, the above-mentioned mini-game may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, or may be executed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, as in the mini-game described above, it is preferable that the result is always notified when the mini-game is started, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the symbol fluctuation display in which the number of pending fluctuation displays of the special figure is 4, the fluctuation time may generally be short, and in such a case, the result is pretended to be a mini game started. It may be interrupted without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the production of the game.

Further, the above-mentioned mini-game may be configured to be interrupted or canceled when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, a sudden jackpot (for example, a combination of jackpot decorative symbols is displayed without going through a reach effect). A mini-game when an error such as a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs, when an error such as a variable display pattern is generated, an RTC effect is started, the effect display being executed is switched to a display such as a wipe, etc. May be interrupted. For example, if a jackpot suddenly occurs during the execution of a mini-game and the mini-game is interrupted, the jackpot suddenly becomes a jackpot while looking forward to the result of the mini-game, and the player is surprised and delighted. It may be possible to give. If the mini-game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to enjoy the link on the effect of the RTC effect with another game console.

Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may have a configuration in which the position and size change depending on the game state, the effect mode, and the stage.

Further, as the operation mode required in the above-mentioned mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as a single operation, a continuous hit operation, a long press operation, and a timing operation can be adopted. As a result, the result of the mini-game may be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

Further, when the mini-game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini-game may be started before reaching the reach. When it comes to reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effect of the symbol variation display. Therefore, by starting the mini game before reach, it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect before reach.

Further, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the above-mentioned mini-game is a notice that a notice will be given, but the reward for accomplishing the mission in the mini-game may be a notice or a look-ahead notice. For example, the change notice or the look-ahead notice may be given as a result of the mini-game played during the execution of the symbol change display, and the look-ahead notice may be given as a result of the mini-game played during the execution of the jackpot game.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game consoles that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 201 to 285. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 201 to 285 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 201 to 285, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. In the description using FIG. 285, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 2001 to 285 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 201. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 as external structures.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 to serve as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, the effect button 136 as an example of the operation means that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 203) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136. The built-in effect button lamp 138 that emits the effect button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the player to the card unit. It is provided with a return operation button 142 for instructing the return of the balance of the player, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED, and can emit light in multiple colors. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means. Further, an operation key unit 137 as an example of the operation means is also provided. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 may be referred to as a first operating means, and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a second operating means. The specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described later. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by the game ball is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 202 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 203 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 for accommodating the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 for processing, and the second sub for performing control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that configures a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 including 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launching a game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 203 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment, they are composed of 7-segment LEDs. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and in this embodiment, the special figure changing game is performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high probability state. Turns on when changing to the probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in this embodiment, only one is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure start port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. The special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 225, and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 225, and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate a human right arm and a forearm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced to a position where it retracts above the decorative symbol display device 208 (evacuation position) and a position where it overlaps on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advance position).

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a translucent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 204. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 is a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two in this circuit). (It is assumed that a counter is built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame opening sensor. Sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including the lower plate full tank sensor and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device. For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a drive circuit for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210. Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal figure holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 are connected.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 commands the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600, etc. However, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, or the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various production data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 of the above is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, in the basic circuit 402, the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the effect button 136) are controlled. The drive circuit 420, the drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, the shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and various buttons included in the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 (details are as follows. It is stored in the ROM 406 based on the operation unit sensor 426 that detects the pressing of (described later), the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 and the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the signal from the CPU 404. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that reads out image data and the like, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400, and this voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment) to the basic circuit 402.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit; not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 404 uses this start signal. When the start signal is input from the output circuit, the game control is started (the first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current positions of the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and an effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal from the player to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table for controlling the game board frame lamp 542. A frame lamp drive circuit 540, a serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

FIG. 3A shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" that repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". Do. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, or after the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. In the figure (a), 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display, and the white part in the figure is turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the location of the segment where the black part is lit is shown.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R big hit symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "Special Figure A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 205 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in each symbol display area of area 208c. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot correspond to the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are arranged. 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability change, the sudden normal 2R jackpot of "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure I" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in the figure (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 205 (c) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the sphere has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of normal map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal-figure variable game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the normal-figure variable game. Also in this figure (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 206 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 207. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 204 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for clocking, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time to change / stop the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for timing a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception processing, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize in the first special figure starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232, the normal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning opening 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318. It is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number value generation circuit 318. It is acquired as a random number value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When a ball is won in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

In step S219, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that composes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is the outlier symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 205 (c)) and the off symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 205 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening / closing of the blade, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this flag is off, even in the normal map state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random number value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 205 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure. Special figure F when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 so as to be in the special figure I when the first missed flag is on and in the special figure I when the second missed flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) A definite display of any one of the I) and the second outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 While setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 234a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set to 100 times, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special map fluctuation game are shorter in the normal map high probability state than in the normal map low probability state. Further, in the high probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many games will be played in the second special drawing starting port 232 until the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases when the ball enters and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step S233, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has won a prize, and whether or not a variable winning port 234 has won a prize. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main control unit main process.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
The processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 208. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data Update process.

In step S311, when the presses of the various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the presses of the various buttons.

In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S317, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S303.

In step S323, the mission achievement determination process (details will be described later) is performed, and in step S325, the original mode control process (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process is terminated.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

Further, in step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 408, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 209. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

When the pachinko machine 100 is powered on, the initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516 and the process returns to step S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. 210. Here, FIG. 210 (a) is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 201, and FIG. 210 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation key unit 137.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a), the operation key unit 137 includes six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, and a clear button 137f. There is. In the following description, in order to simplify the description, among the components of the operation key unit 137, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, and the OK button 137e are shown in FIG. 210 ( It may be expressed in the manner shown in b).

The pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment has a long-press auto-continuous striking function in which a pseudo-continuous striking operation is performed by long-pressing each of the effects button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Here, the long-press operation is an operation mode in which the state in which the effect button 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or more. Yes, the continuous striking operation is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137. In the present embodiment, in the state where the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the continuous striking operation at regular intervals (for example, 100 ms intervals) while the effect button 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are continuously pressed. Is configured to be simulated. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137, the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 are used. In order to properly perform the single-shot operation, the long-press auto-continuous striking function is provided until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses from the start of the pressing operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. It is configured so that a pseudo repeated hit operation is not started.

Subsequently, a specific production example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a display example on the menu screen, and FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211. The figure below shows how the screens transition in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIGS. 211 and 212 show, for example, how various settings are made on the menu screen that can be executed in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

The menu screen in the present embodiment allows the player to change the settings. In addition to this menu screen, for example, a setting menu screen for the game store side is displayed, whereby the game store is displayed. It may be configured so that various settings can be changed by the side, and for example, it may be configured so that the master volume, the store name, and the like can be input. Further, in the slot machine, for example, the setting change for determining the probability of BB, RB, etc. may be made on the menu screen.

Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen can be displayed in the standby state, but for example, the menu screen cannot be displayed in the electric support state (probability change, time reduction). May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are both stopped and displayed in the off-display mode, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol t2 is also stopped and displayed with a display result that is out of alignment corresponding to the display results of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, respectively. Although not shown, the number of pending fluctuation displays in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 211 (a), the effect display of the standby state is performed.

In addition, at the bottom of the display screen, the characters "menu screen display with" are displayed together with the icon representing the effect button 136, and it is notified that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the effect button 136. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), when the effect button 136 is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the menu screen (“setting screen” as shown in FIG. 211 (b). "In some cases.) Is displayed. Specifically, on the menu screen, "volume and light intensity adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light intensity, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by entering a password, and the appearance frequency of effects such as notices. Four menus, "Production customization" for setting and "Operation assistance setting" for setting the long-press auto continuous hit function and the auto button function, which will be described later, are displayed in a selectable manner. At the bottom of these menus, the characters "Select with" are displayed along with the icons of the up button 137a and the down button 137b, and on the right side, the characters "Enter with" are displayed together with the icon of the OK button 137e. Further, on the right side, the characters "return with" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, the cursor CL is moved and the OK button 137e is operated. Notifies that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. Further, in FIG. 211 (b), it is also notified that when the effect button 136 is operated, the display returns to the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 211 (a).

In the present embodiment, in the volume light amount adjustment, the volume and the light amount can be set from 11 steps of 0 to 10, for example. The volume and the amount of light are set to default values when the power is turned on, and the default values are set to, for example, "5". Needless to say, the default value can be set as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the player can change the setting of the volume and the amount of light by the setting operation on the menu screen, but the player may not be able to change the setting of at least one of the volume and the amount of light. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the volume and light amount settings can be changed only on the setting screen on the menu screen, but for example, the volume and light amount settings can be changed without going through the setting screen. Often, for example, during the variable display of the decorative symbol or immediately after the stop display of the decorative symbol, the volume and light intensity settings can be changed by operating the operation key unit 137 without displaying the setting screen. Good.

In the present embodiment, on the menu screen, the cursor CL can be moved one by one for each operation of the up button 137a or the down button 137b, and on the menu screen, the long press auto repeated hit function described later is invalid. Therefore, it is not possible to move the cursor CL by two or more by pressing and holding it. The cursor CL may be moved by 2 or more when the up button 137a or the down button 137b is pressed and held on the menu screen.

In addition to the effect button 136, any one of the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 or a specific button (for example, OK button 137e) is pressed when the effect display in the standby state is performed. The menu screen may be displayed even in such a case. Further, when the menu screen is displayed, in addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the clear button 137f is pressed, the menu screen may return to the standby state effect display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, when the player presses the lower button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 211 (d), a display indicating that "member registration" is selected by the cursor CL is performed.

After that, when the lower button 137b is pressed once more by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates that "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL as shown in FIG. 211 (e). The display is done. That is, in this effect example, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, the menu of "effect customization" operates the lower button 137b twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It is a display that can be selected by. In other words, in the present embodiment, the long press auto repeated hit function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, when "Volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, the menu of "Production customization" is displayed so that it is not selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It can be said that there is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (for example, twice) in the display in which "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL (an example of the second display). It is a display that may be displayed according to (operated in the first operation mode), and it means that the lower button 137b (up button 137a) is pressed and held (operated in the second operation mode). , It can be said that the display in which "Production customization" is selected by the cursor CL does not start.

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL is the display when one of the plurality of options is selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL is the display displayed on the menu screen (setting screen).

Further, in the present embodiment, the menu screen is a screen including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, and a display in which "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL (the first display). When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated multiple times (operated in the first operation mode) when (an example of the third display) is displayed, "Production customization" is selected by the cursor CL. The display (an example of the second display) may start, and when the display (an example of the third display) in which "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, When the lower button 137b (up button 137a) is pressed and held (operated in the second operation mode), the display in which "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL (an example of the second display) is displayed. It can also be said that it will not start.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which "Production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed when the display in which "Volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, and the lower button 137b (up button) is displayed. It can also be said that the display is started when the operation is performed N times (N ≧ 2) according to 137a).

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in which "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL is a display that is not started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player in the state where "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL in the decorative symbol display device 208, On the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 211 (f) is displayed. On the production customization setting screen, "normal mode" that sets the appearance frequency of effects such as notices to the default setting, only the big hit confirmation notice that it is confirmed that it will be a big hit by appearing without giving false big hit notice notification In "One-shot notification mode" and "Normal mode", you can select from three menus, "Premier up mode", which is set to improve the appearance frequency of the premier notice of big hit confirmation, which has a low appearance frequency. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (g), when the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL and the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the figure. As shown in 211 (h), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "It is a normal mode" and "You can see the usual production" are displayed to notify that the normal mode has been set, and the appearance of a production such as a notice appears. The frequency is set to the default.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL. In the above, even if the OK button 137e is pressed and held by the player, the "normal mode" is not set, and the OK button 137e is operated again after the display screen is changed to the effect customization setting screen. "Normal mode" is set.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 211 (f), when the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL and the lower button 137b is pressed twice, as shown in FIG. 211 (g1). , "Premier up mode" is displayed indicating that the cursor CL is selected. In the present embodiment, as described above, the long-press auto-continuous hit function is disabled on the menu screen, so that when the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL, the "premier up mode" menu is displayed. It is a display that can be selected by operating the lower button 137b twice, in other words, it can be said that the display is not selected unless the lower button 137b is operated twice. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that the "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL can be said to be an example of the second display, and the "normal mode" is selected by the cursor CL. The display indicating the above can be said to be an example of the third display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (g1), when the "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL and the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the display device 208. As shown in FIG. 211 (h1), along with the character of Princess Chibi, "You can see a lot of premier productions" is displayed to notify that the premier up mode has been set, and the frequency of appearance of the premier notice is increased. Is set to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 211 (e), when "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL and the lower button 137b is pressed once more, it is shown in FIG. 212 (e2). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that the "operation assistance setting" is selected by the cursor CL. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, the menu of "operation assistance setting" is displayed. It can be said that the display can be selected by operating the lower button 137b three times, in other words, the display cannot be selected unless the lower button 137b is operated three times. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that the "operation assistance setting" is selected by the cursor CL can be said to be an example of the second display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 212 (e2), when the "operation assistance setting" is selected by the cursor CL and the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the display device 208. The operation assistance setting screen as shown in FIG. 212 (f2) is displayed. On the operation assistance setting screen, the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is not assisted by the repeated hitting operation of "no assistance", and the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is pressed and held. By doing so, even if the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is not operated during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the "long press auto continuous hit", the effect button 136, etc. Three menus of "auto button" that simulates single-shot operation, long-press operation, and repeated hit operation are displayed so as to be selectable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 212 (f2), when "no assistance" is selected by the cursor CL and the lower button 137b is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the figure. As shown in 212 (g2), a display indicating that "long press auto continuous hit" is selected by the cursor CL is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (h2), when the OK button 137e is pressed once by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows, as shown in FIG. 212 (i2), "a continuous hit function when pressed for a long time. Will be activated "to notify that the long-press auto-continuous hit function has been enabled, and the long-press auto-continuous hit function will be enabled. In the present embodiment, on condition that the long-press auto continuous striking function is set to be effective in this way, the continuous striking assist function by long-pressing the effect button 136 or each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is performed. Is configured to be activated. In the embodiment described in this specification, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may not be set so that the long-press auto-continuous striking function is always effective.

In the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured to disable the long-press auto-continuous hit function, but the menu screen may be configured to enable the long-press auto-continuous hit function, for example, the upper button. When the 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed, the cursor CL may be moved according to the pseudo continuous striking operation. At this time, the interval of the pseudo repeated hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which it is easy to recognize that the menu to be selected by the player has been changed. Further, in this case, if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, or the OK button 137e is continuously pressed before the setting screen is switched, for example, the transition from the menu screen to the effect customization setting screen, the setting screen is displayed. After switching, the pseudo repeated hitting operation is not performed, and after the setting screen is switched, the pseudo repeated hitting operation is performed again by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b or the OK button 137e again. You may. Further, it is possible that the pseudo continuous hitting operation by the long press operation is not performed at least one of the time when the cursor CL is moved and the time when the setting screen is changed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the result set on the menu screen may affect the effect of the long-pressed automatic continuous hitting described later. For example, the difficulty level of the effect of performing the continuous hit operation can be set on the menu screen, and when the difficulty level is high, it is easier to perform the effect that the long press auto continuous hit function is more successful than the continuous hit operation. Can be done. In addition, the volume and the amount of light set on the volume light amount setting screen are reflected in the effect of the long press auto repeated hitting functioning.

FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous production. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 213 shows how the effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed in the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the variable display of the special symbol, but the left symbol display area 208a, middle, is compared with the variable display of the special symbol for one time. After temporarily stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol in all of the symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed once or multiple times to display the variable display of all the decorative symbols again. Point to. That is, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo-variation that makes it appear that the decorative symbol is fluctuating a plurality of times for one variation display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started in the first special symbol display device 212, and correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, Variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 that is variably displayed according to the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed in such a manner that the colors represented in the circles change to a plurality of types in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. There is. In addition, in FIG. 213 and below, the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the stopped-displayed symbol can be recognized for convenience of explanation, but in reality, the stop display is displayed. The symbol is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 may be displayed in a manner recognizable by the player.

Further, at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold display area is provided which represents the number of holds of special figure 1 by the number of icons. In this hold display area, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special figure 1 and the second special figure 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold of the special figure 1 are displayed. The h12, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 corresponding to the third hold of the special figure 1, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponding to the fourth hold of the special figure 1 are displayed. Has been done. In FIG. 213 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is one, one hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 is set. Since is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, correspondingly, among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 Only is displayed in the default display mode (default hold icon), and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in the non-hold mode (for example, the hold icon in the grayed out mode). In addition, instead of the display in the non-holding mode, the hold icon may be hidden.

Further, a variable icon display area 284 for displaying the variable icon is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The variable icon comprises, for example, a display mode associated with the hold display of the special figure, and is displayed in the same display mode as the hold display. The variable icon can, for example, give a notice (the variable notice) about the display result of the variable display depending on the display mode. The variation icon is erased after the variation display is started. The deletion timing of the variation icon is not limited to this, and may be deleted when the variation display ends, for example.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (b), the first stop is performed, and the “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a swinging manner. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, variable display of decorative symbols continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (c), the second stop is performed, and the “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a swinging manner. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (d), the third stop is performed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol GG including the character display of “continuation” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in the manner of shaking fluctuation. When the pseudo-ream symbol GG is stopped and displayed, the player can be expected to expect whether or not the pseudo-ream occurs.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 213 (e), the characters "PUSH" are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the press of the effect button 136, and the rest of the acceptance period for pressing the effect button. The remaining time meter MT indicating the time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed superimposed on the pseudo-continuous pattern GG. As a result, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 can be accepted.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (f), as shown in FIG. 213 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the operation of the effect button 136. When the production is successful, the production display is performed to the effect that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Specifically, a display of "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed is displayed above the decorative symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 213 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are changed again. The first pseudo-continuous production is started. That is, the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. (B) to (c), as shown in FIG. 213 (i), The third stop is performed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed in the mode of shaking fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. When the pseudo-ream symbol GG is stopped and displayed, the player can be expected to expect whether or not the second pseudo-ream will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as shown in FIG. The meter MT is also displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 can be accepted.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 213 (k), as shown in FIG. 213 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the result of the operation of the effect button 136. When the production is successful, the production display is performed to the effect that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. Specifically, a display of "x3" indicating that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed is displayed above the decorative symbol. After that, as shown in FIG. 213 (m), the second pseudo-continuous production is started.

In the above-mentioned production example, the effect button image BT is displayed each time an effect (sometimes referred to as a pseudo-ream generation effect) for inciting whether or not to generate a pseudo-ream is executed, and the pseudo-ream generation effect is performed a plurality of times. Since it is executed, the effect button image BT is also displayed multiple times, but the effect button image BT displayed at one time is one, and the effect button image BT is displayed intermittently every time a pseudo continuous effect occurs. Indicates that it will be done.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, an example in which the production button 136 is pressed and the production is successful is shown, but when the pseudo continuous production is not started, for example, as a result of the operation of the production button 136, the production has failed. It is also possible to execute the effect display of and stop the display by combining the decorative symbols that are out of alignment. Further, after executing the effect display indicating that the effect has failed, the stop display may be performed by combining the decorative symbols of the big hit.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing the long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the multiple-time effect is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. It may be configured by the above combination. Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be performed sequentially according to the continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off even if the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Further, the effect button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, emitting in blue) different from the light emitting mode (for example, emitting light in red) in the state where the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the one-time pressing operation (single-shot operation) by the effect button 136 is an example of the first operation mode. Further, the long press operation of the effect button 136 for a predetermined time or longer is an example of the second operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period than the first operation mode.

Then, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the effect display by the pseudo-ream executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated from the second time onward is the first operation. The first effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the mode and can be started even when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled, the effect display by the pseudo-ream executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated from the second time onward is the second operation. It is an example of a second effect that is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second operation in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation in the mode. be able to. Further, it can be said that it is an example of a second effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the effect display by the pseudo-repeated operation executed as a result of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode. ..

FIG. 214 is a diagram illustrating an example of the chance eye effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 214 shows how the process shifts to super reach after the effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance eye effect is performed. Here, the chance eye is a mode in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of different symbols of the same color), and is one aspect of the advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (a), after variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. The chance symbol "A" that constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol "B" that constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" that constitutes a part of the above is stopped and displayed, and is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are the chance eyes. The first special symbol display device 212 is undergoing symbol variation, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variablely displayed in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212.

Further, in FIG. 214 (a), since the number of hold of the variation display of the special figure 1 is one, one hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the change display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, correspondingly, among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 Only is displayed in the default display mode, and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in the non-hold mode.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 214 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 is overlapped with the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, together with the effect button image BT1 for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136. The characters "PUSH" are displayed, and the remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the effect button 136 to be pressed so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the effect button 136 to be pressed so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT3 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (c), as shown in FIG. 214 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops the display in the left symbol display area 208a. The chance design "A" that had been done is changed to the lord's design YM1 that imitates the lord's face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are still displayed superimposed on the lord pattern YM1, but the character display of "PUSH" is erased, and the gauge remains on the remaining time meter MT1. It is displayed in a mode of 0 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 214 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 displayed superimposed on the palace symbol YM1 are erased, and the palace symbol YM1 is easily visible. Is displayed. The timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be appropriately set. For example, the timing is before the timing at which the display is changed from the chance symbol "A" to the lord symbol YM1. It may be the same timing as the timing of changing the display from the chance symbol "A" to the lord symbol YM1. This also applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time shown on the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated even while the above-mentioned effect display is being performed.

Further, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (e), as shown in FIG. 214 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops the display in the middle symbol display area 208b. The chance symbol "B" that had been done is changed to the lord symbol YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are still displayed superimposed on the lord pattern YM2, but the character display of "PUSH" is erased, and the gauge remains on the remaining time meter MT2. It is displayed in a mode of 0 seconds. In addition, in FIG. 214 (e), the state in which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased and the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed are shown at the same time, but in reality, the effect is shown. After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. It should be noted that the timing of erasing the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be the same timing, or after the effect button 136 presses the effect button image BT1 and the effect button 136. The remaining time meter MT1 may be erased. Further, even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be erased, only the effect button image BT1 may be erased, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 214 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 displayed superimposed on the palace symbol YM2 are erased, and the palace symbol YM2 is easily visible. Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time shown on the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated even while the above-mentioned effect display is being performed.

Further, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 214 (g), as shown in FIG. 214 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops the display in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" that had been done is changed to the lord symbol YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are still displayed superimposed on the lord pattern YM3, but the character display of "PUSH" is erased, and the gauge remains on the remaining time meter MT3. It is displayed in a mode of 0 seconds. In addition, in FIG. 214 (g), a state in which the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased and a state in which the effect button 136 is pressed are simultaneously shown, but in reality, the effect is shown. After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. The timing of erasing the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be the same timing, or after the effect button 136 presses the effect button image BT2 and the effect button 136. The remaining time meter MT2 may be erased. Further, even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be erased, only the effect button image BT2 may be erased, or only the remaining time meter MT2. May be erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 displayed on the palace symbol YM3 are erased, and the palace symbol YM3 is easily visible. Is displayed, and the patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. Then, as shown in FIG. 214 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen and become super reach. "SP reach" indicating that the transition has been made is displayed. Even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be erased, only the effect button image BT3 may be erased, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be erased.

In the above-mentioned effect example, the effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative symbol, and a plurality of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed at the same time, and the effect button images BT1 to each time the effect button 136 is operated. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, an example is shown in which the production button 136 is pressed to succeed in the production, and all the chance symbols are changed to the lord's symbols to shift to the super reach, but after the chance eye production is performed. When not shifting to the super reach, for example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is A display is displayed to change from the chance symbol to a symbol different from the lord's symbol (for example, the villain's face imitating the villain's face) to notify that it will not shift to super reach, and then with a combination of off-the-shelf decorative symbols It may be displayed as a stop.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, the operation is performed by long-pressing the effect button 136. The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the multiple-time effect is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long-press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. It may be configured by the above combination. Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be performed sequentially according to the continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled.

In this production example, when the long-press auto continuous hit function is enabled, the chance symbol "B" is changed to the lord symbol YM2, and the chance symbol "C" is changed to the lord symbol YM3. The effect can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode, and also when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first production that can be started.

Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hit function is disabled, the chance symbol "B" is changed to the lord symbol YM2, and the chance symbol "C" is changed to the lord symbol YM3. The effect to be changed is more when the operation means performs the second operation in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a second production that is easy to start. Further, it can be said that it is an example of a second effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the effect in which the chance symbol is changed to the lord symbol as a result of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is operated in the first operation mode. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the first operation is performed by the means and can be started even when the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode. Can be done.

FIG. 215 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 215 shows how the effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In this effect example, a cut-in effect that displays a cut-in image is performed each time the effect button 136 is pressed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 215 (a), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is undergoing symbol variation, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variablely displayed in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, on the left side of the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT2, and the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. Further, on the right side of the center of the decorative design display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT3, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

Further, in FIG. 215 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are held. All the lamps are off. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above.

After that, for example, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215 (b), the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in mode.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 215 (c), the “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT1 displayed on the left side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is erased, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 does not decrease. The update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 may be reduced).

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the first cut-in image CI1. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is erased, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is restarted, and the effect button 136 is resumed. Operation reception is resumed.

After that, for example, at the timing when another 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 215 (g), the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 indicate that another 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge. It is displayed in a mode that is further reduced by 1 second.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 215 (h), the “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT2 displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is erased and the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. The update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 may be reduced).

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (i), the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased in the decorative symbol display device 208.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the second cut-in image CI2. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. Further, the display range of the second cut-in image CI2 is expanded in the vertical direction as compared with the first cut-in image CI1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is erased, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is restarted, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is restarted. Will be done.

After that, for example, at the timing when another 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 215 (m), the remaining time meter MT3 indicates that another 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge is further reduced by 1 second. It is displayed in the above mode.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 215 (n), "PUSH" displayed together with the effect button image BT3 displayed on the right side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. "Is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining.

After that, as shown in FIG. 215 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 215 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the third cut-in image CI3. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed over the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the above-mentioned production example, an example is shown in which the effect button 136 is pressed three times, and the cut-in image is displayed as if the effect was successful each time the effect button 136 is pressed. The cut-in image may be displayed only for one or two of the button 136 pressing operations, and the cut-in image may be displayed for any of the three production button operation 136e pressing operations. May not be displayed.

Further, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the effect button 136 is not pressed. At this time, the display mode may be different depending on whether the effect button 136 is pressed or not, or the same display mode may be used.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, the operation is performed by long-pressing the effect button 136. The result of may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the multiple-time effect is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long-press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. It may be configured by the above combination. Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be performed sequentially according to the continuous striking operation. At this time, as soon as the operation of the effect button 136 becomes acceptable, the pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, so that the update of the remaining time meter is performed in a state where the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. In this case, it may be possible to display three cut-in images with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled.

In this effect example, when the long-press auto continuous hit function is enabled, the effect of displaying the second cut-in image CI2 and the effect of displaying the third cut-in image CI3 are It can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode, and can also be started when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of one production.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled, the effect of displaying the second cut-in image CI2 and the effect of displaying the third cut-in image CI3. Is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second operation in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the second production. Further, it can be said that it is an example of a second effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the effect of displaying the cut-in image as a result of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode. ..

FIG. 216 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. FIGS. 216 (a-1) to 216 (a-6) show how the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136 during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and FIGS. 216 (b-1) to (b-). 6) shows how the effect is performed by the single operation of the effect button 136 when the auto button function is in the enabled state. Here, the auto button function is a function that performs a single-shot operation, a long-press operation, and a continuous hit operation in a pseudo manner even if the effect button 136 is not operated during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. Further, in the state where the auto button function is enabled, only one or two functions of one-shot operation, long-press operation, and repeated hit operation are effective depending on the content of the effect using the effect button 136. It may be configured to be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitively displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, it is indicated that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. When the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 may be made to emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color to be emitted is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the second state when it is not in the operation accepting state.

Since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp of the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-2), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and the variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also starts the variable display. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, the characters "PUSH" are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the pressing of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a-3), and the remaining time is below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. The color emitted is not limited to red, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the first state when the operation is accepted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (a-4), as shown in FIG. 216 (a-5), it is displayed together with the effect button image BT. The word "PUSH" is erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216 (a-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the above-mentioned effect example, after the effect button 136 is pressed, the characters "PUSH" displayed together with the effect button image BT are erased as shown in FIG. 216 (a-5). , The remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, but such a display may not be performed.

On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 216 (b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light indicating that the auto button function is enabled. The color to be emitted is not limited to green, and can be set to an appropriate color. As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the third state when the auto button function is enabled.

Since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp of the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-2), the variation display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and the variation display of the special figure 1 is started. Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 also starts the variable display. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, the characters "PUSH" are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the pressing of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b-3), and the remaining time is below the effect button image BT. The meter MT is displayed.

After that, when half of the acceptance period for pressing the effect button 136 elapses, the auto button function performs a pseudo single-shot operation by the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 216 (b-4).

Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-5), the characters "PUSH" displayed together with the effect button image BT are erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining. To.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the above-mentioned effect example, after the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function, as shown in FIG. 216 (b-5), the “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT. Is erased and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, but such a display may not be performed.

In the above-mentioned production example, a single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, a cut-in image is displayed as if the production was successful. However, even if the single-shot operation is performed, the production can be performed. The cut-in image may not be displayed as a failure.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136, but for example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single operation by the effect button 136. Although it is the same as the effect content executed in the case of, the effect content executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single operation by the effect button 136. It may or may not be different from the effect content to be executed in the case of.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 216, the light emitting mode of the effect button lamp 138 differs depending on whether the normal operation of the effect button 136 in the one-shot operation effect can be accepted and the state in which the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending change notice. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. In FIGS. 217 (a-1) to (a-7) and 217 (b-1) to (b-8), a hold change notice is given in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by operating the effect button 136. It shows how it is.

As shown in FIG. 217 (a-1), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started in the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to this starts the left symbol display area. The decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed as described above in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212.

In FIG. 217 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variation display of the special figure 1 is three, the three hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the change display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponds to this. The display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is not held. It is displayed in. A variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-2), the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp The four hold lamps at 218 are lit. Then, in the hold display area at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-3), an animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started. In FIG. 217 (a-3), an animation is displayed in which the hold icon displayed in a circle extends in the horizontal direction and changes into an ellipse. At this time, although the effect button image BTH is still displayed, it may be deleted at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. After that, as shown in FIGS. 217 (a-3) to 217 (a-5), the hold icon extends vertically or horizontally for a predetermined effect execution period (for example, 2 seconds). The animation continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 217 (a-6), after the animation in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 bursts is displayed, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 217 (a-7). Changes to a notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord.

On the other hand, FIG. 217 (b-1) shows the state of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, when it comes to the timing of the symbol stop display, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is the combination of the out-of-order decorative symbols "Decoration 2"-"Decoration". It is confirmed and displayed by "3"-"Decoration 3". Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the display result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Has been done.

In this state, for example, even if the effect button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-3), the animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is displayed. Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted during the stop display of the symbol. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted even during the stop display of the symbol. Here, the stop display of the symbol may be the stop display of the special symbol or the stop display of the decorative symbol.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b-4), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is deleted after moving to the variable icon display area 284, and the second special figure 1 hold display h12. The hold icons displayed on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are animated to move to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13.

After the symbol variation display is started as described above, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 217 (b-5). The animation display in which the hold icon is deformed is started, and after that, as shown in FIGS. 217 (b-5) to (b-6), the hold icon is extended in the vertical direction for a predetermined effect execution period. The animation display that stretches in the horizontal direction continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 217 (b-7), after the animation in which the hold icon in the third special figure 1 hold display h13 bursts is displayed, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 217 (b-8). It changes to a notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord.

In the above-mentioned production example, a single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, a display is performed in which the hold icon is changed as if the production was successful. However, even if the single-shot operation is performed, , The display that changes the hold icon may not be performed because the effect has failed. For example, when a single operation is performed by the effect button 136, the hold icon is transformed into an animation display, and then the default display is displayed again. The effect display may be performed as an aspect.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136, but for example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. In this case, for example, if the symbol variation display ends and the symbol variation display is stopped during the long press operation, after the next symbol variation display starts, the effect button 136 is pressed again to perform the long press operation. May be required, or the long press operation may continue to be effective even while the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In this case, for example, if the symbol variation display ends and is stopped during the long press operation, the effect button is used to enable the long press auto repeated hit function after the next symbol variation display starts. It may be necessary to press 136 again, or the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be continuously enabled even when the long-press operation is continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function may be disabled. Further, the auto button function may be enabled so that the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner.

FIG. 218 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using an effect movable body. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 218 shows how the effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the super reach. In the production example shown in FIG. 218, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are decorative symbols. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 218 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed.

Since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp of the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a mode in which none of them is held.

Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect movable body 224 is arranged so as to overlap the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

After that, when the game ball wins the first special figure start port 230, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), the variable display of the special figure 1 is started on the first special figure display device 212, and corresponding to this. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also starts the variable display.

Then, after shifting to the super reach as shown in FIG. 218 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character "press the button" prompting the pressing of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (d). The display is done.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 218 (e), as shown in FIG. 218 (f), the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position (first position) indicated by the chain line. Position) is displaced to the position indicated by the solid line (second position).

In the above-mentioned production example, a single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, the production movable body 224 moves as if the production was successful. However, even if the single-shot operation is performed, The effect movable body 224 may not move even if the effect fails. Further, when the single-shot operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may be operated so as to return to the first position in the middle of the movement because the effect has failed.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136, but for example, the result of the operation is produced by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be produced by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. At this time, for example, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, the position may be gradually changed, the movement may be made at the first position, or the position may be changed from the first position to the second position. You may try to move gradually towards. Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. For example, the display as shown in FIG. 218 (d) is performed so that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. If the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from the front, the effect movable body 224 moves as if the effect button 136 was pressed when the operation of the effect button 136 became possible. It may be configured to do so. After that, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed and another effect for operating the effect button 136 occurs, the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed in the generated effect. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed or produced (in other words, the result of the operation is displayed or produced even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, and the same operation is performed even when the effect button is pressed and held. The result may be displayed or produced), and the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled so that the effect button 136 is not assumed to be pressed in a pseudo manner. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled.

FIG. 219 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 219 shows how the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 219 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. Further, in this production example, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, in response to the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214, for example, the variation display is performed in such a manner that the colors represented in the square marks change into a plurality of types. Is. As shown in FIG. 219 (a), since the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed as the display result of the deviation, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 212. Correspondingly, the display result of the deviation (for example, a white square mark) is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 219 and below, for convenience of explanation, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the stopped displayed symbol can be recognized, but in reality, the stopped display is displayed. The design is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. The special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable by the player. In FIG. 219 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 219 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. In this effect example, the timing at which the variable icon h00 is erased is set to the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, but it can be set to an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be present, or it may be at a timing before the reach production is started. When the variable icon h00 is displayed in the default display mode, it is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon, which is the default display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 219 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The characters "press" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 219 (e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 219 (f). To.

In the above-mentioned production example, a single-shot operation is performed by the production button 136, and when the single-shot operation is performed, a cut-in image is displayed as if the production was successful. However, even if the single-shot operation is performed, the production can be performed. The cut-in image may not be displayed as a failure.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation by the effect button 136, but for example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation by the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled. Further, in the above-described effect example, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

FIG. 220 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 220 shows how the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. Further, the second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In the present embodiment, when the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation may be basically accepted. In this case, the operation is accepted even when the effect button lamp 138 is off, or the operation is accepted even when the effect button lamp 138 is on. Further, when the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation is always accepted, but even when the effect button lamp 138 is off, the operation is not always accepted. Good.

Further, in FIG. 220A, since the number of holdings of the variation display of the special figure 1 is four, the four holding lamps of the first special figure holding lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in all of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed even before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is a notice display mode, after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animated display is made to move to. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 220 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 220 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The characters "press" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, at this time, since the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to release the pressing of the effect button 136 once and then press the effect button 136 again.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 220 (e) to 220 (f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, the effect is produced at the timing of FIG. 220 (g). When the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. After that, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), the cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not effectively operated, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, which is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 219 (f). The cut-in image of the display mode may be displayed.

FIG. 221 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 221 shows how the effect is performed by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. Further, the second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

Further, in FIG. 221 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this production example, the auto button function is in the enabled state, and the character display of "auto setting" indicating that effect is displayed at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this production example, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, but it may be made to emit green light as described above. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed even before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is a notice display mode, after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animated display is made to move to. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 221 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The characters "press" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. In addition, it may be a green light emitting mode indicating that the auto button function is in the enabled state.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 221 (e) to 221 (f), after the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136) is performed at the timing of FIG. 221 (g). When 2.5 seconds have passed since the operation was accepted), the auto button function is activated and a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 221 (h), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

In this effect example, when the auto button function is activated and the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner, the display is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIGS. 219 (f) and 220 (h). The cut-in image of the aspect may be displayed.

FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by repeatedly hitting the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 222 shows how the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 222 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 222A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

Further, in FIG. 222 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 222 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Repeat hit" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous striking operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous striking meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This continuous hit meter RD is displayed so that the gauge increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136, and when the gauge is full, it is assumed that the effect is successful and the advance notice effect is executed. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 222 (e) to 222 (g), when the continuous striking operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 remains emitting red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 222 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is 0 seconds remaining. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD is not full and has increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 222 (h), since the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD was not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and displayed "Sorry ..." to that effect. Is done.

In the above-mentioned production example, an example is shown in which the continuous striking operation is performed by the directing button 136, and as a result of the continuous striking operation, the effect is displayed as if the production has failed, but the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full. In that case, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or give a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production is successful. Whether or not it is possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD, the gauge will not be full no matter how many times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the continuous striking operation by the production button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the production is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. Although notification is provided, for example, even when a continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the OK button 137e (an example of the second operating means), a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification that a big hit will be made is displayed. It may be done. At this time, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e is invalidated, and the long-press operation by the OK button 137e does not display a notice such as a cut-in image or notify that a big hit will occur. Good. In addition, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e may be enabled, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification that a big hit may be made may be performed by a long-press operation by the OK button 137e. In this case, since there is a difference in operability between the effect button 136 and the OK button 137e, such as a difference in button size and a difference in stroke, the player can select and operate the desired button. There is. Further, since the OK button 137e is smaller than the effect button 136 and does not have a light emitting means such as the effect button lamp 138, it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the OK button 137e is in the operation enabled state, and the OK button 137e is used. It can be said that the operation is for advanced users who obtain the information from, for example, a strategy magazine or the Internet. Here, the OK button 137e may be provided on the left side or below the effect button 136 to facilitate the operation of the OK button 137e with the left hand.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the continuous striking operation by the production button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the production is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. Although the notification is performed, for example, by operating the OK button 137e (an example of the second operating means) once, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification that a big hit will be made is performed. You may do so. In this case, it is possible not to notify that the effect is performed by one operation of the OK button 137e. As a result, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a game expert who knows the existence of the back button effect.

In this production example, the continuous striking operation effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variation display is being executed, and is an example of a third effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode. it can.

Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto continuous striking function is disabled, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that this is an example of the second effect in which the operation is more likely to be started when the operation means performs the second operation in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed once. Further, it can be said that it is an example of a second effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.

In this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled, the effect button lamp 138 may be set to the second state during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. That is, the effect button lamp 138 may not be emitting light, or may be made to emit blue light.

FIG. 223 is a diagram showing a state in which long-press automatic continuous striking is performed in the effect of the continuous striking operation of the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 223 shows how the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 223 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 223 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 223 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 223 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Repeat hit" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous striking meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In this effect example, the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 223 (d) is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 223 (e) to 223 (g), the continuous striking operation is simulated by the long press auto continuous striking function, and the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the pressing of the effect button 136 is accepted, and thereafter, if the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above, the operation is maintained. A pseudo repeated hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains emitting red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 223 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 4/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (h), since the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD was not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and displayed "Sorry ..." to that effect. Is done.

In the above-mentioned production example, a pseudo continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 by the long press auto continuous striking function is performed, and as a result, an example indicating that the effect has failed is displayed. When the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD becomes full after 4 seconds, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or notify that a big hit will occur, assuming that the production is successful. That is, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is operated the first number of times (for example, 20 times) in the pseudo first operation mode. It can be said that the production of is configured so that it can be started.

In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full is that the operation is performed the first number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the third effect is executed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the result of the operation (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held. It can be said that it is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times (first operation) for displaying a notice such as a cut-in image that is successfully displayed in the continuous hit operation effect and for notifying that a big hit will occur. It is an effect that may be executed according to the operation), and when the effect button 136 is pressed and held (operated in the second operation mode), the continuous hit operation effect is successfully displayed. It can be said that a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification of a big hit may be started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the notice display of the cut-in image or the like that is successfully displayed in the continuous hit operation effect and the notification that the big hit is announced may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. It can also be said that.

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing a state in which long-press automatic continuous striking is performed in the effect of the continuous striking operation of the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 224 shows how the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 224 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 224 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

In this effect example, the long press auto continuous striking function is in the effective state, and the player continuously presses the effect button 136 even before the start of the symbol variation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 224 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 224 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Repeat hit" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous striking meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 224 (e) to 224 (g), the continuous striking operation is simulated by the long press auto continuous striking function, and the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD increases. In this effect example, since the player has already started the long press operation of the effect button 136, the pseudo continuous striking operation is started when the effect button 136 is in the operation accepting state. The effect button lamp 138 remains emitting red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 224 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 5/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 224 (h), since the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD was not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and displayed "Sorry ..." to that effect. Is done.

In the above-mentioned production example, a pseudo continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 by the long-press auto continuous striking function is shown, and as a result, an example indicating that the effect has failed is displayed, but the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shows. When the tank is full, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or notify that a big hit will occur, assuming that the production is successful. That is, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect can be started as if the operating means was operated the first number of times in the pseudo first operation mode. It can be said that it is configured.

In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full is that the operation is performed the first number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the third effect is executed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can.

FIG. 225 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by repeatedly hitting the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 225 shows how the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 225 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 225 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 225 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 225 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Repeat hit" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous striking meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 225 (e) to 225 (h), when the continuous striking operation is performed by the effect button 136, the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off every time the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the press operation is released, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light again. Therefore, it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136. It may be possible to recognize it. Further, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, a different color (for example, blue) may be emitted.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 225 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD is not full and has increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 225 (i), since the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD was not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and displayed "Sorry ..." to that effect. Is done.

In the above-mentioned production example, an example is shown in which the continuous striking operation is performed by the directing button 136, and as a result of the continuous striking operation, the effect is displayed as if the production has failed, but the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full. In that case, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or give a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production is successful. Whether or not it is possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD, the gauge will not be full no matter how many times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 is made to blink only once at the timing when the effect button 136 is first pressed. May be good.

FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a state in which the hold change notice is performed during the effect of the continuous pressing of the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 226 shows that in the reach effect, the effect is performed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136, and the hold change notice is simultaneously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 226 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is confirmed and displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 226 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 226 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 226 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 226 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Repeat hit" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous striking meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In this effect example, the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 226 (d) is performed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 226 (e) to 226 (g), the continuous striking operation is simulated by the long press auto continuous striking function, and the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the pressing of the effect button 136 is accepted, and thereafter, if the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above, the operation is maintained. A pseudo repeated hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains emitting red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Further, in this effect example, a game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 during the execution of the above-mentioned continuous striking effect, and the number of pending fluctuation displays of the special figure 1 increases to 4, and FIG. As shown in the above, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit. Then, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. That is, the pending change notice is started. However, in this effect example, priority is given to the continuous striking effect that was being executed, the operation of the effect button 136 accepts only the continuous striking operation related to the continuous striking effect, and the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice is at least the continuous striking effect. It is not accepted until the end of.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 226 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hit meter RD was not full and increased to 4/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (i), since the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD was not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and displayed "Sorry ..." to that effect. Is done.

In this effect example, after the continuous striking effect is completed in this way, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice can be accepted. At this time, even if the long-press auto continuous striking function is still enabled and the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the hold change notice is started by a pseudo operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled when the continuous striking effect is completed, and the effect button 136 may be required to be pressed again. It should be noted that, during the execution of the continuous striking effect, the continuous striking effect and the pending change notice may be executed at the same time so that the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice can be accepted. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice may be accepted by the operation of the long press auto continuous hit function, or the long press operation of the effect button 136 may be once started after the hold change notice is started. It may be configured so that the hold change notice can be executed by releasing the effect button 136 and pressing the effect button 136 again.

In the above-mentioned production example, a pseudo continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 by the long-press auto continuous striking function is shown, and as a result, an example indicating that the effect has failed is displayed, but the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shows. When the tank is full, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or notify that a big hit will occur, assuming that the production is successful.

Further, in this effect example, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and in the continuous striking effect, the operation of the first effect button and the second effect button can be accepted, and only the operation of the first effect button is held. It may be configured so that the change notice can be started. In this case, for example, when the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled for the second effect button, the first effect button is operated to hold the change while the second effect button is pressed and held to perform the continuous striking effect. The notice can be started.

FIG. 227 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by long-pressing the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 227 shows how the effect is performed by pressing and holding the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 227 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 227 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 227 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 227 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 227 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Press and hold to save the meter" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284. This long-press meter NO is displayed so that the gauge increases according to the cumulative time when the effect button 136 is pressed, and when the gauge is full, it is assumed that the effect is successful and the advance notice effect is executed. It is configured to be.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 227 (e) to 227 (g), when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the pressing time of the effect button 136. .. The effect button lamp 138 remains emitting red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 227 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and has increased to 5/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 227 (h), the gauge of the long-press meter NO was not full, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed, and "sorry ..." to that effect. The display is done.

In the above-mentioned production example, an example is shown in which a long-press operation is performed by the production button 136, and as a result of the long-press operation, a display indicating that the production has failed is performed, but the gauge of the long-press meter NO is full. In the case of a tongue, it is possible to display a notice such as a cut-in image or notify that a big hit will occur, assuming that the production is successful. Whether or not it is possible to fill the gauge of the long press meter NO is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the long press meter NO, the gauge will not be full no matter how long the effect button 136 is held down.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long-press auto continuous striking function is disabled, but the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed during the long-press effect, the continuous-stroke operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long-press auto continuous hit function.

FIG. 228 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by long-pressing the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 228 shows how the effect is performed by pressing and holding the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 228 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 228 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 228 (a), the effect button 136 is continuously pressed even before the start of the symbol variation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 228 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 228 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Press and hold to save the meter" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to release the pressing of the effect button 136 once and then operate (hold down) the effect button 136 again.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 228 (e), (f), and ..., after the effect button 136 continues to be pressed during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136, the timing of FIG. 228 (g) is determined. When the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is 0 seconds remaining. At this time, the long press meter NO is shown to be 0. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (h), the gauge of the long-press meter NO was not full, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed, and "sorry ..." to that effect. The display is done.

In the above-mentioned effect example, when the long-press effect is started while the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not effectively handled, but the effect button 136 is Even when the long-press effect is started while the effect is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 may be effectively handled.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long-press auto continuous striking function is disabled, but the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed during the long-press effect, the continuous-stroke operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long-press auto continuous hit function.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing a state in which a continuous striking operation is performed in the effect of pressing and holding the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 229 shows how the effect is performed by pressing and holding the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 229 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 229 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 229 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 229 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 229 (d), together with the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136, " The words "Press and hold to save the meter" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the variable icon display area 284.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 229 (e) to 229 (g), the player performs a continuous striking operation instead of a long press operation by the effect button 136. Even when such a continuous striking operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the time when the effect button 136 is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 227, since the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed is shorter than when the long press operation is performed, the amount of increase in the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. The effect button lamp 138 remains emitting red light during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

Then, when the operation acceptance period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 229 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and has increased to 3/6. Further, at this time, since the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (h), the gauge of the long-press meter NO was not full, so that the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed, and "sorry ..." to that effect. The display is done.

In the above-mentioned production example, an example is shown in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the long-press effect, and as a result, a display indicating that the effect has failed is displayed, but the gauge of the long-press meter NO is full. In that case, it is possible to display a notice of a cut-in image or the like or give a notice of a big hit, assuming that the production is successful.

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of a specific production example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. FIGS. 230 (a-1) to 230 (a-4) show how the conversation notice effect is executed by operating the effect button 136, and FIGS. 230 (b-1) to FIG. b-2) shows a state in which the hold change notice is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the conversation notice effect is, for example, a notice effect based on the conversation content of the character.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a-1), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started in the first special symbol display device 212, and the left symbol display area is correspondingly started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. The decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed as described above in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, and is confirmed and displayed as an outlier display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. There is. Further, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 284. ..

In FIG. 230 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is three, the three hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, correspondingly, among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 , The second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the non-holding mode. Has been done.

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-1), the effect button image BT for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, since the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this production example, the remaining time meter is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, together with the character image CH of Princess Chibi, "A reach is expected to develop. A balloon FD1 containing the characters "yo" is displayed. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a confirmation sound notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed. The confirmation sound may be output at the same time as the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 (depending on the display control, the voice output control, the signal transmission / reception timing, etc., the display timing and the voice output timing may be different. It may be before or after), and it may be output at a timing before the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1, or it may be output at a timing after the display of the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1. May be done. Further, the confirmation sound may not be output. Further, in this production example, the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed at the same time, but the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the character image CH of Princess Chibi is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 are displayed. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the effect of the operation of the effect button 136 is further performed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is further pressed once, as shown in FIG. 230 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, together with the character image GY of the grandfather, "the chance is increased by the appearance of the grandfather. FD2 containing the characters "" is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a confirmation sound notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed. The confirmation sound may be output at the same time as the display of the grandfather's character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing before the display of the grandfather's character image GY and the balloon FD2. It may be output at a timing later than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. Further, in this production example, the character image GY of the grandfather and the balloon FD2 are displayed at the same time, but the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the character image GY of the grandfather is displayed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

It goes without saying that the contents of the character image and the balloon appearing in the conversation notice effect are not limited to those described above, and various ones can be adopted. Further, the number of times of the conversation notice to be executed in one conversation notice production is not limited to two times, and may be executed only once, or may be executed three times or more.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136, but for example, the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing the long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the effect of the effect button 136 by the single-shot operation is performed a plurality of times, but the multiple-time effect is two of the effect by the single-shot operation, the effect by the long press operation, and the effect by the continuous hit operation. It may be configured by the above combination. Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. It may be performed sequentially according to the continuous striking operation. That is, the conversation notice may be executed one after another at intervals of pseudo continuous hitting operations. Further, when the conversation notice is executed by the long press auto continuous hit function, the above-mentioned confirmation sound may not be output. Further, the gap between the timing at which the character image and the balloon are displayed in the conversation notice effect and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the character image and the balloon are additionally displayed each time the conversation notice is executed, but the character image and the balloon are not added and only the characters included in the balloon are displayed. May be changed. For example, by the first operation of the effect button 136, the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach is expected to develop" are displayed, and then the second operation of the effect button 136 is performed. Then, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to "Chance up with the appearance of the old man".

In this production example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is enabled, the second-stage conversation notice is when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the first effect that can be started and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, and the result of the same operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is pressed and held.

Further, in this production example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the second-stage conversation notice is more than the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Further, it can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is more likely to be started when the operation is performed a second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode. Further, it can be said that it is an example of a second effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.

Further, in this effect example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the conversation notice executed as a result of the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is the first operation mode by the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed a number of times and can be started even when the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode.

On the other hand, FIG. 230 (b-1) shows the state of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in the default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, the variation display is performed as described above in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, and is confirmed and displayed as an outlier display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. There is. Further, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram as a notice display mode, is displayed in the variable icon display area 284. .. In this production example, the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state, but the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. The effect button lamp 138 may be turned on, for example, in red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 230 (b-1), when the effect button 136 is pressed once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the fourth button at the timing shown in FIG. 230 (b-2). Special figure 1 Hold display h14 changes to a hold icon in a notice display mode that imitates the face of the lord. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be left displayed.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a specific production example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. In FIGS. 231 (a-1) to (a-4) and 231 (b-1) to (b-4), the effect of operating the effect button 136 during the variable display of the decorative symbol is shown. It shows how multiple events are held at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (a-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 231 (a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 231 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variation display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the change of the special figure 2 Since the number of hold lamps displayed is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed even before the start of the symbol variation display.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (a-2), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 231 (a-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. It is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are being executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a conversation notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a hold change notice is executed. Further, in this effect example, since the effect button 136 is continuously pressed even before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not treated as valid, and the figure is shown. As shown in 231 (a-4), the result of the operation is not produced for any of the effect button effects. The first effect button effect may be started before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. However, it may be started at a timing after the start of the second effect button effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 231 (b-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 231 (b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, and it is shown that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

Further, in FIG. 231 (b-1), since the number of hold of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the change of the special figure 2 Since the number of hold lamps displayed is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed even before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this production example, the long press auto continuous striking function is in an effective state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 231 (b-2), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 231 (b-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. It is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are being executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. In this effect example, the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed even before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, but since the long press auto continuous hit function is in the effective state. As shown in FIG. 231 (b-4), of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the first effect button effect is displayed. Of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the second effect button effect may be displayed. Regarding which effect button effect to display the result of the operation of the effect button 136, for example, the effect may be performed only for the effect that started earlier, or the effect to be executed with priority is predetermined. You may be.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example of a specific production example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 232 shows how another effect of operating the effect button 136 is started while the effect of operating the effect button 136 is being executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 232 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is also displayed with the display result of the deviation corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. It is confirmed and displayed. In FIG. 232 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation accepting state.

Further, in FIG. 232 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the variable display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided in the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of special figure 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. Then, in this hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode in each of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed even before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this production example, the long press auto continuous striking function is in an effective state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 232 (b), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol corresponds to this. The variable display is also started for t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 changes to the change icon h00, which is the shape of a hexagram, as a notice display mode after moving to the change icon display area 284. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are replaced with the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third. An animation display for moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. Then, on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14, a hold icon of a mode that is not held is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 232 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed in the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state.

Then, when the long press operation by the effect button 136 is started, it is assumed that there is one press operation by the effect button 136, and as shown in FIG. 232 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed as the first effect button effect. In the device 208, a balloon FD1 including the characters "A reach is expected to develop" is displayed together with the character image CH of Princess Chibi. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed.

After that, when the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230, as shown in FIG. 232 (e), the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp 218 Four hold lamps light up. Then, in the hold display area at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed with the hold icon in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of the second effect button effect. However, in this effect example, the second effect button effect is an effect started after the first effect button effect, so if the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, this effect The result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the button image BTH is not displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon FD2 including the characters "The chance is up with the appearance of the old man" is displayed together with the character image GY of the old man at the timing of FIG. 232 (f) by the long press auto continuous hitting function. .. That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

In this production example, only the conversation notice effect is executed, and the hold change notice is not executed. However, the long-press auto continuous hit function is used to continue executing the hold change notice after the conversation notice effect is completed. Alternatively, after the conversation notice effect is completed, the effect button 136 may be released once and then pressed again to execute the hold change notice.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of operating the effect button in accordance with the rhythm. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 233 shows how the effect of operating the effect button 136 in rhythm is executed in the super reach.

As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is executed in the first special symbol display device 212, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly executes the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Is being done. As shown in FIG. 233 (a), the decorative symbol shown in the left symbol display area 208a and the decorative symbol shown in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed with the same “7” symbol. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner and is in a reach state. FIG. 233 (a) shows a state in which the state shifts to the super reach after the reach state is reached. In the decorative pattern display device 208, "Princess Dance SP Reach" indicating the type of super reach that has been transferred and "Press the flowing button at the right time" for explaining the content of the production are displayed. Further, in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, "mode 3" indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are multiple types of difficulty, for example, it is configured to change according to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Further, in FIG. 233 (a), since the number of hold of the variation display of the special figure 1 is two, the two hold lamps of the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the change display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of hold lamps is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In this production example, the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled.

Then, after the "princess dance SP reach" is started, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the princess character image HM dances to the music on the left side of the display screen. Animated display is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed on the right side of the display screen in which the timing image TM including the characters "CHANGE" moves from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, and on the movement path of the timing image TM. The hit image HT is displayed in. This timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing that overlaps with the hit image HT in time with the music.

As shown in FIG. 233 (c), when the player presses the effect button 136 at the position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the timing image TM is displayed on the effect button as shown in FIG. 233 (d). The result display RS changes according to the timing of the operation of 136. The result display RS is displayed in a mode including the character display of "PERFECT" when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, and is slightly deviated. When the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing, it is displayed in a mode including the character display of "GOOD", and when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at the timing greatly deviated, "BAD" is displayed. The mode including the character display of is displayed. In this effect example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 136, and the advance notice effect according to the final point is executed. If the effect button 136 is not operated at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT, the result display RS is not changed and the screen is scrolled out to the lower part of the display screen.

In this production example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT, the pseudo effect button 136 may be repeatedly hit at regular intervals, except for the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT. When the pseudo effect button 136 is operated at the timing of, the points may be subtracted to reduce the possibility that the advance notice effect is executed. This also provides an incentive for the player to operate the effect button 136 at the player's own timing without relying on the long-press auto continuous striking function, and the effect can be improved. In addition, only when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT (timing that becomes "PERFECT") or slightly deviated (timing that becomes "GOOD") by the long-press auto continuous hit function. The effect button 136 may be configured to be operated in a pseudo manner.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example of a specific production example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. FIGS. 234 (a-1) to 234 (a-4) show how the auto button function is canceled, and FIG. 234 (b) shows how the auto button function is set. , FIG. 234 (c) shows how to notify the preferable timing of the operation of the effect button 136, and FIGS. 234 (d-1) to 234 (d-3) show that the auto button function is enabled. It shows how the back button effect is being executed while the button is on. Here, the back button effect does not notify that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid, but is performed when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is operated during the period. It refers to a specific production. The player may be able to know the existence of such a back button effect in a strategy magazine or on the Internet. The back button effect is often used mainly for the notice effect, but is not limited to this. Here, the mode for notifying that the operation is effective is, for example, a light emitting mode indicating that the effect button lamp 138 emits light or the effect mode of the effect button lamp 138 is effective. One or a combination of two or more of outputting a predetermined voice (for example, a voice saying "press a button") and displaying a predetermined image (for example, displaying the characters "press"). Say that. On the other hand, the mode that does not notify that the operation is effective is, for example, a light emitting mode of the effect button lamp 138 or a light emitting mode indicating that the light emitting mode of the effect button lamp 138 is effective. Not doing at least one or all of the output of audio and the display of a given image. Further, the mode that does not notify that the operation is valid may be that at least a predetermined image is not displayed. Further, when the N notification means notify that the operation is valid, the mode in which the N notification means does not notify the operation is not notified that the operation is valid. Good.

As shown in FIG. 234 (a-1), the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed based on the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the first special figure display device 212. Corresponding to the display result of, the display result of the deviation (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. Further, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp of the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. There is. That is, FIG. 234 (a-1) shows a standby state in which the symbol is not changed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, it is indicated that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In this production example, for example, in addition to setting the auto button as described above with reference to FIG. 212, the auto button function is effective by simultaneously pressing the left button 137c and the right button 137d in the standby state. Can be set to state.

When the auto button function is enabled, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light as shown in FIG. 234 (a-2).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 234 (a-3), for example, when a button other than the effect button 136 (for example, the left button 137c) is operated while the auto button function is enabled, FIG. As shown in 234 (a-4), the auto button function is canceled. That is, the auto button function is disabled. The auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136 while the auto button function is enabled, or the left button 137c and the right button 137d may be pressed at the same time. By doing so, the auto button function may be canceled. Further, the auto button function may be canceled even when "no assistance" or "long press auto continuous striking" is set as described above with reference to FIG. 212.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed as "auto button is being set" so that the player can automatically perform the auto button function. It may be possible to easily recognize that the button function is in the enabled state.

The operation when the auto button function is enabled is as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 234 (c), when the effect related to the effect button 136 is executed, the auto button When the effect button 136e is operated at this timing, the auto button function is used to notify the advantageous timing of operating the effect button 136 rather than when the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner by the function. It may be configured so that an effect different from the effect executed by operating the effect button 136 in a pseudo manner is executed.

In the present embodiment, when the effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. For example, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated without doing so, the back effect may be executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 234 (d-1), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is definitely displayed. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 also displays the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result is confirmed and displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed by the display result of the deviation. Further, in FIG. 234 (d-1), since the number of hold of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is one, one hold lamp of the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the change of the special figure 2 Since the number of hold lamps displayed is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In addition, in FIG. 234 (d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, indicating that the auto button function is in an effective state.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 234 (d-2), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the first variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and in response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 The variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in this effect example, the display prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed, but when the effect button 136 is operated, the back button effect can be executed. It should be noted that the back button effect can be executed on condition that, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the back button effect based on the result of the variable display of the symbol, and it is decided to execute the back button effect.

After that, when the activation timing of the predetermined auto button function is reached, the auto button function performs a pseudo single-shot operation by the effect button 136.

Then, as shown in FIG. 234 (d-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in image CI6 as a back button effect.

In the above-mentioned effect example, it is shown that the display prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is performed even when the auto button function is enabled.

In the above-mentioned production example, the back button effect is executed by a single operation by the effect button 136, but for example, the back button effect is performed by a long press operation by the effect button 136. May be good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. Further, in the above-mentioned production example, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled. Further, in the case where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it may be possible to see an effect to encourage the operation of the effect button 136. On the other hand, in the case where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it may not be possible to see the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is a single operation by the effect button 136. It may be the same as the effect content executed in the case of, or the effect content executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is performed by a single operation by the effect button 136. It may or may not be different from the effect content that is executed when it is broken.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect example using the two effect buttons. The figure below shows how the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 235, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are provided as the effect buttons, and the effect related to the effect button is executed according to these operations. It is configured. Here, FIGS. 235 (a-1) to (a-7), 235 (b-1) to (b-4), and 235 (c-1) to (c-6). Indicates that the effect is performed by a single operation of the first effect button 136A or the second effect button 136B during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this production example, the shape of the button is different between the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B, but the same shape may be used.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (a-1), a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 121 is undergoing symbol variation, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variablely displayed in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

Further, in FIG. 235 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp and the second special figure hold lamp 220 in the first special figure hold lamp 218 The hold lamps in are all off. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. Both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

After that, for example, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-2), the mode in which the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-3), one pressing operation was performed by the first effect button 136A, but as shown in FIG. 235 (a-4), the result of the operation was not displayed. , The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are still displayed. That is, in this effect example, in the operation of the first effect button 136A, an effect in which the effect related to the effect button is not executed is executed. In addition, in FIG. 235 (a-3), since both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the operation result is displayed by any of the effect buttons. It may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the lamp and improve the effect of the effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B emits red light. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the result of the operation is displayed by operating the second effect button 136B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-6), when the second effect button 136B is pressed once, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 235 (a-7), displays the decorative symbol. The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

In the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B, but for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing the continuous striking operation by the second effect button 136B.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled for either or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. When the long-press auto-continuous striking function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. If it continues to be performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto-continuous hitting function to operate. You may want to display the result of. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is pressed and held. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed, FIG. 235 (a). Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press auto continuous hit function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect according to the above is started, the second effect button 136B may be released once, and the second effect button 136B may be required to be pressed again.

Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous striking function to display the result of the operation. You may do so. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (a-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In order to cancel the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B once after the effect related to the effect button is started, the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (b-1), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is undergoing symbol variation, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variablely displayed in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

Further, in FIG. 235 (b-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp and the second special figure hold lamp 220 in the first special figure hold lamp 218 The hold lamps in are all off. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A emits red light, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B is turned off. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-3), when a single pressing operation is performed by the second effect button 136B in which the effect button lamp is not emitting light, as shown in FIG. 235 (b-4). , The cut-in image CI7 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in this effect example, the effect button lamp of the effect button on which the result of the operation is displayed is turned off, and the effect button lamp of the effect button whose result is not displayed even if the operation is performed is turned on. , It is possible to make the player feel the unexpectedness of the production, and it may be possible to improve the production effect.

In the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B, but for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing the continuous striking operation by the second effect button 136B.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled for either or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. When the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. If it continues to be performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous hit function to operate. You may want to display the result of. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is pressed and held. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed, FIG. 235 (b). Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press auto continuous hit function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect according to the above is started, the second effect button 136B may be released once, and the second effect button 136B may be required to be pressed again.

Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous striking function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do so. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (b-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In order to cancel the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B once after the effect related to the effect button is started, the second effect button 136B needs to be pressed again. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (c-1), a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is undergoing symbol variation, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is also variablely displayed in response to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

Further, in FIG. 235 (c-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0, the hold lamp and the second special figure hold lamp 220 in the first special figure hold lamp 218 The hold lamps in are all off. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not perform the hold display, but the hold display may be performed as described above. Both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

After that, for example, when 1 second elapses, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge decreases by 1 second. Displayed in mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-3), one pressing operation was performed by the first effect button 136A, but as shown in FIG. 235 (a-4), the result of the operation was not displayed. , The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are still displayed. That is, in this effect example, in the operation of the first effect button 136A, an effect in which the effect related to the effect button is not executed is executed. In FIG. 235 (c-3), both the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, so that the operation result is displayed by any of the effect buttons. It may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the lamp and improve the effect of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), in this effect example, both the effect button lamps of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B remain off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-5), when the second effect button 136B is pressed once, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 235 (c-6), displays the decorative symbol. The cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

In the above-mentioned effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by one pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B, but for example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing the continuous striking operation by the second effect button 136B.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled or disabled for either or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. When the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. If it continues to be performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous hit function to operate. The result of may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the second effect button 136B is pressed and held. Further, for example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed, FIG. 235 (c-1) is used. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press auto continuous hit function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the effect according to the above is started, the second effect button 136B may be released once, and the second effect button 136B may be required to be pressed again.

Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. After the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is pseudo-operated by the long-press auto continuous striking function to display the result of the operation. You may do so. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 235 (c-1) is started, the operations of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. In order to cancel the pressing of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B once after the effect related to the effect button is started, it is necessary to press the second effect button 136B again. May be good.

FIG. 236 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 236 shows, for example, how the character selection effect performed during the jackpot game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 236 (a), when the character selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 brightly displays the character image Y of the lord in the center of the display screen, and the character image H of the princess is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the character image G of the grandfather is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state, the character that appears after the end of the big hit game is determined to be the character of the lord, and the character image H of the princess is selected. When the effect button 136 is operated when it becomes possible, the character that appears after the jackpot game ends is determined to be the princess character, and when the grandfather's character image G becomes selectable, When the effect button 136 is operated, the character that appears after the jackpot game ends is determined to be the grandfather's character. Further, below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Press the button to select a character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

Then, when the right button 137d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (b), as shown in FIG. 236 (c), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the grandfather The display in which the character image G rotates counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the grandfather is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the grandfather is in a selectable state. After that, the rotation display of each character image is performed as shown in FIGS. 236 (c) to 236 (f), and as shown in FIG. 236 (f), the grandfather's character image G is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. When the character image H of the princess is in a selectable state, it can be realized by further performing a single pressing operation with the right button 137d in the state shown in FIG. 236 (f). That is, in this production example, the character image H of the princess has the first operation mode as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that this is an example of the first image that is easier to be selected when the second operation is performed by the operation means. It can also be said that the character image H of the princess is an image that is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. When the left button 137c is pressed once, the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather are displayed to rotate clockwise so as to draw a circle.

In this production example, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, only the character image remains at the position where each character image is displayed at the time of operation. It is possible to perform a character selection cancel display in which is replaced. The character selection cancel display may not be performed. Further, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the animation of the rotation display is omitted, and the character image in the selectable state is the position in front of the display screen. For example, when the right button 137d is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 236 (c), FIGS. 236 (d) to 236 (e) are displayed. ) May be omitted and the rotation display may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 236 (f).

In this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the character selection effect is the first that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

Further, in this production example, the production by the princess character appearing after the jackpot game is finished is an example of the fourth production that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

Further, in this effect example, the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled, and even if the long press operation is performed, only one character image that can be selected is transferred, so that the first selection display is displayed. It is said that during the execution of, even if the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the first time or longer, it is considered that one operation has been performed by the operating means. be able to.

FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 237 shows, for example, how the character selection effect performed during the jackpot game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 237 (a), when the character selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 brightly displays the character image Y of the lord in the center of the display screen, and the character image H of the princess is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the character image G of the grandfather is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. Further, below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Press the button to select a character" is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is off. In this effect example, the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled, and the player continuously presses the right button 137d even before the start of the character selection effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, a display in which the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather rotate counterclockwise in a circular motion is displayed. To be started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the grandfather is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the grandfather is in a selectable state.

Then, in this production example, since the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the continuous pressing operation of the right button 137d is simulated by the long press auto continuous striking function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 237 (b) to 237 (e), the above-mentioned character selection cancel display is performed for each operation of the pseudo right button 137d (for example, every 200 ms). That is, for example, when the character selection cancel display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 237 (b), the display positions of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather are maintained. As shown in FIG. 237 (c), the grandfather's character image G is displayed at the position where the lord's character image Y is displayed, and the princess's character image Y is displayed at the position where the princess's character image H is displayed. The character image H of the princess is displayed at the position where the character image G of the grandfather was displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the grandfather's character image G to the princess's character image H, and the princess's character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 137d is repeatedly hit, and the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 137d is pressed and held.

In this effect example, even if the long-press auto-continuous hit function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the start of the character selection effect, the long-press auto-continuous hit function If you want to perform the pseudo-continuous hitting operation by the long-press auto-continuous hitting function, press the left button 137c or the right button 137d after the character selection effect starts. It may need to be pushed again. Further, in the character selection effect, the long press auto continuous striking function may be restricted. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be effective for each button constituting the operation key unit 137 in addition to the effect button 136.

In this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hit function is enabled, the character selection effect is a second image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

Then, in this production example, the character image H of the princess can be selected when the operation means performs a third number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display.

Further, in this production example, the production by the princess character appearing after the jackpot game is finished is an example of the fifth production that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

FIG. 238 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 238 shows, for example, how the character selection effect performed during the jackpot game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238 (a), when the character selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 brightly displays the character image Y of the lord in the center of the display screen, and the character image H of the princess is displayed on the display screen. It is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and the character image G of the grandfather is displayed slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. Further, below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display "Press the button to select a character" is displayed. In this effect example, the auto button function is enabled, and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 238 (b), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display in which the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather rotate counterclockwise in a circular motion is displayed. To be started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the grandfather is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the grandfather is in a selectable state.

Then, in this production example, the auto button function is enabled, and the continuous striking operation of the right button 137d is performed in a pseudo manner. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 238 (b) to (e), the character selection cancel display described above is performed for each operation of the pseudo right button 137d (for example, every 200 ms). When the auto button function is enabled, the left button 137c may be repeatedly hit in a pseudo manner.

FIG. 239 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 239 shows, for example, how the character selection effect performed at the start of the big hit is performed. This character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 239 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "select a character" and displays an explanation in the character selection effect. In addition, the character image Y of the lord is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, the character image H of the princess is displayed slightly darker on the right side of the display screen, and the character image G of the grandfather is displayed slightly darker on the left side of the display screen. .. The character image Y of the lord is arranged in front of the character image H of the princess and the character image G of the grandfather, and it is notified that the character image Y of the lord is in a selectable state. These character images are displayed in such a manner that they are partially covered by the character display described above. In this effect example, the character in the selectable state can be changed by operating the effect button 136, and the character in the selectable state at the end timing of the character selection effect (the character corresponding to the brightly displayed character image). ) Is configured to be determined as the character that appears during the jackpot game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 239 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the character selection effect as shown in FIG. 239 (c) after displaying the characters "START". In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 239 (c), the characters "PUSH" are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the pressing of the effect button image 136e below these character images. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. Further, on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT, a balloon including the character display "Press the button to select a character" is displayed.

After that, for example, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 239 (d), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge is reduced by 1 second. Is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 239 (e), as shown in FIG. 239 (f), the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the old man The display in which the character image G of the above is rotated counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is started. At this time, the character image Y of the lord is displayed slightly dark, the character image G of the grandfather is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the grandfather is in a selectable state. After that, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 239 (f) to 239 (i), and as shown in FIG. 239 (i), the old character image G is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. This operation is executed every time the effect button 136 is pressed.

In this effect example, if the effect button 136 is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the character selection in which only the character image is replaced while the position where each character image is displayed at the time of operation remains the same. Cancellation display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed.

When the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press auto continuous hit function may be enabled. For example, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed after the character selection effect is started, the continuous press operation of the effect button 136 is simulated by the long press auto continuous hit function, and as a result, the pseudo effect button The character selection cancel display described above may be performed every 136 operations (for example, every 200 ms). Further, in the character selection effect, the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled.

Further, in this effect example, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the gauge update display until the character selection effect ends (the reduction of the remaining time of the character selection effect is not stopped). However, while the rotation display of the character image is being performed, the update display of the gauge may be stopped (the reduction of the remaining time of the character selection effect is stopped). That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while the character image of any one of the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the grandfather is stopped and displayed in the front.

Further, the update display of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped while the long press operation by the effect button 136 is being performed. According to this, it may be possible to suppress unnecessary operation of the effect button 136 by the player.

Further, in this production example, the character that appears during the jackpot game is selected, but for example, a song that is output during the jackpot game or in a normal game state is selected from a plurality of types of songs, or a plurality of types of songs. It can also be applied to select a story to be executed during a jackpot game from a story.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a selection effect executed during the symbol variation display. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 240 is an example of the selection effect executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, in which the effect of operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d to select one of the treasure chests (treasure box selection effect) is executed. It shows how it is.

As shown in FIG. 240 (a), when the treasure box selection effect is started, the right treasure box image BG1 and the left treasure box image BG2 are displayed in the left and right centers of the display screen on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Between the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2, the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed side by side, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the icons. The right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 are represented by, for example, light blue, and the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are represented by, for example, white. Then, at the upper part of the display screen, the characters "Select a treasure box that can be opened with the arrow keys" are displayed, and it is notified that the treasure box selection effect has started. In the upper right corner of the display screen, a variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. In this treasure box selection effect, the left button 137c and the right button 137d are operated to select the right treasure box image BG1 or the left treasure box image BG2 before the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure box selected when the operation acceptance period elapses. An effect is performed in which items may appear from the image.

After that, for example, at the timing when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 240 (b), the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode indicating that 1 second has passed, that is, a mode in which the gauge is reduced by 1 second. Will be done. At this time, the operation by the left button 137c and the right button 137d has not been performed yet.

When the left button 137c is pressed once, the decorative symbol display device 208 changes the color of the icon indicating the left button 137c from white to red, as shown in FIG. 240 (c). The color of the left treasure box image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is notified that the left treasure box image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button operation has been performed. The audio output timing may be the same timing as the display change timing, may be a timing after the display change timing, or may be a timing before the display change timing. May be good. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 240 (c), it is shown that, for example, 3 seconds have passed since the operation acceptance period started.

After that, when the operation acceptance period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time meter MT in a mode in which the gauge has 0 seconds remaining, as shown in FIG. 240 (d), and the left treasure box image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure chest image BG2 has been selected.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 240 (e), after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed, the lid is opened and a booklet as an example of the item pops out from the inside. .. The items that appear in the left treasure box image BG2 are not limited to the booklet described above, and various items such as the princess character HM as shown in FIG. 240 (e1) can also be made to appear. Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (e2), although the treasure box image is selected, the lid may not be opened and the item may not appear. Further, the same item may appear depending on whether the left treasure box image BG2 is selected and the right treasure box image BG1 is selected, or different items may appear.

In the above-mentioned production example, either the left treasure box image BG2 or the right treasure box image BG1 can be selected by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d once. For example, the selection target is a loop. You may be. Specifically, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 240 (c), when the left button 137c is pressed once, the selection target is a loop, so that the right treasure box image When BG1 is selected and the left button 137c is pressed once in that state, the left treasure box image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the target of selection is made according to the pseudo continuous striking operation. You may change the treasure chests that are. At this time, the interval of the pseudo repeated hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can easily recognize that the treasure box to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the treasure chest to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each single pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the treasure box selection effect is started, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed. Instead, the pseudo continuous striking operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after the treasure box selection effect is started.

Further, the selection target does not have to be a loop. For example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 240 (c), the selection target is left. It may be configured so as not to change from the treasure box image BG2. In this case, only the confirmation sound obtained by pressing the left button 137c once may be output. Further, in this case, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled, and if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed, but the selection is performed. The treasure chest image that is the target of the above may be configured so as not to change. Further, in this case, only the confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo repeated hit operation.

FIG. 241 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by repeatedly hitting the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 241, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the left image display device 209L is located at a position overlapping the front of the left end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the front of the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right image display device 209R is arranged at a position overlapping the above. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R each function as a fourth effect means (second image display means). The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are, for example, connected to slide drive motors (not shown) via link members, respectively, and are in directions close to each other along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is possible to move to. Further, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a rotary drive motor (not shown) via a link member, and when they are located close to each other, the decorative symbol display device 208 It is possible to rotate along the display surface. Further, the left image display device 209L is provided with a light emitting unit LL in which full-color LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer periphery thereof, and the right image display device 209R is provided with a light emitting unit LR in which LEDs are arranged side by side on the outer periphery thereof. ing. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of the second effect means. Further, the means for moving the left image display device 109L and the right image display device 209R provided with the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of the third effect means (movable means). Further, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region, and a light emitting body is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118. By reflecting the light forward at the lens cut portion, the transmission region is configured to appear to be emitting light in a predetermined pattern. The light emitting body constituting the light emitting units LL and LR is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp, or another light emitting device such as an EL may be applied. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 241, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. It is omitted. Further, even if the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the long-press auto continuous striking function is invalid in the effect example shown in FIG. 241. That is, the effect of repeatedly hitting the effect button shown in FIG. 241 can be said to be an example of the second effect. It should be noted that the long press auto continuous striking function may be effective in the effect of the continuous striking operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 241.

As shown in FIG. 241 (a), a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the lower part of the display screen of the right image display device 209R. Then, the continuous hitting effect by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT together with the effect button image BT that prompts the pressing of the effect button 136. Note that the timing shown in FIG. 241 (a) is before the start of the operation valid period, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. Further, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Further, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off, but they may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode. For example, in the normal time, they are white. It may be made to blink. In the present embodiment, a mode in which all the LEDs in the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off is also included in one mode of the light emitting mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (b), the characters "continuously hit" are displayed on the upper part of the effect button image BT, and the effect button lamp 138 emits red light to operate. You will be notified that the validity period has started. Then, the player who sees this starts the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

When the player continuously strikes the effect button 136, the light emitting units LL and LR gradually increase the number of LEDs emitted from the lower part according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 241 (c), it is shown that the LED emits yellow light from the lower ends of the light emitting units LL and LR to a height of about 1/4. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be said to be an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases according to the elapsed time. In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR simultaneously emit the same number of LEDs. For example, the light emitting unit LL is caused to emit light first, and all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LL emit light. Later, the light emitting unit LR may be started to emit light, or the light emitting unit LR may be made to emit light first, and after all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LR emit light, the light emitting unit LL may be started to emit light. You may. Further, the number of LEDs emitted by the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR may be alternately increased.

After that, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (d), the LED emits green light from the lower ends of the light emitting units LL and LR to a height of about 2/3. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be said to be an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting units LL and LR, and an effect display is performed as if the light from the LED affects the image. As described above, the light emitting colors of the light emitting units LL and LR change according to the number of LEDs emitted, that is, the number of times the effect button 136 is operated. It should be noted that only the number of emitted LEDs may be changed so that the emitted color is not changed. Further, only the emission color of the LED may be changed, and the number of emissions may not be changed. Further, the timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the LED colors of the light emitting units LL and LR change, or the LED colors may change after the effect image is displayed. , The effect image may be displayed after the color of the LED changes. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR, but may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be associated with each other.

After that, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is further continued, and at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (e), all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit red light. In the present embodiment, such a light emitting mode can be said to be an example of the second light emitting mode. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a red effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting units LL and LR, and an effect display is performed as if the light from the LED affects the image.

After that, when the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 by the player continues, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (f), the princess character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect of the continuous striking operation is successful. A mode in which the light emitting color of all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LL and LR changes (hereinafter, referred to as "rainbow color light emitting mode"" so that the light emitting units LL and LR appear to emit light in rainbow color while being notified. It may light up.). Further, in response to this, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an effect image having a display mode that is visually recognized in rainbow colors in a region along the light emitting units LL and LR. The timing at which the princess character is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect image is displayed, which is a display mode in which the effect image is visually recognized in rainbow colors, or the princess character is displayed. The timing may be earlier, or the timing when the princess character is displayed may be later.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move in directions close to each other, and left at a position where they overlap in front of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are at the closest positions. In the light emitting units LL and LR, all the LEDs are continuously lit in the rainbow-colored light emitting mode.

Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (h), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrated and rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then. At the timing shown in FIG. 241 (i), the character "celebration" congratulating the big hit is displayed across the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. At this time, the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the lower left portion of the right image display device 209R in accordance with the orientation of the right image display device 209R.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 241 (j), the light emitting body arranged near the side end portion of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. As a result, the left image display device 209L, the right image display device 209R, and the pattern formed on the transparent plate member 118 may be able to produce a deep effect. It should be noted that the effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous striking operation, as shown in FIGS. 241 (b) to (f), the light emitting mode of the light emitting units LL and LR is changed to the number of operations of the effect button 136. You can see the effects and effect images that change according to the situation. For example, if the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation after the continuous hitting operation is started, these effects are not performed. As shown in FIG. 241 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move at the timing when the operation valid period elapses. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 241 (g) to (j) without performing the continuous striking operation, but the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR change. Since it is not possible to visually recognize the effect or effect image, repeated hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the effect of turning on the light emitting units LL and LR in the modes shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e) depends on the operation of the effect button 136 a plurality of times. It can be said that the effect is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed and held.

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the continuous striking operation effect shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to 241 (e) may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are in close proximity to each other depends on the continuous pressing operation of the effect button 136. It may or may not be related to the light emitting mode (emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR that have changed. Further, when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are in close proximity to each other, the light emitting modes (emission colors) of the light emitting units LL and LR are set when the continuous hitting operation is successful and when the continuous hitting operation is performed. It may be different or the same as when it is not done.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned light emitting units LL and LR, a light emitting means whose position changes according to the content of the effect may be provided. In this case, the light emitting mode may be changed in relation to the effect of the continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 241 or may not be changed, or may be emitted in relation to the effect of another continuous striking operation. The mode may change. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned light emitting units LL and LR, a light emitting means whose position changes according to the content of the effect may not be provided.

Further, the light emitting units LL and LR have a predetermined light emitting mode (first light emitting mode) even during execution of an effect other than the effect by the continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 241 (for example, an effect during a symbol variation display or a big hit game). ), But it may be configured to light only during the execution of the effect by the continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 241. In the present embodiment, the first light emitting mode is different from the second light emitting mode, but the same light emitting mode may be used.

In the production example shown in FIG. 241, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 203) without an image display device may be applied instead of the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. The left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 may be provided with light emitting units LL and LR, respectively.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrally rotatable, but may not be rotated. Further, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be movable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be configured not to move.

Further, in the present embodiment, two image display devices (left image display device 209L and right image display device 209R) are applied as the second image display means, but one image display device may be used. It may be composed of three or more image display devices.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided in a configuration other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200 may be provided. Instead, the configuration may be provided on the front frame door 106. For example, the effect button lamp 138 may be applied instead of the light emitting units LL and LR. In this case, for example, the effect button lamp 138 may be configured such that light emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and the display mode may be changed according to the continuous striking operation. Further, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, if the light emitting unit is controlled so as to emit light in conjunction with the light emitting unit provided on the game board 200 to the light emitting unit provided on the front frame door 106, the effect may be improved. Further, any of the light emitting units in these embodiments may be movable by a movable means or may not be movable. When the movable means is provided with a light emitting unit and a non-movable light emitting unit, the immovable light emitting unit is first emitted to emit light, and then the step up is performed to emit the light emitting unit provided to the movable means. The light emission may be controlled so as to cause the light emission. Further, instead of the light emitting portions LL and LR, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 241 (j) is applied to emit light in a pattern formed in the transmission region. It may be realized by changing the mode.

FIG. 242 is a diagram illustrating an example of a back button effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 242, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, effect lamps SL1 to SL4 functioning as a second effect means are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208, and are lit by each. It is configured so that it can be controlled. The effect lamps SL1 to SL4 all have a built-in full-color LED as a light emitting means and are covered with a lens cover. The character "eight" is drawn on the lens cover of the production lamp SL1, the character "dai" is drawn on the lens cover of the production lamp SL2, and the lens cover of the production lamp SL3 is "". The characters "Sho" are drawn, and the characters "Army" are drawn on the lens cover of the production lamp SL4. Further, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 201) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region, and a light emitting body is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118. By reflecting the light forward at the lens cut portion, the transmission region is configured to appear to be emitting light in a predetermined pattern. The light emitting means constituting the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to the LED, and may be, for example, a lamp, or another light emitting device such as an EL may be applied. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 242, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. It is omitted. Further, even if the long-press auto-continuous striking function is enabled, in the effect example shown in FIG. 242, the long-press auto continuous striking function is invalid, but the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In the present embodiment, it is not notified that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid during the period in which the back button effect can be executed (the operation acceptance period for performing the back button effect). For example, a tutorial display that suggests the existence of a back button effect such as "If you operate a button at the time of ..." may be performed, and this tutorial display happens to produce a back button effect. It may be displayed during a feasible period, or it may be displayed intentionally. When the suggestion of the back button effect by such a tutorial display is performed, the effect performed by operating the effect button 136 or the like may also be referred to as the back button effect, and is not included in the back button effect. There may be.

As shown in FIG. 242 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. Further, in the center of the decorative pattern display device 208, the reach title TT "Find the family crest" is displayed in the square frame to notify that the super reach effect is started. Within the frame of this reach title TT, for example, a green color scheme is applied. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect button lamp 138 are all turned off. Here, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be turned off in a normal state, or may be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a mode of lighting in white).

After that, when a player who knows the existence of the back button effect presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (b), as shown in FIG. 242 (c), the frame of the reach title TT. The color scheme inside changes from green to red. That is, although it is not notified that the effect button 136 is operated, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) when the reach title TT is displayed, and the effect button 136 is effective during this period. The back button effect is performed by operating 136. The color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may be changed by pressing the effect button 136 once, or may be performed when there are a plurality of operations. , It may be performed when the long press operation for a predetermined time is performed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT is changed as the back button effect. For example, the color of the characters is changed, the background color and the display mode are changed. It may be changed. Further, as the back button effect, the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed only once, or the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed each time the effect button 136 is pressed. Further, by operating the effect button 136 while the reach title TT is displayed, the back button effect may or may not be performed without fail. For example, the effect button 136 may be operated. A lottery may be performed each time the game is played, and if a winner is won, a back button effect may be performed. In the example shown in FIG. 242 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated, a predetermined sound effect may be output in addition to the change in the color scheme within the frame of the reach title TT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 242 (c), even if the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation acceptance period, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may change from green to red. Further, if the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation acceptance period, the color may change to a color other than red. In this case, when the effect button 136 is further pressed, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT may be further changed (for example, green> yellow> red, etc.).

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the super reach effect. When the super reach effect is started, the characters "developed by falling family crest" are displayed on the left side edge of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the effect movable body 225 imitating the family crest is above the decorative pattern display device 208. It is notified that the development production with higher reliability of the jackpot will be started by falling from.

After the super reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 242 (d), a player who knows the existence of the back button effect (back button continuous hit effect) starts the continuous hit operation by the effect button 136, and a predetermined number of times. When the pressing operation of is performed, the effect lamp SL1 lights up in green as shown in FIG. 242 (e). That is, although it is not notified that the effect button 136 is operated, the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) during which the super reach effect is performed, and the effect button is effective during this period. By repeatedly hitting 136, the back button repeated hitting effect is performed. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in an area along the lower edge of the display screen in response to the effect lamp SL1 lighting in green, and the light from the effect lamp SL1 affects the image. The effect display is performed as if it were. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect lamp SL1 lights up in green, or the effect lamp SL1 may be turned on after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the effect lamp SL1 is turned on. Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the effect lamp SL1, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may or may not be associated with each other. Further, the effect image may not be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamp SL1 is turned on by the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136, and the effect image is displayed accordingly. However, the effect image is displayed by the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136. , The effect lamp SL1 may be turned on accordingly.

After that, when the player continuously hits the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are lit in green in this order according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. To start. FIG. 242 (f) shows that all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit in green. Although the display mode of the effect image does not change, it may be changed. For example, the display area of the effect image may be increased according to the number of lighting of the effect lamps. Further, the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to those described above, and can be appropriately set. Further, the jackpot notice may be given by making the lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 different from the usual one.

After that, the player continuously presses the effect button 136, and at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (g), the effect lamp SL1 changes its light emitting mode from green to red. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display color of the effect image changes from green to red, and the display area is also expanded upward.

After that, when the player continuously presses the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are arranged in this order from green according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The light emission mode changes to red. FIG. 242 (h) shows how all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 have changed their light emitting modes from green to red. In the present embodiment, since the long-press auto-continuous striking function is disabled in the back button continuous striking effect, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are not started to be lit when the effect button 136 is long-pressed. As described above, in the back button repeated hitting effect, the effect of lighting the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect of displaying the effect image can be said to be an example of the second effect. Further, the effect image in the back button repeated hitting effect can be said to be an example of the second display. Further, in the back button repeated hitting effect, the mode in which at least one of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is lit can be said to be an example of the second light emitting mode.

After that, when a predetermined effect time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 242 (i), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered, and the decorative symbol is lowered. The display device 208 is moved to a position where it overlaps in front of the center. At this time, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are all in a rainbow-colored light emitting mode. The descent operation of the effect movable body 225 is not due to the back button effect, but is an effect executed in the super reach effect. Further, the rainbow-colored light emitting mode by the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is a light emitting mode accompanying the movement of the effect movable body 225, and is different from the back button effect. The timing of starting lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the rainbow-colored light emitting mode may be at the same time as the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225, or before the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225. It may be the timing of, or it may be the timing after the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 242 (j), the light emitting body arranged near the side end portion of the transmission plate member 118 emits light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the background image is changed to enhance the pattern formed on the transparent plate member 118. As a result, it may be possible to perform a deep effect with the effect movable body 225 and the pattern formed on the transparent plate member 118. It should be noted that the effect of forming a predetermined pattern in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by performing the continuous striking operation, as shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h), the light emitting mode of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is used as the back button continuous striking effect. You can see the effects and effect images that change according to the number of operations of the effect button 136, but if the player does not perform the repeated hitting operation, these effects are not performed and the operation validity period elapses. At the timing of this, as shown in FIG. 242 (i), the effect movable body 225 is lowered. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 242 (i) to 242 (j) without performing the continuous hitting operation as the back button operation, but he / she visually recognizes the above-mentioned back button effect. Therefore, repeated hits of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

Further, in addition to the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 described above, a light emitting means whose light emitting mode changes according to the content of the effect may be provided. In this case, the light emitting mode may change in relation to the effect of the continuous striking operation shown in FIG. 242, may not change, or may emit light in relation to the effect of another continuous striking operation. The mode may change. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned effect lamps SL1 to SL4, it may not be provided with a light emitting means whose light emitting mode changes according to the content of the effect. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be configured to be movable according to the effect content.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided in a configuration other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200 may be provided. Instead, the configuration may be provided on the front frame door 106. Further, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be provided on both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106. In this case, for example, if the effect lamps provided on the game board 200 are controlled to emit light in conjunction with the effect lamps provided on the front frame door 106, the effect effect may be improved. Further, the effect lamps of these aspects may be movable by movable means or may not be movable. Further, when the movable means is provided with the effect lamp and the immovable effect lamp, the immovable effect lamp is first emitted, and then the step-up is performed to emit the effect lamp provided in the movable means. The light emission may be controlled so as to cause the lamp. Further, instead of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 242 (j) is applied to emit light in a pattern formed in the transmission region. It may be realized by changing the mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button continuous striking effect may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode). It can be said that the light emission of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed and held (operated in the second operation mode) in a certain effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image in the back button continuous striking effect is a display that may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operated in the first operation mode). It can be said that the display of the effect image is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed and held (operated in the second operation mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect of lighting the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect of displaying the effect image in the effect of repeatedly hitting the back button may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. ..

FIG. 243 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by long-pressing the effect button. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 243, the effect button unit 1360 is provided instead of the effect button 136. The effect button unit 1360 includes a button unit 136P and a jog dial unit 136J. The button portion 136P can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and its position is displaced according to the content of the effect. The jog dial portion 136J is formed in an annular shape and is arranged so as to surround the outside of the button portion 136P. The jog dial unit 136J can be rotated in the forward / reverse direction along the circumferential direction by the player, and a signal corresponding to the amount of operation is sent to the sensor circuit 428 of the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 204). Is entered in. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 243, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. It is omitted. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is subjected to variable display corresponding to the variable display of the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special symbol display device 214. Corresponding to, the display result is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 243 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, a reach state is formed by "decoration 3", and a super reach (swordsman reach). The production is being performed. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (a), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the game will be decided at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (a). It is shown that. In addition, in order to easily recognize the content of the effect, it is possible to display what the effect result of the big hit is (for example, a character such as "If you win the swordsman, a big hit" is displayed). Then, in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT imitating the effect button unit 1360 on the animation of the duel scene, and the effect button image BT. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below, and a notification for prompting the operation of the button unit 136P is performed. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the button portion 136P emits red light. Note that FIG. 243 (a) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the operation valid period started. Then, when the player presses the button portion 136P, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state in which the main character is defeated by the swordsman, as shown in FIG. 243 (b).

After that, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the revival effect, and the characters "Rotate the jog to rewind the time" are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the jog dial 136J. Notifies that it is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 243 (d), when the player rotates the jog dial 136J according to the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation is rewound to the display of the duel scene in the swordsman reach production. In some cases. Here, a predetermined effect such as an effect image or light emission of a lamp may be performed according to the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the animation of the duel scene again, and the big button image LBT, which is a large image imitating the effect button unit 1360, is displayed. The remaining time meter MT is displayed below the big button image LBT, and a notification for prompting the pressing of the button unit 136P is performed. Further, in the effect button unit 1360, the button portion 136P is projected, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is high. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. The timing at which the button portion 136P protrudes may be the same as the timing at which the display of the deca button image LBT is started, may be after the display of the deca button image LBT is started, or the display of the deca button image LBT is started. It may be before. In the present embodiment, when the display of the deca button image LBT is started, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is started. However, when the button portion 136P protrudes, the operation valid period of the button portion 136P is set. It may be started. Further, in FIG. 243 (e), the effect button image BT may be displayed instead of the display of the deca button image LBT. In this case, the button portion 136P may not protrude.

FIG. 243 (f) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the display of the deca button image LBT was started. When the player presses the button portion 136P as shown in FIG. 243 (f), the effect movable body 225 arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered as shown in FIG. 243 (g). Then, it moves to a position where it overlaps the front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image in order to enhance the fact that the effect movable body 225 has descended.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 243 (h), the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, move to positions close to each other, and the effect movable body 225 It becomes a form that surrounds both the left and right sides of. The left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are formed by cutting out a part of a semicircular plate-shaped member in an arc shape, and have a shape substantially along the outer circumference of the effect movable body 225. In the present embodiment, it is notified that the effect movable body 225 will be a big hit by operating, and the player may be able to recognize that the effect is a big hit by seeing this effect. It should be noted that the effect shown in FIGS. 243 (g) to 243 (h) does not have to be performed without fail. For example, even if the button portion 136P is operated, the effect movable body 225 does not descend and comes off. The result may be displayed.

After that, the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R retract to the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 225 retracts above the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 243 (i). In the decorative pattern display device 208, a display showing how the hero has defeated the swordsman is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the long press auto continuous striking function is effective in the swordsman reach effect, and after the effect shown in FIG. 243 (c) is performed, the jog dial 136J is not rotated and FIG. 243 ( As shown in d'), the effect shown in FIG. 243 (e) may be performed as if the jog dial 136J was rotated by long-pressing the button unit 136P.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured that a predetermined effect is started on the assumption that the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J is performed by performing the long press operation on the button unit 136P. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that a predetermined operation by an operation device other than the effect button is replaced by a long press operation of the effect button. Examples of operation devices other than the effect buttons include touch panels and touch sensors. For example, in the case of a touch sensor, when performing an operation such as rubbing a hand on the sensor to request that the detection / non-detection of the sensor be repeated a plurality of times, press and hold the effect button for this operation. It may be replaced by an operation.

Further, instead of the long press operation of the effect button, the long press auto continuous hit function may be enabled by a long press operation by an operation device other than the effect button. For example, a long press operation on the touch panel or a touch may be performed. It may be configured to exhibit the long-press auto-continuous hitting function by detecting the sensor for a long time.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a specific production example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the production example shown in FIG. 244, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. It is omitted. FIGS. 244 (a1) to 244 (e1) show how the effect of operating the effect button 136 in rhythm is executed in the super reach. In this super reach, when the long press auto continuous striking function is set, the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, but the long press auto continuous striking function may be disabled.

As shown in FIG. 244 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, the reach state is formed by "decoration 3", and the super reach (princess dance) is performed. SP reach) The production is being performed. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "step 1" indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are multiple types of difficulty, for example, it is configured to change according to the degree of expectation for a big hit and the degree of success of the production in this princess dance SP reach.

Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 244 (a1), a timing image TM including the characters "CHANGE" is displayed on the right side of the display screen as being moved from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen. The hit image HT is displayed on the movement path of the timing image TM. This timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing that overlaps with the hit image HT in time with the music. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red to notify that the operation is being accepted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 244 (b1), the player starts a long press operation of the effect button 136. Then, the long-press auto continuous hitting function is activated, and the pseudo effect button 136 is repeatedly hit at regular intervals regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT. While the long-press auto continuous hit function is operating, the pseudo effect button 136 may be operated only at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT. On the other hand, a skilled player does not play a game for beginners such as pressing and holding the effect button 136 to activate the long press auto continuous hit function, and the effect button is at a position where the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT. You can also aim for a high score by playing a game that operates 136. The method of playing this "princess dance SP reach" is the same as that shown in FIG. 233 and described above.

After that, the game of the first turn in the princess dance SP reach is completed, and the result of the game in the first turn is determined. If the determination result is a level-up determination result, the characters "NICE" are displayed as shown in FIG. 244 (c1), and it is notified that the difficulty level shifts to "step 2". .. At the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c1), since the operation is out of the valid period, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off.

After that, the game with a difficulty level of "step 2" is started. FIG. 244 (d1) shows how the game is being played at a difficulty level of “step 2”. After that, when the player starts the long-pressing operation of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e1), the long-press auto continuous striking function is activated again, and the continuous striking operation of the pseudo effect button 136 is restarted. ..

In the present embodiment, the period in which the long-press auto-continuous striking function is effective is repeated. For example, the first period in which the long-press auto-continuous striking function is effective (for example, FIGS. 244 (a1) to FIG. The second period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 244 (c1)) in which the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is effective is sandwiched between the period shown in b1) and the interval period (for example, the period shown in FIG. , When the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time during the period from FIG. 244 (d1) to FIG. 244 (e1), the second after the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is once disabled. During the period of, the long press auto continuous striking function is not effective unless the effect button 136 is pressed again. In addition, when the effect button 136 is long-pressed over the second period with an interval period from the first period, the effect button 136 is not pressed again, but the long-press auto is performed in the second period. The repeated hit function may be enabled.

FIGS. 244 (a2) to 244 (d2) show an example of the operation when the premier up mode is selected on the effect customization setting screen as described above with reference to FIG. 211.

FIG. 244 (a2) shows how the premier up mode is set as shown in FIG. 211 (h1) and as described above.

As described above, when the continuous striking operation effect is started after the premier up mode is set, as shown in FIG. 244 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 prompts the pressing of the effect button 136. Along with the BT, the characters "Strike repeatedly" are displayed in the center of the screen, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In this continuous striking operation effect, when the long press auto continuous striking function is set, the long press auto continuous striking function is effective. When the player recognizes that the continuous striking operation effect has been started, the player starts the continuous striking operation with the effect button 136.

After that, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed to perform the operation a plurality of times, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image composed of the character of the lord and the characters "iron plate" as shown in FIG. 244 (c2). It may be displayed and a premier notice may be given to inform that the jackpot is confirmed. In this embodiment, since the premier up mode is set, this premier notice is likely to occur, and if it is set to a mode other than the premier up mode on the production customization setting screen, a notice other than the premier notice is given. Is likely to occur.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the "decoration 5"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5" which is a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mission achievement display indicating the achievement of the mission (task) is displayed. The mission achievement display is like the history of the effect generation display (here, the effect generation display displayed as "NO92: I saw the iron plate notice") that has been displayed so far. It should be noted that the effect generation display corresponding to the effect with a high degree of expectation may be displayed for a longer period of time. On the other hand, the effect generation display corresponding to the effect having a low degree of expectation may disappear immediately, and when the effects are executed one after another, they may be overwritten one after another. Further, the effect generation display may be provided with a display indicating the degree of expectation of the effect and the frequency of appearance, and may be, for example, a rank display of rank A to C. In addition, this mission achievement display may be a display for opening a hidden effect for a membership service. That is, for example, by performing the premier notice shown in FIG. 244 (c2), a specific hidden effect (for example, a specific character can be selected) becomes executable, and the mission is achieved. It may be displayed in the display.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting the premier up mode, the premier notice is likely to occur. Therefore, for example, when the player's game history points are easily accumulated or a mission is given. May be easier to complete the mission.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the menu screen described above with reference to FIGS. 211 to 212, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is pressed once to move the cursor CL and transition the setting screen. As a benefit of the effort of setting the premier up mode, it is easy to generate a premier notice (premier production).

Further, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the result set on the menu screen described above is reflected in the effect in which the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is effective.

FIG. 245 is a diagram illustrating an example of the chance eye effect. The figure below shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 245 shows a state in which the effect shifts to the super reach after the effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed in the chance eye effect. In the production example shown in FIG. 244, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. It is omitted. Further, in this chance-eye effect, even when the long-press auto continuous hit function is set, the long-press auto continuous hit function is invalid, but the long-press auto continuous hit function may be enabled.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a1), after variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. The chance symbol "A" that constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol "B" that constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" that constitutes a part of the above is stopped and displayed, and is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are the chance eyes. Then, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT1 for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "A" stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT2 for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the press of the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT3, which indicates the remaining time of, is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a1), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed from the time when the chance eye effect is started. In the present embodiment, with respect to the effect that enables the player to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed in advance, the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled in order to allow the player to perform a careful operation. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 245 (a1), the lord symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbol each time the effect button 136 is operated. May occur. FIG. 245 (b1) shows how the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a mode in which three palace symbols YM1 to YM3 are aligned. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in such a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned is an example of the second display (second effect). On the other hand, it is displayed in the middle of a plurality of operations, for example, a display in a mode in which only the palace symbol YM1 is displayed, or a display in a mode in which the palace symbol YM1 and the palace symbol YM2 are displayed together and the palace symbol YM3 is not displayed. Can be said to be a display other than the second display. That is, some kind of effect (output of sound effect, etc.) is performed for each operation of the effect button 136, and after that is performed a plurality of times, the second display (second effect) is displayed (or executed). It can be said.

Then, as shown in FIG. 245 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the cut-in effect including the character display of "heat" is performed, the super reach effect is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (d1). To be started. In the chance-eye effect, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display is in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are aligned. Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) is started without the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1). Further, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display is in a mode in which three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are aligned. After the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1) is performed, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d1) may be started without performing the above.

As described above, in the chance eye effect shown in FIGS. 245 (a1) to (d1), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the lord symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are displayed. In some cases, the display in all three modes can be visually recognized. In other words, if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. The same can be said for the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 245 (c1).

Further, for example, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b1) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in the production in which the long-press auto continuous hit function is disabled, the advanced user can quickly operate the production button 136 a plurality of times to see the production earlier than the beginner. Therefore, you may be able to feel a sense of accomplishment.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a2), after variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. The chance symbol "A" that constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol "B" that constitutes a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol "C" that constitutes a part of the above is stopped and displayed, and is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols that are the chance eyes. Then, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT1 for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "A" stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT2 for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "B" stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the characters "PUSH" are displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the press of the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol "C" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed. The remaining time meter MT3, which indicates the remaining time of, is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (a2), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. That is, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed from the time when the chance eye effect is started. In the present embodiment, with respect to the effect that enables the player to recognize the number of times the effect button 136 should be pressed in advance, the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled in order to allow the player to perform a careful operation. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 245 (a2), the lord symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbol each time the operation button 136 is operated. May occur. FIG. 245 (b2) shows how the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a mode in which three palace symbols YM1 to YM3 are aligned.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the effect button 136 is pressed once more. An additional effect of button operation is being performed to encourage this. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 245 (c2-1), the characters "Put your spirit and press" are displayed above the display in the form in which three lord symbols YM1 to YM3 are aligned. , The specified effect image is displayed. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red to notify that the operation valid period has started.

Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 245 (c2-2), as shown in FIG. 245 (d2), the decorative symbol display measure 208 starts the super reach effect. However, at this time, a character display of "super hot" is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot of this super reach production is high. In the chance-eye effect, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display is in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b2) are aligned. Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 245 (d2) is started without performing the button operation additional effect shown in FIGS. 245 (c2-1) to (c2-2). In this case, for example, it is not necessary to add the character display of "super hot".

As described above, in the chance eye effect shown in FIGS. 245 (a2) to (d2), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the lord symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 245 (b2) are displayed. In some cases, the display in all three modes can be visually recognized. In other words, if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, it is not possible to visually recognize the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are aligned. This can be said to be the same for the button operation additional effect shown in FIGS. 245 (c2-1) to (c2-2).

Further, for example, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period elapses without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 245 (b2) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in the production in which the long-press auto continuous hit function is disabled, the advanced user can quickly operate the production button 136 a plurality of times to see the production earlier than the beginner. Therefore, you may be able to feel a sense of accomplishment.

Further, in this effect example, after the number of operations of the effect button 136 is recognizable in advance, the effect of further operating the effect button 136 is performed, so that the number of times the effect button 136 should be operated is clear from the beginning. In some cases, the expectation for the player can be increased.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing another display example of the menu screen. FIG. 246 shows, for example, how various settings are made on the menu screen that can be executed in the standby state in which the symbol variation display is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), "decoration 3"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 1", which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Corresponding to, the display result is stopped. Further, since the number of holdings of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 0, none of the first special figure 1 holding display h11 to the fourth special figure holding display h14 is displayed in a mode in which they are not held. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), a special figure 1 hold number display unit 281A indicating the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 by a number is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. In the special figure 1 hold number display unit 281A, "0" indicating that the hold number is 0 is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 246 (a), the effect display of the standby state is performed.

Further, at the upper part of the display screen, the characters "menu screen display with" are displayed together with the icon representing the effect button 136, and it is notified that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the effect button 136. ing.

Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 246 (b). Specifically, on the menu screen, "volume and light intensity adjustment" for adjusting the volume and light intensity, "member registration" for registering the player's game history by entering a password, and acquisition of the player's game history. Three menus of "game history" are displayed in a selectable manner. At the bottom of these menus, the characters "Select with" are displayed along with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and on the right side, the characters "Enter with" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is notified that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed by operating the effect button 136. In this production example, the menu of "game history" is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 137d twice, and when the long press auto repeated hit function is disabled, the first In the execution of the selection display, the case where the operation means performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode rather than the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. Can be said to be an example of the first image in which is easily selected. Further, in this effect example, the menu screen can be said to be an example of a first selection display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operating means.

On this menu screen, the long-press auto continuous hit function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous hit operation. You may move it. At this time, the interval of the pseudo repeated hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each single pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the menu screen is displayed, the pseudo continuous striking operation is not performed. , The pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the menu screen.

When "volume light amount adjustment" is selected as described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 246 (c). That is, an "adjustment screen" indicating that the volume and the amount of light can be adjusted is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and below that, an 11-step gauge of 0 to 10 indicating the volume is displayed. The brightness of the display screen on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the 11-step gauge of 0 to 10 indicating the light intensity of the game board lamp 532 and the game underframe lamp 542 are displayed. Then, below these gauges, the characters "change with" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and further to the right side, the characters "determine with" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the settings for the items (volume and light intensity) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed, and by operating the effect button 136, the changed volume setting can be performed. In addition to determining that the effect is executed by setting the amount of light, it is notified that the adjustment screen can be terminated. On this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the amount of light by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the amount of light by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. After that, the setting can be changed in the direction of decreasing the volume or the amount of light each time the left button 137c is pressed, and the setting is changed in the direction of increasing the volume or the amount of light each time the right button 137d is pressed. be able to.

On this adjustment screen, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the volume and the amount of light are adjusted according to the pseudo continuous striking operation. It may be possible to change the setting of. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the volume and light amount settings may be changed only for each single pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the transition to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous striking operation is not performed. , The pseudo continuous striking operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the adjustment screen. Similarly, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may be in a state in which the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled or disabled.

In this production example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for setting the volume can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said that this is an example of the first selection display. Then, for example, when the setting is "0" in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting "10" is once by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that it is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the operation is performed a second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed, and the volume setting. The audio output executed at "10" can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light intensity setting.

When "member registration" is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. 246 (d). That is, at the top of the display screen, "Please enter the password" is displayed to the effect that the password can be entered, and below that, a 4-digit input to display the entered characters is displayed. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, alphabets A to Z and a cursor UB, which is an underlined display mode, are displayed. The cursor UB points to only one of the alphabets A to Z, and points to "S" on the display screen shown in FIG. 246 (d). In this password input screen, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are pressed, the cursor UB moves, and when the effect button 136 is pressed, the cursor UB points to the cursor UB. The alphabet is displayed in the input character display area with the alphabet as the input target character. Then, if the entered password is correct as a result of entering the alphabet in each of the four-digit input character display areas, the game history corresponding to the entered password is entered. When the password input screen is terminated, it can be executed by, for example, pressing the cancel button 136f.

In this password input screen, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d are continuously pressed, a pseudo The cursor UB may be moved according to the repeated hitting operation. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each single pressing operation of the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d. May be done. In addition, when the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled, if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d are continuously pressed before the transition to the password input screen is performed. , The pseudo repeated hitting operation is performed by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after moving to the password input screen without performing the pseudo repeated hitting operation. You may.

In this production example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the password input screen is the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is "S", the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet "K" is the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. This is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the operation means performs the second operation in the first operation mode than when the operation means performs one operation in. Can be done.

Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is enabled, the password input screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. Then, for example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is "S", the display mode in which the cursor UB points to the alphabet "K" is the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be selected when the operation means performs the third number of operations in, and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said to be an example of a second image that can be selected. In other words, it can be said that the display mode pointing to the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the left button 137c is repeatedly hit, and the display mode pointing to the alphabet "K" is displayed even when the left button 137c is pressed and held.

When "game history" is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issuing screen as shown in FIG. 246 (e). That is, at the upper part of the display screen, a "code issuance screen" is displayed to the effect that the game history can be acquired by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like equipped with an imaging means. A two-dimensional code CD in which the player's game history is coded is displayed, and the characters "Please read" prompting the reader to read the two-dimensional code CD are displayed. In this effect example, the code issuance screen can be said to be an example of an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

The menus that can be selected on the menu screen described above are not limited to those described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (f), a favorite selection screen for selecting a character to appear during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the favorite selection screen, a "favorite selection screen" indicating that a character can be selected is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, and below that, a "character A" for making the character A appear. , "Character B" for making character B appear and "Character C" for making character C appear, can be selected from three selection items. Below these selection items, the characters "Select with" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and further to the right, the characters "Enter" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is notified that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the character indicated by the cursor CL can be made to appear by operating the effect button 136.

In this favorite selection screen, the long-press auto continuous hit function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is adjusted to the pseudo continuous hit operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval of the pseudo repeated hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each single pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long-press auto continuous striking function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the transition to the favorite selection screen, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed. Instead, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

In this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the favorite selection screen is the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of "Character C" is the operation means in the first operation mode rather than the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that this is an example of the first image that is more likely to be selected when the second operation is performed. Then, the effect by the character C in which the "character C" is selected and appears can be said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. Then, the selection item of "Character C" can be selected when the operation means performs the operation a third number of times in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that this is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the selection display. Then, the effect by the character C in which the "character C" is selected and appears can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output during a big hit or in a normal game state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, it is possible to select from three selection items: "song A" for outputting song A, "song B" for outputting song B, and "song C" for outputting song C. It is displayed in. Below these selection items, the characters "Select with" are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and further to the right, the characters "Enter" are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. It is informed that the cursor CL can be moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output by operating the effect button 136.

On this song selection screen, the long-press auto continuous hit function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is adjusted to the pseudo continuous hit operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval of the pseudo repeated hitting operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each single pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the transition to the song selection screen, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed. Instead, the pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the song selection screen.

The song selection screen shown in FIG. 246 (g) may be executed, for example, in the jackpot start effect.

In this production example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the song selection screen is the first image in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of "Song C" is the operation means in the first operation mode, rather than the case where one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that this is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed. Then, the music C in which "song C" is selected and output can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is enabled, the song selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. Then, the selection item of "Song C" can be selected when the operation means performs a third number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that this is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the selection display. Then, the song C in which "song C" is selected and output can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 246 (h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, a "customization screen" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen to the effect that various settings in the game can be set individually, and below that, function 1, function 2, and function 3 are displayed. ... Each setting item and the setting content for each setting item are displayed. Then, below these displays, the characters "select with" are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and further to the right side, "change with" together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Is displayed, and the function for changing the setting can be selected by pressing the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the setting for the function selected by the left button 137c and the right button 137d can be changed. It has been notified. The selected function is surrounded by a thick frame.

In this customization screen, the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled, and when the up button 137a or the down button 137b is continuously pressed, a thick frame is set according to the pseudo continuous striking operation. You may move it. At this time, the interval of the pseudo continuous striking operation may be set to, for example, an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each single pressing operation of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. In addition, when the long press auto repeated hitting is enabled, if the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed before the transition to the customize screen, the pseudo repeated hitting operation is not performed. After shifting to the customize screen, the pseudo continuous striking operation may be performed by pressing the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b again.

In addition, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed while the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, the setting can be changed according to the pseudo continuous striking operation. You may. Alternatively, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled, and the function may be changed only for each single pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. In addition, when the long press auto repeated hitting is enabled, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the transition to the customize screen, the pseudo repeated hitting operation is not performed. After moving to the customize screen, the left button 137c or the right button 137d may be pressed again to perform a pseudo continuous striking operation.

When the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to 246 (h) are displayed, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, or the effect button 136 is pressed and held. In this state, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the effect related to the operation of the above-mentioned effect button 136 or the like is started, the long-press auto continuous hit function is enabled and the operation is performed. A pseudo continuous striking operation of the button may be performed, or a pseudo continuous striking operation by the long press auto continuous striking function may be performed on condition that the button is pressed again after the effect is started. Then, the long press auto repeated hit function may be disabled.

Further, the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 246 (b) to 246 (h) are configured to fill the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, FIGS. 246 (b) to 246 (h). The various setting screens shown in FIG. (H) may be made smaller than the entire display screen, and may be displayed superimposed on the standby state effect display shown in FIG. 246 (a).

Further, in the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 246 (a), when the effect button 136 is pressed once, the display of the menu screen shown in FIG. 246 (b) is not used. For example, various setting screens as shown in FIGS. 246 (c) to 246 (h) may be directly displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not it is possible to enable the long-press automatic continuous striking function. For example, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 246 (b), an ON / OFF setting menu for the long-press auto-continuous striking function is provided, and in this setting menu, the effect button is provided on condition that the long-press auto-continuous striking function is turned on. When the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled when 136 is pressed and held, and when the long press auto continuous hit function is turned off, the long press auto continuous hit function is not enabled even when the effect button 136 is long pressed. You may do so. Further, ON / OFF of the long press auto continuous striking function may be set by a predetermined operation by the operation key unit 137.

Further, in the effect example described so far, when the continuous striking operation effect is executed, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, the effect button image may also display a moving image in which the effect button image is repeatedly pressed accordingly. Further, when the long-press operation effect is executed, if the effect button 136 is long-pressed, the effect button image may also display a moving image as if the long-pressed button image. In addition, when the long-press auto continuous hit function is enabled and the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time to perform a pseudo continuous hit operation, the effect button image is also repeatedly hit instead of long-press. You may want to display a video that looks like you are doing it, or you may display a video that looks like you have been holding it down. The moving image display corresponding to such an operation is not limited to the effect button 136, and may be applied to, for example, the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 246, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may be applied. It may be applied to the icon of.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing how the initial setting of the effect movable object is performed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 247, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), the effect movable object GM1 is provided on the game board 200, and the position indicated by the chain line in the figure (decorative symbol display device 208). It is configured to be able to move from the upper position (the position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208) to the position indicated by the solid line (the position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208). Further, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), an effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and an effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The effect movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the rotation support shaft side of the front frame door 106 as a support axis, and the effect movable member GM3 is supported along the upper end side of the front frame door 106. A shaft is provided, and the support shaft is used as a support shaft and is rotatably attached upward. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

In order for these effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 to operate normally, it is necessary to perform an initial operation to recognize the initial position. However, the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may collide with the game clerk, for example, by being operated at an unintended timing of the game clerk who is opening the store. , These effect movable members GM2 and GM3 need to perform the initial operation at the timing intended by the game clerk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided on the game board 200, which is unlikely to hit the game clerk. Is done. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time within 1 minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 247 (c). The initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is performed. As a result, it may be possible to reduce the risk of the game clerk colliding with the effect movable member performing the initial operation during the opening work of the game clerk.

Here, a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed in order to perform the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3, and the variation display of the decorative symbol starts in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. Then, when the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 described above is started, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled to perform a pseudo continuous striking operation of the effect button 136. A pseudo continuous striking operation by the long press auto continuous striking function may be performed on condition that the effect button 136 is pressed again after the effect is started, or even if the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled. Good.

The initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is started by a long press operation by the effect button 136, but the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is started by a single press operation (single operation) by the effect button 136. May be started, or the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 may be started by the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136.

Further, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be enabled only for a part of the selection effects described so far, or the long-press auto continuous striking function may be enabled for all of them. Further, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may not be enabled for only a part of the selection effects described so far, or the long-press auto-continuous striking function may not be enabled for all of them.

Further, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times while the front frame door 106 is open, a specific menu for setting by the game clerk may be executable. In this case, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be disabled or enabled.

Further, the above-mentioned long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled across a plurality of symbol fluctuations, or may be disabled when the symbol is stopped and displayed, and straddles a plurality of symbol fluctuations. It may not work.

In addition, when a plurality of effect buttons are provided, when one effect button is repeatedly pressed with a pseudo effect button by the long-press auto-continuous hit function, the operation for the other effect button is not accepted. Alternatively, the acceptance of the operation on one of the effect buttons may be temporarily stopped, the operation on the other effect button may be accepted, and then the acceptance of the operation on the one effect button may be resumed.

Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136, a lever for effect, a touch sensor, and the like may be provided, and the long-press auto continuous hit function and the auto button function may be enabled for the effect lever and touch sensor.

Further, for example, the effect in which the long-press auto-continuous hit function is disabled may be given regularity. For example, after the start of the super reach effect, the effect in which the long-press auto-continuous hit function is effective should not be performed. It may be. In addition, after the start of the super reach effect, the continuous hit effect may be performed.

Further, among the feasible continuous hitting effects, the number of the effects in which the long-pressed auto-continuous hitting function is disabled may be larger than the number in which the long-pressed automatic continuous-hit function is enabled. You may.

Further, the expectation for the big hit may be higher or lower in the effect in which the long-press auto-continuous hit function is disabled than in the effect in which the long-press auto-continuous hit function is enabled.

Further, in addition to the second effect, the Nth effect may be an effect in which the long press auto continuous striking function is invalidated.

Further, in addition to the first effect, the third effect may be an effect in which the long press auto continuous striking function is effective.

Further, the second effect may be the only effect in which the long-press auto continuous hit function is invalidated.

Further, the first effect may be the only effect in which the long-press auto-continuous hit function is effective.

Further, for example, the long-press auto continuous hit function may be enabled for those whose display is determined as a result of the operation.

In addition, the long-press auto-continuous striking function may be enabled in the effect in which the character "continuous striking" is displayed.

Further, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled for the continuous striking operation effect (or the multiple operation effect) relating to the success or failure of the big hit.

Further, in the embodiments described so far, for example, an effect or the like may be produced in accordance with the pseudo-continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 by the long-press auto continuous striking function. It can be said that the production is different from the first production in the invention. In other words, it can be said that the first effect is an effect displayed as a result of performing a pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the long press auto continuous striking function.

Further, in the continuous striking operation effect in which the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled, for example, an effect effect may be performed in accordance with the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) of the effect button 136 by the player. Can be said to be an effect different from the second effect referred to in the present invention. In other words, the second effect can be said to be an effect displayed as a result of the repeated hitting operation (multiple operations) of the effect button 136.

In addition, the long-press auto-continuous striking function is effective for the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) effect in which the execution is determined mainly by the control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines the result. Alternatively, the long-press auto-repeated hit function may be disabled.

Further, the execution is determined mainly by a control means different from the control means (for example, the main control unit 300) that determines the result (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500). The long-press auto-continuous striking function may be enabled, or the long-press auto continuous striking function may be disabled for the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) effect.

Further, an example of the relationship between the effect button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136, including the examples described so far, is as follows.

(1) If a single operation is performed after the button effect (single operation effect) for executing one pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136 is started, the effect related to the result of the operation is executed. To.

(2) In the case where the single-shot operation effect is executed a plurality of times in succession, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, the effect related to the result of the operation related to all the button effects is executed.

(3) If the continuous hit operation is performed after the button effect (continuous hit operation effect) for executing the multiple pressing operations (continuous hit operation) by the effect button 136 is started, the effect related to the result of the operation is executed. To. Further, when the long press operation is performed by the effect button 136 after the continuous striking operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation is executed when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled.

(4) Long-press operation If a continuous hit operation is performed after the effect is started, the effect may proceed as it is, for example, the effect is executed according to the cumulative time of pressing the effect button 136. .. Further, if the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long press auto continuous striking function is effective, the effect may be advanced as it is by performing a pseudo continuous striking operation, or the effect button 136 is operated as if it was long pressed. May be accepted.

(5) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed (continuously pressed state), the operation by the effect button 136 is accepted as long as the continuously pressed state is maintained. Absent.

(6) When the continuous striking operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, when the long press auto continuous striking function is enabled, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed to execute the effect related to the operation result. To. In this case, a pseudo continuous striking operation is performed from the time when the continuous striking operation effect is started. Further, when the continuous striking operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous striking operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single-shot operation is performed. You may. Further, when the continuous pressing operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

(7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous press state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained.

(8) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state and then the single-shot operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these single-shot operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect relating to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the predetermined single-shot operation effect having a high priority is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(9) When the single-shot operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result for the single-shot operation effect and the effect related to the operation result for the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Will be done. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(10) In the continuous pressing state, when the single-shot operation effect is started and then the long-press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single-shot operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long-press operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(11) When the continuous striking operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state and then the single-shot operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result for the single-shot operation effect and the effect related to the operation result for the continuous striking operation effect are executed. Will be done. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(12) When the continuous striking operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state and then the continuous striking operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these continuous striking operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the previously started continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the predetermined high-priority continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(13) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous striking operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous striking operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(14) In the continuous pressing state, when the long-press operation effect is started and then the single-shot operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long-press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single-shot operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(15) In the continuous pressing state, when the long-press operation effect is started and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long-press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect. Is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(16) In the continuous pressing state, when the long-press operation effect is started and then the long-press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these long-press operation effects is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started earlier is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is executed. Alternatively, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the predetermined high-priority long-press operation effect is executed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, neither effect is executed.

(17) If a long-press operation is performed after the long-press operation effect is started and a single-shot operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long-press operation effect is executed. Unless the long-press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single-shot operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect related to the result of the operation for the long-press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single-shot operation effect are executed. Further, when the continuous striking operation is performed after the long-press operation effect is started and the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the long-press operation effect is, for example, according to the cumulative time of pressing the effect button 136. In some cases, the effect may be advanced as it is, such as when the effect is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation for the one-shot operation effect is executed.

(18) If the long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not executed. Alternatively, both the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Further, when the continuous striking operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started and the continuous striking operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, according to the cumulative pressing time of the effect button 136. The effect may be advanced as it is, such as when the effect is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is executed.

(19) When the long-press operation effect is performed after the long-press operation effect is started and the long-press operation effect is started in that state, the result of the operation for the previously started long-press operation effect is concerned. Unless only the effect is executed and the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the long press operation effects is also executed. Further, if the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for example, the effect button 136 may be used for the previously started long press operation effect. The effect may progress as it is, such as the effect according to the cumulative press time of, and for the long press operation effect started later, for example, the effect according to the cumulative press time of the effect button 136 is executed. In some cases, the production may proceed as it is.

(20) If a long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and a single operation effect is started in that state, the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled and the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result of is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation related to the single-shot operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once released. Alternatively, both the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single-shot operation effect are executed. In addition, when the continuous striking operation is performed after the continuous striking operation effect is started and the single-shot operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous striking operation effect and the result of the operation for the single-shot operation effect. Both of the productions related to are performed.

(21) If a long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled and the repeated hits started earlier are enabled. Only the effect related to the result of the operation for the operation effect is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation for the operation effect started later is not executed unless the long press operation is once released. Alternatively, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the repeated hit operation effects is also executed. Further, when the continuous striking operation effect is performed after the continuous striking operation effect is started and the continuous striking operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the continuous striking operation effects is also executed.

(22) If a long press operation is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press auto continuous hit function is enabled, and the continuous hit operation effect is described. Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation related to the long press operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once released. Alternatively, both the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect are executed. Further, if the continuous striking operation is performed after the continuous striking operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous striking operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is executed. For example, the effect may be advanced as it is, for example, the effect is executed according to the cumulative pressing time of the effect button 136.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 248 to 272. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

FIGS. 248 to 272 are diagrams that stepwise show the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 248 to 272, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. Although the figure is shown, the drawing of the normal drawing display device 210 and the general drawing holding lamp 216 is omitted. In FIGS. 248 to 272, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the same as the stop symbol modes shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b). Has been done. Further, in FIGS. 248 to 272, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 248. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not shown, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are symbols for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or the symbol is stopped). In the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, while the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special figure 1 is displayed, and the symbol of the special figure 1 is displayed. During the fluctuation, the "-" symbol is blinking. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, while the symbol in the special figure 2 is stopped, the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of the loss or the symbol corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the special figure 2 is displayed, and the symbol of the special figure 2 is displayed. During the fluctuation, the "-" symbol is blinking. As described above, the fourth symbol is not only different in the display position from the decorative symbol, but also in the display mode (here, the shape), so that the player can distinguish it at a glance. By changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol, a pre-reading notice or a notice regarding the symbol variation display may be given.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 248 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). On the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, the hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state.

The number of holds of special figure 1 is represented by the number of hold icons of special figure 1 in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 218 of special figure 1. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The hold icons of Special Figure 1 are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the left side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 248 (1), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed, and all of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 have a default display mode (round shape). It is displayed in a non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 248 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), so that it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 according to the control state (game state). .. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is hidden as shown in FIG. 248 (1). When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is hidden.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Figure 2 is also a round, unpatterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from that of the hold icon in Special Figure 1. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a distinction at a glance.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device → the blinking start or turn off of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. , This order may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon which is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. , Displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (3), the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and the hold notice has been started. That is, the display mode of Sabohani is the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), a button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136 has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (4), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display state of the button reception time meter MT changes in a manner in which the gauge in the rectangular frame decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. This button reception time meter MT is a display indicating the maximum time that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received after the operation validity period starts. Here, the button image 136a is displayed overlapping (overlapping) on the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, but is arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and overlapped (overlapped) by the decorative symbol. ) May be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 248 (4), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (5), the step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 248 (6). To. At this time, the button reception time meter MT is erased together with the button image 136a. The step-up notice is a notice that the switching display is performed by a plurality of steps, and is a notice that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is high as the steps progress. The step-up notice in this effect example is a notice effect related to the symbol variation display, but may be executed as a look-ahead notice. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (6), the display SU1 of step 1 in the step-up notice is displayed. The display SU1 in step 1 is a display represented by the face of the character of the chief. In this production example, the case where the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed and then the display of step 2 is performed is more than the case where the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed and then the display of step 2 is not performed. Is also configured so that it is easy to get a big hit (the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed). Although the display SU1 in step 1 is displayed overlapping on the front side of the middle symbol of the decorative symbol, it may be arranged on the rear side of the decorative symbol and displayed so as to be superimposed by the decorative symbol. Further, even if the effect button 136 is operated, the step-up notice may not be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the step-up notice has ended, and the display SU1 in step 1 has been deleted. That is, in this step-up notice, the display SU1 in step 1 ends.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (9), a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 248 (10). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area 280 without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (12), the button operation effect is started, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed as shown in FIG. 248 (4) as described above. At the timing shown in FIG. 248 (12), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (13), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14), FIG. 248 (15) shows. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Here, the decreasing speed of the gauge may be faster than, the same as, or slower than the decreasing speed of the gauge displayed before the effect button 136 is operated. Further, on the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of Bancho mini-characters BCH consisting of the face of the Bancho (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (15)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. The number of mini-characters BCH of the number length displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation valid period is started). In this production example, the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, which functions as a notice display suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. When the effect button 136 is operated, the display of the mini character BCH of the chief in the button reception time meter MT (notice display using the button reception time meter MT) starts after the display of the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice display may be started after the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is started, or the step-up notice display start and the button may be started. The start of the notice display using the reception time meter MT may be the same timing. This also applies to the following description. Further, the notice display using this button reception time meter MT is performed from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the maximum time of the operation valid period elapses, but ends at an earlier timing. It may end at a late timing. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the mini character BCH of the chief may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, in this production example, the case where the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini character BCH of the chief is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is configured in. In addition, a mini-character different from the Bancho mini-character BCH (for example, a princess mini-character) may be displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the displayed mini-character. Further, after the mini character BCH of the bancho is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, a step-up notice that the displayed mini character changes may be given. For example, the display mode of the mini character BCH of the bancho changes. The more likely it is to be a big hit. In this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is the same regardless of the number of the mini character BCH of the Bancho displayed, but the reliability of the jackpot depends on the number of the mini character BCH of the Bancho displayed. May be different. For example, the greater the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of the deca button, a display mode in which the button vibrates and rotates, etc.), and for example, a display mode of the deca button. When the button image 136a is displayed in, when the effect button 136 is operated, the princess mini-character may easily appear on the button reception time meter MT, and the princess mini-character may appear on the appearing mini character. When it is included, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when only the mini character BCH of the chief appears. On the other hand, when the button image 163a is displayed in the default display mode, only the mini character BCH of the Bancho may be likely to appear. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts, a notice is displayed in such a manner that the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. The notice may be displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the reception time meter MT (for example, changing from blue to red, etc.), or the notice may be displayed by changing the shape of the button reception time meter MT. You may do so. Further, in this effect example, the type of notice display on the button reception time meter MT may differ depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period starts. For example, the operation valid period starts. If the effect button 136 is operated at an early timing, the mini character BCH of the Bancho is likely to be displayed, and if the effect button 136 is operated at a later timing after the operation validity period starts, the timer is displayed. A notice may be given. Further, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is performed by a display means other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, a sub display device, a front door frame 106, a display device provided on the door 108 with a ball storage plate, etc.). You may do so.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (16), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. The display SU2 in step 2 is a display represented by the whole body of the character of the Bancho. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that since the display SU2 of step 2 is displayed in the step-up notice, it is more likely to be a big hit than the display ends at the display SU1 of step 1. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho decreased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number was three at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (17), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. The display SU3 in step 3 is a display showing how the character of the Bancho is tearing his clothes. Further, along with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the characters "It's super hot" are displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that the display is more likely to be a big hit than the display SU2 of step 2 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is one at the timing shown in FIG. 248 (17). The button reception time meter MT may be deleted (that is, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is terminated) before the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. The button reception time meter MT may be deleted at the timing when the display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, in this effect example, no effect is performed even when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is exhausted, but a notice may be given when the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted. Further, in this production example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT and the number of steps executed in the step-up notice are not related, but for example, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT. If the mini character of the princess is included in, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed, or conversely, the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT is only the mini character BCH of the chief. When the display SU3 of step 3 is difficult to be displayed, the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 may easily end the step-up notice. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a may be a display mode other than the default display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button, a vibration and rotation display mode, etc.), and for example, the button image 136a. When the display mode is the display mode of the big button, the display SU3 in step 3 is more likely to be displayed than in the case of the default display mode, and when the display mode of the button image 136a is the default display mode. May make it easier for the step-up notice to end in the display SU1 in step 1 and the display SU2 in step 2 than in the case of the display mode of the big button.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 248 (18), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the step-up notice has ended, and the button reception time meter MT has also been deleted. Here, the step-up notice may be continued until the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is exhausted, or may be terminated before the remaining amount of the gauge is exhausted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (19) following FIG. 248 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "extremely hot" to notify that the player has reached the reach state, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. Normally, when a reach state is formed, "reach" is displayed to notify that the reach state has been reached. That is, it can be said that when a reach state is formed and "extremely hot" is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when "reach" is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 249 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 249 (21), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 249 (22), as shown in FIG. 249 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a close-up image of the character of the lord and a balloon "game A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Ja" is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters "game" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b It suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", FIG. ), In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the "special figure A" is a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of "special figure A".

FIG. 250 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 250 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In FIG. 250 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and among them, the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the display mode of Sabohani (pre-reading notice), and the first The second hold icon h12 is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (4), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (5), FIG. 250 (6) shows. As shown, the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, and the timer notice display TM is displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. Timer notice display The timer display in TM displays the time corresponding to the time since the operation valid period was started (that is, the remaining amount of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated). At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (6), “03.87” indicating 3.87 seconds is displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display TM. That is, the timer display indicates the timing at which the advance notice effect performed by the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM is executed, and the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the timer display is started is set. It depends on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated after the operation valid period is started. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the timer advance notice is performed by the timer advance notice display TM displayed instead of the button reception time meter MT. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM is displayed by operating the effect button 136, but the timer notice display TM may not be displayed in some cases. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the timer notice display TM may not be displayed, or the timer notice display TM may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 250 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM, the time in the timer display is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the timing shown in FIG. 250 (7) is 2.49 seconds. "02.49" indicating that is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 250 (8), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM becomes “00.00” and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 250 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 , The display SU2 in step 2 changes to the display SU3 in step 3. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display TM changes the display color to red and is shown in bold to notify that a notice has occurred due to the completion of the countdown. The change from the display SU2 in step 2 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed by counting up the timer display in the timer notice display TM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further increased by the result of the timer notice being performed with respect to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are interrelated. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices. In this effect example, the effect content of the step-up notice may be changed according to the remaining time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display TM. For example, the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started. When the time is long (for example, 5 seconds), the display SU3 of step 3 is performed from the display SU1 of step 1 through the display SU2 of step 2, but the remaining time indicated by the timer display when the timer notice is started is performed. If the number is small (for example, 1 second), after the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed, the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed in time, so that the display SU2 of step 2 is not displayed and the display of step 3 is displayed. SU3 may be displayed. Alternatively, the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed without displaying the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2. Further, in this production example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM is set from the time corresponding to the operation valid period (for example, 5 seconds) to the time from the start of the operation valid period (for example, 1.13 seconds). When the deducted remaining time is 3.87 seconds, "03.87" indicating this is displayed, but it corresponds to the remaining gauge of the button reception time meter MT when the effect button 136 is operated. The initial value of the timer may be displayed, and the display SU3 of step 3 may be displayed at the timing when the timer counts down from the displayed initial value of the timer to become "00.00". .. Specifically, for example, in the period within 1 second (first period) after the operation valid period is started, "04.00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer, and within 2 seconds after exceeding 1 second. In the period (second period), "03.00" is displayed as the initial value of the timer ... In the period (fourth period) within 4 seconds after exceeding 3 seconds, "01" is displayed as the initial value of the timer. .00 "may be displayed. Further, if a certain period is exceeded after the operation valid period is started, the timer advance notice may not be started.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (10) to (18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 250 (10) to 249 (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (25), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 251 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 252 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 251. .. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (1) to 251 (5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 250 (1) to (5), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (4), as shown in FIG. 251 (6). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, on the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of Bancho mini-characters BCH consisting of the face of the Bancho (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. There is. That is, the notice display is performed by displaying the mini character BCH of the Bancho. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (6), the timer notice display TM is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and in the timer notice display TM, the timer notice display TM is predetermined regardless of the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. (For example, in the timer notice display TM shown in FIG. 251 (6), the display of "30.00" indicating 30 seconds) is performed. At this time, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display TM may be different depending on the time when the operation valid period is started so that the countdown ends at the same timing, for example. , The timing at which the countdown ends may be adjusted by varying the time between the start of the reach effect and the transition from the normal reach to the super reach and the time for displaying the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking. Further, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM when the timer notice is started may be set to display the time corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the notice by the display of the mini character BCH of the chief in the button reception time meter MT and the timer notice by the timer notice display TM are integrated into one notice display. In other words, in this production example, at least the remaining time at the time when the production button 136 is operated out of the time set as the operation valid period is notified by the button reception time meter MT, and some kind of notice (bancho mini) is given. It can be said that the character BCH is displayed and the timer is announced).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is three at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (7). Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM is counted down according to the time from the start of the timer notice, and at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU2 in step 2 is changed to the display SU3 in step 3. Further, along with the display of the display SU3 in step 3, the characters "It's super hot" are displayed above the display SU3 in step 3, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of the Bancho decreased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and became one at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (8). Further, the timer display in the timer notice display TM is counted down according to the time from the start of the timer notice, and at the timing shown in FIG. Is displayed. In this production example, unlike the production example shown in FIG. 250, the countdown due to the timer notice does not affect the step-up notice, and the countdown still continues in FIG. 251 (8). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 251 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the step-up notice is finished and the button reception time meter MT is also erased, but the timer notice is continuously performed, and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM is progressing. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice is continuously performed even after the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed and the step-up advance notice is completed. Further, the period during which the timer display on the timer notice display TM is displayed is from the period from the start of the operation valid period and the start of the gauge on the button reception time meter MT until the remaining amount of the gauge becomes 0. Can also be said to be a long period. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (10) to 251 (13) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 251 (10) to 249 (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 249 (19) to 249 (22), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 251 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (13) after the button advance notice effect is started, the decorative symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 251 (14). In the device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the chief is not displayed around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the reliability of is low, it suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the cut-in image is not displayed. At this time as well, the timer advance notice is continuously performed, and the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (14), "10.50" indicating that the timer display on the timer notice display TM has 10.50 seconds remaining is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 251 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the timer advance notice is continuously performed at this time as well, and the timer display countdown in the timer advance notice display TM is progressing. At the timing shown in FIG. 251 (15), "05.50" indicating that the timer display in the timer notice display TM has 5.50 seconds remaining is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 251 (16) to 251 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". The timer notice is continuously performed, and when the timer display on the timer notice display TM becomes "00.00" at the timing shown in FIG. 251 (17) and the countdown is completed, the timer is shown in FIG. 251 (18). As shown, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the character BC of the bancho appears backward, and in the timer notice display TM, the characters "revival" are displayed to notify that the revival effect is performed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. In addition, in the revival effect, an effect that fails to revive may be performed, and the result of the loss may be derived.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 252 (19) following FIG. 251 (18), the character BC of the Bancho, who was facing backward, faces the front and the decorative symbol of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". The combination of is displayed, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. In addition, the timer notice display TM also displays the characters "Congratulations", indicating that it is congratulating the big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 252 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", FIG. 252 (21). ), In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

FIG. 253 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 253 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. In this production example, the icon of the chief and the icon of the panda are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is different from the above-described aspect, and as shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to (7), it corresponds to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Therefore, the display mode changes so as to gradually shorten. Further, in response to the button reception time meter MT becoming shorter, the panda icon arranged at the right end of the button reception time meter MT also moves so as to follow the right end of the button reception time meter MT. At this time, the position of the Bancho icon arranged at the left end of the button reception time meter MT is fixed and does not move. In the following description, an icon that is placed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT and whose position does not change regardless of the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT is called a fixing icon, and is placed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT. An icon that is displaced according to the decrease display of the button reception time meter MT may be called a movement icon. Therefore, as time goes by, the panda icon is displayed so as to approach the Bancho icon. In this production example, it can be said that something happens when the panda bites the bancho, that is, the display of the button reception time meter MT itself functions as a notice display. From another point of view, by displaying the button reception time meter MT, the advance notice display by the button reception time meter MT is started before the operation of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is performed. It can also be said that there is. In this production example, a step-up notice may be given in which the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT change according to the time from the start of the operation validity period. For example, the operation validity period may be given. When is started, two panda icons are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT, and as time passes, the panda icon changes to the chief icon one by one, and the more the icon changes, the more reliable the jackpot The notice with a high degree may be easily displayed, or the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed as the icon changes. Further, in this production example, the notice display is performed in such a manner that the character icon is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. For example, the notice display is displayed by changing the color of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT. It may be performed, or the notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the button reception time meter MT.

FIG. 253 (4) shows that the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation valid period is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 253 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change. At this time, a mini-character (for example, a mini-character BCH of a bancho, a mini-character of a princess, etc.) may be displayed on the button reception time meter MT to display a notice. In this case, for example, when the two icons attached to the button reception time meter MT are both the icons of the chief, the mini character of the princess is easily displayed and is added to the button reception time meter MT2. When one icon is a combination of the Bancho icon and the Panda icon, the Bancho mini character BCH may be easily displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation validity period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 253 (7), the panda icon approaches the Bancho icon, and " By displaying the word "gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the bancho. This can make the player expect something to happen, and as a result, have a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In this production example, the advance notice display by the button reception time meter MT is performed within the range of the period from the start of the operation valid period to the elapse of the time corresponding to the operation valid period.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 253 (8), the display SU2 in step 2 is covered with the symbols of a large number of stars in a manner that is difficult to see. At this time, the decorative design is displayed small in the upper left corner. This effect is performed when the panda bites the bancho, that is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT affects the step-up notice (the notice started by the operation of the effect button 136). It can be said that it is something to give. As a result, it may be possible to expect that the step-up notice will change. In addition, since the step-up notice is further developed by pretending that the step-up notice has ended, it may be possible to give the step-up notice a surprise. In this production example, the time from the start of the operation valid period to the start of displaying the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is determined. Therefore, the effect is performed after the operation valid period is started. The earlier the timing until the button 136 is operated, the longer the execution time of the step-up notice becomes. Further, in this effect example, if the effect button is not operated during the operation valid period, the step-up notice is not started, and the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 253 (9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HM is displayed together with the character display of "Premier" instead of the display SU2 in step 2, and the big hit is confirmed. The state of being notified is shown. That is, the result of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT shifts from the step-up notice to the premier notice. If the effect button 136 is not operated in the above-mentioned button operation effect, the step-up notice is not started, and therefore the premier notice is not given. However, even if the step-up notice is not given, the premier notice is given. It may be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (10), it is notified that the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

FIG. 254 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, a state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period in the button operation effect is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 254 (1) to (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 250 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 254 (4) shows a state after the button operation effect is started and the operation valid period is started. After that, as shown in FIGS. 254 (4) to (6), when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the step-up notice is started as shown in FIG. 254 (7). Display of step 1 SU1 is displayed. In this effect example, even if the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the step-up notice is started after the operation valid period has elapsed. In this case, since the button reception time meter MT is deleted with the lapse of the operation valid period, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Further, when the auto button mode is set as described above, it is assumed that the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the operation valid period is started. At the same time as the step-up notice is started, the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed, only the step-up notice is performed, and the notice display using the button reception time meter MT is not performed. Alternatively, only the notice using the button reception time meter MT is given, and the step-up notice does not have to be given. After the step-up notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 254 (7), the step-up notice develops in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 254 (8) to (9). In this case, the step-up notice may end at the display SU2 of step 2 without displaying the display SU3 of step 3, or the display SU1 of step 1 may not be displayed without displaying the display SU2 of step 2. The step-up notice may end at. The effects shown in FIGS. 254 (8) to (9) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (16) to (17) except that the button reception time meter MT is not displayed. Is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 254 (11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "extremely hot" to notify that the player has reached the reach state, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, after the reach effect as described above is performed, in the case of a big hit, after the temporary stop display due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, as shown in FIG. 254 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 The combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

FIG. 255 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a pseudo-continuous effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 255. Since the effect shown in FIG. 255 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this effect example, a character display "If three people are gathered, it is a pseudo-ream" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, foretelling that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 253 (3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself becomes shorter with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated multiple times (three times in this effect example) to display the desired display result (Echigoya character ECG, lord character YSM, and princess character HME. By displaying), it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed. When the pseudo-ream is not performed, the three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the number of characters may be increased by one depending on the amount of long press operation, or depending on the number of repeated hit operations. The characters may be incremented by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed at the same time by one operation. Further, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) by the time the operation valid period elapses, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or the pseudo-ream is performed. You may.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (4), as shown in FIG. 255 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (5), as shown in FIG. 255 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (6), as shown in FIG. 255 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (8), the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda, which are displayed along with the button reception time meter MT, are separated from each other, and the character "all gathered" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed, and it is announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is displayed, and it is shown that the temporary stop is performed by the shaking fluctuation display. , It is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed. That is, in this production example, the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this production example, "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed at the same time, but it may be stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (10), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. In addition, a character display "If three people are gathered, it is a pseudo-ream" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, foretelling that the second pseudo-ream effect will be performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (11), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is also a notice effect regarding the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 253 (3) and described above, but in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11), the icon of the chief is displayed at both ends. It is displayed. In this production example, pseudo-ream is more likely to occur when two Bancho icons are displayed than when the Bancho icon and the panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. When two icons of are displayed, the pseudo-ream may be performed without fail. When two icons of Bancho are displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default (for example, a display mode of a big button, a vibration and a rotating display mode, etc.). On the contrary, when the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode other than the default display mode, it may be easy to display two icons of the chief of the button reception time meter MT. ..

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (12), as shown in FIG. 255 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (13), as shown in FIG. 255 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 255 (14), as shown in FIG. 255 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (8) and as described above, the pair of bancho icons displayed attached to the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the button reception time meter MT is "all set". The characters are displayed and it is announced that the second pseudo-ream will be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-replay symbol-decoration 7" is displayed, and it is shown that the temporary stop is performed by the shaking fluctuation display. It is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 255 (17), it is shown that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x3" indicating the number of times that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a character display saying "If three people are gathered, it is extremely hot" is displayed, foretelling that a highly reliable notice of the big hit will be made.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256 (18) following FIG. 255 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the button operation effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (18), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect relating to a certain advance notice effect being performed. In the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 256 (18), the icon of the chief is displayed at both ends. In this production example, a highly reliable notice is more likely to occur when two Bancho icons are displayed than when the Bancho icon and the Panda icon are displayed on the button reception time meter MT. , It is easy to get a big hit by displaying two icons of Bancho (the big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed).

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (19), as shown in FIG. 256 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (20), as shown in FIG. 256 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 256 (21), as shown in FIG. 256 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 256 (23), "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character ECG of Echigoya, the character TSM of the lord, and the character HME of the princess are arranged so as to overlap the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception time meter MT displayed below the character ECG The word "super hot" is displayed, suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable.

After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (subjugation reach). The effects shown in FIGS. 256 (24) to (30) are the same as those in FIGS. 249 (20) to (26) except that the decorative symbols constituting the reach state are different, and thus the description thereof is omitted. To do.

FIG. 257 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the pseudo-continuous production performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this production example, it is shown that three characters are not aligned in the button operation production and the pseudo-ream is not performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 257 (1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 255 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 257 (6), a button operation effect is performed, and as a result of pressing the effect button 136 twice, the character ECG of Echigoya and the character YSM of the lord are displayed. It is shown. Then, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 257 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the princess character HME as shown in FIG. 257 (7). An "x" indicating that the princess character HME did not appear is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257 (8), the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda displayed attached to the button reception time meter MT are separated from each other, and the character "sorry" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It is displayed, and it is notified that the button operation effect fails and the pseudo-ream is not performed. In addition, even though three characters are not displayed and the character "sorry" is displayed, a pseudo-ream may be performed. In this case, for example, as a premium effect of breaking the law, a big hit may be confirmed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 257 (9) to (12), the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol> middle symbol> right symbol, and the decorative symbols lost in "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" are displayed. The combination is confirmed and displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 257 (9) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (7) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this production example, the icons displayed along with the button reception time meter MT are the bancho icon and the panda icon, and the two bancho icons in the production example shown in FIGS. It is more difficult for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed.

FIG. 258 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, a state of the effect performed when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing close to the end of the operation valid period in the button operation effect is shown. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 258 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (10) to (13), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 258 (4), as shown in FIG. 258 (6). The step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 258 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14), and is slightly before the end of the operation valid period. It has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 258 (6), the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is small, and the number of mini-character BCHs of the number length displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge is only one.

After that, as shown in FIG. 258 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. On the other hand, in the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The step-up notice ends at a timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, since the timing at which the step-up notice ends is predetermined (for example, in this effect example, the timing before the left symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect button is displayed during the period when the step-up notice can be executed. It will fluctuate depending on the timing when 136 is operated. Therefore, the later the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated, the shorter the execution time of the step-up notice. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 was operated at a timing shortly before the end of the operation valid period, the step-up notice was started, the display SU1 of step 1 was started, and then the display SU3 of step 3 was started. Even though there was not enough time to perform the development effect and it was planned to display up to the display SU3 in step 3, the step-up notice will end at the display SU1 in step 1. In addition, the display of the step-up to start the display may be determined according to the time when the step-up notice can be executed. For example, as in this production example, the execution time of the step-up notice is short. In this case, the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2 may not be displayed, and the display may be started from the display SU3 of step 3.

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 258 (8) to (15) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 258 (7) to 249 (15) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 259 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 259 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (10) to (13), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (5) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (4), as shown in FIG. 259 (6). In addition, the step-up notice will start. In this production example, when the step-up notice is started, the display is not started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display is started from the display SU2 in step 2, and then, as shown in FIG. 259 (7), the step Display of 3 SU3 is displayed. This is because, as shown in FIG. 259 (5), the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated is later than the timing shown in FIG. 248 (14). Therefore, the execution time of the step-up notice is set to the step. Since it is shorter than the execution time of the effect scheduled to be executed in the up notice, when the display is started from the display SU1 in step 1, the display SU2 in step 2 and the display SU3 in step 3 cannot be sufficiently displayed. .. Therefore, in this effect example, the display of the step to start the display is determined in the step-up notice from the timing when the effect button 136 is operated, and the step-up notice is performed based on this. For example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 259 (5), it is determined to start the display from the display SU2 in step 2 so that the display SU3 in step 3 is displayed. .. As a result, for example, when the display SU3 in step 3 is scheduled to be displayed, it may not be impossible to see the display SU3 due to the delay in the operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, the above-mentioned character icons may be added to both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, when the Bancho icon and the Panda icon are displayed, the effect button 136 is operated. Then, the mini character BCH of the Bancho is likely to appear on the button reception time meter MT, and when the icons of the two Bancho are displayed, the mini character of the princess is more likely to appear than the mini character BCH of the Bancho. When the mini character of the princess appears, it may be easier to get a big hit than when the mini character BCH of the Bancho appears (the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed).

After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 259 (8) to (16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 259 (8) to 249 (16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (26), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 260 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 260 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (4), "5.00 seconds left" indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value gradually decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period by the countdown method. The display of this countdown may be such that the countdown progresses according to the passage of the actual time, the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown progresses later than the passage of the actual time. You may try to do it. In this production example, the display of the remaining time is started at the timing when the operation valid period starts, but the display of the remaining time may be started at the timing after the operation valid period starts. For example, the operation is valid. When the maximum time of the period is 5 seconds, after the operation valid period starts, when the remaining 3 seconds are reached, "3.00 seconds left" is displayed, and the display of the remaining time is started. May be good.

After that, the timing shown in FIG. 260 (5) (for example, in this production example, 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the remaining time display is "3.00 seconds left"). Then, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 260 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the countdown display is deleted together with the button image 136a.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (7), the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 253 (3) is displayed below the display SU1 in step 1. The button reception time meter MT starts displaying with the same length regardless of the timing from the start of the operation valid period to the operation of the effect button 136. On the other hand, since the execution period of the step-up notice depends on the timing from the start of the operation valid period to the operation of the effect button 136, the period during which the button reception time meter MT is displayed is also different. Therefore, the speed at which the button reception time meter MT is shortened differs depending on the timing at which the effect button 136 is operated. For example, the earlier the effect button 136 is operated after the operation validity period is started, the earlier the button reception time meter is operated. The speed at which MT becomes shorter becomes slower.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 260 (8), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is shortened according to the time after the button reception time meter MT starts to be displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 260 (8), the panda icon is close to the Bancho icon. , By displaying the letters "Gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the bancho. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 260 (9) to (13) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 260 to (13) are the same as those in FIGS. 253 (8) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, the display related to the operation validity period (display of the remaining time and display of the button reception time meter MT) changes before and after the operation of the effect button 136. There is.

FIG. 261 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 261 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 261 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, but the button reception time meter MT as described above is not displayed. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (4), "5 seconds left" indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period is displayed. The display of the remaining time is displayed so that the numerical value decreases by the countdown method according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 260, since there is no display of less than 1 second, it can be said that the remaining time is roughly displayed. The display of this countdown may be such that the countdown progresses according to the passage of the actual time, the countdown may proceed faster than the passage of the actual time, or the countdown progresses later than the passage of the actual time. You may try to do it.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 261 (5) (for example, in this production example, one second has passed since the operation valid period was started, and the remaining time is displayed as "4 seconds left"). When the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 261 (6), the step-up notice is started, and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the countdown display is still displayed, and the countdown is also continuously performed. Also, at this time, the "after" part of the countdown display has been erased, indicating that the display of the remaining time of the operation valid period has been switched to the display as a timer notice until a certain effect is performed. ing.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 261 (7) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the countdown as a timer notice. At this time, the display of the numerical value part of the countdown display changes to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. When the display of the numerical value part of the countdown display changes to multiple colors, the big hit may be confirmed. Further, the numerical portion of the countdown display may be displayed in another one color, and for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the display color. Further, for example, the typeface of the numerical part of the countdown display may be changed so that the displayed typeface suggests the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in the step-up notice, the development from step 1 is not performed, and the display SU1 of step 1 remains.

After that, as shown in FIG. 261 (10), the countdown display becomes "0 seconds", and when the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays step 1 as shown in FIG. 261 (11). The display changes from SU1 to the display SU3 in step 3. Also, the countdown display has been erased. The change from the display SU1 in step 1 to the display SU3 in step 3 is a notice display performed when the countdown as a timer notice is completed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the reliability of the step-up notice is further increased by the result of the timer notice being performed with respect to the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect. In other words, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are interrelated. From another point of view, it can be said that the step-up notice started as a result of the button operation effect and the notice given as a result of the timer notice countdown are separate notices.

After that, for example, after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 248 (18) to (19) to reach the reach state, the effects shown in FIGS. 261 (12) to (18) are shown. Is done. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 261 (12) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 249 (20) to (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 262 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 262 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different. Further, in this production example, the character display "It is a chance to collect three people" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is high if three characters appear. Has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (3), the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The button reception time meter MT in this production example is the same as that shown in FIG. 253 (3) and described above, and the display mode changes as the button reception time meter MT itself becomes shorter with the passage of time. In this button operation effect, the effect button 136 is operated multiple times (three times in this effect example) to display the desired display result (Echigoya character ECG, lord character YSM, and princess character HME. By displaying), it is notified that a notice with high reliability of the jackpot will be given. That is, when all three characters are displayed, the notice is more likely to be displayed than when all three characters are not displayed. In this production example, one character is displayed for each operation, but the number of characters may be increased by one depending on the amount of long press operation, or depending on the number of repeated hit operations. The characters may be incremented by one. Further, two or more characters may be displayed at the same time by one operation.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (4), as shown in FIG. 262 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Echigoya is displayed at the upper part of the display screen. Character ECG is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the operation validity period continues. That is, it is shown that the hidden button effect that accepts the operation of the effect button 136 is performed without displaying the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 136. Then, when the second effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (5), as shown in FIG. 262 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YSM of the lord is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character ECG of Echigoya. That is, it is shown that the character YSM of the lord appears by operating the hidden button. Further, when the third effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (6), as shown in FIG. 262 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is placed on the upper part of the display screen. Is displayed side by side with the character YSM of the lord, and the desired display result is displayed. That is, it is shown that the princess character HME appears by operating the hidden button. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the hidden button effect is performed during the execution of the notice display by the button reception time meter MT.

Then, as shown in FIG. 262 (8), the icon of the bancho and the icon of the panda, which are displayed along with the button reception time meter MT, are separated from each other, and the character "all gathered" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT. Is displayed, and it is notified that a notice display indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high will be displayed after that.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (9), "decoration 7" is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character ECG of Echigoya, the character YSM of the lord, and the character HME of the princess are arranged so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the middle symbol, and the button reception displayed below them. On the time meter MT, the character "chance" is displayed, and a notice is displayed suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. In the button operation effect, when the effect button 136 is not operated enough times and three characters are not displayed, or when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, for example, any one of the three characters When the above characters do not appear, for example, "sorry" may be displayed instead of the character "chance" to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is low. Further, when the reach is achieved with a specific symbol (for example, "decoration 7"), the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the reach is achieved with another symbol.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 262 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the development of the above-mentioned subjugation reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 262 (11), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 262 (12), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 262 (13).

After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 262 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", FIG. 262 (16). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 263 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (1) to (3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 250 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 263 (3), after the button operation effect is started, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (4), the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character "continuous hit" is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the step is advanced in the step-up notice by the continuous hit operation of the effect button 136.

After that, when the continuous striking operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 263 (5), as shown in FIG. 263 (6), a step-up notice is given in response to the first operation of the effect button 136. It is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed. At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, at this timing, a plurality of mini-character BCHs of the length (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 263 (6)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge on the button reception time meter MT. .. Also in this production example, the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, which functions as a notice display suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. At the timing shown in FIG. 263 (6), the player continuously hits the effect button 136. In this effect example, the step-up notice is started by one operation of the effect button 136, but the step-up is performed when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit a predetermined number of times after the operation valid period is started. The notice may be started. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display is performed by the button reception time meter MT while the effect of the continuous striking operation by the effect button 136 is being executed.

After that, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, and when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 steps from the display SU1 in step 1. Step up to the display SU2 of 2. As described above, in this effect example, the display step-up in the step-up notice may be performed on condition that the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed. In other words, the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient. If so, step-up is not performed. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho is also decreasing according to the remaining amount of gauge.

After that, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, and when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 263 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 steps from the display SU2 in step 2. Display of 3 Step up to SU3. That is, in this production example, it is suggested that the display SU3 of step 3 is displayed in the step-up notice, so that the display is more likely to be a big hit than the display SU2 of step 2 ends. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of displayed mini-characters BCH of Bancho is also decreasing according to the remaining amount of gauge.

After that, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (9) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 263 (9) to 249 (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 248 (18) to 249 (26), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 264 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button continuous press operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 264 (1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 250 (1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (3), it is shown that the button repeated pressing operation effect is started. Specifically, the character BC1 of the Bancho is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the characters "Awaken the Bancho by repeated hits" are displayed. That is, in this button continuous striking operation effect, it can be said that the mission effect is aimed at displaying the mode in which the clothes of the bancho are torn within a predetermined time by repeatedly striking the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (4), it is shown that the operation valid period in the button continuous press operation effect has started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of "Awaken the Bancho by repeated hits" displayed on the right side of the character BC1 of the Bancho is changed to the character display of "Start of repeated hits" and "Continuous hits". Below the character display of "Start", the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is displayed. The button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits has a different display mode from the button reception time meter MT described above, and is composed of an indicator composed of a plurality of blocks (nine in the production example shown in FIG. 264 (4)). There is. Then, the display mode of the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits changes in such a manner that it is erased one by one from the rightmost block according to the time from the start of the operation valid period.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 264 (5) to (7), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, the number of star symbols displayed overlaid on the Bancho character BC1 increases as the number of operations increases. It will increase.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 264 (8), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a mode in which the character of the bancho is breaking clothes (final form). The character BC2 of the Bancho is displayed), and the characters "Awakening" are displayed to notify that the purpose (mission) of the button repeated operation effect has been achieved. At this time, the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner of changing to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, it can be said that the notice display is performed by changing the display mode of the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hitting. It should be noted that the display mode of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT does not change, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is low, or the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT is deleted when the mission is achieved. And the notice may not be displayed. Further, the display color of the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits may be changed to any one of a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the changed display color. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the advance notice display using the button reception time meter RMT for continuous striking is performed after the purpose of the button continuous striking operation effect is achieved. It should be noted that, in the button repeated operation effect, the number of operations of the effect button 136 during the operation valid period is that the mission is not achieved or the mission is determined in advance. If the number of times required to complete the mission is not reached, the character of the Bancho will not be displayed in the final form (that is, the character BC2 of the Bancho in the final form will not be displayed), and the button for repeated hits will be displayed. Since all the blocks of the reception time meter RMT are also erased, the advance notice display using the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is not performed. If it is determined in advance that the mission will be accomplished, the chief character BC1 will be able to perform even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is less than the number required to complete the mission during the operation validity period. The final form may be displayed. Even in this case, since all the blocks of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT have been erased, the advance notice display using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT will not be performed. Further, after the operation valid period starts, the number of operations of the effect button 136 becomes the number of times required for the mission to be achieved, but for example, since the predetermined period has not elapsed since the operation valid period started. If the conditions for accomplishing the mission are not satisfied, the mission may not be achieved unless the effect button 136 is continuously pressed until the predetermined period has elapsed. Further, in the button continuous operation effect, the mission may be achieved by one operation of the effect button 136 after the operation valid period has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (9), it is shown that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is four. Has been done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (10), it is shown that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been done. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 264 (10), the second stop is performed, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In addition, in the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 264 (11), the decorative symbol is set to the normal display state, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" forming the reach state for each of the left symbol and the right symbol is stopped and displayed. , It is shown that the middle symbol is displayed in a variable display mode. Then, the character BC2, which is the chief of the final form, moves to a position where it overlaps on the front side of the middle symbol, the character "SP" is displayed, and it is notified that the character BC2 shifts to super reach.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 264 (12) to (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the super reach (subjugation reach), and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 264 (12) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 256 (24) to (30), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 265 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button continuous press operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 264 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 265 (4), after the operation valid period in the button continuous striking operation effect is started, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed as shown in FIGS. 265 (5) to (6), As the number of operations increases, the number of star symbols displayed on the Bancho character BC1 increases.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 265 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character BC2, which is the final form of the Bancho, and " The words "Awakening" will be displayed to inform you that the mission has been completed. At this time, the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits is not erased, and the displayed blocks are displayed in a manner of changing to multiple colors (for example, 7 colors), suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, as compared with the production example shown in FIG. 264, the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 is faster and the number of operations per hour is larger, so that the number of blocks of the continuous button reception time meter RMT remains large. The mission has been completed with (7 remaining). After that, the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation validity period.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (8), it is shown that the mini character YM of the lord is displayed in the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hitting. There is. This lord's mini character YM appears when the time from the start of the operation validity period to the completion of the mission is early (when the mission is completed within the predetermined first mission achievement time). It can be said that this is an example of a notice display using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT along with the change in the display mode of the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT. That is, it can be said that the mode of the notice using the continuous hit button reception time meter RMT differs depending on the time from the start of the operation valid period to the achievement of the mission. In this way, by displaying the notice using the margin portion formed by erasing the block in the button reception time meter RMT for continuous hitting, the effect of the effect may be improved and the interest may be improved. In addition, when the mission is completed, the mini character YM of this lord may be displayed without fail regardless of the time from the start of the operation validity period to the completion of the mission. Even if the time from the start of the operation validity period to the completion of the mission is early, it may not be displayed. In addition, when the mini character YM of this lord appears, the big hit may be confirmed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (9), it is shown that two more blocks are erased according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is three. ing. In addition, in the button reception time meter RMT for repeated hits, it is also shown that the mini character YM of the lord is moving to the left side as the margin portion where the block is erased expands. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (9), it is shown that the characters “large board” appear in association with the mini character YM of the lord. In this production example, it is notified that the big hit is confirmed by the appearance of the characters "large board behavior". Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 265 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 265 (10), it is shown that the blocks are erased one by one according to the time from the start of the operation valid period, and the number of remaining blocks is one. Has been done. At this time, the display of the characters "Large board behavior" that is attached to the mini character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In this production example, there may be cases where only the "large board" of the "large board behavior" appears and the characters "behavior" do not appear. In this case, the entire characters of the "large board behavior" appear. It may be possible to make it more difficult for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when is displayed. By doing so, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the big hit is a highly reliable notice until the character YM of the lord is completely displayed. In addition, it may be displayed that characters different from "behavior" appear. On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 265 (10), the second stop is performed, the "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol (corresponding to the right symbol in the normal display state), and the reach state is formed. In addition, in the right symbol (corresponding to the middle symbol in the normal display state), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (11) to (18) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 265 (11) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 264 (11) to (18), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 266 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a reserved consecutive villa notice effect executed during a jackpot game. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In FIG. 266, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the effect movable body 224. Is also illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 266 (1), in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed by the “special figure I” which is a lost symbol, and in the second special figure display device 214, the jackpot symbol “ It is stopped and displayed in "Special Figure a", and in this production example, it is shown that a big hit was made in Special Figure 2. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special diagram 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special diagram 1 fourth symbol t1 is lost due to "special symbol I". It is stopped and displayed by the symbol of "x" indicating that it has become, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is stopped and displayed by the symbol of "A" indicating that it became a big hit in "special symbol a". There is.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, since the big hit was made in the electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. In FIG. 266 (1), the four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed, and all of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the four special figures 2 have default display modes (1). It is displayed in a round, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a round hold icon. On the other hand, the number of holds of special figure 1 is 0, and no hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. In this production example, the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed in the electric support state, but the hold icon may be displayed when the number of hold of special figure 1 is 1 or more. Good.

Further, in the effect movable body 224, both the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are set to the initial positions, that is, they are not movable.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (2), it is shown that the jackpot game is started and the jackpot start effect is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol displayed by the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" displayed at the time of the jackpot is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. It is displayed in the corner, and in the center of the display screen, a character of Copanda with a fan is shown celebrating the big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (3), it is shown that the jackpot start effect is completed and the first round is started. In addition, in the production during the big hit game, the number of consecutive villas of the big hit, the number of balls obtained during the current big hit, and the number of balls obtained during the consecutive villa may be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (4), it is shown that the seventh round has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 266 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "super hot when the arm comes out with the button" are displayed on the right side of the character of the copanda, and the effect movable body 224 is operated by operating the effect button 136. In the case, it is explained that it is notified that the reserved symbol variation display is likely to include a big hit symbol variation display (that is, there is a high possibility that a reserved consecutive villa will occur). It is done.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 266 (6), the button image 136a is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button effect can be said to be an example of a look-ahead notice effect during a big hit game. At the timing shown in FIG. 266 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 266 (7), as shown in FIG. 266 (8), the forearm portion of the effect movable body 224. 224b operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a plurality of star symbols in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect display as if the forearm portion 224b affects the decorative symbol display device 208. Is being done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 266 (9), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is confirmed that the reserved consecutive villa will occur. "Holding consecutive villas confirmed" is displayed. In this production example, when the effect movable body 224 operates, the hold consecutive villa is always generated, but even if the effect movable body 224 operates, the hold villa may not occur. Good.

FIG. 267 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the reserved consecutive villa notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 267 (1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 266 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 267 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, the effect movable body 224 is used as shown in FIG. 267 (8). No operation is performed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the character "chance" that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved consecutive villa will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in the button reception time meter MT, a plurality of panda mini-character PNDs composed of panda faces (five in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (8)) are arranged side by side in the remaining display portion of the gauge. The number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed on the button reception time meter MT is a number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation valid period is started). In this production example, the panda's mini-character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, which functions as a notice display suggesting that the expectation that a reserved consecutive villa will occur is not so high. Even if the effect button 136 is operated, the panda mini-character PND may not be displayed on the button reception time meter MT. That is, when the panda mini-character PND is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, the hold-up villa is more likely to occur than when the panda mini-character PND is not displayed on the button reception time meter MT. It may be configured. In addition, a mini character different from the panda's mini character PND may be displayed, and the degree of expectation that a reserved consecutive villa may occur may differ depending on the displayed mini character. In addition, a plurality of types of mini characters may be mixed and displayed. In this production example, regardless of the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed, the expectation that a reserved villa will occur is the same, but depending on the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed. The expectation that the reserved villa may occur may be different. For example, the larger the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed, the higher the expectation that the reserved villa may occur. Further, the type of the mini character displayed on the button reception time meter MT may be changed depending on the timing after the operation valid period starts. For example, the operation timing of the effect button 136 may be the operation valid period. If the timing is early after the start of, the mini character other than the panda mini character (for example, the mini character of the bancho) may be easily displayed. Further, in this effect example, the character display of "chance" is displayed by operating the effect button 136, and then, the panda mini character PND in the button reception time meter MT is displayed without operating the effect button 136. Although the display is performed, for example, the character display of "chance" and the display of the panda's mini character PND on the button reception time meter MT may be simultaneously performed by the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the target displayed by the operation of the effect button 136 is the display of "chance", and the display of the panda mini-character PND in the button reception time meter MT is displayed by the operation of the effect button 136. An example that is not a thing is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, the number of panda mini-character PNDs displayed decreases according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and the number is two at the timing shown in FIG.

FIG. 267 (10) shows how the eighth round has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 267 (10), it is shown that the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT has become zero. That is, it is shown that the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation valid period was started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 267 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only one star figure, while the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and then is shown in FIG. 267 (12). As described above, the character "sorry" is displayed, and it is notified that the button operation effect fails and the possibility that the reserved villa will occur is low. In this production example, even if a reserved villa is scheduled to occur, the button operation effect may fail, and such a configuration may impair expectations for the reserved villa. May be reduced.

FIG. 268 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the reserved consecutive villa notice effect executed during the jackpot game. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 268 (1) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 267 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 268 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button operation effect is started, the effect is also produced in this effect example as shown in FIG. 268 (8). Although the movable body 224 does not operate, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "hot" that gives an expectation as to whether or not a reserved consecutive villa will occur. When the characters "hot" are displayed, the effect movable body 224 is more likely to operate than when the characters "chance" are displayed, that is, there is a high possibility that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is continuously displayed, and the display mode is changed so that the gauge is reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Further, in this production example, the remaining display portion of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT has a plurality of Bancho mini-characters BCH consisting of Bancho's face and panda mini-character PNDs (decorative symbol display shown in FIG. In the device 208, two mini-character BCHs of the Bancho and three mini-character PNDs of the panda are arranged side by side. In this production example, a reserved consecutive villa is more likely to occur when the Bancho mini character BCH is displayed than when only the panda's mini character PND is displayed (a big hit in the reserved symbol variation display). The design is easy to confirm). In other words, when a reserved villa is scheduled to occur, the mini character BCH of the Bancho is likely to be displayed. The mini-character BCH of the bancho is arranged on the right side of the mini-character PND of the panda, and the mini-character BCH of the bancho is erased earlier than the mini-character PND of the panda as the remaining amount of the gauge decreases. Therefore, the player may be able to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the button reception time meter MT in order to confirm the mini character BCH of the chief. Further, since the number of mini-characters displayed on the button reception time meter MT is the number corresponding to the remaining amount of the gauge (time after the operation valid period is started), the operation valid period is started. If the timing of the operation of the effect button 136 is late and the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT is less than the space for arranging the mini character BCH of the chief, only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed. The mini character BCH of the chief may not be displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to improve his / her motivation to press the effect button 136 as soon as he / she wants to confirm the mini character BCH of the chief. In this production example, the expectation that the effect movable body 224 operates is the same regardless of the number of displayed Bancho mini-characters BCH, but depending on the number of displayed number of Bancho mini-characters BCH. The expected degree of operation of the effect movable body 224 may be different. For example, the larger the number of the mini character BCH of the Bancho displayed, the easier the effect movable body 224 may operate. Further, the button image 136a displayed in FIG. 268 (6) may be displayed in the display mode of the big button or the display mode of vibration and rotation, and when such a display mode is displayed. May make it easier for the Bancho mini-character BCH to be displayed than when it is displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (9), the button reception time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the remaining amount of the gauge is further reduced according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. In addition, all the mini character BCH of the bancho is erased according to the remaining amount of the gauge, and only the mini character PND of the panda is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 268 (9), two panda mini-character PNDs are displayed.

FIG. 268 (10) shows how the eighth round has started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 268 (10), the time corresponding to the operation valid period has elapsed since the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT became 0 and the operation valid period was started. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (11), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates and moves to a position overlapping the front side of the right end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of star symbols are displayed in response to the operation of the effect movable body 224, and the effect as if the forearm portion 224b is affecting the decorative symbol display device 208. The display is being made. As described above, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate immediately in response to the effect button 136 being pressed, and operates only when the remaining amount of the gauge in the button reception time meter MT becomes 0. An example of the production to be performed is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 268 (12), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that it is confirmed that the reserved consecutive villa will occur. "Holding consecutive villas confirmed" is displayed.

FIG. 269 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 269 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 269 (1), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 to h13 of the three special figures 1 are all default. It is displayed in a display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon which is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display positions of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and are displayed as the variable icon h0. Is displayed as a hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT in this production example is the above-mentioned mode shown in FIG. 253 (3), and the icon of the chief and the icon of the panda are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT.

FIG. 269 (4) shows that the button reception time meter MT is shortened with the passage of time after the operation valid period is started.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 269 (6). At this time, the button image 136a is erased, but the button reception time meter MT is still displayed, and the display mode is such that the button reception time meter MT is gradually shortened according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Change.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (7), the step-up notice is continuously performed, and the display SU1 in step 1 is changed to the display SU2 in step 2. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation validity period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (7), the panda icon approaches the Bancho icon, and " By displaying the word "gabutsu", it is shown that the panda is biting the bancho. This can make the player expect something to happen, and as a result, have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (8), after the icon of the bancho displayed at the left end of the button reception time meter MT changes to the panda icon, the pair of panda icons are separated from each other. , The character of "icon change" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 in step 2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269 (9), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, and the notice of the symbol variation display is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU2 in step 2 here as well. As described above, in this effect example, even if the step-up notice does not become the display SU3 of step 3, the change icon changes to the notice display mode by the notice effect using the button reception time meter MT. , It may be possible to maintain the expectation for the big hit. In this effect, the displayability of the display SU3 in step 3 may differ depending on the characters displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT. For example, the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter may be displayed. In the case of the bancho icon and the panda icon, it is difficult to display the display SU3 of step 3, and the step-up notice is likely to be completed by the display SU1 of step 1 and the display SU2 of step 2, and the button reception time meter When the icons displayed at both ends are icons of two lengths, the display SU3 in step 3 may be easily displayed.

After that, when the first stop and the second stop of the decorative symbol are performed and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively to form a reach state, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 269 (10) is formed. The device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 269 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the development of the above-mentioned subjugation reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 269 (12), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 269 (13), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 269 (14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character's lord was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 6" scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 269 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5", FIG. 269 (17). ), The decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 270 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button continuous press operation effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 270 (1) to (6) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 269 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (5), the step-up notice is started and the display SU1 of step 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 270 (6), FIG. 270 (7) shows. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the step-up notice is continuously performed, but the display SU1 in step 1 does not change to the display SU2 in step 2, and the display SU1 in step 1 remains. On the other hand, the button reception time meter MT is further shortened according to the time from the start of the operation validity period, and at the timing shown in FIG. 270 (7), the panda icon approaches the Bancho icon, and the panda Tryes to bite the bancho, but the word "return" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 270 (8), the panda is shown to be struck back by the bancho. In this production example, when the panda returns to the bancho and is struck down, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the end than when the panda bites the bancho (this). In the production example, as will be described later, the reserved symbol variation display tends to be a big hit).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (9), the panda icon displayed at the right end of the button reception time meter MT changes to the Bancho icon, and then the pair of Bancho icons are separated from each other. , The character "icon change" is displayed on the button reception time meter MT, and it is notified that the display mode of the hold icon or the variable icon changes. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged as the display SU1 in step 1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (10), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the lord, and the hold notice is given. On the other hand, the step-up notice remains unchanged from the display SU1 in step 1 here as well. As described above, in this production example, even if the result of the step-up notice in the symbol variation display is such that the big hit cannot be expected, the pre-reading notice using the button reception time meter MT may be performed. By doing so, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation that the pending symbol variation display will be a big hit. Further, in this effect example, as a result of the advance notice effect by the button reception time meter MT in the same display mode, either the variable icon h0 or the hold icon h11 to h14 changes, so that the notice effect of the symbol variation display is produced. It can be said that at least a part of the effects of the look-ahead notice is performed in the same manner, and thus the expectation can be maintained until the variable icon h0 or the hold icons h11 to h14 change. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 270 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 270 (14). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 271 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 272 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 271. .. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (1), the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen. Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 271 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. 271 (1), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the change icon display area 280. The second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), the button operation effect has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (3), the button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode, and the button reception time meter MT is also displayed together with the button image 136a. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. At the timing shown in FIG. 271 (3), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 271 (4) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the button image 136a is erased as shown in FIG. 271 (5). At the same time, the button reception time meter MT is enlarged and displayed, and the mini game is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (5) displays the characters "stock chance" and "press at the right time", and the enlarged button reception time meter MT displays the operation validity period. The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time since the start of. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, on the button reception time meter MT, three treasure chests (treasure chests TR1, TR2, TR3) are arranged side by side in the remaining display part of the gauge, and the right end of the gauge that is displayed decreasing with the passage of time. It is suggested that something will appear by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the player passes through the center of each treasure chest. That is, it is notified that the timing push mini-game is started. In this production example, the mini-game by the button reception time meter MT may not be performed, and the advance notice production using the button reception time meter MT described above may be performed. Further, the number of treasure chests to be displayed may differ depending on the remaining amount of the gauge displayed according to the time from the start of the operation valid period when the effect button 136 is operated. For example, the effect button. The earlier the operation timing of 136 is from the start of the operation validity period, the larger the remaining amount of the gauge. Therefore, the number of treasure chests may be increased accordingly, and the later the operation timing of the effect button 136 is, the more The number of treasure chests to be displayed may be reduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (6), the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR1 arranged on the rightmost side of the three treasure boxes. When operated, as shown in FIG. 271 (7), the treasure chest TR1 may move upward, and the treasure chest TR1 may be opened and the Sabohani notice icon I71 with the character "change" may appear. .. The notice icon I71 of Sabohani is one aspect of the look-ahead notice, and when the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, it is announced that the variable icon or the hold icon will change to the notice display mode. As described above, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is operated at the right time when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is approximately the center of the treasure box arranged on the button reception time meter MT. Notice icons may be stocked. Here, the notice icon may be a notice item or a mini item. Even if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR1, the notice icon may not appear. In addition, something other than the notice icon may appear. For example, a notice character may appear to give a notice of the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice, or a mere effect display without a notice (for example, an explanation display, etc.). May be done. Further, even if the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is stocked, the display mode of the variable icon or the hold icon may not change.

As shown in FIG. 271 (7), when the Sabohani notice icon I71 appears from the treasure box TR1, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (8), the Sabohani notice icon that appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I71 is displayed, indicating that the notice icon has been stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (9), the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT became approximately the center of the treasure chest TR2 arranged on the right side of the remaining two treasure chests (treasure chests TR2 and TR3). When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing, as shown in FIG. 271 (10), the treasure chest TR2 moves upward, and the treasure chest TR2 is opened and the word "subjugation" is added to the notice icon I72 of the lord. May appear. This lord's notice icon I72 is an aspect of the look-ahead notice, and by stocking the lord's notice icon I72, a strong cut-in CI1a is set in the subjugation reach that is scheduled to be executed in the pending symbol variation display. It is announced that it will appear. That is, by stocking the notice icon I71 of the lord, a look-ahead notice that the subjugation reach will be performed in the reserved symbol change display and a look-ahead notice that the strong cut-in CI1a will appear are performed. It can be said. Even if the notice icon I72 of the lord is stocked, the strong cut-in CI1a may not appear, or the strong cut-in CI1a may always appear.

As shown in FIG. 271 (10), when the notice icon I72 of the lord appears from the treasure box TR, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (11), the notice icon of the lord that appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. I72 is displayed, indicating that the notice icon has been stocked.

After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (12), when the effect button 136 is operated at a timing significantly delayed from the timing when the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT becomes approximately the center of the remaining one treasure box TR3. , As shown in FIG. 271 (13), the treasure chest TR3 moves upward but is not opened, and the character "failure" is displayed, indicating that the timing push has failed. Therefore, the contents of the treasure chest TR3 are not displayed, and as shown in FIG. 271 (14), the treasure chest TR3 is deleted as it is. If the timing push fails, the contents of the treasure box will be displayed, but if the contents of the treasure box is a notice icon, it may not be stocked. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is enabled for the auto button function, the right end of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT is an abbreviation for each treasure box even if the effect button 136 is not operated. Each treasure chest may be opened as if the effect button 136 was operated at the central timing, or the auto button function may be disabled in this timing-pressed mini-game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (15), it is shown that the button reception time meter MT is erased and the mini game using the button reception time meter MT is completed. In addition, the notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lord are continuously displayed.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of left symbol> right symbol> middle symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (16) shakes with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 2". Temporary stop due to fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 271 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol. Further, in this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed, the decorative symbol is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button reception time meter MT It is shown that the notice display using is affecting the subsequent decorative pattern variation display.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 271 (18), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. And it is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. In addition, the notice icon I71 of Sabohani and the notice icon I72 of the lord are continuously displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (19) following FIG. 271 (18), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (20), the notice icon I71 of Sabohani moves to substantially the center of the display screen while being enlarged and displayed, and the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is digested. ..

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (21), the variable icon h0 of the default display mode displayed in the variable icon display area 280 is changed to the display mode of Sabohani, and the notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Is shown to be taking place. In addition, when the notice icon I71 of Sabohani is digested, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 272 (21), after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (22), the enlarged notice icon I71 of the Sabohani is erased, and then As shown in FIG. 272 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (24), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (25), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters "It's super hot" to notify that it is in the reach state, and the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. It is suggested that it is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (27), it is shown that the normal reach effect is being performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (28), the notice icon I72 of the lord is enlarged and moved to the substantially center of the display screen, and the notice icon I72 of the lord is digested. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 272 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that it has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 272 (30), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 272 (31), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 272 (32). As shown in FIG. 272 (28), this strong cut-in image CI1a appears when the notice icon I72 of the lord is digested. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the button notice effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. Even if not, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed after the lapse of the operation valid period. Further, in the above-mentioned mini-game, the notice icon I72 of the lord was scheduled to appear, but if the timing press of the effect button 136 fails and the notice icon I72 of the lord does not appear, the strong cut-in image CI1a The weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed more easily than the weak cut-in image CI1b.

After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 272 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5", FIG. 272 (35) ), In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

In this production example, as a result of the mini-game, a notice icon indicating that the button operation effect for displaying the notice using the button reception time meter MT described above may be executed may be stocked. That is, a pre-reading notice of the notice display using the button reception time meter MT may be performed.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 285. In addition, in FIGS. 274 to 285, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown. Although the figure is shown, the drawing of the normal drawing display device 210 and the general drawing holding lamp 216 is omitted. Also in FIGS. 274 to 285, the types of special figures to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are the same as the stop symbol modes shown in FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b). Has been done. Further, in FIGS. 274 to 285, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL may be arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, it goes without saying that the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 274 to 285 can be applied as it is or by appropriately changing the display mode of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 to 272. Nor.

First, the types of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIG. 273. Here, FIG. 273 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the decorative symbol, and FIG. 273 (b) is a diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that is a chance of pre-reading notice.

As shown in FIG. 273 (a), the decorative symbols of the present embodiment include 10 types of decorative symbols "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" and two special "special 1" and "special 2". Decorative designs are also available. The decorative symbol of "special 1" may be referred to as a replay symbol, and for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, or "special 1" is displayed in all symbols. It is a decorative pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed when the mode (such as a stop display mode) is set. The decorative design of "Special 2" may be called a chance button design, and is a display mode in which the button is simply represented, and the display mode is different from the button image 136a as described above displayed in the button operation effect. There is. The decorative symbol of "special 2" includes, for example, a predetermined display mode including this (for example, a mode in which "special 2" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, a mode in which "special 2" is stopped and displayed in all symbols, etc.). It is a decorative pattern in which a button operation effect is performed when the situation is met. It should be noted that "special 1" and "special 2" are not always included in the variable display of the decorative symbol, but appear as needed, but they are always included in the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be included. Further, "Special 1" and "Special 2" are not fixedly displayed by the combination of decorative symbols including them, and function as a notice display for notifying the content of the effect to be performed after that. In addition, it will be confirmed and displayed by the combination of decorative symbols including the decorative symbols of "Special 1" or "Special 2", and will function as a pre-reading notice that the production corresponding to "Special 1" or "Special 2" will be performed. It may be. Further, although one type of symbol corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect and one type of symbol corresponding to the button operation effect are prepared, there may be two or more types of each. Further, in the present embodiment, a "special 1" decorative symbol corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect and a "special 2" decorative symbol related to the button operation effect are prepared. In addition to these, for example, a variable icon is prepared. A special decorative symbol corresponding to an effect in which the display mode of the or hold icon changes to the display mode of the notice, a special decorative symbol that specifically suggests the content of the subsequent effect, or the like may be prepared. In this case, at least a part of the display mode of these special decorative symbols and the display mode of the image displayed when the corresponding effect is performed may be different or the same.

As shown in FIG. 273 (b), in the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols consisting only of "decoration 7" and "decoration 3" is lost except for the combination constituting the reach and the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols. It is configured so that the look-ahead notice can be displayed by confirming the combination of the decorative symbols (sometimes called "chance eyes"). Specifically, the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 7", the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7", and the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 3" By confirming and displaying the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 3" and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 3", there is a high possibility that the pending symbol variation display will be a big hit. It is notified that the variable display is included.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 275 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 274. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 6-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not shown, for example, a default background image is displayed.

The special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In both the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, the symbol of "x" corresponding to the result of the loss is displayed.

Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 in the lower left corner of the display screen.

Further, the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 274 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon of the special figure 1 represents the number of holds of the special figure 1 according to the displayed number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. The hold icons of Special Figure 1 are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the left side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 274 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed, and both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 have a default display mode (no round shape). It is displayed in a pattern and white display mode). On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 274 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. Because there is.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed on the right side of the variable icon display area 280 according to the control state (game state). .. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is hidden as shown in FIG. 274 (1). When the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is hidden.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Figure 2 is also a round, unpatterned and white display mode, but the display position is different from that of the hold icon in Special Figure 1. Alternatively, the display mode (here, the shape) may be different. By doing so, it may be possible for the player to make a distinction at a glance.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of the variation start in the special symbol display device → the blinking start or turn off of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start of the hold icon → the variation start of the decorative symbol. , This order may change.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (3), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (4), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "decoration 3-special 2-decoration 4" is displayed. The combination causes a temporary stop display (temporary stop display). Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the button operation effect requesting the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, when the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, it is notified that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is erased, and a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 is displayed in the default display mode in place of the decorative symbol of "Special 2", together with this button image 136a. The button reception time meter MT is also displayed. In addition, the characters "press the chance button" are also displayed above the button image 136a, facilitating the operation of the effect button 136. At this time, the middle symbol may remain erased or may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the button image 136a may be displayed by a predetermined animation (for example, an animation in which the button moves up and down). As described above, the decorative design of "Special 2" is displayed in a simplified display mode of the button as described above, whereas the button image 136a is displayed in a display mode imitating the effect button 136. At the same time, it is accompanied by the display of the button reception time meter MT, and it can be said that these are displayed in different modes. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" is not animated at least when it is stopped and displayed, but it may be animated during the stop display.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 274 (7), as shown in FIG. 274 (8), the decorative symbol display device 208 , Button reception time meter MT is erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the front side of the middle symbol and the right symbol, and a display is performed so as to affect these.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (9), after the slip fluctuation display in which the middle symbol and the right symbol fluctuate at high speed is performed, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed. "Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on each of the symbols, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 274 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is an opportunity, and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the pending symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify that. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 274 (11), it is foretold that the hold of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 274 (10), when temporarily stopped at the chance eye, the characters "Change" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance eye is displayed. Notifies that the pre-reading notice has been made by.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, has started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (13), the characters "mini game" and "press at the right time" are displayed, and a band-shaped timing meter is displayed, which is substantially in the center of the timing meter. It is shown that the treasure chest TR is arranged in. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of this timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In this mini-game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge, which is displayed decreasing with the passage of time, passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

FIG. 274 (14) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 274 (15), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR, the treasure box is operated as shown in FIG. 274 (16). The TR is enlarged and moved above the timing meter, and the replay icon RP appears from the treasure chest TR. The icon RP of this replay displays a display in which a question mark is added to the characters "following", and notifies that a pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, it can be said that the icon RP of the replay functions as a notice of the pseudo-continuous production in the symbol variation display. That is, in this production example, it is configured so that the pseudo-ream is more likely to be started when the replay icon RP appears than when it does not appear. Here, the replay icon RP does not appear, for example, the button icon may appear, and when the button icon appears, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display. , It may be notified that the button operation effect may be performed. Here, when the button icon appears, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" may be displayed and the button operation effect may be started more easily than when the button icon does not appear. In addition, the timing meter is still displayed, and the bancho icon is displayed on the left and right ends of the gauge. The Bancho icon displayed on the right side follows the decrease display of the gauge, and moves toward the Bancho icon displayed on the left side. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is approximately in the center of the treasure box TR1, something other than the replay icon RP may appear. For example, the button icon may appear. By appearing, it may be foretold that a button operation effect may be performed in the symbol variation display. That is, the button operation effect may be started more easily when the button icon appears than when it does not appear. Further, even if the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter is substantially at the center of the treasure box TR1, nothing may appear.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (17), the treasure chest TR is erased, the replay icon RP is displayed in the substantially center, and a fanning effect of whether or not pseudo-ream is performed is performed. This fanning effect is continued from the start of the operation valid period until the time corresponding to the operation valid period elapses. Until then, the timing meter will continue to display the gauge decrease.

After that, when the time corresponding to the operation validity period elapses from the start of the operation validity period and the remaining amount of the gauge in the timing meter becomes 0, the decorative symbol protection display device 208 shown in FIG. 274 (18) replays. The display of the question mark on the icon RP has been changed to an exclamation mark, and the timing meter displays the characters "I'm still going on", informing me that a pseudo-ream will be performed. As described above, in this production example, the pseudo-ream effect is performed by displaying the icon related to the pseudo-ream effect (replay icon RP) before the decorative symbol of "Special 1" is stopped and displayed. It may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the icon at an early stage.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (19) following FIG. 274 (18), it is shown that the mini game is finished and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (21), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (22), the decorative symbol of "special 1" appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward, and then, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), "special 1" The decorative symbol of is stopped and displayed, and temporarily stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Special 1-Decoration 4". The decorative pattern of this "Special 1" is a pattern in which the characters "Replay" are displayed on a roughly elliptical figure with a moon pattern, and the figure is different from the replay icon RP that appears as a result of the mini game. They are common in that they are the same, but the displayed characters are different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 275 (23), the decorative symbol of "Special 1" which is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is enlarged and displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. The appearance of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" is an effect performed by the appearance of the replay icon RP as a result of the mini-games shown in FIGS. 274 (13) to (18). Can be done. If the mini-game described above fails, the pseudo-ream may not be performed, or if the mini-game fails, the pseudo-ream may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (25), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 275 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of "Change" notifying that the chance eye has appeared is deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 275 (29), it is shown that the button notice effect is started. In this button notice effect, a big button image 136aL is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default mode. The deca button image 136aL is an image imitating the effect button 136, but has a display mode larger than that of the button image 136a in the default mode. Further, the display mode of the deca button image 136aL is the display mode of the "special 2" decorative symbol shown in FIG. 274 (5), which was displayed in the previous symbol variation display (that is, displayed in a different decorative symbol variation display). Is also different. As described above, in this effect example, a plurality of types of button images are prepared as the button images displayed in the button operation effect, and the display pattern of the button image (decorative pattern of "Special 2") displayed as the decorative pattern. It can be said that it has more display patterns. In addition, the button image 136a in the default mode may be displayed instead of the big button image 136aL. In this case, when the deca button image 136aL is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 275 (30), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 275 (31).

After that, as shown in FIG. 275 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle "Decoration 3" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", FIG. 275 (34). ), In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A. As shown in FIG. 275 (33), when the decorative symbol becomes the default display mode, the display of the character "Change" notifying that the chance eye is displayed is resumed, but it is displayed. It does not have to be.

In this production example, when the decorative symbol of the third stop is "Special 1" or "Special 2", the button operation effect or pseudo-ream is performed, but "Special 1" or "Special 2" When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the second stop or the first stop, the button operation effect or the pseudo-ream may be performed. Further, when two of the three decorative symbols of "Special 1" or "Special 2" are included, the button operation effect or the pseudo-ream may be performed.

Further, in this effect example, the description has been made in comparison with the button image displayed in the button operation effect in which the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is displayed and executed in one decorative symbol variation display, but one decoration. The present invention also includes a comparison between the "special 2" decorative symbol displayed in the symbol variation display and the button image displayed in the button operation effect unrelated to the display of the "special 2" decorative symbol. It can be applied as a concept.

FIG. 276 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the effect example shown in FIG. 276, the button operation effect is performed when three "special 2" decorative symbols are aligned, but the button operation effect is not started because the three "special 2" decorative symbols are not aligned. It shows how the production is being performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 276 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 276 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "special 2". Is stopped and displayed. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, when "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol more easily than when "Special 2" is not stopped and displayed on the left symbol. May be good. This makes it difficult for the player to give up early on the start of the button operation effect, and the expectation that the button operation effect will be performed can be expected until the timing when the third stop of the decorative pattern is performed. You may be able to do it. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 276 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the decorative symbol of "special 2-decoration 4-special 2" is displayed. Temporary stop display is displayed in combination, and it is notified that three "special 2" are not aligned and the button operation effect is not started. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left symbol and the right symbol are variablely displayed at high speed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 3" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 276 (6). Is stopped and displayed, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation with the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 3", and then, as shown in FIG. 276 (7), "Decoration 4" -Decoration 4-Decoration 3 "is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decoration patterns. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol.

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 278 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 277. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific production example shown in FIG. 278. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed when three decorative symbols of "Special 1" are aligned, and a button operation effect is performed when three decorative symbols of "Special 2" are aligned. It is shown how it will be done. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 277 (1) to (4) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 276 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 277 (4), after the second stop is performed and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (5) makes a third stop. Therefore, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is displayed in a mode in which three "Special 2" are arranged.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (6), the decorative symbol starts the variable display again, and the button operation effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. At this time, the effect button 136 also starts vibration and rotation of the internal mechanism. When the effect button 136 vibrates and the internal mechanism is rotated, the effect button 136 is more likely to be a big hit than when the effect button 136 is not vibrated and the internal mechanism is rotated (the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). ) Is configured. It can be said that this button operation effect is a notice effect in which a chance eye appears in the symbol change display, and is a look-ahead notice effect that announces that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the pending symbol change display. It can be said that. In addition, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a in the default display mode described above may be displayed. In this case, for example, the display color of the button image 136a may be changed, the button image 136a may be blinked, or the button image 136a may be displayed by a special animation. Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, it may be displayed in another display mode (for example, a display mode of a big button). At the timing shown in FIG. 277 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid. As described above, in this effect example, in the button operation effect, it is possible to display the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 (at least one of vibration and rotation), and the display mode of "Special 2" Can be said to have different displays. In this effect example, the effect button 136 may only vibrate and a button image showing how the effect button 136 vibrates may be displayed, or only the rotation operation of the internal mechanism of the effect button 136 may be displayed. Is performed, and a button image showing how to rotate correspondingly may be displayed. Further, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed in a normal state in which the effect button 136 does not perform any vibration or rotation operation. Further, a button image other than the button image corresponding to the state of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating, the button image 136a in the default display mode may be displayed. May be displayed. On the contrary, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed, but the effect button 136 may take a default state in which neither vibration nor rotation operation is performed.

After that, after the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (7), the decorative symbol is displayed as the default as shown in FIG. 277 (8). In addition to the variable display being performed as a mode, a plurality of star symbols are displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, and the decorative symbol being displayed in the variable display is displayed in such a way that the decorative symbol is affected. Will be.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (9), after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7", FIG. 277 (10) It is confirmed and displayed as shown in. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol. As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is an opportunity, and includes a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit in the pending symbol variation display. It functions as a look-ahead notice to notify that. That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 277 (10), it is foretold that the hold of the first symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 277 (9), when temporarily stopped at the chance eye, the characters "Change" are displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance eye is displayed. Notifies that the pre-reading notice has been made by.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. It is displayed as a variable icon h0. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. That is, the symbol variation display, which is the target of the pre-reading notice, has started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (12), the characters "mini game" and "press at the right time" are displayed, and a band-shaped timing meter is displayed, which is substantially in the center of the timing meter. It is shown that the treasure chest TR is arranged in. At this time, the decorative symbol has moved to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of this timing meter changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In this mini-game, it is suggested that something appears by operating the effect button 136 at the timing when the right end of the gauge, which is displayed decreasing with the passage of time, passes through the center of the treasure chest TR.

FIG. 277 (13) shows the state after the mini game is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 277 (14), when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing when the right end of the gauge of the timing meter becomes substantially the center of the treasure box TR, the treasure box is operated as shown in FIG. 277 (15). Switches to the display showing how the Bancho's face design BF appears. Then, after the character "continue" is displayed as shown in FIG. 277 (16), the character "continue" is added to the fluctuation icon h0 as shown in FIG. 277 (17), and the symbol variation display is performed. It will be announced in advance that a pseudo-ream will be performed. The variable icon h0 to which the character "sequel" is added can also be said to be an example of the display mode of the design for the effect for notifying that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this way, a plurality of types of notification modes for performing pseudo-ream may be prepared.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 277 (18), it is shown that the mini-game is finished and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (19) following FIG. 277 (18), the first stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (20), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (21), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and once three "special 1" are arranged. Stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (22), the character of Copanda appears, the character "one more time" is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In this way, the decorative symbol for notifying that the pseudo-ream is performed has one type of display mode (decorative symbol of "special 1"), but the design for the effect for notifying the pseudo-ream is performed. There are multiple types of display modes, and there are many variations.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (23), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), it is shown that the selection effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (24), two boxes BXL and BXR are arranged side by side, and a button reception time meter MT is shown below the two boxes BXL and BXR. Here, the box arranged on the left side may be referred to as a left box BXL, and the box arranged on the right side may be referred to as a right box BXR. Further, above the two boxes BXL and BXR, an operation key image 137p schematically showing the operation key unit 137 is displayed in a mode in which the left and right button portions are highlighted, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is performed. The word "choose" is displayed to urge. Further, the left box BXL of the two boxes BXL and BXL is displayed in a mode surrounded by the cursor CSL. That is, in this effect example, the cursor CSL is moved by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d of the operation key unit 137 from the start of the operation valid period to the end of the operation valid period. It is shown that when either one of the boxes BXL and BXR is selected, the effect corresponding to the selected box is performed. The operation key image 137p is an image that is displayed only when the selection effect is performed, and is not prepared as a decorative pattern for notifying that the selection effect is performed. That is, there is no special symbol for notifying that the operation effect will be performed. An image imitating the operation key unit 137 may be separately prepared as a special symbol for notifying that the operation effect will be performed.

After that, after the operation acceptance period of the operation key unit 137 is started, when the right key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 278 (25), as shown in FIG. 278 (26). The cursor CSL that surrounds the left box BXL moves to surround the right box BXL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (27), when the operation acceptance period elapses and the remaining amount of the gauge of the button acceptance time meter MT is exhausted, it is not selected in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (28). The left box BXL is erased, only the selected right box BXR is displayed, the right box BXR is opened, and the replay icon RP appears in the vicinity with a question mark. That is, the icon RP of this replay is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" in that a question mark is added. As a result, it is notified that the second pseudo-ream may be performed in the symbol variation display. In this production example, since the question mark is added to the icon RP of the replay, it is not guaranteed that the pseudo-ream will always be performed. Therefore, the pseudo-ream is not performed, and it may end in a mess. In addition, there may be a case where the question mark is not attached and the pseudo-ream is displayed in a manner that guarantees that the pseudo-ream is always performed, and when the replay icon RP appears from the box, the pseudo-ream is always performed. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 278 (29), the character "continuation" is added to the variable icon h0, and the variable icon display area 280 corresponds to the display of the question mark added to the replay icon RP. A question mark is also displayed above, which also informs that there is a possibility that a pseudo-ream will be performed in the symbol variation display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (30), it is shown that the selection effect is completed and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (31), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (32), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (33), the enlarged decorative symbol of "Special 1" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. At this time, the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be stopped and displayed without the reach effect being performed, or the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 278 (34), the characters "one more time" are displayed below the decorative symbol of "special 1", and the question mark displayed above the variable icon display area 280 is displayed. It will be changed to an exclamation mark, and it will be notified that a pseudo-ream will be performed. As described above, in this production example, the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be stopped and displayed after the reach state is reached, and the pseudo-ream may be started. If the pseudo-ream is not performed, the decorative symbol of "Special 1" may be scrolled out without stopping, and then the reach effect may be performed, or the reach effect may not be performed. Any decorative symbol other than the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the symbol so that a combination of lost decorative symbols or a combination of jackpot decorative symbols can be derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (35), it is shown that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x3" indicating the number of times that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 278 (36), the symbols of a plurality of stars are displayed so as to overlap in front of the variable icon h0, and the display is performed as if affecting the variable icon h0. The situation is shown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 279 (37) following FIG. 278 (36), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. That is, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed to the display mode of the notice. In the production example shown in FIGS. 278 (36) to 279 (37), when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may change instead of the variable icon h0.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (38), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (39), the second stop is performed, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "super hot", notifies that the reach state has been reached, and suggests that the reliability of the jackpot in this reach is high. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 279 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, a small decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left corner, and a screen where the main character's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), the button notice effect has been started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 279 (41), instead of the button image 136a, a protruding button image 136aS schematically showing an aspect in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward is displayed. It is suggested that the jackpot is more likely to be obtained (that is, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed. In the protruding button image 136aS, the character of the grandfather is added to the front side, and the character "Push" is displayed below the character, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. In this production example, since the effect button 136 is not equipped with the function of projecting upward, the state of the effect button 136 does not correspond to the display mode of the projecting button image 136aS. The 136 may be equipped with a function capable of projecting upward. In this case, the effect button 136 may or may not project upward according to the display of the projecting button image 136aS. .. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 279 (42), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 279 (43).

After that, as shown in FIG. 279 (44), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle "Decoration 3" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 279 (45), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", FIG. 279 (46). ), In the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "A" indicating that the special figure A has become a big hit is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is performed in the mode of the jackpot symbol of the special figure A.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (6), when the effect button 136 is operated, the button reception time is not given when the button reception time meter MT is not used. Although the meter MT is erased, for example, the button reception time meter MT may continue to be displayed even if the effect button 136 is operated, and the effect display may be performed using the remaining display portion of the gauge. This effect display may be a notice display or may be a non-notice display.

FIG. 280 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 280 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 280 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (3), "decoration 3" is displayed on the left symbol from above the display screen. It is shown scrolling in and moving downwards. At this time, "decoration 3" is moving at a low speed. In the middle and right symbols, the decorative symbols continue to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (4), the “decoration 3” of the left symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display is performed, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the “decoration 3” of the left symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, and an effect display is performed as if affecting the "decoration 3" of the left symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (5), after the "decoration 3" of the left symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", the display is stopped. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the decorative symbol is changed to the “special 2” symbol that simply represents the effect button 136 immediately before the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (6), it is shown that "decoration 1" scrolls in from the upper part of the display screen and moves downward in the right symbol. .. At this time, "decoration 1" is moving at a low speed. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues at high speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (7), the “decoration 1” of the right symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display is performed, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the “decoration 1” of the right symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, and an effect display is performed as if affecting the "decoration 1" of the right symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (8), after the "decoration 1" of the right symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", the display is stopped. Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (9), it is shown that "decoration 6" is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen and is moving downward in the middle symbol. At this time, "decoration 6" is moving at a low speed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (10), the "decoration 6" of the middle symbol moves at an ultra-low speed immediately before the stop display is performed, and at this time, it moves to the front side of the "decoration 6" of the middle symbol. A plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other, and an effect display is performed as if affecting the "decoration 6" of the middle symbol.

Then, as shown in FIG. 280 (11), after the "decoration 6" of the middle symbol is changed to the decorative symbol of "special 2", it is stopped and displayed, and temporarily stopped in a mode in which three "special 2" are aligned. It is displayed (temporary stop display).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 280 (12), the decorative symbol starts the variable display again, and the button operation effect is started. Since the effect shown in FIG. 280 (12) is the same as that shown in FIG. 277 (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is changed to the "special 2" decorative pattern that simply imitates the effect button 136 and is stopped and displayed immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped. For example, the decorative pattern is stopped. Immediately before this, the "special 2" may be interrupted in the order of the decorative symbols, and the "special 2" may be stopped and displayed. For example, in the case where the decorative symbol is varied and displayed in the order of "decoration 1"> "decoration 2"> ...> "decoration 10", "decoration 1" and "decoration 1" The decorative symbol of "special 2" may be inserted between "decoration 2", and the "special 2" may be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 281 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 281 (1) to 281 (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 281 (2), after the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "decoration 3". Is stopped and displayed. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (4), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), it is shown that the decorative symbol of "Special 2" appears in the middle symbol and scrolls downward. The decorative design of this "special 2" is an oversized display mode in which the size is larger than the normal display mode. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (6), the left symbol and the right symbol are erased, and only the decorative symbol of "special 2", which is the middle symbol, is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped). It is shown. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode may be displayed by one decorative symbol instead of the stop display mode by the combination of the three decorative symbols.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), a simplified button image 136aX imitating the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. That is, in the simplified button image 136aX, the display portion of the button is the same as the decorative symbol of "special 2", but at least the decorative symbol of "special 2" is displayed together with the button reception time meter MT. It can be said that the display mode is different from that of. The display mode of the simplified button image 136aX may be a form in which the character display of "Change" is omitted from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 2". In this case, the shape of the button is common, but the character display is performed. It can be said that the display mode of the simplified button image 136aX and the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 2" are different depending on the presence or absence. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (7), the decorative symbol is not displayed, but for example, it may be displayed small in the upper left corner of the display screen.

On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 281 (5), the decorative symbol of "Special 2" appears in the middle symbol and is shown to be scrolling downward, but the button operation effect is performed. If not, for example, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" scrolls out downward without performing the stop display, and then, as shown in FIG. 281 (6'), "Decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. After the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed, the display may be confirmed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 1".

FIG. 282 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the pseudo-continuous production performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 282 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 282 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "special 1". Is stopped and displayed. Characters for notifying the number of pseudo-reams are added to the decorative symbol of "special 1" in this production example. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282 (3), the decorative symbol of "special 1" is added. Is added with the character "x1" informing that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character "x1" is added to the "special 1" in the right symbol to notify that the first pseudo-ream may be performed. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (5), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are provisionally arranged. Stop is displayed. Here, too, the character "x1" is added to notify that the first pseudo-ream may be performed for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (6), the decorative symbol in which three "special 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1", which is an oversized display mode, is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream will be performed. As described above, in this effect example, the stop display mode may be displayed by one decorative symbol instead of the stop display mode by the combination of the three decorative symbols.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (7), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (8), the first stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. The decorative symbol of "Special 1" shown in FIG. 282 (8) also has a character for notifying the number of pseudo-reams, and "x2" for notifying that a second pseudo-ream may be performed. Character is added. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (9), the second stop is performed, and "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The character "x2" is added to the "special 1" in the right symbol to notify that the second pseudo-ream may be performed. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (10), the third stop is performed, the decorative symbol of "special 1" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and three "special 1" are provisionally arranged. Stop is displayed. Here, too, the character "x2" is added to notify that the second pseudo-ream may be performed for "special 1" in the middle symbol.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (11), the decorative symbol in which three "special 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1", which is an oversized display mode, is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 282 (12), it is shown that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x3" indicating the number of times that the third variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

As described above, in this production example, the number of pseudo-reams is displayed on the decorative symbol of "Special 1", but the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" itself is changed according to the number of pseudo-reams. You may do so. As a result, the player may be able to easily recognize the number of pseudo-reams.

FIG. 283 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 283 (1) to (2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283 (2), after the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (3) is first stopped, and the left symbol is "special 2". Is stopped and displayed. The decorative design of "Special 2" in this production example is displayed in a manner in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is added. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (4), the second stop is performed, and "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" in the right symbol is displayed in a mode in which a panda mini-character PND is added, unlike the decorative symbol of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In this production example, even if the same "special 2" decorative symbol is used, the added symbol is different, so that it may be possible to prevent misidentification that reach has occurred. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (5), the third stop is performed, and the decorative symbol of "special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. The decorative symbol of "Special 2" in the middle symbol is displayed in a manner in which the mini character BCH of the same number as the decorative symbol of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is added. As a result, the temporary stop is displayed in the form in which three "special 2" are aligned, but in this production example, the type of the mini character added to the "special 2" that is stopped and displayed in the right symbol is different. .. That is, in this production example, even when three "special 2" are arranged, the display mode of at least one of the "special 2" is different from the display mode of the other "special 2", so that the design is different. It may be possible to prevent the misidentification that a big hit has occurred. In this production example, the display mode of "Special 2" stopped and displayed on the right symbol and the display mode of "Special 2" stopped and displayed on the middle symbol are the same, but three "Special 2" All of the display modes may be different. In addition, the types of mini characters added to each of the three "special 2" may be the same (for example, the mini character BCH of the chief is added to all of the three "special 2". In this case, the reliability of the jackpot is higher (the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the types of mini characters added to each of the three "special 2" are not the same. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (6), it is shown that the button operation effect is started by stopping and displaying all three decorative symbols of "Special 2". In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (6), a vibration / rotation button image 136aV showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating is displayed, and the button reception time meter MT is displayed together with the vibration / rotation button image 136aV. Is also displayed. Further, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is provided with a mini character BCH having a number length, and in this respect, it can be said that the display mode is common to the above-mentioned "special 2" decorative symbol. At this time, the effect button 136 is not vibrated or rotated and is in a normal state, but the vibration and the rotation operation of the internal mechanism may be started. This button operation effect is a notice effect regarding the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display) being executed. The mini-character added to the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be a mini-character other than the longest mini-character BCH (for example, a panda mini-character PND or the like). At this time, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the additionally displayed mini-character. For example, the mini-character BCH of the chief is displayed more than when the panda's mini-character PND is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot may be higher in the case. Further, as in the production example shown in FIG. 280 (12), the mini character may not be additionally displayed, and when the mini character is additionally displayed, it is a big hit as compared with the case where the mini character is not additionally displayed. The reliability of the game may be high (the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed). Further, instead of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV, the button image 136a in the default display mode described above may be displayed. At this time, the longest mini-character BCH or the panda mini-character PND may be added to the button image 136a. At the timing shown in FIG. 283 (6), the operation valid period has not yet started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is not treated as valid.

After that, after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 283 (7), as shown in FIG. 283 (8), the character "x1" is displayed. The decorative symbols of "Special 1" to which are added are stopped and displayed in a manner in which three are aligned, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The above-mentioned mini-character may be added to the decorative symbol of "special 1" and displayed. In this case, at least one mini-character of the three "special 1" decorative symbols is the other "special 1". It may be different from the mini character of the decorative pattern of "" to prevent misidentification of the jackpot and the reach state.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (9), the decorative symbol in which three "special 1" are aligned is erased, and instead, the decorative symbol stop display of "special 1", which is an oversized display mode, is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. As a result, it is notified that the first pseudo-ream will be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 283 (10), it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. Then, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

FIG. 284 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 284 (1) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 274 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (7) after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, as shown in FIG. 284 (8), the button is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are erased, and a plurality of star symbols are displayed so as to cover the second hold icon h12, and the display is performed so as to affect them. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, it is shown that "decoration 4" scrolls in from the upper part of the display screen and moves toward the stop position of the middle symbol due to low-speed fluctuation.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (9), it is shown that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button notice display mode. That is, the display mode of this button notice is the display mode of the look-ahead notice. The display mode of this button notice is different from the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 2" in that the characters "Change" are not displayed and an animation prompting the button operation is displayed. .. The medium design continues to fluctuate at low speed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (10), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then the decoration is performed as shown in FIG. 284 (11). In the symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1, "x" indicating that it is lost is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is also erased. Further, in the first special figure display device 212, the stop display is displayed by "special figure I" which is a lost symbol. The second hold icon h12, which has changed to a button image, has not changed yet.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 284 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280. Then, it is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started, and the variable display of the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1 is also started. The second hold icon h12, which was the display mode of the button notice, continues to be the display mode of the button notice even after moving to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and being displayed as the first hold icon h11. Will be done.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 284 (13), as shown in FIG. 284 (14), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the button notice to the display of Sabohani. It is changed to the aspect. This suggests that the first reserved symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit.

FIG. 285 (A) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 285 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of a continuous production.

FIGS. 285 (A1) to 285 (A2) show that the decorative symbol of "Special 2" suggests the content of the button operation effect. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, respectively. In this effect example, the display mode of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is different from the display mode of "Special 2" which is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, and imitates the effect button 136. It is said that this is the mode. Then, in the "special 2" of this middle symbol, the character "hold change" is displayed on the upper surface thereof, and when the effect button 136 is operated in the button operation effect, the hold icon (or variable icon) is displayed. It has been notified in advance that the display mode may change. That is, the decorative symbol of the "special 2" of the middle symbol can be said to be a dedicated display mode for notifying that the change notice of the hold icon is performed by holding the button.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (A2), it is shown that the button operation effect is started. Specifically, when the button operation effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the decorative symbol in which three "special 2" are aligned, and instead displays the button image 136a represented by an oversized size. It is shown how it is done. The characters "hold change" are displayed on the upper surface of the button image 136a, and it is notified that the change notice of the hold icon due to the button hold is being performed. Although the button image 136a has the same display mode as the "special 2" of the dedicated display mode, it differs in that an animation for promoting the button operation is performed. That is, it can be said that a part of the display mode is common to the button image 136a shown in FIG. 285 (A2) and the decorative symbol of the "special 2" of the dedicated display mode shown in FIG. 285 (A1). On the other hand, the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. The hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode has the character "push" displayed on its upper surface, prompting the operation of the effect button 136. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, the button image 136a is erased, and the hold icon h11 in the button hold display mode changes to another display mode (for example, the display mode of Sabohani, the default display mode, etc.). ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (B), a notice icon of a pseudo-ream acquired and stocked in a mini game or the like is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. The notice icon of this pseudo-ren is a notice icon displayed in a manner in which the characters "pseudo-ren" are added to the character of the lord, and may be displayed in both the pre-reading notice and the notice in the symbol variation display. However, the display mode may be different between the pre-reading notice and the symbol variation display. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 285 (B), it is shown that three decorative symbols of "Special 1" are aligned to generate a pseudo-ream. In addition, in FIG. 285 (B), the pseudo-ream notice icon displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen and the display in which three decorative symbols of "Special 1" are aligned are not related. Both may be related. Here, when the display mode of the pseudo-ream notice icon and the display mode of the decorative symbol of "Special 1" are different, and the player can clearly distinguish between the notice icon and the decorative symbol. There is.

In the embodiments described so far, the configuration may include a main display device having a large screen size and one or a plurality of sub display devices having a screen size smaller than that of the main display device. In this case, the configuration may be provided. For example, a symbol displayed on a sub-display device whose screen size is smaller than that of the main display device (decorative symbol, button image, various icons, characters, etc.) than the symbol displayed on the main display device having a large screen size. The one may be displayed larger.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
A symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
With notice means capable of executing a plurality of types of notices [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542, etc.] ,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon, etc.].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number") [for example, in the hold icon display area 281 of special figure 1 , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, , If the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and if the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6, etc.] among the plurality of types of notice icons is the first number [for example, two, etc.]. ] It is configured so that a second number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the first number, is more likely to be a big hit than when it is digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production.

In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easier to recognize that there is a fluctuation that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent overlooking the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

In addition, according to this game table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be executable other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the advance notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be executable in addition to the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be displayable in addition to the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area of the image display means.

Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by, for example, characters, numbers, or symbols.

Further, the hold display may be displayed only for the number of holds, or may be displayed in addition to the number of holds.

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is exhausted, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed in a field other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be one that can display only one or more notice icons, or may be one that can display other than one or more notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. , When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be feasible. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the type of notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [for example, as many notice icons as the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. The notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to do it.

Here, the notice icon may display only the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may be other than the number corresponding to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or may not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the advance notice means gives a fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the advance notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that becomes a big hit]. It ’s a viable means,
The notice means is the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a means capable of executing the above-mentioned fake notice [for example, a pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, a reach transition effect, etc.] corresponding to the above.
After the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player may be able to feel tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice in the same mode as the notice, or may be capable of executing other than the fake notice in the same mode as the notice. You may. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same mode as the notice, or may not execute a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.

Further, even if the notice means can execute only a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, something other than a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be executable. .. Further, the notice means may be one that always executes a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be out of order after the fake notice is executed, or the result of the symbol variation display may be a big hit after the fake notice is executed. There may be.

After the fake notice is executed, the notice that is likely to display the big hit symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, "During the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than that of the third number [for example, one or the like]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the three, is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, effect hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to clearly distinguish between the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only the display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing the display other than the display according to the number of holds. Further, the hold display means may always execute the display according to the number of holds, or may not execute the display according to the number of holds.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

Here, the hold display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured by including other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be one composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, and may be a hand-held one including a plurality of LEDs in one package, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the launch operation notification means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the launch operation means may also be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "pre-reading notice means capable of executing pre-reading notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc." ] With
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may be displayed to increase the expectation for a big hit.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only the look-ahead notice, or may be capable of executing other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing the look-ahead notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may be other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The look-ahead notice may be executable. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be read ahead (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of look-ahead shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.]] The notice icon may be digested by the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period when () is being executed.
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. 82 (4). During the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the look-ahead is executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of the look-ahead is displayed. A game table characterized in that it is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the number of digested notice icons differs depending on whether the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed or the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand the symbol variation display that should be noted.

Here, in the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed. In the case, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a different number than the sixth number. In addition, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol change display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol change display is being executed, or the first one. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. Further, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, or the first symbol may be displayed. During the period in which the variation display is being executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

Here, the notice icon may always start to be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period other than the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to be displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, "during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol variation display ") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed is executed, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may be started to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (C) is the symbol variation display. Increased display during execution of symbol variation display executed before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed only during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, or it may be configured to start displaying during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be started to be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may not start to be displayed.

The notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed does not have to start displaying during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed.

In addition, "the hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, 4 or 8].
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum number of pending displays that can be displayed and the maximum number of notice icons that can be displayed may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable hold displays of the special figure 1, or at least the number may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable hold displays of the special figure 2, or at least the number may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the total number of maximum displayable numbers of the hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, or at least may be the same.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and 97 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) and FIG. 92 (Bb)].
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and 97 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the content of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. .. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Further, the first notice may only notify that the first effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. .. Further, the first notice may always notify that the first effect will be executed, or may not notify that the first effect will be executed.

Further, the second notice may only notify that the second effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. .. Further, the second notice may always notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect will be executed.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail [for example, FIGS. 82 (1) to 86 (66) and 94 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A first display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.] and
A second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the effect hold lamp 286].
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol advance, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended number”) in the reserved display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.] is a display means that can be displayed [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, the reach transition effect is executed. In some cases, etc.],
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is digested than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit if it is done,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the image display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production.

In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easier to recognize that there is a fluctuation that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display in the hold. , It may be possible to prevent overlooking the notice display corresponding to the notice icon.

In addition, according to this game table, the player may be able to pay attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons and improve the interest of the game.

Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be executable other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be displayable in addition to the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be displayable in addition to the plurality of types of notice displays. In addition, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the second display means may be one that can display the display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or the one that can display the display according to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. ..

Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is not digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even if the hold is digested.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

Further, the notice icon display area may be one that can display only one or more notice icons, or may be one that can display other than one or more notice icons. Further, the notice icon display area may always display one or more notice icons, or may not display one or more notice icons.

In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon can be displayed. May be good. In addition, the second display means always displays a type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player does not miss the notice display. May be possible.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or may be a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or display the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. It may not be possible.

In addition, "the second display means is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-ream effect or reach that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-ream effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] It is a display means that can display [transition effect, etc.]
The second display means is the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, reach transition effect, etc.]
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give the player a sense of tension until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display, or something other than the fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display. May also be displayable. In addition, the second display means may always display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display, or may not display a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display. There may be.

In addition, the second display means can display only a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it is possible to display something other than the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon. It may be. In addition, the second display means always displays a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It may be present, or when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed. ..

Further, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be out of order after the fake notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the fake notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

After the fake notice display is displayed, the symbol display means may display a notice display that is likely to display the jackpot symbol.

Further, "During the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than that of the third number [for example, one or the like]. The fourth number [for example, three, etc.], which is larger than the three, is configured to be more likely to be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, "The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.].
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, turning on a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to clearly distinguish between the hold display and the notice icon display.

Here, the second display means may be composed of two display means or may be composed of three or more display means.

Further, the second display means may be composed of only the image display means and the hold display means, or may be composed of other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be one in which the image display means and the hold display means are always configured, or may not form at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying the display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be able to display the display according to the number of holds other than the hold display area. May be good. Further, the hold display means may always display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display the display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

Here, the hold display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured by including other than the light emitting means (for example, an image display means).

The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be one composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, and may be a hand-held one including a plurality of LEDs in one package, such as a full-color LED. Further, it may be composed of a single color LED.

Further, in addition to the hold display means, the launch operation notification means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the launch operation means may also be realized by the light emitting means.

In addition, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208 or the like].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the variable display of the decorative symbol and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of hold while visually recognizing the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "pre-reading notice means capable of executing pre-reading notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 540, etc." ] With
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may be displayed to increase the expectation for a big hit.

Here, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing only the look-ahead notice, or may be capable of executing other than the look-ahead notice. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice, or may not execute the look-ahead notice.

Further, the look-ahead notice means may be capable of executing the look-ahead notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may be other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The look-ahead notice may be executable. Further, the look-ahead notice means may always execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or may not execute the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, "the symbol variation display to be read ahead (hereinafter," second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of look-ahead shown in FIG. 82 (2), etc.]] The notice icon may be digested by the fifth number [for example, three, etc.] during the period when () is being executed.
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. 82. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of look-ahead during the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that was held before the second hold that is the target of look-ahead shown in (4) is being executed. A game table characterized in that the hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the number of digested notice icons differs depending on whether the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is being displayed or the symbol variation display that is executed before the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Therefore, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand the symbol variation display that should be noted.

Here, in the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period during which the second symbol variation display is executed. In the case, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Further, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the fifth number during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the second symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may be digested in a different number than the sixth number. In addition, the notice icon may be configured to be always digested by the sixth number during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed, or during the period when the first symbol variation display is executed. , The notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol change display is held during the period when the first symbol change display is being executed. , It may be possible to notify other than the fact that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may always notify that the operation of the second symbol change display is held during the period when the first symbol change display is being executed. During the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, it may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

Here, the notice icon may always start to be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed, or the notice icon may be displayed during the period other than the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to be displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, "during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" third symbol variation display ") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed is executed, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed may be started to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat that is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (C) is the symbol variation display. Increased display during execution of symbol variation display executed before],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed only during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed, or it may be configured to start displaying during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may be started to be displayed. Further, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to always start to be displayed. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed may not start to be displayed.

The notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is executed does not have to start displaying during the period when the third symbol variation display is executed.

In addition, "the hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.] according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the displayable number of the display according to the number of holds and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, so that the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

Here, the hold display area may always display the display according to the number of holds up to the seventh number, or may not display the display according to the number of holds up to the seventh number. Good.

Further, the notice icon display area may always display the notice icons up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

The maximum number of displays that can be displayed according to the number of reservations and the maximum number of notice icons that can be displayed may be the same.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable displayable numbers according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 1, or at least the same number may be used.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the maximum number of displayable displayable numbers according to the number of reservations in Special Figure 2, or at least the same number may be used.

Further, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be larger than the total number of maximum displayable numbers according to the number of reserved figures 1 and 2, or at least the same. Good.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and 97 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and 97 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the content of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and may also display notice displays other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. Further, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. May be good.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. .. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Further, the first notice display may only notify that the first effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. Further, the first notice display may always notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

Further, the second notice display may only notify that the second effect is executed, or may also notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may always notify that the second effect will be executed, or may not notify that the second effect will be executed.

Further, "The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail [for example, FIGS. 82 (1) to 86 (66) and 94 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that.

In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a look-ahead notice, but it may be displayed separately from the look-ahead notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the look-ahead mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or be digested even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may be increased or digested even while the special background mode for look-ahead is being executed. May be good.

Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, the notice icon C is displayed. When the notice display b, the notice display c or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested in the notice display a when the notice c is always displayed. It is a display that is displayed in the case of, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is a symbol in which "notice display b, notice display c or notice display d" is displayed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variation display on which the notice display a is displayed" is performed than when the "variation display" is performed. Further, the notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C or the notice icon D is digested. It is a display, and it is easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the "symbol variation display with the notice display b displayed" is executed than when the "symbol variation display with the notice display c displayed" is executed. It may be configured in. Further, the notice display d is a display displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested, and the notice icon C is displayed. When it is digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when "notice icon A, notice icon B or notice icon D is digested" is executed rather than "notice icon C is digested symbol change display". It may be configured to be easy. In addition, the jackpot symbol is better when the "signature variation display in which the notice display a, notice display b or notice display c is displayed" is executed than when the "symbol variation display in which the notice display d is displayed" is executed. It may be configured so that it can be easily confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in the above description,
"A first display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.] and
A second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the effect hold lamp 286].
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol advance, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. And
The second display means displays a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “suspended number”) in the reserved display area [for example, the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. , The hold icon display area of the special figure 2, the variable icon display area 280, the hold display area of the effect hold lamp 286, etc.] is a display means that can be displayed [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 has The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, the notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. It is configured so that a notice icon can be displayed in each area],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, , If the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and if the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
A second number that is larger than the first number [eg, one, etc.] than if the notice icon was digested during the period in which the symbol variation display was executed once. For example, 3 etc.] It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when digested.
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)". It is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the start of "design variation display, etc.]".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In addition, "the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-ream effect or reach that is out of place] in the same manner as the mode of the notice display [for example, a pseudo-ream effect or a reach transition effect that is a big hit] It is a display means that can display [transition effect, etc.]
The second display means is the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is a display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-continuous notice that is out of order, reach transition effect, etc.]
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second display means is composed of a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.]. Is a display means
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "One of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, a first special figure hold lamp 218, a second special figure hold lamp 220, a production hold lamp 286, etc.].
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, turning on a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (9) to 83 (20), display of the notice icon as a look-ahead notice. Is done by the decorative icon display device 208, etc.],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, during the period in which the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold which is the target of the look-ahead shown in FIG. 82 (2)] is being executed, the notice icon is displayed. Fifth number [eg, 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, "three objects to be read ahead shown in the first symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82 (2))". The notice icon may be digested by the sixth number [for example, one, etc.] during the period during which the "design variation display based on the hold held before the eye hold, etc.]" is being executed. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. 82. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of look-ahead during the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that was held before the second hold that is the target of look-ahead shown in (4) is being executed. A game table characterized in that the hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1]. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead [for example, FIG. 82 (1)). As shown in FIGS. 86 (66) and 94 (1) to 98 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested by the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" fourth symbol variation display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 91 (C), the digestion display of the hat notice icon I6 and the increase display of the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed. The notice icon may be started to be displayed [For example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (C) is during execution of the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.] according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.].
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542". Etc.]
As the notice icon, the first notice icon [for example, the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box shown in FIGS. 85 (47) and 96 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, the ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 92 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIGS. 85 (49) to (50) and 97 (49)].
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display [for example, a stage change effect shown in FIG. 92 (Ac) or FIG. 92 (Bb)].
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIGS. 85 (51) to (57) and 97 (50-1) to (57). Directing, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of a lunar background].
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.] and
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While displaying the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)], the notice icon As a result, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Displayed, etc.],
The first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 82 (9) to 83. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (14). ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, "the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold which is the object of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2))" (Variation display, etc.] ”), the first notice icon that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested [for example, FIG. 82 (for example, FIG. 82 ()). 9) As shown in FIGS. 83 (25), the notice icon I6 of the hat which started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is a symbol variation display which is a target of pre-reading as shown in FIG. 83 (23). Digested in],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Further, "The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat]. The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display where the display of I6 has started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "as a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIGS. 82 (9) to FIGS. As shown in 83 (25), the symbol variation that is the target of pre-reading so that the notice icon I6 of the hat that started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 82 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (23). The notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the display]. ] Was also explained.

In addition, "during the display of one symbol variation display, the second number [for example, three, etc.] is higher than the case where the first notice icon of the first number [for example, one, etc.] is digested. ] Is more likely to be a big hit when the first notice icon is digested.
The second number is larger than the first number.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "a second notice icon [for example, fan notice icon I10, etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop pattern notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (31)) is used as the notice display. Continuous production, etc.] may be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fake notice display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a reach transition effect that is out of place].
When the first notice icon [for example, hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, the first fake notice table [for example, pseudo-continuous production, etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. May be
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
It is configured so that the symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is out of alignment.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect, which is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 81 (b)].
As the notice icon, a third notice icon [for example, ribbon notice icon I8, etc.] can be displayed.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is high, The background shifts to the look-ahead mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a decorative symbol variable display [for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a decorative symbol variable display, etc.]" Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "based on the hold three before the hold that is the target of the look-ahead shown in FIG. 82 (9), the first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon I6, etc. of the hat whose display was started during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, hold which is the target of pre-reading]. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the pattern change display based on],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285, etc.] in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 is composed of a notice icon first display area YA1 and a notice icon sixth display area YA6. It is configured so that a notice icon can be displayed in each area],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is provided with "effect control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500]].
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "main control means [for example, main control unit 300, etc.] and
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, etc.] and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, in the above description, the game table is provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 81 (b), a "house" notice icon I21, and a "crest" notice icon I22. , "Den" notice icon I31, "Princess" notice icon I32, "Grandfather" notice icon I33, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 104 (1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 105, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 during the period from when the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. Notice icon I21 and "Crest" notice icon I22 are displayed, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to 84 (32), the hat. When the notice icon I6 of the above is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed, and as shown in FIGS. 85 (46) to (57), when the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May be started, etc.],
The first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons [for example, the combination of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 shown in FIG. 104, etc.] changes once. By being digested in the display, the first effect display [for example, the effect image displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 105 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that the first effect display may be displayed until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

In addition, according to this game console, it is possible to show a plurality of notice icons during the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started, which gives a feeling of expectation for a big hit. You may be able to do it.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. A display other than the effect display corresponding to the above may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. The effect display corresponding to may not be displayed.

Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, only the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. It is good, and the first combination of the displayed multiple notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, so that a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as the effect display. May be done. Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is always displayed as the effect display. Alternatively, the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons may be digested in one symbol variation display, so that the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display.

Further, even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. It is also configured so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed multiple notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be done.

Further, "The first combination is a combination consisting of the notice icons of the first number [for example, two or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first effect display is displayed from the time when the notice icon of one of the first combinations consisting of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons are digested. It may be possible to continue to have the expectation that may be displayed.

In addition, "the first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a notice icon I21 of a" house "] and a second notice icon [for example, a notice icon I22 of a" crest "]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. You may. Further, the first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 104 (1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of the above is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be exhausted [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (19), the symbol variation display to be read ahead is suspended. During the period from the time until the end of the symbol variation display, the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 have been digested],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "In one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display is not displayed [for example, Even if only one of the "house" notice icon I21 and the "crest" notice icon I22 is digested, the effect image shown in FIG. 105 (21) is not displayed, etc.]. The stand. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display, so that the first effect display is displayed. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who was able to see.

Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed, or once. In the symbol variation display of, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in one symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not always be displayed, or the first effect display may be configured once. In the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may be displayed.

In addition, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested only in one symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed, or the first effect display may be displayed once. In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, even if only a part of the notice icons in the first combination is digested, the first effect display may not be displayed.

Further, "as the notice icon, the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 83] is digested, so that the third effect display [for example, FIG. 84 (28) ), The effect display in which the chief character BC displayed in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 pushes up the right pattern, etc.] is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the production is increased, and the production effect may be enhanced.

Here, the third notice icon may be digested so that only the third effect display is displayed, or the third notice icon is digested to display the third effect display. It may be configured so that a display other than the effect display is also displayed. In addition, it may be configured so that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect display is digested by digesting the third effect icon. The display may be configured so that it may not be displayed.

In addition, it may be configured so that the third effect display is displayed only when the third notice icon is digested, or the third notice icon is not digested. It may be configured so that the three effect displays are displayed.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 104. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 104 (notice icon I21 of" house "or notice of" crest "". Icon I22, etc.) is not an icon indicating the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"The first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]
The second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The first display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, a display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIGS. 109 (10) to 110 (13) is digested, or a display in FIGS. 110 (16) to 110 (19). ), The display of the character BC of the chief character, which is performed corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, or the pseudo-continuous production, or the display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c5). Etc.] is a means that can be displayed,
The second display means is a display related to the notice icon [for example, the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 109 (2) to 110 (13) and FIGS. 109 (5) to (9). It is a means capable of displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat, or the notice icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 112 (c6).
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81 may function as a look-ahead notice display].
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 112 (c1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c9), the notice icon is displayed during the period from when the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. Two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed in area 285B],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the player's line of sight looking at the display related to the notice icon should not be concentrated on one display means. It may be possible to entertain the player.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the display related to the notice icon, or may be able to display a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display the display related to the notice icon, or may not display the display related to the notice icon.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the display related to the notice icon, or may be able to display a display other than the display related to the notice icon. In addition, the second display means may always display the display related to the notice icon, or may not display the display related to the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 112 (c1)] is reserved, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 112 (c1) to 112 (c9), they are subject to pre-reading. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 have been digested, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notice icon is displayed in the "second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 109 (5), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the display means on which the stock effect can be performed is defined, it may be possible not to overlook the stocked notice icon.

Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display something other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display means may be configured so that the notice icon may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display means, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display means other than the second display means. May be good.

In addition, the notice icon is displayed in the "first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. A notice may be displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (2) to (5), a display for notifying that the notice icon I6 of the hat will be displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (Don) (Direction) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the notice icon may be displayed, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the display means and prevent the player from overlooking the display of the notice icon. is there.

Here, the first display means may only display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed, or the first display means may display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed. Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, the first display means may always display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed, and the first display means may display a notice that the notice icon will be displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed in the display means other than the first display means. May be displayed to give notice.

Further, "the first display means includes a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. It is a provided means,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, and the like]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (4) and (10), the notice icon is the first. It is displayed over one decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to produce an impactful notice icon, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with a second display area without fail, or may not be provided with a second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed in a display other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over an area. Further, the notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over.

Further, "the first display means includes a first display area [for example, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 109, a display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 112, etc.]. It is a provided means,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 109, a display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 112, and the like]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of types of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG. 81].
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. As shown in 110 (16) to (18), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the enlarged display of the bancho character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which the character BC of the Bancho pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed over 208B. Displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to produce an impactful notice icon, which may entertain the player.

Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or may not be provided with the first display area.

Further, the second display means may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with a second display area without fail, or may not be provided with a second display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayable only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode according to the type.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. May be good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. , When the notice icon is digested, the effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the digested type of the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 109. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon (for example, the hat notice icon I6) shown in FIG. 109 is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
The first movable means [for example, an actuator that displaces the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 115 (12), a family crest accessory 224B shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2), etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. 81 (b), a "house" notice icon I21, and a "crest" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and 115, in the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, a drink notice icon I31, etc. are displayed in the notice icon display area 285],
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from a default position to a protruding position, as shown in FIGS. 115 (12) to (17)]. It ’s a viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there was room for improvement in the movable means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic in the movable means.

Further, according to this game table, when the fourth notice icon is digested by the display means, the first movable effect by the first movable means may be performed, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, the line of sight of the player can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect of the effect may be enhanced.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayable only in a display mode according to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode according to the type. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a display mode according to the type, or may not be displayed in a display mode according to the type.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. When the fourth notice icon is exhausted, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may be executed. Further, when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed without fail, or the displayed notice icon may be configured. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may not be executed when the fourth notice icon is exhausted.

In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the third hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 82 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66) and FIG. 115, the look-ahead During the period from the suspension of the target symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the notice icon I6 for the two hats, the notice icon I9 for the Senryo box, the notice icon I31 for the drink, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, when "the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 81, the notice icon I21 of" house ", etc.] is digested, the first movable It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured so that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, it may be configured so that a movable effect other than the first movable effect is not executed. Further, it may be configured so that the first movable effect is not always executed when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

Further, it may be configured so that the first movable effect is not executed only when the fifth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the first of the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the first movable effect is not executed even when the notice icon of the fifth is not digested.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
The first movable means is a means for moving the operating means.
The first movable effect shows the mode of the operating means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 115 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 115 (17). It is an effect that changes to the protruding position, etc.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the operation means may be noticed by the notice icon, so that the operation means may also be noticed.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or may be one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player without fail, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the first movable means may be one in which only the operating means can be moved, or one in which other than the operating means can be moved. Further, the first movable means may be one in which the operating means is always movable, or may not be movable.

In addition, "a second movable means [for example, a family crest accessory shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)] is provided.
The second movable means is a means capable of performing the second movable effect [for example, the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 107 (d4-2)].
When the sixth notice icon [for example, the notice icon I21 of "house" etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be executed. ing,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a wide variety of productions by movable means, which may improve the interest.

Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may always execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. When the sixth notice icon of the above is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may be executed. In addition, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail, or among the displayed notice icons. It may be configured so that the second movable effect may not be executed when the sixth notice icon is digested.

Further, it may be configured so that the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be executed. It may be configured so that the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon of the above is not digested.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 104. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 115 (notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes, notice icon I31 of a drink, etc.)). Is not an icon indicating the number of pending symbol variation display operations in Special Figure 1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 117 (1)]] The display of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as “plural notice icons”) is started in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In some cases [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), the notice icon is displayed during the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to be read ahead to the end of the symbol variation display. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, etc. are displayed in area 285],
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 117 (2) to (6), a notice that the notice icon produced by the lord is displayed, etc. ], And
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, it may be suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be able to suggest only that the notice icon display may be started, or may be other than the case where the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestive. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the notice icon display may be started, or may not suggest that the notice icon display may be started. There may be.

Further, after the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display which is a big hit based on the second hold which is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 117 (1)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display is held. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display of No. 1 is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), the look-ahead target. During the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display to the end of the symbol variation display, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are exhausted. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be something other than the plurality of notice icons that is digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably exhausted, and the second symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

Further, a plurality of notice icons may be exhausted only in the period from the suspension of the second symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the second The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIGS. 117 (2) to (5), twice. There is a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by the director over the pattern change display of], etc.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than the plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be the one that may occur. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, "While the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display is being displayed, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is terminated [for example, FIG. 117 (2)). ~ As shown in Fig. (5), the notice that the notice icon will be displayed by the lord's direction has ended before the symbol variation display, which is the target of pre-reading, is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be pre-read starts, it may be possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be pre-read.

Here, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated, or the second symbol variation may be terminated. During the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end without fail, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. It may be configured so that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be terminated. It may be configured so that the display of the notice icon display suggestion display ends even when the symbol variation display displayed before is not displayed.

Further, "The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that the display of at least one of the notice icons of a third number [for example, three or the like] may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 119 (a1-4), at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started to be displayed in the Amida effect. It suggests that there is, etc.],
The third number is a number of two or more.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, so that the player can know which notice icon may be displayed. In some cases, it may be possible to entertain the fluctuation of the design on which the notice icon is displayed.

Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may only suggest that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or may be a third. It may also suggest something other than that at least one of the number of notice icons may be initiated. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the notice icon of the third number may be started. It may not suggest that at least one of the displays may be initiated.

In addition, "the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in 119 (a1-1) to FIG. 6 (a-6), as a result of the Amida effect, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display may be started only by at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon display suggestion display, or the notice may be started. Display other than at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested by the icon display suggestion display may also be started. Further, the display may be configured so that at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display suggestion display of the notice icon may be started is always started. The display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the icon display suggestion display may be started may not be started.

In addition, "the lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a lost symbol. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the suspension of "variation display, etc.") to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 82. As shown in FIGS. (2) to 86 (66), four notice icons are stocked from the time when the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always start. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started.

Further, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a loss of the symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), in the target of pre-reading. Four notice icons have been digested between the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended and the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 117. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 117 (hat notice icon I6, etc.) is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), FIG. 81 (b), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter, "second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 120 (2)]] ”) Is suspended, and then the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 120 (4) to (13)] ”) is displayed. May be started,
During the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons"). The display may be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to 86 (66), the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the jackpot that is the target of pre-reading is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display to the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that starts to be displayed after the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be read ahead is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but then started. It may be possible to enjoy the display of the notice icon as the look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display to be read ahead from the symbol change display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as the first look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as the first look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as the first look-ahead notice display.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the first symbol variation display is started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, a symbol variation display other than the display of the display may be started. Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, only the display of one symbol variation display may be started.

Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, or the first In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the display of the first symbol variation may be started. The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, "the plurality of notice icons may be digested in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example," As shown in FIGS. 82 (4) to 86 (66), the target of the pre-reading is the target of the pre-reading after the display of the symbol variation display, which is started after the symbol variation display that is the jackpot that is the target of the pre-reading is suspended. By the end of the big hit symbol variation display, the two hat notice icons I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 will be digested, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the symbol variation display displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be read ahead is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started after that. It may be possible to enjoy the digestion of the notice icon as the look-ahead notice display related to the second symbol change display that is the target of the look-ahead from the symbol change display.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the first In the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be digested without fail, and the first symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the start of display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 120]. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number. [For example, the notice icon (for example, the hat notice icon I6) shown in FIG. 120 is shown in FIG. It is not an icon that indicates the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, when the "second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 120 (2)] is suspended, the second symbol variation display The display of the hold display [for example, the display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 120 (2)] is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display has been suspended.

Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. The display of the hold display may be started. Further, the display of the second hold display may be started whenever the second symbol change display is suspended, and the display of the second hold display may be started when the second symbol change display is held. It does not have to be started.

Further, "as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, the look-ahead notice display mode (display mode of Sabohani) shown in FIG. 120 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode [for example, FIG. 120 (2). ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (sabohani display mode) when the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of look-ahead, is held. Display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the look-ahead notice display increases, and the interest may be improved.

Here, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. Further, as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, and as the second look-ahead notice display, the second hold display is the second look-ahead display. It may not be displayed in the mode.

Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second In the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display of is suspended, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second look-ahead display mode. Further, in the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may always be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display may be displayed. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

Further, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode only in the symbol change display displayed when the second symbol change display is held, or the second In the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display of No. 1 is suspended, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third look-ahead notice display [for example, a look-ahead mode effect display shown in FIGS. 121 (b2) to (b3)].
The third look-ahead notice display is a display in which the display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, shown in FIGS. 121 (b1) to 121 (b3). In this way, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display, which is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading, is held.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the variation of the look-ahead notice display increases, so that the interest may be improved.

Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, the display may be started. Further, the third look-ahead notice display may always start after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or may not start after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be cases.

In addition, "a lost symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter," a fourth symbol variation display [for example, a symbol variation that is a loss based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading shown in FIG. 120 (2)). Display, etc.] ”) is suspended, and then referred to as a symbol variation display (hereinafter,“ third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 120 (4) to (13)] ”. ) May start to appear
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started [for example, the figure. As shown in 82 (4) to 86 (66), the pre-reading target is the target of the pre-reading after the display of the symbol variation display, which is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead is suspended By the time the display of the symbol variation that causes a certain loss is completed, the notice icon I6 of the two hats, the notice icon I9 of the Senryo box, the notice icon I10 of the fan, etc. will be displayed],
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that starts to be displayed after the symbol variation display displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Further, there may be a case where only the display of the third symbol variation display is started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, a symbol variation display other than the display of the display may be started. Further, the display of the third symbol variation display may be always started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not be started.

Further, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, and the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. In some cases, only the display of the three symbol variation displays may be started.

Further, in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, or the third symbol variation display may be started. In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the display of the third symbol variation may be started. The display of the plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from the start of the display of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

Further, after the "fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 83 (21) to 86 (66), which is a lost symbol variation display, etc.] is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. In the period until the display of the four symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (2) to 86 (66), in the target of pre-reading. A game console characterized in that four notice icons have been digested from the time when a certain symbol variation display is suspended until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading]. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is digested, it does not necessarily become a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the symbol variation display to be read ahead is completed.

Here, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested, or the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, other than the plurality of notice icons may be digested. Further, in the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, a plurality of notice icons may be inevitably digested, and the fourth symbol variation display may be exhausted. In the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may not be digested.

In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be digested only during the period from the suspension of the fourth symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the fourth. The plurality of notice icons may be digested even in a period other than the period from the suspension of the symbol variation display of the above to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. (B), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132].
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of "Den-sama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the part TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in the figure (l)].
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 132] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a swordsman's notice icon I62. And the chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. May be good. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be one. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. ..

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), when the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, the notice icon is displayed. The explanation is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be one that is not displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be one that is not displayed even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not always be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed.

Further, "When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be restarted, or when the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display may be restarted. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d)".
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 shows "super heat". Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. May be good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 129].
The third display means is a display that matches the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 129 (a2) to (a4) to give a notice of the swordsman. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.] is a means that can be displayed.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is located below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include a display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display. It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display matching the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display matching the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display area may be provided in a part of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area in the third display means. ..

Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area in the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. It may be the one that was given. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132].
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of the "castle town stage" displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the stage name display unit ST2 has a princess notice icon I64. Two pseudo-ream notice icons I65 are displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. You may. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area of the display means.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display area, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. When is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.], which is a game table. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third display may be a state in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and may not be displayed, or a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be in the state of or not displayed. Further, the third display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or is displayed in a state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

Further, "The first display area is a display area divided by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by lines, or may be partitioned including items other than lines. Further, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 132]. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a7) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-ream notice icon I65, The swordsman's notice icon I62, chance-up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons that indicate the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. (B), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132, the stage name display unit ST2, etc.] is displayed in the hold icon [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132]. The display area is different from the display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 132] on which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132].
The first display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a tutorial display shown in FIG. 125 (a). The display of "Den-sama is the Yatsushiro Shogun" displayed in the part TT1, "Panda is the master of the lord" etc. displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in the figure (l)].
When displayed, the first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 or the like shown in FIG. 132] in the display means.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the tutorial display unit TT4 has a chance up with the swordsman's notice icon I62. Notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in a field other than the first display area of the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. In the displayed state, the explanation is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the state of being displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, only the first display may not be displayed, or in the state of being displayed in the first display area of the notice icon, the first. It is also possible to hide the display other than the display of. Further, the first display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or the first display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The display may be displayed.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or even in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. It is possible that only the first display is not displayed.

Further, "When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display will be resumed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is also restarted. In some cases. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be restarted without fail, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be restarted.

Further, when the first display is, for example, the explanation of the first character, the tenth display, which is an explanation display different from the first display, may be displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 131 (d)".
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 shows "super heat". Character display is displayed, etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display related to the notice icon [for example, a character display of "By digesting the notice icon ..." in the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132 (a1)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when it is displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when it is displayed. It may be displayable. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed. May be good.

Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display related to the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display related to the notice icon. Further, the explanation display may always include the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include the explanation display regarding the notice icon.

The notice display in this description may be one of a number of notice displays.

Further, the notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of the display is the third display [for example, the character display of" gold is hotter than red "in the balloon TT2 shown in FIG. 131 (a1), or the same figure. The character display of "Swordsman reach is hot" in the balloon part TT2 and the character display of "When a panda breaks in" in the balloon part TT3 shown in (a6)].
The third display is an explanatory display.
The display content of the third display is different from the display content of the first display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed [for example, a balloon portion TT2, a balloon portion TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 131 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in a field other than the second display area of the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area of. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area of the display means when it is displayed, and when it is displayed, it may be displayed in the second display area of the display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be completely different.

Further, "Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (a10). Even if the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed on the tutorial display section TT4, the character display "Swordsman reach is hot" is displayed on the balloon display section TT2, and "When a panda breaks in" on the balloon display section TT3. Character display is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Further, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may always be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. The third display may be displayed even in the state of.

In addition, the animation introducing the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

In addition, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be displayed in the second display area. In addition, the notice display and the explanation display may be displayed alternately.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [for example, the character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132].
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of the "castle town stage" displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 132 (a1), and a stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 126 (c). Display of "Swordsman Reach" etc.],
The display content of the fourth display is different from the display content of the first display.
The fourth display is a display displayed in the third display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 or the like shown in FIG. 132 (a1)] in the display means.
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area.
In a state where the notice icons of the first number [for example, three, etc.] are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 132, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the fourth display may be displayable only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. May be good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area of the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area of the display means.

Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be completely different.

Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area, or the first one. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. Further, in the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may always be displayed in the third display area, or the first one. In the state where the number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

Further, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, or the first number. Even in a state other than the state in which the notice icon of is displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

Further, here, a type in which the stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

Further, "In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. Is displayed, the stage name is not displayed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth display may be a state in which the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and may not be displayed, or a state other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be in the state of or not displayed. Further, the fourth display may not always be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or is displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern shown in FIG. 129].
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 129 (a2) to (a4), and the swordsman's notice icon I62 Is a means that can display [displays that are stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is located below the symbol display device 208N, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. It may be configured to include a display means other than the display means. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means, the second display means and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means and the third display. It may be configured without including at least one of the means.

Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. In addition, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or may display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display the display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display the display linked with the display of the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display area may be provided in a part of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area in the third display means. ..

Further, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the area in the third display means, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display means. It may be the one that was given. Further, the first display area may be always provided in at least a part of the third display means, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display means. There may be.

Further, "The first display area is a display area divided by lines [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is divided into squares by lines, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by lines, or may be partitioned including items other than lines. Further, the first display area may be always divided by a line, or may not be divided by a line.

Further, the second display area may also be divided by lines, and the third display area may also be divided by lines.

In addition, it is provided with "hold display means [for example, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.].
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a display of a number corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. 132]. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 132 (a9) (princess notice icon I64, pseudo-ream notice icon I65, The swordsman's notice icon I62, chance-up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons that indicate the number of pending symbol variation displays in Special Figure 1, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display of the number corresponding to the hold number. .. Further, the hold display means may always display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number, or may not display the display of the number corresponding to the hold number.

It should be noted that the number of holds and the number of notice icons may happen to match.

Further, the maximum number of holds and the maximum number of stocks of the notice icon may be the same or different.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a), each notice icon shown in FIG. (B), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), etc.].
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 137].
The notice icon can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the display mode of the swordsman's notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is the display of the second display mode [for example, the enlarged notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i). Aspects, etc.]
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode [for example, from the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 137 (l). Also, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 137 (i) is larger in size, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, Swordsman's notice icon I62 is enlarged and displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice display, or may be displayed as something other than the look-ahead notice display. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the size of the notice icon may always be larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode, and the size of the notice icon is larger in the second display mode than in the first display mode. It may not be available.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. You may. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode. [For example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. 137 (i). ), After being enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), it is displayed in a normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. Therefore, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after it is displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode other than after it is displayed. Also, it may be displayed in the first display mode. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode after being displayed in the first display mode. It may not be displayed in the display mode of.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs the decorative symbol variation display. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), a normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-ream notice icon I65 and the swordsman's notice icon I62 do not overlap with the decorative design being displayed in a variable manner, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the notice icon may not overlap the decorative symbol variation display only in the first display mode, or may not overlap the decorative symbol variation display even in the display modes other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the notice icon may not always overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode, or may overlap the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode. ..

Further, "The decorative symbol variation display is a display that does not overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the decorative symbol during the variation display is a notice icon. It does not overlap with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 of the normal display mode displayed in the display area or the notice icon I62 of the swordsman],
The decorative symbol variation display is a display that may overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (i), the decorative symbol during the variation display is a notice. It overlaps with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 of the enlarged display mode displayed on the icon display frame YF and the notice icon I62 of the swordsman],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the decorative symbol variation display may not overlap only with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may have something other than the notice icon of the first display mode that does not overlap. .. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may not always overlap the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display mode. There may be something. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may always overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not overlap with the notice icon of the second display mode.

Further, "The notice icon is an icon that is displayed in the second display mode even when digested.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when it is digested, or it may be displayed in the second display mode even when it is not digested. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when it is digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when it is digested.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in the hold display area [for example, the notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 137 (a)].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), is displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-ream notice icon I65 and the swordsman's notice icon I62 are displayed in a normal display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be one that can display the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be one that can display the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area, and may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed in the display mode of. Further, the notice icon may be always displayed in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode when it is displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when it is displayed in the hold display area, or may be displayed in the first display mode even when it is not displayed in the hold display area. It may be displayed by.

In addition, "when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 137 (i)). As shown in, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all of the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be always displayed in the second display mode, and the notice icon is newly stocked. In some cases, at least a part of the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, "The second display mode is a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 137 (i) is It is an enlarged display of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in the normal display mode shown in FIG. 137 (l)],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon of the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which other than the notice icon of the first display mode is also enlarged. May be good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is always enlarged, or a display mode in which the notice icon of the first display mode is not enlarged.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol advance, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, revariation effect, etc.]. Yes,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 81 (a) and FIG. (B), each notice icon shown in FIG. 135 (d), and the like]. And
When the notice icon is digested, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 83 (23) to (25). When the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-continuous production shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (31) is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

Further, when the notice icon is digested, only the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, it is digested. A type of notice display other than the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon may be displayed. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the type of notice display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may always be displayed, and when the notice icon is digested, the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed. The notice display of the type corresponding to may not be displayed.

In addition, the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed only when the notice icon is digested, and also in cases other than the case where the notice icon is digested. , A type of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as" hold number ") [for example, FIG. 137 (Fig. 137). In the hold icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is held is displayed, etc.],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the hold number depending on the displayed number [For example, the notice icon (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65) shown in FIG. 137 (a) is a special figure 1. It is not an icon indicating the number of pending symbol variation display operations, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may be able to display a display other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with "display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a)].
Of the icon display frames, an icon related to symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “icon”) can be displayed in an area inside the frame (hereinafter, referred to as “frame inner area”) [for example, As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the variable icon h0 is housed in the hold display frame FL1],
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode [for example, the default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (a)].
One of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i)].
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is extended [for example, the extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 140 (i) is shown in FIG. 140. The hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode extended upward, etc.],
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, a variation display of the first decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 140 (b) and a second decoration in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Display of fluctuations in the design, etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 140 (b). The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M]. so,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game table, the player notices that the effect is performed by expanding the icon display frame that is displayed with priority and performing a notice or a look-ahead notice in the expanded part. It may be possible to make it. In recent years, a variety of production displays are displayed at the same time on a game table, which tends to be complicated and difficult to see. However, according to this game table, icons related to the symbol variation display that the player is always paying attention to. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying the icon, it is possible to distinguish it from other effect displays, and it may be possible to enhance the effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may include only the icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include something other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may always include the icon display frame, or may not include the icon display frame.

Here, the "icon display frame" may be referred to as "hold display frame", "hold frame", "UI", "hold icon display area", or the like. Further, the "icon display frame" is a display that may overlap with at least a part of a hold icon, a variable icon, or the like. Further, since the "icon display frame" is displayed near the edge of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect displays. Further, the "icon display frame" may be a frame in which one variable icon or hold icon is displayed. Further, the "icon display frame" can be said to be a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative symbol after the stop, or at least a display frame that overlaps with a part of the hold icon or the like. Further, the "icon display frame" is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like, and can be said to be a background display different from the background display of the decorative pattern.

Further, here, the "icon display frame" is a part that the player can recognize as a part where the icon is displayed without being caught by the word "frame", and the display of the frame image is It is just an example and is not bound by this.

Further, the icon display frame may be configured so that only the icon can be displayed in the area within the frame, or the icon display frame may be configured so that items other than the icon can be displayed in the area within the frame. Further, the icon may be configured so that the icon is always displayed in the area within the frame of the icon display frame, or the icon may not be displayed in the area within the frame of the icon display frame. Good.

Here, the area within the frame constitutes the icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

Further, the icon display frame may be displayable only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayable in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the icon display frame may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, the icon display frame may be displayable only in the first display mode and the second display mode, and can also display display modes other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be one. Further, the icon display frame may always display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. May be good.

In addition, the second display mode may be an extension of only a part of the first display mode, or may be an extension of all of the first display mode.

Here, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

Further, here, in a broad sense, the "extension" can be said to be a paraphrase display of the "icon display frame", or can be said to increase the area of the image or the area.

Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not overlap only with the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. It may be one that does not overlap. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not always overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. There may be.

Here, the "decorative symbol variation display" may include a stop display of the decorative symbol or a display in a state where the symbol can be identified at the start of the variation. For example, the stop display is being performed during high-speed fluctuation or the like. It may include a display in a state that is more difficult to identify than the display state of the above or the display state at the start of fluctuation (for example, a semi-transparent display during high-speed fluctuation), or a decoration whose size is reduced during SP reach or the like. It may include a variable display of a symbol.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an effect display [for example, the ninja character NJ1 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to 140 (l) throws a shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Production display, etc.]
A portion of the second display mode that is extended from the first display mode (hereinafter, "extended portion [for example, an extended portion in the reserved display frame FL1 of the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i), etc." ] ”), The third display is configured to be displayable in an overlapping manner [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to 140 (l), the second hold icon h12. In the effect display that changes the display mode of, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended part of the hold display frame FL1],
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the second display [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is the third display in the variable display. It does not overlap with 1 decorative pattern or 2 decorative pattern],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, at least the expansion display of the icon display frame is given priority over the variation display of the decorative symbol indicating the propriety of the variation, and the effect display such as the notice and the look-ahead notice is performed in the expanded portion. It may be possible to improve the effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Here, the "effect display" includes a display mode in which the hold icon and the variable icon are changed, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the variable icon is changed, and the like.

Further, only the third display may be overlapped and displayed in the extended portion, or the display other than the third display may be overlapped and displayed in the extended portion. Further, the third display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed in the extended portion, or the third display may be configured not to be displayed in the extended portion in an overlapping manner. Good.

Here, the "extended part" may be a difference from the part before expansion, or may refer to itself when only a part of the icon display frame before expansion is expanded (or expanded). ..

Further, the extended portion may be one that does not overlap only with the second display, or may not overlap with other displays other than the second display. Further, the extended portion may not always overlap with the second display, or may overlap with the second display.

Further, "the effect display is a display of a look-ahead notice [for example, an effect display for changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to (l)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to 140 (l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. An effect display that changes from the display mode to be displayed to the display mode that lights up in green].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second display is a display that may overlap with the extended portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (f), the decorative symbol during the variable display is a hold of the extended display mode. It overlaps with the display frame FL1 etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in a portion other than the extended portion. Further, the second display may be one that always overlaps with the extended portion, or may not be overlapped with the extended portion.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is a line display [for example, a line display by the character CH1 of Princess Chibi in the balloon TT2, a line display by the grandfather character GY1 in the balloon TT3, etc., shown in FIG. 140 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap with the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (d), a hold display of the default display mode. The frame FL1 does not overlap with the balloon TT2 or the balloon TT3, etc.],
The fourth display is a display that may overlap the extended portion [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. It overlaps with the display of the dialogue by the character CH1 of Princess Tachibi],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Here, the "display of dialogue" may be referred to as "notice of dialogue" or "notice of conversation", and may include, for example, a notice of the change, a look-ahead notice, a tutorial display, and the like.

Further, the fourth display may not overlap only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be something that has never happened. Further, the fourth display may not always overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be.

Here, "the display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode" does not overlap with the display position. It is a concept that includes what is structured.

Further, the fourth display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in a portion other than the extended portion. Further, the fourth display may be one that always overlaps the extended portion, or may not be overlapped with the extended portion.

In addition, the "display of lines" includes the display of the first line and the display of the second line, and the display of the first line is a display that may overlap with the extended part. , The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap with the extension portion.

In addition, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6), and FIG. 147 (c). -1) to the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in the figure (c-4)].
In the extended portion, the fifth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6). In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is an extended display mode. It overlaps with the extended part of the hold icon display area FL1],
The third display and the fifth display are partially the same display [for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 140 (g) to 140 (l). The display and the effect display for changing the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 145 (c-1) to (c-6) are also shown in FIGS. 147 (c-1) to (c-). In the effect display that changes the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, for example, instead of making it difficult to confirm the validity of the fluctuation with a decorative pattern, the icon display frame is displayed by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with the expanded icon display frame. If you look at it, you may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if all of the third display and the fifth display are different modes, it may become clear whether the fluctuation should be expected or the symbol fluctuation display performed after the next time. By making a part of the display and the fifth display the same mode, it may be possible to raise the expectation until it becomes possible to recognize which is the expected symbol variation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

Further, in the extended portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayable, and in the extended portion, displays other than the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed. It may be the one that has been done. Further, in the extended portion, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner, or in the extended portion, the fifth display may not be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be configured in.

Further, the fifth display may be configured to be overlapped and displayed only in the extended portion, and the fifth display may be overlapped and displayed in the portion other than the extended portion. It may be configured.

Here, the "notice display" may be a change effect of a variable icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or the like.

Further, "the third display and the fifth display are partially the same display" is a concept including, for example, the same animation until the character appears.

In addition, "the area within the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter," the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in "the first frame area [for example, FIG. 140 (a))" Etc.] ”) is the first area,
The in-frame area in the second display mode (hereinafter, "second frame area [for example, an area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 140 (i)]". The area of.) Is the second area,
The second area is a larger area than the first area.
The extended portion is a portion of a difference region between the second frame region and the first frame region.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second frame area is an area including the first frame area [for example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode. The area in the frame is configured to include the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode], and the like. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second frame area may be configured to include a part of the first frame area, or may be configured to include the entire first frame area. There may be.

In addition, the "display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded" according to claim 1 means that "the area of the frame area of the first display mode has increased.""Displaymode" [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the reserved display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a larger area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. Display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the icon display frame is configured to be displayable in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed [for example, there is no hold and no symbol variation display is performed. , The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the variable icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayable only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured so that it can be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be configured even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

In addition, the icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in an area other than the icon display frame.

Further, "The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon. [For example, as shown in FIG. 140 (i), the variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be the hold icon.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, a first hold icon h11 to a fourth hold icon h14 displayed in the hold icon display area] as the icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the hold icon as an icon, or may be one that can display other than the hold icon as an icon. Further, the display means may always display the hold icon as an icon, or may not display the hold icon as an icon.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display, or corresponds to the number of pending start of symbol variation display. Hold icons other than the number of hold icons to be displayed may also be displayable. Further, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of the symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of the symbol variation display may be displayed. May not be displayed.

Further, "The first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap with the second display [for example, FIGS. 140 (f) to 140 (m). The reserved display frame FL1 of the extended display mode shown in) is overlapped with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Not, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not overlap only with the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May also be non-overlapping. Further, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily overlap with the second display mode, or may overlap with the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, operation unit 136] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the effect performed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full].
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect [for example, when the long press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect buttons generated after the second time shown in FIG. 213. The effect display by the pseudo-ream executed as a result of 136 operations],
The second effect is different from the first effect.
In the first effect, the operation is performed the first number of times [for example, 20 times] by the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation by the effect button 136 (single operation)]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136].
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
In the second effect, the operation means performs a second number of operations in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is an effect that is easier to start in the case of [For example, when the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled, the result of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs after the second time shown in FIG. 213 is executed. The effect display by the pseudo-ream is not started by the long press operation with the effect button 136],
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of effects, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the first effect and the second effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect and the second effect, or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

Here, the first production may be, for example, a production corresponding to "Re" in "Doremi", and the second production may be, for example, "I" in "Ai". It may be said that it is a corresponding production.

Further, the first effect is started only when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may also be startable. Further, the first effect is always started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may not be possible.

In addition, "a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 and a second special symbol display device 214] is provided.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous striking operation effect shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)].
The third effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g), an effect button image. It is a production in which the characters "Strike repeatedly" are displayed together with BT].
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation is performed the first number of times by the operating means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, the first effect is the first. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation means by the operation means in the first operation mode. Even if the operation can be started other than when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. Good. Further, in the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation is performed the first number of times by the operating means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, the first effect is the first. It may be started whenever one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation means is performed in the first operation mode. It may not start when the operation is performed a number of times, or when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.

Further, "The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time [for example, the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operating means is pseudo-operated the first number of times in the first operating mode. The first production is configured so that it can be started.
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first effect, it is assumed that the operating means is operated the first number of times in the pseudo first operating mode only when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time. It may be startable, and the operating means has been manipulated a first number of times in a pseudo-first mode of operation, except when the operating means has been operated for a second time. It may be something that can be started as a thing. Further, the first effect always starts as if the operating means was operated the first number of times in the pseudo first operating mode when the state in which the operating means was operated was maintained for the second time. It may be the one that does, or the operating means may not start even if it is maintained for a second time.

Further, "The second effect is an effect that cannot be started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be startable when two or more operations are performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

In addition, "a light emitting means [for example, an effect button lamp 138] is provided.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a first state [for example, a state of emitting light in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a second state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue] in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted. Yes,
The second state is different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first state is a state in which light is emitted.
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which light is emitted in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing and blinking pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and a brightness is different.

In addition, "the first aspect is the first color [for example, red].
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may be one that always irradiates light from the inside of the operating means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operating means.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above explanation,
"Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, operation unit 136] and
An effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the effect performed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full].
In the first effect, the operation is performed the first number of times [for example, 20 times] by the operation means in the first operation mode [for example, one pressing operation by the effect button 136 (single operation)]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136].
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first selection display [for example, the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236].
The first selection display is a display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236].
The first image shows the operation in the first operation mode rather than one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by means [For example, when the long press auto repeated hit function is disabled, the character image of the princess shown in FIG. 236. H is not selected by long-pressing the effect button 136],
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of effects, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

Further, the effect means may be one that can execute only the first effect, or may be one that can execute an effect other than the first effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the first effect, or may not execute the first effect.

Further, the display means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of displays, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

Further, the first effect is started only when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be possible, except when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may also be startable. Further, the first effect is always started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode and when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It may not be possible.

Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first selection display. Further, the display means may always execute the first selection display, or may not execute the first selection display.

Further, the first selection display may be one in which only one image out of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operating means, or a plurality of types of images depending on the operation of the operating means. An image other than one of the images may be selectable. Further, the first selection display may be one in which one of a plurality of types of images is always selected according to the operation of the operating means, or the image of the plurality of types of images may be selected according to the operation of the operating means. You may not select one of the images.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect by a princess character appearing after the jackpot game ends].
The fourth effect is different from the first effect [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 223, which is executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full].
The fourth effect is when the first image is selected in the first selection display [for example, when the princess character image H is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]. It is a production that can be started,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect may be such that it can be started only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is displayed in the first selection display. It may be something that can be started other than when it is selected. Further, the fourth effect may always start when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is selected in the first selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, "a symbol display means capable of executing a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212 and a second special symbol display device 214] is provided.
One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous striking operation effect shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)].
The third effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g), an effect button image. It is a production in which the characters "Strike repeatedly" are displayed together with BT].
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, in the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation is performed the first number of times by the operating means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, the first effect is the first. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation means by the operation means in the first operation mode. Even if the operation can be started other than when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. Good. Further, in the first effect, during the execution of the third effect, when the operation is performed the first number of times by the operating means in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the third effect, the first effect is the first. It may be started whenever one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode, or during the execution of the third effect, the first operation means is performed in the first operation mode. It may not start when the operation is performed a number of times, or when one operation is performed by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.

Further, "The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time [for example, the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed for 0.5 seconds. The operation mode maintained above].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time [for example, 4 seconds], the operating means is pseudo-operated the first number of times in the first operating mode. The first production is configured so that it can be started.
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the first effect, it is assumed that the operating means is operated the first number of times in the pseudo first operating mode only when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time. It may be startable, and the operating means has been manipulated a first number of times in a pseudo-first mode of operation, except when the operating means has been operated for a second time. It may be something that can be started as a thing. Further, the first effect always starts as if the operating means was operated the first number of times in the pseudo first operating mode when the state in which the operating means was operated was maintained for the second time. It may be the one that does, or the operating means may not start even if it is maintained for a second time.

Further, "During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operating means is being operated is maintained for the first time or longer, the operating means performs one operation. It is configured to be considered,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first image is an image that is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first image may be selectable when two or more operations are performed by the operating means in the second operating mode.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second selection display [for example, a favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 246 (f)].
The second selection display is a selection display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means.
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of "character C"].
The second image can be selected when the operation means performs a third number of operations [for example, twice] in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It is an image
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display.
The third number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second selection display may be one in which only one image out of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means, or a plurality of types of images depending on the operation of the operation means. Images other than one of the images may be selectable. In addition, the second selection display may be one in which one of a plurality of types of images is always selected according to the operation of the operating means, or the image of the plurality of types of images may be selected according to the operation of the operating means. You may not select one of the images.

Further, the second image shows the case where the operation means performs a third number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display, and during the execution of the second selection display. , The operation means may be selectable only when the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode, or the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. Can be selected in addition to the case where the operation is performed a third number of times by the operation means and the case where the operation is performed once by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It may be. Further, the first effect is performed when the operation means performs a third number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display, and during the execution of the second selection display. , It may be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. Even if the operation is performed a third number of times, or if one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display, the selection may not be performed. Good.

In addition, "One of the multiple types of production is the fifth production,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fifth effect may be such that it can be started only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is displayed in the second selection display. It may be something that can be started even when it is not selected. Further, the fifth effect may always start when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is selected in the second selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, "a light emitting means [for example, an effect button lamp 138] is provided.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a first state [for example, a state of emitting light in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue] while the first selection display is being executed.
The second state is different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first state is a state in which light is emitted.
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which light is emitted in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first aspect and the second aspect are aspects in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing and blinking pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and a brightness is different.

In addition, "the first aspect is the first color [for example, red].
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may be one that always irradiates light from the inside of the operating means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operating means.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, operation unit 136] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter, "the first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full". The production to be performed] ”.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the second display mode (hereinafter, "second display [for example, when the long press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. 213". The effect display by the pseudo-ream executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 that occurs from the second time onward] ”).
The second display is different from the first display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, "third display [for example, shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)). , Repeated hitting operation production] ”.
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state") [for example, FIG. 223 (Fig. 223). d) -As shown in the figure (g), the effect button image BT and the characters "Repeat hit" are displayed].
The first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is pressed and held.
The second display is a display in which the operation means is more likely to be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is long-pressed.
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "second state") [for example, FIG. 213. In the example shown in, the characters "Strike repeatedly" are not displayed together with the effect button image BT]. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of displays, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always execute a plurality of types of displays, or may not execute a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be a first display or a second display. And only the third display may be feasible, and displays other than the first display, the second display and the third display may be feasible. Further, the display means may always execute the first display, the second display and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display and the third display. Part or all may not be executed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display. It may be possible to execute the operation in a state other than the state in which it can be accepted. Further, the third display may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted without fail, or the operation means for starting the first display. It may not be displayed in a state where the operation of is acceptable.

Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit and when the operation means is long-pressed after the third display is started, or the operation means may be started. It may be possible to start other than the case where is repeatedly hit and the operation means is long-pressed. Further, the first display may always start when the operating means is repeatedly hit or when the operating means is long-pressed, or when the operating means is repeatedly hit or when the operating means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, "a light emitting means [for example, an effect button lamp 138] is provided.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state [for example, the state of emitting red light] in the first state.
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a second light emitting state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may be one that always irradiates light from the inside of the operating means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operating means.

Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

Further, the light emitting means may be in the second light emitting state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emitting state in a state other than the second state.

In addition, "The first light emitting state is a lighting state.
The second light emitting state is the extinguished state.
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-3) and (a-4). , The effect button lamp 138 is lit in the state of accepting the operation of the operation means],
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-1) and (a-2). In addition, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off when the operation of the operating means is not accepted],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted [for example, light is emitted in red] in the first light emitting mode.
The second light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted [for example, emitted in blue] in the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a symbol variation display.
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol].
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol].
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 222 (d) to 222 (g), during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol. Repeated hit operation production is performed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that the display can be started only while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or the display may be started even when the symbol variation display is not being displayed. Further, the first display may always start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

Further, the second display may be capable of starting the display only while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may be capable of starting the display even when the symbol variation display is not being displayed. Further, the second display may always start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

Further, the third display may be capable of starting the display only while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may be capable of starting the display even when the symbol variation display is not being displayed. Further, the third display may always start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

Further, "The second display is a display that is not started only by long-pressing the operating means [for example, the display shown in FIG. 213 (l) is a state in which the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is invalid. If it is, it will not be displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated twice],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be a display that does not start except when the operating means is long-pressed.

Further, "when the operating means is long-pressed [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated 20 times in a pseudo manner, and a display relating to the result of the operation (a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice display). Notification etc. to announce that it will be a big hit) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only when the operating means is long-pressed, the first display may be started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit, or even when the operating means is not long-pressed, the operating means may start. The first display may be startable as if it was hit repeatedly. Further, when the operating means is long-pressed, the first display may be always started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit, or when the operating means is long-pressed, the operating means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, "the long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, operation unit 136] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter, "the first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full". The production to be performed] ”.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display [for example, character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]").
The fourth display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display.
The fourth display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operating means.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236].
The first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit.
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is pressed and held.
The first image is an image that is easier to select when the operating means is operated a plurality of times than when the operating means is long-pressed [for example, a state in which the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled. The princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is not selected by the long press operation of the effect button 136],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be one that can execute only a plurality of types of displays, or may be one that can execute other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

Further, the display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing displays other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may always execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

Further, the first display may be started only when the operating means is repeatedly hit and when the operating means is long-pressed, or when the operating means is repeatedly hit and when the operating means is long-pressed. It may be something that can be started other than when it is done. Further, the first display may always start when the operating means is repeatedly hit or when the operating means is long-pressed, or when the operating means is repeatedly hit or when the operating means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the production by the character of the princess who appears after the jackpot game is over].
The fifth display is different from the first display [for example, the effect shown in FIG. 223, which is executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full].
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236] is selected during the execution of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fifth display may be started only when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the fifth display may be started during the execution of the fourth display. It may be startable except when one image is selected. Further, the fifth display may always start when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the first display may be started during the execution of the fourth display. It may not start when an image is selected.

In addition, "a display of one of the plurality of types of displays prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter," third display [for example, FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)). )) ”.
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state") [for example, FIG. 223 (Fig. 223). d) -As shown in the figure (g), the effect button image BT and the characters "Repeat hit" are displayed].
The first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display. It may be possible to execute the operation in a state other than the state in which it can be accepted. Further, the third display may be displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted without fail, or the operation means for starting the first display. It may not be displayed in a state where the operation of is acceptable.

Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is repeatedly hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may always start when the operating means are repeatedly hit, or may not start when the operating means are repeatedly hit.

In addition, "a light emitting means [for example, an effect button lamp 138] is provided.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
The light emitting means is a means for turning on in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may be one that always irradiates light from the inside of the operating means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operating means.

Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a symbol variation display.
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that the display can be started only while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or the display may be started even when the symbol variation display is not being displayed. Further, the first display may always start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not start the display while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

Further, "The first image is an image that is not selected only by long-pressing the operating means [for example, in the display shown in FIG. 236, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled. In some cases, the princess character image H will not be displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated twice],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first image may be an image that is not selected except that the operating means is long-pressed.

Further, "when the operating means is long-pressed [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated 20 times in a pseudo manner, and a display relating to the operation result (notice display such as a cut-in image, etc., Notification etc. to announce that it will be a big hit) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only when the operating means is long-pressed, the first display may be started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit, or even when the operating means is not long-pressed, the operating means may start. The first display may be startable as if it was hit repeatedly. Further, when the operating means is long-pressed, the first display may be always started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit, or when the operating means is long-pressed, the operating means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, "the long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game table characterized by that. 』\

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
An operating means that can be operated by the player [for example, an operating unit 136, etc.]
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter, "the first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIG. 223 is full". , Etc.] ”.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the second display mode (hereinafter, "second display [for example, when the long press auto-continuous hitting function is disabled, FIG. 214" In the chance eye production shown in, the display in which three YM1 to YM3 designs are aligned] ”.
The second display is different from the first display.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, "third display [for example, shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g)). , Etc.] ”.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started even when the operation means is long-pressed after the display of the third display is started.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that prompts the player to operate the operating means (hereinafter, "fourth display [for example, shown in FIGS. 214 (b) to (h)). , Opportunity production, etc.] ”.
The fourth display is different from the third display, and is different from the third display.
The second display may start when the operating means is operated two or more times [for example, three times, etc.] after the display of the fourth display is started. And
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, in FIG. 214 (i). The display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown are aligned is not displayed unless the effect button 136 is operated three times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In addition, "a light emitting means [for example, an effect button lamp 138, etc.] capable of emitting light in a plurality of types of light emitting states is provided.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
One of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the first light emitting state [for example, the state of emitting red light].
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state of accepting the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off, a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.].
The first light emitting state is a lighting state.
The second light emitting state is the extinguished state.
When the light emitting means is in the lighting state, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-3) and (a-4). , The effect button lamp 138 is lit when the operation of the operating means is accepted],
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 216 (a-1) and (a-2). In addition, when the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is a second light emitting state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off, a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.].
The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emitting mode (for example, light is emitted in red).
The second light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emitting mode [for example, light is emitted in blue].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first display is a notice display [for example, a notice display of a cut-in image or the like, a notice of notifying a big hit, etc.].
The second display is a notice display [for example, as shown in FIG. 214 (i), it is foretold that the transition to super reach will occur when three of the lord symbols YM1 to YM3 are aligned].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display instructing to select one option from the plurality of options (hereinafter," selection display [for example, the character selection effect shown in FIG. 236]. Or, the display when the volume is indicated by the cursor CL on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 246 (c), or the display when the light intensity is indicated by the cursor CL, etc.] ”.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first option of the plurality of options [for example, the character image H of the princess shown in FIG. 236, the volume "10" setting, or the light intensity "10". The display displayed when [Settings, etc.] is selected (hereinafter, the display in which the fifth display [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 236 is brightly displayed in the center of the display screen, and the volume The setting is "10" display mode, or the light intensity setting is "10" display mode] ".
The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, two times, five times, etc.] after the display of the selection display is started. Is a display
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started [for example, the long-press auto-continuous hitting function is invalid. In the case of the state, the character image H of the princess shown in FIG. 236 is not selected only by the long press operation by the effect button 136, and when the long press auto continuous hit function is disabled. The display in the display mode in which the volume setting shown in FIG. 246 (c) is "10" is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, or the long press auto continuous striking function is disabled. In the case, the display in the display mode in which the light amount setting shown in FIG. 246 (c) is "10" is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The fifth display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number [for example, 2 times, 5 times, etc.] after the display of the selection display is started. Is displayed
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "when the operating means is long-pressed after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the operating means is repeatedly hit. It is configured so that the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operating means is pseudo. Assuming that the operation has been performed 20 times, the display related to the result of the operation (notice display such as cut-in image, notification to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.) is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The state of one of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is the first state.
The state of one of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operating means is the second state.
The second state is different from the first state.
The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 223 (d) to (g), the characters "continuously hit" are displayed together with the effect button image BT. Production, etc.]
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters "PUSH" are displayed in each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIGS. 214 (b) to 214 (h). Displayed display, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The first state is a state of accepting an operation for starting the display of the first display [in other words, the first state is a state of accepting an operation of the operation means. In the first state, the display of the first display may be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second state is a state of accepting an operation for starting the display of the second display [in other words, the second state is a state of accepting an operation of the operation means. In the second state, when the operating means is operated two or more times, the display of the second display may be started. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first state is a state in which a predetermined time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses after the first state is reached.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "the second state ends when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time shown in the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 214] elapses after the second state is reached. Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "In the second display, after the display of the fourth display is started, the number of operations of the operating means is the second number [for example, three times, etc., and the first number (1). It is a display that starts to be displayed when the number of times is different from 2 times or 5 times).
The second number is two or more.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The third display is a display including the first image.
The first image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operating means [for example, an effect button image BT shown in FIG. 223 (d)] [for example, as shown in FIG. 223 (d). An image containing the characters "Strike repeatedly" along with the button image BT].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images.
The second image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operating means [for example, effect button images BT1, BT2, BT3 shown in FIG. 214 (b)] [for example, shown in FIG. 214 (b)]. As described above, the image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT1, the image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT2, and the image including the character "PUSH" together with the effect button image BT3]. is there,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The second image is an image whose display mode is different from that of the first image.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a first operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, which is executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full].
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect in which the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the continuous striking operation effect shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e)]. Yes,
The first operating means operates in the first operation mode [for example, a continuous striking operation or a multiple operation (the operation mode by the continuous striking operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation mode. The same shall apply hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, when a continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full. Assuming that the production was successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification that a big hit may be made may be performed],
When the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode [for example, a plurality of operations], the second effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 241 (e). , When the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR may emit red light, etc.],
When the first operating means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, the effect button. When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the long press auto continuous hit function performs a pseudo continuous hit operation, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full, it is assumed that the production is successful, and the cut-in image There may be a notice display such as, or a notice that a big hit will be made],
When the first operating means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [for example, in the continuous striking operation effect shown in FIG. 241, the long press auto continuous striking function is invalidated. Therefore, if the effect button 136 is pressed and held for a long time, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR do not emit red light, etc.],
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means [for example, light emitting unit LL, LR, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production.

Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operating means being operated in the first operating mode, or the first operating means may be the first. It may be executed in response to something other than the operation in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be executed without fail in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operating mode, or the first operating means is the first operating mode. It may not be executed depending on what was operated in.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operating mode, or the first operating means may be the first. It may be executed in response to something other than the operation in the operation mode of. Further, the second effect may be executed without fail in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operating mode, or the first operating means is the first operating mode. It may not be executed depending on what was operated in.

Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means may be executed in the second operation. It may be executed in a case other than the case where the operation is performed in the embodiment. Further, the first effect may be executed whenever the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

Further, the second effect may not be started even if the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means may be the second operating mode. It may not always be started by the operation in, or it may be started when the first operation means is operated by the second operation mode.

Further, the second effect may be executed only by the second effect means, or may be executed other than the second effect means. Further, the second effect may be always executed by the second effect means, or may not be executed by the second effect means.

Further, the second effect is an effect executed including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect executed only by the second effect means, or other than the second effect means. , The production may be executed including the production means other than the second production means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are executed at the same time. Good. It should be noted that the effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter, the same applies).

In addition, "The second directing means is a light emitting means,
“The effect executed by the second effect means” means that “the second effect means is approximately 1 / from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL and LR shown in the second light emitting mode [for example, FIG. The mode in which the LED emits yellow light up to the height of 4, the mode in which the LED emits green light up to about 2/3 of the height from the lower ends of the light emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. ) Shown in a mode in which all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit light in red, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode [for example, a predetermined light emitting mode during a symbol variation display or a big hit game].
The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode [for example, the light emitting modes of the light emitting units LL and LR shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to (e) vary in design. It is different from the light emission mode in the production during display and big hit game],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect means may be capable of emitting light only in the first light emitting mode, or may be capable of emitting light in modes other than the first light emitting mode. In addition, the second effect means may always emit light in the first light emitting mode, or may not emit light in the first light emitting mode.

Further, the first light emitting mode may be partially different from the second light emitting mode, or may be completely different.

In addition, "the first effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect means is the first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [For example, as shown in FIG. 222, a continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136, and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full. In some cases, the notice display of the cut-in image, etc., which is executed as if the production was successful, and the notice of the big hit are performed by the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

Further, the first effect is an effect executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. , The production may be executed including the production means other than the first production means. Further, when the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed at the same time. Good.

In addition, "equipped with a third production means,
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 241, a left image display device 209L and a right image display provided with light emitting units LL and LR. The device 209R is a means that can be moved by a slide drive motor, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the third effect means may be composed of only movable means, or may include means other than movable means. Further, the third effect means may always include the movable means, or may not include the movable means.

Further, the second effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the second effect means may be always provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

Further, it is provided with "fourth effect means [for example, left image display device 209L and right image display device 209R shown in FIG. 241].
The fourth effect means is a second image display means, and is
The fourth effect means is a means provided in the third effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 241, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are driven by a slide drive motor. It is a movable means, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the fourth effect means may be composed of only the second image display means, or may include means other than the second image display means. Further, the fourth effect means may always include the second image display means, or may not include the second image display means.

Further, the fourth effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the fourth effect means may be always provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

Further, "a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full. The production to be performed is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, in the continuous striking operation effect shown in FIGS. 241 (c) to 241 (e), the light emitting unit LL, The effect that the LR lights up is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, the second effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, "when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode. The first effect may be started as if it had been performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operating means is operated 20 times in a pseudo manner. Display related to the result of the operation (notice display such as cut-in image, notification to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, only the first effect may be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. Alternatively, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, an effect other than the first effect is started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. There may be. Further, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may always be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. When one operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may not be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode.

In addition, "" operation in the first operation mode "means" multiple operations ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In other words, the "operation in the first operation mode" in "when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started" means It is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It can be said.

Further, in other words, "operation in the first operation mode" in "when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started". Means multiple operations,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
You can also say that.

In addition, "" operation in the second operation mode "means" long press operation ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The production mode of the second effect is a production mode different from the production mode of the first effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the effect mode of the second effect may be partially different from the effect mode of the first effect, or may be entirely different.

In addition, "The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a first operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect [for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, which is executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full].
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect [for example, in the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to 242 (h), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red light. The effect to be performed, the effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The first operating means operates in the first operation mode [for example, a continuous striking operation or a multiple operation (the operation mode by the continuous striking operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation mode. The same shall apply hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, when a continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full. Assuming that the production was successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image and a notification that it will be a big hit will be made],
When the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode [for example, a plurality of operations], the second effect may be started [for example, FIGS. 242 (e) to FIG. In the back button repeated hitting effect shown in h), when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 136, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red light, or the effect image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Etc.],
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223, the effect button. When the long press operation by 136 is performed, the long press auto continuous hit function performs a pseudo continuous hit operation, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full, it is assumed that the production is successful, and the cut-in image , Etc., and a notice to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.],
When the first operating means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started [for example, in the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIG. 242, the long press auto repeated hitting function is invalid. Therefore, when the effect button 136 is pressed and held for a long time, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 do not emit green or red light, and the effect image is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.],
The second effect is a back button effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production.

Here, the first effect may be executed only in response to the first operating means being operated in the first operating mode, or the first operating means may be the first. It may be executed in response to something other than the operation in one operation mode. Further, the first effect may be executed without fail in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operating mode, or the first operating means is the first operating mode. It may not be executed depending on what was operated in.

Further, the second effect may be executed only in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operating mode, or the first operating means may be the first. It may be executed in response to something other than the operation in the operation mode of. Further, the second effect may be executed without fail in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operating mode, or the first operating means is the first operating mode. It may not be executed depending on what was operated in.

Further, the effect mode of the second effect may be partially different from the effect mode of the first effect, or may be completely different.

Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means may be executed in the second operation. It may be executed in a case other than the case where the operation is performed in the embodiment. Further, the first effect may be executed whenever the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

Further, the second effect may not be started even if the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means may be the second operating mode. It may not always be started by the operation in, or it may be started when the first operation means is operated by the second operation mode.

In addition, "the first effect means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect means is an image display means.
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [For example, as shown in FIG. 222, a continuous hit operation is performed by the effect button 136, and the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD is full. In some cases, the notice display of the cut-in image, etc., which is executed as if the production was successful, and the notice of the big hit are performed by the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. Further, the first effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

Further, the first effect is an effect executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. , The production may be executed including the production means other than the first production means. Further, when the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed at the same time. Good. It should be noted that the effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter, the same applies).

In addition, "the first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means" means that "in the first effect, the first effect means is the first display [for example, the first effect]. As shown in FIG. 222, when the continuous hitting operation is performed by the directing button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, it is executed as a successful production, such as a notice display of a cut-in image or a big hit. It is an effect that is executed by displaying [notification, etc. that announces that]. "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, in the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to 242 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208. Effect images displayed on],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. Further, the second effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means, or other than the first effect means. , The production may be executed including the production means other than the first production means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed at the same time. Good.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means" means that "in the second effect, the first effect means has a second display [for example, It is an effect executed by displaying an effect image or the like displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated striking effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to 242 (h). "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, it is equipped with "second production means [for example, production lamps SL1 to SL4, etc.].
The second directing means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means [for example, in the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to 242 (h), an effect is applied to the decorative symbol display device 208. Image is displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second effect may be executed only by the second effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the second effect means. Further, the second effect may be always executed by the second effect means, or may not be executed by the second effect means.

Further, the second effect is an effect executed including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect executed only by the second effect means, or other than the second effect means. , The production may be executed including the production means other than the second production means. Further, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are executed at the same time. Good.

In addition, "the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means" means that "in the second effect, the second effect means has a second light emitting mode [for example," , In the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to (h), the effect is executed by emitting light in the mode in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit light in green or red. " Is,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "notifying means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, effect button lamp 138, etc.] is provided.
The notification means is a notification for prompting an operation on the first operating means (hereinafter, an effect button for prompting the pressing of the effect button 136 by the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the operation notification [for example, FIG. 222 (d)). It is a means for displaying an image BT, displaying the characters "striking repeatedly", displaying the remaining time meter MT, emitting red light from the effect button lamp 138, etc.] ".
The back button effect is the second period in which the operation notification is not performed [for example, an operation acceptance period related to the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (d) to 242 (h)]. This is an effect that may be started in response to the operation of one operating means in the first operating mode [for example, a continuous hitting operation].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the notification means may be one that only gives a notification that prompts an operation to the first operating means, or may also give a notification that prompts an operation other than the first operating means. Further, the notification means may always perform a notification for prompting an operation to the first operating means, or may not perform a notification for prompting an operation for the first operating means.

Further, the back button effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed. Alternatively, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operating means may be started in response to something other than the operation in the first operating mode. Further, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation means may be always started in response to the operation in the first operation mode, or the operation notification is not performed. In the second period, the first operating means may not be started in response to being operated in the first operating mode.

Further, in the "first period in which the operation notification is performed [for example, the operation acceptance period related to the continuous striking operation effect shown in FIGS. 222 (d) to (g)], the first operation means is the first. The first effect may be started in response to the operation in one operation mode [for example, continuous striking operation].
In the first period, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode [for example, long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. Alternatively, in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operating means may be started in response to a response other than the operation in the first operating mode. .. Further, the first effect may be always started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, the first operating means may not be started in response to the operation in the first operating mode.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode in the first period, or the first effect may be started in the first period. In the case where the first operating means is not operated in the second operating mode, it may be started. Further, the first effect may be always started when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode in the first period, and in the first period, the first effect may be started. It may not be started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the second operating mode.

Further, "a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full. The production to be performed is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, the effect lamps SL1 to the back button repeated hitting effect shown in FIGS. 242 (e) to 242 (h). The effect that SL4 emits green or red light, the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the first effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, the second effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, "when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode. The first effect may be started as if it had been performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operating means is operated 20 times in a pseudo manner. Display related to the result of the operation (notice display such as cut-in image, notification to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, only the first effect may be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. Alternatively, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, an effect other than the first effect is started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. There may be. Further, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may always be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. When one operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may not be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode.

In addition, "" operation in the first operation mode "means" multiple operations ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In other words, the "operation in the first operation mode" in "when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started" means It is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It can be said.

Further, in other words, "operation in the first operation mode" in "when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started". Means multiple operations,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
You can also say that.

In addition, "" operation in the second operation mode "means" long press operation ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The long press operation is an operation in which the state of being operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds or the like.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
In addition, in the above description,
"The first operating means [for example, effect button 136, etc.]
Second operating means [for example, upper button 137a, lower button 137b, left button 137c, right button 137d, OK button 137e, clear button 137f, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to display multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the display shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, which is displayed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a display shown in FIG. 211 (e) indicating that "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL, the same figure (g1). Indicates that "Premier Up Mode" is selected with the cursor CL, etc.]
The first operating means operates in the first operation mode [for example, a continuous striking operation or a multiple operation (the operation mode by the continuous striking operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation mode. The same shall apply hereinafter). Etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, the continuous striking operation is performed by the effect button 136, and the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full. In some cases, if the production is successful, a notice such as a cut-in image will be displayed, and a notice will be given to announce that it will be a big hit.],
When the second operating means is operated in the first operating mode [for example, continuous striking operation or multiple operations], the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. 211 (b). )-As shown in the figure (e), when "Volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL on the menu screen, the display indicating that "Production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is shown below. It is displayed by operating the button 137b twice, and as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g1), when "notification mode" is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, "premier" is displayed. The display indicating that "up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed by operating the lower button 137b twice, etc.],
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 223. When the long press operation is performed by the effect button 136, the continuous press operation is simulated by the long press auto continuous striking function, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD is full, the effect is regarded as successful and cut. Notice display of in-images, etc., notification of a big hit, etc.],
When the second operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the display of the second display is not started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (e), the menu screen. When "Volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL, the display indicating that "Production customization" is selected by the cursor CL is not displayed by pressing and holding the lower button 137b. As shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g1), when the "notification mode" is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, the "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL. Is not displayed when the lower button 137b is pressed and held for a long time, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic display.

Here, the first display may be displayed only in response to the first operating means being operated in the first operating mode, or the first operating means may be the first. It may be displayed in response to something other than the operation in one operation mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed according to the fact that the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode, or the first operating means is the first operating mode. It may not be displayed depending on the operation in.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in response to the operation of the second operating means in the first operating mode, or the second operating means may be the first. It may be displayed even if it corresponds to something other than the operation in the operation mode of. Further, the second display may be always displayed according to the operation of the second operating means in the first operating mode, or the second operating means may be the first operating mode. It may not be displayed depending on the operation in.

In addition, the display mode of the second display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or may be completely different.

Further, the first display may be started only when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means may be the second. The display may be started even when the operation mode is not used. Further, the first display may always start to be displayed when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the first operating means may be started in the second operating mode. The display may not start when it is operated.

Further, the second display may be such that the display may not be started even if the second operating means is operated in the second operating mode, or the second operating means is the second operation. The display may not always start when the operation is performed in the mode, or the display may start when the second operating means is operated in the second operation mode.
It should be noted that the effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter, the same applies).

Further, "The second display is a display when one of a plurality of options is selected [for example," volume light amount adjustment "on the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e)". Display when "Production customization" of "Member registration", "Production customization", and "Operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, "Normal" on the production customization setting screen shown in the figure (g1) "Mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premier up mode", "Premier up mode" is displayed when the cursor CL is selected],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 211].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be displayed only on the setting screen, or may be displayed on a screen other than the setting screen. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the setting screen, or may not be displayed on the setting screen.

Further, "The setting screen is a screen including a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options. [For example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 is" volume light amount adjustment "," member. Includes a display instructing you to select one option from "Register", "Customize production", and "Operation assistance settings", and select one option from "Normal mode", "One notification mode", and "Premier up mode". Including a display instructing to select, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display displayed when the first option among the plurality of options is selected [for example, "volume light amount adjustment", "volume light amount adjustment" in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e). Display when "Volume light intensity adjustment" of "Member registration", "Production customization", and "Operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, or on the production customization setting screen shown in the figure (f). "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premier up mode", "Normal mode" is displayed when the cursor CL is selected],
The second display is a display displayed when the second option among the plurality of options is selected [for example, "volume light amount adjustment", "volume light amount adjustment" in the menu screen shown in FIG. 211 (e). Display when "Production customization" of "Member registration", "Production customization", and "Operation assistance setting" is selected with the cursor CL, or "Production customization setting screen" shown in the figure (g1). "Normal mode", "One-shot notification mode", "Premier up mode", "Premier up mode" is displayed when the cursor CL is selected],
When the third display is displayed and the second operating means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. 211]. As shown in (b) to (e) of the same figure, when "volume light amount adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL on the menu screen and the lower button 137b is operated twice, "effect customization" is cursored. The display indicating that the selection is made by the CL is started, and as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g1), when the "notification mode" is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, When the lower button 137b is operated twice, the display indicating that "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is started, etc.],
When the third display is displayed, if the second operating means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [for example, FIG. 211 (b)). -As shown in the figure (e), when "Volume light amount adjustment" is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen and the lower button 137b is pressed and held, "Production customization" is performed with the cursor CL. The display indicating that the selection is selected is not started, and as shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g1), when "notification mode" is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, When the lower button 137b is pressed and held for a long time, the display indicating that "premier up mode" is selected by the cursor CL is not started.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the setting screen may include only a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from a plurality of options. It may include a display other than the display to be displayed. Further, the setting screen may always include a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from a plurality of options. The display may not be included.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first option among the plurality of options is selected, or the first option among the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed in addition to the case. Further, the third display may be displayed whenever the first option among the plurality of options is selected, or the first option among the plurality of options is selected. It may not be displayed at the time.

Further, the second display may be displayed only when the second option among the plurality of options is selected, or the second option among the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed in addition to the case. Further, the second display may be displayed whenever the second option among the plurality of options is selected, or the second option among the plurality of options is selected. It may not be displayed at the time.

Further, the second display may be started only when the second operating means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. Alternatively, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even in a case other than the case where the second operating means is operated in the first operating mode. Further, the second display may always start when the third display is displayed and the second operating means is operated in the first operation mode. When the third display is displayed, the display may not be started when the second operating means is operated in the first operating mode.

Further, the second display may be such that when the third display is displayed, the display is not started except that the second operating means is operated in the second operation mode. When the third display is displayed, the display may not always start when the second operating means is operated in the second operation mode, or the third display is displayed. In some cases, the display may be started when the second operating means is operated in the second operating mode.

Further, "The second display is when the third display is displayed and the second operation means has been operated N times (N ≧ 2 [for example, twice, etc.]). [For example, in the menu screens shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (e), the display indicating that "effect customization" is selected by the cursor CL is "volume". When the display indicating that "light intensity adjustment" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed, the display is started when the lower button 137b is pressed twice, or on the effect customization setting screen. The display indicating that "Premier Up Mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed twice by pressing the lower button 137b when the display indicating that "Notification Mode" is selected by the cursor CL is displayed. The display starts when there is a pressing operation, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the second display may be started only when the third display is displayed and the second operation means has performed N times. However, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started in a case other than the case where the N-kai is operated by the second operating means. Further, the second display may be the one in which the display is always started when the third display is displayed and the second operation means performs N times of operations, or the third display may be started. When the display of is displayed, the display may not be started when the N-kai is operated by the second operating means.

In addition, "an image display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 222, a notice display of a cut-in image or the like in a continuous hit operation effect, or a notification of a big hit is displayed. , Displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, etc.],
The second display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, "effect customization" on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (e) is selected by the cursor CL. The display indicating that the image is present and the display indicating that the "premier up mode" on the effect customization setting screen shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g1) is selected by the cursor CL are the decorative symbol display devices. Displayed at 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed by the image display means, or may not be displayed by the image display means.

Further, "a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] is provided.
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous striking meter RD shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is full. The production to be performed is started while the symbol variation is displayed],
The second display is a display that does not start during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, "effect customization" on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 211 (b) to 211 (e) is selected by the cursor CL. The display indicating that the display is performed and the display indicating that the "premier up mode" on the effect customization setting screen shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g1) is selected by the cursor CL are symbol variation. It does not start while displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

In addition, the first display may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. You may. Further, the first display may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, the second display may not be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, the second display may not always be started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

Further, "when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode. The first display may be started as if it had been performed [For example, as shown in FIG. 223, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operating means is pseudo-operated 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (notice display such as cut-in image, notification to announce that it will be a big hit, etc.) will be started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, only the first display may be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. Alternatively, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, displays other than the first display are also started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. May be the case. Further, when the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first display may always start as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode. When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first display may not be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode.

In addition, "" operation in the first operation mode "means" multiple operations ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In other words, "operation in the first operation mode" in "when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started". Is a continuous hit operation,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It can be said.

Further, in other words, in the "first operation mode" in "" When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started ". "Operation" means multiple operations,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
You can also say that.

In addition, "" operation in the second operation mode "means" long press operation ",
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a change effect of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 161 (c) to 161 (n), or a change effect of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 172 (g) to 172 (n). i) Button notice effect shown in]]
The second effect display is the effect display of the mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to (k) and the button notice shown in FIGS. 171 (m) to 172 (f). Directing, etc.]
The first effect display is the first operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button hold icon shown in FIGS. 161 (c) to 161 (j) and the display of the button hold icon shown in FIGS. 172 (g) to 172 (h). It is an effect display including vibration and rotating button image 136a and "Push" display, etc.].
The second effect display is the second operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to 161 (f) and the display shown in FIGS. 171 (r) to 172 (b). It is an effect display including the button image 136a and the display of "continuous hitting", etc.]
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays.
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter, "the first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 161 (k), the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead notice display mode (circular blue display mode)". As a result, a look-ahead notice, a notice by displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172 (i) and the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 172 (i'), etc.] ”) may be executed. It is a certain production display,
The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, "second notice [for example, as shown in FIGS. 161 (h) to (k)," hold 1 UP "display". As a result, there is a possibility that a super hot notice may appear due to the notice that the reliability of the look-ahead notice on the hold icon will be upgraded by one level and the display of "Daikichi" as shown in FIG. 172 (f). Notice notification, etc.] ”) is an effect display that may be derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing mini games has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

Also, according to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice, which affects the first notice.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to positively operate the operating means in order to reach the first notice.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the plurality of types of effect displays may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect displays other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may always include the first operation promotion display, or may not include the first operation promotion display.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the second operation promotion display. Further, the second effect display may always include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first notice is executed, or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be such that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, the second effect display may be derived from only the notice related to the first notice, or may be derived from other than the notice related to the first notice. It may be something. In addition, the second effect display may be such that the notice related to the first notice is always derived, or the notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

In addition, "a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter, as shown in" first state [for example, FIGS. 161 (d) to (k)). , A state in which both the hold icon change effect and the mini game are displayed, or a state in which both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (o). Etc.] ”),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the first notice and the second notice are related.

Here, it may be only in the first state, it may be in a state other than the first state, it may be in the first state without fail, or it may be in the first state. It may not be.

Further, "when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, the configuration is such that the second notice is executed. As shown in FIG. 161 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated while both the hold icon change effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. 173 ( g) -As shown in FIG. 6 (l), if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed while both the button notice effect and the mini-game are displayed, the result of the mini-game is derived, etc.],
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice is executed in response to the second notice [for example, FIG. 161 (j). ), When the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived, the display mode of the hold icon is pre-read notice according to the result of the mini game as shown in FIG. When the display mode is changed to, or when the effect button 136 is operated after the result of the mini game is derived as shown in FIG. 173 (n), as shown in FIG. 173 (o), the mini game Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed depending on the result],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the second notice, which affects the first notice. Therefore, it may be possible to positively operate the operation means for the mini game.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first state. The second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed even when the operation means is not operated in the above.

Further, if the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed, or the second notice may be executed. If the operation means is operated after the notice is started, a notice other than the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed. Further, if the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed without fail, or the second notice may be executed. If the operation means is operated after the notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may not be executed.

Further, the first notice according to the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice may be executed. In a case other than the case where the operation means is operated after the start of the operation, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed.

Further, "when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, , As shown in FIG. 165 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated while both the hold icon change effect and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes and the result of the mini game. Is also derived, or as shown in FIG. 168 (g), when the effect button 136 is operated while both the hold icon change effect and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes. However, the result of the mini game is not derived, etc.],
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change [for example, FIGS. 165 (g) to 165 (j) and FIG. As shown in FIGS. 168 (h) to 168 (m), after the result of the mini-game is derived and "hold 1UP" is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or the first notice may be executed. If there is an operation of the operating means in the state of, the notice other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state. When there is an operation of the operating means, a notice other than the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail, or the first notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the above state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

Further, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state, or the first notice may be executed. A configuration may be configured in which at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed even when the operation means is not operated in the state.

Also, after the second notice has been executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice has been executed, Notices other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may also change. Also, after the second notice has been executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may always change, and after the second notice has been executed, the second notice may change. The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

Also, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change only after the second notice has been executed, and even after the second notice has been executed. , The first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.

Further, "In the first state, the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 166 (e) to 166 (i), the first decoration. The change effect of the hold icon performed on the symbol display device 208L overlaps with the mini game performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect display on the mini-game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and increase the expectation for the first notice.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to give priority to the mini-game side in chronological order.

Further, according to this game table, the notice that affects the notice that may occur in the future is displayed with priority, so that it may be easy to understand even if the operation means overlap.

Here, in the first state, the first effect display may overlap only with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. It may also overlap the display. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may always overlap with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display does not overlap with the second effect display. There may be cases.

Further, the first effect display may overlap with the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display may be the second effect display even in a state other than the first state. May overlap.

In addition, "the second valid period [for example, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to (f), 175 (e) to (g), etc." ], The second notice is started when the operating means is operated.
The second effect display is a second valid period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to (f), 175 (e) to (g), etc.). ] Is included in the production display.
The second validity period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of the second validity period [for example, FIGS. 161 (e) to 175 (f) and 175 (e) to the same. As shown in FIG. (G) and the like, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation reception time],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by displaying the second validity period, the player can be made to derive the result of the mini-game earlier, so that the first notice may be noticed. ..

Here, the configuration may be such that only the second notice is started when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is operated in the second valid period. A notice other than the second notice may also be started. Further, the configuration may be such that the second notice is always started when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, the second notice is started. The second notice may not be started.

In addition, the second notice may be started only when the operating means is operated in the second valid period, or when the operating means is not operated in the second valid period. Alternatively, the second notice may be started.

Further, the second effect display may include only the second validity period display, or may include a display other than the second validity period display. Further, the second effect display may always include the second validity period display, or may not include the second validity period display.

In addition, "The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect [for example, the hold icon in the blue display aspect shown in FIG. 161 (k), the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173 (o), and the like]. And
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect [for example, the hold icon in the green display aspect shown in FIG. 161 (m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 172 (i), and the like]. And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
In the case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect than in the case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed. It is configured and
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more likely to be executed in the second aspect than when the second effect display is not started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect the first notice by starting the mini-game.

Here, the first notice may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be executed in a plurality of modes without fail, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, the first notice may be feasible only in the first and second aspects, or may be feasible in aspects other than the first and second aspects. May be good. Further, the first notice may be always executed in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may not be executed in the first aspect and the second aspect.

Further, when the first notice is executed in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol may be configured not to be confirmed and displayed in the end, or the first notice is executed in the second aspect. In that case, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be confirmed and displayed in the end.

Further, if the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second aspect, or if the second effect display is started, the second aspect may be executed. May be configured so that the first notice is always executed.

In addition, "The second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of embodiments is a third embodiment [for example, display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 177 (l)].
One of the plurality of embodiments is a fourth embodiment [for example, display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 176 (l)].
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second aspect [for example, display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 176 (n)], the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect. Is configured to be
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed by the second mode in the first notice, so that the expectation of the derivation result for the second notice is further improved. You may be able to.

Here, the second notice may be feasible only in a plurality of modes, or may be feasible in a mode other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second notice may be executed in a plurality of modes without fail, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

Further, the second notice may be feasible only in the third and fourth aspects, or may be feasible in aspects other than the third and fourth aspects. May be good. In addition, the second notice may always be executed in the third and fourth aspects, or may not be executed in the third and fourth aspects.

Further, "The first notice is a look-ahead notice [for example, the display of the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k) and the hold in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Display of icons, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of pending start of symbol variation display can be displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), three start of symbol variation display of special figure 1 is suspended. If it is, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.]
The first notice is a notice given by changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 161 (k) and 161 (m), the display mode of the hold icon is blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to the display mode or the green display mode],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] And
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
It is configured to be able to run multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the dice game shown in FIGS. 185 (g) to 185 (l)].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game shown in FIGS. 185 (g') to (l')].
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a)].
The second mini-game is a mini-game displayed using the certain display area.
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing mini games has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

Further, according to this game table, since the display area of the mini game is fixed to "a certain display area", it may be easy for the player to understand.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the display means may be composed of one display means or may be composed of two or more display means. Further, in the case of those composed of two or more display means, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed only in a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol variation display may be performed in all the display means. It may be something that is said.

Further, it may be configured so that only a plurality of types of mini games can be executed, or games other than the plurality of types of mini games may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini-games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

Further, only the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to be executable, or mini-games other than the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to be executable. Further, the first mini-game and the second mini-game may be configured to always be executed, or the first mini-game and the second mini-game may not be executed. ..

Further, the first mini-game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the first mini-game may be displayed using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, the second mini-game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than a certain display area. Further, the second mini-game may be displayed using a certain display area without fail, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

Further, "a notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] is provided.
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in the blue display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 185 (l) and (l')].
The first mini-game is referred to as a result suggesting that the first notice is to be performed (hereinafter, "first result [for example, display of" 1UP confirmation "shown in FIG. 185 (k)"]. ) Is a mini-game that can be derived,
The second mini-game is a mini-game capable of deriving the first result [for example, the display of "1UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 185 (k')].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the relationship such as advance notice easy to understand while entertaining the variation of the mini game.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices, or may not execute a plurality of notices.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice, or may not execute the first notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the first mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the second mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the second mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, "one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, a look-ahead notice in the red display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 186 (l) and (l')]. ,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The first mini-game is referred to as a result suggesting that the second notice is to be performed (hereinafter, "second result [for example, display of" 3UP confirmed "shown in FIG. 186 (k)"]. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result [for example, the display of "3UP confirmed" shown in FIG. 186 (k')] can also be derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to improve the expectation that the mini-game will lead to a result suggesting that the second notice will be given.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing a notice other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice, or may not execute the second notice.

Further, the first mini-game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Further, the first mini-game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

Further, the second mini-game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. Further, the second mini-game may or may not always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, "the first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 185 (g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 185 (g')] may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the same notice may be given even if the type of mini-game is different, so that the player may have various expectations.

Here, in the first mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, "the first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 185 (g)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character [for example, the image BCH of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 185 (g')] may be displayed.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a second character [for example, the Sabohani character SBH shown in FIG. 189 (A1)] may be displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a third character [for example, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 189 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more likely to be derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the second result is more likely to be derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have expectations for a second result depending on the type of character that appears in each mini-game.

Here, in the first mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. .. Further, in the first mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the first character may be displayed, or characters other than the first character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the first character may always be displayed, or the first character may not be displayed.

Further, in the first mini-game, only the second character may be displayed, or characters other than the second character may also be displayed. Further, in the first mini-game, the second character may always be displayed, or the second character may not be displayed.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the third character may be displayed, or characters other than the third character may also be displayed. Further, in the second mini-game, the third character may always be displayed, or the third character may not be displayed.

The third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

Further, in the first mini-game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and when the second character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. The result of is always derived.

Further, in the second mini-game, when the first character is displayed, the second result may not be derived, and when the third character is displayed, the second result may not be derived. The result of is always derived.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display [for example, the auntie mode shown in FIGS. 187 (A1) to 187 (A6)].
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second effect display [for example, the princess mode shown in FIGS. 187 (B1) to B6].
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (A1) to 187 (A6), the aunt mode is a decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display, etc.],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 187 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is decorated. It is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, etc.],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays.
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game, etc.] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed while the first effect display is displayed than during the display of the second effect display.
The second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed while the second effect display is displayed than when the first effect display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to associate the main production with the mini-game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

In addition, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the second effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first mini-game may not be executed while the second effect display is displayed, or may be always executed while the first effect display is displayed.

Further, the second mini-game may not be executed while the first effect display is displayed, or may be always executed while the second effect display is displayed.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of game states,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous.
The probability of executing the plurality of types of mini-games differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the game state, the expectation that the mini-game will be executed may be changed depending on the game state.

Here, it may be configured so that it can shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or it may be configured so that it can shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured so that it can be shifted only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or it may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

Further, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability that the first game state executes a plurality of types of mini games may be higher, and the second game state is higher. The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be high.

In addition, while the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (including latent probability variation, the same applies hereinafter), the special figure low probability normal figure low probability At least one of the state and the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state. , Special figure high probability state The special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability normal The high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini-games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini-games in the second gaming state.

In addition, "the probability of executing the plurality of types of advance notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the first mini-game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second mini-game differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to shift to multiple types of game states,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [for example, a normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), etc.].
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, a probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc.].
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous.
The first mini-game [for example, a dice game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. 190. (A1) -As shown in the figure (A6), the dice game is more likely to be executed in the normal game state than in the probability change state],
The second mini-game [for example, a fortune-telling game or the like] is a mini-game that is easier to be executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [for example, FIG. 190. (B1) -As shown in the figure (B6), the fortune-telling game is more likely to be executed in the probabilistic state than in the normal game state],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to associate the game state with the type of mini-game.

Here, it may be configured so that it can shift only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or it may be configured so that it can shift to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

Further, it may be configured so that it can be shifted only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or it may be configured to be able to shift to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. .. In addition, it may be configured to always shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may not shift to the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

In addition, while the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the special figure high probability normal figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state normal figure high. The probability state may be the second gaming state, and the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is the second game. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, while the normal figure high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the normal figure, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

Further, the first mini-game may not be executed in the second gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

Further, the second mini-game may not be executed in the first gaming state, or may be executed without fail in the first gaming state. Good.

"The first game state [for example, the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)] and the second game state [for example, the probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), etc. ], And the probability of executing the multiple types of mini-games is different.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the execution probability of the mini-game differs depending on the game state, the expectation that the mini-game will be executed may be changed depending on the game state.

Here, in the first game state and the second game state, the probability that the first game state executes a plurality of types of mini-games may be higher, or the probability of the second game state is higher. May have a high probability of playing multiple types of mini-games.

Further, "The first gaming state is a non-electric support state [for example, a low probability state in a normal figure].
The second gaming state is an electric support state [for example, a high probability state in a normal figure].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the non-electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

Further, the electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

Further, when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in the "display area [for example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a)], a non-mini game effect is produced in the display area. Display [For example, the tutorial display "The mini game will start at various timings" shown in Fig. 185 (c), the tutorial display "Yoshimune is the 8th Shogun" shown in Fig. 185 (f), etc.] is displayed. May be done,
The non-mini-game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini-games.
When any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in the certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed is deleted [for example, in FIGS. 185 (f) to (g)). As shown, if the mini-game is started while "Yoshimune is the 8th General" is displayed, the display of "Yoshimune is the 8th General" will be deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a non-mini-game effect display can be performed using a certain display area from the normal time, so that the player may easily pay attention to it.

Here, the non-mini-game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area in which none of the mini-games is displayed. In addition, when none of the plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display may always be displayed in the certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display may not be displayed in a display area when it is not displayed.

In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a certain display area only when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed in a certain display area, or a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a certain display area. A non-mini-game effect display may be displayed in a display area other than the case where none of the games is displayed.

Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted, or any of the plurality of types of mini games may be deleted in a certain display area. When one of them is started to be displayed, the display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted without fail, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. When one of them is started to be displayed, the non-mini game effect display being displayed may not be deleted.

Further, the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted only when any one of the plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, or any of the plurality of types of mini-games in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even when one of them is not displayed.

In addition, as the display applicable to the non-mini game production display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, an original mode parameter display (LV display, etc.), and a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC is adopted. It is possible.

In addition, "the display area includes a frame [for example, a liquid crystal frame of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 161 (d), an outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 171 (m), and the like. , The outer frame of the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 175 (a)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by something other than the frame.

Further, "The certain display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the multifunctional display area MF1 is a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is formed in the right half of the lower end, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

Further, "The certain display area is an area that expands in relation to the start of the first mini-game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 191 (A2), the multifunctional display area MF1 is the start of the dice game. Extended display related to],
The display area is an area that expands in connection with the start of the second mini-game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a player may be able to pay attention to a mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

Here, a display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini-game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini-game. Good. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the first mini-game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini-game.

Further, a display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the second mini-game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the second mini-game. .. Further, a certain display area may be always expanded in connection with the start of the second mini-game, or may not be expanded in connection with the start of the second mini-game.

Also, some display areas may expand only in connection with the start of the first mini-game and may be configured not to expand in relation to the start of the second mini-game. It may extend only in connection with the start of the mini-game and may be configured not to extend in connection with the start of the first mini-game.

Further, "The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [For example, the multifunctional display area MF1 shown in FIG. 185 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Formed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the mini game is executed by the display means in which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, it may be possible to draw more attention to the mini game.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

Further, a display means different from the "display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 161 (a)] (hereinafter," the second display means [for example, FIG. 161 (a)) The second decorative symbol display device 208M, etc. shown] ”is provided.
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

In addition, in the above description,
"A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice [for example, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 175 (i')].
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 175 (i)].
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of results can be derived.
One of the plurality of results is the first result [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 175 (h')].
One of the plurality of results is the second result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 175 (h)].
The second notice is more likely to be given when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the notice means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing mini games has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

Further, according to this game table, a player may participate (attention) in a mini game in order to derive a second result.

Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices, or may not execute a plurality of notices.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. .. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

Further, when the first notice is given, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as not to be finally confirmed, and when the second notice is given, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to.

Further, "At least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. It is configured [for example, as shown in FIG. 175 (c), when the mini game is started, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed as "a strong cut-in occurs in Daikichi"]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to the trends of mini-games toward the occurrence of favorable notices.

In addition, by incorporating the so-called mission production into the mini-game, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment.

Here, it is configured so that at least it is suggested that only the second notice is likely to be given because the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. Maybe, at least it is suggested that the mini-game derivation result becomes the second result before the mini-game result is derived, which makes it easier to give notices other than the second notice. It may be configured. Further, it may be configured so that at least it is suggested that the second notice is always given by the derivation result of the mini game being the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. However, it is configured so that the mini-game derivation result may at least suggest that the second notice will not be given before the mini-game result is derived. You may.

Further, it may be configured to notify in advance that the second notice is likely to be given because the derived result of the mini game becomes the second result before the result of the mini game is derived. ..

The mode of suggestion is, for example, "if you succeed in ...", "put out ...", "if ... stops ...", etc., at least suggesting the effect of mission achievement. If so, any aspect can be applied.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first effect display [for example, the effect of the mission shown in FIGS. 176 (c) to 176 (n)].
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the mission effects shown in FIGS. 176 (c) to 176 (n) are decorative symbols. It is done during the variable display of],
The first effect display is an effect display capable of deriving a plurality of effect results.
One of the plurality of effect results is the first effect result [for example, the display of "mission failure" shown in FIG. 177 (n)].
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 176 (n)].
Before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured so as to at least suggest that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result and is likely to be a big hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), when the production of the mission is started, the contents of the mission such as "put out a cut-in" and "if it comes out, a big hit" are displayed],
In the mini-game, the second effect result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 175 (h)] is derived in the first effect display than in the case where the second result [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the display of "mission achievement" shown in FIG. 176 (n) is derived.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the number of scenes in which the player can obtain a sense of accomplishment by incorporating so-called mission effects in addition to the mini-game.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the mission production by providing a difference in the result of the mission.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to clarify the difference between the mission of the main production and the mission of the mini game.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

In addition, the first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be displayed without fail during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of effect results, or may be capable of deriving results other than the plurality of effect results. Further, the first effect display may always derive a plurality of effect results, or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

Further, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only the first effect result and the second effect result, and the effect results other than the first effect result and the second effect result may be derived. It may be possible. Further, the first effect display may always derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or may not derive the first effect result and the second effect result. May be good.

In addition, before the effect result of the first effect display is derived, it is configured to notify in advance that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result and is likely to be a big hit. You may.

In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed in a definite manner, or when the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed in a definite manner, or the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. If this is the case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, "when the second effect result is derived, the jackpot symbol is finally fixedly displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to clarify the division of mission production.

Here, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed only when the second effect result is derived, or in cases other than the case where the second effect result is derived. , It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "a state in which both the mini-game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter," first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 176 (g) to (l), the mission The state where both the production and the mini game are displayed, etc.] ”.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player feel that the result of the mini-game is related to the result of the first effect display.

Here, it may be only in the first state, it may be in a state other than the first state, it may be in the first state without fail, or it may be in the first state. It may not be.

In addition, "The mini-game is started earlier than the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, "an operation means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position that can be operated by the player] is provided.
When the operating means is operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is derived [for example, FIGS. 176 (g) to 176 (l) and 177 (g)). -As shown in the figure (l), "Daikichi" and "Kokichi" are derived when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed in the mini game],
If the operating means is not operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is not derived.
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice [for example, FIG. 177 (m)) is more than the second notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 176 (m)]. Weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. shown in] is easier to perform,
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, it may be possible to have the player actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. ..

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the result of the mini game may be derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the mini game may be configured except when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that the result of is derived. Further, the result of the mini game may be derived so that the result of the mini game is always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

Further, the result of the mini game may not be derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the mini game may be configured except when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured so that the result of the game is not derived. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is not always derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured to be derived.

Further, the first notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the second notice only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or when the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first notice may be configured to be easier to perform than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be configured to be easier to be performed than the second notice, or the result of the mini game may not be derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be given than the second notice.

In addition, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may not be given, and if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always given. It may be configured to be.

Further, only when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be configured so as to be easier to be performed than the first notice, except when the result of the mini game is derived. In some cases, the second notice may be configured to be easier to perform than the first notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice may be configured so as to be easier to be performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the mini game may be derived. It may be configured so that the second notice is less likely to be given than the first notice.

In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be given, and when the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always given. It may be configured in.

In addition, "even if the second notice is scheduled to be given (hereinafter referred to as" first case "), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, if it is decided that "Daikichi" can be derived as a result of the mini game, but the result of the mini game is not derived, a strong cut is performed as shown in FIG. 178 (m). Weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of in-image CI1a],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the result of the mini-game may affect the notice, it may be possible to have the player actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini-game. ..

In addition, according to this game console, the advance notice does not affect the success / failure judgment, so even if a notice different from the schedule occurs, the result of the success / failure judgment will not be affected, and the scheduled notice will be forcibly scheduled. No need to do. Therefore, it may be possible to participate in a mini-game in order to make a better notice appear.

Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be given only when the result of the mini game is not derived, and even in the first case, the mini may be used. It may be configured so that the first notice is given even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, the first notice may be given whenever the result of the mini game is not derived, and even in the first case, the mini game may be provided. If the result of is not derived, the first notice may not be given.

Further, "a hold icon display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons is provided.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k)].
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m)].
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice given by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Etc.],
The mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect a change in the display mode of the hold icon while enjoying the mini game. For example, it was monotonous only in the conventional effect in which the button hold icon is displayed and the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means, but according to this game console, the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Later, it may change further, so it may be possible to raise expectations in the change display of the hold icon.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, and can also display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be an icon. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. You may. Further, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state where it is set, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the mini-game may be configured to be always started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured so that it may not be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state in which it is set.

Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change only to the second hold icon, and in the first case, If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so that it does not change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon, and in the first case, If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived, and in the first case, It may be configured so that the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon except when the result of the mini game is not derived. Further, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon, or other than the first case. Even in this case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured so as not to change to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon, or the first case. In the mini-game, when the second result is derived, the first hold icon may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to always change to the second hold icon, or the first case. In the mini-game, when the second result is derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

Further, in the first case, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game, or in the first case. In the mini-game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon even in cases other than the case where the second result is derived. Further, only in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon, or in the first case. In other cases, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon.

Further, "a hold icon display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons is provided.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k)].
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m)].
The first notice is a notice given by displaying the first hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 161 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice given by displaying the second hold icon [for example, a look-ahead notice is given by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 161 (m). Etc.],
The mini-game may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display that starts after the change display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be changed depending on the participation status of the mini game.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to maintain the relationship between the notice and the reliability even if the player does not finally participate in the mini game.

Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, and can also display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be an icon. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

Further, the first notice may be given only by displaying the first hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the first hold icon. You may. Further, the first notice may be given by displaying the first hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the first hold icon. ..

Further, the second notice may be given only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be given by something other than displaying the second hold icon. You may. Further, the second notice may be given by displaying the second hold icon, or may not be given by displaying the second hold icon. ..

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state where it is set, it may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the mini-game may be configured to be always started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display while the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured so that it may not be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display even in a state other than the state in which it is set.

Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is configured to change only to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to do so. Further, in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is always changed to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Alternatively, in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini-game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured in.

Also, in the first case, the first hold icon is configured to change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the second result is derived in the mini game. Alternatively, in the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, except when the second result is derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is configured to change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Also, in cases other than the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change only from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from an icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the icon may not change to a second hold icon.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If this is the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first other than the execution of the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the hold icon of to a second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, which is higher than that of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later.

Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not change from a certain symbol change display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If this is the case, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first is during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the hold icon of to a second hold icon. Also, in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol change display, and the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon. May also be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later.

Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and from a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. Even in cases other than the above, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display started after the certain symbol variation display is being executed. It may be configured to change from a first hold icon to a second hold icon. Also, only in the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the symbol variation display does not change. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that will be started later, and even in cases other than the first case, the result of the mini game. If is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during the execution of the symbol variation display that starts after the certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from a first hold icon to a second hold icon.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate."
The derivation result of the mini-game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 176 (i) to 176 (l), the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed to increase the number of operations. When the condition is satisfied, "Daikichi" is derived, but as shown in FIGS. 178 (i) to 178 (l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, "Daikichi" is derived. "Kokichi" is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain the operation of the operating means.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, only the derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means, or other than the derivation result of the mini game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means. .. Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation status of the operation means, or the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation status of the operation means.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate."
In the mini-game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not [for example, FIGS. 177 (i) to 177 (l) show. As described above, when it is determined in advance that "Nakayoshi" is derived, "Kokichi" is derived even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed or not.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, in the mini game, only the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. In some cases, results other than the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may always be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, and in the mini game, the operating means is operated and the operating means is operated. In some cases, the same result may not be derived as in the case where it did not exist.

Further, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived depending on whether the operating means is operated or not, and the operating means is operated in other than the mini game. The same result may be derived depending on whether the operation means is not operated or not.

In addition, "the display means includes a first display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] and a second display means [for example, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] ] And is a means composed of
The first display means and the second display means are different display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be configured to include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be composed of. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be one.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate]
Display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, a mini game shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to (m), a mini game shown in FIGS. 195 (j) to (o), and the like]. It ’s a possible means,
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of types of results can be derived.
The result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to 193 (k), the operation key unit 137 holds a treasure chest. When you select and determine the treasure box selected with the effect button 136, the auntie character BA appears from the treasure box and "Kokichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, or Fig. 196 (A1) to the same figure. As shown in (A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed, it is shown that the clothes worn by the Bancho character are torn, and "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed.] ,
It is configured so that any one of the plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 194 (A1) to (A6), the operation is performed. When the treasure chest BX2 at the lower left is selected by the key unit 137 and determined by the production button 136, the princess character HM3 appears and "Daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling, but Fig. 194 (B1) -As shown in the figure (B6), when the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and decided by the production button 136, the auntie character BA appears and as a result of the fortune-telling, "Kokichi" Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 196 (A1) to (A6), when the effect button 136 is repeatedly pressed and the condition for the number of operations is satisfied, the clothes worn by the character of the bancho are worn. Is shown to be broken, "Bancho Awakening" and "Today is in great shape" are displayed, and the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, but if the condition for the number of operations is not met, FIG. 197 (C7). ), The clothes worn by the Bancho character are not torn and the "Bancho Awakening Game" ends, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of results is a third result [for example, the display of the auntie character BA and "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 193 (k), and the bachelor of arts shown in FIG. 197 (C7). The clothes that the character is wearing are not torn, etc.]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment [for example, the hit / fail judgment of at least one of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure and the hit / fail judgment of the normal figure].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, conventionally, a game table for playing mini games has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini games. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature of a mini game.

In addition, according to this game table, there are cases where the player can be entertained in addition to pure games.

Here, the operating means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can operate it, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate it.

Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

Further, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be capable of deriving something other than a plurality of types of results. Further, the mini-game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

Further, it may be configured so that only the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means, or it is configured so that other than the result of the mini game is derived by operating the operating means. May be done. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operating means. You may.

Further, it may be configured so that only one of a plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or among the plurality of types of results depending on the operating status of the operating means. It may be configured so that other than any one is derived. Further, it may be configured so that any one of a plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation status of the operating means, or any one of the plurality of types of results depending on the operating status of the operating means. It may be configured so that one of them may not be derived.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result. Further, the mini-game may always derive the third result, or may not derive the third result.

In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the pass / fail judgment, nor does it notify the result.

Further, "The mini-game is a game for deriving a certain result out of the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini-game shown in FIGS. 194 (A1) to (A6) is" Daikichi ". The mission is to select the treasure chest inside],
The certain result can be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means [For example, in the case shown in FIGS. 194 (A1) to (A6), the operation key unit 137 selects the lower left treasure box BX2. If it is decided by the production button 136, the princess character HM3 will appear and "Daikichi" will be displayed as a result of the fortune-telling.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to concentrate on the operation of the operating means for the mini game.

Here, a certain result may be only one or two or more.

Further, only a certain result may be derived depending on the operation status of the operating means, or a result other than a certain result may be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means. Further, it may be configured so that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operating means, or it may be configured so that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operating status of the operating means.

In addition, "decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepare,
The mini-game is started when it is started in the first period [for example, a period in a standby state in which the variable display of the special figure is not displayed (including a state in which the customer waiting demo display is displayed)] (hereinafter, It is a game with "the first case"),
The first period is a period during which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [for example, a period during which both special figures 1 and 2 are held at 0].
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to entertain with a mini-game during the first period.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to positively operate the operating means even during the original game by encouraging the operation of the operating means in the mini game.

Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variable display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variable display. Further, the decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variable display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variable display.

Further, the mini-game may be started only in the first period, or may be started in a period other than the first period. Further, the mini-game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. May be good.

Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not executed, or a period other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device). 214 etc.) may also be a period during which some are not executed.

In addition, "automatic operation of the operating means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable.
In the first case, the mini-game is configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (g) and FIGS. (J) to (o). , Even if the auto button mode is set to on, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Bancho awakening game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, in the first case, since it is a mini-game that has nothing to do with the success / failure judgment, the automatic operation cannot be executed and the player can actively operate the operation means. There is.

Here, only the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable, or operations other than the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operating means may be configured to be executed without fail, or the automatic operation of the operating means may not be executed.

Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that only the automatic operation cannot be executed, or the operation other than the automatic operation may be disabled. Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured so that the automatic operation is always infeasible, or may be configured so that the automatic operation may not be infeasible.

Further, the mini-game may be configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or the automatic operation cannot be executed even in cases other than the first case. May be good.

In addition, "the mini-game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter, referred to as" second case ") [for example, shown in FIGS. 161 (d) to 161 (l). The mini-games shown in FIGS. 171 (m) to 172 (f) and the mini-games shown in FIGS. 185 (g) to 172 (k) are started during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The mini-games shown in FIGS. 200 (e) to 200 (i) are started during the execution of the jackpot game, etc.],
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period.
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game.
In the first case, the third result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to entertain with a mini game even during the game.

Here, the mini-game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. Further, the mini-game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

Further, in the first case, the third result may be always derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. May be good.

In addition, "the types of the mini-games started in the first case and the second case are configured to be different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 193 (g) to (m). Fortune-telling and the bancho awakening game shown in FIGS. 195 (j) to (o) are mini-games started in a standby state, and the dice game and figures shown in FIGS. 185 (g) to (l). The omikuji game shown in 185 (g') to the same figure (l') is a mini-game started during the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to distinguish between a notice and a mere game depending on the type of mini-game.

Here, only the type of the mini-game started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different, or the mini-game started in the first case and the second case. It may be configured so that there are different things other than the type. Further, the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other, and the types of mini-games started in the first case and the second case. May be configured so that may not be different.

In addition, "in the mini-game started in the first case, the first validity period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 195 (k)] is displayed. Is configured to be
In the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. 176 (i)] is displayed. It is composed and
The first valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 195 (k) to 195 (n). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],.
The second valid period display is a meter display whose display mode changes according to the passage of a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid [for example, shown in FIGS. 176 (i) to 176 (k). As described above, the display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],.
The speed at which the display mode changes differs between the first validity period display and the second validity period display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to distinguish the types of mini-games by looking at the validity period display.

Here, in the mini-game started in the first case, only the first validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first The validity period display other than the validity period display may be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be always displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first valid period is displayed. It may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed.

Further, the first validity period display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, and the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case may also be displayed. , The first validity period display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, only the second validity period display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period is displayed. The validity period display other than the period display may be displayed. Further, the mini-game started in the second case may be configured so that the second validity period display is always displayed, and in the mini-game started in the second case, the second validity period is displayed. It may be configured so that the period display may not be displayed.

Further, the second validity period display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the second case, and also in the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the second case. , The second validity period display may be displayed.

Further, the first valid period display may change in the display mode only according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may change according to the above. Further, the first valid period display may be such that the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or when the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid elapses. The display mode may not change depending on the situation.

In addition, the display mode of the second valid period display may change only according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The display mode may change according to the above. In addition, the display mode of the second valid period display may always change according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or when the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid elapses. The display mode may not change depending on the situation.

Further, either the first validity period display or the second validity period display may not be displayed.

Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the display mode may change faster in the first validity period display, and the display mode may change in the second validity period display. The rate of change may be high.

Further, the first validity period display and the second validity period display may have different display modes or the same display mode. Further, in the first validity period display and the second validity period display, the first validity period display may be larger, or the second validity period display may be larger. Alternatively, the size of the first validity period display and the second validity period display may be the same.

Further, "In the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a and" repeated hits "displayed in the Bancho awakening game shown in FIG. 195 (l)". Etc.] is configured to be displayed,
In the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the mini-game shown in FIG. 176 (i) and the display of "continuous hitting", etc.] is displayed. Is configured to be
The first operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The second operation promotion display is a display that prompts the operation of the operation means.
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed with a display pattern [for example, a default display mode, etc.] of the first number [for example, one, etc.].
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed with a display pattern of a second number [for example, two or the like] [for example, a default display mode and a vibration and rotation display mode].
Of the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, in the mini-game started in the second case, it may be possible to increase the expectation for a big hit by varying the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

Here, in the mini-game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first The operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation It may be configured so that the promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the first case, or in a mini-game other than the mini-game started in the first case. , The first operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation may be displayed. The operation promotion display other than the promotion display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or in the mini-game started in the second case, the second operation It may be configured so that the promotion display may not be displayed.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini-game started in the second case, and also in the mini-game other than the mini-game started in the second case. , The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operating means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operating means. Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operating means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only with the display pattern of the first number, or may be displayed with a display pattern other than the display pattern of the first number. Good. Further, the first operation promotion display may always be displayed in the display pattern of the first number, or may not be displayed in the display pattern of the first number.

Further, the second operation promotion display may be displayable only with the display pattern of the second number, or may be displayed with a display pattern other than the display pattern of the second number. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may always be displayed in the display pattern of the second number, or may not be displayed in the display pattern of the second number.

Further, the first number may be 1, or may be 2 or more.

Further, between the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display, the first operation promotion display may be larger in size, and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the size of the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may be the same.

Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have different display modes, or at least a part of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of results is the first result [for example, the display of" Kokichi "shown in FIG. 177 (l)".
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Kokichi" shown in FIG. 177 (l) is the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 177 (m). At least suggests a display, etc.],
In the second case, the first result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game than in the first case.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the mini-game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

Further, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the hit / fail judgment, or may at least suggest the result other than the result of the hit / miss judgment. In addition, the first result may at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment, or may not at least suggest the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Further, the first result may suggest the result of the hit / miss determination, or may notify the result of the hit / miss determination.

Further, in the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be always derived in the mini game.

Further, "The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a look-ahead notice [for example, FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (f). ), In the mini-game performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a notice or pre-reading notice is given by the appearance of the main character's character YSM from the treasure box],
The first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the mini-game may also function as a notice.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (o)].
The first effect display may be a big hit notice (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice [for example, display of weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 173 (o]]"). And
As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be executed [for example, FIG. 173 (Fig. 173). c) As shown in the figure (l), the display of "Nakayoshi" derived in the mini-game started during the variable display of the decorative symbol foretells the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the first result that affects the first notice.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of effect displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

Further, the first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the first effect display may be always related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, the first effect display may be one in which only the first notice is executed, or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be such that the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, only the notice related to the first notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be executed. As the first result derived when the mini-game is started during the execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may be executed. Further, as the first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, the notice related to the first notice may always be executed, or the decoration symbol variation display may be executed. As a first result derived when the mini-game is started during, the notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of results is the second result [for example, the display of" Daikichi "shown in FIG. 176 (l)".
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment [for example, the display of "Daikichi" shown in FIG. 176 (l) is the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 176 (m). At least suggests a display, etc.],
In the second case, the second result is more likely to be derived in the mini-game than in the first case.
It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived as a result of the mini game.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

Further, the second result may be a result suggesting the result of the hit / miss judgment, or may be a result of notifying the result of the hit / miss judgment in advance.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that the second result is not derived in the mini game, and in the second case, it may be configured so that the second result is always derived in the mini game. Good.

Further, when the first result is derived, the jackpot symbol may be configured so as not to be finally confirmed, and when the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always finally confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, "in the first case, the mini-game shows only the third result [for example, the result of the mini-game shown in FIG. 193 (k), FIGS. (K1) to (k4)]. It is a game to derive,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of results is shown in the fourth result [for example, the display of the princess characters HM3 and" Daikichi "shown in FIG. 193 (k1) and the display in FIG. 196 (A6). The display of the torn clothes worn by the Bancho character, etc.]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest the result of the hit / fail judgment [for example, the hit / fail judgment of at least one of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure and the hit / miss judgment of the normal figure].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give variation to the result of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. .. Further, the mini-game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

Further, the fourth result does not suggest the result of the pass / fail determination, nor does it notify the result.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (17)].
The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, a display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14)].
The operation valid period display is a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14) is an effect button. Shows the remaining time of the 136 operation validity period, etc.],
The first display is a first notice display [for example, a button reception time meter in a mode in which the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17). MT display, etc.] may be included.
The first display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 248. As shown in FIGS. (12) to (17), the button reception time meter MT is operated by the effect button 136 when the effect button 136 is displayed in a manner indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. When this is done, the display will switch to the mode in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge],
The first notice display is a notice display that is not displayed when the operation means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (7), the button reception time. If the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the meter MT does not give a notice using the button reception time meter MT, and the button reception time meter MT is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Conventionally, display effects by display means have become diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to quickly operate the operating means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations even after the operation of the operating means.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be at a position where the player cannot operate.

As the operating means, any operating device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, and a touch sensor can be applied.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The operation means itself may be provided with the display means, or the display means itself may be provided with the operation means.

Further, the first display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first display may always include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

The operation validity period display may be a gauge display, a timer countdown display, or a display mode that switches before and after the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first display may include only the first notice display, or may include a display other than the first notice display. Further, the first display may always include the first notice display, or may not include the first notice display.

Further, the first display may be the operation valid period display as the first notice display only in response to the operation of the operating means after the operation valid period is started, or the operation. The operation validity period display may be the first notice display depending on other than the operation of the operation means after the validity period is started. Further, the operation valid period display may always be the first notice display according to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started, or the operation valid period is started. Depending on that the operating means is operated later, the operation valid period display may not be the first notice display.

Further, the first notice display may not be displayed only when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period, or may be a case other than the case where the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. It may not be displayed. Further, the first notice display may not always be displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period, or may be displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

Further, the first notice display can be applied not only to the display on the display device but also to the notice effect by the output of voice, the notice effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and the notice effect by the light emission of the lamp.

Further, "the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display in which the Bancho icon and the panda icon shown at FIG. 253 (3) are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT, etc.]". It is a display that may be
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to (5), the icon of the chief The button reception time meter MT in the display mode with the panda icon has been displayed since the button operation effect started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the first display even before the operating means is operated.

Here, the first display may include only the second notice display, or may include a display other than the second notice display. Further, the first display may always include the second notice display, or may not include the second display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. There may be. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed before the operating means is operated, or may not be displayed before the operating means is operated.

In addition, "the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode [for example, a mode in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15)]. There is a notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge].
The second notice display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which a bancho icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (3)]. It is a notice display that may occur,
The second notice display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which a number length icon is displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11)]. It is a notice display,
The case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode is better than the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, according to the third display mode. It is configured so that the first notice display is easily displayed [For example, the button reception time is larger than the case where the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of the Bancho icon and the panda icon. If both of the icons displayed on both ends of the meter MT are the icons of the chief, it is easier for the princess's mini character to be displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT],
The jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the second notice display functions as a notice of the first notice display, the first notice display may be noticed by the operation of the operating means.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. May be good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the second notice display may be displayed. When the notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may also be displayed. Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be configured to be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. Is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be configured so that the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

Further, the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed even when the notice display of is not displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In the case of being displayed with, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In that case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In cases other than the case where is displayed in, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display [for example, a button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12), a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29), and the figure. Vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc. shown in 277 (6)].
The fourth display is an operation promotion display, and is
The operation promotion display is a display that promotes the operation of the operation means [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248 (12) prompts the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12)].
In the fourth display, the sixth display mode [for example, the deca button image 136aL in a display mode larger than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29) and the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 277 (6) vibrate and Vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc. in a rotating mode] is a notice display that may be displayed.
The first notice display may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a mode in which the mini character BCH of the bancho is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15)]. Is a display
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge].
When the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first display according to the third display mode is used. It is configured so that the notice display of [For example, the button reception time meter is displayed when the big button image 136aL or the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed than when the button image 136a is displayed. The mini character of the princess is likely to be displayed in the remaining display part of the MT gauge],
The jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice by the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be composed of only the operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the operation promotion display. Further, the fourth display may always include the operation promotion display, or may not include the operation promotion display.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fifth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the sixth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, it may be configured so that only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the fourth display may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may also be displayed. Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be configured to be displayed without fail, and the fourth display may be the fourth display. When displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

Further, the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, or the fourth display mode may be displayed. It may be configured so that the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In the case of being displayed with, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In that case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In cases other than the case where is displayed in, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display that starts to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started [for example, in FIG. 248 (15). As shown, the gauge length of the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated is the length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the display mode of the first notice display differs depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated, it is possible to give diversity to the display of the first notice display and improve the effect of the effect. In some cases.

Here, the first notice display may be such that the display can be started only in the display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or the operation validity period is started. The display may be started in a display mode other than the display mode according to the timing at which the operating means is operated. Further, the first notice display may always start to be displayed in a display mode according to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or after the operation validity period is started. The display may not start in a display mode according to the timing at which the operating means is operated.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display displayed only for a period corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIGS. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed until the gauge is exhausted. That is, the button reception time meter MT in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed from the operation of the effect button 136 until the time corresponding to the operation validity period elapses.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, for example, the earlier the timing at which the operating means is operated, the longer the first notice display can be seen, so that the operation of the operating means may be promoted.

Here, the first notice display may be displayable only during the period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or after the operation validity period is started. It may be possible to display a period other than the period corresponding to the timing at which the operating means is operated. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed in a period corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or the operation means may be displayed after the operation validity period is started. May not be displayed for a period corresponding to the timing of operation.

In addition, "The first notice display is a notice display whose display mode changes with the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17), the mini character BCH of the chief. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT on which is displayed changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the first notice display changes with the passage of time, it may be possible to pay attention to the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be such that the display mode can be changed only according to the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed according to other than the passage of time. There may be. In addition, the display mode of the first notice display may always change with the passage of time, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time.

Further, "The operation valid period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14), the button reception time meter MT has a button reception time meter MT. The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the operation valid period display changes according to the passage of time, it may be possible to pay attention to the operation valid period display.

Here, the operation valid period display may be such that the display mode can be changed only according to the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed according to other than the passage of time. You may. In addition, the display mode of the operation valid period display may always change with the passage of time, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The second display is the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The second display is a display that is erased when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (6). The button reception time meter MT is deleted when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect button 136 is displayed in a manner indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, it may be possible to pay attention to the second display when the operation means is operated.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the second display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured not to include the operation valid period display.

Further, the second display may be deleted only when the operating means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operating means may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. It may be erased even when it is not operated. Further, the second display may be deleted without fail when the operating means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or when the operating means is operated after the operation valid period is started. In addition, it may not be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The first display and the second display are different displays.
The second display may include the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The second display is a display that may include the first effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first notice display.
The second display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first effect display in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the second display before and after the operation of the operating means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the second display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may always include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

Further, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include a display other than the first effect display. Further, the second display may always include the first effect display, or may not include the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be partially different from the first notice display, or may be completely different.

Further, in the second display, the operation valid period display may be the first effect display only when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation may be performed. The operation valid period display may be the first effect display depending on the fact that the operating means is not operated after the valid period is started. Further, in the second display, the operation valid period display may always be the first effect display depending on the operation of the operating means after the operation valid period is started, or the operation may be performed. Depending on that the operation means is operated after the validity period is started, the operation validity period display may not be the first effect display.

Further, "The operation valid period display is a display by a gauge [for example, in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5) and in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14). Button reception time meter MT gauge display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display by a gauge [for example, a gauge display on the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the number shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17) is displayed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the operation validity period display and the first notice display may be easy to see.

Here, the operation validity period display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured by including something other than the gauge. Further, the operation validity period display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

Further, the first notice display may be configured only by a gauge, or may be configured including something other than a gauge. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

In addition, "the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect [for example, decorative pattern variation display, etc.].
The certain effect is an effect configured to develop after the display of the first notice display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (20). The decorative pattern variation display has evolved into super reach after the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the operation validity period is originally used, it may be possible to pay attention to the development effect after showing the first notice display.

Further, according to this game console, the first notice display including the display regarding the operation validity period may function as a timer notice regarding the development of a certain effect.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during the execution of an effect other than the execution of a certain effect. There may be one. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.

Further, a certain effect may be configured so that it may develop only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started. It may be configured so that it may develop other than later. Further, a certain effect may be configured to always develop after the display of the first notice display is started, or may be developed after the display of the first notice display is started. It may not be possible.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a step-up notice shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17)].
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (17), the operation is valid. After the period starts, when the production button 136 is operated, the step-up notice is started, etc.],
The third display is a notice display and is
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (20), the decorative symbol variation display is , After the step-up notice started, it has developed into super reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the third display is displayed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may be displayed only when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. May also be displayed. Further, the third display may be always displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. May be good.

Further, the third display may be configured to include only the notice display, or may be configured to include a display other than the notice display. Further, the third display may be configured to include the notice display without fail, or may be configured not to include the notice display.

Also, some displays may be configured to develop only after the third display has started, or may develop other than after the third display has started. It may be configured as follows. Further, a certain display may be configured to always develop after the third display is started, or may not be developed after the third display is started.

Further, "The third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (9). In addition, after the operation valid period starts, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the step-up notice is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a notice display that starts when the operation means is operated appears even if the operation means is not operated, but the first notice display cannot be seen. It may be possible to facilitate the operation of the operating means to see the notice display.

Here, the third display may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period, or is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

In addition, "the operation valid period ends when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds after the operation valid period starts] elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts. Is configured as
The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of 1 second from the start of the operation validity period] has elapsed since the operation validity period started. The period to be performed is the fourth period [for example, a period of 4 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated].
The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds from the start of the operation validity period] has elapsed since the operation validity period started. The period to be performed is the fifth period [for example, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated].
The third period is longer than the second period.
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the operation valid period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or after the operation valid period starts. When the first period elapses without the operating means being operated, a period other than the operation valid period may end. Further, the operation valid period may be configured to always end when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation may be performed after the operation valid period starts. It may be configured so that the operation valid period may not end if the first period elapses without the means being operated.

Here, the operation valid period display may be a display for notifying the first period.

Further, the operation valid period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation may be performed after the operation valid period starts. The operation valid period may be configured to end even if a period other than the first period elapses without the means being operated.

Further, the second period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the third period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the fourth period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the second period may be a longer period than the fourth period, may be a period of the same length, or may be a shorter period. Further, the third period may be a longer period than the fifth period, may be a period of the same length, or may be a shorter period.

In addition, "The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the first period or shorter than the first period.
The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same as the first period or shorter than the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The total length of the second period and the fourth period may be longer than the length of the first period, and the total length of the third period and the fifth period is the first period. It may be longer than the length of.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Operating means [for example, effect button 136, operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate]
A display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is the first display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (17)].
The first display is a display that may include an operation valid period display [for example, a display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14)].
The operation valid period display is a display related to the operation valid period of the operation means [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14) is an effect button. Shows the remaining time of the 136 operation validity period, etc.],
The first display is a first notice display [for example, a button reception time meter in a mode in which the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17). MT display, etc.] may be included.
The first display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first notice display in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIG. 248. As shown in FIGS. (12) to (17), the button reception time meter MT is operated by the effect button 136 when the effect button 136 is displayed in a manner indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. If so, the display will be such that the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge],
The first notice display is a notice display configured to include the operation validity period display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17), the mini character BCH of the chief is displayed. The button reception time meter MT is displayed in such a way that the length of the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that.

Conventionally, display effects by display means have become diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations even after the operation of the operating means.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be at a position where the player cannot operate.

As the operating means, any operating device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, and a touch sensor can be applied.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

The operation means itself may be provided with the display means, or the display means itself may be provided with the operation means.

Further, the first display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first display may always include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

The operation validity period display may be a gauge display, a timer countdown display, or a display mode that switches before and after the operation of the operation means.

Further, the first display may include only the first notice display, or may include a display other than the first notice display. Further, the first display may always include the first notice display, or may not include the first notice display.

Further, the first display may be the operation valid period display as the first notice display only in response to the operation of the operating means after the operation valid period is started, or the operation. The operation validity period display may be the first notice display depending on other than the operation of the operation means after the validity period is started. Further, the operation valid period display may always be the first notice display according to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started, or the operation valid period is started. Depending on that the operating means is operated later, the operation valid period display may not be the first notice display.

Further, the first notice display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured not to include the operation valid period display.

Further, the first notice display can be applied not only to the display on the display device but also to the notice effect by the output of voice, the notice effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and the notice effect by the light emission of the lamp.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display that starts to be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started [for example, in FIG. 248 (15). As shown, the gauge length of the button reception time meter MT on which the mini-character BCH of the Bancho is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated is the length corresponding to the time from the start of the operation valid period. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the display mode of the first notice display differs depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated, it is possible to give diversity to the display of the first notice display and improve the effect of the effect. In some cases.

Here, the first notice display may be such that the display can be started only in the display mode corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or the operation validity period is started. The display may be started in a display mode other than the display mode according to the timing at which the operating means is operated. Further, the first notice display may always start to be displayed in a display mode according to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or after the operation validity period is started. The display may not start in a display mode according to the timing at which the operating means is operated.

Further, "The first notice display is a notice display displayed only for a period corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started [for example, FIGS. 248 (15) to FIG. As shown in (18), the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed until the gauge is exhausted. That is, the button reception time meter MT in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed from the operation of the effect button 136 until the time corresponding to the operation validity period elapses.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, for example, the earlier the timing at which the operating means is operated, the longer the first notice display can be seen, so that the operation of the operating means may be promoted.

Here, the first notice display may be displayable only during the period corresponding to the timing at which the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or after the operation validity period is started. It may be possible to display a period other than the period corresponding to the timing at which the operating means is operated. Further, the first notice display may always be displayed in a period corresponding to the timing when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started, or the operation means may be displayed after the operation validity period is started. May not be displayed for a period corresponding to the timing of operation.

In addition, "The first notice display is a notice display whose display mode changes with the passage of time [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17), the mini character BCH of the chief. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT on which is displayed changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the first notice display changes with the passage of time, it may be possible to pay attention to the first notice display.

Here, the first notice display may be such that the display mode can be changed only according to the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed according to other than the passage of time. There may be. In addition, the display mode of the first notice display may always change with the passage of time, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time.

Further, "The operation valid period display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14), the button reception time meter MT has a button reception time meter MT. The display mode changes so that the gauge decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display mode of the operation valid period display changes according to the passage of time, it may be possible to pay attention to the operation valid period display.

Here, the operation valid period display may be such that the display mode can be changed only according to the passage of time, or the display mode can be changed according to other than the passage of time. You may. In addition, the display mode of the operation valid period display may always change with the passage of time, or the display mode may not change with the passage of time.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The second display is the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The second display is a display that is erased when the operation means is operated after the operation validity period is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (6). The button reception time meter MT is deleted when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect button 136 is displayed in a manner indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the second display is erased when the operation means is operated, it may be possible to pay attention to the second display when the operation means is operated.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the second display may be configured to include only the operation valid period display, or may be configured to include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may be configured to always include the operation valid period display, or may be configured not to include the operation valid period display.

Further, the second display may be deleted only when the operating means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operating means may be deleted after the operation valid period is started. It may be erased even when it is not operated. Further, the second display may be deleted without fail when the operating means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or when the operating means is operated after the operation valid period is started. In addition, it may not be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The first display and the second display are different displays.
The second display may include the operation valid period display [for example, the display of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5)].
The second display is a display that may include the first effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display different from the first notice display.
The second display is a display in which the operation valid period display becomes the first effect display in response to the operation of the operation means after the operation valid period is started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the second display before and after the operation of the operating means.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the second display may include only the operation valid period display, or may include a display other than the operation valid period display. Further, the second display may always include the operation valid period display, or may not include the operation valid period display.

Further, the second display may include only the first effect display, or may include a display other than the first effect display. Further, the second display may always include the first effect display, or may not include the first effect display.

Further, the first effect display may be partially different from the first notice display, or may be completely different.

Further, in the second display, the operation valid period display may be the first effect display only when the operation means is operated after the operation valid period is started, or the operation may be performed. The operation valid period display may be the first effect display depending on the fact that the operating means is not operated after the valid period is started. Further, in the second display, the operation valid period display may always be the first effect display depending on the operation of the operating means after the operation valid period is started, or the operation may be performed. Depending on that the operation means is operated after the validity period is started, the operation validity period display may not be the first effect display.

Further, "The operation valid period display is a display by a gauge [for example, in the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 248 (4) to (5) and in FIGS. 248 (12) to (14). Button reception time meter MT gauge display, etc.],
The first notice display is a display by a gauge [for example, a gauge display on the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the number shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17) is displayed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the operation validity period display and the first notice display may be easy to see.

Here, the operation validity period display may be configured by only the gauge, or may be configured by including something other than the gauge. Further, the operation validity period display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

Further, the first notice display may be configured only by a gauge, or may be configured including something other than a gauge. Further, the first notice display may be configured to always include a gauge, or may be configured not to include a gauge.

In addition, "the first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect [for example, decorative pattern variation display, etc.].
The certain effect is an effect configured to develop after the display of the first notice display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (20). The decorative pattern variation display has evolved into super reach after the button reception time meter MT on which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the operation validity period is originally used, it may be possible to pay attention to the development effect after showing the first notice display.

Further, according to this game console, the first notice display including the display regarding the operation validity period may function as a timer notice regarding the development of a certain effect.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only during the execution of a certain effect, or may be displayed during the execution of an effect other than the execution of a certain effect. There may be one. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed during the execution of a certain effect, or may not be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.

Further, a certain effect may be configured so that it may develop only after the display of the first notice display is started, or the display of the first notice display is started. It may be configured so that it may develop other than later. Further, a certain effect may be configured to always develop after the display of the first notice display is started, or may be developed after the display of the first notice display is started. It may not be possible.

In addition, "one of the plurality of displays is a third display [for example, a step-up notice shown in FIGS. 248 (15) to (17)].
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (17), the operation is valid. After the period starts, when the production button 136 is operated, the step-up notice is started, etc.],
The third display is a notice display and is
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 248 (12) to (20), the decorative symbol variation display is , After the step-up notice started, it has developed into super reach, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the third display is displayed.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display, or may not display the third display.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may be displayed only when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. May also be displayed. Further, the third display may be always displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period, or may not be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period. May be good.

Further, the third display may be configured to include only the notice display, or may be configured to include a display other than the notice display. Further, the third display may be configured to include the notice display without fail, or may be configured not to include the notice display.

Also, some displays may be configured to develop only after the third display has started, or may develop other than after the third display has started. It may be configured as follows. Further, a certain display may be configured to always develop after the third display is started, or may not be developed after the third display is started.

Further, "The third display is a display that may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period [for example, as shown in FIGS. 254 (3) to (9). In addition, after the operation valid period starts, even if the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the step-up notice is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, a notice display that starts when the operation means is operated appears even if the operation means is not operated, but the first notice display cannot be seen. It may be possible to facilitate the operation of the operating means to see the notice display.

Here, the third display may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period, or is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. There may be.

Further, "the first display includes a second notice display [for example, a display in which the Bancho icon and the panda icon shown at FIG. 253 (3) are attached to both ends of the button reception time meter MT, etc.]". It is a display that may be
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed before the operation means is operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 253 (3) to (5), the icon of the chief The button reception time meter MT in the display mode with the panda icon has been displayed since the button operation effect started],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the first display even before the operating means is operated.

Here, the first display may include only the second notice display, or may include a display other than the second notice display. Further, the first display may always include the second notice display, or may not include the second display.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only before the operation means is operated, or may be displayed other than before the operation means is operated. There may be. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed before the operating means is operated, or may not be displayed before the operating means is operated.

In addition, "the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode [for example, a mode in which the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15)]. There is a notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge].
The second notice display is displayed in a second display mode [for example, a mode in which a bancho icon and a panda icon are displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (3)]. It is a notice display that may occur,
The second notice display may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a mode in which a number length icon is displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 255 (11)]. It is a notice display,
The case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode is better than the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode, according to the third display mode. It is configured so that the first notice display is easily displayed [For example, the button reception time is larger than the case where the icons displayed at both ends of the button reception time meter MT are a combination of the Bancho icon and the panda icon. If both of the icons displayed on both ends of the meter MT are the icons of the chief, it is easier for the princess's mini character to be displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT],
The jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the second notice display functions as a notice of the first notice display, the first notice display may be noticed by the operation of the operating means.

Here, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. May be good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second notice display may be displayed only in the fourth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fourth display mode. May be good. Further, the second notice display may be always displayed in the fourth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the second notice display may be displayed. When the notice display of is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may also be displayed. Further, when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be configured to be displayed without fail, or the second notice display may be displayed. Is displayed in the fourth display mode, it may be configured so that the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

Further, the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed only when the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode, or the second notice display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed even when the notice display of is not displayed in the fourth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In the case of being displayed with, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In that case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In cases other than the case where is displayed in, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

Further, "One of the plurality of displays is a fourth display [for example, a button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12), a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29), and the figure. Vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc. shown in 277 (6)].
The fourth display is an operation promotion display, and is
The operation promotion display is a display that promotes the operation of the operation means [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 248 (12) prompts the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The fourth display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode [for example, the button image 136a in the default display mode shown in FIG. 248 (12)].
In the fourth display, the sixth display mode [for example, the deca button image 136aL in a display mode larger than the default display mode shown in FIG. 275 (29) and the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 277 (6) vibrate and Vibration / rotation button image 136aV, etc. in a rotating mode] is a notice display that may be displayed.
The first notice display may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, a mode in which the mini character BCH of the bancho is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge shown in FIG. 248 (15)]. Is a display
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a mode in which a princess mini character is displayed in the remaining display portion of the gauge].
When the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the fourth display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first display according to the third display mode is used. It is configured so that the notice display of [For example, the button reception time meter is displayed when the big button image 136aL or the vibration / rotation button image 136aV is displayed than when the button image 136a is displayed. The mini character of the princess is likely to be displayed in the remaining display part of the MT gauge],
The jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode. [For example, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the mini character of the princess is displayed than when the mini character BCH of the Bancho is displayed in the remaining display part of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the first notice display can be expected by the notice by the operation promotion display, the operation of the operation means may be further promoted.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

Further, the fourth display may be composed of only the operation promotion display, or may include a display other than the operation promotion display. Further, the fourth display may always include the operation promotion display, or may not include the operation promotion display.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the fifth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the fifth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the fifth display mode, or may not be displayed in the fifth display mode.

Further, the fourth display may be displayed only in the sixth display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the sixth display mode. Good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the sixth display mode, or may not be displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first notice display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the first notice display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, it may be configured so that only the first notice display in the third display mode may be displayed, or the fourth display may be displayed. When the display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in a display mode other than the third display mode may also be displayed. Further, when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may be configured to be displayed without fail, and the fourth display may be the fourth display. When displayed in the sixth display mode, the first notice display in the third display mode may not be displayed.

Further, the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed only when the fourth display is displayed in the sixth display mode, or the fourth display mode may be displayed. It may be configured so that the first notice display by the third display mode may be displayed even when the display is not displayed in the sixth display mode.

Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In the case of being displayed with, a symbol other than the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode. In that case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed only when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode, and the first notice display is the third display mode. In cases other than the case where is displayed in, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, "the operation valid period ends when the first period [for example, a period of 5 seconds after the operation valid period starts] elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts. Is configured as
The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a second period [for example, a period of 1 second from the start of the operation validity period] has elapsed since the operation validity period started. The period to be performed is the fourth period [for example, a period of 4 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated].
The first notice display is displayed when the operation means is operated after a third period [for example, a period of 3 seconds from the start of the operation validity period] has elapsed since the operation validity period started. The period to be performed is the fifth period [for example, a period of 2 seconds after the effect button 136 is operated].
The third period is longer than the second period.
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the operation valid period ends when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or after the operation valid period starts. When the first period elapses without the operating means being operated, a period other than the operation valid period may end. Further, the operation valid period may be configured to always end when the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation may be performed after the operation valid period starts. It may be configured so that the operation valid period may not end if the first period elapses without the means being operated.

Here, the operation valid period display may be a display for notifying the first period.

Further, the operation valid period may be configured to end when only the first period elapses without the operation means being operated after the operation valid period starts, or the operation may be performed after the operation valid period starts. The operation valid period may be configured to end even if a period other than the first period elapses without the means being operated.

Further, the second period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the third period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the fourth period may be shorter than the first period, or may be the same length as the first period. Further, the fifth period may be a period shorter than the first period, or may be a period having the same length as the first period. Further, the second period may be a longer period than the fourth period, may be a period of the same length, or may be a shorter period. Further, the third period may be a longer period than the fifth period, may be a period of the same length, or may be a shorter period.

In addition, "The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the first period or shorter than the first period.
The total length of the third period and the fifth period is the same as the first period or shorter than the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The total length of the second period and the fourth period may be longer than the length of the first period, and the total length of the third period and the fifth period is the first period. It may be longer than the length of.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication [for example, the decorative symbol of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274 (5)].
One of the plurality of displays is a second display [for example, a display in which the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) and the button reception time meter MT are combined].
The first display is a display related to a button effect [for example, a button operation effect shown in FIGS. 274 (6) to (8)].
The second display is a display related to the button effect.
The first display is a display that may be displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, "decoration 3" shown in FIG. 274 (5). -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Special 2-Special 2-Special 2" or the combination of the decorative symbols of "Special 2-Special 2-Special 2" shown in FIG.
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of decorative symbols.
The first display and the second display are different displays [for example, the decorative pattern of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274 (5) simply represents a button, and the characters "Change" are displayed at the top. The button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) is a display imitating the effect button 136, and the button reception time meter MT is added, so that the display mode is different. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Conventionally, display effects by display means have become diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means in the conventional game table. According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to identify whether the pattern is once displayed or generated as an effect.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of displays, or may not display a plurality of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display. Further, the display means may always display the first display, or may not display the first display.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the second display. Further, the display means may always display the second display, or may not display the second display.

Further, the first display may be a display related only to the button effect, or may be related to an effect other than the button effect. Further, the first display may be always related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

Further, the second display may be a display related only to the button effect, or may be related to an effect other than the button effect. Further, the second display may be always related to the button effect, or may not be related to the button effect.

Further, the first display may be displayed only as a display constituting at least a part of the combination of decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variable display, or the decorative symbol variable display may be executed. It may be displayed as a display other than the display constituting at least a part of the combination of decorative symbols. Further, the first display may be displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of the combination of decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be decorated during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may not be displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of the combination of symbols.

Further, the second display may not constitute only the combination of decorative symbols, or may not constitute anything other than the combination of decorative symbols. Further, the second display may not always constitute a combination of decorative symbols, or may constitute a combination of decorative symbols.

Further, the first display and the second display may be partially different displays or all may be different displays.

The differences between the first display and the second display include, for example, differences due to different colors, differences due to lighting modes, differences due to blinking modes, differences due to animation modes, and animation. Differences depending on the presence / absence (for example, the presence / absence of animation of pressing a button, etc.) can be mentioned, but the present invention is not limited to these.

Further, "The button effect is an effect that is started after the first display is displayed. [For example, the button operation effect shown in FIGS. 274 (6) to (8) is shown in FIG. 274 (5). ) Is displayed after the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is displayed, and the button operation effects shown in FIGS. 277 (6) to (8) are performed at the timing shown in FIG. 277 (5). It starts after all three "Special 2" decorative patterns are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the button effect is performed by displaying the first display.

Here, the button effect may be started only after the first display is displayed, or may be started other than after the first display is displayed. Further, the button effect may be always started after the first display is displayed, or may not be started after the first display is displayed.

In addition, "the first display is a display that can be displayed in the first number display mode [for example, one display mode (for example, a display mode of a decorative symbol of" special 2 ")".
The second display is a display mode of the second number [for example, a display mode of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) and a display mode of the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 275 (29). A mode, a display mode of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277 (6), a display mode of the protruding button image 136aS shown in FIG. 279 (41), and a button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 281 (7) were added. It is a display that can be displayed with the simplified button image 136aX display mode), etc.
The second number is larger than the first number,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the number of patterns can be reduced to make the first display easier to understand, while the second display may be shown as various variations such as a notice.

Here, the first display may be displayable only in the display mode of the first number, or may be displayable in a display mode other than the display mode of the first number. .. Further, the first display may always be displayed in the display mode of the first number, or may not be displayed in the display mode of the first number.

Further, the second display may be displayable only in the display mode of the second number, or may be displayable in a display mode other than the display mode of the second number. Further, the second display may always be displayed in the display mode of the second number, or may not be displayed in the display mode of the second number.

Further, the first number and the second number may be the same number, or the second number may be smaller than the first number.

Also, "The first number is one,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand as a symbol once displayed by unifying the number of patterns of the first display.

Here, the first number may be a number larger than one or zero.

Further, "As a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 277 (10), as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the left symbol is displayed.・ Decorative symbols are displayed on each of the middle and right symbols, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed],
The button effect is started when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed and is displayed as a combination of the three decorative symbols in the combination of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). [For example, in the button operation effects shown in FIGS. 277 (6) to (8), the decorative symbols of "Special 2" are displayed on the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, respectively, and "Special 2-Special". 2-Special 2 ”is started when the display is temporarily stopped with the combination of decorative symbols],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that a button effect may be performed.

Here, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, only the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination other than the combination of the three decorative symbols is also stopped. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be configured to be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may not be stopped and displayed. It may be configured to be.

Further, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed only as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, or the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped as well as the result of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the button effect may be started only when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed and is displayed as a combination of the three first display combinations, or the decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may be started in a case other than the case where the combination of the three first display is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of. Further, the button effect may be started whenever the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may not be started when the combination of the three first display is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols during the execution of.

Further, the button effect may be started only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display when the combination of the three first displays is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may be started when the combination of the three first display is displayed as the combination of the decorative symbols other than during the execution of.

Further, "In the first case, the display mode of at least one of the three first displays is different from the display mode of the other first display at least in part. [For example, as shown in FIG. 283 (5), the decorative symbol of "Special 2" in the left symbol and the decorative symbol of "Special 2" in the middle symbol are added with the mini character BCH of the Bancho, but the one on the right. A panda mini character PND is added to the decorative design of "Special 2"],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the design from being mistaken as a big hit.

Here, in the first case, the display mode of the first display of one of the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other two first displays. In the first case, the display mode of one of the three first displays may be completely different from the display mode of the other two first displays.

Further, in the first case, the display mode of the two first displays of the three first displays may be partially different from the display mode of the other one first display. In one case, the display mode of the two first displays of the three first displays may be completely different from the display mode of the other one first display.

Further, in the first case, some of the display modes of all the first displays among the three first displays may be different from each other, and in the first case, the three first displays. All of the first indications may be different from each other.

In the first case, the display mode of all the first displays among the three first displays may be exactly the same.

Further, "As a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols is stopped and displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (34), as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the left symbol is displayed.・ Decorative designs are displayed on each of the middle design and the right design, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative designs in "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", etc.],
In the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols are configured to be displayed in sequence [for example, as shown in FIG. 275 (26), "decoration 3" is first stopped and displayed on the left symbol. , As shown in FIG. 275 (27), subsequently, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and finally, as shown in FIG. 275 (33), "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Etc.],
The button effect is an effect that is started when the first display is displayed as the last decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example,. As shown in FIGS. 274 (3) to (5), the button operation effect shown in FIGS. 274 (6) to (8) is a decorative symbol of "special 2" in the middle symbol which is the third stop. Is started when is stopped and displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to understand that a button effect may be performed.

Here, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, only the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination other than the combination of the three decorative symbols is also stopped. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be configured to be stopped and displayed, or as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, the combination of the three decorative symbols may not be stopped and displayed. It may be configured to be.

Further, the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed only as a result of the decorative symbol variation display, or the combination of the three decorative symbols may be stopped as well as the result of the decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in the decorative symbol variation display, only three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed, or in the decorative symbol variation display, symbols other than the three decorative symbols are also configured to be sequentially displayed. May be good. Further, in the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols may be configured to be displayed in sequence, or in the decorative symbol variation display, the three decorative symbols may not be displayed in sequence. Good.

Further, the three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed only in the decorative symbol variation display, or the three decorative symbols may be sequentially displayed in addition to the decorative symbol variation display. Good.

Further, the button effect may be started only when the first display is displayed as the last decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. However, it may be started even when the first display is not displayed as the last decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the button effect may be always started when the first display is displayed as the last decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. However, in the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, it may not be started when the first display is displayed as the last decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols.

The button effect may be started when the first display is displayed as the first decorative symbol to be displayed among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decorative symbol variation may be started. It may be started when the first display is displayed as the second decorative symbol among the three decorative symbols during the execution of the display, or when the decorative symbol variable display is being executed, the three decorative symbols are displayed. It may be started when the first display is displayed as two decorative symbols of the decorative symbols.

In addition, "the display means provides a notice display for notifying that the first display may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter," third notice display [for example, FIG. In the mini-games shown in 274 (13) to (15), if the mini-game succeeds and the button icon appears, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display. It is a means to display (notify that there is something, etc.] ”.
It is configured so that the first display is more likely to be displayed when the third notice display is displayed than when the third notice display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have a sense of expectation for the display of the first display.

Here, the display means may display only the third notice display during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the third notice display during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. Display other than the above may also be displayed. In addition, the display means may always display the third notice display during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the third notice display may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display. It may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may display the third notice display only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or the third notice may be displayed even when the decorative symbol variation display is not being executed. It may be the one that may display the display.

Further, when the third notice display is displayed, only the first display may be displayed, and when the third notice display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. It may be configured so that a display other than the display may be displayed. Further, when the third notice display is displayed, the first display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or even when the third notice display is displayed, the first display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, it may be configured so that the first display may be displayed only when the third notice display is displayed, or in cases other than the case where the third notice display is displayed. , The first display may be configured.

Further, "The decorative symbol variation display is configured so that, after the decorative symbol variation is started, the combination of decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination is confirmed and displayed [for example, FIG. 274 (1)). -As shown in FIG. 11 (11), if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is a loss after the variation of the decorative pattern is started, the loss such as "decoration 3-decoration 7-decoration 7" is lost. The combination of decorative patterns is confirmed and displayed],
The first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the game from being mistaken for being included in the combination of decorative patterns.

Here, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured so that after the decorative symbol variation is started, only the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination may be confirmed and displayed. After starting the variation of the symbol, the combination other than the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination may be fixedly displayed. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured so that after the decorative symbol variation is started, the combination of the decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination is always confirmed and displayed, or the decorative symbol variation is started. After that, the combination of decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination may not be confirmed and displayed.

Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be configured so that the combination of decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination is confirmed and displayed only after the variation of the decorative symbol is started, or the variation of the decorative symbol is started. In addition to the above, the combination of decorative symbols according to the result of the winning / failing determination may be fixedly displayed.

Further, the first display may not be fixedly displayed only as a combination of decorative symbols, or may not be fixedly displayed as a combination other than the combination of decorative symbols. Further, the first display may not always be confirmed as a combination of decorative symbols, or may be confirmed as a combination of decorative symbols.

In addition, "an operating means [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate the player is provided.
The button effect is an effect using the operation means.
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (5), the decorative design of "Special 2" simply represents a button, etc.]. Yes,
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 274 (6), the button image 136a is represented in a mode imitating the effect button 136, etc.]. ,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be recognized that the effect by the operating means is performed by displaying the first display and the second display.

Here, the operating means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate it, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can also operate it. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be at a position where the player cannot operate.

As the operating means, any operating device such as a button, a lever, a cross key, a touch panel, and a touch sensor can be applied. Here, for these operation devices, the first display is not prepared, but the second display may be prepared. For example, the first display imitating a lever as an operation means is provided. The display of is not prepared, but the second display may be prepared.

Further, the button effect may be an effect using only the operating means, or may be an effect using means other than the operating means. Further, the button effect may be an effect that always uses the operating means, or may not use the operating means.

Further, the first display may be a display including only a display imitating the operating means, or may be a display including a display other than the display imitating the operating means. Further, the first display may be a display that always includes a display that imitates the operating means, or may not include a display that imitates the operating means.

Further, the second display may be a display including only a display imitating the operating means, or may be a display including a display other than the display imitating the operating means. Further, the second display may be a display that always includes a display that imitates the operating means, or may not include a display that imitates the operating means.

Further, "The first display does not include a display relating to the operation validity period of the operating means [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274 (6)].
The second display is a display including a display relating to an operation valid period of the operation means in the button effect [for example, a button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 274 (6)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily distinguish between the first display and the second display.

Here, the first display may not include only the display relating to the operation validity period of the operating means, or may not include any display other than the display relating to the operating validity period of the operating means. Further, the first display may not always include a display relating to the operation validity period of the operating means, or may include a display relating to the operating validity period of the operating means.

Further, the second display may include only a display relating to the operation validity period of the operation means in the button effect, or may include a display other than the display relating to the operation validity period of the operation means in the button effect. May be good. In addition, the second display may always include a display relating to the operation validity period of the operation means in the button effect, or may not include a display relating to the operation validity period of the operation means in the button effect. ..

Further, "The first display is a display displayed before the operation valid period of the operation means in the button effect is started [for example, in FIGS. 274 (5) to (8). As shown, the decorative symbol of "Special 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol before the button operation effect is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to easily recognize that the button effect is performed.

Here, the first display may be displayed only before the operation valid period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation validity period of the operation means in the button effect is started. It may be displayed in addition to the one before. Further, the first display may always be displayed before the operation valid period of the operation means in the button effect is started, or the operation validity period of the operation means in the button effect is started. It may not be displayed before.

In addition, "The operating means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states.
One of the plurality of states is the first state [for example, the default (normal) state of the effect button 136].
One of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, a state in which the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating].
The first state and the second state are different states.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode of "special 2" shown in FIG. 274 (5)].
The second display is a display that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, the display mode of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 274 (6) (default display mode), etc.].
The second display is a third display mode [for example, a display mode of the vibration / rotation button image 136aV shown in FIG. 277 (6) (a display mode showing how the effect button 136 is vibrating and rotating), etc.] It is a display that may be displayed with
The second display mode and the third display mode are different display modes.
The first display mode is a display mode corresponding to the operating means, which is the first state.
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding to the operating means, which is the first state.
The third display mode is a display mode corresponding to the operating means, which is the second state.
The first display is a display that is not displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 277 (5) to (7), the effect button 136. The display mode of "Special 2" has not changed even when it takes a state of vibration and rotation],
When the first display is displayed in the first display mode and then the second display is displayed in the third display mode in the button effect (hereinafter, "second case [for example, [for example," , After "Special 2" is displayed in FIG. 277 (5), the button operation effect is started in FIG. 277 (6), and in this button operation effect, the vibration / rotation button image 136aV may be displayed. Etc.] ”),
In the second case, the operating means is more likely to be in the second state than in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be capable of taking only one of a plurality of states, or may take a state other than any of the plurality of states. It may be anything. Further, the operating means may always take any one of a plurality of states, or may not take any of a plurality of states.

Further, the operating means may be capable of taking only the first state and the second state, or may be taken in states other than the first state and the second state. There may be. Further, the operating means may always take the first state and the second state, or may not take the first state and the second state.

The first state and the second state are not limited to those showing only the external state of the operating means, and for example, those showing the internal control state related to the operating means are also included in the present invention. For example, the states applicable to the first state and the second state include a state in which a single press of the operating means is accepted, a state in which a repeated hit operation of the operating means is accepted, and a long press operation of the operating means. The state of accepting is also included. More specifically, for example, even if the first state is a state in which a single press of the operating means is accepted, and the second state is a state in which a continuous hit operation or a long press operation of the operating means is accepted. Good.

Further, the first state and the second state may be partially different from each other, or may be completely different from each other.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second display may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the second display mode and the third display mode may be different in a part of the display mode or may be completely different in the display mode.

Further, the first display mode may be a display mode corresponding only to the operating means in the first state, or a display mode corresponding to something other than the operating means in the first state. May be good. Further, the first display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operating means that is the first state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operating means that is the first state. Good.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode corresponding only to the operating means in the first state, or a display mode corresponding to something other than the operating means in the first state. May be good. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operation means that is the first state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operation means that is the first state. Good.

Further, the third display mode may be a display mode corresponding only to the operating means in the second state, or a display mode corresponding to something other than the operating means in the second state. May be good. Further, the third display mode may be a display mode that always corresponds to the operating means in the second state, or may be a display mode that does not correspond to the operating means in the second state. Good.

Further, the first display may not be displayed only in the display mode corresponding to the operation means in the second state, or may be a display mode other than the display mode according to the operation means in the second state. However, it may not be displayed. Further, the first display may not always be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operating means in the second state, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the operating means in the second state. There may be.

Further, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may be displayed only in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode may be displayed. After the first display is displayed in, the second display may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode in the button effect. Further, after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, the second display may always be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect, or the first display mode may be displayed. After the first display is displayed in, the second display may not be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

Further, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect only after the first display is displayed in the first display mode, or the first display mode may be displayed. In addition to after the first display is displayed in, the second display may be displayed in the third display mode in the button effect.

Further, the operating means may be easily in the second state only in the second case, or may be easily in a state other than the second state in the second case. Further, the operating means may be inevitably in the second state in the second case, or may not be in the second state in the second case.

Further, the operating means may be more likely to be in the second state than in the first state only in the second case, and may be in the second state than in the first state in cases other than the second case. It may be easy to be in a state.

Any display mode applicable as the first display mode, the second display mode, and the third display mode can be adopted. For example, a display mode of a deca button, a display mode of different colors, and a display mode of different colors can be adopted. A lighting display mode, a blinking display mode, an animation display mode, and the like can be adopted.

In addition, "The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the operating means is in the second state than when the operating means is not in the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the operating means will be in the second state.

Here, when the operating means is in the second state, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the operating means is in the second state, it is finally displayed. In some cases, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may also be confirmed and displayed. Further, when the operating means is in the second state, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the operating means is in the second state, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed. It may not be displayed.

In addition, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed only when the operating means is in the second state, or when the operating means is not in the second state. , The jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
It may be displayed.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a ball is enclosed and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine to be used. In this enclosed pachinko machine, the enclosed ball is used as a launching ball. The payout of the ball may be carried out by electronic display.

FIG. 286 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 1001 into the gaming area 1002 is discharged from the gaming area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching means 1001 again. Further, a display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 1002 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 201 are not provided.

It should be noted that the above-described display means 1003 may be further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 201, and further, the display means 1003 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 1003 can function as an operation means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous hit operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous hit function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to be activated more or less. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 286 encloses a ball and circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine to use the enclosed ball as a launching ball and pays out the ball. May be executed by credit.

In addition, the term "notice icon" explained so far is just for convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience according to the display mode (motif), and when the notice icon is a tool, it may be called a notice item, and when the notice icon is a character, it is called a notice character. In some cases, if the notice icon is a display indicating the skill, it may be called a notice skill, and if the notice icon is a box-shaped one, it may be called a notice box, etc., a display showing the notice + shape (for example) , Notice medal). In addition, the term "notice" in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be referred to as a charge item or a stock item to indicate that it is to be stored.

Further, what has been referred to as a lamp or lighting is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

The items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Even if the constituent requirements are included only in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and appendices, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and appendices.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of the game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG. 287.

The game console according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 having a plurality of types of symbols and being rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel" shown in FIG. 287. Based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the stop button 1006 for stopping the rotation of the reels individually, the lottery means for determining the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations by lottery (winning combination internal lottery), and the lottery result. The combination of the reel stop control means (reel stop control process) that controls the stop related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. A determination means (winning determination processing) for determining whether or not the combination of symbols is determined in advance, and a game in which a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning aspect is paid out when the stopping mode of the symbols is a predetermined winning aspect. In addition to the payout control means (medal payout process 1008) that performs the medium payout process, the effect means 1010 that executes the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and this effect means puts a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. The launching device 1014 to launch, the winning opening 1016 configured to allow the ball launched from the launching device to enter, the detecting means 1018 to detect the ball entering the winning opening 1016, and the detecting means 1018 detect the ball. The payout means 1020 that pays out the ball in the case of the above, the variable display device 1022 that variablely displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and the shutter 1024 that can be moved to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, operate in a predetermined operation mode. The movable body 1026 is provided, and when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 1022 changes the design and then stops and displays the game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000 ".

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 288 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, as the recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game consoles that can be applied to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 289 to 336. As a general rule, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are used only for the explanations using FIGS. 289 to 336, and even when the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. 289 to 369 are used. In the description using FIG. 336, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 289 to 336 are prioritized.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 289. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a game table on which a player can obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and launches an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, and a door 108 with a ball storage plate. The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side) thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102, having a locking function, and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. .. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk at a store (game store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and is provided with a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a locking function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The clerk of the game store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 has been opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In this embodiment, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is opened by pushing an opening lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 open. A door sensor with a ball storage plate that detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate has been opened may be provided. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. The ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124, the effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 291) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 that is built into the effect button 136. The chance button lamp 138 that emits light, the ball lending operation button 140 that instructs the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store to lend the ball, and the card unit that instructs the card unit to return the balance of the player. It includes a return operation button 142 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full due to the game ball. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously launched by the player, the launching device 110 launches the game ball into the gaming area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It fires at the target and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button capable of maximizing the firing intensity by pressing the ball firing handle 134 while being operated may be provided.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 289, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG. 291.

FIG. 290 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 289 as viewed from the rear side.

The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear view is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The payout device 152 is removable and, when mounted at a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152 are temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to the game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined value. Based on the condition being satisfied, the player is given (paid out) an amount of game value (game ball) according to the grant condition by this configuration.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 for accommodating the main board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control unit 300. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 and the first sub-control unit 400 that house the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing related to the effect based on the effect. A second sub-board case 166 that houses a second sub-board 164 that constitutes a second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 292) that performs control processing related to the effect, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls (see FIG. 292). A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes (see FIG. 292) and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to launch of a game ball (FIG. 292). A power switch that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes (see), a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices (see FIG. 292), and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, and a signal between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving the above is arranged.

FIG. 291 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a "general symbol", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro-Luminence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 in a form with enhanced effect, and is a decorative symbol. The display device 208 may also be used as a predetermined symbol display means.

The normal map holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and this implementation In the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number of special figure variable games (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term "hold" as used herein means to hold the start of various determination processes (lottery process, etc.) based on the start information described later.

The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-accuracy middle lamp 222 is configured to perform a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the jackpot game, and not to notify the current symbol control state thereafter. There is. Further, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is cut off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a time saving state (electric support state), and a probability change state, and a state with a special symbol probability change and a state with a probability change. It may be one of the states without the special figure probability change.

In this specification, the control state will be described using the wording indicating the state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100), but the wording of the control state includes the concept of the so-called gaming state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. ing.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 289 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". It is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. The first special figure start port 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 230 of the first special figure, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 290 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls is used as a prize ball on the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which its own size does not change.

In this embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is arranged below the first special figure start port 230. A pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid are provided in the vicinity of the second special figure start port 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 is provided. It corresponds to the variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize in the second special drawing start port 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the ball into the starting port 232 of the second special figure with the pair of blade members 2321 closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode in which it is difficult to win a prize. On the other hand, when the normal figure variable game is won and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 open and close at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and go to the second special figure start port 232. The ball can be entered (easy to win), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is the easy to win. That is, the size of the entrance (advance entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure start port 232 is either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size). A variable starting region in which the ease of entry of the game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is variable, and corresponds to an example of the second starting region. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special drawing start port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are open, among the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is a variable start area is larger than the game ball that enters the first special figure start port 230 that is the fixed start area. Figure There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure start port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 that can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening is sometimes called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 is sometimes called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball is easier to enter the variable winning opening than the closed state to the other state. Both the closed state and the open state are the stationary states, the closed state is the predetermined first stationary state, and in the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state at the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is in a stationary state. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until the big hit game described later is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. In addition to the completely closed state, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly open to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 291 as long as the game ball wins a prize by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The ball housed in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a game nail 238, or the like can roll, and a passing ball enters the first special figure start port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a that makes it easier to ball is provided.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate a human right arm and a forearm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a translucent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely blocked (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 289, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 291, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of decorative pattern display means.

Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 indicating the specifications of the game table is attached at a position visible to the player.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 292. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is configured to include a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, etc., a WDT314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, and a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit has two counters built-in). Is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, and various sensors 320 including a lower plate full tank sensor. Then, the sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random number value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special figure display device 212 or the first 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of the normal figure hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high-accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.), and a predetermined movable member, for example, an ordinary electric accessory. 2 Special figure for controlling various solenoids 332 including a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the starting port 232 and a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory. The drive circuit 334 is connected to the drive circuit 334. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is similarly set. Latch and store the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the above.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bidirectional communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub control unit 400 to the main control unit 300. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured so that a signal such as a command can be transmitted to the main control unit 300, but is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. May be good.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control is performed by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246. , The sensor circuit 428 and the volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 is from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the button sensor 426 that detects the presses of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a CPU 504. VDP (Video Display Processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in ROM 506 based on the signal from, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And, are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored is connected to the basic circuit 502.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 pays out prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out and a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loan balls. Ball rental information or the like indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has opened, and the like, and the main body 104 and the front frame door 106 include the main body 104 and the front frame door 106. If it is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs the release signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs the door opening information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage, and the payout control unit 600 launches the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control unit 500. Although the control unit 630 is supplied with the power supply of the predetermined voltage, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 293 (a) to 293 (d), the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 start port 232. The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has been hit. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment in the "variable display of special figure 1" (special figure 1). Fluctuating game) is performed. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2" ( Special figure variable game) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2. After that, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variation display from the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variation display of the special figure. The variable display of this special figure may be continuously performed multiple times.

FIG. 293 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. In FIG. 293 (a), nine types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure I" are shown. In FIG. 293 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols (“Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G”) are prepared as stop symbols for the special figure. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, while you can expect to get the ball out in 5 of the 15 rounds, you can not expect to get the ball out in the remaining rounds, which is a real 5R probability variation jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 15R jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all 15 rounds, and "Special Figure D" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 out of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in one round, but not in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure E" is a 15R jackpot symbol, four of the 15 rounds. It is a real 4R-RUB that can be expected to get a ball in the round, but cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds. It is a symbol, and is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation, in which the acquisition of balls cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long the round in which the winning of the ball can be expected will continue at the start of the big hit, and is a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). It is a big hit that tells the player whether or not the round that can be expected to get a ball will continue when the eye or the 9th round is reached.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability variation jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the jackpot game is completed, the time may be shortened (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than that of the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure fluctuation game to the start of the next big hit. It refers to the state. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the jackpot game is completed. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to a normal figure, and the "time saving state" is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a normal figure and a special figure. A time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal map, it is easier to win the variable game of the normal map than in the low probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). For example, the winning probability of the normal figure variable game is 1/100 in the normal figure low probability state (non-electric support state), while it increases to 99/100 in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is shorter in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (normal map variation and shortness). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-electric support state (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the blade member 2321 is easier to open more than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened increases). For example, the blade member 2321, which opens only once in the non-electric support state for each winning of the normal drawing start port 228, opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and closes for 2 seconds again). Open). By extending the electric chew opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time saving flag is set to off during the jackpot game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the jackpot game. This may be disadvantageous to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in the big hit game, and the prize of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (time saving state), the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, the extension of the opening period of the electric chew, and the increase of the number of times of opening the electric chew are all performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's advantage will be high, and the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times of opening the electric chew is performed, which increases the probability of entering the starting port 232 of the special figure 2, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes into a winning difficult state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in a state where it is easy to win a prize for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure E" are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (normal figure high probability state) after the end of the big hit game to be performed after that until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and "Special Figure F" is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 100 times of the special figure variable game after the end of the subsequent big hit game, and the 101st time is non-electric. It shifts to the support state (low probability state in the normal figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without electric support (“Special Figure G”) is won, the state does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when "special figure A" to "special figure E" are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is completed. Further, when the "special figure G" is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the big hit game is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum for each operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If this is done, the second and subsequent openings will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game ends, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 293 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing number and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game in which "Special Figure G" is stopped and displayed and shifted. The number of times and the opening time) are substantially the same, but may be different. For example, at least one of the number of opening times and the opening time may be different.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 293 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. In FIG. 293 (b), six types of special figures "special figure a" to "special figure f" are shown, and five kinds of special figures are jackpot symbols ("special figure a" to "special figure f"). Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and is a 15R probability variation jackpot symbol that can be expected to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15 It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to get a ball out in all rounds, and "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it is expected to get a ball out in 8 out of 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected to get a ball in 4 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to get a ball, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

FIG. 293 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variablely displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode, which is a combination of decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed.

When notifying the actual 5R probability variation jackpot (“special figure B”), 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns with the same number other than "3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" and "Decoration 1" Decorative 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, when notifying the 15R probability variation jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB, and substantial 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols having the same numbers, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. The combination of decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-lord-decoration 1", "decoration 4-lord-decoration 4", etc.), which is a decorative pattern, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”) which is the big hit of 2R, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration” is set in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. Further, in the case of notifying the lost symbol of "special symbol I" or "special symbol f", a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols described above (for example, dispersal) is provided in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Eye) is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variable display of the decorative symbol" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by being controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

FIG. 293 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal drawing display device 210 lights up all seven segments and one segment in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" (variable game of normal map) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the hit symbols "Fu-zu A" and the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 293 (d), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned off, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment where the light is turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "variation display of the normal map" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the normal map may be referred to as the variable display of the normal map.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 will be described with reference to FIG. 294. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 stores a special figure random number value, a special figure round determination random number value, a special figure electric support determination random number value, and a special symbol symbol determination random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter that generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the random value of winning special figures, the results of various determinations (lottery), and the like. Hereinafter, the area in the RAM 308 for storing the reserved number of special figures may be referred to as a reserved number storage area for special figures. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special figures divided into a maximum number of areas (4 in this example) in which the start of the winning / failing determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random value storage area for ordinary drawings is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for the special figure stores a plurality of types of start information as one set, and stores the start information in the winning order (holding order) for each area.

As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 294 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Permission to operate and set initial values. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338. Monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the timer interrupt process of the main control unit described later in the timer circuit 312 in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 290 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is turned on (indicating that the operation has been performed). In other words, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and when the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the basic circuit 302 is set to the initial state in step S113. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power supply status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 290 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 295. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 4 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Part timer interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 292 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various types are sent to the RAM 308. It is stored in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor is read out from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 292 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is determined that there was a passage. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 234 and 226 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been awarded. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects the entry of the ball into the first special figure start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special figure It is determined that the start port 230 has won a prize, that is, the game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and the subsequent processing associated with the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the subsequent processing associated with winning the first special figure start port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure winning random number value used by the main control unit 300 are used. The random number counter for generating each special figure random number value is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area for this purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 in a fluctuating / stopped manner. Various types including a special symbol display symbol update timer for timing the fluctuation / stop display time, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined open time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a winning in the winning openings 234, 226 and the starting openings 230 and 232, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is displayed. Read out, add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In the prize reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area of the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 292 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so that the display mode is a lost symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 293 (c)) and the lost symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 293 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening / closing of the 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a loss, the normal map loss flag is turned on as described later. When this normal figure loss flag is on, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If a winning decision is made, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and the normal figure display device 210 is used from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired normal figure timer random number value. One time for variable display of the figure is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Subsequently, the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) is executed. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 5R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any one of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. 293 (a) is on, and the 2R jackpot flag is on. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure e, and the loss flag is on, the special figure f. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), a 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and a lost symbol (special figure e). Confirmation display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. The door member is attached to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234. Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating the closure period in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in this example embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example). (3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to be set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating the production waiting period in. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal map, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal map. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls are entered. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In this example embodiment, the special figure variable game (special figure 2 variable game in this example) having a high advantage is given priority over the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game in this example) having a low advantage. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and ROM 306 is based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308. The hit / fail judgment table stored in is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result, etc. The symbol to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display (stop symbol) is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of Special Figure 2 is determined using various tables.

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the high-advantageous special figure 2 variable game or the low-advantage special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started and won a prize. It may be a variation in the starting opening winning order that starts in order. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Then, it may be possible to raise the upper limit of the number of holds.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the display of 1 may be configured to display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when the fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command, etc. (Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and timers selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of a symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command that includes information indicating a number, etc., it includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc., and the winning effect start command and end. In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Including presence / absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit is used as command data. Including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figure stored in the RAM 308 are stored in the command data. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the effect control content can be determined.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 294 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power interruption at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the HALT state is reached.

FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process, and predetermines the stop symbol (special figure). The pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 297 (a) to 297) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the rank of the remaining special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area. Special figure 2 Perform by comparing with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 look-ahead number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing. The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the special figure 1 look-ahead number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit. Return to timer interrupt processing.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support (high probability state in the normal figure)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead processing is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 296, the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 2 and the pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of the special figures 1 and 2. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the look-ahead result.

FIG. 297 illustrates a state in which the look-ahead result information and the like are stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 297 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297 (a), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (a), "special figure I" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 2". "(Disappearance) is stored," special figure A "(15R probability variation jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 3 ", and" special figure I "as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area" hold 4 ". "(Off) is remembered.

FIG. 297 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 297 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 297 (b), "special figure f" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 297 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 297 (c) shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 297 (c), "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned stop symbol information, the hit / fail judgment result, the variable timer number (variable time), the timer group described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit and the pre-reading result. It can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as information.

Next, refer to FIG. 298 for the win / fail determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 295. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 298 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for hit / fail determination, and FIG. 298 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for hit / fail determination. When the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 is performed, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 298 (a) is referred to in the case of the special figure high probability state, and in the case of the special figure low probability state. , Refer to the low probability table for hit / fail determination shown in FIG. 298 (b). Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

Similarly, when the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 is performed, when the special figure is in the high probability state, the hit / fail judgment high probability table shown in FIG. 298 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is in the low probability state. In that case, the low-probability table for determining whether or not the result is shown in FIG. 298 (b) is referred to. Then, the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced hit / miss judgment table and the acquired random number value. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a miss is selected as a hit / fail determination result.

FIG. 298 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit determination table. When the hit / fail judgment result of the big hit is incorrect, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 298 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit judgment table and the acquired random number value. , Select the winning / failing judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 1, a small hit is selected as the winning / failing judgment result with a probability of 2000/65536, and a loss occurs with a probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, if the winning / failing determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special figure is the special figure 2, the small hit is not selected.

Next, the stop is performed based on the winning / failing determination result determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 295. The special figure determination table used for determining the symbol will be described with reference to FIG. 299. Here, FIG. 299 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 299 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299 (a) is referred to, and the special figure is based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value. Select the stop symbol of 1. In the present embodiment, when the hit / fail result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, any one of the special figures A to G is selected, and when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

Further, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 299 (b) is referred to, and based on the hit / fail result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value. The stop symbol of special figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected, and when the winning / failing result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed is set in the special symbol display device.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 300A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 300A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is converted into the effect data according to the operation of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 according to the detection result. Perform the process to change to.

In step S413 following step S411, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S415 following step S413, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 442,452 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 450. To do.

In step S417 following step S415, the movable body control process is performed. For example, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S419 following step S417, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 300B is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 300C is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S441 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S443 following step S441, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S419) of the first sub-control unit main process, and the random value value for other effects is updated. And so on.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 301A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S501 of FIG. 301 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization process of storage area in RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

In step S503 following step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. .. In step S505, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S507 following step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S509 following step S507, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to this command from the ROM (not shown) is performed to update the effect data. If is necessary, the effect data is updated.

In step S511 following step S509, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP516 in the effect data read in step S509, this instruction is output to VDP516 (details will be described later). After that, the process returns to step S503.

FIG. 301 (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM.

FIG. 301 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S541 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other effects such as updating the random value for effect are performed.

FIG. 301 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub-control unit main process. In step S551, a transfer instruction for image data (movie data and texture data described later) is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP516 is input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. If not (step S553: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S555, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S559 following step S557, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input based on the end of drawing the image, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S561, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

Next, an example of the configuration of the effect device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 302. Here, FIG. 302A is a diagram for explaining a first configuration example of the effector 206, and FIG. 302B is a diagram for explaining a second configuration example of the effector 206.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with the decorative members constituting the effect device 206 so that a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. .. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the decorative design display device 208, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. The first UI unit 280 is capable of displaying the variable icon h0 on the left side thereof in a manner of being placed on the pedestal, and when the variable icon h0 is displayed, it notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. ing. When the symbol is stopped, the variable icon h0 is not displayed. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. The navigation character YM does not have to be displayed all the time, and N specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, pre-reading notice, notice in the symbol change display, and hold of the symbol change display are accumulated). It may be displayed at the time of the effect (such as the effect sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 302 (a), since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but the display mode is changed according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice. Here, the variable icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol variable display. Further, the variation icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol variation display. The variable icon h0 does not have to be displayed.

Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". .. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part or all of the combination of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The second hold number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

Further, the background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the background display corresponding to the effect and the game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → .... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order.

Further, below the decorative pattern display device 208, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved or rotated in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 302A, the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest accessory 224E is lower than the decorative pattern display device 208, but it can be set to an appropriate position. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

In addition, on the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 208, the first large board behavior character 224Ga, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is given the letters "large", and the second is given the letters "board". The large board behavior character 224Gb, the third large board behavior character 224Gc with the characters "shake", and the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd with the characters "Mai" are arranged. Each of these 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd can be rotated around the center and can be moved toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

Further, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a Senryo box accessory 224H, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the effect content. .. The Senryo Box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo Box accessory 224H has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body through the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end portion of the light guide plate IL, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 302A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion that irradiates the light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol, for example, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The LED is lit and displayed when the special symbol is stopped, but blinks or is turned off while the special symbol is changing. The look-ahead notice may be given by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be lit and displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be turned off while the symbol is stopped.

In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the vertical direction along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. It should be noted that the effect operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured so as to be able to perform all of them, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured so that it can be used. Further, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. Or, the production operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can be moved and rotated to the right, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be moved in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured so that the effect operation can be performed. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may operate, and one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. 1 Only the decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. The front surface side of the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is covered with decorative members constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is invisible. The decorative member may be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Further, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 216 are shown. It is omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and the second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. The variation icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and notifies that the symbol variation display is in progress. Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a navigation character YM composed of a character of the lord is displayed. The second UI unit 281 is formed with a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. In FIG. 302 (b), since the four variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in the default display mode (for example, a round non-patterned and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game. The aspect may change. As a result, it is possible to display a notice and a look-ahead notice.

Further, in the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol smaller than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". ing. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but it may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part or all of the combination of symbols (1 or 2 decorative symbols match) may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second reserved number display may be divided into different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by another display device for effect (for example, 7-segment display, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.) May be done. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and displays the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. May be good.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. In this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (normal game state, probability change state, hidden probability change state, time saving state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or two or more of a normal gaming state, a probabilistic state, a hidden probabilistic state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A → .... If it collapses, it may be a notice of big hit confirmation (premier notice)), and it may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be in a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move or rotate in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. .. In the example shown in FIG. 302 (b), the family crest accessory 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIG. 302 (b) is the upper end of the family crest accessory 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged so that it can be moved in the vertical direction according to the content of the effect. The Senryo Box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

The above-mentioned light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative symbol display devices, family crest accessory 224E and Senryo box accessory 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each production movable body is made visible.

Further, in FIG. 302 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) or FIG. 302 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 303. Here, FIG. 303 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 303 (A1) to (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). That is, when the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H operate from the state shown in FIG. 303 (A1), the mode shown in FIG. 303 (A2) is obtained. Specifically, the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are until the characters "large", "board", "swing", and "mai" are first facing the front. Each rotates and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the Senryo box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where it overlaps at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are the Senryo box accessory. Compared to the case where it does not overlap with 224H, it is difficult to see. It should be noted that the Senryo box accessory 224H may be configured so as not to overlap the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Further, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the 1000-car box accessory 224H and may be configured to overlap the 1000-car box accessory 224H.

In FIG. 303 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL may be made more visible by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the decorative pattern display device 208 or various lamps. ..

FIGS. 303 (C1) to (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 303 (C1) to (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The POV display 224I, also referred to as a versa writer, is movable in the vertical direction and is configured to be overlappable on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is set below the decorative symbol display device 208, but it can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has an elevating arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the elevating arm. The elevating arm can be elevated by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and the posture extending in the horizontal direction is the initial posture of the LED array. The LED provided in the LED array may be a full-color LED or a single-color LED. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls the lighting of each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data which is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs change during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated in the rotation locus of each LED, and a pattern is represented. Further, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H, but the front-rear relationship of these effect movable bodies is appropriately adjusted. Can be set.

FIG. 303 (C1) shows a state in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

FIG. 303 (C2) shows that the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display screen is more difficult to see than in the case where the POV display 224I does not overlap.

FIG. 303 (C3) shows how the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. LED arrays are accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

In FIG. 303 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the characters "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a look-ahead notice display is performed. The image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. Further, while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I, the light emission brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed by the POV display 224I. May be good. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display while the image is displayed by the POV display 224I.

In FIG. 303 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. It is shown that it is. Here, while the light guide plate IL is emitting light, the brightness of the backlights of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the brightness of various lamps are reduced to guide the light. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more visible.

FIGS. 303 (E1) to (E2) show that the family crest accessory 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303 (E1), the family crest accessory 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps with the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM. It is considered to be more difficult to see than when at least a part of the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM do not overlap. After that, as shown in FIG. 303 (E2), the family crest accessory 224E is rotated in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest accessory 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may vibrate with or in place of rotation. Further, it may be performed only ascending and not rotating or vibrating. It can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a).

FIG. 303 (F1) shows how the Senryo box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the Senryo Box accessory 224H is moving from the initial position to a position where it overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (F1), it is considered that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it is not overlapped because the Senryo box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this production example, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the family crest accessory 224E is not operated so that the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E do not interfere with each other. In addition, there may be a case where both the Senryo box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are in operation. Further, when the Senryo box accessory 224H operates, the evacuation operation may be performed to move the family crest accessory 224E further downward.

In FIG. 303 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved by sliding so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is also scrolled. That is, with respect to the background image, the area that was not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N were slid and moved can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and move to the second position. 3 The decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

In FIG. 303 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged to display the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. It is shown that the display straddles the device 208N. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the enlarged first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the enlarged left symbol. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed only, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the variable icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

FIGS. 303 (I1) to (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 303 (I1) to (I2), the above-mentioned POV display 224I is provided in place of the family crest accessory 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 303 (I1), the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

In FIG. 303 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps with the front side at the substantially center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates and rotates constantly. It is shown that the character "heat" is displayed after reaching the speed and rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 303 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is displayed. It is shown that the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281. That is, the navigation character YM and the variable icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIGS. 303 (K1) to 303 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b). In the examples shown in FIGS. 303 (K1) to (K4), the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is also visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

FIG. 303 (K1) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

FIG. 303 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M slide and move to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls according to the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. It is displayed. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the images of the overlapping portions are adjusted to the slide movement. By scrolling the display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can perform a unified display. As shown in FIG. 303 (K2), the family crest accessory 224E moves downward from the initial position to the evacuation position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 303 (K2'), the displays on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid and moved without scrolling. Further, the family crest accessory 224E may rotate or vibrate at the initial position when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are operating. It may vibrate while rotating.

In FIGS. 303 (K3) to 303 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other, and counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is shown that they are rotating together in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 303 (K4) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are matched with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A display is performed that rotates around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may appear that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated, but the displayed image is not rotated.

FIG. 303 (L1) shows a modified example of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 303 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the family crest accessory 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 described above are displayed. That is, on the sub-display device 208S, the variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub-display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the lower right side of the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right side to the left side, but a part of it overlaps with the sub display device 208S and is sub. It is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the display device 208S. As shown in FIG. 303 (L1'), the display image (background image, Sabohani character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

FIG. 303 (M1) shows the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. That is, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the characters "large", "board", "shaking", and "mai" are in front of each other, and then the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S which has moved to a position on the front side in the substantially center of the above. At this time, the sub display device 208S performs the cut-in display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image, indicating that a predetermined advance notice effect or a look-ahead advance notice effect is being performed. ing.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 to 307. Here, FIG. 304 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 305 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 304. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 305 stepwise, and FIG. 307 is a diagram showing another example of the effect shown in FIG. 306 stepwise. ..

In FIG. 304, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a normal figure hold The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) will be applied, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) can also be applied. Further, in the following, the family crest accessory 224E, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light guide plate IL are not shown.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (coastal background image) as shown in FIG. 302A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, the second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" in accordance with the stop display of the first decorative symbol. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 304 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the second UI unit 281, a hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 and the display of the number of second holdings in addition to the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 304 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 304 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are shown by broken lines. Further, in FIG. 304 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are divided by broken lines, but the broken lines are not actually displayed.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 304 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. I am trying not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 304 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special symbol is the start of fluctuation in the special symbol display device → the start of blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the start of fluctuation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → decoration. It is performed in the order of the start of fluctuation of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

In FIG. 304 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off, but the hold icon and decoration are performed. The design has not changed yet. The symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may start at the same time, or the variation display of the fourth symbol after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 starts. May start, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may start after the variation display of the fourth symbol starts.

In FIG. 304 (3), the display of the number of reserved numbers is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. It should be noted that the update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or the change of the second decorative symbol after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the second hold number display may be updated after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 304 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 has started. In the move (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for this symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the pedestal of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. At this stage, the variable display of the decorative pattern has not started.

In FIG. 304 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the pedestal of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and then the change display of the first decorative symbol. Is started. When the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon that has been the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be viewed as the change icon h0. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. The end of the movement animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the movement animation is completed. 1 The movement animation may end after the variable display of the decorative symbol starts.

FIG. 304 (7) shows how the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (8), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a balloon in which the characters "opportunity" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is high.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (9), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" displayed together with the character of the lord is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon has changed from the character display of "opportunity" to the character display of "no", and it is informed that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "No", or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to "No", or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "No". It should be noted that there may be cases where the effect of promoting from the previously displayed notice (for example, "opportunity") to the later displayed notice (for example, "super heat") (for example, "no") is not performed. .. In addition, the navigation character notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a pre-reading notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the production of the pachinko machine 100). , Explanation of the stage of the production, etc., also called tutorial display), etc. may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that encourages the pressing of the effect button 136 within the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the effect button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation valid period. It is composed of. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. In addition, the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 304 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, in the navigation character notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of "No" to the character display of "Intense heat", and it is notified that the expectation for the big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of this balloon overlaps with a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed and the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat" may be the same, or after the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is displayed, in the balloon. The display may be updated to "super heat", or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to "super heat". As described above, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is given is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not given. Further, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be reduced and displayed (for example, the display of the same size as in FIG. 304 (9) is still displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be erased. In addition, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (larger or smaller) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A, which has a high expectation for a big hit, is this conversation. It may be different in size (larger or smaller) from the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for a big hit than the notice A.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (11). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 304 (11).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 304 (12) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses, and then at the timing shown in FIG. 304 (13), the game is played. It is shown that a person is pressing the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 304 (12), the navigation character notice has ended and the balloon display has been erased. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 304 (14), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, the characters "It's intense heat" are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. May occur. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as "It's intense heat" may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation validity period is long without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed even when it has passed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 304 (16), after "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, "decoration" is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 304 (17). 7 ”is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to indicate that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 304 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display is performed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be adopted. By watching this reach start animation, the player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 304 (20) to (21), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 fluctuates. While leaving the icon h0, the frame is out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed in the second UI unit 281 (in the production example shown in FIG. 304 (20), the hold icon h11) are also framed out. .. The start of the movement display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol may be the same timing as the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is started, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be started. After the frame-out display of each image in the above is started, the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 304 (22), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. In addition, there may be cases where the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 304 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is not performed, or only the light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior is performed. Even if the operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or even if both the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il are not performed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 304 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. Return to position. It should be noted that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions, respectively, or the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the first The start of movement of the four large board behavior accessory 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed at the same time. Here, in FIGS. 304 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224 Gd and the light guide plate IL are performed in a series It may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit than when no production is performed.

FIG. 305 (26) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (26) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (27) follows a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Animation is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (28) displays the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT, indicating that the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (29), the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (30), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (31), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 305 (32), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. The cut-in image CI3 of the lord overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or even when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the second button effect has been started since the development into super reach. ing. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (35), the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted.

In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 305 (36), it is shown that the gauge is decreasing after the operation valid period is started, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 305 (37), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. It should be noted that the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach. In this case, it develops into super reach. The rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the rate of decrease of the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect after the development of super reach. In addition, the operation validity period in the first button effect after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button effect after developing into super reach, or after developing into super reach. The operation valid period in the first button effect and the operation valid period in the second button effect after the development of super reach may be the same length.

When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 305 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and at the same time, the first large panel The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the effect image and the 1st decorative symbol are overlapped by the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd, respectively, and the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character. It is considered to be more difficult to see than in the case where it is not overlapped by 224 Gd. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. It should be noted that only a part of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd may operate, or all of them may operate. For example, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 1st The reliability may be different depending on the number of operating 4 large board behavior accessories 224Gd. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated. It may also be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the display of the effect image and the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are performed, the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th is performed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd is started, or the effect image. And the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may be started at the same time. Further, when the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the effect display that causes a loss may be performed without performing the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38), and further, the effect display that causes a loss may be displayed. After that, the revival effect may be displayed so that a big hit effect display is performed. When the effect shown in FIG. 305 (38) is started, the displayed variable icon h0 is hidden, but it may be continuously displayed.

After that, in FIG. 305 (39), the Senryo box accessory 224H operates and moves downward, and overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front side of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. It is shown that it is. Further, after that, FIG. 305 (40) shows how the light guide plate IL is emitting light. The display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the order in which the light guide plate IL starts emitting light are limited to those described above. It can be set as appropriate. Further, the display of the effect image, the operation of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, the operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may all be performed. The part may not be performed.

FIG. 305 (41) shows how the light guide plate IL has finished emitting light. After that, as shown in FIG. 305 (42), the Senryo box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 305 (43), the effect image fades out, and then, as shown in FIG. 305 (44), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd move toward the initial position, respectively. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed.

After that, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 305 (46). In FIG. 305 (46), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and in FIG. 305 (47), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 305 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 306 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of the decorative patterns of. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. .. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (50), the first special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 did not receive the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol determination has stopped, the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 306 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the decorations of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 306 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since it is a big hit game started as a big hit by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the "special bonus" and the game. It has been notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (52), a mini right-handed display instructing right-handed is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini right-handed display may not be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 306 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed, and then the first round is started as shown in FIG. 306 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display and displays "decoration 7" indicating a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs in the lower right corner of the display screen. It is done. In addition, a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and "1R", which is the current round, is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls acquired during the consecutive villas may be displayed.

After that, when the jackpot game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 306 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round "15R" is displayed.

FIG. 306 (56) shows that the jackpot game is completed and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displaying the jackpot end effect. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability change big hit, the game state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state (probability change state with electric support) after the big hit game ends. Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" is displayed to that effect, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state with electric support.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (57) displays a warning (warning display) for forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 292). In addition, this warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that became a big hit in the game state that is not in the electric support is completed, or the big hit regardless of the situation where the big hit is made. It may be displayed whenever the game is finished.

FIG. 306 (58) shows a state before the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probability variation state with electric support, and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is the background image for the probabilistic state with electric support, and the decorative design also has a display mode different from the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). .. Further, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed in the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold icons of special figure 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 is a quadrangular patternless and white display mode, and the display mode (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the player Can be identified at a glance. The default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be the same as the default display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2. In addition, in FIGS. 306 (58) to (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold that is not actually displayed is held. The icon is shown by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 306 (58) to 306 (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy explanation, but the broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probabilistic state with electric support, the hold icon of Special Figure 1 is not displayed, but it may be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive villas is displayed below the mini right-handed display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 306 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, a "bonus x 1" indicating that fact is displayed.

Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 306 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60) instructs the player to strike right. Right-handed notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters "Please right-handed" are displayed on the translucent band image. The right-handed notification overlaps with the decorative design, and the decorative design is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state in which the first jackpot game is completed and shifted, but it may be displayed even in the electric support state in which the jackpot game other than the first jackpot game is completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the jackpot game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Further, after shifting to the electric support state, the right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is hitting left. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has won a prize. In some cases, it may be determined that a left-handed hit has been made and a right-handed hit notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (60), the second hold number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 306 (61) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is hidden as shown in FIG. 306 (62). In addition, the mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

FIG. 306 (63) shows how the symbol variation display of Special FIG. 2 is held for four times. That is, in the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special drawing 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special drawing 2 are turned on. Is displayed. Further, also in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

FIG. 307 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 305 (48). In addition, in FIGS. 304 to 305, the case where "decoration 7" is in the reach state and "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol has been described, but here, "decoration 6" is in the reach state and is in the middle. A case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the design will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (49a), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is shaken and fluctuated by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be hidden, may be a background image different from that before the super reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before the super reach is performed. Further, at this time, the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the variable icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, although the navigation character YM is not displayed, the navigation character YM may be displayed.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (50a), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each decorated with "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6". In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot is either a substantial 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot.

After that, when the jackpot game starts and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 307 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot start effect. The display starts. This time, since the jackpot game was started as a jackpot by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6", the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a "bonus" and the player. It is informed that it is either a real 5R probability variation jackpot, a 5R normal jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 307 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 305 (37). FIG. 307 (38b) shows that the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the decorative symbol is lost. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 is also resumed. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and then the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in Fig. 306 (40b), the variable icon h0, the second hold number display, and the second decorative pattern are displayed. It is left and hidden.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 307 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 scroll in from below the display area, and the hold icon and the navigation character YM Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 307 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts swinging with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7". As for the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all still displayed in a variable manner.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 307 (43b), the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 300, and therefore has not determined that the symbol determination stop has occurred. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth decorative symbol 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command, as shown in FIG. 307 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorated with "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", respectively. In addition to displaying the stop by the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 displays in the mode that the symbols have stopped.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 307 (45b) displays the variable icon erasing animation. In the variation icon erasing animation display, the variation icon h0 gradually becomes smaller, and finally, as shown in FIG. 307 (46b), the variation icon h0 disappears in the animation display. The variable icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure is stopped.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice effect step by step.

In FIG. 308, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (2), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice effect is started. "10:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. In this production example, the countdown is started when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started, but after the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed (that is, the display shown in FIG. 308 (3)). You may want to start the countdown (after that).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 308 (3) to (7), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 308 (6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 308 (8), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 308 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (10), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 308 (11), after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, it is shown in FIG. In this way, a cut-in display consisting of the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed. In this embodiment, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed in this way to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a variation display mode of the decorative symbol in which the variation start and temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times in one variation display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit. In addition, there may be a case where the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward without stopping and displaying, and when the pseudo-ream symbol is framed out downward, the pseudo-ream is not started and the decorative symbol is lost as it is. The combination may be stopped and displayed, or the reach state may be reached and the reach effect may be started. As described above, in this production example, the timer is announced to notify that the pseudo-ream will be started after the countdown is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 308 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the variable display of the first decorative symbol. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (14), the display of "x2" is reduced and moved to the lower side of the second decorative symbol.

FIG. 308 (3a) shows another production example following FIG. 308 (2). In this production example, "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIGS. 308 (10a) to (11a), the first pseudo-ream is performed as described above. After that, as shown in FIG. 300 (14a), the second variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Note that FIGS. 308 (10a), FIG. (11a) and FIG. (14a) are effects corresponding to FIGS. 308 (10), (11) and (14), respectively.

Then, after "decoration 7" and "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, as shown in FIG. 308 (15a), 20 seconds have passed since the timer advance notice effect was started, and the timer When the timer display of the notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 308 (16a), in the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that the notice is noticed is displayed. Is displayed. At this time, the design on the right has changed from "decoration 6" to "decoration 7". The design on the right may remain as "decoration 6". Then, as shown in FIGS. 308 (16a) to (17a), the second pseudo-ream is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo-ream. As described above, the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 308 (3a) to 308 (17a) foretells that the second pseudo-ream will be started. In addition, foretelling the start of the second pseudo-ream means that the start of the first pseudo-ream is also foretold. That is, in this production example, the timer notice production is used. It can be said that the start of the first and second pseudo-ream is announced. In the timer notice in this production example, the start of the second pseudo-ream is announced, but other types of notice and the occurrence of the effect may be announced.

FIG. 308 (7b) shows another production example following FIG. 308 (6). It should be noted that FIGS. 308 (7b) to (11b) correspond to FIGS. 308 (7) to (11), respectively. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (7b), the display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (8b-1), the face image of the character of the lord with the balloon line "Ikuze" added instead of the character display of "attention" in the timer notice display TM1. YMF is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 308 (8b-2), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed to attract attention to the notice. It should be noted that the means for attracting attention to the notice after the countdown in the timer notice effect is completed is not limited to the display, but may be performed by voice or a lamp, or by combining two or more of the display, voice, and lamp. You may do so.

After that, as shown in FIG. 308 (9b), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts displaying that the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 308 (10b), the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously performed, and the face image YMF of the character of the lord is erased, as shown in FIG. 308 (11b). After the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continue" is performed as shown in FIG.

In this production example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the corresponding effect (pseudo-ream) is started, but the timer display becomes "00:00". However, there may be cases where the corresponding effect is not performed.

Further, while the timer display is being counted down on the timer notice display TM1, another notice may be given. In this case, this notice may be a notice related to the timer notice effect, or may be a notice unrelated to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 309 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 309 (a1) shows another production example following FIG. 308 (7). When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 309 (a1), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a2), the navigation character YM is displayed to face the variable icon h0 and point the sword. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (a4), a state in which a beam is emitted from the sword held by the navigator character YM toward the variable icon h0 is displayed, and then shown in FIG. 309 (a5). As described above, the notice display in which the character "heat" is added to the variable icon h0 is performed. The look-ahead notice display may be performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon instead of the variable icon h0. After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (a6), after the navigation character YM returns to the default display mode, a reach state by the "decoration 7" occurs as shown in FIG. 309 (a7). As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect in this effect example is an effect of notifying that the advance notice will be performed.

FIG. 309 (b1) shows a state after the timer advance notice effect has started. In the timer advance notice effect in this effect example, the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is started at "30:00", that is, a certain advance notice effect 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Suggests that is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 309 (b1), the display on the timer notice display TM1 is "29:69". In this way, a plurality of types of countdown times for the timer advance notice effect may be prepared. For example, the longer the countdown time, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the countdown time may be set. The shorter the value, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same regardless of the countdown time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b2), about 8 seconds have passed since the countdown started, and in the first decorative symbol, the reach effect by "decoration 7" has started. It is shown.

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 309 (b3), the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left and displayed in the first UI unit 280. Along with frame-out at the bottom of the screen, the hold icon displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out.

After that, FIG. 309 (b4) shows how it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4) displays a large image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows the main character and the enemy role. Animated display of the duel scene with the swordsman begins. During this period, the countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b5), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 309 (b6), the timer notice display TM1 gives a notice instead of the timer display. The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is continued even after the timer advance notice effect shifts to the reach state.

FIG. 309 (b4'-2) shows another production example following FIG. 309 (b4). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4'-2), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "02:37" after the animation display of the duel scene is started. There is. That is, the state when about 27 seconds have passed since the countdown by the timer advance notice effect was started is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (b4'-2), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and it is shown that the button effect is started. It should be noted that this button effect is different from the effect announced by the timer advance notice effect. After that, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 309 (b5'), the timer display is changed to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as shown in FIG. 309 (b6'). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7'), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a notice display in which the characters "heat" are added to the variable icon h0. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display (or effect) performed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect is being performed during the execution of the button effect.

In the above-mentioned production example, as an effect performed as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect, an example in which a change display of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed has been described. For example, as shown in FIG. 309 (b7 ″), the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT may change to give a notice.

FIG. 309 (b6 ″ ″) shows another production example following FIG. 309 (b5). When the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ""), the timer notice display TM1 "attention" to call attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character display is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (b6 ″ ″ -2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to perform a notice display, and the animation display of the duel scene is a big hit. It is shown that the cut-in display is switched to indicate that the degree is extremely high. In this cut-in display, the princess character is displayed large on the right side of the display screen, and the characters "suddenly hot" suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high are displayed. In addition, this cut-in display may be a notice display in which the big hit is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that two or more notices are displayed as a result of the countdown in the timer notice effect. The display mode of the variable icon h0 does not change, and only the cut-in display may be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (c1) to (c2) show that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 309 (c1), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00" during the execution of the animation display of the duel scene, and the timer display is changed to the timer display to call attention to the notice. It is shown that the "attention" character of is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 in this production example, in addition to the production button 136 as an operation means for production, a production lever 136V is provided.

After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (c2), a lever image 136V imitating the effect lever 136V and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, indicating that the lever effect is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (c3), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the lever effect starts as a result of counting down in the timer notice effect, but the button effect described above may be performed instead of the lever effect.

There may be a plurality of types of button effects depending on the degree of expectation for the jackpot (for example, the button image 136a in the default mode, and the button image 136a having a color different from the default mode (for example, red or gold)). , Button image 136a with character notation (for example, "super heat", "expected large", etc.) and characters added to the default mode, button image 136a with a size different from the default mode (for example, big button effect and mini button) (Direction), the number of button images 136a displayed is larger than the default mode (for example, when three button images 136a are displayed, the same number of operations as the number of button images 136a (for example, three times) is performed). The operation may be performed a number of times different from the number of the button images 136a (for example, once or twice, four times, etc.), and the response according to the operation of the effect button 136 As the display, a number corresponding to the number of button images 136a may be displayed, or a number different from the number of button images 136a may be displayed.)).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 309 (d1) to 309 (d4) show that the effect movable body operates as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice effect. As shown in FIG. 309 (d1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the reach is achieved by "decoration 7" in the first decorative symbol, and the reach effect is performed. In the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left and the frame is out downward, and the hold icon displayed in the second UI unit 281 is also framed out downward. In addition, a timer notice effect is also performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 309 (d1), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (d2), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 309 (d3), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, as shown in FIG. 309 (d4), the timer notice display TM1 is erased. As described above, in this production example, as a result of counting down in the timer advance notice production, it is shown that the first large board behavior character Ga to the fourth large board behavior character Gd as the production movable body operate. The object 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H may operate, and two or more of the first large board behavior accessory Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory Gd, the family crest accessory 224E, and the Senryo box accessory 224H operate. You may.

FIG. 310 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1) shows that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 310 (1), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended. In addition, between the start of the timer advance notice effect and the start of the timer addition effect, for example, a button effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a chance-up notice, a look-ahead notice, and the like may be given. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 310 (3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed. It is not necessary to display the count-up animation. Further, instead of displaying the count-up animation, as shown in FIG. 310 (4a), the effect images may be overlapped in a manner in which the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM is difficult to see. After displaying the effect image shown in FIG. 310 (4a), the count-up animation shown in FIG. 310 (4) may be displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (5), the timer display on the timer advance notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of adding the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 310 (6), when the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased and a predetermined time (for example, about 3 seconds after the timer addition effect is completed) elapses, the first pseudo continuous effect is produced. Is started, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (7), and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

In this production example, when the timer addition effect is performed and the time is added to the timer display, it is easier to make a big hit than when the time is not added, but the reliability of the big hit is increased. There may be no change, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 310 (1b) to (6b) show a state in which the timer addition effect is performed by the conversation notice instead of the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM described above. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1b), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 310 (1b), the timer advance notice effect described above has been started, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1b), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 310 (1b), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. The timing at which the timer notice effect is started and the timing at which the conversation notice is started may be the same, the conversation notice may be started after the timer notice effect is started, or the conversation notice may be started. The timer advance notice effect may be started after the start. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2b), the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed, and the character of the grandfather moves below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather with the character display "It is an additional 10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed. As a result, it is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM. The timer display countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuously performed. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather also partially overlaps the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather.

Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4b), the time is added by the display of the count-up animation described above.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM is displayed as shown in FIG. 310 (6b). It is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display. In this production example, the count-up animation display ends after the conversation notice ends. For example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (4b'-1) to (4b'-2). The conversation notice may be continued until the count-up animation display is completed. Further, the timing at which the conversation notice ends and the timing at which the count-up animation display ends may be the same.

The production example shown in FIGS. 310 (1c) to 310 (6c) shows another example of the timer addition effect by the conversation notice. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (1c) shows how the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1c), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in FIG. 310 (1c), the timer notice effect described above has been started, and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (1c), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69". Further, in FIG. 310 (1c), the conversation notice has started, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord, in which the character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord, is displayed. It should be noted that the conversation image CI1 of the lord is partially overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, and the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be overlapped with the conversation image CI1 of the lord.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. The conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the above-mentioned operation promotion notification image is displayed is displayed together with the character of. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. In addition, even during the execution of the conversation notice, the countdown by the timer notice effect is continuously performed.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2). FIG. 310 (2c-3) shows that about 1.5 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started, and the length of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT corresponds to the elapsed time. It has decreased so much. After that, when the operation valid period elapses without the operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT disappears, and the player is notified to that effect. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (3c), the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is changed to the character display of "10 seconds is added" indicating the time to be added from the operation promotion notification image, and the timer notice display TM is displayed. It is notified that a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display. If the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period, the time may not be added in the timer display. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the gauge on the remaining time display meter MT may be temporarily erased, and then the character display may be changed to "Add 10 seconds." The remaining time display meter MT may be changed to the character display of "Add 10 seconds" without displaying that the gauge disappears. Further, on condition that the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the characters "10 seconds are added" may be displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed. Further, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, 10 seconds may be added to the time indicated by the timer display at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated. That is, a display may be performed in which 10 seconds are added to the remaining time at the time when the effect button 136 is pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 310 (4c), the effect of adding time is performed by displaying the count-up animation described above. In this case, the count-up animation display may end after the conversation notice ends, the conversation notice may continue until the count-up animation display ends, or the conversation notice may end. May end at the same time as the count-up animation display ends.

After that, after the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased and the conversation notice ends, as shown in FIG. 310 (6c), the count-up animation display ends and the timer display on the timer notice display TM changes. It is updated and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 310 (6c), it is shown that the timer display counts down to "09:85" after adding 10 seconds to the time in the timer display.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2c-2) to (2c-4), the countdown in the timer advance notice production is continuously displayed even during the operation valid period. After the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), the countdown update display in the timer advance notice effect is not performed during the operation valid period as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3'). (Leave the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), time the timer internally, and at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4'), inside. The timing result (for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4'), the remaining 2.00 seconds) may be reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 to restart the countdown update display.

Further, for example, after the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (2c-2), as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-3 ″), the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is updated during the operation valid period. Without displaying (keeping the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 as "06: 00"), the time is measured internally, and the operation valid period has elapsed as shown in FIG. 310 (2c-4 ″). However, it does not reflect the internal timekeeping result, and as shown in FIG. 310 (3c ″), it is said that the display of the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is added to the operation promotion notification image by 10 seconds. At the timing changed to the character display, the internal timekeeping result (for example, 1.23 seconds remaining at the timing shown in FIG. 310 (3c ″)) is reflected in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown update display is displayed. May be restarted.

FIG. 311 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

311 (1d) to 311 (2d) show another production example of FIGS. 310 (1b) to (2b). In FIG. 311 (1d), the character display displayed in the conversation image CI1 of the lord is "attention to the timer notice". As a result, it may be possible to pay attention to the effect (notice) performed as a result of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 being "00:00". That is, it can be said that the advance notice is given by the display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord in FIG. 311 (1d).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (2d), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed and moved below the display position of the second decorative symbol. In 2b), the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather described above is displayed. In this way, after paying attention to the timer advance notice effect, it may be notified that the timer display changes.

FIG. 311 (1e) shows another production example of FIG. 311 (1d). In FIG. 311 (1e), instead of the conversation image CI1 of the lord, the timer display is set to "00" by performing the scroll display SC1 scrolling from the right end to the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the timer notice display TM1. You may want to pay attention to the effect that is performed as a result of ": 00". That is, in the scroll display SC1 shown in FIG. 311 (1e), the characters "attention to timer notice" are scrolled in a loop from the right end to the left end of the display screen.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 311 (1f) to 311 (6f) is another example of the timer addition effect, and shows how the countdown of the added time is performed by a display different from the timer notice display TM1. Shown. FIG. 311 (1f) is an production example following FIG. 310 (3), in which the additional timer display TM2 is displayed below the timer notice display TM1 on the display screen after the additional time is notified by the balloon of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the frame is in from the right end. In this addition timer display TM2, "10:00" indicating the time to be added is displayed. Here, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is performed while the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted. The additional timer display TM2 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the additional timer display TM2 may overlap with the balloon of the navigation character YM.

FIG. 311 (2f) shows how the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed. At this time, the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. Here, after the animation of the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the balloon of the navigation character YM may be deleted, or after the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted, the frame-in of the additional timer display TM2 may be deleted. The animation of the above may be completed, or the timing at which the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed may be the same as the timing at which the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. In FIG. 311 (2f), the additional timer display TM2 is arranged below the timer notice display TM1, but the timer advance display TM1 and the additional timer display TM2 may be arranged so as to overlap each other, for example. , As shown in FIG. 311 (2f ′), the additional timer display TM2 may be overlapped with the timer advance notice display TM1, or as shown in FIG. 311 (2f ″), the timer advance notice display TM1 It may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 311 (2f) to 311 (4f), the timer display countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until "00:00". After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (5f), the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is framed out to the right end of the display screen. .. Here, after the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started, the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 may be started, or the timing at which the timer display countdown on the additional timer display TM2 is started. , The timing at which the frame-out animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts may be the same. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 311 (5f), the timer notice display TM1 is framed out when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, but the timer notice display TM1 is not framed out. At that time, for example, as shown in FIG. 311 (5f'), the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed with the character "attention" to attract attention to the notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (6f), a pseudo-ream symbol may appear in the middle symbol and the pseudo-ream may be performed in response to the completion of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. This is suggested, and the additional timer display TM2 counts down the time until another effect is performed. Note that the pseudo-continuous symbol does not appear when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may appear when the countdown of the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 is completed. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the added time is not added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, but is displayed on the additional timer display TM2 separate from the timer notice display TM1 to perform the countdown. ing. The notification of the time to be added may be the notification of the total value of a plurality of timer notice displays. For example, the value obtained by adding 3 seconds to the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and the remaining timer display TM2 is displayed. A value with 7 seconds added may be displayed. The additional timer display TM2 here may be a timer notice newly displayed with the addition of the timer, or may be a timer notice originally displayed before the addition of the timer.

311 (3fa) to 311 (8fa) are still another example of the timer addition effect, in which the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display countdown on the addition timer display TM2 are performed at the same time. It shows the situation. FIG. 311 (3fa) is an production example following FIG. 311 (2f), and after the frame-in animation of the additional timer display TM2 is completed, the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 counts down together with the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. It is shown that it is starting. That is, in this production example, the time to be added is notified as 10 seconds, but the addition of 5 seconds is substantially performed. It should be noted that the timer display on the additional timer display TM2 may be the time obtained by adding the time indicated by the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 to the additional time of 10 seconds so that the additional 10 seconds is substantially performed. For example, in the case shown in FIG. 311 (3fa), "15:00" may be displayed on the additional timer display TM2.

After that, the countdown is continued in the manner shown in FIGS. 311 (3f) to 311 (6f), and in FIG. 311 (7fa), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), it is shown that the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted and the first pseudo-ream is performed. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "x2" indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started is displayed below the second decorative symbol. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 311 (8fa), the countdown of the timer display in the additional timer display TM2 is completed, and instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is displayed is displayed. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol on the middle symbol, and notifies that the second pseudo-ream is started. .. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 311 (9fa'), the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to give a notice. Further, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed after the pine pattern CC is stopped and displayed. In this way, as the effect performed as a result of the countdown by the timer advance notice effect, it may be suggested that the notice effect or the big hit is performed in addition to the pseudo-ren. Here, the replay symbol RP and the pine symbol CC overlap with the additional timer display TM2, but may be overlapped with the additional timer display TM2. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display is increased as one aspect of the change of the display mode of the timer display. The timer display may be split.

FIG. 312 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are displayed, and in the second hold number display. , "2" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (2), "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed overlapping the left symbol. The display of the notice icon MI1 of the clock is a notice display that may function as a look-ahead notice, and is a notice that time will be added in the timer notice effect. It should be noted that the timer advance notice effect may be announced. Here, the timing at which the left symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed may be the same, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be displayed after the left symbol has stopped. The left symbol may be stopped after the notice icon MI1 of the clock is displayed. The display timing of the stock notice icon is not limited to the case where the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed along with the decorative design, and various types such as temporary stop of the notice icon symbol, navigation character notice, conversation notice, etc. It may be performed at any timing such as a notice or hold in the symbol variation display due to the effect, or a look-ahead notice by various effects such as the navigation character YM.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (3), the first UI unit 280 shows that the table on which the navigation character YM stands rises and the notice icon display area 285 is formed. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, five areas, and the areas in which the notice icons are displayed are arranged side by side in the row direction. The number of areas configured in the notice icon display area 285 can be arbitrarily set.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (4), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is moved to the notice icon display area 285 and is shown to be stocked. In the first decorative symbol, it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Here, the timing at which the right symbol stops and the timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 starts moving may be the same, or the notice icon MI1 may start moving after the right symbol has stopped. , The right symbol may stop after the notice icon MI1 starts moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (5), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is reduced and displayed, stored in the leftmost area of the notice icon display area 285, and the state in which the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked is shown. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (5), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". It is shown that the confirmation is displayed with. The timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stored in the notice icon display area 285 and the timing when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed may be the same, and the notice icon MI1 of the clock is set in the notice icon display area 285. After being stored, the decorative symbol may be confirmed and displayed, or after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the notice icon MI1 of the clock may be stored in the notice icon display area 285.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 312 (6), it is shown that one hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is performed. Further, the timer notice effect has also started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 312 (6), the timer display displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is "09:69", and the countdown is performed. It should be noted that there may be an effect display (for example, a navigation character YM) that overlaps with the timer advance display only during execution of a certain effect (for example, a stock effect of a notice icon). On the contrary, there may be an effect display that overlaps the timer notice only during the execution of a certain effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (7), an effect is displayed around the clock advance notice icon MI1 stored in the advance notice icon display area 285, foretelling that the clock advance notice icon MI1 will be used. .. In addition, "07:31" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (8), the notice icon MI1 of the clock pops out from the notice icon display area 285 and is enlarged and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen. Although the effect is still displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted at the timing when the notice icon MI1 of the clock jumps out of the notice icon display area 285.

After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (9), the notice icon MI1 of the clock is erased, and the display of the count-up animation is started. The timing at which the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted and the timing at which the count-up animation display is started may be the same, or the count-up animation is displayed after the clock notice icon MI1 is deleted. It may be started, or the clock notice icon MI1 may be erased after the display of the count-up animation is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (10), the notice icon display area 285 is framed out downward.

FIG. 313 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313 (A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “09:69” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A2), it is shown that "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. Further, the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 has been completed, and the timer display is "00:00".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A3), a balloon in which the characters “addition” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. Even if the character "addition" is displayed, the time of the timer display may not be added, or other effects may be performed. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-1), after displaying the character "attention" to encourage attention to the notice instead of the timer display, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3a-2). The balloon of the navigation character YM may be displayed, and "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added may be displayed on the balloon to notify the time to be added. In this effect example, the effect to be displayed as "attention" is not a notice display but an additional time of 10 seconds. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), instead of the timer display, the character "still" indicating that the timer notice effect is continued is displayed, and then the display of the timer notice display TM1 is added. The display may be switched to "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added, and the time to be added may be notified. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-1), after displaying the characters "still" on the timer notice display TM1, a balloon of the navigation character YM is displayed, and "+10" indicating the time to be added to the balloon is displayed. You may want to display "seconds". Further, after the display shown in FIG. 313 (A3), the display as shown in FIG. 313 (A3b-2) may be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 313 (A4), a time of 10 seconds is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is updated to "10:00", and the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. .. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (A4), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol in response to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 being performed to "0:00". It is shown that it is. The timing at which the timer display is updated and the timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed may be the same, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is updated. The timer display may be updated after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313 (B1) to (B5) show an effect example in which the timer is shortened in the timer advance notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and a countdown is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B1), a balloon displaying the characters “subtraction” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and time is subtracted from the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. Is notified. That is, it is notified that the time for which the timer advance notice effect is performed is shortened by a predetermined time.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B2), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display shows “05:89”. In addition, the balloon display of the navigation character YM is changed to the character display of "subtraction" and is set to "-3 seconds" indicating the shortened time. That is, it may be recognized that the timer advance notice effect is shortened by 3 seconds, and the period until the countdown is completed is shorter than the initially displayed time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (B3), the time is shortened by displaying the shortened animation in which the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 fluctuates at high speed (timer shortening effect). It is not necessary to display the shortened animation. Further, the effect images may be overlapped in such a manner that the display state of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is difficult to see.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (B4), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "02:00", and it is shown that the time in the timer display is shortened (subtracted) by 3 seconds. ing. That is, it can be said that the display mode in the timer notice display TM1 is changed by the effect of shortening the timer. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer shortening effect is being performed.

After that, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5), the character "attention" is displayed instead of the timer display to call attention to the notice, and then the middle A notice is displayed by stopping and displaying the pine symbol CC as a chance symbol on the symbol. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 313 (B5'), the replay symbol RP as the pseudo-ream symbol may be stopped and displayed on the middle symbol to notify that the pseudo-ream is started. The timing at which the character "attention" on the timer notice display TM1 starts to be displayed may be the same as the timing at which the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed, or the character "attention" may be displayed. The pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) may be stopped and displayed after the display starts, or the character "attention" may be displayed after the pine symbol CC (or replay symbol RP) is stopped and displayed. May start displaying. Note that the appearance rate of the content of the effect performed when the countdown is completed may change depending on whether the timer display does not change or changes in the timer advance notice effect. For example, the timer may change during the execution of the timer advance notice effect. If there is no change in the display, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the pseudo-ream notification is likely to be performed. However, if the timer display changes during the execution of the timer notice effect, the above-mentioned pine symbol CC, etc. It may be easy to give a highly reliable notice of the big hit. Further, when the timer shortening effect is performed, the pseudo-ream may be notified earlier than when the timer shortening effect is not performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313 (C1) to (C2) show another effect example in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes in the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "06:99" and counting down. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (C1), a balloon in which the characters "timer notice level UP" is displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the reliability of the jackpot for the timer notice display TM1 is increased. It is suggested that there is a possibility of improvement.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (C2), the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 changes from, for example, white to red, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot of the timer notice display TM1 is improved. ing. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display, it is notified that a notice with extremely high reliability may be given as a notice to be executed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 313 (D1) to (D5) show an effect example in which the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted and restarted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. "1" indicating that is 1 is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a timer notice effect is performed, and "06:99" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D1), a balloon in which the characters “stop” are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted. The timing at which the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed and the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is interrupted may be the same, or the balloon with the character "stop" starts to be displayed. Later, the countdown of the timer display may be interrupted, or the balloon with the characters "stop" may be started to be displayed after the countdown of the timer display is interrupted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 313 (D2), the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and it is shown that the pseudo-ream is notified. At the timing shown in FIG. 313 (D2), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 remains at "06:99".

After that, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again, and shows how the second decorative symbol variable display is performed by the pseudo-ream. Has been done. In addition, below the second decorative symbol, "x2" indicating that the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D3), a balloon in which the characters "restart" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the timer display countdown is restarted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D4), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is restarted, and then, as shown in FIG. 313 (D5), the balloon of the navigation character YM is deleted. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is interrupted while a predetermined effect such as pseudo-ream is being performed, and the countdown can be restarted after the effect is completed. Has been done.

As an example of the change in the display mode of the timer notice display TM1, the number of timer notice display TM1 may change (increase or decrease) as compared with that before the change. For example, if one timer notice display TM1 is displayed before the change and it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes, the timer notice display TM1 may increase to 2 or more, and conversely, the timer. If it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 changes when three notice display TM1s are displayed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced to 2 or less. Here, when the number of timer notice display TM1 increases, the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed separately from the time notified by the timer notice display TM1 that was originally displayed. The displayed timer notice display TM1 may be increased as it is (for example, if there is one timer timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds, and the two timer notice display TM1 are increased, 10 There are two timer notice display TM1s that notify the seconds). Further, when the number of the timer notice display TM1 is reduced, the total value of the times notified by the timer notice display TM1 originally displayed may be displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced as it is. (For example, if there are two timer notice display TM1s that notify 10 seconds, and if the number is reduced to one, the timer notice display TM1 that notifies 10 seconds becomes one). Further, when there are a plurality of timer notice display TM1s that have changed due to an increase or decrease, the countdown of the timer notice display TM1 may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise. In the effect example shown in FIG. 314, in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the family crest accessory 224E. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (A1) to (A6) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (A1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. The time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (A2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and the upper right corner thereof overlaps with the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (A4), the sub-display device 208S descends and returns to the initial position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (A5), in the timer notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time in the timer display. It is shown. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (A6), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased in the sub display device 208S. In this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed, the operation of raising the sub display device 208S is performed, but the operation of raising the sub display device 208S may not be performed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (B1) to (B7) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “06:54” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, in the sub-display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B2), the display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icon is switched to the display of the characters "+10 seconds", and the timer is added to the timer display in the notice display TM1. The time to be done is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (B3), when the sub display device 208S moves upward and overlaps with the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the count-up animation display is started on the timer notice display TM1. The time is added to the production. It should be noted that at least a part of the timer advance notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is said that it is more difficult to see than the case where the timer notice display TM1 is not overlapped. Further, the timing at which the sub display device 208S is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be the same as the timing at which the count-up animation display starts, and the sub display device 208S may display the decorative symbol. The count-up animation display may start after being located on the front side of the substantially center of the device 208, or the count-up may be started before the sub-display device 208S is located on the front side of the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The animation display may start.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 314 (B4) to (B5), the sub-display device 208S performs a countdown display of the additional time. More specifically, the addition time displayed on the sub display device 208S is reduced by 1 second, while the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added by 1 second. .. In this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is interrupted while the countdown display of the additional time is being performed, but the countdown may be continued without being interrupted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (B5), when the additional time displayed on the sub display device 208S becomes "0 seconds", the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is reached. It will be updated and displayed. At this time, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the sub display device 208S, and it is difficult to specify the timer display time on the timer notice display TM1, but the timer display time is set to be identifiable. May be good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (B6), the sub-display device 208S switches from the display of the additional time to the display of "Restart" indicating that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is restarted. The sub-display device 208S starts descending toward the initial position.

FIG. 314 (B7) shows a state in which the sub-display device 208S is lowered and returned to the initial position. Further, in the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown of the timer display is restarted, and at the timing shown in FIG. 314 (B7), the timer display is "14:23". After that, the display of "Restart" displayed on the sub-display device 208S is switched to the original display (display of the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the notice icon) as shown in FIG. 314 (B1). Here, the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes and the timing at which the sub-display device 208S starts descending may be the same, or after the timer display countdown resumes, the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Alternatively, the timer display countdown may be restarted after the sub-display device 208S starts descending. Further, the timing at which the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S may be the same as the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is restarted, or after the display of "Restart" is started on the sub-display device 208S. Then, the countdown of the timer display may be restarted, or the display of "Restart" may be started on the sub-display device 208S after the countdown of the timer display is restarted. Further, the timing at which the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position and the timing at which the timer display countdown resumes may be the same, and after the sub-display device 208S returns to the initial position, the timer display countdown resumes. Alternatively, the sub-display device 208S may return to the initial position after the timer display countdown is resumed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 314 (C1) to (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using the sub-display device 208S. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, on the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “05:89” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 314 (C1), a balloon in which the characters "+10 seconds" are displayed is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S, and the timer is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. The time to be added is notified. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 314 (C1), the timer notice display TM1 has started to display a suction animation for sucking the balloon displayed on the sub display device 208S, and sucks from the timer notice display TM1. An effect image showing how it is doing is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C2), the sub display device 208S moves upward, and a part of the display area of the sub display device 208S overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. , The display mode of the character "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM extends toward the timer notice display TM1 and is displayed straddling the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Navi character YM has a surprised expression on the appearance.

FIG. 314 (C3) shows how the sucking animation is still displayed. Specifically, the display of "+10 seconds" sucked by the timer notice display TM1 by the sucking animation further moves toward the timer notice display TM1, and the display of this "+10 seconds" continues to be displayed on the sub display device 208S. Is displayed across the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, on the timer advance notice display TM1, the display of the above-mentioned count-up animation has started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (C4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of "+10 seconds" absorbed by the timer notice display TM1 completely moves from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208. , It is shown that the timer is heading toward the timer notice display TM1 while shrinking. When the sucking animation is displayed, the navigation character YM performs a surprising animation (animation accompanying the sucking animation) by seeing the sucking animation, but it is not necessary to perform the animation in particular. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 314 (C5), when the display of "+10 seconds" is completely sucked up by the timer notice display TM1, the sucking animation display is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 314 (C6), the timer In the notice display TM1, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display is updated to "15:00", and 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed. When a plurality of decorative symbol display devices are provided, the timer advance notice effect may be performed by only one decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 315 (A1) to (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect. In the production example shown in FIGS. 315 (A1) to 315 (A4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) will be used for explanation. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the family crest accessory 224E, No. A part of 1 large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryo box accessory 224H will be described without illustration.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (A2), the second large board behavioral accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it is notified that the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (A3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, the timer display is displayed by operating the 2nd large board behavioral accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd out of the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd. Although it is notified that the second is added, the addition time may be different depending on the number of operating accessories among the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd, for example. When all of the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are activated, 20 seconds may be added to the timer display. Further, in this production example, it is notified that the timer display is added with 10 seconds by operating the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd only once. The time to be added may be different depending on the number of times. For example, when the 2nd large board behavior accessory 224Gb and the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated 3 times, the timer display is added by 30 seconds. You may.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 315 (B1) to (B4) show an example of a timer addition production using the family crest accessory 224E. In the production example shown in FIGS. 315 (B1) to 315 (B4), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) will be used for explanation. However, in order to facilitate the explanation, the first large board behavior accessory The illustrations of the 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 315 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “06:99” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (B2), the family crest accessory 224E operates, rises to the front side slightly below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down at that position. Move in the direction. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the overlapping family crest accessory 224E. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer notice display TM1 is displayed. It is notified that 10 seconds will be added to the timer display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 starts the effect of displaying the count-up animation and adding time.

After that, the count-up animation display is completed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. In this production example, it is notified that the family crest accessory 224E operates only once to add 10 seconds to the timer display, but the addition time may differ depending on the number of operations. Often, for example, when the family crest accessory 224E is operated three times, 30 seconds may be added to the timer display.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 315 (C1) to 315 (C6) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 315 (C1) to 315 (C6), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visually recognizable. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 315 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 in the hold display area in the second UI unit 281 formed on the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed, and in the second hold number display arranged in the upper right corner of the display area, "1" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. Further, a first UI unit 280 is formed on the lower right side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed on the first UI unit 280.

Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, and a timer display countdown is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 315 (C1), "05:00" is displayed as the timer display. In this production example, when the timer display becomes "05:00", the countdown is interrupted and "05:00" is displayed. The display is maintained. In addition, the countdown may be continuously performed without interrupting the countdown.

Further, the character "additional 10 seconds" is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the time to be added to the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (C2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 315 (C3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions. At this time, the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps a part of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 315 (C4), the display of "15:00" indicating the time obtained by adding 10 seconds to the time indicated by the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed in the second position. It is displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (C5), the display of "15:00" is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the timer display is not displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. 2 The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing of starting the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be the same as the timing of starting the movement of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is started, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may start moving, or the second decoration After the symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving, the display of "15:00" on the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 315 (C6), after the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. To. The timer display countdown in a state where the display of "15:00" is displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N (for example, the state shown in FIG. 315 (C4)). May be restarted. A case where the timer display is displayed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit than a case where the timer display is displayed on one decorative symbol display device. The susceptibility to a big hit may be the same, or it may be configured so as not to be a big hit.

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing another example of the timer advance notice effect stepwise.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 316 (A1) to 316 (A4) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 316 (A1) to 316 (A4), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and the outer circumference of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visually recognizable. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 316 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer advance notice effect has been started, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this production example, two timer notice productions are performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice effect performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M is set as the first timer advance notice effect, and the timer advance notice effect performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N is used as the second timer advance notice effect. explain. At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (A1), "05:89" is displayed as the timer display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and "15:89" is displayed as the timer display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has been done.

After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example, even when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are moving, the timer display countdown is continuously performed, but may be interrupted. Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stop at the closest positions, as shown in FIG. 316 (A2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device The time indicated by the timer display displayed on each of the 208Ns is added up, and the display of "20:00" indicating the result is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. To. At this time, the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, but it does not have to be interrupted. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L also displays a timer of "20:00" at a position corresponding to the display of "20:00" displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, it is difficult to see because the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlap each other. After that, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start moving to the initial position along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

FIG. 316 (A3) shows how the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have returned to the initial positions. Here, the timer display of "20:00" displayed straddling the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. According to the movement of 208N, each scroll is displayed while maintaining the displayed coordinates. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M scrolls the display of "20:00" to the right in response to the movement to the initial position, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls the display to the right in response to the movement to the initial position. Scroll the display of "20:00" to the left. In the process of moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display of "20:00" is the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decoration. When "20:00" displayed across the symbol display device 208N and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is completely scrolled out, FIG. 316 (A3) shows. As shown, the display of "20:00" will be displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (A4), the timer display of "20:00" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is erased and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. After that, the countdown of the timer display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N is restarted. The countdown may be started while the display of "20:00" is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L (for example, the state shown in FIG. 316 (A3)). Here, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the decorative symbol display device on which the timer display is displayed (in this production example, the case where the timer display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is the first. It is more likely to be a big hit than the two decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed separately, but the big hits may be the same or less likely to be big hits).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 316 (B1) to 316 (B3) show an example of a timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 316 (B1) to FIG. 316 (B3), the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a) is applied, but in this production example, the family crest accessory 224E is replaced with FIG. 303. The POV display 224I described above is provided with reference to. In addition, in the production example shown in FIGS. 316 (B1) to (B3), in order to facilitate the explanation, about a part of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H. The description will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (B1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “05:71” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 316 (B1), the POV display 224I has reached a constant rotation speed and is rotating at a constant speed. Then, by controlling the lighting of the plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array, the character "+10" is displayed by the simple display, and the time to be added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is notified. As shown in FIG. 316 (B1), by rotating the LED array of the POV display 224I, all of the first decorative symbol and the variable icon h0, the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 It overlaps the rotating area and is difficult to see.

After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (B2), the character "+10" displayed on the POV display 224I moves in the lower right direction, and the display of "+10" previously displayed only on the POV display 224I is displayed. Will also be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, the character "+10" is displayed across the POV display 224I and the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the character "+10" may be a decorated display mode. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "+10" are displayed so as to match the display of the characters "+10" on the POV display 224I. As a result, the display of "+10" on the POV display 224I and the display of the characters "+10" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to provide a unified display. In this production example, the number font displayed on the POV display 224I is different from the number font displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be the same.

Then, after the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I decreases, the display stops in the initial posture as shown in FIG. 316 (B3). At this time, the display of the character "+10" displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208 is easier to see than the state in which the LED array is rotating. In this production example, after that, 10 seconds are added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 316 (C1) to 316 (C5) show another example of the timer addition effect using a plurality of display devices (decorative symbol display device 208 and POV display 224I). Here, the configuration in the production example shown in FIGS. 316 (C1) to 316 (C5) is the same as that shown in FIG. 316 (B1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 316 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, and “06:87” is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1 and the countdown is performed. Further, in FIG. 316 (C1), the POV display 224I is raised from the initial position to a position on the front side substantially in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the initial posture, and is not rotating. It should be noted that all of the variable icon h0, the first decorative symbol, and a part of the timer notice display TM1 are overlapped with the POV display 224I, which makes it more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, when the LED array of the POV display 224I starts rotating, reaches a constant rotation speed, and is set to a constant speed rotation, as shown in FIG. 316 (C2), the timer notice display TM1 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The timer display displayed in is displayed on the POV display 224I, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. The timer display displayed on the POV display 224I is "05:17", and the countdown is continuing. Further, at this time, it is shown that the time to be added to the timer display is divided into a plurality of times and displayed around the rotation area of the LED array. Specifically, one "+5 second" display, two "+2 second" display, and one "+1 second" display are displayed so as to surround the family crest accessory 224E, whereby the timer display is displayed for 10 seconds. It is notified that the addition will be performed.

After that, on the POV display 224I shown in FIG. 316 (C3), an effect of bursting the timer display is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 316 (C4), the timer display after being added is "15:00". Is displayed. In this production example, when "15:00" is displayed, the countdown is interrupted, but it may be continued.

After that, the rotation speed of the LED array of the POV display 224I is started to decrease, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is displayed again on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, as shown in FIG. 316 (C5), the vehicle stops in the initial posture. At this time, the timer display of the displayed timer notice display TM1 is "15:00", and then the countdown is restarted. The countdown may be restarted while the timer display is displayed as it is on the POV display 224I. Here, the case where the timer display is displayed by the POV display 224I may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is easy to be a big hit. May be the same, or it may be difficult to make a big hit.

In the timer advance notice effect described so far, when the timer is added, shortened, interrupted, etc. in the timer display, the countdown from the beginning to the end of the countdown after the change is internally performed. The total time may be counted down. Also, internally, the time until the change may be counted down before the change, and the time until the change may be counted down after the change (for example, if the change occurs 10 seconds after the start of the countdown). If you count down 10 seconds and display "Attention" 5 seconds after the change, count down another 5 seconds, etc.). Moreover, the display of the countdown and the time for internally counting down may match.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 317, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown. Further, in this effect example, the effect lever 136V described above is further provided.

FIG. 317 (1) shows another production example following FIG. 305 (25). FIG. 317 (1) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in large size, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (2), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. The chance-up meter CMT is, for example, a meter that shows the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current progress of the reach effect is outlined according to the position. Is informed. Here, the progress speed of the Sabohani character SBH is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the production, but it may be constant. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 317 (2), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a specific notice may occur. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is started to be displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but the display of the appearance of the development to the super reach shown in FIG. 317 (1) is started. The display may be started at the same timing, the display may be started when the reach state is reached, the display may be started before the reach state occurs, or the decorative symbol may be changed. The display may be started when the display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen and moves toward the right side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given by the appearance of the boy character BOY. It can be said that this Boy's character BOY functions as a chance-up character.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (5), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. I am informing you that. The timing at which the boy character BOY starts to be displayed and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may be displayed after the boy character BOY starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the character BOY of Boy may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The Sabohani character SBH stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the announcement by displaying the Boy character BOY is given, but it may not stop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 317 (6), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the content of the notice that has occurred may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the chance-up meter CMT may be enlarged and displayed when the Sabohani character SBH approaches the checkpoint. In this case, the entire chance-up meter CMT may be enlarged or displayed, or only the relevant checkpoint portion may be enlarged. This is also applicable in the following description.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (8), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (9). It is displayed and the button effect is started. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (10), the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted. Here, the Sabohani character SBH stops at the second checkpoint CP2 until the player operates a button or the operation valid period elapses, but it may not stop.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317 (11) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (12), the player can see the player. It is shown that the effect button 136 is pressed. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 317 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed, and a notice effect is performed to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. .. In this production example, the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is surrounded by a golden frame, and is a cut-in image of a special display mode showing a state of riding a large motorcycle while wearing sunglasses and smoking a cigar. It informs that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high. Instead of the cut-in image CI3 of the lord shown in FIG. 317 (13), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord (see FIG. 305 (32)) having a lower reliability than the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed. You may. The cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 317 (13) may be displayed on the condition that the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period, or the effect button 136 may be displayed. It may be displayed whenever it is operated within the period. Further, the cut-in image CI1 of this lord shown in FIG. 317 (13) may be displayed even when the operation valid period has elapsed without the effect button 136 being operated, or the effect button. It may be displayed without fail when the operation valid period elapses without operating 136, or may not be displayed when the operation valid period elapses without operating the effect button 136.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (14), a balloon with the characters “Chance up gold cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and the cut-in is surrounded by a golden frame. Notifies that a notice has been given by displaying an image. The timing at which the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed and the timing at which the balloon of the character SBH of the lord starts to be displayed may be the same, or the character of the sabohani after the cut-in image CI3 of the lord starts to be displayed. The balloon of SBH may be displayed, or the cut-in image CI3 of the lord may be displayed after the display of the balloon of the character SBH of Sabohani is started. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the second checkpoint CP2 while the character image CI3 of the lord is displayed, but it may not stop. Further, in this effect example, the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2 and the timing at which the button effect is started may be the same, and the Sabohani character SBH becomes the second checkpoint CP2. The button effect may be started after the button effect is reached, or the Sabohani character SBH may reach the second checkpoint CP2 after the button effect is started. In addition, even if the effect button 136 is not operated in the case where the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is not displayed when the operation valid period elapses without the effect button 136 being operated, the effect button is also displayed. It is possible to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred in the same manner as when 136 is operated, or it is not necessary to notify that a chance-up notice has occurred, and a chance-up notice is given. Only a part of what has occurred may be notified (for example, only the character "UP" is displayed without displaying the balloon).

After that, as shown in FIG. 317 (15), the second checkpoint CP2 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (16), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible.

After that, when the character SBH of the balloon reaches the third checkpoint CP3 at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (18) displays the lever image 136V and the balloon image. A balloon with the characters "Chance Up Lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH, indicating that the notice by lever production has started. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (19), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The operation valid period of the effect lever 136V may be started while the balloon with the characters "chance up lever" is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT may overlap a part (plastic card) of the chance up meter CMT, but the whole may overlap, and the chance up meter CMT is displayed while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed. It may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT while the remaining time display meter MT is displayed, and conversely, the chance may be displayed so as not to overlap a part or all of the chance up meter CMT. The up meter CMT may overlap a part or all m part of the remaining time display meter MT, and a part or all of the remaining time display meter MT may be overlapped during the display of the chance up meter CMT. May be good.

After that, when the operation valid period of the effect lever 136V starts at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (20), the operation of the effect lever 136V by the player can be accepted. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving. The character SBH of Sabohani may be stopped at the third checkpoint CP3 until the lever is operated by the player or the operation valid period has elapsed.

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 317 (21) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect lever 136V at the timing shown in FIG. 317 (22) within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 317 (23), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth The large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H are activated, the light guide plate IL is emitted, and the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is notified that it will be a big hit. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, but may be displayed. It should be noted that the effect performed when the effect lever 126V shown in FIG. 317 (23) is operated (1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd and Senryo box accessory 224H are activated, and the light emitting of the light guide plate IL The effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208) and the effect performed when the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 305 (40) is operated are the same, but may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 317 (24), the light emission of the light guide plate IL is terminated, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd and the Senryo box accessory 224H return to their initial positions, respectively, and the decorative design The effect image fades out on the display device 208. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted resumes while fading in. The chance up meter CMT also fades in with the duel scene animation display fade-in, but the chance up meter CMT may be redisplayed after the duel scene animation display fade-in is completed. .. The operations of FIGS. 317 (23) to (24) are performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 305 (38) to (44) as described above.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (25), it is shown that the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed and restarted. Specifically, in the animation display of the duel scene, the swordsman who plays the enemy role shows an expression of faint in agony, and it seems that he is about to lose. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, and the placard shows the letter "V" indicating that it is a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (26), the main character, the lord, defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 7" is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 317 (27), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 316 (28), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Shaking fluctuation starts with the combination of decorative patterns. Although the chance up meter CMT is hidden, it may be displayed even after the reach effect is completed. Further, only a part of the chance up meter CMT (for example, Sabohani character SBH and placard) may be displayed.

In the effect using the chance-up meter CMT described above, the chance-up meter CMT may or may not be displayed. In this case, the case where the chance up meter CMT is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where it is not displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may not be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT is displayed or not.

Further, there may be a notice of chance up that appears only when the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

In addition, there may be a notice of chance up that appears regardless of whether or not the chance up meter CMT is displayed.

Further, the position of the checkpoint may be moved or the checkpoint may be deleted during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT.

In addition, during the execution of the effect on the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH indicating the current position returns to the position before the current position (the position indicating the past) or the position ahead (indicating the future). You may move to position).

Further, the effect itself in the chance-up meter CMT may be a mini-game. For example, when the effect is performed at the position indicated by the checkpoint, the effect may be performed to increase the chance. Further, for example, an enemy character may be placed at the checkpoint, and an effect may be provided in which the chance is increased when the enemy character fights against the ally character and wins.

Further, as an effect of increasing the chance during the execution of the big hit game (for example, rank-up bonus, probabilistic promotion, promotion to a big hit game with more balls, etc.), an effect using the chance up meter CMT may be performed.

Further, the chance up meter CMT itself may be hidden by the power interruption and recovery. Further, the chance-up meter CMT itself may return to the display, but the history of the checkpoint timing and the occurrence of the chance-up effect before the power failure may be hidden.

Further, the effect displayed after the countdown of the count display in the timer advance notice effect becomes 0 may or may not be notified by the chance-up meter CMT.

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 318 (3a) is another production example following FIG. 317 (2), and the same production as in FIG. 317 (3) is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (4a), the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the first checkpoint CP1, but no notice is given. That is, it is shown that even if the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the chance-up notice is not given. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (5a), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 318 (5a) to (7a), the Sabohani character SBH is the first checkpoint. It passes through CP1 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the first checkpoint CP1 are not displayed. As a result, at the first checkpoint CP1, it may be possible to recognize that the occurrence of the notice has ended unexploded. If the chance-up notice is not given at the first checkpoint CP1, for example, as shown in FIG. 318 (7a'), the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be deleted. Also, as shown in FIG. 318 (7a ″), instead of the character “UP” displayed at the first checkpoint CP1, an “x” indicating that the chance-up notice was not given was displayed. May be done. In addition, even if the chance-up notice is not actually given, it is assumed that the chance-up notice has been given after the Sabohani character SBH has passed the checkpoint, and the marking or "UP" at the checkpoint is assumed. The character may be displayed. For example, after marking at the checkpoint or hiding the character "UP", the marking or the character "UP" may be displayed. The Sabohani character SBH may return to the checkpoint to give a notice of chance up and display markings and the characters "UP". In addition, for example, when the reach effect is rewound to the beginning or halfway, and then the Sabohani character SBH passes the checkpoint, a chance-up effect is performed, and marking or the characters "UP" are performed. May be displayed.

FIG. 318 (17b) is another production example following FIG. 317 (16), and the same production as in FIG. 317 (17) is performed. In addition, at the final point GP in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the placard is a question mark display, and when the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the final point GP, some event may occur. Is suggested.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (18b), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT were displayed instead of the lever image 136V, and the lever effect as a notice of chance up was not started. It is shown. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 318 (19b), the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is not displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 318 (17b) to (20b), the Sabohani character SBH is the third checkpoint. It passes through CP3 as it is, and the marking and the character "UP" at the third checkpoint CP3 are not displayed. Note that FIG. 318 (19b) shows that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started and the player can accept the operation of the effect button 136.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 318 (20b) shows that the operation valid period is decreasing. On the other hand, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH is located in front of the final point GP.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 318 (21b) within the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (22b) shows the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy role. Is displayed with a line saying "Did you remove it ..." and the appearance that the victory or defeat is not decided. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the character "development" is displayed on the placard at the final point GP, and it is notified that the reach effect will be developed.

After that, after the cut-in image CI4 is displayed by the character of the lord shown in FIG. 318 (23b), the effect that the panda character appears as a helper in the swordsman reach as shown in FIG. 318 (24b). Is started. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH rides on a flying carpet and heads toward the starting point SP.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 318 (25b) to (29b), on the way to the starting point SP, the Sabohani character SBH is displayed to change the chance up meter CMT while overlapping with the Sabohani character SBH. Do. Therefore, due to the movement of the Sabohani character SBH, for example, as shown in FIGS. 318 (26b) to (27b), a part of the changed chance-up meter CMT appears and the fifth checkpoint CP5 appears. , As shown in FIGS. 318 (28b) to (29b), the fourth checkpoint CP4 appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (29b), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH is located at the starting point SP again. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display state before the change of the 4th checkpoint CP4 and the 5th checkpoint CP5 (the state where the red marking is not attached and the character "UP" is not displayed). It has become. Then, in the chance up meter CMT, the movement of the Sabohani character SBH is started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b) shows how the SP swordsman reach has evolved. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 318 (30b), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (30b), the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters cheers at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the fourth checkpoint CP4. A notice is displayed to show how the character is, and it is informed that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. It can be said that this Copanda cheering party KPD is functioning as a character to increase chances. The Copanda cheering party KPD may or may not appear in the SP swordsman reach.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (31b), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up Copanda Cheering Party" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH, and a notice is given by displaying the chance up character. I am informing you that I have been damaged. The timing at which the Copanda cheering party KPD starts to display and the timing at which the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH starts to be displayed may be the same, or the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH may start displaying after the Copanda cheering party KPD starts displaying. It may be displayed, or the Copanda cheering party KPD may be displayed after the balloon of the Sabohani character SBH is displayed. The character SBH of Sabohani stops at the first checkpoint CP1 while the notice is given by the display of the Copanda cheering party KPD, but it may not stop.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (32b), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the fifth checkpoint CP5. Then, the display of "collaboration deadly" indicating that the chance-up effect is performed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 318 (33b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lever image 136V together with the display of "blow". Will be done. Further, on the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up lever" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and it is notified that the notice by the lever effect has started. Here, the lever effect, which is a chance-up effect, may not be performed, and the button effect, which is an effect of operating the effect button 136, may be performed. In addition, the lever effect may be always performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (34b), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the fifth checkpoint CP5 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. After that, for example, when the effect lever 136V is operated, the effect is performed in the manner described above as shown in FIGS. 317 (24) to (28), and it is notified that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 318 (23c) is another production example following FIG. 317 (22), and in the lever production shown in FIGS. 317 (18) to (22), the effect lever 136V was operated by the player. It is shown that the production failed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. In addition, in the chance up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, but the placard is shown with the letter "x" indicating that it will be lost, and the Sabohani character SBH looks disappointed. ing.

FIG. 318 (5d) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 317 (5). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 318 (5d), a large number of Boy character BOYs (boy groups) appear from the left side of the display screen and move toward the right side. .. That is, it is shown that a notice is being given due to the appearance of the Boy group. When this Boy character appears in a group, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the Boy character BOY appears alone. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT, a balloon with the characters "chance-up BOY group" is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that a notice has been given by displaying the chance-up character. In this way, even if the chance-up points are the same, different chance-up effects may be performed, or the same effect may be performed at the same chance-up points.

FIG. 319 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

FIG. 319 (7e) is another production example following FIG. 317 (6), and the same production as in FIG. 317 (7) is performed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 319 (8e) to (9e), in the chance-up meter CMT, the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaches just before the third checkpoint CP3, and the third checkpoint CP3 is reached. Wait at that location until the chance-up notice corresponding to checkpoint CP3 is given. It should be noted that while the Sabohani character SBH jumps over the second checkpoint CP2 and reaches the third checkpoint CP3, the effect corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 (for example, FIGS. 317 (9) to 9). The button effect and the like described above as shown in FIG. 15 may be performed, or the effect itself may not be performed. Alternatively, although the effect is not performed, the second checkpoint CP2 may be marked in red and the character "UP" may be displayed as if it was performed.

FIG. 319 (2f) is another production example following FIG. 317 (1). In the production example shown in FIG. 319 (2f), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that of the production example shown in FIG. 317. Specifically, the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT is configured in the shape of a green rod, and instead of the Sabohani character SBH, the current progress of the reach effect is roughly notified by the position of the marker MRK. At this time, the color of the advanced portion of the marker MRK in the gauge portion changes from green to white. Further, the progress speed of the marker MRK is not constant and may vary depending on the progress of the effect, but it may be constant. In addition, the display mode of the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 is represented by a question mark so as to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Also, the start and end points are indicated by the start and end of the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT.

In FIG. 319 (3f) following FIG. 319 (2f), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (4f), the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side at the timing when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1. It is shown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 319 (5f), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" was displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and a notice was given by displaying the character of the chance up. Is being notified. As shown in FIGS. 319 (5f) to (6f), the marker MRK stands by at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 319 (7f-1) to (7f-2), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move. At this time, instead of displaying the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed superimposed on the gauge portion. The Boy character BOY is framed out from the right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (7f-2).

FIG. 319 (4g') shows an example of an effect in which the boy character BOY does not appear even if the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 after the effect shown in FIG. 319 (3f) is performed. Has been done. Specifically, when the Boy character BOY does not appear at the timing shown in FIG. 319 (4f), as shown in FIG. 319 (4g'), the chance-up meter CMT at the first checkpoint CP1. Instead of displaying the question mark, an "x" indicating that the notice did not appear is displayed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4 g ″), the display of the question mark at the first checkpoint CP1 may be erased so that no display is performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 319 (4 g ″ ″), the display mode may not be changed while the question mark is displayed at the first checkpoint CP1.

FIG. 319 (2h) is yet another production example following FIG. 317 (1). In the production example shown in FIG. 319 (2h), the display mode is the same as that of the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 319 (2f), but the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are hidden. It differs in that. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the start timing of the chance-up notice, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to when the chance-up notice will start.

At the timing shown in FIG. 319 (5h), a balloon with the characters "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that a notice has been given by displaying the character of the chance up. At this time, a part of the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice has appeared.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 319 (6h) to (7h), as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance up meter CMT changes, the hidden characters "UP" appear. Appear.

FIG. 320 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 320 (A1) to 320 (A11) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A2), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed to show that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

After that, FIG. 320 (A3) shows how the chasing effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, an effect display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant is started. Further, below the second decorative symbol, the chance-up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed. In the chance up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (A3), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a pseudo-ream may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. That is, when the markers MRK reach the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 on the way, a pseudo-ream may occur. In addition, it is suggested that by reaching the final point, the unscrupulous merchants will be captured and it will be easier to shift to a highly reliable reach production. In this production example, the more pseudo-reams occur, the more likely it is to become a big hit. When the pseudo-ream occurs four times (that is, when the pseudo-ream occurs when the final point is reached), the big hit is confirmed. The big hit may be confirmed when the number of pseudo-reams is other than four. For example, when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 and 4, the big hit may be confirmed. The number of pseudo-reams that confirms the jackpot is less likely to occur than the number of pseudo-reams.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A4), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A5), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 320 (A6), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display that the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode. Even if the display of the main character chasing the unscrupulous merchant and the timing of displaying the characters "continue" and the timing of switching the display of the first checkpoint CP1 from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue" are the same. Alternatively, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 may be switched from the question mark to the display of the character "continue" after the character "continue" is displayed together with the display that the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant. After the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continue", the characters "continue" may be displayed together with the display in which the main character's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A7), it is shown that the distance between the hero's lord and the unscrupulous merchant is shortened.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A8), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the second pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A9), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. In addition, the angle showing how the hero's lord is chasing the villainous merchant has been changed, and the expression of the villainous merchant who has been able to afford it has become impatient.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (A10), the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the third pseudo-ream will be performed. It is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the third checkpoint CP3 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (A11), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "secured" and the state in which the main character, the lord, has captured the unscrupulous merchant. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT indicates that the marker MRK has reached the final point, and thus the pseudo-ream has been performed three times in total in the symbol variation display this time. Further, at this time, in the first decorative symbol, the reach state is reached with "decoration 7", and the reach effect is started.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 320 (B1) to 320 (B14), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed during the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol, and the appearance of notifying the timing when the notice of chance-up occurs is shown. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance-up meter CMT of the above-described embodiment shown in FIG. 319 (2f) is displayed below the second decorative symbol. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B2), the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 and second checkpoint CP2 indicate that a notice of chance up may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B3), it is shown that the marker MRK has started to move from the starting point. In addition, a balloon displaying the characters "opportunity" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, and the navigator character YM gives a notice of the navigator character. In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the character "opportunity" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but is a chance that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of up.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B4), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1. Then, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are changed from "opportunity" to "no". In response to this, a balloon with the characters "Chance up or not" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, notifying that the navigation character YM has given notice of the chance up. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the conversation notice has also started. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" displayed together with the character of the lord is displayed. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The conversation image CI1 of this lord is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B5), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. It is shown that it is appearing. As a result, the history of the occurrence of the notice of chance up is shown. In addition, the characters displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM have been changed from "No" to "Intense heat". In this production example, the notice by the balloon of the characters "super heat" of the navigation character YM is a notice that is not directly related to the chance up meter CMT, but the chance up that is directly related to the chance up meter CMT. It may be a notice of. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the second decorative pattern. The conversation image CI1 of the lord is also overlapped with the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. Then, as a continuation of the conversation notice, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image shown in FIG. 304 (10) is displayed is displayed together with the grandfather character. The conversation image CI2 of this grandfather is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a chance-up notice that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B6), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. The first decorative pattern is overlapped by the grandfather's conversation image CI2. Further, as shown in FIG. 320 (B6), at least a part of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. Further, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is partially overlapped by the balloon of the navigation character YM and the chance up meter CMT, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, the marker MRK that has reached the second checkpoint CP2 is in a standby state.

After that, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B7).

The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 320 (B8) is shown in a display mode when the operation valid period starts and a predetermined time elapses. At the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B8), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon of the navigation character YM has been deleted. After that, when the player presses the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (B9), as shown in FIG. 320 (B10), in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, instead of the operation promotion notification image, "super heat" is displayed. The text "It's right" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the outer frame of the old man's conversation image CI2 is a display mode emphasized by a thick gold line, and it is more likely to be a big hit than the case of the normal outer frame display mode. Is being notified. In addition, in the chance-up meter CMT, in response to the change in the display mode of the outer frame of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather to gold, a balloon with the characters "chance-up gold frame" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK. , Notifies that the notice of chance up in the conversation notice has been made. The marker MRK is waiting at the first checkpoint CP1 while the balloon is displayed, but the marker MRK may proceed without waiting. If the effect button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the old man's conversation image CI2 may or may not be displayed. When the old man's conversation image CI2 is not displayed, it is not necessary to notify that the chance up notice has occurred in the chance up meter CMT, or it may be notified, or only a part thereof may be notified. (For example, displaying only the characters "UP").

The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 320 (B11) shows how the position of the balloon has changed. At this time, the balloon overlaps with the grandfather's conversation image CI2, and the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The position of the balloon may not change from the position shown in FIG. 320 (B10), or the display position of the balloon may be the position shown in FIG. 320 (B11) from the beginning.

After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B12), in the chance-up meter CMT, as the marker MRK progresses and the display color in the gauge portion of the chance-up meter CMT changes, the hidden character "UP" appears. It is shown that it is appearing. As a result, the history of the occurrence of the notice of chance up is shown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of the balloon displayed on the chance up meter CMT is erased, and the conversation notice is also completed. The display of the balloon may be deleted at the timing when the conversation notice ends, or may be deleted after the conversation notice ends. Further, the conversation notice may end after the display of the balloon is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 320 (B13), it is shown that the first decorative symbol is in the reach state in the “decoration 7”. At this time, the marker MRK of the chance-up meter CMT has reached the final point, and it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT is completed. After that, as shown in FIG. 320 (B14), the reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance up meter CMT is erased. The timing at which the reach effect is started and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT is erased may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may be erased after the reach effect is started. The reach effect may be started after the upmeter CMT is erased.

In addition, although the production by the chance up meter CMT in this production example is terminated when it reaches the reach state, the production may continue even when it reaches the reach state, and it continues even when it shifts to the super reach state. You may do so. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT is started, it may be continuously performed until the symbol variation display is completed. At this time, for example, when the super reach starts, an effect by the chance up meter CMT, which is different from the effect by the chance up meter CMT that is continuously being executed, may be started. Further, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not always start during the normal symbol variation display. Further, in the normal symbol variation display, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may or may not start, but in the reach effect, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may always start. Further, when the effect by the chance up meter CMT becomes possible, the effect by the chance up meter CMT may be started when the effect button 136 is operated. In this case, for example, a display to that effect may be displayed so that the player can recognize it.

FIG. 321 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 321, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to 321 (A5), the production by the chance up meter CMT is started, but it is shown that the production is erased in the middle.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance-up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance-up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (A1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 were reached respectively, the display of the 1st checkpoint CP1 and the 2nd checkpoint CP2 was erased because the notice of chance up corresponding to these was not generated. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH starts moving from the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2) displays a cut-in indicating that the character of the grandfather holding the energy drink is speaking “fight”. The display of this cut-in is, for example, an effect of promoting the super reach being executed, and when this cut-in is displayed, it is more likely to be a big hit than when it is not displayed. Further, the display of this cut-in may be a premier notice, and when it is displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. Also, when this cut-in is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT is completed because the notice that the chance-up related to the chance-up meter CMT is more likely to be a big hit is given. There is. The display of this cut-in is a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the production by the chance up meter CMT is completed before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that it is shown that the production by the chance-up meter CMT ends before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT may always end in the middle, or the chance-up meter CMT may or may not end in the middle. At this time, for example, the content of the effect to be performed after that may be different depending on whether the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle or does not end, or the same content may be produced. .. Further, the case where the chance-up meter CMT ends in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance-up meter CMT does not end in the middle. In addition, the reliability of the jackpot when the chance up meter CMT ends in the middle is the same as when the chance up notice occurs at all the checkpoints and the chance up meter CMT does not end in the middle. It may be. Alternatively, the case where the chance-up meter CMT does not end in the middle may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the chance-up meter CMT ends in the middle.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed together with the character display of "blow" to show that the button effect is started. This button effect is also a notice not related to the chance up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance up related to the chance up meter CMT.

After that, when the operation valid period is started and the effect button 136 is operated by the player or the operation valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 321 (A4), "decoration 7" is displayed in the middle symbol, and "decoration 7" is displayed. It is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" will be a big hit. In the case of loss, as shown in FIG. 321 (A4'), "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle pattern, and it is notified that the combination of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is lost. Will be done.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A5), the animation display of the duel scene fades in, and it is shown that the hero's lord has defeated the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and it is notified that it will be a big hit. ..

FIG. 321 (A2a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 321 (A1). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), a cut-in display showing how the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach" is performed. The display of this cut-in is, for example, a notice for improving the reliability of the jackpot by assuming that the reach effect performed in the symbol variation display is produced with other contents. When this cut-in display is made, the chance up meter CMT is erased. The display of this cut-in is also a notice that is not directly related to the chance-up meter CMT, but may be a notice of chance-up that is directly related to the chance-up meter CMT. As described above, also in this production example, it is shown that the chance up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. It can also be said that the chance-up meter CMT is erased before the Sabohani character SBH reaches the checkpoint. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2a), the variable icon h0 is also erased, but it may not be erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a), the state after the reach effect is rewritten is shown. Specifically, in FIG. 321 (A3a), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again. In this chance-up meter CMT, the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 appear, and they are red. It is marked with and the characters "UP" are displayed. That is, in reality, the notice of chance up corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1 and the notice of chance up corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 were not given, but both are expressed as if they were done and a big hit. It is shown that the reliability of is improving.

FIG. 321 (A3a'-1) shows another production example following FIG. 321 (A2a). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-1), it is shown that the SP swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach described above with reference to FIG. 318 (30b) instead of the swordsman reach. SP Swordsman Reach is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than Swordsman Reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-1), the chance of showing how the child panda cheering party KPD is cheering at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 is increased. A notice is displayed to inform you that the reliability of the SP swordsman reach jackpot has increased dramatically. The child panda cheering party KPD may or may not appear. Further, in FIG. 321 (A3a'-1), the erased chance-up meter CMT is displayed again, but the display mode thereof is the same as the display mode before the chance-up meter CMT is erased.

FIG. 321 (A3a'-2) is an production example following FIG. 321 (A2a), and shows an production example different from that of FIG. 321 (A3a'-1). In the production example shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-2), the display mode of the chance up meter CMT is different from that in FIG. 321 (A3a'-1). That is, the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-2) is a chance-up meter different from the chance-up meter CMT before the cut-in of the princess character is displayed. As shown in 318 (30b) and described above, it is a chance-up meter CMT displayed when the swordsman reach is changed to the SP swordsman reach. That is, according to the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A3a'-2), it is shown that the Copanda cheering party KPD appeared at the fourth checkpoint CP4 that passed after shifting to the SP swordsman reach. Therefore, on the decorative pattern display device 208, the Copanda cheering party KPD is displayed, indicating that a notice of chance up is given. When the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH may be located at the start point SP and the SP swordsman reach may start from the beginning, or the Sabohani character SBH may be the final point GP. It may be located at the end of the SP Swordsman Reach.

FIG. 321 (A3a ″) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 321 (A2a). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A3a ″) shows how the full rotation reach starts. The full rotation reach is a reach in which a big hit is confirmed, and since it is not necessary to give the player a feeling of expectation any more, the chance up meter CMT is not displayed again, but FIG. 321 (A3a ″ ″ ), The chance-up meter CMT may be displayed again. In this case, it can be said that it is notified that the big hit will be confirmed when the full rotation reach starts, so the position of the Sabohani character SBH is changed to the final point GP without passing through the 5th checkpoint CP5. , The placard may be labeled with a "V" indicating that it will be a big hit. The timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP may be the same, or the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP after the full rotation reach starts. Alternatively, the full rotation reach may be started after the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP. Further, the timing at which the full rotation reach starts and the timing at which the chance up meter CMT displays again may be the same, or the chance up meter CMT may display again after the full rotation reach starts. Then, the full rotation reach may be started after the chance up meter CMT is displayed again.

FIGS. 321 (A2b) to 321 (A3b) show another production example following FIG. 321 (A1).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the display of the effect image. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased. After that, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate, and they overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It should be noted that the chance up meter CMT may be displayed again after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd operate and the overlapping effects on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 are completed. Then, the chance up meter CMT may not be displayed again.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 321 (B1) to 321 (B4), the production by the chance-up meter CMT was started, but the production by the chance-up meter CMT was completed because the result of the loss was displayed in the middle. It is shown.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance-up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance-up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GM, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, but at the timing shown in FIG. 321 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH is the first. Although the 1st checkpoint CP1 was reached, the red marking and "UP" were not displayed on the 1st checkpoint CP1 because the corresponding chance-up notice did not occur. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (B1) shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the first checkpoint CP1.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B2), the cut-in image CI5 of the swordsman is displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of loss. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 321 (B3), it is notified that the main character, the lord, is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the middle symbol, resulting in a loss. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays that the character SBH of Sabohani is lost and shows a disappointing expression. Here, as shown in FIG. 321 (B3'), although "decoration 6" is displayed in the middle symbol and it is notified that the character will be lost, the Sabohani character SBH is finally set in the chance up meter CMT. The state of proceeding as it is toward the point GP may be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 321 (B4), the first decorative symbol is shaken and changed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7", and then stopped and displayed.

FIG. 322 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In FIG. 322, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 322 (A1) to 322 (A5), the chance-up meter CMT is temporarily erased during the production by the chance-up meter CMT, and then displayed again.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. It is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, FIG. 322 (A2) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. The light emission of the light guide plate IL is a notice of an increase in chance corresponding to the first checkpoint CP1. At this time, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display is dimmed to make the pattern on the light guide plate IL easier to see. At this time, the chance up meter CMT is also erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (A3), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene whose display was interrupted by the darkening display is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the chance up meter CMT is also restarted. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up illumination emission" in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH to notify that the chance-up notice has been given. The light emitting of the light guide plate IL continues.

FIG. 322 (A4) shows that the light emitting of the light guide plate IL is finished and the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is continued. In addition, the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice. A history of what happened is shown.

FIG. 322 (A5) shows how the fade-in of the animation display of the duel scene is completed. In addition, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving.

In this production example, the light emitting of the light guide plate IL was performed as a notice of the chance increase in the reach production, but the effect is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It may be applied in the production of reaching and inciting whether it is a big hit or a loss. In addition to the production that incites whether it is a big hit or a loss, it is also applied in the production that incites whether it will be a big hit or something else (for example, the production develops or a loss is displayed). You may. Even in such a case, the chance up meter CMT may be temporarily erased during the production by the light emission of the light guide plate IL.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 322 (B1) to 322 (B6) show how the chance-up meter CMT is displayed or erased by the operation of the player.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. These first checkpoint CP1 to third checkpoint CP3 indicate that a specific notice may occur, and give the player a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B1), the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the left side of the display screen, and moves toward the right side. Is shown, and it is shown that a notice of chance up is being made. Further, in this production example, a guidance display is performed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Specifically, in this guidance display, an icon indicating the up key and the down key of the operation key unit 137 and the character "Hide the meter by operating the arrow keys" are displayed, and the player can display the operation key unit 137. It is displayed that the chance up meter CMT can be hidden by operating the up key or the down key. In this production example, the chance up meter CMT is displayed when the swordsman reach starts, but it may be displayed by a display operation by the player after the swordsman reach starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 322 (B2), a balloon with the characters "Chance up BOY passing" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, and a notice is given by displaying the character of chance up. Is being notified.

Then, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B3), the chance up meter CMT is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 322 (B4). .. After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated again at the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B5), the chance up meter CMT is displayed again as shown in FIG. 322 (B6). At this time, the Sabohani character SBH is in the position where it should be located when the display of the chance up meter CMT is resumed. In this case, for example, the balloon shown in FIG. 322 (B2) may not be displayed, and the effect of the chance-up meter CMT may be restarted from a good point. Further, as shown in FIG. 322 (B6'), when the effect between the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 is omitted and the chance up meter CMT display is resumed, the Sabohani character SBH May be located in front of the second checkpoint CP2 and wait at that position until the timing corresponding to the second checkpoint CP2 is given. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIGS. 322 (B6) and (B6'), the first checkpoint CP1 is marked in red due to the appearance of the Boy character BOY, and "UP" is displayed. The letters are displayed above it. At the timing shown in FIG. 322 (B6), the characters "UP" overlap with the Sabohani character SBH, making it difficult to see.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 322 (B1) to 322 (B6), the chance-up meter CMT can be displayed / hidden as many times as necessary according to the operation of the player. After being displayed and then hidden by the player's operation, the chance-up meter CMT may not be displayed until the next production by the chance-up meter CMT is performed.

Further, in this production example, the chance up meter CMT is configured to be displayed first, but for example, as shown in FIG. 322 (B4), the chance up meter CMT is first hidden. It may be configured to be in this state.

FIG. 323 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter. FIG. 323 shows an example of an effect in which a plurality of chance up meters are displayed.

In FIG. 323, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 323 (A1) to (A2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display the same contents.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A1), two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are displayed side by side on the lower side of the display screen with the variable icon h0 in between. In this production example, the chance up meter arranged on the left side is referred to as a first chance up meter CMTa, and the chance up meter arranged on the right side is referred to as a second chance up meter CMTb. The chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb are shown in FIG. 319 (2f) and have the same display mode as those described above. In the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (A1), the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b, the second checkpoints CP2a and CP2b, and the third checkpoints CP3a and CP3b are arranged, respectively. These first checkpoints CP1a (CP1b) to third checkpoints CP3a (CP3b) are represented by question marks to give a sense of expectation that a notice of chance up will be given. Here, the checkpoint indicated by the first chance-up meter CMTa and the checkpoint indicated by the second chance-up meter CMTb are intended for the same chance-up notice. In this production example, two chance up meters are displayed, but only one may be displayed. For example, two chance up meters may be displayed as compared with the case where only one chance up meter is displayed. The case where it is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit, or the ease of being a big hit (reliability) may be the same. Further, when the effect is performed by the chance up meter, two chance up meters may be displayed without fail. Further, three or more chance up meters may be displayed. Further, in this production example, the traveling speeds of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are the same, but they may be different. For example, the traveling speed of the second chance up meter CMTb is higher. However, it may be faster than the traveling speed of the first chance up meter CMTa.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2), in response to the fact that the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first checkpoints CP1a and CP1b and the boy character BOY appears, " A balloon with the words "Chance up BOY passed" is displayed on each of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and it is notified that the chance up notice has been given by the character display.

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2'), the first chance-up meter CMTa displays the characters "Chance-up BOY passage" in the balloon, and the balloon of the second chance-up meter CMTb has a reliability. May be displayed to notify the reliability of the jackpot due to the appearance of the character BOY of the balloon.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 323 (A2 ″), when the appearance of the boy character BOY and the appearance of the boy character BOY singing a balloon as a rare notice are displayed, the first chance The characters "Chance Up BOY Passed" are displayed on the balloon of the upmeter CMTa, and the characters "Chance Up Nose" indicating that a rare notice has occurred are displayed on the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb. May be good.

In this production example, the traveling speeds of the markers MRKa and MRKb are the same for the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but they may proceed at different speeds. Further, in this production example, the balloon is displayed by both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, but only one of them may be displayed.

323 (A2a-1) to 323 (A2a-2) show another example of the effect following FIG. 323 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reached the first chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the boy character BOY appeared. Then, a balloon with the words "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2a-2), only the first chance up meter CMTa is erased from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb, and the second chance up meter CMTa is erased. Only CMTb is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance up meters, one of them may be erased. For example, if one of the two chance up meters is erased, it is not erased. It may be more likely to be a big hit than it is, or it may be more likely to be a big hit when it is not erased. Moreover, the reliability may differ depending on the erased chance up meter. Also, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

FIGS. 323 (A2b-1) to 323 (A2b-2) show still another production example following FIG. 323 (A1). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-1) following FIG. 323 (A1), the markers MRKa and MRKb reach the first chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb, and the boy character BOY appears. Then, a balloon with the words "Chance Up BOY Passing" is displayed near the markers MRKa and MRKb on each of the 1st chance up meter CMTa and the 2nd chance up meter CMTb, and the character display gives a notice of chance up. It is informed that it has been done. At this time, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is changed to a thick red line, and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is further improved. That is, in the display mode of the balloon of the first chance up meter CMTa and the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb, the display mode of the balloon of the second chance up meter CMTb is the display of the notice with higher reliability of the jackpot. It can be said to be an aspect. It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the balloon may be performed by only one of the two chance up meters, or may be performed by both.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (A2b-2), the first chance up meter CMTa displaying a balloon having a low reliability from the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb. Only the second chance up meter CMTb, which is erased and displays a highly reliable balloon, is displayed. In this way, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the highly reliable balloon is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Further, after displaying the two chance-up meters, the display of the chance-up meter on which the balloon with low reliability is displayed may be continued, and the display of the other chance-up meter may be erased. Alternatively, both of the two chance up meters may be erased.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 323 (B1) to (B2) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (B1), the first chance-up meter CMTa has three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1a, second checkpoint CP2a, and third checkpoint CP3a). Have been placed. On the other hand, in the second chance up meter CMTb, two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4b and fifth checkpoint CP5b) are arranged, and the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are the first checkpoints. The timing of the chance-up notice and start corresponding to any of CP1a to the third checkpoint CP3a is different. In this production example, when the arrival timings of the markers MRKa and MRKb of the first checkpoint CP1a, the second checkpoint CP2a, the third checkpoint CP3a, the fourth checkpoint CP4b, and the fifth checkpoint CP5b are arranged in chronological order. , 1st checkpoint CP1a, 4th checkpoint CP4b, 2nd checkpoint CP2a, 5th checkpoint CP5b, 3rd checkpoint CP3a.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (B2), after the marker MRKa of the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the first checkpoint CP1a and the boy character BOY appears, the marker of the second chance up meter CMTb It is shown that the MRKb has reached the fourth checkpoint CP4b and the Boy character BOY has begun humming. In response to this, the second chance-up meter CMTb displays a balloon with the characters "chance-up humming" in the vicinity of the marker MRKb, informing that the chance-up notice has been given.

In this production example, both the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. In this case, for example, if one of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb is not displayed, the chance up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the not displayed chance up meter is given. It may not be performed, or a chance-up notice corresponding to a checkpoint in the hidden chance-up meter may be given. Further, there may be a checkpoint that does not notify when one of the first chance-up meter CMTa and the second chance-up meter CMTb is not displayed, or even if the checkpoint is notified. Good.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 323 (C1) to 323 (C4) show how the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb display different chance-up notices.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are displayed side by side with the variable icon h0 in between, at the bottom of the display screen. Of the two chance-up meters CMTa and CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the second chance-up meter CMTa is a meter that shows the progress of the entire reach effect, and one checkpoint (development point CPA) is arranged. Has been done. This development point CPA indicates the point at which the reach production may develop. On the other hand, the first chance up meter CMTa indicates the period from the start point to the checkpoint, the period from the checkpoint to the checkpoint, or the period from the checkpoint to the final point in the second chance up meter CMTb. When the period in the second chance up meter CMTb is changed, the first chance up meter CMTa is also changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed period. In this production example, the period from the start point SP to the development point CPA in the second chance up meter CMTb is referred to as the first period, and the period from the development point CPA to the final point GP is referred to as the second period. Further, in this production example, the display modes of the first chance up meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb are different, and the first chance up meter CMTa is the same as that shown in FIG. 319 (2f) and described above. The second chance up meter CMTb has a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 317 (2) and described above. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C1), the first chance up meter CMTa has a display mode corresponding to the first period, and three checkpoints (first checkpoint CP1, second checkpoint CP2, The third checkpoint CP3) is arranged, and it is shown that a notice of chance up may occur when the marker MRK reaches each checkpoint. Further, the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa and the Sabohani character SBH in the second chance up meter CMTb are also starting points.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C2), it is shown that the button effect is being performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 323 (C2), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing, and it is shown that a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started. In addition, on the first chance-up meter CMTa, the characters "UP" indicating that a chance-up notice has occurred at the first checkpoint CP1 are displayed, and the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2. It is shown. The second checkpoint CP2 corresponds to, for example, a notice of a certain chance up that appears as a result of the button effect. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is progressing toward the development point CPA.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C3), the marker MRK reaches the final point at the first checkpoint CP1 and the Sabohani character SBH reaches the development point CPA at the second chance up meter CMTb. , It is shown that the cut-in is displayed to show that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is erased. When the marker MRK in the first chance up meter CMTa reaches the final point, the first chance up meter CMTa may not be erased, only the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased, or the first chance up meter CMTb may be erased. Both the meter CMTa and the second chance up meter CMTb may be erased.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 323 (C4), a cut-in image of the panda is displayed and a state of shifting to the SP swordsman reach is shown. At this time, the first chance up meter CMTa is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the second period, and two checkpoints (fourth checkpoint CP4 and fifth checkpoint CP5) are arranged, and each check is performed. It has been shown that a chance-up notice may occur when the marker MRK reaches the point. In addition, the second chance up meter CMTb shows that the Sabohani character SBH is moving from the development point CPA to the final point GP.

FIG. 324 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 324 (A1) to (A7) show that the chance-up meter CMT notifies the timing at which the pseudo-ream occurs and the number of times the pseudo-ream occurs during the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 320 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A1), the characters "Secure Echigoya" are displayed to show that the chasing effect as an example of the pseudo-continuous effect is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A2), it is shown that the first decorative symbol sways and fluctuates depending on the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 6". Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged in this chance-up meter CMT. , It is informed that pseudo-ream may occur at each checkpoint. Then, in this chance up meter CMT, it is shown that the marker MRK has reached the first checkpoint CP1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (A3), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the characters "continue" are displayed together with the display in which the hero's lord chases the unscrupulous merchant, and it is notified that the first pseudo-ream is performed. The state is shown. At this time, in the chance up meter CMT, the display of the first checkpoint CP1 is switched from the question mark to the display of the characters "continued". Further, at this time, the first decorative symbol is hidden, but for example, variable display may be performed in a semi-transparent display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A4), it is shown that the first decorative symbol variation display (that is, the second variation display of the decorative symbol) is performed by the first pseudo-ream. ..

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (A5), although the unscrupulous merchant missed it, it is shown that the recovery of the Senryo box leads to the development of reach. Further, in the chance up meter CMT, the marker MRK has reached the second checkpoint CP2, and the display of the second checkpoint CP2 is indicated by the letter "R" indicating that the question mark has changed to the reach state. It has switched to the display. As a result, the pseudo-continuous effect is terminated in the middle, and as shown in FIG. 324 (A6), the display of the pseudo-continuous effect fades out together with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (A7), when the reach effect is started, the left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is left in the first UI unit 280. The frame is out below the display area, and the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. At this time, the chance-up meter CMT is erased when the fade-out of the display of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed. In this way, the chance up meter CMT may be configured so that it is more likely to be a big hit when it reaches the end than when it ends at a checkpoint in the middle. In addition, the likelihood of a big hit may differ depending on the checkpoint reached.

Further, as an example of the effect of hiding the chance up meter CMT, it may be performed as shown in FIGS. 324 (A6a-1) to (A6a-2). Specifically, in FIG. 324 (A5), when the pseudo-continuous production is terminated in the middle, as shown in FIGS. 324 (A6a-1) to FIG. 324 (A6a-2), the chance-up meter CMT The chance up meter CMT may be hidden by frame-out outside the display screen.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 324 (B1) to (B7) show that the chance-up meter CMT is used between the start of the reach production and the development of the super reach. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B1), it is shown that the reach effect of “decoration 7” is changed to reach. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 324 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Then, in this effect example, when the reach effect is started, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed below the second decorative symbol, and the effect using the chance-up meter CMT is performed. The effect using this chance-up meter CMT is performed until the shift to the super reach or the loss is displayed without shifting to the super reach. Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 324 (B1), when the marker MRK reaches the first checkpoint CP1 and the second checkpoint CP2 in the reach production, a notice of chance up corresponding to each checkpoint is given. Is being performed, and the characters "UP" to that effect are displayed. Further, the chance up meter CMT overlaps a part of the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 324 (B2), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and in the first UI unit 280, the variable icon h0 is left below the display area. At the same time as the frame is out, it is shown that the hold icon h11 displayed on the second UI unit 281 is also framed out. Further, the chance-up meter CMT shows that the marker MRK has reached the third checkpoint CP3. The chance-up meter CMT overlaps the left symbol of the first decorative symbol after movement, and the left symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 324 (B3), the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left and right symbols of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are considered to be difficult to see. Further, at least a part of the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga and the second large board behavior accessory 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to see. Further, in this production example, at least a part of the chance up meter CMT is overlapped by the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga, and the chance up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. ing. In this production example, the marker MRK continues to progress while the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior character 224Gd are operating, but the 1st large board behavior character 224Ga to the 4th large board The progress of the marker MRK may be stopped while the behavioral object 224Gd is operating. Further, the chance-up meter CMT may be hidden while the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operating. Further, in the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 324 (B3), a balloon with the characters "chance-up large board behavior" is displayed in the vicinity of the marker MRK, and the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior role. It is informing that the notice of chance up by the thing 224Gd has been made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the chance up meter CMT overlaps the light emitting portion of the light guide plate IL.

After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. Return to position. At the timing when the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished, the marker MRK has reached the final point in the chance up meter CMT, but the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished after the marker MRK reaches the final point. Alternatively, the marker MRK may reach the final point after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Further, in this production example, after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the first decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance up meter CMT, and the left of the first decorative symbol. The design overlaps with the chance-up meter CMT, but before the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the front side of the chance-up meter CMT, and the first is After the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd are operated, the 1st decorative symbol is arranged on the back side of the chance up meter CMT, and the 1st decorative symbol is overlapped with the chance up meter CMT. You may do so. Further, the context of the first decorative symbol and the chance-up meter CMT may not be changed before and after the operation of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. The chance-up meter CMT is erased after the 1st large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavioral accessory 224Gd have returned to the initial positions. After that, as shown in FIG. 324 (B7), it develops into super reach.

FIG. 325 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect using the chance up meter.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 325 (A1) to 325 (A5), another production unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with the chance-up meter CMT during the performance using the chance-up meter CMT. It is shown how it is done. Here, another effect may overlap only a part of the chance up meter CMT, or another effect may overlap the entire chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance-up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance-up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (A1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the characters "UP" are displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A2), the treasure chest BX is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the chance up meter CMT. Therefore, the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than the case where the treasure box BX does not overlap with the chance-up meter CMT. The treasure chest BX is a notice production that has nothing to do with the chance-up notice corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance-up meter CMT. In addition, the marker MRK does not stop even while the treasure box BX is displayed, and continues to progress.

In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (A3), when the marker MRK reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a corresponding chance-up notice is generated, and the second checkpoint CP2 notifies "UP" to that effect. "Is displayed. The treasure chest BX still overlaps with the chance up meter CMT.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (A4), the treasure box BX is opened, and the characters "extreme heat" appear from the inside. The character display of "super heat" is also a notice production that has nothing to do with the notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT. In addition, it may be a notice of chance up corresponding to the checkpoint in the chance up meter CMT.

After that, as shown in FIG. 325 (A5), the treasure chest BX displayed overlapping with the chance-up meter CMT is erased, and the chance-up meter CMT becomes easily visible.

FIG. 325 (B1) shows how other effects unrelated to the chance-up meter CMT are overlapped with the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the effect using the chance-up meter CMT. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (B1), the wipe is made so as to overlap at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT during the execution of the chance-up meter effect using the chance-up meter CMT. A screen WP is arranged, and it is shown that a simultaneous effect is being performed on this wipe screen WP. Here, the simultaneous production means, for example, using an RTC (Real Time Clock) as a timekeeping means or a built-in timer, the same model of pachinko machine 100 mounted on the same game island, and the same production content is the same. It is a production performed at the timing. The wipe screen WP is displayed, for example, when the simultaneous effect starts, and is erased when the simultaneous effect ends. Further, the wipe screen WP may be displayed even when an effect other than the simultaneous effect is performed.

FIGS. 325 (C1) to 325 (C2) show how an error display is displayed during the execution of the effect using the chance up meter CMT.

The decorative pattern display device shown in FIG. 325 (C1) shows that the display device has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance-up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance-up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (C1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the characters "UP" are displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (C1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2.

After that, for example, a radio wave detection provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 indicates that a radio device such as a transceiver outputs a strong radio wave that causes fluctuations in the signal voltage of the pachinko machine 100. When it is detected by means, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2), an error display is performed by displaying the characters "Radio wave detected" to that effect. In the effect example shown in FIG. 325 (C2), this error display does not overlap with the chance-up meter CMT and does not affect the visibility of the chance-up meter CMT. This error display may be applied to other errors, for example, a ball removal error that occurs when it is detected that the lower plate 128 (see FIG. 289) is full, or a front frame door 106 (see FIG. 289). It can also be applied to a door opening error that occurs when it is detected that the door member has been opened (see 289). Further, depending on the type of error, the error display may not be performed, or the error notification may be performed by voice or a lamp.

FIGS. 325 (C2a), (C2b), and (C2c) show other display examples of the error display. For example, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2a), the error display is a chance up meter CMT. It may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2b), a plurality of errors can be displayed at the same time, and when an error occurs, the error is displayed vertically from the upper left side of the display screen. There is. In this case, for example, when the fourth error (error D) occurs, the fourth error is displayed so as to overlap the chance up meter CMT. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), it is shown that an error display is performed on the entire display screen. Specifically, it was detected by, for example, a magnetic force detecting means provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 that strong magnetism was emitted to the game board 200 (see FIG. 289) of the pachinko machine 100. In this case, as shown in FIG. 325 (C2c), an error display is performed over the entire display screen by displaying the characters "Magnetism detected" to that effect. As a result, the chance up meter CMT is hidden, and other effects are also hidden. When such an error is detected, the game may not proceed by not performing a part of the processing in the main control unit 300 until the power is cut off, for example, not performing the big hit determination. .. If the power is cut off while the error is displayed and then the power supply is restored, the symbol fluctuation stop command is issued after the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display that was being executed when the power was cut off has elapsed. For example, "preparing" may be displayed over the entire display screen until it is output to the first sub-control unit 400.

FIGS. 325 (D1) to 325 (D2) show how the chance-up meter CMT overlaps with other display devices. In the production example shown in FIGS. 325 (D1) to (D2), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 325 (D1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, a chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is shown that the effect is performed by the chance-up meter CMT. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the marker MRK moves from the start point to the final point, and the progress of the current reach effect depends on the position. The situation is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the marker MRK is on the way from the start point SP to the final point GP. When the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached, a specific notice may occur, and at the timing shown in FIG. 325 (D1), the marker MRK becomes the first checkpoint CP1. When it arrives, a corresponding notice of chance up occurs, and at the first checkpoint CP1, the characters "UP" are displayed to notify that fact. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 325 (D1) shows that the marker MRK is progressing from the first checkpoint CP1 to the second checkpoint CP2. Further, on the sub-display device 208S, the characters "vs swordsman" indicating that the swordsman reach has been developed are displayed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 325 (D2) shows that the sub display device 208S moves upward along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 208S overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped with the sub-display device 208S, and the chance-up meter CMT is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In addition, the sub-display device 208S displays a cut-in image of the main character, who has a balloon with the characters "Battle Ja" displayed.

In this production example, the chance-up meter CMT is overlapped by the sub-display device 208S as an example of the display means, but the chance-up meter CMT may be overlapped by another display means. For example, a display means composed of a light guide plate IL, a POV display 224I, a 7-segment display, a dot matrix, a lamp, or the like can be applied.

Further, in this effect example, the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, as shown in FIG. 325 (E1), the chance-up meter CMT is displayed on the sub-display device 208S. It may be. Further, the chance up meter CMT may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

In this production example, an example in which the chance up meter CMT overlaps with another display has been described, but it is also applied to the case where the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with another display instead of the chance up meter CMT. can do.

FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating an mode of change of the remaining time display meter in the button effect.

In FIG. 326, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 326 (A1) to (A9), the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed by the navigation character YM and the change speed of the remaining time display meter in the button effect performed in the conversation notice. Is shown to be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A1), the button effect by the navigation character YM is started, and a balloon including the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. After that, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A2), the operation of the effect button 136 by the player can be accepted. The operation validity period in the button effect by the navigation character YM is, for example, 10 seconds.

After that, the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A3) shows that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is decreasing. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A3), it is shown that the conversation notice is started while the button effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, the conversation image CI1 of the lord with the character display of "chance" displayed together with the character of the lord is displayed. The display of the conversation image CI1 of this lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of this lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than the case where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the conversation notice is updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather on which the operation promotion notification image is displayed together with the grandfather character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of a button image 136a2 imitating the effect button 136a and a remaining time display meter MT2 indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period. At the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the operation valid period in the conversation notice has not started, and even if the effect button 136 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, in the button effect by the navigation character YM, since the operation valid period has started, when the effect button 136 is operated, an effect corresponding to this may be performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. You may be able to do it. In addition, the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 326 (A4), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than that in the non-overlapping state. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to see. In addition, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather partially overlaps with the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM.

After that, the operation valid period in the conversation notice is started at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5). The player may be able to see the effect according to the operation by operating the effect button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A5). The operation valid period of the button effect by the conversation notice is, for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than the operation valid period of the button effect by the navigation character YM. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 326 (A5) to 326 (A7), the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice is more than the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM decreases. The rate at which the gauge decreases is greater. In other words, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the button effect by the conversation notice decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the button effect by the navigation character YM.

After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A8), as shown in FIG. 326 (A9), the old man's conversation image CI2 replaces the operation promotion notification image with "extreme heat. The characters "Zo" may be displayed. This informs us that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. On the other hand, the display of the balloon of the navigation character YM on which the button image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 were displayed changes to the character display of "super heat", and it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. ing. That is, in this production example, it is shown that a single production button operation is performed according to the button operation result for both the button production in the conversation notice and the button production by the navigation character YM. ing. In addition, the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather and the character display of "Intense heat" displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM are displayed even when the operation validity period has passed. However, it does not have to be displayed.

When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (A8), for example, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-1), the operation corresponding to the button effect started earlier. The production may be performed according to the result. That is, in this production example, the button production by the navigation character YM was started before the button production in the conversation notice. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-1), the production button 136 in the button production by the navigation character YM. Only the effect according to the operation of (the character display of "super heat" in the balloon of the navigation character YM) is performed, and the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (displayed on the old man's conversation image CI2). "It's intense heat" is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (A9a-2), when the player operates the effect button 136 for the second time, as shown in FIG. 316 (A9a-3), it corresponds to the button effect started later. The effect is performed according to the operation result. That is, the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the conversation notice (the character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather) is performed.

In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated when the operation valid period is started in each of the two button effects, the button effect in which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter is prioritized and produced. The effect may be performed according to the operation of the button 136, or the effect according to the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed by giving priority to the button effect in which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter. May be good.

Further, in this production example, the change speeds of the display modes of the two remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 are different. For example, until a certain time, the change of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the notice image CI2 of the grandfather The speed is the same as the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM, and the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 may be changed when a certain time is reached. ..

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period related to the grandfather's preview image CI2 is set to 5 seconds. The display mode of MT2 may be changed. That is, when the operation valid period is 10 seconds, the change speed of the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 in the balloon of the navigation character YM is the same. In this case, the case where the operation validity period related to the grandfather's notice image CI2 is selected to be 5 seconds may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the operation valid period is selected to be 10 seconds.

In addition, in this production example, the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather whose extension was started later than the case where "super heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose production was displayed earlier is "super heat. Is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher, so that the notice display displayed later is more likely to be displayed at the time of the jackpot, and the notice display displayed later is the one that is displayed later. It may be possible to surprise the player by displaying the image while the attention level is relatively lowered. In addition, "It's intense heat" was displayed in the conversation image CI2 of the old man whose extension was started later than when "Intense heat" was displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM whose effect was displayed earlier. In the case, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower, or the reliability of the jackpot may be the same.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 326 (B1) to 326 (B11) show that both the timer advance effect and the effect using the chance up meter are performed at the same time.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon h0 and the chance-up meter CMT are displayed side by side, indicating that the chance-up meter CMT is performing the effect. The chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326 (B1) is, for example, a meter showing the progress of the reach effect, and the Sabohani character SBH moves from the start point SP to the final point GP, and the current position is used depending on the position. The progress of the reach production is roughly notified. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 326 (B1), the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged, and the Sabohani character SBH heads from the start point SP to the final point GP. It has been shown that when the first checkpoint CP1 to the third checkpoint CP3 are reached on the way, a specific notice may occur, so that the player has a sense of expectation. Further, at the final point GP, the placard is rotated and displayed, suggesting that when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the final point GP, the result of either a big hit or a loss is derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B2), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B3), the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, and the timer notice effect is started. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the start of the timer advance notice effect functions as a notice of increasing the chance. Further, "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B4), a balloon with the characters "chance up timer notice" is displayed in the vicinity of the character SBH of Sabohani, indicating that the chance up notice has been given. I am informing you. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and "09:17" is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B4).

After that, as shown in FIG. 326 (B5), the first checkpoint CP1 in the chance-up meter CMT is marked in red, and the "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice. Letters are displayed above it to show the history of the notice. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:81” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B6), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started to move. At this time, since the overlap was eliminated for a part of the display of "UP", a part of the display is visible. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “08:31” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B7), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the second checkpoint CP2. In this production example, when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the second checkpoint CP2, a notice of chance up (for example, occurrence of a cut-in) is given, and the second checkpoint CP2 is marked in red. At the same time, the character "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above the notice, indicating the history of the notice. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “04:14” is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 326 (B7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B8), it is shown that the character SBH of Sabohani has reached the third checkpoint CP3. On the other hand, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. Then, as shown in FIG. 326 (B9), on the timer notice display TM1, instead of the timer display, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed. According to this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer advance notice display TM1 started later is higher than the rate (speed) of the change in the display mode by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. It can be said that it is early. That is, the time from the start to the end of the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 started later than the time from the start point SP to the final point GP of the Sabohani character SBH by the chance up meter CMT started earlier. Can be said to be faster.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a balloon with the characters “chance up lever” is displayed in the vicinity of the Sabohani character SBH. It informs that the notice by the production has started. The display of the lever image 136Va in this lever effect is a notice of chance up displayed in response to reaching the third checkpoint CP3, and at the same time, it is a notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown of the timer notice effect. .. That is, it can be said that the target of the advance notice of the chance up shown in the effect of the chance up meter CMT and the object of the advance notice performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect are the same. Alternatively, it can be said that the notice of chance up when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the third checkpoint CP3 and the notice indicated by the character "attention" shown on the timer notice display TM1 are the same. The target of the chance-up notice shown in the production by the chance-up meter CMT and the target of the notice performed as a result of the timer notice production may be different. For example, in the production by the chance-up meter CMT, the third check The lever image 136V is a notice of chance up when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the point CP3, and the notice given as a result of the timer notice effect is a display mode of the appearing lever image 136V with higher reliability. It may change to (for example, change from red to gold, etc.).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 326 (B11), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in addition to the lever image 136V, and the lever effect is started. In addition, the third checkpoint CP3 in the chance up meter CMT is marked in red, and the word "UP" indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has increased due to the appearance of the notice is displayed above it, and the notice is given. A history of what happened is shown. The display of "UP" is overlapped by the character SBH of Sabohani, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

FIG. 327 is a diagram showing another example of the button effect step by step.

In FIG. 327, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (2), it is shown that the button effect is started. In this production example, six sets of operation promotion notification images including a combination of a button image and a remaining time display meter are displayed. Specifically, the first operation promotion notification image including the first button image 136a1 and the first remaining time display meter MT1 is arranged at the upper left of the display screen, and the second button image 136a2 and the second remaining time A second operation promotion notification image composed of the display meter MT2 is arranged in the upper center of the display screen, and a third operation promotion notification image composed of the third button image 136a3 and the third remaining time display meter MT3 is displayed on the display screen. The fourth operation promotion notification image, which is arranged in the upper right and consists of the fourth button image 136a4 and the fourth remaining time display meter MT4, is arranged in the lower right of the display screen, and the fifth button image 136a5 and the fifth remaining. A fifth operation promotion notification image composed of the time display meter MT5 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen, and a sixth operation promotion notification image composed of the sixth button image 136a6 and the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 is displayed on the display screen. It is located at the bottom right of. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 starts for any of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 327 (4), all of the first remaining time display meter MT1 to the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 show that the operation valid period is started and the gauge is reduced. Has been done. In this production example, of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, the operation validity period for the first operation promotion notification image is the operation validity period for the other operation promotion notification images. It is shorter and the operation validity period elapses earlier. In this production example, the second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image all have the same length of operation validity period. Therefore, the gauge of the first remaining time display meter MT1 decreases faster than the gauges of the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 327 (5), as shown in FIG. 327 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first operation promotion notification image is the character of the copanda. It has changed to KP, and it is shown that a notice is being given. The second operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image have not changed. That is, in this effect example, only one operation promotion notification image among the plurality of operation promotion notification images is changed by one operation of the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is operated, the first operation promotion notification image, the second operation promotion notification image, the third operation promotion notification image, the fourth operation promotion notification image, and the fifth operation promotion are performed. The display mode is changed one by one with priority given to the notification image and the sixth operation promotion notification image. The order of the operation promotion notification images that change the display mode is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the display mode of two or more operation promotion notification images may be changed by one operation of the effect button 136.

In this effect example, the first remaining time display meter MT1 (remaining time display meter corresponding to the first operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the highest priority when the effect button 136 is operated). The gauge is reduced faster than the other remaining time display meters MT2 to MT6. For example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4a), when the third remaining time display meter MT3 (effect button 136 is operated). The remaining time display meter MT1 including the first remaining time display meter MT1 has a decrease in the gauge of the third operation promotion notification image whose display mode changes with the third priority. , MT2, MT4, MT5, MT6 may be faster or slower. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4b), the sixth operation promotion notification has the lowest priority for changing the display mode when the sixth remaining time display meter MT6 (effect button 136 is operated). The gauge of the remaining time display meter (corresponding to the image) may decrease faster or slower than the other remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5. Further, the remaining time display meter that accelerates the decrease of the gauge is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set to an appropriate one.

Further, in this effect example, the button images 136a to 136a6 are configured in each of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image, but the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth For any one or two or more of the operation promotion notification images, another image may be displayed instead of the button image. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4c), as an image constituting the sixth operation promotion notification image, a sixth button image 136a6 is used instead of the sixth button image 136a6 to promote the operation of the effect lever 136V. The lever image 136Va6 of the above may be displayed. In this case, any of the remaining time display meters of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image may have the same rate of decrease of the gauge, and as shown in FIG. 327 (4c), the sixth The speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT6 corresponding to the sixth operation promotion notification image constituting the lever image 136Va6 of the above decreases is made faster than the remaining time display meters MT1 to MT5 corresponding to other operation promotion notification images. It may be slowed down. With this configuration, for example, when the button effect is started and the display as shown in FIG. 327 (4c) is performed, it is promoted to operate the effect lever 136V once after operating the effect button 136 five times. You may be able to.

Further, in this effect example, the speed at which the gauge of the remaining time display meter in any one of the first operation promotion notification image to the sixth operation promotion notification image decreases is displayed as the remaining time in the other operation promotion notification image. Although it is made different from the meter, for example, as shown in FIG. 327 (4d), there may be two or more different gauges of the remaining time display meter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 327 (4d), the decreasing speed of the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT3 and MT5 of the third operation promotion notification image and the fifth operation promotion notification image is the other operation promotion notification. The fifth remaining time display meter MT1, MT2, MT4, MT6 of the image is different from the third operation promotion notification image corresponding to the fifth operation promotion notification image than the third remaining time display meter MT3 corresponding to the third operation promotion notification image. The remaining time display meter MT5 may decrease the gauge at a higher speed.

FIG. 328 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

In FIG. 328, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 328 (A1) to 328 (A6) show that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 328 (A1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 and TM2 frame in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, as will be described later, the countdown speed of the timer display on one timer notice display is faster than the countdown speed of the timer display on the other timer notice display, so that the time until the countdown is completed is faster. It's different. In this production example, of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2, the one displayed above is referred to as the first timer notice display TM1, and the one displayed below is referred to as the second timer notice display TM2. is there.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each timer advance notice display TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. In this production example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that of the first timer notice display TM1. The first timer notice display TM1 counts down according to the actual passage of time, but the second timer notice display TM2 is faster than that. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A3), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "09:73", and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is "06:73". It has become. The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to a speed that matches the passage of actual time. The countdown speed of the timer advance notice display TM2 of 1 may be slower than the countdown speed of the second timer advance notice display TM2.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is set to "00:00" and the countdown is completed. On the other hand, the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 is "06:00", that is, the state when 4 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer notice display started is shown. Can be done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (A5), in the second timer notice display TM2, the character "attention" indicating that attention to the notice is urged is displayed instead of the timer display. On the other hand, the countdown of the first timer notice display TM1 continues, and the timer display is "05:87" at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (A5). After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 may be given. The second timer notice display TM2 is deleted by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (A6), the timer display of the first timer advance notice display TM1 is set to “00:00” and the countdown is completed. After that, a notice corresponding to the completion of the countdown of the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 may be given. After that, the first timer notice display TM1 is erased by, for example, frame-out after the countdown is completed.

In this production example, the case where the two timer notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer notice effect started earlier may be used. The countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display may be faster or slower than the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 328 (B1) to (B4), a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed at the same time, and the time until the countdown is completed is added to one of the timer advance notice effects. Shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, FIG. 328 (B1) shows that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. Specifically, when the timer notice display (first timer notice display TM1 and second timer notice display TM2) is framed in from the right side of the display area, the timer notice effect is started respectively. "10:00" is displayed on both timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2, suggesting that a certain advance notice effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the countdown speed of the timer display in the timer notice display is the same.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B2), it is shown that the frame-in of the two timer advance notice displays TM1 and TM2 is completed. After that, each timer advance notice display TM1 and TM2 starts the timer display countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed on each of the two timer notice displays TM1 and TM2. Both the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 count down according to the lapse of the actual time. At the timing shown in FIG. 328 (B3), both the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the second timer notice display TM2 are "09:73". The countdown speed is not limited to the above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the countdown speed may be slower or faster than the actual passage of time. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (B3), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time to be added is notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 328 (B4), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM1 is updated to "19:00", and 10 seconds is added to the time on the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1. The state is shown. At this time, since the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 is not added, the difference of 10 seconds between the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 and the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2. Is occurring. Therefore, although the two timer advance notice effects have been started, the timing at which the countdown ends is different because the time is added to one of the timer displays in the middle.

In this production example, the time is added to the timer display of one of the two timer notice displays, but the time may be shortened (subtracted) or during the execution of the timer notice effect. The countdown of either one of the timer displays may be paused so that the time until the countdown is completed is different.

Further, in this effect example, the case where the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time has been described, but the two timer advance notice effects may be started at different timings. In this case, for example, the timer advance notice started earlier may be started. The time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the effect, and after the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later is completed, the timer notice effect started earlier The countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display may be completed. In addition, the time is shortened with respect to the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later, and before the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started earlier is completed. In addition, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display related to the timer notice effect started later may be completed.

Further, in this effect example, when the timer addition effect is performed while the two timer notice effects are being performed, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to one of the timer notice effects. However, the time is added to the timer display in the timer notice display related to any timer notice effect (or the time is shortened, the countdown is paused, etc.), and the display mode of any timer notice display is also changed. You may change it.

In addition, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, two timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) corresponding to each timer advance notice effect are performed, whereby the timer advance notice related to the timer advance notice effect is performed. The time may be added to the timer display in the display for each of them.

Further, after the two timer advance notice effects are started, three timer addition effects (timer shortening, countdown pause, etc.) are performed, for example, for one of the two timer advance notice effects. The timer display may be changed by two timer addition effects or the like, and the timer display may be changed by the remaining one timer addition effect or the like with respect to the other timer advance effect. Further, three timer addition effects and the like are performed, and for example, the timer display may be changed only by two of the three timer addition effects and the like, or only by one of the three timer addition effects and the like. The timer display may be changed, or the timer display may not be changed by any of the three timer addition effects.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 328 (C1) to 328 (C4), in the effect of prompting the operation of any of the plurality of operating means, the remaining time display timer indicating the operation valid period for each of the plurality of operating means is set. The state of being displayed is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 328 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is displayed. Is displayed as "1" indicating that is 1. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C1), the button effect is started. Specifically, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are displayed side by side. Corresponding to the left door image DRL, the left key image 137aL imitating the left key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the left door image DRL, and below the left key image 137aL. , The remaining time display meter MT1 is displayed. Further, corresponding to the right door image DRR, the right key image 137aR imitating the right key constituting the operation key unit 137 is displayed overlapping with the right door image DRR, and is displayed below the right key image 137aR. The remaining time display meter MT2 is displayed in. After that, the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 is started, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 by the player can be accepted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 328 (C2), the gauges of the remaining time display meters MT1 and MT2 corresponding to the left door image DRL and the right door image DRR are reduced after the operation validity period is started. The situation is shown. In this production example, the operation valid period of the right key corresponding to the right door image DRR is shorter than the operation valid period of the left key corresponding to the left door image DRL, so that the operation valid period elapses earlier. It has become. Therefore, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 corresponding to the right door image DRR decreases faster than the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 corresponding to the left door image DRL.

FIG. 328 (C3) shows a state in which the left key is operated by the player to select the left door image DRL. Specifically, the left door image DRL is moved to the center of the display screen and enlarged and displayed, and the left key image 137aL and the remaining time display meter MT1 are erased. Further, the right door image DRR is erased together with the right key image 137aR and the remaining time display meter MT2. As a result, it is notified that the left door image DRL has been selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (C4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the door of the left door image DRL opens, and shows how the replay symbol RP appears. As a result, for example, it is foretold that a pseudo-ream will be performed.

On the other hand, in the case shown in FIG. 328 (C2), when the right key is operated to select the right door image DRR, as shown in FIG. 328 (C4a), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the right door image. The door of the DRR may open and a pine pattern CC may appear. The word "Gekiatsu" is added to the pine pattern CC, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot has increased dramatically.

In this way, in this production example, when the one with the faster gauge reduction is selected from the two remaining time display meters, a more reliable notice display is performed. You may select to display the same display. Further, when the one with the slower gauge decrease is selected from the two remaining time display meters, the notice display with higher reliability may be performed.

Further, in this production example, the operation valid period of the left door image DRL is shorter than the operation valid period of the right door image DRR, but the length of the operation valid period may be the same. For example, even if the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT2 of the right door image DRR becomes 0, wait until the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT1 of the left door image DRL becomes 0, and operate the right key. It may be enabled, or the right key operation may be disabled during standby.

FIG. 329 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 329, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 329 (A1) to (A12) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. In this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size (default display size), and when the timer notice effect is started and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it is displayed in a small size. .. Here, when the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started, the size may be at least small. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 is large before the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in a size, it may be displayed in another size, or the display mode itself may be different.

The timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A2) continues to count down the timer display, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (A3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also decorated. It is changed to substantially the center of the symbol display device 208. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1 that is enlarged and displayed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the enlarged display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the enlarged display animation is being performed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the size of the timer display portion may not change, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged. Further, in this production example, when the timer display becomes "03:00", the timer notice display TM1 is always enlarged and displayed, but it may not be enlarged. For example, the timer notice may not be displayed. When the display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be easier to win a big hit than when it is not enlarged. Further, in this effect example, the display position is changed when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the display position may not be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A4) to (A7), the countdown in the enlarged timer notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "0:00". Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 329 (A6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the enlarged timer notice display TM1. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display, "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed. The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). The timer notice display TM1 may be deleted as it is without being reduced and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 329 (A10), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol moves at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A11), the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 329 (A12), the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this effect example, in the timer notice effect, when the timer display becomes "03:00" indicating 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is reduced. It may be displayed, the color of the frame may be changed, the color of the timer display (numerical part) may be changed, the shape of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer notice may be changed. The orientation of the display TM1 may be changed (for example, changed from horizontal to vertical), the timer notice display TM1 may be rotated, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the timer may be changed. Other elements such as characters and symbols may be added to the notice display TM1, the time may be added to the timer display, the time may be shortened to the timer display, and the timer display may be added. The countdown of the timer may be stopped, the countdown speed of the timer display may be increased, the timer display may be counted up (rewind), or the timer notice display TM1 may be split and newly added. The timer notice display may be displayed, or when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed, these timer notice displays may be integrated and changed to one timer notice display.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to two sizes, a small size and a large size, but it may be changed to three or more sizes, for example, a timer display or the like. When the character display of "attention" is displayed in red, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in medium size, and when the timer display or the character display of "attention" is displayed in gold, the timer notice display TM1 is large. It may be displayed in size. As a result, for example, the display mode may be changed according to the reliability of the jackpot.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from a small size to a large size, but for example, the size may be changed from a small size to a medium size and then to a large size. For example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "05:00", the size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a medium size, and when it becomes "03:00", the size changes from a medium size to a large size. It may be changed to the size. Further, although it changes from a small size to a medium size, it may not change to a large size.

Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). The size of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a large size when the remaining time in the timer display becomes "0:00", or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed when the character "attention" is displayed. The size may be changed to a large size.

Further, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the frame of the timer notice display TM1 and the background color (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer notice display TM1 (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer notice display TM1.

Further, for example, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the color of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 or the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of gold> red> green> blue, etc.). ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the size of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention" (for example, the reliability is higher in the order of large size> medium size> small size, etc. ). Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the shape of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the character display of "attention".

Further, a certain effect may be likely to appear when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. For example, when the timer notice display TM1 is changed to a large size, the pseudo-continuous symbol is likely to stop. You may do so.

Further, in this effect example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is completed, a specific effect is performed, but even if the countdown is completed, no effect may be performed. You may. Here, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, a certain effect may be easily performed when the countdown is completed, and a big hit may be easily performed.

Further, in this production example, when the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 starts, the timer notice display TM1 is set to a small size display mode, but at the start of the countdown or the display start of the timer notice display TM1. It may be a large size display mode.

Further, in this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, the timer display also changes to a large size, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a large size, and the timer display You may not change the size of. Further, the size of the timer display may not be changed, and only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed to a small size. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a large size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed. Further, although the size of the timer display is changed to a small size, the size of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not be changed.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the color of the frame portion or the background of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the color of the timer display may also change. Further, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 changes, but the color of the timer display may not change. Further, although the color of the timer display changes, the color of the frame portion (and / or the background portion) of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the display mode may be changed by changing the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, when the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may also change. Further, although the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the shape (font) of the timer display may not change. Further, although the shape (font) of the timer display changes, the shape of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

Further, the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by animation. In this case, for example, when the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes its form due to the animation, the form of the timer display may also change due to the animation. Further, although the form of the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 changes due to the animation, the timer display may not change. Further, although the form of the timer display changes depending on the animation, the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may not change.

As the effect example shown in FIGS. 329 (B1) to (B4), another example in which the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect is shown. At the timing shown in FIG. 329 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "00:31" and counting down the timer display. Further, in the first decorative symbol, "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and the middle symbol and the right symbol are being displayed in a variable manner.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 329 (B2) to (B3), the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 is continuously performed until the timer display becomes "0:00". Here, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (B2), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, but it is overlapped by the timer notice display TM1.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 329 (B4), the timer notice display TM1 instead of the timer display, "attention" to call attention to the notice. Character is displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, and the display position is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208.
The characters "attention" are enlarged and displayed in accordance with the enlarged timer notice display TM1. After the timer display becomes "00:00", the character "attention" may not be displayed, or no effect may be performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. In this way, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed not only during the countdown of the timer display but also when the character "attention" is displayed. Further, when the timer display becomes "00:00", the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

FIG. 330 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

The production example shown in FIGS. 330 (A1) to 330 (A3) is an example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change in the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. Shown. In the production example shown in FIGS. 330 (A1) to (A3), in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (a), the sub display device 208S replaces the family crest accessory 224E with the decorative symbol display device 208. It is located below. The upper end portion of the sub display device 208S overlaps at least a part of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 330 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and the timer notice display TM1 is arranged in the upper center of the sub display device 208. On the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as the timer display, and the countdown is performed. That is, in this effect example, when the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in a small size on the sub display device 208S. When the effect of the countdown by the timer notice display TM1 is started, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a small size.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (A2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the sub-display device 208S, the timer display countdown continues on the timer notice display TM1, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (A2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (A3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the sub display device 208S moves to the decorative symbol display device 208, and further. Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the enlarged timer notice display TM1, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the sub display device 208S to the decorative symbol display device 208, or the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed from the sub display device 208S as a decorative symbol. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the sub display device 208S and the decorative symbol display device 208. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed.

The effect example shown in FIGS. 330 (B1) to 330 (B3) is another example of displaying the timer notice display TM1 after the change of the display mode on another display means when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. An example is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in the sub display device 208S, the navigation character YM, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h11 to h14 can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (B1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. On the other hand, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in this second hold number display, it is indicated that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, "09:69" is displayed as a timer display and a countdown is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (B2), the decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (B2). Further, at this time, the sub display device 208S is operating, rises along the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, is located on the front side in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is located on the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps with the displayed decorative design and timer notice display TM1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. Further, while the sub-display device 208S is rising, the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S are erased. The variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub-display device 208S may be deleted before the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. It may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S starts moving, or it may be erased at the timing when the sub-display device 208S completes the movement. Further, only one of the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be deleted. Further, the display positions of the variable icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM displayed on the sub display device 208S may be changed to the decorative symbol display device 208.

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (B3), when the timer display has 3 seconds remaining, the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the sub display device 208S, and further, Timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed. When the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, it may be moved and enlarged by animation. In this case, the timer notice display TM1 may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. Here, the timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is completely moved from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub display device 208S, or the timer notice display TM1 may be sub-displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208. The enlarged display may be performed while moving across the display device 208S, or the timer advance notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed before straddling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S. The countdown continues while the enlarged display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the movement and enlarged display animations are being performed. In this production example, when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer notice display TM1 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed on the sub display device 208S, but the decorative symbol display device 208 is used. May continue to display the timer notice display TM1. In this case, for example, the size of the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced for display. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S, the timer display on these timer notice display TM1 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. ..

The production examples shown in FIGS. 330 (C1) to 330 (C9) show another example of the display mode after the change of the timer notice display TM1. At the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 329 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

The timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330 (C2) continues to count down the timer display, and “03:01” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C2).

Then, as shown in FIG. 330 (C3), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes. The timer notice display TM1a after the change has a mode in which the timer display is arranged inside the circular meter. As shown in FIGS. 330 (C3) to 330 (C6), the display state of this circular meter unit changes in a manner in which the gauge decreases clockwise from the 12 o'clock position with the passage of time. Although a part of the timer notice display TM1a after the change in the display mode overlaps with the variable icon h0, the variable icon h0 may be overlapped with the timer notice display TM1a. Further, the timer notice display TM1a has the same size until the countdown is completed, but the size may be changed depending on the remaining time, for example, the circular meter portion is enlarged when the remaining 1 second is reached. It may be displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed may be composed of only a circular meter unit so that the timer display is not performed. Further, the first decorative symbol overlaps with the timer advance notice display TM1a after the display mode is changed, and it is said that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. The first decorative symbol may overlap with the timer notice display TM1a whose display mode has changed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes, the change display by animation may be performed. In this case, the countdown is continuously performed while the change display animation is being performed, but the countdown may be interrupted while the change display animation is being performed. Further, when the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed and displayed, the timer display portion may not be changed, but only the frame portion of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 330 (C4) to 330 (C6), the countdown and the gauge decrease display on the timer notice display TM1a are continuously performed until the timer display becomes "00:00". In this production example, the countdown effect is performed by both the countdown by the timer display and the decrease display of the gauge of the circular meter unit. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C5), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol, and at the timing shown in FIG. 330 (C6), "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. Is difficult to see due to the timer notice display TM1a. When the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, the stop symbol may be arranged on the front side of the timer notice display TM1a.

When the display on the timer notice display TM1a becomes "00:00" and the countdown is completed, as shown in FIG. 330 (C7), the timer notice display TM1a "continues" to the effect that a pseudo continuous effect is performed instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, character display other than "continuation" may be performed. For example, when the timer display countdown is completed and the process shifts to SP reach, "SP reach" or the like is displayed and SP reach is displayed. You may notify that the transition will occur. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, "attention" may be displayed in order to pay attention to the occurrence of the notice.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 330 (C8), the timer notice display TM1a is erased, and then, as shown in FIG. 330 (A9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the lord is displayed in the middle symbol. The display in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved from the top to the bottom at a low speed is started. After that, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-ream is executed.

In this production example, the character "continue" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1a to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. However, for example, a question mark is added to the character "continue" to notify the pseudo-ream. The display may be performed so that the effect may not be performed. Further, in such a case, for example, when a pseudo-continuous production is performed, the big hit may be determined.

Further, in this effect example, when a plurality of timer notice displays are displayed for the same effect, one of the timer notice displays may be displayed in a large size, or both. The timer notice display may be displayed in a large size. Further, one timer notice display is displayed with a timer of "03:00", and the other timer notice display is roughly displayed with, for example, "3 seconds left". A countdown may be displayed.

FIG. 331 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 331, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 331 (A1) to 331 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A1), the timer notice effect is started, "09:69" is displayed in the timer notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A2), it is shown that the timer addition effect by the navigation character YM is being performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the timer addition effect is started, a balloon displaying the characters "addition" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the time is added to the timer display on the timer notice display TM1. You will be notified that it will be done. That is, it is notified that the countdown time performed in the timer advance notice effect is extended.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 331 (A3), in the balloon of the navigation character YM, "+10 seconds" indicating the time to be added is displayed, and the time to be added is notified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "05:00" indicating that the timer display has 5 seconds remaining, and the display position is also a decorative symbol display. It is changed to approximately the center of device 208. In this production example, the countdown is temporarily interrupted at "05:00", but the countdown may be continued. Here, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the timer notice display TM1 is added to the timer display. Is enlarged and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the balloon of the navigation character YM, but the balloon of the navigation character YM is enlarged. It may be overlapped with TM1. Further, the condition for enlarging the timer notice display TM1 is not limited to the addition of time in the timer display, and when the timer display changes, for example, when the time in the timer display is shortened or when the countdown is stopped. The timer notice display TM1 may be enlarged and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 331 (A5), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A6), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 10 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. .. The countdown display may be stopped or the countdown display may be advanced while the timer addition effect is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (A7), the balloon of the navigation character YM is erased, and then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (A8), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size. And the display position is also changed to the original position. After that, the timer display countdown is restarted.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 331 (B1) to 331 (B7) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the timer display time is added in the timer notice effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol, the left symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped, and the right symbol shows that "decoration 7" is stopped. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown display of the timer display is completed, and "0:00" is displayed. There is.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B2), the timer notice display TM1 moves to substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "attention" to attract attention to the notice instead of the timer display. Character is displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (B3), when the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed, the timer display is performed again, and "00:00" is displayed as the timer display. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the pseudo-continuous symbol in which the character of the lord is represented on the middle symbol is displayed to move at a low speed from the upper side to the lower side. Pseudo-continuous production by this pseudo-continuous pattern is continuously performed from FIG. 331 (B3) to FIG. (B7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 331 (B4), the enlarged timer notice display TM1 displays a count-up animation, and an effect of adding time in the timer display is performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B5), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated to "15:00", and it is shown that 15 seconds are added to the time in the timer display. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 331 (B6), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown is restarted thereafter. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped at the middle symbol, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 331 (B7), a cut-in display including the character of the lord and the character display of "continuation" is performed, and then the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display is counted down, and the timer display is "14:92" at the timing shown in FIG. 331 (B7).

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 332, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 332 (A1) to 332 (A8) show that the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed when the display mode of the timer notice display changes and the rank of the notice is increased. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A1), a timer advance notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (A2).

FIG. 332 (A3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (A3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 332 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and the timer notice display TM1 The color of the frame has been changed from white to red, and "LvUP" is added to indicate that the reliability of the jackpot has increased. Then, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is also changed to substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 has been upgraded. Although the timer display countdown is continuously performed, the countdown may be temporarily interrupted while the enlarged display is displayed. Here, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is not enlarged and displayed because the remaining time of the timer display is a predetermined time, but the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is a display with high reliability of the jackpot. The timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed by changing the mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A5), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed in the original size, and the display position is also changed to the original position (substantially right center of the display screen). At this time, the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 remains red, but the display of "LvUP" is erased. The timer notice display TM1 may be displayed in its original size without being reduced.

As shown in FIG. 332 (A6), the display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", and when the countdown is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is replaced with the timer display as shown in FIG. 332 (A7). The word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice.

Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene is switched to the cut-in display indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. In this cut-in display, along with the princess character, the characters "Suddenly hot" suggesting that the jackpot is highly reliable are displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), in response to the timer advance notice display TM1 being ranked up, the character display of "expected large" is added. As a result, it is easier to win a big hit than when a cut-in display without the character display of "expected large" is displayed. The character display of "expected large" may or may not be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up. Further, the character display of "expected large" may be displayed on condition that the timer notice display TM1 is lamped up, or may be displayed even if the timer notice display TM1 is not ranked up. You may. In this production example, the character display of "expected large" is more likely to be displayed when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up than when it is not ranked up. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (A7), the display of the variable icon h0 is also changed to display the notice. The change in the display of the variable icon h0 may be performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect, or may be performed regardless of the timer advance notice effect. That is, when the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, a notice different from the notice given by the timer notice effect may be given.

As described above, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer notice display TM1 may be a notification indicating that the notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect is promoted, or the timer notice may be given. The rank-up of the display TM1 itself may function as a notice of chance-up. Further, by increasing the rank of the timer notice display TM1, it may be notified in advance that the expectation that a notice with high reliability of the big hit is displayed has increased.

Further, in this effect example, the rank-up of the timer notice display TM1 suggests that the notice performed as a result of the completion of the countdown in the timer notice effect may be promoted. For example, the first decorative symbol is used. It may suggest that the design of the reach in the above may be promoted. Specifically, for example, when the reach is produced by "decoration 2" in which the probability change jackpot is not confirmed, the timer notice display TM1 is ranked up, and if the jackpot is reached, the probability variation jackpot is achieved. May change to the reach of "decoration 7", which is likely to be a big hit.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 332 (B1) to 332 (B7) show how the effect using the chance-up meter is started when the timer advance notice effect is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size, and it is shown that the swordsman has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "20:35" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), an animation of a duel scene between the main character and the swordsman who plays the enemy has started to be displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B2), the chance up meter CMT is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. In the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 332 (B2), in addition to the start point SP and the final point GP, the first checkpoint CP1, the second checkpoint CP2, and the third checkpoint CP3 are arranged. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B2).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B3), it is shown that the Sabohani character SBH has started moving from the starting point SP. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B3).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 332 (B4), at the timing when the Sabohani character SBH reaches the first checkpoint CP1, the Boy character BOY appears from the right side of the display screen and moves toward the left side. It is shown how to do it. That is, it is shown that the announcement of the chance increase due to the appearance of the boy character BOY is being made. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 332 (B4), when the Boy character BOY appears, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed so that the Boy character BOY stands out. That is, by reducing the timer notice display TM1 to display, it may be possible not to interfere with the display of the boy character BOY, and that the boy character BOY has given notice of a chance increase. It may be easily recognizable. Even if the timer advance notice display TM1 is reduced in size, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 332 (B4). The timer display countdown may be interrupted while the reduced display is displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 332 (B4) to (B6), the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1 is maintained until the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 332 (B7), when the notice of chance up by the boy character BOY is completed, the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed in the original size.

In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size while the chance-up notice is being given to notify that the chance-up notice is being given. The purpose may be achieved by changing the display mode. For example, in addition to the reduced display of the timer notice display TM1, the enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1, the change in the color of the frame of the timer notice display TM1 or the timer display itself, the change in the display position of the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by changing the shape of the display TM1 or the like.

FIG. 333 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 333, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 333 (A1) to (A3) show a state in which the display position of the timer notice display displayed at the time of transition to the super reach is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A1), a state of transition to super reach is shown. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "21:37" and counting down the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman of the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (A3), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. The timer notice display TM1 changes the display position when the animation display of the duel scene is started. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the central portion of the right end of the display screen is changed to the lower right corner of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 333 (A3'), the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed to make the super reach effect stand out.

In this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is moved at the timing when the animation display of the duel scene starts, but when the production shift to the super reach shown in FIG. 333 (A1) is performed. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the title of the super reach shown in FIG. 333 (A2) is displayed. May be good. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may be configured to move to the original position again at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed as it is. Further, even when the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed, it is enlarged (for example, displayed first) at a specific timing (for example, 3 seconds before or when it becomes 0, the chance of the timer notice display TM1 is increased, etc.). It may be displayed in a larger size or larger than the originally displayed size).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 333 (B1) to (B7) show how to change the display position of the timer notice display that was displayed when the effect movable body operates. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "27:37", and the timer display is being counted down.

FIG. 333 (B2) shows that the first large board behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "25:34" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B2). Here, the timer notice display TM1 has at least a part overlapped by the second large board behavior accessory 224 Gb and the fourth large board behavior accessory 224 Gd, and the timer notice display is more than in the non-overlapping state. It is said that TM1 is difficult to see.

Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B3), the timer advance notice display TM1 changes the display position to a position where it does not overlap with the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed at the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper end of the center of the display screen. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, when the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed, the timer notice display TM1 may be reduced and displayed. If the 1st large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior accessory 224Gd do not operate, the display position may not be changed, but the display position may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (B4), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. At this time, the effect image that appears when the light guide plate IL emits light is overlapped with the timer notice display TM1, but the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is not changed accordingly. The display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed when the light guide plate IL emits light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 333 (B5), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 333 (B6), the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd are initially set. Return to position.

Then, as shown in FIG. 333 (B7), the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed to the original position (center portion at the right end of the display screen). In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (B7). The timing at which the timer advance notice display TM1 moves to the original position may be the same as the timing at which the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position. , The timer notice display TM1 may be moved to the original position after the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd start the operation of returning to the initial position, or the timer notice display TM1 may be moved. After starting to move to the original position, the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd may start the operation of returning to the initial position.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 333 (C1) to (C5) show how the positional relationship between the timer notice display and the decorative symbol is changed. At the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the first hold icon h11 is displayed, and in the second hold number display, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1. "1" indicating that is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C1), the timer advance notice effect is started, "29:69" is displayed in the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer display is counted down. Further, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C2), it is shown that the “decoration 7” is stopped in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and is in the reach state. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "22:04" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C2). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C3), the reach effect is started, the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed upward to the left and right, respectively, and the variable icon h0 is displayed. , Navi character YM and hold icon h11 are framed out and hidden. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "21:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C3). At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the right symbol of the first decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1 may overlap with the first decorative symbol.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4) shows how it has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C4), the title of the super reach in which the image of the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C4). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 333 (C5), an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 333 (C5). Also at this time, the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the first decorative symbol. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen, the above-mentioned chance-up meter CMT is displayed, and an effect using the chance-up meter is performed.

FIG. 334 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 334, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 334 (A1) to 334 (A10) show how the display position of the timer notice display is changed by the operation of the player. At the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A1), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of holds, "1" indicating that the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1 is displayed. There is. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A1) shows a transition to super reach. Specifically, it is suggested that the left and right symbols move to the upper left corner and the upper right corner, respectively, and then shift to super reach. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “21:37” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A2), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "20:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A2).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A3), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A3). Further, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player can lower it. It has been notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed by operating the key. In this production example, the guide display is displayed when the animation display of the duel scene is started, but it may be displayed from the time when the timer advance notice production is started, or when the reach state is reached. It may be displayed in.

After that, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed and its display position is displayed as shown in FIG. 334 (A5). change. Specifically, the timer notice display TM1 displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen is changed to the upper part of the guide display. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced and displayed. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, when the lower key of the operation key unit 137 is operated, the timer notice display TM1 may be hidden. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A5). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A5), the characters "enlarge timer" are displayed together with the icon of the upper key of the operation key unit 137, and the timer advance notice display TM1 is enlarged by the player operating the upper key. Then, it is displayed in the original size, and it is notified that the display position also returns to the original position.

After that, when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A6), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size as shown in FIG. 334 (A7). , The display position also returns to the original position. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "17:81" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A7). Further, in the guide display shown in FIG. 334 (A7), the guide display is performed in which the characters "reduce timer" are displayed together with the icon of the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and the player operates the lower key. As a result, it is notified that the timer notice display TM1 can be reduced and displayed. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 334 (A3), when the upper key of the operation key unit 137 is operated when the timer notice display TM1 has the default display size and the default display position, The timer notice display TM1 may be further enlarged and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A8), it is shown that the animation display of the duel scene is continuing. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "03:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (A8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (A9), when the timer display reaches "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are left, the guide display displayed at the lower right of the display screen is deleted. , It is shown that the display position (display size) of the timer notice display TM1 cannot be changed. It should be noted that the display position and display size of the timer notice display TM1 may be continuously changed. If the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed when the timer display becomes "03:00" and the timer display is reduced, the display size returns to the default display position at this timing. It may be done so that it may remain reduced at the changed display position.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (A10), the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", indicating that the countdown is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 334 (B1) to (B9) show that the timer notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer notice effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the title of the super reach in which the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed in a large size is displayed, and it is shown that the swordsman has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B1), a timer notice effect is performed, and “20:35” is displayed in the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display is counted down.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B2), the animation of the duel scene with the swordsman who plays the enemy role of the main character, the lord, has started to be displayed. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "18:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B2).

FIG. 334 (B3) shows how the animation display of the duel scene continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B3).

After that, as shown in FIG. 334 (B4), an effect image is displayed around the timer notice display TM1 at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display has 15 seconds remaining, and then FIG. 334. As shown in (B5), the timer notice display is divided into two. Here, the timer notice display displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays may be referred to as the left timer notice display TM1L, and the timer notice display displayed on the right side may be referred to as the right timer notice display TM2R. The timer displays on these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 334 (B5), they indicate "13:56", respectively. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of timer advance notice displays to be divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Further, in these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, the color of the frame has changed to red, but the color of the frame does not have to change, and the case where the color of the frame changes to red is the case of the frame. It may be easier to make a big hit than when the color does not change. Further, only the color of one of the frames of the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R may be changed to red.

After that, when the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R becomes "00:00" as shown in FIG. 334 (B6), the timer display on the timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R as shown in FIG. 334 (B7). Instead, the word "attention" is displayed to encourage attention to the notice. Then, as shown in FIG. 334 (B8), it is shown that the decorative pattern display device 208 is displaying a cut-in indicating that the princess character is saying "I will rewrite the reach". There is. This cut-in display is an effect performed by completing the countdown of the timer display on one of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R (for example, the left timer notice display TM1L), and is a reliable jackpot. This is to notify that the player will be promoted to a higher reach production. It should be noted that the effect may be performed when the countdown of the timer display in both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9) shows how the SP swordsman reach has evolved. The SP swordsman reach is a reach in which the swordsman reach develops and shifts, and is a reach production that is more likely to be a big hit than when the swordsman reach does not develop into the SP swordsman reach. As shown in Fig. 334 (B9), the SP swordsman reach is the same as the pre-development swordsman reach in that the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other, but he follows the panda as an assistant to the hero's lord. It differs from the point in that the full moon appears in the background. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 334 (B9), a notice display showing how the Copanda cheering party KPD composed of three Copanda characters is cheering is performed, and the SP swordsman reach It informs that the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased. This Copanda cheering party KPD is a notice character displayed when the countdown of the timer display on the other timer notice display (for example, the right timer notice display TM1R) of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R is completed.

In this production example, the chance-up notice and reach production are developed corresponding to each of the two timer notice displays, but one production (development of reach production) is provided corresponding to the two timer notice displays. It can be said that the chance-up production is performed even in the developed reach production.

FIG. 335 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer notice effect.

In FIG. 335, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 335 (A1) to (A5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 335 (A1) to 335 (A5), the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 302 (b) is applied, and the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L overlaps the decorative member. The image displayed in the area is also visually recognizable. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The family crest accessory 224E and the Senryo box accessory 224H are not shown for the sake of simplicity.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (A1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed, which has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach). .. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 335 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. The indicated "1" is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a timer advance notice effect is performed, "15:47" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (A2), the animation of the duel scene is continuously performed. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "15:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A2).

After that, as shown in FIG. 335 (A3), a predetermined effect is applied to the display area in the vicinity of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the display area in the vicinity of the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An image is displayed, suggesting that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N operate. Further, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "14:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A3).

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (A4), it is shown that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N reciprocate left and right along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. At this time, the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. That is, it is shown that the timer notice display is divided into two. After the operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completed, the timer display may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The timer display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the timer display displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N each indicate the same time, and at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A4), "13: 56 ”is shown. Although the timer display countdown continues even during the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. May interrupt the countdown of the timer display. In this production example, it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is increased by dividing the timer notice display into two. The number of timer advance notice displays to be divided is not limited to two, and may be three or more. The larger the number of divisions, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. For example, in addition to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the timer display may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

After that, as shown in FIG. 335 (A5), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each return to their initial positions. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the timer display countdown continues, and "12:19" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 335 (A5).

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 335 (B1) to (B5) show a timer advance notice effect using a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Here, in the production example shown in FIGS. 335 (B1) to (B5), a mini display device 208P is provided in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini display device 208P is provided at an appropriate position on, for example, the game board 200 or the front frame door 106 (see FIG. 289). In this production example, for example, a dot matrix type display device in which full-color LEDs are arranged in a matrix is adopted, but other display devices such as LCD, EL, 7-segment display, lamps, and drums may be used. The mini display device 208P is provided with a shutter member, and the mini display device 208P can be changed between an easy-to-see state and a difficult-to-see state by driving the shutter member.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1) shows that the display device 208 has evolved into a super reach (swordsman reach), and an animation of a duel scene between the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy role is being performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and in the second display of the number of reservations, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1. 1 "is displayed. The variable icon h0 is also displayed. The hold icon h11 and the navigation character YM are framed out and hidden. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 335 (B1) is performing a timer notice effect, and the timer notice display TM1 is displaying "18:19" and counting down the timer display. In addition, the timer advance notice effect is also performed on the mini display device 208P, "6:19" is displayed as the timer display, and the timer display is counted down. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that two timer notice effects are performed in parallel, and the timer display is set to "0" in the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In that case, an effect such as a chance-up notice may be performed, and even if the timer display becomes "0" in the timer advance effect on the mini display device 208P, an effect such as a chance-up notice is performed. In some cases.

After that, as shown in FIG. 335 (B2), the timer notice display is displayed at the timing of "15:00" indicating that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has 15 seconds remaining. The effect image is displayed around TM1 and the countdown is interrupted. On the other hand, even in the mini display device 208P, the countdown is interrupted at the timing of "3:00" indicating that the timer display has 3 seconds remaining.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B3), in the mini display device 208P, instead of the timer display, the timer display time indicated on the mini display device 208P is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a timer notice display. The character "UP" indicating that the timer is added to the timer display of TM1 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 335 (B4), a time of 3 seconds is added to the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the time is updated to "18:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 335 (B5), the timer notice display TM1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 restarts the countdown of the timer display. At the timing shown in FIG. 335 (B5), the timer display is "17:99". On the other hand, in the mini display device 208P, the display screen is difficult to see due to the shutter member. In this production example, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM on the decorative symbol display device 208 is added with time, the timer effect on the mini display device 208P is terminated, but the decorative symbol display is performed. Even if time is added to the timer display of the timer advance notice display TM in the device 208, the timer display in the mini display device 208P may not end, and then the timer display may be counted down.

FIG. 336 is a diagram showing stepwise examples of other effects of the timer advance notice effect.

In FIG. 336, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the normal figure hold lamp 216 and the fourth The symbol display device 284a is not shown.

An example of the effect shown in FIGS. 336 (A1) to 336 (A10) is a state in which the timer advance notice effect is notified by displaying that the timer advance notice effect is being prepared before the start. Shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold number display shows. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A2), it is shown that the timer advance notice preparation effect has started. Specifically, when the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen, the timer notice preparation effect is started. The timer advance notice preparation effect is intended to give the player a sense of expectation by displaying that the preparation is in progress until the timer advance notice effect starts. At the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A2), nothing is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, for example, the display of "STANDBY" described later may be performed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A3) shows that the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed. When the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is completed, "STANDBY" indicating that the timer notice effect is being prepared is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify the fact. That is, in this production example, it is a production performed as one mode of the look-ahead notice for notifying that the timer notice production will be performed in the hold. It should be noted that the change notice may be used to give notice that the timer notice effect will be performed in the changing symbol display.

Then, as shown in FIG. 336 (A4), the timer notice display TM1 on which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed changes its display position to a position below the second hold display unit. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is reduced in size and becomes a mini size display size. When changing the display position, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while being reduced may be displayed, or the display position may be switched for display. Further, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be reduced in size after the display position is changed, or may be reduced in size and then the display position may be changed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 may not be reduced and displayed, and the display position may not be changed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1". At this time, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A6), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. As described above, it can be said that the timer advance notice preparation effect is an effect that may be performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A7), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1 in which the characters "STANDBY" are displayed is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A8), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the earliest hold of the special figure 1. The timer advance notice display TM1 is still displayed below the second hold display unit. It should be noted that the symbol variation display this time corresponds to the hold that was the target of pre-reading.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A9), the timer notice display TM1 is enlarged and displayed and returns to the original size, and the display position also returns to the original position, and the timer is displayed from the display of "STANDBY". It is shown that the display is switched to "10:00". As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect has been started. When changing the display position of the timer notice display TM1, an animation in which the timer notice display TM1 moves while expanding may be displayed, or the display position may be switched and displayed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed and then enlarged and displayed, or the enlarged display and then the display position may be changed. Further, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display, or the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed after the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. The display of may be switched to the timer display. Further, the timing at which the display of the timer notice display TM1 is switched to the timer display and the timing at which the display position of the timer notice display TM1 is changed may be the same.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (A10) shows that the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has started.

After that, for example, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes a display at a specific time (for example, "03:00") or when the display mode changes, the display size of the timer notice display TM1 is changed. You may change from a small size to a large size.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 336 (B1) to 336 (B8), a plurality of clock warning icons MI1 that function as pre-reading notices are stocked, and timer notice production is performed for the number of stocked clock warning icons MI1. Is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B1), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 336 (A1), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 3, the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the second hold number display shows. , "3" indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, is displayed. In addition, the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM are also displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B2), a state in which "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol is shown. A clock notice icon MI1 is added to this "decoration 3", indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked. In addition, the notice icon MI1 of two or more clocks may be stocked at one time.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B3), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “Decoration 3-Decoration 9-Decoration 1”. Further, below the second decorative symbol, a timer notice stock display area TMst indicating the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1 is displayed. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 1" indicating that one clock notice icon MI1 is stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least once during the hold. It should be noted that the time may be added to the timer display in the timer notice effect by the number of stocks of the clock notice icon MI1. Further, the remaining time to be displayed on the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is started may be determined according to the number of stocks of the clock advance notice icon MI1. In the timer notice stock display area TMst, the number of stocks is added each time the notice icon MI1 of the clock appears.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B4), it is shown that the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. In addition, it is shown that the navigation character notice is being given by the navigation character YM. This navigation character notice is performed by displaying a balloon in the vicinity of the navigation character YM in which the characters "get" are displayed together with the clock icon. The navigation character notice in this production example functions as a pre-reading notice that the timer notice production is performed in the hold. In this way, the number of clock notice icons MI1 stocked in one symbol variation display is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of effects performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked. Further, in the effect performed when the notice icon MI1 of the clock is stocked, the number of the notice icons MI1 of the clock to be stocked is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B5), it is shown that the display is stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 1-Decoration 7". Further, in the timer notice stock display area TMst, "timer notice stock x 3" indicating that the notice icons MI1 of the three clocks are stocked is displayed. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is performed at least three times during the hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B6), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B7), one of the three stocked notice icons MI1 of the clock is digested, and the timer notice effect is started. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the timer notice display TM1, "10:00" is displayed as the timer display, and it is suggested that the chance-up notice may be given 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Further, in this production example, one clock notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect, but two clock notice icons MI1 are digested and two timer notice effects are performed in parallel. You may do it. Further, in this effect example, one timer advance notice icon MI1 is digested to start one timer notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 336 (B7'), the clock notice icon MI1 is used. The timer advance notice effect may be started without digestion.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 336 (B8), the timer notice display TM1 changes the display position to the substantially right center of the display screen, and the timer display countdown is started. At this time, the display position of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed by a movement animation. When the notice icon MI1 of the clock is digested and the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may not be displayed in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed in the center of the right end of the display screen from the beginning. ..

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 337 to 390. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

FIGS. 337 to 390 are diagrams that stepwise show the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 337 to 390, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 337 to 390, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 337 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 338 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 337 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 337 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 337 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 and the display of the number of second holdings in addition to the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 337 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are both default display modes. It is displayed in (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 337 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. I am trying not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 337 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (3), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "chance", suggesting that there is a high possibility of a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (6), the third stop is performed, the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 337 (7), the navigation is performed. The character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the character YM, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (8), after the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, it is shown that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream has started. ing. After that, as shown in FIG. 337 (9), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (11), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 337 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 337 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN cross the Sabohani group notice. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectations for big hits. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of Sabohani group notices are provided according to the reliability of the jackpot, and the strong Sabohani group notice in which the Sabohani character SBHN is the second number and the Sabohani character SBHN are the first number. A weak Sabohani group notice (a number less than the second number) may be executed. The Sabohani group notice shown in FIG. 337 (13) is a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (14), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 337 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 337 (16), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. In this button notice effect, the button reception time meter may be displayed to notify the operation validity period.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 337 (17), as shown in FIG. 337 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a close-up image of the character of the lord and a “game” in the balloon. A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Ja" is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the chief is not decorated around the characters "game" in the balloon, and is a big hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It suggests that the reliability of is low.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 338 (19) following FIG. 337 (18), the screen in which the main character, the lord, was defeated by the swordsman who played the enemy role and was defeated is displayed, and at the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208. , "Decoration 6" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 338 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 339 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 340 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 339 stepwise. is there. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 339 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the timer notice display TM1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to display the decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (4), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM. There is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 339 (7), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (7). After that, as shown in FIG. 339 (8), the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (8).

After that, as shown in FIG. 339 (9), when the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "Ikuze" is placed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 339 (10), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is “x”. 2 ”is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 339 (11) to (18) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 339 (11) to (18) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 337 (10) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (18), as shown in FIG. 340 (19) following FIG. 339 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 is accompanied by a close-up image of the character of the lord. , A cut-in image including a balloon image with the characters "Game" is displayed in the balloon. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number (for example, nine) of the faces of the bancho are arranged around the characters "game" in the balloon, and the weak cut-in image CI1b It suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when it is displayed. When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be a big hit (so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 340 (21), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 340 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed. In this production example, even if the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 341 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 341 (1) to (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 339 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (5), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (pseudo-ream) was not performed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed when the true timer advance notice effect is performed rather than when the fake timer advance notice effect is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a fake timer notice effect is performed, it may be a big hit.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (6), the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

After that, when the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 341 (8), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM "Reach" is displayed in the vicinity, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In this production example, the notice of the pseudo-ream by the timer notice effect was a false notice, but it may be said that it functions as a reach notice by shifting to reach.

After that, as shown in FIG. 341 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice, in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice, is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 341 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 341 (11) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 341 (11) to 341 (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 337 (15) to 338 (21), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 342 is a diagram stepwise showing another display example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 342 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 339 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 342 (6), after "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:" as shown in FIG. 342 (7). The third stop is performed at the timing of "00", and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this way, the countdown in the timer advance notice display TM1 may be completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be stopped and displayed after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. , Or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the same time as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes “00:00”.

After that, the timer notice display TM1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 342 (8), and the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the pseudo-ream is performed. The character "continue" may be displayed after the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, the timer notice display TM1 may be deleted after the character "continue" is displayed, or the timer notice may be displayed. The timing at which the display TM1 is erased and the timing at which the characters "continue" are displayed may be the same.

After that, as shown in FIG. 342 (9), the character "Ikuze" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 342 (7a) to (9a), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. Until this is done, the timer advance notice display TM1 may be maintained without being erased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 342 (9b), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "done" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has been successful and the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the timer notice display is started at the timing when the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts. The character "pseudo-ream" may be displayed on TM1 to notify that the timer advance notice effect has been successful and the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 342 (9c), by displaying the icon BCHO of the face of the chief on the timer notice display TM1, it is made to produce that the pseudo-ream as a certain effect has been started. May be good.

FIG. 343 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 343 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 339 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (4), the timer notice display TM1 is counted down, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to “04:25”. Further, in this production example, the characters "reach may be" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that reach may occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (6).

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "00:52" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 343 (7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 343 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 343 (9) shows the strong sabohani group. A notice will be given. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 343 (10) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 343 (10) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 339 (15) to 340 (22), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, the symbol variation display is performed as compared with the case where the timer notice effect is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is not started. (The symbol variation display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed. In this production example, even if the timer notice production is performed and the strong Sabohani group notice is started, it may be lost.

FIG. 344 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 344 (1) to (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 343 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 344 (8), even if the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 344 (9), no matter what. An example is shown in which no notice is given. That is, in this production example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM, it is shown that the notice that the strong Sabohani group notice will be performed is a false (gase) notice. .. In other words, it can be said that even if the timer notice display TM1 is set to "00:00", it is shown that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 344 (10), "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display develops into super reach.

Subsequently, the effects shown in FIGS. 344 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 344 (11) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 343 (11) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In this production example, the timer notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false, and a big hit may occur even if a certain effect is not started, but it may be lost.

FIG. 345 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 345 (1) to (8) are the same as those in FIGS. 343 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 345 (8), when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", as shown in FIG. 345 (9), the weak Sabohani group notice is given. Is done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that as a result of the timer notice production, a notice different from a certain effect (weak Sabohani group notice) is performed. In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", it can be said that a certain effect (strong Sabohani group notice) and another effect (weak Sabohani group notice) are performed. This timer advance notice effect can also be said to be a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 345 (10), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 345 (11) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 345 (11) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 343 (11) to (17), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that this effect example also shows an example in which the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is false and a big hit may occur even if an effect different from a certain effect is started, but it may be lost. is there.

FIG. 346 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 347 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 346 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 346 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1A from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high-reliability display mode indicating that the possibility of a false timer notice is lower than the default display mode. When the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown may be executed without fail. Further, when the timer notice display TM1A in the high reliability display mode is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the timer notice display TM1 in the default display mode is displayed (the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed). (To make it easier to do). "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (4), "00:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A, the display mode of the hold icon may change. It is suggested that. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1A is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 346 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1A is shown. In addition, the character "first hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is started next. In addition, the character display of "first hot" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed after the character display of "first hot" is performed. Alternatively, the character display of "first hot" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 346 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 346 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (14), it is shown that the navigation character notice is being performed by the navigation character YM. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice starts, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (15), the timer advance notice display TM1A is displayed to show that the timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1A is a high reliability display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A, which suggests that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this production example, the timer display time displayed when the countdown starts is as long as "20:00", and the reliability of the jackpot is much higher than when the short time is displayed. It is also suggested that it is increasing. The countdown in the timer notice display TM1A is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 346 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (17).

After that, as shown in FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 346 (18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (19) following FIG. 346 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "15:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (19). Further, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1A is overlapped by the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (19), in addition to the timer notice display TM1A, the second timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer notice displays are performed in the timer notice effect is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode, and "5:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, and 5 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Then, it is suggested that a certain production is started. Further, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 displayed later has a shorter time than the timer notice display TM1A displayed earlier, and the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 displayed later However, it is completed before the countdown in the timer notice display TM1A started earlier. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 whose display is started later is digested first. The countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is then started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (20), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "14:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20). Further, the timer notice display TM1 which is started to be displayed later also continues to count down, and "4:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 347 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "10:95" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (21). Further, the timer notice display TM1 whose display is started later also continues to count down, and "1:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (22), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 which is started later becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed, the button notice effect is started and the button image is displayed. It is shown that 136a is displayed in the default mode. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 whose display is started later is digested before the timer notice display TM1A which is started to be displayed earlier. In this production example, a certain effect performed as a result of the countdown of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 which is started later is not the start of the button advance effect itself, but the operation of the effect button 136 in the button advance effect. It is said that the advance notice effect is started as a result of the above, and in this effect example, the strong cut-in image CI1a is foretold to be displayed, but the occurrence of the button advance notice effect itself is foretold. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (23), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 347 (24). On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1 whose countdown has already been completed continues to display "0:00" until the effect button 136 is operated and the cut-in image is displayed. When the countdown is completed, "0:00" is displayed, and the button notice effect is started, it may be deleted. In this production example, the notice that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 that is started later is a false notice that the notice is false. It can be said that a certain situation is shown. Alternatively, in this effect example, it is shown that as a result of the timer advance notice effect, an effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) different from a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed. In other words, when the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", it is shown that a certain effect (display of the strong cut-in image CI1a) and another effect (display of the weak cut-in image CI1b) are performed. It can be said that this timer advance notice effect can be said to be a fake timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (25), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 whose display is started later is erased. In the timer notice display TM1A whose display was started earlier, the countdown continues, and "5:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (26), the screen in which the main character is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown continues, and "3:77" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (26).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (27), it is shown that the display position of the timer notice display TM1A moves from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. In the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "2:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (27).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1A, the countdown is still continuing, and "1:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 347 (28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (29), it is shown that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is set to "0:00" and the countdown is completed while the fluctuation of the decorative symbol continues. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 347 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the timer notice display TM1A is erased, and the character BC3, whose clothes are torn, appears with the characters "Resurrection", and the navigation character YM. An exclamation mark is displayed in the vicinity, showing that he is surprised at the sudden appearance of the Bancho character. Then, three decorative symbols of "decoration 5" are displayed, and it is notified that all three "decoration 5" are big hits. That is, in this effect example, an example is shown in which a revival effect for notifying that a big hit is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1A is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 347 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 347 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the display of the variable icon h0 and the characters "I did it" is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance effect is performed and the revival effect is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance effect is performed and the revival effect is not started. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, when the timer notice display is displayed in a highly reliable display mode, the time initially displayed on the timer display is set to "3:00" or "20:00". For example, the timer is displayed. When the notice display is displayed in the high-reliability display mode or in the special display mode, the time to be displayed first on the timer display is set first in the timer display when the timer notice display is displayed in the default display mode. It may be configured to have a longer time (second time) than the time displayed in (first time). As a result, depending on the display mode of the timer notice display, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to a certain notice display to be executed.

FIG. 348 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 348 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (4), a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the display is held. It is suggested that the display mode of the icon may change. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice. On the other hand, in this production example, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, and the timer display remains "03:00".

After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is a false (gase) notice. In other words, in this effect example, the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and a certain effect (change effect of the display mode of the hold icon) is not performed. It can be said that the situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (6), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 348 (9), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 348 (10), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 348 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 349 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 350 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 349. FIG. 351 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 350. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 349 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the two timer advance notice displays TM1L and TM1R are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In addition, three or more timer notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are the default display modes. On the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. In addition, "45:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, suggesting that a certain notice effect will be started 45 seconds after the countdown is started. doing. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R start the countdown at the same time, a certain notice production is performed both when 10 seconds have passed and when 45 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be started. Here, a certain advance notice effect that may be started when 10 seconds have passed and a certain advance notice effect that may be started when 45 seconds have passed may be the same. It may be different. In addition, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, suggesting that a strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain notice effect. .. In addition, by adding the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho, it may be notified that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In addition, a plurality of types of icons added to the timer notice display are prepared, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of the added icon, or a certain type of notice effect that may be performed. May be different.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1L and TM1R is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (4), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side has "9: "25" is displayed, and "44:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (5), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "44:00" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (6), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "43:75" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (7) displays the characters "Open right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been decided as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (7), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "39:00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (8), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "38:67" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. As a result, in the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, it is notified that a certain effect is guaranteed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME foretells that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain production. That is, in this production example, the princess character HME can be said to be a pseudo-ren's notice item (sometimes referred to as a "notice icon"). At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is added, "41:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, "1:67" is displayed, and the countdown continues here as well. It is not necessary to add the timer display of the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. In the present embodiment, in this way, the countdown is performed by the timer advance notice effect, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "0:00").

After that, the mini-game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (10), the characters "preparing for production" are displayed above the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side, and a pseudo-ream is performed. It has been announced in advance. Further, the character "pseudo-ream" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice is given that the pseudo-ream will be performed here as well. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (10), "1:33" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:33" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (11), it is shown that the countdown in the timer advance notice effect is continuing. In addition, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed in a mode in which the princess character HME is added, that is, by displaying the notice item of the pseudo-ream, it is visually possible that the pseudo-ream is performed. It may be easier to understand. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. The two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (11), "1:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "41:00" is displayed.

After that, the countdowns on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1R are continuously performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12), the timer display of the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side becomes "0:00". When the countdown is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6". In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "40:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 349 (13), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is erased, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Here, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started after the timer notice display TM1L is erased, or the timer may be started after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The notice display TM1L may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the timer notice display TM1L is erased. Further, in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the princess character HME is displayed, and it is notified by the display of the icon that the pseudo-ream has been performed. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "39:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (13).

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (14), a new timer notice display TM1N is started to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen, and a state in which a new timer notice effect is started is shown. The display mode of the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode. For example, frame-in is performed from the left side of the display screen by frame-in animation. "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. In this production example, the newly displayed timer notice display TM1N starts the countdown after the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side where the countdown is started earlier, but the timer notice display displayed on the right side. The countdown will be completed earlier than TM1R. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, the countdown continues, and "38:15" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (15), it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed in each of the timer notice display TM1N and TM1R. At the timing shown in FIG. 349 (15), "9:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and "37:" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side. 40 "is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (16) shows that the second mini-game is started. When the mini-game is started, as described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image are displayed on the left and right in the center of the display area. The BXRs are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (16), "9:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "37:15" is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (17), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (17), "8:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "36:90" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 349 (18) displays the characters "Open right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been decided as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (18), "4:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "32:15" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (19) following FIG. 349 (18), the result production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and selected. The left treasure chest image BXL that did not exist is deleted. Then, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (19), "3:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. In the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "31:82" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (20), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is a fake timer advance notice effect. The two timer notice displays TM1N and TM1R continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (20), "1:67" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side. On the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side, "29:82" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (21), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, and the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1N is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. The timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "29:49" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (21). In addition, "x2" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the number of times of variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is two times. When the princess character HME is displayed, "x2" may not be displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (22), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N displayed on the left side is completely erased. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream as a result of the timer advance notice effect is not performed. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side continues the countdown, and "27:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (22).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (23), "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state, and "reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner. Further, in this production example, the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is moved from the center on the right side of the display screen to the upper left corner. Then, at least a part of the timer notice display TM1R overlaps with the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice. The strong Sabohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed, or the strong Sabohani group notice is started before the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is completed. Further, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started after the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started, or the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started after the strong Sabohani group notice is started. Alternatively, the strong Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the movement of the display position of the timer notice display TM1R is started. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "25:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (24).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (25), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "24:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (25).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (26), it is shown that the display screen is dimmed and a blackout effect is performed across the lightning bolt. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (26).

When the blackout effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (27) shows that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the words "strong cut-in chance" are displayed along with the icon of the face of the bancho, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho attached to the timer notice display TM1R is moved to the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located in the middle of the three options. That is, the display of the Bancho's face icon BCHO added to the timer notice display can be said to be a notice display of the start of the mini game by Amidakuji. In addition, the word "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select the chief's face icon BCHO from one of the three options. .. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "21:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (27).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (28), the bancho located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown continues, and "18:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (28).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the ghost leg is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (29). The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "○" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "○" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "○" displayed may be 2 or more, or "○" may be displayed at all end points. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1R continues the countdown, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (30), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (30).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (31), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the icon BCHO of the face of the bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, the mission is successful, and the strong cut-in image. It has been notified that it has been confirmed that CI1a will be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (31).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 350 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are left hidden. Then, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. There is. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (32).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 350 (33), the button notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, on the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display is set to "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1RA is the timer advance notice effect related to this button effect, and is the timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a result of the button effect. .. The timer notice display TM1RA that has reached "0:00" is maintained until the effect button 136 is operated and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, but after the countdown is completed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. May be erased before is displayed.

When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 350 (34), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 350 (35). After that, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 350 (36), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the main character, the lord, defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 351 (37) following FIG. 350 (36), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It is shown. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this production example, a timer advance notice effect is performed to start a pseudo-ream, and a timer advance notice effect is performed, a strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and a jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it is configured so that it may be lost.

FIG. 352 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect following from FIG. 350 (24). In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. It should be noted that FIGS. 352 (25a) to (28a) are the same as those in FIGS. 350 (25) to (28), but in this production example, the countdown display is displayed in the blackout effect in FIG. 352 (26a). The difference is that the timer notice display TM1R inside is temporarily hidden.

When the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the effect of the ghost leg is produced at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a). It will be started. In this production example, at this time, three icons are displayed at each of the three end points of the Amida field. Specifically, a panda icon indicating that the mini-game has failed is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, and a bancho icon indicating that the mini-game has succeeded is displayed at the center end point. Is displayed, and at the end point on the right side, a Sabohani icon indicating that the mini game was a great success is displayed. There may be no panda icon, two panda icons, or all panda icons. In addition, there may be no icon of the bancho, there may be two icons, or all of them may be the icons of the bancho. In addition, there may be no Sabohani icon, two may be used, or all of them may be Sabohani icons. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1R continues the countdown, and "18:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (29a).

After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (30), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. In the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "17:55" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (30a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (31a), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the Bancho's face icon BCHO reaches the end point on the right side where the Sabohani icon is displayed, and the characters "strongest cut-in confirmed" are displayed, making the mission a great success and the strongest described later. It has been notified that the cut-in image CI1v has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1R, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (31a).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 352 (32a), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the display of the navigation character YM is resumed, but the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are left hidden. Then, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. Further, it is shown that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1R is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1RA), and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. There is. Further, in this effect example, the characters "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" are displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 together with the character of Sabohani, and it is announced that the strongest cut-in image CI1v will be displayed. I am informing you. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1RA, the countdown continues, and "9:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (32a).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (33a), the button notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. At this time, on the timer notice display TM1RA, the timer display is set to "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 352 (34a), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 352 (35a). At this time, the display of the Sabohani character and the characters "Preparing for the strongest cut-in" is erased. The strongest cut-in image CI1v includes a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon together with a close-up image of the character of the lord, and is surrounded by a large number of Sabohani characters. This is a cut-in image. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. When the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. In this effect example, as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1RA, the strongest cut-in image CI1v, which is a notice effect more advantageous than the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain notice effect, is displayed. The situation is shown. Here, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be displayed as a certain advance notice effect, or may be displayed as a notice effect different from a certain advance notice effect. After the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed, the timer notice display TM1RA is erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (36a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 352 (37a), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. The display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is also resumed, and the variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are visible. After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (38a), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 353 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 353 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (4), the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not been started, and the timer display remains at "10:00". The timer advance notice effect in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect indicating that a pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (7) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been decided as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "pseudo-ren stock" are displayed, the mini-game mission is achieved, and the pseudo-ren Has been announced in advance. As a result, in the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1, it is notified that when the countdown of the timer display is completed, it is guaranteed that a pseudo-ream as a certain advance notice effect will be performed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started. In this production example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived and displayed before the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, the mini-game ends, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (10), the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1A). It is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice display TM1 is stepping up by succeeding in the mini game. In addition, the princess character HME as a notice item is displayed at the lower left of the display screen, and a notice is given that a pseudo-ream will be performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice item is displayed when the mini game is successful. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 353 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1A is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and the princess character HME as a notice item is also displayed. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the display of the timer notice display TM1A and the princess character HME is displayed as a look-ahead notice of the pseudo-continuous production. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1A is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1A is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (14), "06:44" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1A. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 353 (16).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 353 (17), the third stop is performed at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", and the middle symbol is replayed as a pseudo continuous symbol. It is shown that the symbol RP is stopped and displayed. After that, the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started as described above.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 354 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 353. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 354 (1) to (8) are the same as those of FIGS. 353 (1) to (8), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (9), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. .. As a result, it is notified that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 is a fake timer advance notice effect. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (10), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

After that, after the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol as described above, and as shown in FIG. 354 (11), the "decoration 5" is displayed. -Decoration 6-Decoration 6 ”is combined to perform a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuations. After that, as shown in FIG. 354 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. As described above, in this production example, since the mini-game failed, the pre-reading notice by the timer notice display TM1 was a fake notice, so that the game ended in the middle, and as a result, the pre-reading notice was not performed. It is shown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (14), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (15), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 354 (16), the third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 354 (17), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. Is performed, and then the combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed.

In this production example, even if the mini-game fails and the look-ahead notice by the timer notice effect is a false notice, it may be a big hit in the symbol variation display that is the target of the look-ahead notice.

FIG. 355 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 356 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 355 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 355 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (3) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started during the period when the mini game is started and the selection operation by the player is accepted. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 10 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 has not started, and the timer display remains "10:00".

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (6) displays the characters "Open right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been decided as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (8), the icon BCF of the face of the chief appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "strong cut-in confirmed" are displayed, and the mission of the mini game is completed. , It has been announced that the strong cut-in image CI1a will be displayed. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 355 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is provisionally due to shaking fluctuation. A stop is made. At this time, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho is reduced and displayed (stocked) in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The stock of the icon BCF of the face of the bancho will give a pre-reading notice of the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, as shown in FIG. 355 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol, and the icon BCF of the face of the bancho as a notice item is also displayed. .. That is, these displays will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 and the display of the Bancho's face icon BCF are displayed as a look-ahead notice. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (12), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, and becomes the notice display mode. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed by, for example, the hold change animation, but the display mode may be changed by the switching display without performing the hold change animation. After that, as shown in FIG. 355 (13), the variable display of the decorative symbol continues. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "10:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 355 (14), "9:95" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (15), the disappearance animation is started during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1, and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer advance notice display TM1 is erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 which is a fake notice is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the pseudo-ream being performed as a certain advance notice effect, that is, the pseudo-ream is deleted by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. It may be recognized that it will not be done. In addition, before the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 is started, a ghost effect to that effect may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (16), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 355 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 356 (19) following FIG. 355 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. To. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (21), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. Here, since the Bancho's face icon BCF is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the display of "SP development" overlaps with the Bancho's face icon BCF, and the Bancho's face icon BCF is displayed. It is said that it is more difficult to see than if it is not done.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 356 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (23), the button notice effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 356 (24), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as shown in FIG. 356 (25). The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a corresponds to the fact that it was foretold by the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, it can be said that the result of the mini-game is shown as a pre-reading notice of the notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation display performed later. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is related to the result of the mini game and is not related to the timer advance notice production started at the same time. That is, it is shown that only the mini-game of the strong cut-in image CI1a is actually the true advance notice effect, while pretending that the mini-game and the timer advance notice effect are related.

After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 356 (27), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 356 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, when the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the mini game, the icon BCF of the face of the Bancho appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when is not displayed, but even if the icon BCF of the Bancho's face appears and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost. May be good.

FIG. 357 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 357 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Further, in this effect example, the icon BCHO of the face of the chief is added to the timer notice display TM1, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 357 (4), "0:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 357 (7), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown. In addition, the character "first hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified in advance that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the symbol variation display that is started next.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 357 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 357 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 357 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 358 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 357. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 358 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 357 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 357 (3) in that the icon BCHO of the face of the chief is not added to the timer notice display TM1. This suggests that it is less likely that a certain notice effect will be displayed than when the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is added.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 358 (4), "0:24" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2.76 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the display of the characters "hold change", and as a result of counting down the timer display in the timer notice display TM, the display mode of the hold icon changes. It has been suggested that there is a possibility. That is, it is shown that this timer notice effect may be a look-ahead notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (5), it is shown that the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is set to "0:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 358 (6), the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon is displayed. It is notified that the display mode of h11 may change.

However, as shown in FIG. 358 (7), in this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed from the default display mode. That is, it is shown that this effect example is a fake timer notice effect in which the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance display TM1 is not performed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the timer advance notice effect is a fake effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. At this time, the character "sorry" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM has been deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 358 (10), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 358 (11), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 358 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character "first hot" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

FIG. 359 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 359 (1) to (6) are the same as those in FIGS. 341 (1) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased in FIG. 359 (6), the erased timer notice display TM1 is restored and redisplayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (7). It is shown. Further, at this time, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is added, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream as a certain advance notice effect is displayed. That is, it is shown that the disappeared timer notice display TM1 was not the timer notice display TM1 related to the fake timer notice effect, but the true timer notice display TM1. It is also shown that the timer notice display TM1 is stepped up when the timer notice display TM1 is redisplayed. From another point of view, it can be said that a plurality of timer advance notice effects are performed for the same certain effect. Here, when the timer advance notice display TM1 is redisplayed, the execution of a certain advance notice effect (pseudo-ream) performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect may be confirmed. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed again in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. At the timing shown in FIG. 359 (7), "03:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream may be performed after 3 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (9), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:23" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (9).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 359 (10), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (10). After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (11), the character "continue" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 359 (11).

After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (12), when the countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is completed and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", "Ikuze" is placed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Is displayed, and the second variation display of the decorative pattern by the pseudo-ream is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 359 (13), the timer notice display TM1 is erased, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. 2 ”is displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation is concerned) as compared with the case where the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is not started. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 360 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 361 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 360 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 360 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 337 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. “25:00” is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect will be started 25 seconds after the countdown is started. In this effect example, a timer advance effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain advance effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission production has been started to show that the expectation of big hits will rise dramatically by developing into super reach. It is also shown that it is. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (4), "23:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. That is, it is shown that 2 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (5).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (6), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (7).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 360 (8) to (10), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (11), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. The strong Sabohani group notice is a notice with high reliability of the big hit, and there is a high probability that it will shift to super reach. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong Sabohani group notice may dramatically increase expectations for mission achievement. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 360 (11), the Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice overlaps with the timer notice display TM1, but the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the Sabohani character SBHN. You may. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (12), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. This may recognize that the mission will be accomplished. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (12).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 360 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (14), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. As a result, it is notified that the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are improved. In addition, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 may be changed (demoted) to a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot and the execution probability of a certain notice effect are reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 360 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display). It has been changed to TM1B), and it is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. The timer notice display TM1B in this special display mode is a display mode in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that of the timer notice display in the high reliability display mode, that is, when the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, it is high. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the timer notice display in the reliability display mode is displayed. When the timer notice display in the special display mode is displayed, the jackpot may be confirmed. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 360 (15).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (16) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in relation to each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 360 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 360 (18), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 361 (19) following FIG. 360 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 362 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 362 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 360 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 362 (10).

Since the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 362 (11) does not shift to super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Will be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is false. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 was deleted in the middle of the countdown because the mission was not completed before it became "00:00", indicating that a certain effect was not performed. it can. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. , It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 362 (12), after the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 362 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" After that, as shown in FIG. 362 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the shaking with the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, even if the timer advance production ends without developing into super reach, it may be a big hit.

FIG. 363 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361, and FIG. 364 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 363 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 363 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 360 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "5:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. This production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 360 (3) in this respect. In this effect example, a timer advance effect in which the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as a certain advance effect is shown. In addition, the characters "Chance in SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a mission production has been started to show that the expectation of big hits will rise dramatically by developing into super reach. It is also shown that it is. In this effect example, when the mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 363 (4) to (13) are performed. The production examples shown in FIGS. 363 (4) to (14) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 360 (4) to 360 (4), except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 remains unchanged at "5:00". Since it is the same as FIG. (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). It is shown that it has been changed and stepped up, and that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, the timer notice display TM1 has not yet started the countdown, and at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (15), it remains at "5:00".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 363 (16), "4:11" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. .. As described above, the timer advance notice effect in this effect example does not start the timer display countdown when it is started, but starts the timer display countdown when the mission is achieved.

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 363 (17) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the achievement of the mission. Further, the timing at which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed is notified by the timer notice display. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the timer notice effect and the mission effect are performed in relation to each other.

After that, as shown in FIG. 363 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 364 (19) following FIG. 363 (18), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by combining the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It is shown. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 364 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 365 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 363 to 364. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 365 (1) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 363 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (10), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Since the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 365 (11) does not shift to super reach, it is shown that the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is a false notice, and the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 starts. Will be done. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is false. In other words, the timer notice display TM1 was started to be displayed, but the mission was not completed before the countdown was started, so it was erased before the countdown was started, and a certain effect was not performed. It can be said that it is shown. The timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect relating to the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect, that is, by erasing the timer advance notice display TM1. , It may be recognized that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 365 (12), after the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely erased, as shown in FIG. 365 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" After that, as shown in FIG. 365 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is lost. It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 366 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 360 to 361, and FIG. 367 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 366 in a stepwise manner. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 366 (1) to (14) are the same as those in FIGS. 360 (1) to (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 366 (15), as a result of the timer display step-up animation, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is changed from the default display mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B). , It is shown that it is stepping up, and it is shown that the reliability of the jackpot has improved dramatically. Further, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Further, this effect example is different from the effect shown in FIG. 360 (15) in that the timer display of the timer notice display TM1B is reset to "5:00". At this time, the timer display countdown has not started, and the display of "5:00" is maintained. As described above, in this production example, the time in the timer display is reset at the timing when the mission is achieved and the display mode of the timer notice display is changed, so that the change in the display mode of the timer notice display can be easily understood. ing. In addition, after the mission is completed, it is shown that the timer display in the timer notice display is reset to an appropriate time while the display mode of the timer notice display is stepped up to a highly reliable display mode. It can also be said that it is.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1B is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 366 (16), "4:32" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1B. .. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (17) to 367 (20) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 366 (17) to 367 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 360 (16) to 361 (19), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 368 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 369 shows a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 368 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 368 (1) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 339 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (10), in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 when the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 341 (5) as described above. It is shown that the disappearance animation is being performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 368 (11), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "22:35" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 368 (10) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it can be said that a new timer advance notice effect is started using the same timer advance notice display TM1. Further, in this production example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, "x2" is displayed to indicate that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 368 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “18:50” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (14).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 368 (15) to (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "15:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (17).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 368 (18), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 368 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (19) following FIG. 368 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (19).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 369 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown on the timer notice display TM1. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (20).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (21), a timer display step-up animation in which the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 changes is performed. The effect of this timer display step-up animation is the same as that of the disappearance animation described above. That is, it can be said that a part of the animation that changes the display mode of the timer notice display and a part of the animation that erases the timer notice display are the same. The timer display step-up animation and the disappearing animation may be completely different animations.

After the timer display step-up animation is started, as shown in FIG. 369 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the timer display step-up animation being performed, the display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display. It is shown that the mode is changed from the mode to the special display mode (timer notice display TM1B) and the step-up is performed, and the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved. In addition, the timer notice display TM1B whose display mode has been changed has an icon BCHO of the face of the chief, foretelling that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In the timer notice display TM1, a countdown is performed, and "4:32" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 369 (22).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1B becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (23) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1B in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 369 (25), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 369 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, the timer notice effect is performed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and finally the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Even if the timer advance notice effect is performed and the pseudo-ream is started, and the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, it may be lost.

FIG. 370 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 368 to 369, and FIG. 371 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 370 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 370 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 368 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (10), it is shown that the above-mentioned disappearance animation is performed in order to erase the timer notice display TM1 because the countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is completed. There is. This disappearance animation has at least a part of the same display mode as the disappearance animation shown in FIG. 368 (10). As a result, it may be possible to give an expectation as to whether the timer notice display is continuously displayed or deleted.

As shown in FIG. 370 (11), in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (12), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, "x2" is displayed to indicate that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (13), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 370 (15) to 370 (17), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 370 (18), it is shown that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (19) following FIG. 370 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 371 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the type of super reach is notified, which is different from the effect shown in FIG. 369 (20).

After that, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (21).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 371 (22), the screen in which the main character is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 371 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 372 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 341. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 372 (1) to (4) are the same as those of FIGS. 341 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (5), the timer advance notice addition animation, which is the same effect as the disappearance animation, is started during the countdown display on the timer advance notice display TM1, and the timer advance notice display TM1 has the same effect as the disappearance animation. It shows how the effect is displayed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the possibility that the notice that the pseudo-ream will be performed is a false notice is notified. As a result, the player may be made to think that the timer notice display TM1 is erased and is a fake notice.

However, as shown in FIG. 372 (6), not only the timer notice display TM1 is not erased, but also the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is added, and "20:00" is added to the timer notice display TM1. It is displayed. That is, it is found that the animation performed in FIG. 372 (5) was not actually a disappearing animation, but a timer advance notice addition animation which is an animation similar to the disappearing animation. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to recognize that another effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain effect. is there. Further, in this production example, it can be said that a part of the animation for adding the timer display in the timer notice display and a part of the animation for erasing the timer notice display are the same. Note that the timer advance notice addition animation and the disappearance animation may be completely different animations.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "18:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (8), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 372 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "16:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (9).

After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice is being performed. In this effect example, at this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "13:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (10).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (11), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "10:37" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (11).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 372 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is still continuing, and "4:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 372 (12).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (13). That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 in this effect example is a timer advance notice effect for displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a as a certain advance notice effect.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this production example, the timer display is added, the timer notice effect related to the timer display after the addition is performed, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, resulting in a loss, but it may be a big hit. You may.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 372 (14), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the middle symbol in the substantially center. The "decoration 6" to be displayed is displayed, and it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". As described above, as a result of the timer advance notice effect, even if the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain advance notice effect, a loss display result may be obtained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 372 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 373 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 374 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 373 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 373 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 373 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figures 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. Of these two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is the default display mode, while the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is the special display mode. Both the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side display "03:00" as the timer display, and a certain notice is given when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It suggests that the production will start. Further, the timer notice display TM1R displayed on the right side is provided with the icon BCHO of the face of the chief, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a certain notice effect will be performed. Further, in each of these timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer display countdown has not been started, and the timer display is maintained at "03:00".

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Then, in the approximate center of the display screen, the characters "strong timer is activated when the princess appears" are displayed, and when the princess character appears from the treasure box, the advantageous timer notice of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is notified that the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the display is performed. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been decided as a treasure chest to be opened. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, the characters "attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (8), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR, and the characters "It was bad" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has failed. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (9), the character "kochija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. The timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1RB displayed in is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1RB is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is not performed. .. In addition, both of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may be erased so that the timer notice effect related to any of the timer notice displays is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 373 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 373 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1L is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1L will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1L is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1L is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (14), the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1L is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this production example, it is shown that due to the failure in the mini-game, a false notice is not performed for either of the two timer notice displays.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (15), the timer advance notice display TM1 is completely erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (17), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 373 (18), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 374 (19) following FIG. 373 (18). After that, as shown in FIG. 374 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, although the mini-game fails and any timer advance notice production ends in the middle and the lost symbol is finally displayed, it may be a big hit.

FIG. 375 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 373 to 374, and FIG. 376 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 375 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 375 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 373 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Expect" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. In that respect, it is different from the production shown in FIG. 373 (8). In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (9), the character "kochija" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer notice that is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is displayed. It is shown that the timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the display is erased is started, and the timer notice display TM1L is erased. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed. Therefore, as compared with the effect shown in FIG. 373 (9), the timer advance effect having a high possibility that a certain effect is executed is executed, thereby improving the expectation that the certain effect is executed. May be possible. It should be noted that both the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB may not be erased, and the timer notice effect related to either timer notice display may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is completely erased and only the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is displayed. ing. Further, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 375 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 375 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (14), the timer notice display TM1RB is not erased, and the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change. Therefore, attention should be paid to the hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 375 (15).

Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (16), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. It changes and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1RB is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or the first display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB may be "00:00". At the timing of "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. The hold icon in the display mode of the sabohani has a higher reliability of the jackpot than the hold icon of the panda described above. Further, when the hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon. That is, it may be a pre-reading notice for confirming the jackpot.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (17), the timer notice display TM1RB is erased when the countdown is completed, then the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. .. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 375 (18), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 376 (19) following FIG. 375 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 376 (20). After that, as shown in FIG. 376 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 375 to 376, and FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a continuation of one example of the effect shown in FIG. 377 stepwise. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 377 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 375 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, FIG. 375 (3) is different except that the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB is "18:00". ) Is the same as the production shown in). In this way, by making the time indicated by the timer display different between the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, it is difficult to understand which notice effect corresponds to a certain notice effect, and the game is monotonized. May be suppressed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 377 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 377 (4) to (7) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 375 (4) to (7), and the time indicated by the timer display of the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side. Since they are the same except that they are different, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "Super expectation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. It is shown. Moreover, this production example is different from the production shown in FIG. 375 (8) in that it suggests that a special privilege is given by displaying the characters "Please expect super". In addition, the characters "Chance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the navigation character YM also notifies that the mini-game mission has been successful. Of the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is left as "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and the countdown has not started in either case.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (9), the characters "There are two" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which is not the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB. The timer display selection animation in which the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side of the timer notice display is erased is started, and a state in which the timer notice display TM1L is erased is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that at least the timer notice effect related to the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side, which is the advantageous timer notice display of the two timer notice displays TM1L and TM1RB, is performed.

However, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (10), the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is not erased, and as a result of the timer display selection animation being performed, the timer notice display TM1L displayed on the left side is performed. The display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode (timer notice display TM1LA), and it is shown that the display mode is stepping up, and the possibility that a certain effect is performed is improved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Expect both" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character, suggesting that there are expectations for any of the two timer advance notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. The timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB have not yet started the countdown.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 377 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 377 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 and the character display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In this production example, the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB are continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, these timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB will be displayed across the next symbol variation display. Of the timer displays on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is left as "03:00", and the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side is It is left at "18:00", and the countdown has not started in either case.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in this production example, the characters "Attention to the left" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB is displayed. It suggests that the countdown will start. Note that the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB has not yet started the countdown.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (14), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is performed on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB. To be started. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (14), "02:76" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may change. Therefore, attention should be paid to the hold icon.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. Of the two timer notice displays TM1LA and TM1RB, the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side continues the countdown, and "01:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 377 (15). There is. On the other hand, the timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

Then, as shown in FIG. 377 (16), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side becomes “00:00”. It changes to the display mode of Sabohani and becomes the pre-reading display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, or the first display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1LA may be "00:00". At the timing of "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (17), the timer notice display TM1LA displayed on the left side is erased when the countdown is completed. After that, the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 377 (18), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The timer notice display TM1RB displayed on the right side has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (19) following FIG. 377 (18), the third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, and then as shown in FIG. 378 (20). After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". Will be done. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In this production example, the timer notice display TM1RB is continuously displayed even during the final display of the symbol. That is, the timer notice display TM1RB is displayed over three times of the symbol variation display. The timer notice display TM1RB remains at "18:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (22), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. Here, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Sabohani. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The timer notice display TM1RB has not yet started the countdown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 378 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and it is left as "18:00".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (26), a normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown has not yet started, and it is left as "18:00".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1RB is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (27), "17:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB. ..

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (28), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, in the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown continues, and "14:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (28).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (29), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continuing, and "12:90" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (29).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 378 (30), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to the countdown in the timer notice display TM1RB. In the timer notice display TM1RB, the countdown is still continuing, and "8:63" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 378 (30).

Then, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1RB becomes "0:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (31). That is, in this effect example, a certain advance effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the timer advance display TM1RB is the strong cut-in image CI1a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. The timer notice display TM1RB has been deleted because the countdown has been completed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 378 (33), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 378 (34), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

In this effect example, a plurality of timer notice effects are performed, and an example corresponding to a certain effect is shown.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 380 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 379 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 379 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 373 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is left as "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is left as "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is left as "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is left as "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the character "Yatte" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1 is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1RB.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (10).

Then, as shown in FIG. 379 (11), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. It changes to, and it becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. After the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be set to "00:00", or the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 may be changed. The display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when becomes "00:00". As described above, in this production example, the timer notice display TM1 is first started to be displayed, and then the mini game is started in a state where the countdown is not started. Then, when the result of the mini game is successful, the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and then the countdown is completed (that is, "00:00"). It can be said that a pending change production is being performed as a production. Further, the start order of each effect is not limited to the above. For example, after the timer notice display TM1 is started to be displayed after the mini game is started and the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 is started. , The result of the mini-game may be derived, and if the result of the mini-game is successful, a certain effect may be performed at the timing when the countdown is completed.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. Further, the character "button hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 379 (13), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 379 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The display mode of the second hold icon h12, which is the button hold display mode, does not change, and the button hold display mode remains the same.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (16), it is shown that the mini game is started using the entire display screen. Specifically, the words "Holding Change Chance" are displayed along with the icon of the Bancho's face, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, the word "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select the chief's face icon BCHO from one of the three options. .. In addition, the characters "Do your best" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the player is being encouraged.

After that, after the mini-game by Amidakuji is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 379 (17) shows that a new timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance effect is started by frame-in a new timer advance display TM1N from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1N is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N, which suggests that a certain notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1N is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (18), "04:77" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1N. ..

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 380 (19) following FIG. 379 (18) is in the middle of the three options in the Amida field. The bancho's face icon BCHO, which was located at, moves to the right of the three options. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (19).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the ghost leg is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (20). The production starts. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either a "push" at which the button hold operation effect is started or an "x" indicating a failure is displayed. Specifically, "push" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "push" displayed may be one, or "push" may be displayed at all end points. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (20).

After that, the Bancho's face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg, and as shown in FIG. 380 (21), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the Bancho's face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "push" is displayed, the mission is successful, and the operation production of button hold is started. It has been notified that this has been confirmed. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 380 (21).

As shown in FIG. 380 (22), in response to the result of the mini-game, at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", the first hold icon h11 of the button hold display mode is set to ". The character "push" is added, and it is notified that the operation effect of holding the button is started. In addition, the characters "Yoshia" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to congratulate the player. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N becomes "00:00", the character "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11, or "push" may be added to the first hold icon h11. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1N may be set to "00:00" after the character "" is added, or the first hold is made when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N is set to "00:00". The character "push" may be added to the icon h11. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed a plurality of times, and a certain advance effect performed as a result is performed for the same hold icon.

In FIG. 380 (23), it is shown that the operation valid period related to the operation effect of the button hold is started because the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N is set to "00:00", and the decorative symbol display is displayed. In the device 208, the timer notice display TM1N is not erased, the characters "hold change when the button is pressed" are displayed, and the game is explained.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 380 (24), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the Sabohani display mode. Further, on the timer notice display TM1N, the characters "super hot hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has become a highly reliable display mode. In addition, the characters "next hot ze" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the next symbol variation display.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is started, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the button hold operation effect is not started. In the variable display (the symbol variable display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon of the button hold), the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 380 (25), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. At this time, the timer notice display TM1N is erased. After that, as shown in FIG. 380 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect following from FIG. 379 (18). In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (19a) following FIG. 379 (18) shows that the Bancho's face icon BCHO is located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. There is. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (19a).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the right side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the ghost leg is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a). The production starts. At this time, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "push" is displayed at the right end point. .. At this time as well, the timer notice display TM1N continues the countdown, and "03:88" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (20a).

After that, the bancho's face icon BCHO moves on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg, and as shown in FIG. 381 (21a), in the decorative pattern display device 208, the bancho's face icon BCHO is among the three end points. It is shown that the end point on the left side of is reached. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side where "x" is displayed, the mission has failed, and the operation production of button hold is not started. Is notified. Further, in the timer notice display TM1N, the countdown is still continuing, and "00:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 381 (21a).

As shown in FIG. 381 (22a), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation during the countdown display on the timer notice display TM1N, and the timer notice display TM1N is erased. It is shown. In response to this, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button hold operation effect is not performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1N, it is notified that the notice that the button hold operation effect is performed is a false notice. In other words, the timer notice display TM1N was erased in the middle of the countdown before reaching "00:00", indicating that a certain effect (button hold operation effect) was not performed. it can.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (23a), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 381 (24a), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes.

Then, as shown in FIG. 381 (25a), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows how the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the button hold display mode to the default display mode. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the operation effect of holding the button was not performed because the mini game failed, and the game ended unexploded. If the button hold operation effect is not performed and the button is held unexploded, the symbol variation display based on the hold of the button hold target is likely to be lost, but it may be a big hit.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 381 (26a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 381 (27a), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 379 to 380. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 382 (1) to (7) are the same as those in FIGS. 379 (1) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (8), the character BBA of the auntie appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has failed. .. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer advance notice effect related to the timer advance notice display TM1 was a fake timer advance notice effect. The timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is still "03:00", and the countdown has not yet started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (9), the disappearance animation is started on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer notice display TM1 is erased. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, but it is erased before the countdown is started, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (10), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1 is completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 382 (11), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (13), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 382 (14), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 382 (15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. In this production example, the result of the mini game was a failure, and the display mode of the hold icon as a certain notice effect was not changed by the timer notice effect, but the display mode of the hold icon was not changed regardless of the timer notice effect. Even if the result of the mini-game is unsuccessful, the result of the production (the hold icon changes to the hold icon of Sabohani) may be the same. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 379 to 380 and described above, when the display mode of the hold icon changes as a result of the success of the mini game, the mini game is described as shown in FIG. 382 and described above. It is easier to get a big hit than when the display mode of the hold icon changes although it fails, but it goes without saying that it is not limited to this.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 382 (16), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. At this time, the characters "next hot ze" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display. After that, as shown in FIG. 382 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 383 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 383 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 373 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the bancho appears, and the dice "1" is displayed. "If appears, the hold change" is displayed, and it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed after the mini-game is started. In this mini-game, the result is derived without the operation by the effect button 136.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (5), it is shown that the dice symbol has started the variable display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 383 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stopped and displayed the dice symbol in a manner indicating a "3" roll, indicating that the mission was not achieved. ing. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the mini-game has failed. That is, as a result of the countdown of the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, it is notified that the notice that a certain notice effect will be performed is a false notice. In other words, it can be said that the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the countdown starts, indicating that a certain effect has not been performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 383 (7), in response to the result of the mini game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the disappearance animation of the timer notice display TM1 and shows that the timer notice display TM1 is erased. ing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 383 (8), it is shown that the timer notice display TM1N is completely erased.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 383 (9), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" is tentatively caused by shaking. A stop is made. After that, as shown in FIG. 383 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game, but the result may be derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. In this case, , There is a possibility that a certain advance effect will be performed in the case where the result is derived by operating the effect button 136 in the mini game than in the case where the result is derived without operating the effect button 136 in the mini game. May be high, and the reliability of the jackpot may be high.

FIG. 384 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 384 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 384 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. A hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the three special figures 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area. , H13 are displayed. All of the three hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the default display mode. Further, in this production example, a 7-segment display device SEG composed of 4-digit 7-segments is shown. This 7-segment display device SEG is provided with a full-color LED for each segment, and is configured to be capable of emitting full-color light for each segment. Further, although the 7-segment display device SEG is provided on the front frame door 106, for example, it may be provided on the door 108 with the ball storage plate or the game board 200. At the timing shown in FIG. 384 (1), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13 move to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and the display position of the second hold icon h12, respectively. It is displayed as the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain notice effect will be started when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Further, the timer advance notice display is also started in the 7-segment display device SEG, and "0300" is displayed in the white light emitting mode.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure box image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG are both left at "03:00", and the countdown has not started.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the timer display countdown on the timer advance notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG is started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (9), the timer display (time display) countdown (subtraction display) is started on the timer notice display TM1. In addition, the countdown of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is also started at the same time. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 384 (9), "02:75" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, and "0275" is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance effect is performed by each of the plurality of devices. Here, when the timer advance notice effect is performed by a plurality of devices at the same time, a certain effect may be started more easily than when the timer advance notice effect is performed by one timer advance notice display, and the reliability of the big hit. The degree may be high.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (10), the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12, and it is notified that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. The timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG continue to count down, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 379 (10), "01:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. "0175" is displayed on the SEG display device SEG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (11), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes “00:00”. The display mode changes from to button hold to a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG is shown. .. After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00", the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode. Alternatively, after the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the button hold display mode, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". Alternatively, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the button hold display mode at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 and the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "00:00". It may change. In this production example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG display two timer notices, but only one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG displays the timer notice. May be done. In this case, when the timer notice display is performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain notice effect is always performed so that the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG are used. If the timer notice display is performed on only one of the two, a certain notice effect may not be performed. Further, the timer notice display may be displayed by three or more effect display devices, and the reliability of the jackpot may be increased as the number of timer notice displays displayed increases. For example, when there is one timer notice display, the weak cut-in image CI1b is likely to be displayed as a certain notice effect, and when there are two timer notice displays, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain notice effect. When it is easy to display and the timer notice display is three or more, the strongest cut-in image CI1v may be easily displayed as a certain notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 384 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed, and is turned off when the countdown in the 7-segment display device SEG is also completed. Further, the character "button hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the button hold display mode.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

FIG. 385 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 386 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 385 stepwise. FIG. 387 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 386. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 385 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 384 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (3), the frame-in animation shows the state after the timer notice display TM1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen and the timer notice effect is started. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode, and at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (3), "09:75" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. In this production example, the time set in the timer notice display TM1 is, for example, "10:00". Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the timer advance notice display has not been started and is turned off.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (4) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display area. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "09:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (4).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (5), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "06:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (5). At this time, the timer notice display is started on the 7-segment display device SEG, and "3000" is displayed in the red light emitting mode. Here, when the light emitting mode of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, a certain advance notice effect is more likely to be started as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed as compared with the case where the light emission mode is white. In this production example, the timer notice display by the 7-segment display device SEG functions as a look-ahead notice, and the target of a certain notice effect is different from the timer notice display by the timer notice display TM1.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (6) displays the characters "Open the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It has been notified that the right treasure chest image BXR has been determined as a treasure chest that can be opened. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and “04:03” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (6). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (7), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Further, in the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:70" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (7). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (8), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "directing activation" are displayed, indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved. Has been done. In addition, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that a certain advance notice effect performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 is started. .. In the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "03:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (8). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (9) shows that the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner. In the timer notice display TM1, the timer display countdown continues, and “02:75” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (9). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (10), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 display mode may change. In addition, the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, prompting attention to changes in the display mode of the hold icon. In the timer display on the timer notice display TM1, the countdown is continuously performed, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 385 (10). On the other hand, in the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

Then, as shown in FIG. 385 (11), at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of Sabohani. It changes and becomes a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the timer notice display TM1 is shown.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 385 (12), the timer notice display TM1 is erased when the countdown is completed. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the next symbol variation display.

After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and as shown in FIG. 386 (13) following FIG. 385 (12), the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7" are displayed. Temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 7-decoration 7". At this time, the display of characters and the variable icon h0 displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are also deleted. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown has not yet started, and the timer display is maintained at "3000".

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the 7-segment display device SEG is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (16), "2978" is displayed on the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG. ing.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (17) shows that the mini game is started. When the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the words "strong cut-in chance" are displayed along with the icon of the face of the bancho, indicating that the mini-game by Amidakuji has started. Then, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho appears in the Amida field, and it is shown that it is located on the right side of the three options. In addition, the word "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select the chief's face icon BCHO from one of the three options. .. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "2833" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (17).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (18), the chief of the number located on the right side of the three options in the Amida field. The face icon BCHO moves to the left of the three options. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2580" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (18).

After that, when the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player and the operation valid period elapses when the left side of the three options in the Amida field is selected, the production of the Amida lottery is started. At this time, at the three end points of the Amida field, either "○" indicating success or "x" indicating failure is displayed. Specifically, "x" is displayed at the left end point of the three end points, "x" is displayed at the center end point, and "○" is displayed at the right end point. ing. The number of "○" displayed may be 2 or more, or "○" may be displayed at all end points. After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (19), the decorative pattern display device 208 shows that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho is moving on the line according to the rules of the ghost leg. The timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is still counting down, and "2411" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (19).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (20), it is shown that the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the right side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, the icon BCHO of the face of the Bancho reaches the end point on the right side where "○" is displayed, and the characters "Yatte" are displayed near the navigation character YM, and the mission is successful. However, it has been notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a has been confirmed to be displayed. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "2236" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (20).

After that, the mini-game is finished, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (21) continues to display the decorative symbol in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "waiting for intense heat" are displayed, and it is notified that a strong cut-in image CI1a with high reliability of the big hit appears. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2185" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (21).

After that, "decoration 5" is sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and when the reach state is formed, as shown in FIG. 386 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower center of the display screen is displayed. "Reach" is displayed on the screen, and it is notified that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "2005" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (22).

After that, as shown in FIG. 386 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. Further, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG continues to count down, and "1927" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (23).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 386 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is changed from the red display mode to the rainbow display mode in which the display mode changes to multiple colors. In the timer display of the rainbow display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the timer display of the red display mode, and a certain effect is more likely to be started. Here, when the timer display is displayed in the rainbow display mode, the jackpot symbol may be surely displayed, or a certain effect may be always started. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1737" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 386 (24).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 387 (25) following FIG. 386 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "1010" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (25).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (26), the button continuous striking effect has been started, and it is shown that the button image 136a is displayed in the default mode. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "0500" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (26). After that, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (27), the strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed during the execution of the button repeated pressing effect. This strongest cut-in image CI1v is displayed in response to success as a result of a mini game by Amidakuji, but in this production example, the strongest cut-in image CI1v which is more advantageous than the strong cut-in image CI1a is It is displayed, and it is informed that the expectation of the big hit is dramatically increasing. At this time as well, the player continuously hits the effect button 136. Further, in the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG, the countdown is continuously performed, and "0200" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 387 (27).

After that, at the timing when the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG becomes "0000", in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (28), the character of the bancho whose clothes are torn appears with the characters "Premier". However, it is shown that the premiere notice is being held. As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot has been confirmed. As described above, in this effect example, the timer advance effect by the timer advance display TM1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the timer advance effect by the 7-segment display device SEG are different from each other. It is shown that it is. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 was performed in one symbol variation display from the start to the end, but the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG is performed twice in the symbol variation display. It is shown that it is done across the display. The target symbol variation display may be different between the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 and the timer advance notice effect by the 7-segment display device SEG. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be performed across the jackpot game and the symbol variation display performed after the jackpot game is completed. Further, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production by the 7-segment display device SEG, the premier notice as a certain notice production was performed, but the notice with low reliability of the jackpot, which is not a certain notice production, A fake timer notice effect to be performed may be performed. Further, a fake timer advance notice effect in which a certain advance notice effect is not performed may be performed.

As described above, in this production example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is performed, the symbol variation display (the symbol variation) is performed as compared with the case where the timer notice effect is performed and the premier notice is not performed. Display) makes it easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At this time, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to congratulate the big hit, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. In addition, the characters "premier appearance" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the premier notice has been given.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 387 (30), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 387 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also erased, and the 7-segment display device SEG is also turned off.

FIG. 388 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect in a jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The effect example shown in FIG. 388 (1) is, for example, an effect example following FIG. 387 (31), and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" continues. The state of the confirmed display is shown in.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (2), it is shown that the jackpot game is started and the jackpot start effect is being performed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol "decoration 5" is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a fan-bearing Copanda character celebrates the jackpot in the center of the display screen. The situation is shown. Further, in the 7-segment display device SEG, in order to improve the decorative effect in the big hit game, multicolor display (rainbow display) is performed using all the segments. At this time, a special effect display may be performed by the 7-segment display device SEG. For example, "7777" may be displayed or a number string of puns may be displayed. Such a display may be performed, for example, to give a notice of a hold consecutive villa where a big hit will occur in the hold, or to give a notice of a probability change state after the big hit game is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (3), it is shown that the third round has started. Then, the characters "LED attention" are displayed on the right side of the character of Copanda, suggesting that a notice effect is performed.

Then, in FIG. 388 (4), the 7-segment display device SEG is turned off in front, and then, as shown in FIG. 388 (5), the character of the bancho appears with the display of the characters "Tear the clothes by repeatedly hitting the button". , The mini game is started. In this mini-game, it is possible to display the result according to the game state after the big hit game, and when the game state after the big hit game becomes a probabilistic state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state), it is produced. As a result of repeatedly hitting the button 136, the mini-game may be successful due to the tearing of the chief's clothes. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and the operation valid period for accepting the button repeated press effect is displayed. In this effect example, when the mini-game is started, "1000" is displayed, and it is notified that the effect button 136 can be repeatedly hit for 10 seconds after the countdown (operation valid period) is started. When the timer display shifts to the fourth round and the operation valid period starts, the countdown starts. The display mode of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is such that it emits light in white, but it may also emit light in another color. For example, the reliability of success in a mini game depends on the emission color. It may be different. Further, for example, a timer display (for example, a combination of specific numbers such as "9999" and "7777") indicating another time is displayed instead of "1000" indicating 10 seconds corresponding to the operation valid period. Therefore, a premier notice that the mini game will surely succeed may be given.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (6) shows the transition to the fourth round. In the fourth round, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the characters "continuous hitting" together with the button image 136a, prompting the continuous hitting of the effect button 136. In addition, the operation valid period for accepting the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and the countdown (timer subtraction) of the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 388 (6), "0800" is displayed, indicating that 2 seconds have passed since the operation valid period was started. As described above, in this effect example, this timer display may function as a timer advance notice effect, and it is shown that the timer advance notice effect and the mini game are started at the same time. The timer advance notice effect and the mini game do not have to be started at the same time.

FIG. 388 (7) shows how the player continuously hits the effect button 136. At this time, the timer display on the 7-segment display device SEG is set to "0500", and it is notified that the remaining time of the operation valid period is 5 seconds.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8), the characters "sorry" and "next time reduction" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has failed. As a result, it is notified that after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the time saving state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) without shifting to the probability change state.

FIGS. 388 (5a) to (8a) show another production example following FIG. 388 (4). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (5a) shows that the above-mentioned mini-game is started. In this production example, the princess character HME is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that there is a high possibility that the mini game will be successful. Further, when the mini game is started, a timer (“1000”) is displayed on the 7-segment display device SEG, and an operation valid period for accepting the button repeated pressing effect is displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 388 (6a) to (7a) are performed. Since FIGS. 388 (6a) to (7a) are the same as those of FIGS. 388 (6) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 388 (8a), the clothes of the character of the Bancho are torn, and the characters "Awakening of the Bancho" and "Next probability change" are displayed, indicating that the mini game has been successful. As a result, it is notified that after the jackpot game is completed, the state shifts to the probabilistic state.

FIG. 389 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example when an error display is displayed in the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 389 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 389 is the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reserved for the special figure 1. A hold icon is displayed. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed, and both of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 have the default display mode (round patternless pattern). And it is displayed in a white display mode). On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

Further, in this production example, an error display (lower plate full tank error display ERR1) of "please pull out the ball" is displayed above the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. It is informed that it is doing. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. When the resolution of the error that is the target of the error notification is detected (for example, when the lower plate full tank detection switch is turned off and the lower plate full tank error is resolved), the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 Is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (2), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started by frame-in the timer advance notice display TM1 from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the timer advance notice display TM1, which suggests that a certain advance notice effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (3), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is still displayed. At this time, the timer notice display TM1 is overlapped by the lower plate full tank error display ERR1, and the visibility of the timer notice display TM1 is lowered. Therefore, the player may hurry to remove the ball from the lower plate by looking at this display state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM1 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (4), "04:25" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1. .. In addition, the characters "maybe pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that pseudo-ream may be performed as a result of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM. There is. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (4), the lower plate full tank error has not yet been resolved, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (5), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "03:96" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (5). Further, even at the timing shown in FIG. 389 (5), the lower plate full tank error has not been resolved yet, the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is displayed, and the timer notice display TM1 overlaps with the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 389 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the timer advance notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and "01:73" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 339 (6). At the timing shown in FIG. 389 (6), since the player pulled out the ball from the lower plate, the lower plate full tank error was resolved and the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 was erased. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (7) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 389 (7) to (12) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 339 (7) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the timer notice effect described above, the time until a certain effect is performed is displayed by the countdown of the timer display. For example, when the timer notice effect is performed, the timer display in the timer notice display is changed to ". Start from "0:00", for example, display "Maybe a pending change at" 03:00 "" or "A strong cut-in occurs at" 25:00 "" and count up the timer display. It may be configured so that a certain effect is performed when the designated time is reached.

Further, in the timer advance notice effect described above, as a certain effect, a hold change effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a cut-in image display, and a jackpot confirmation notification have been described as examples, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a look-ahead mode or the like. It may be a production that rushes into a specific zone, a movie insertion, a next notice production, or the like.

Further, in the timer notice effect described above, the expectation of the jackpot changes by changing the color of the timer notice display. In this case, for example, in the order of red> green> yellow> blue> white. When the degree of expectation is high and the color of the timer notice display is yellow or more, the start of a certain effect may be confirmed. Further, when it is executed by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 208 such as the 7-segment display device SEG, a certain advance notice effect may be always performed. In this case, for example, when the color of the timer notice display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is blue and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is white, the expectation of a big hit is obtained because blue <white. If the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is red and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red, the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is a big hit. You may increase the reliability of.

Further, for example, when the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow, the jackpot symbol is larger than when the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is red. The reliability of the jackpot may be dramatically improved by combining the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG, such as easy confirmation display. Further, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG may be ranked respectively, and the sum of the ranks may be compared to determine the jackpot reliability. When the white rank is 1, the yellow rank is 3, and the red rank is 5, the color of the timer notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is white, and the emission color of the 7-segment display device SEG is yellow. Compared to the case (the former), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the timer notice, and the 7-segment display device SEG only displays the timer, and when the emission color is red (the latter), the latter May have a higher reliability of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390, an example of the display mode of the timer notice display displayed when the timer notice effect is started will be described. Here, FIG. 390 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the timer notice display.

FIG. 390 (a) shows an example in which "7:77" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" which is a combination of jackpot decorative symbols, and the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (a) has started the timer notice effect. When it is displayed occasionally, it can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit is confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (a) is displayed, it may be displayed as a notice for deriving the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that the transition to the probability change is confirmed after the end of the big hit game or a notice that the reserved consecutive villa will occur.

FIG. 390 (b) shows an example in which "99:99" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. In the above-described embodiment, the time initially displayed on the timer notice display TM1 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol, but the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (b) is at least. , It is said that the time is longer than the time from the start of the display to the stop display of the symbol, and it is the time when it is recognized that the countdown is not completed during the fluctuation. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (b) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

Further, the timer display shown in FIG. 390 (b) is the maximum numerical value that can be represented in a decimal number, but as shown in FIG. 390 (c), the maximum numerical value that can be represented in a hexadecimal number is displayed. You may do so. Even with this, the same effect as the timer display shown in FIG. 390 (b) may be expected.

FIG. 390 (d) shows an example in which "7:58" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. This timer display is a timer display reminiscent of the wordplay of "Nagoya", which is the prefectural capital of Aichi Prefecture, and is displayed when the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (d) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started. Can be used as a premier timer display and as a notice that a big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

Further, FIG. 390 (e) is a timer display (“2:23”) reminiscent of the pun of “Mt. Fuji”, which is the highest mountain in Japan, and the timer shown in FIG. 390 (d) is also shown. In some cases, the same effect as the display can be expected. In the present embodiment, in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 displayed when the timer notice effect is started, "0" is displayed for all the digits less than 1 second, but the above-mentioned premiere The timer display is characterized in that digits of less than 1 second are also displayed. The timer display displayed as the premier timer display is not limited to the above, and various timer displays can be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 390 (f) shows an example in which "hit" is displayed as the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 when the timer notice effect is started. When this timer display is displayed, the player may easily recognize that the jackpot is confirmed. When the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (f) is displayed when the timer notice effect is started, it can be used as a premier timer display as a notice for confirming a big hit. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

FIG. 390 (g) shows the timer advance notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be changed when the timer advance notice effect is started or during the timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (g) is a rainbow display mode in which the timer notice display TM1 is displayed while changing to multiple colors. When the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this rainbow display mode, the premier timer is displayed. As a display, it can be used as a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur. The display mode that can be adopted as the premier timer display is not limited to this, and can be set to an appropriate color.

FIG. 390 (h) shows the timer advance notice display TM1 in a display mode that may be displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started or during the timer advance notice effect. The display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 390 (h) is a display mode in which the Sabohani character SBHN is added to the four corners, and when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed in this display mode, the premier timer As a display, it can be used as a notice that the big hit will be confirmed. The character to be added is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, when the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, it may be used as a notice that it is confirmed that the transition will be probable after the end of the big hit game, or a notice that a reserved consecutive villa will occur.

In addition, the timer notice display TM1 described above is configured to display the timer display in a rectangular frame, but as the premier timer display, the timer notice display TM1 having a display mode different in the frame shape may be displayed. For example, the timer notice display TM1 in which the timer display is displayed in a circular frame may be used as the premier timer display.

Further, the timer notice display TM1 of the premier timer display described above may be counted down after the display is started, but the timer notice effect may be ended without performing the countdown. The jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the middle of the countdown, and the timer advance notice effect may end. Further, when the timer advance notice effect by the timer advance notice display TM1 of the premier timer display is started, a certain advance notice effect such as a pseudo continuous effect may not be performed even if the countdown of the timer display is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mini-game for notifying whether the timer advance notice effect is true or false based on the derivation result has been described, but the mini-game is applied to any of the above-mentioned timer advance notice effects. Can be done.

Next, another specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 391 to 424. Further, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments shown below can be applied to any of the embodiments shown so far.

391 to 424 are diagrams stepwise showing a modified example of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 391 to 424, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Further, FIGS. 391 to 424 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L arranged in the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M arranged on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as a sub display device, and the second decorative symbol display device may be referred to. The length of the 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the width direction is shorter than approximately half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also slightly shorter. Further, the right end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M overlaps the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the left end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is second. 1 It overlaps with the front side of the right end side portion of the decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidably movable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are in the closest state to each other. It is configured so that it can be done. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily mean that the decorative symbols are variablely displayed for each display device, and are named for convenience. It is added here just in case that it does not narrow the interpretation of the display device. Further, a collection of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. It is also possible to display the fluctuation of the above and to display multiple types of effects. Although various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices in the present embodiment, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. .. Further, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate. .. The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate, and the light from the light emitting body is reflected forward at the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to make it look like it is. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 391 to 424, the light guide plate is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where the light is refracted toward the player is thinner than the thickness of the portion to which the light is irradiated. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the front side of at least one display device of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, FIGS. 391 to 424 show the state of the fourth symbol display device 284a1,284a2, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special figure 1 has a square shape and is special. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights in the loss lighting mode or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 1. Further, the special figure 2 fourth symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the variable display of the special figure 2, and is a lost lighting mode during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights up in a jackpot lighting mode. Further, in FIGS. 391 to 424, the state of the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z is shown.

FIG. 391 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 391 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon in the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a manner of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area on which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variable icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 391 (a), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, on the right side of the variable icon h0, a tutorial display unit TT1 as an explanation display unit is arranged, and various information related to the game and the production is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at appropriate timings. Will be done. In the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the character of the panda and the character of the lord is explained. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be displayed as a preview or a demo effect display, or may be hidden. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the characters appearing, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. In addition, the jackpot expectation degree may be configured to be able to be notified depending on the display mode of the tutorial display (for example, display in blue, display in red, etc.). In this case, this tutorial display may be used as a notice display of the position of the notice display. In this specification, for convenience, the description described will be described as a tutorial display. That is, the tutorial display unit TT1 in this production example can be said to be an area for displaying something. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbol. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame constituting the hold icon display area, the variable icon display area, and the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanatory display unit for displaying the currently performed stage name and reach name is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 391 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the central portion of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 391 (a), the reception count display 850 of the character string image of "0 more times" is displayed, and the reception count of the operation of the effect button 136 is 0 times. Further, a stock button image 852 imitating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception number display 850. Three lines are drawn in the stock button image 852 at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 391 (a), all four regions of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is 0.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. This lord's character may be called a navigator character. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. The character of the lord may or may not be displayed at all times. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of the lord may be displayed included in the Ui unit UI3, or at least a part thereof may be displayed so as to overlap the front side of the UI unit UI3.

Further, below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a family crest accessory 224E, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged, and can move and rotate in the vertical direction according to the effect content. It is configured so that it can be done. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each of them moves in the vertical direction according to the effect content. Is configured to allow Further, both the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb have a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes depending on the content of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 391 (b), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, instead of a certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1), a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (display of "preparing") is performed. It can be said. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (c), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a preparatory image notice display that is displayed before the display of the preparatory image RDY described later is started. Further, the shutter image may be displayed even when the notice is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayable in a plurality of types of display modes so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the display mode of the shutter image, or the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured so that the jackpot expectation is not shown only by itself.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (d), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY in which the characters "preparing" are displayed. In other words, it can be said that the prepared image RDY is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1 and overlaps with the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 391 (d), the background color of the preparing image RDY is green, that is, the display mode of the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) is the default display mode. .. The image RDY being prepared can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even if the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) at the start of display. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the above-mentioned shutter image can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. For example, when the shutter image is red, the red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easily). In this effect example, a certain effect (for example, timer notice, mini game, etc.) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (e), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this production example, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 is set to the gold display mode, which suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change. That is, the UI unit UI3 in this golden display mode functions as a look-ahead notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. The UI part UI3 of this gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, and functions as a direct look-ahead notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. May be done. In addition, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be the default mode before the hold icon (hold icon to be read ahead) whose display mode has changed is digested, or the result of whether or not the change in the look-ahead target changes. (For example, display of a decorative symbol indicating that it is a big hit or a loss) may be configured to be the default mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right portion of the tutorial display unit TT1. This ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, when the preparing image RDY and the ninja character NJ4 can be focused on. There is.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (g), the hold change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first hold icon h11, and the first one. It is shown that the hold icon h11 of is hit. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire first hold icon h11, which makes it more difficult to see than the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire hold icon h11. The effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon next to the target hold icon. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 391 (g), the effect EF4 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the second hold icon h12 also overlaps with the effect EF4. In this production example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change pre-effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from the start of the display of the ninja character NJ4 to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. May be used as a pending change pre-effect display. Further, only the display of the ninja character NJ4 may be used as the pending change pre-effect display. Further, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change pre-effect display. It should be noted that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Further, the display of the preparing image RDY may be started after the effect display regarding the ninja character NJ4. On the contrary, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the preparing image RDY. Further, it may be configured so that the prepared image RDY is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the look-ahead mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon is changed after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 can be expected to appear in the preparing image RDY, so that the ninja character NJ4 has a different type of notice display (hold). Icon change and in preparation The target may be different, such as RDY, or the pre-reading notice and the target change may be different, such as the notice).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (h), the effect EF4 is erased and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 391 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits red light according to the display mode of the first hold icon h11. The family crest accessory 224E may emit red light after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in the red display mode, or the first hold icon h11 may emit red light after the family crest accessory 224E emits red light. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 391 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Further, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7". The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is a combination of loss, but it is also a combination of chances. That is, the look-ahead notice is given by deriving and displaying the combination of the chance eyes. The chance eye is easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the look-ahead display mode, but the chance eye is displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily when the chance eye is displayed than when the chance eye is not displayed. After the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be sequentially performed, or the ninja character NJ4 may be erased after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started. Further, the sequential stop display of the decorative symbols may be started at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is erased. Although the variable icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 391 (i), the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is confirmed and displayed.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, as shown in FIG. 391 (j), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move onto the corresponding pedestal. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It can be said that the tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the preparing image RDY, that is, the preparing image RDY is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 that was displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. .. On the other hand, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (k), it is shown that "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, to form a reach state. The "decoration 4" displayed on the left and right is swaying and fluctuating, and the middle symbol is fluctuating and displayed at high speed. In addition, the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before the reach state is reached, and the UI part UI3 may be temporarily hidden, but basically, the UI part UI3 remains until the super reach is started. It is designed not to be hidden.

After that, FIG. 391 (l) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to the super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the family crest accessory 224E is started, or the super The operation of the family crest accessory 224E may be started at the timing when the reach transition display is started. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden and at least the hold icon is hidden when shifting to a specific super reach. Further, the reach name (title) of the SP reach may be displayed, or the UI unit UI3 may be hidden at least when the reach name of the SP reach is displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the frame is displayed around the image RDY being prepared, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. Further, when the preparing image RDY is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI section UI3 is hidden. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI unit UI3 after the transition to the super reach differs depending on whether or not the preparing image RDY is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured so that a certain notice display or a certain mode of effect can be specified. The UI unit UI3 does not have to be hidden even after shifting to the swordsman reach.

FIG. 391 (m) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. When the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, the display is maintained only for the preparation image RDY, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the prepared image RDY, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same positions. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the family crest character 224E may return to the initial position after the swordsman reach starts, the swordsman reach may start after the family crest character 224E returns to the initial position, or the family crest character 224E. The swordsman reach may be started when the player returns to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (n), the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY being prepared is finished, and it can be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY ends (becomes hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (o), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. This mini-game is an example of a notice display in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and is started, but the mini-game may be started without going through the display of the preparing image RDY. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the preparing image RDY than in the case of not passing through the display of the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the mini game is started, but the display of the image RDY being prepared may end and the timer advance notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the winning / failing determination may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters "iron plate" may be displayed without performing the mini game or the timer advance notice effect. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four regions (the upper region in the production example shown in FIG. 391 (o)) is the hit region. By hitting the hit area with an arrow, a highly reliable notice of the big hit is given. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and may be plural, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas. Further, in a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini-games and timer notices, the certain types of mini-games and timer notices may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (configuration 1). On the contrary, another type of mini-game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both configuration 1 and configuration 2 may be provided, or one of the configurations may be provided.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (p), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success. The display showing the result of the mini game may be configured to be displayed in a cut different from the cut shown in FIG. 391 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this production example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display portion of the mini game may be a certain production. When a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of the "iron plate" may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after the certain effect.

Then, in the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 391 (q), the characters "iron plate" are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted by about 15 degrees in the counterclockwise direction is displayed. .. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display is performed according to the result of the mini game, that is, another notice display is performed according to the result of the notice display. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0. Further, when the timer notice effect is performed, another notice may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the fact that another notice display is started just before the value becomes 0).

FIG. 392 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. It should be noted that at least one of a plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may not be provided. This also applies to the following figures.

FIG. 392 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the production is illustrated as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 391, but the production may be performed in another scene, or may be a production performed only as a continuation of the production example of FIG. 391. May be good. This also applies to the following figures. The effects shown in FIGS. 392 (a1) to (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (o), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini game as a notice display has failed is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (a5), the iron plate image TP is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between the failure and the success of the mini game is made, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini game is successful. Note that the timer advance notice effect may be performed instead of the mini game. For example, it may be a fake timer advance notice effect that does not display anything even if the timer display countdown is completed and becomes 0, or the timer display. When the countdown of is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, the word "chance" may be displayed small somewhere) may be performed.

FIG. 392 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 392 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (o), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (b4), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord hits the target TGT, but it is shown that the arrow is stuck in the non-hit area. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the mini-game was successful but not a great success.

Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (b5), the first decorative pattern display device 208L displays the princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters "chance" and the princess character are displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, when comparing whether the mini-game was successful or a great success, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol in the case of a great success than in the case of a success. ..

FIG. 392 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 391 (l). The effects shown in FIGS. 392 (c1) to (c2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (n), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (c3), a mini game different from the mini game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. It is shown. The mini-game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is also an example of a notice display in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and is started. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the lateral direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, it is configured so that the success is more likely to occur when the mini-game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started. The mini-game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. Further, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the mini-game shown in FIG. 392 (c3) is started than when the mini-game shown in FIG. 391 (o) is started. However, the mini-game shown in FIG. 391 (o) may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 392 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and displayed, and the symbol displaying the characters "iron plate" is derived, indicating that the mini game has been very successful.

Then, as shown in FIG. 392 (c5), the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is shown that the notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed.

In addition, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 391, the mini game was played in the effect shown in FIG. 391, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 392, the timer advance notice effect may be performed and vice versa. .. Further, both timer advance notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

FIG. 393 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 393 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 391 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. In FIG. 393 (a1), the variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and the family crest accessory 224E is also displayed in red.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a2) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, it is shown that the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the preparing image RDY than in the case of not passing through the display of the preparing image RDY.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a3), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed.

As described above, in this production example, the mini game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY, but this may be executed only during the super reach. It may be executed not only during super reach, or may be configured to be executable during or without super reach. In addition, there may or may not be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state after the third display ends in the first state. May be good. In addition, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display ends in the first state may straddle the next variation. Then, after the third display ends in the second state, a certain notice display (particularly, a certain effect) may at least start and end in the second state.

FIG. 393 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). The effects shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (n), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started instead of the mini game in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of the notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY being prepared ends. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 393 (b3), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, a fake timer advance notice effect may be started in which the timer advance notice effect ends before the time reaches "0:00". Here, as another example of the timer advance notice effect, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 337 to 390 can be appropriately combined. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, and the mini game may be easier than when the timer advance notice effect is started. It may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when is started. Note that the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example,) in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after the countdown reaches "0:00" indicating 0 seconds. , Iron plate image TP), but after "0:00" indicating 0 seconds, another effect display (for example, "iron plate") is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed. In a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed after performing a certain effect display such as identifiable display or a display related to a certain effect display such as "chance"). It may be configured to perform the effect display (for example, the iron plate image TP). Further, the timer advance notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to "0:00" indicating 0 seconds as a result of performing the countdown, but may display up to "1" indicating 1 second. , May be configured to display up to "00:01". Specifically, "10" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after "1" is displayed, another effect display (for example, a display such as "iron plate" that can identify a certain effect display in the display area where the timer display was performed, or a "chance" After performing a certain effect display (display related to such a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed (for example, the iron plate image TP). Here, the countdown display may be up to the display of "1", just before another effect display is displayed, or up to the display of another effect display. ). The time from the display of "1" to the start of the display of another effect display is the same as the time from the display of "2" to the start of the display of "1" (approximately the same). It may be different (that is, it is displayed at the timing of "0" in "2"-> "1"-> "0"). When a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed as a certain effect display, a display representing "NEXT" or "continuation" may be displayed as another effect display. Further, although the timer display (for example, "10:00") is configured to be displayed immediately after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed, another display is displayed after the display of the preparing image RDY is completed. (For example, a display showing how the timer display is counted up from 0, or a display related to the timer display such as "until the next chance up") is displayed, and then the timer display is displayed. It may be configured so that no other display is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (b5), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot is confirmed. That is, the timer advance notice effect can be said to be a notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In addition, in each effect example shown in this embodiment, an effect other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

FIGS. 393 (c1) to 393 (c3) are productions following FIG. 393 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 393 (c1), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. In the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 393 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in an area different from the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to be gradually shortened according to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". In this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed by the display by the number in the timer display and the display in the display mode other than the number. At first, only the reduction display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is performed, and for example, the countdown by the timer display may be started when the remaining time reaches 3 seconds. In this case, the decreasing speed of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided and each may display a length according to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decreasing speed of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decreasing speed of the shorter remaining time display meter. Further, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the reduction speeds of each may be different.

Further, in this effect example, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer advance notice effect may be performed. For example, when extending the effect, the number 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the time of the timer notice. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Further, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of one meter is long, but for example, as a result of the decrease rate increasing in the middle, the length of one meter may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Further, the decreasing speed of the meter does not have to be constant, and for example, the decreasing speed may be faster or slower in the state where the numbers are also displayed.

FIG. 394 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIG. 394 (a1) shows how the swordsman reach has started. In this production example, unlike FIG. 391 (m), the preparing image RDY is not displayed. After that, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 394 (a2) to 394 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (a4) performs a united animation and displays it. A pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the combined animation may be referred to as an introduction animation of button production or a fade-in animation (IN animation). The semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button advance notice effect is started by combining them. Here, the introduction animation may also be included in the button notice effect. The pair of translucent button images 136q are moving toward the center while being close to each other. In this production example, an example in which two semi-transparent button images 136q are united has been described. However, for example, an effect in which four translucent button images 136q are united may be performed. In this case, two semi-transparent buttons are combined. The button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is more likely to be started when the effect of combining the four translucent button images 136q is performed than when the effect of combining the images 136q is performed. It may be. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted. Further, when the deca button image 136aL described later is displayed and the button advance notice effect is started, the combined animation may be performed using the same semitransparent button image 136q, or the semitransparent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL may be used. A coalescing animation may be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (a5), it is shown that the pair of translucent button images 136q are closer to each other.

Then, when the coalescence animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 394 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, the character "press" is displayed together with the animation showing how the button image 136a is pressed, and the character remains below the button image 136a. The time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation acceptance period. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button advance notice effect may be started after the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button advance notice effect is started.

FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b5). The effects shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b3) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b3), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 394 (b4) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the coalescence animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown of the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the coalescing animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced. Note that the countdown may not be started immediately after the timer advance notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, but the timer display countdown may be started at the start of the combined animation. According to this, it may be possible to easily specify the advance notice effect to be executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the timer advance notice effect may be started by ending the display of the image RDY being prepared during the display of the combined animation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (b5), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. The timer display may be set to "0:00" after the combined animation is completed, or the timer display may be set to "0:00" when the combined animation is completed.

FIG. 394 (b6) shows how the combined animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the operation acceptance state was started. In this production example, the big button image 136aL is more likely to be displayed when both the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation are performed than when only one of the timer advance notice effect and the combined animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

FIG. 394 (c1) is a modified example of the effect shown in FIGS. 394 (b3) to (b6). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 394 (c1) to (c2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 394 (b3) to (b4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 394 (c3), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 394 (c3), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

Then, when the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the deca button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 394 (c4). Since the effect shown in FIG. 394 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 394 (b6), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 394 also shows an example in which the preparing image RDY ends during the execution of the super reach. It should be noted that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the image RDY being prepared ends and the timer notice starts during the display of the introduced animation.

FIG. 395 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 395 (a), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 395 (a). The background color of the preparing image RDY is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the background color is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 395 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 395 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is set to emit red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395 (b), the image RDY being prepared overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. .. That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY being prepared has been started. As described above, in this production example, it can be said that the display of the preparing image RDY is completed except for the super reach.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 395 (c), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 395 (c), "90:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. Further, the background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, it is shown that the timer advance notice production is started before the development into super reach. Then, the timer display displayed when the timer advance notice effect is started is a long time of "90:00", and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, which may improve the expectation for the big hit. As described above, in this production example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as "90:00", it is relatively short time such as "10:00". It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in (short time). Further, in this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to start with a long time in the timer advance notice effect. Further, in this production example, the timer display has a long time and the background is red, so that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically improved.

FIG. 395 (d) shows the transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to the super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to see because the family crest accessory 224E overlaps. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. At the timing shown in FIG. 395 (d), the timer display is "30:00".

FIG. 395 (e) shows how the above-mentioned coalescence animation is started when the timer display is being counted down in the timer advance notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "2:00", and it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, too, the timing at which the semi-transparent button image 136q is merged by the coalescence animation corresponds to the timing when the countdown on the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. That is, in this production example, the coalescing animation And the timer advance notice effect indicate that the start of the button advance notice effect is announced.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 395 (f), a pair of translucent button images 136q are further close to each other, and a state immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is "0:00", indicating that the countdown has been completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but the same may be applied. The reliability of the jackpot may be the same depending on whether the timer notice display has the default background color or the red background color.

FIG. 395 (g) shows that the union animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, the remaining time meter MT was displayed, and the operation acceptance state was started. There is. In this production example, the longer the time for counting down the timer in the timer display, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur.

FIG. 396 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 396 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 396 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 396 (a1). The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 396 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 396 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a2), the prepared image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the hit region, and the hit area is hit by an arrow to determine the reliability of the jackpot. High notices are being made. In this production example, it is shown that a mini game is being played before the transition to super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a4), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini-game as a notice display was a great success.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the variable icon h0 changed from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the variable icon h0. It is shown that the notice by is increasing. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. After the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, the family crest accessory 224E may change from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode, or the family crest accessory 224E may emit red light. After changing to the mode or the golden light emitting mode, the variable icon h0 may change from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the timing at which the variable icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode. Then, the family crest accessory 224E may be changed from a red light emitting mode to a golden light emitting mode. Then, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation by the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game is shifted to the invisible state by the shutter image. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, in this production example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game, but the hold icon may be changed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a6), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image shows how the shutter image is released. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a hidden state in which no display is performed. The tutorial display may be started when the shutter image is released, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini game may be started. Further, the display may be grayed out after the shutter image is released.

Subsequently, an example showing how the mini-game is started without displaying the preparing image RDY will be described with reference to FIGS. 396 (b1) to (b8).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b1), since one variable display of special figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in red, and a notice is displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 396 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b2), it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. As a result, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display displayed before the display of the mini-game described later is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 396 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In this production example, when the shutter image is released, the mini game is started on the tutorial display unit TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game is started is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini-game is shown to start without displaying the preparing image RDY. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (b4) to (b8) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (b4) to (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 396 (a3) to (a7), the description thereof will be omitted. After the mini-game is finished, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the explanation or gray out the display.

FIG. 397 is a diagram stepwise showing a display example in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 397 (a1), a UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on a pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, the variable notice display mode, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest accessory 224E has a red light emitting mode according to the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 397 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 397 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 397 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 397 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that instead of a certain display (explanatory display) in a certain area (tutorial display unit TT1), a display (display of a shutter image) before another display (notice display) is performed. .. It should be noted that during the display of the shutter image, at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image is displayed may be displayed.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a3), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display, which is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display consisting of the characters "super heat" is displayed instead of the preparing image RDY, the mini game, or the timer notice effect. The notice display of this "super heat" may be displayed as a result of performing a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is displayed as a result of performing the mini-game or timer notice effect than when it is displayed without going through the mini-game or timer notice effect. Good. Further, the notice display of this "super heat" may not be displayed as a result of performing a mini game or a timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform the effect of closing the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image before displaying the notice such as "extreme heat".

FIGS. 397 (b1) to 397 (b8) show an example of an effect showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display unit TT1. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 397 (a1) to (a3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is released is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display unit TT1, when the shutter image is released, it is shown that the timer advance notice icon I81, which gives notice that the timer advance notice effect is performed, appears. As a result, it is announced that the timer advance notice effect will be performed. Other notice icons may appear, and for example, the notice icons shown in FIGS. 81 and 135 (d) may appear.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b5), the timer advance notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 pops out from the tutorial display unit TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b6), the closing operation by the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b7), the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. As a result, the display state on the tutorial display unit TT1 is difficult to see. In this production example, the timer advance notice icon I81 is maintained in the state of being displayed until the shutter image is completely closed, and the timer advance notice icon I81 is notified that it will be stocked. , It may be erased when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 397 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is released is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is openly displayed by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY. At the timing shown in FIG. 397 (b8), the preparing image RDY is in the default display mode. This preparing image RDY is displayed because the timer advance notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer advance notice effect is announced by the display of the preparing image RDY. In this production example, the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the timer notice effect and the display mode of the preparing image RDY for notifying the start of the mini game are the same, but they are different. It may be. Further, the mini game or the timer advance notice effect may be started without displaying the preparing image RDY.

FIG. 398 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start or end timing of a certain notice display, and the start or end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state. It may be in the same state.

FIG. 398 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 391 (l). Since the effect shown in FIG. 392 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 391 (m), the description thereof will be omitted. In the production shown in FIG. 398 (a1), the display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a3), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and " The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the preparing image RDY is still in the displayed state. That is, it can be said that the preparing image RDY is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is made. In addition, to congratulate the big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the shogun character 224Fb emit light in a multicolored rainbow display mode.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is made more difficult to see than the state without overlapping with the effect EF5. ing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" indicating 0 seconds is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 398 (a5), "3:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, a fake timer advance notice effect may be started in which the timer advance notice effect ends before the time reaches "0:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a7), the character "Go" is displayed in the display area where the timer display was performed, and it is notified that a certain advance notice effect is started. There is. The display of the characters "Go" may or may not be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (a8), it is shown that the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 398 (a9), the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and it is notified that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain advance notice effect, that is, it corresponds to the advance notice effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer advance notice effect is not performed, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may not be started, and when the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol is started, the default display instead of the big button image 136aL is displayed. The button image 136a of the aspect may be displayed. Further, a mini game may be played instead of the timer advance notice effect. Further, the big button image 136aL may be displayed even when the timer advance notice effect or the mini game is not performed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (a9), the jackpot of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is changed from the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4". It is changed to the combination of decorative symbols of, and it is notified that the probability variation jackpot has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

FIGS. 398 (b1) to 398 (b4) show how the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started during the continuation of the animation of the duel scene in the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b1), it is shown that the animation of the duel scene is continuing. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b1), "10:00" is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. The countdown may start before the development of the super reach, after the development of the super reach, or at the timing of the development of the super reach, or the reach. It may be before the transition to the state, after the transition to the reach state, and before the development to the super reach.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b2), the button advance notice effect is started, and it is shown that the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT. .. That is, it is shown that the final judge production has started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b2), the timer display indicates "9:00". That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer display is counted down by the timer notice effect during the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136. Here, the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation acceptance period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 398 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 398 (b4), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4" -The combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continuing, that is, there is a possibility that the jackpot symbol may be promoted after that. In this production example, the timer display is configured so as not to be "0:00" even when the production button 136 is not operated in the final judge production. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes "0:00". On the contrary, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect, the count may be 0.

FIG. 399 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a timer advance notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 399 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 397 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. Only one type of display mode is prepared for the preparing image RDY in this production example, and change display to another display mode is not performed. As described above, in this production example, the reliability of the jackpot is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. Further, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is to be performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. In this production example, one of a plurality of colors is selected as the background color in the timer notice display, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the production example shown in FIG. 399 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. Note that the background color of the timer notice display may change before or after the timer display countdown starts, so that the reliability may be improved in the middle.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decorative symbols are in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. The timer display may be in the reach state after the timer display is set to "0:00", the timer display may be set to "0:00" after the timer display is reached, and the timer display may be set to "0:00". The reach state may be reached at the timing of "0:00". In this production example, there is a correspondence relationship with the display indicating that when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, it develops into super reach, and it always develops into super reach.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (e), the character "Go" is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (f), the button notice effect was started, the default button image 136a was displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 was started. The situation is shown. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of "Go", the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (g), it is shown that the button notice effect is started and the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 399 (h), it shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to the super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden. That is, in this production example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 399 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, since the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 399 (k), a state in which the cut-in image HCI of the princess is displayed is shown. This princess's cut-in image HCI is suddenly displayed without going through the button notice effect, timer advance effect, or mini game, and its reliability is low, but the button advance effect, timer advance effect, or It may be displayed as a result of the mini-game being played. Further, instead of the cut-in image HCI of the princess, for example, the iron plate image TP may be displayed.

FIG. 400 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 (c) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 399 (a) to 399 (c), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 400 (d) shows an animation in which the character of the lord as a navigator is throwing a bomb. Specifically, the character of the lord displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while shouting "Not yet", and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol. Move across device 208L. Then, the bomb goes to the tutorial display unit TT1 where the timer display countdown is performed, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display unit TT1.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (e), the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, and the state in which the preparing image RDY is displayed again is shown. At the time when this timer advance notice effect was started, the timer display was "10:00", and the timing when the button advance notice effect was started was notified, but the timer advance notice effect was interrupted. It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the timer advance notice effect is interrupted by the navigator character than when the timer advance notice effect is not interrupted by the navigator character. If the countdown of the timer display is interrupted, the timer display time may be increased instead of the preparation image RDY display to extend the time until the timer display is counted up. Alternatively, the countdown speed may be slower. Further, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that the timing of 0 can be easily predicted because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the end timing of the preparing image RDY (that is, the start timing of the timer notice) shows the future. In some cases.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. The tutorial display unit TT1 continues to display the image RDY being prepared.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period. ing.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 400 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and the process shifts to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 400 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to the super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this production example, when shifting to at least the swordsman reach of the super reach, the UI section UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display section TT1 after the super reach transition display is started. , Will be hidden.

FIG. 400 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the timer notice effect is restarted. Specifically, the timer notice display after restarting has been changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot has improved. Further, in FIG. 400 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer notice production during the super reach (swordsman reach). It should be noted that the start time of the timer advance notice effect is set to an appropriate timing, for example, before the start of the super reach, after the start of the super reach, before the reach state, or after the reach state is reached, the super reach starts. May be started at a timing such as before. Further, the timer display when the timer advance notice effect is restarted can be appropriately set to a time, and may be started from "9:00" indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 400 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 399, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not a development to super reach, but a cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer advance effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has a high degree of reliability. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is set to "0:00" at a good point in the super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. Further, the later the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (the start timing of a certain notice display) is, the higher the expectation of a big hit is.

FIG. 401 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 401 (a) is the same as that shown in FIG. 399 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (b), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the preparing image RDY. At this time, "TIMER x 2" is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 on which the preparing image RDY is displayed, indicating that the timer advance notice effect is performed twice. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be displayed at the same time as the display of the preparing image RDY, or may be displayed after the preparing image RDY is displayed. For example, the timer notice effect is initially displayed. You may make it think that it will be done once, but actually it will be done twice. In addition, instead of displaying "TIMEr x 2", for example, two images RDY being prepared may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (c), the preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. .. The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. Here, the background color of the timer notice display may be the default display mode of green. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (d), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. In addition, it is shown that the decorative symbols are in the reach state with "decoration 4" stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively. In addition, when the timer display countdown is completed, the display of "TIMER x 2" displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been digested and ended. ing. The display of "TIMER x 2" may be difficult to see by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes "0:00". Further, the display of "TIMEr x 2" may be left as it is without being erased. Further, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state may be provided in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed.

Then, when the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (e), the characters "Go" are displayed in place of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. Notifying that it will be started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (f), the button notice effect was started, the default button image 136a was displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 was started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the display of "Go" is erased and the display is hidden. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock of the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect itself is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated in the button notice effect and succeeds. The display corresponds to the notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (g), it is shown that the gauge of the remaining time meter is decreasing according to the time from the start of the button notice effect and the start of the operation valid period. ing. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the preparing image RDY again, and it is notified that the second timer advance notice effect is started. However, when the preparing image RDY is redisplayed, the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Is displayed in a larger size than when is displayed. Therefore, due to this preparing image RDY, the variable icon h0 and a part of the decorative symbol may overlap. In this way, the preparing image RDY may be hidden once and then overlapped with each other, which may have an effect of attracting more attention.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 401 (h), it is assumed that the button advance notice effect is successful, and as shown in FIG. 401 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to super reach. The display is made and it develops into a super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Further, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the state in which the family crest accessory 224E is not overlapped. The image RDY being prepared may be overlapped with the family crest accessory 224E only when it is enlarged and displayed, and may not be overlapped when it is not enlarged and displayed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden. That is, in this production example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development to super reach.

FIG. 401 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is still displayed. Since the image RDY being prepared is enlarged and displayed, a part of the variable icon h0 is overlapped, and the character of the swordsman in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the enlarged image RDY being prepared may be displayed even during the execution of super reach. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (k), it is shown that the preparation image RDY is switched to the timer notice display and the second timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 401 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "3:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown is performed by the timer notice production during the super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this production example, the size of the timer notice display is set to be the same as the size of the prepared image RDY that is enlarged and displayed, and when the timer notice display is enlarged and displayed, it is a big hit than when it is not enlarged. It is easier to confirm the design. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be enlarged and displayed without fail. Further, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be enlarged and displayed. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer advance effect is more reliable than that of the first timer advance effect, but the timer display time is shorter. The timer display time may be longer in the second timer advance notice effect than in the first timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (m) displays the character "Go" instead of the timer display, and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 401 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer advance notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, it may be possible to dramatically improve the expectation for a big hit by notifying in advance that the timer advance notice effect will be performed twice.

As described above, in this production example, when the number of clothes in the prepared image RDY is displayed and one prepared image RDY is digested, all the prepared image RDYs are displayed in the same symbol variation display. It has been shown to be digested.

FIG. 402 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 402 (a1) to 402 (a2) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 398 (a1) and 398 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a3), it is shown that the long press effect by the long press effect display is started to be displayed. In the long-press effect display, the area where the character of the lord is drawn is arranged above, and the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn is arranged below, and according to the operation amount of the long-press operation of the effect button 136. , The sizes of both areas are displayed to fluctuate relatively. The preparing image RDY is displayed even when the long press effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a3), the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a4), it is shown that the acceptance of the long press operation by the long press effect has started. That is, it is shown that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has started. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. Further, the image RDY being prepared is switched to the timer notice display, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display has been changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 402 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been done. That is, in this production example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display match. It does not have to be a perfect match. The timer advance notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer advance notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

FIG. 402 (a5) shows how the player is performing a long press operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is "4:00".

FIG. 402 (a6) shows how the player continues to press and hold the effect button 136. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the swordsman placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is reduced by that amount. Characters are shown to be dominant. This suggests that favorable results are likely to occur. At the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is "3:00".

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a7), the timer display is set to "0:00", the countdown is completed, and the characters "Go" are displayed. In addition, the long press effect is still being performed, and the operation validity period of the effect button 136 is still ongoing. That is, it can be said that the character display of "Go" is displayed during the operation valid period of the effect button 136. In addition, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is further expanded, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is drawn is further reduced by that amount. It has been shown that the character of the lord is by far the dominant. The long-press effect may be terminated after the characters "Go" are displayed, the characters "Go" may be displayed after the long-press effect is completed, or "Go" may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the characters "" are displayed. Further, the operation validity period may end after the character "Go" is displayed, the character "Go" may be displayed after the operation validity period ends, or "Go" may be displayed. The operation validity period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a8), the characters "blow" are displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to start the button notice effect, and the operation is valid. It is shown that the period has been set again. That is, this button advance notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that it shows an example in which a plurality of (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the operation valid period to be set may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect has ended, or may be continuously set to the operation valid period in the long press effect. You may.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (a10), the hero's lord defeats the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4" -The combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light emitting mode so as to congratulate the big hit.

In this way, in this production example, the preparation display ends in the long press part and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long press part and the next part or near the end of the long press part. Then, it becomes "0:00", and an example is shown in which the button effect performed in the next part becomes good.

FIGS. 402 (b1) to 402 (b5) show that the long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but the timer advance notice effect is not performed.

Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b1), after the long-press effect by the long-press effect display is started, the acceptance of the long-press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is also started. It is shown that the long press operation of is being performed. In this production example, the timer advance notice production is not performed.

However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 402 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the long press effect display, the character of the lord arranged above is drawn. The area has been reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn has been expanded accordingly, indicating that the character of the lord is inferior (the character of the swordsman who is the enemy character is superior). .. This suggests that it is difficult to obtain favorable results.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b3), the characters "blow" are displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to give a button notice effect. It is shown that it has been started and the operation validity period has been set again. As described above, when the long press effect is performed and the timer advance notice effect is not performed, it is difficult to display the deca button image 136aL, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is likely to be displayed. If the timer advance notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 402 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 402 (b5), the main character, the lord, loses to the swordsman who plays the enemy role, and "decoration 4- The combination of the lost decorative patterns of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is derived and the shaking fluctuation is started. It should be noted that the flow may be such that the game may be a big hit even if the mini game or the timer notice effect is not used.

FIG. 403 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a button repeated striking effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 403 (a), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of "set the meter to MAX in time by the button repeated striking" is given. The button image 136a is displayed together with the characters "prepared", and the operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (a), the effect button 136 is lit in white before the start of accepting the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period. In this effect example, the display of "preparation" displayed above the button image 136a can be said to be a display corresponding to the preparing image RDY (preparation effect display of the button repeated hitting effect). When the button repeated pressing effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 403 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 403 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (b), it is shown that acceptance of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 has started. Specifically, the character "prepared" displayed above the button image 136a is switched to the character "start", and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the operation valid period is started. Along with notifying that, the effect button lamp 138 emits light in red. In this effect example, it can be said that the button repeated press effect (main effect) is started at the timing when the operation valid period is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a manner of decreasing with the passage of time from the operation valid period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, it is displayed. A countdown display is displayed by displaying numbers. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (c), "5" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. Since there is a possibility that a certain advance notice effect is performed when the countdown in the countdown display is completed, it can be said that the countdown effect by this countdown display corresponds to the timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 403 (d) shows how the player has started the operation of repeatedly hitting the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (d), "4" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 4 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 403 (e), the player continuously hits the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is one in red according to the number of repeated hits. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (e), "3" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that it is 3 seconds until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 403 (f), the player continuously presses the effect button 136, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 403 (f), "1" is displayed as a countdown display, and it is notified that there is only one second left until the operation valid period ends.

In FIG. 403 (g), the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is set to “0”, the operation valid period has expired, and the player has completed the repeated hitting operation of the effect button 136. It should be noted that the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in three red modes, that is, it is shown that the button repeated pressing effect has failed. Although the effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, the lit state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation valid period ends, or before the operation valid period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

If the button repeated striking effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 403 (h) displays "Sorry ..." and notifies that the button repeated striking effect has failed. In this production example, in a pachinko machine capable of executing a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display-like display.

FIG. 404 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 404 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variable icon h0 placed on the pedestal in the center thereof. On the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 404 (a), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 404 (a) displays the first preparing image RDY1. The function of the first preparing image RDY is the same as that of the preparing image RDY described above. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 404 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in this production example, the second preparing image RDY is displayed above the first preparing image RDY1, and it is shown that a plurality of preparing images are displayed at the same time. The first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are each subjected to corresponding effects (timer notice effect, mini game, etc.). All of these preparing images (first preparing image RDY1 and second preparing image RDY2) function as a look-ahead notice. In addition, the background color of each of the images being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, these preparing images may be started to be displayed at the same time, or one may be started to be displayed and then the other may be started to be displayed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 404 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

FIG. 404 (b) shows how the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 404 (a) has ended and the next symbol variation display has started. Specifically, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The variable icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variable icon is displayed and becomes the variable icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves to the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, variable display of decorative patterns has started. It can be said that the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY2 are still displayed, that is, these preparing images are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (c), the first preparing image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and it is shown that the timer notice effect is started. ing. The background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the timer display in the timer notice display is "5:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this production example, when one of the plurality of preparing images is activated (digested) and the production is started, all the other preparing images are also digested. Although all the images in preparation are digested in one symbol variation display, the notice icon may be carried over to the symbol variation display from the next time onward.

FIG. 404 (d) shows that the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 404 (e), the character "Go" is displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is notified that a corresponding notice display is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (f), the character "Go" is erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and moves to the position of the tutorial display unit TT1. Preparing to do Image movement animation is being performed. In addition, the advance notice effect (advance start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon described above is changed as shown in FIG. 391 (f), but is different. It may be a character. In this production, the preparatory image movement animation may start after the pre-start notice production has started, or the pre-start notice production may start after the preparatory image movement animation has started. Preliminary start notice The image moving animation being prepared may start at the timing when the production starts. Further, although the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 404 (f) overlaps the second preparing image RDY2, it may overlap with the second preparing image RDY2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (g), the pending change animation is started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the variable icon h0 and hits the variable icon h0. Has been done. At this time, the effect EF4 covers the entire variable icon h0, which makes it more difficult to see than the state where the effect EF4 does not cover the entire variable icon h0.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the change notice is started.

FIG. 404 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the left and right symbols, respectively, to reach the reach state, and then shift to the super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. The reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to the super reach. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the second preparing image RDY2. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

FIG. 404 (j) shows how the swordsman reach has started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is still maintained. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E has been moved downward and returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (k), the timer advance notice display is switched from the second preparing image RDY2, and the timer advance notice effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 404 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates "10:00", and it is notified that a certain notice display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been done. The timer notice display is set to the default display mode at the start of display, and may be promoted such as changing to a golden background color after the display is started (for example, after the countdown is started). May be good.

After that, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (l), the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed.

Then, when the countdown of the timer display is completed, the character "Go" is displayed in place of the timer display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (m), and a certain notice display is started. I am informing you.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 404 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, the new preparing image is not displayed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested, but the new preparation is performed after one of the plurality of preparing images is digested. The medium image may be displayed.

FIG. 405 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an effect by explanatory display applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 405 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 391 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405 (a2), it is shown that the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from "Panda is the master of the lord" to "The lord is the eighth shogun". .. In this production example, when the explanatory display on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image described above is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanatory displays. In this effect example, it is shown that in one symbol variation display, when the explanatory display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, and the switching display is performed between the explanatory displays.

FIGS. 405 (b1) to 405 (b3) show how the opening / closing display is performed by the shutter image when the explanatory display is switched. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 405 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (a) to 391 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 405 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display unit TT1 by the shutter image is completely closed, and the explanation display of "The lord is General Yatsushiro" is displayed. It is shown that it is being done. That is, it is shown that the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which the notice display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. I expected that the notice display would be started by performing such an effect, but the notice display was not started and the explanation display was performed, which disappointed the player, and the shutter image was opened and closed. It may be possible to have expectations.

FIG. 406 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIGS. 406 (a1) to 406 (a3) show another example of the effect following FIG. 391 (e). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 406 (a1) to 406 (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to 391 (g), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 406 (a3), the effect EF4 is erased, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged as the default display mode. .. In this way, even if the above-mentioned pending change animation is performed with reference to FIG. 391, a failure effect in which the display mode does not change may be performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of characters appearing in the hold change animation may be prepared so that the rate at which the display mode of the hold icon changes differs depending on the characters appearing in the hold change animation.

In the above-mentioned pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 was displayed overlapping with the UI section UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI section UI3 to display the UI. It may not overlap with the part UI3. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

FIG. 407 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 407 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 407 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 407 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 407 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a2), it is shown that the roulette effect as a mini game is started. In this roulette effect, the circularly formed roulette board RR is divided into three equal parts. The area of the grandfather is arranged in the upper part of the three sections, the area of the princess is arranged in the lower left, and the area of the princess Chibi is arranged in the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, the variable display is performed by blinking each area in red, and the notice display corresponding to the area finally lit in red is prepared. It should be noted that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation display and the like end may be the same or different. Further, in the configuration in which the display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed and the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends may be the same, or separately. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be called a look-ahead notice display.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a3), as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect, it is shown that all the areas are lit in red. That is, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the Chibi princess character are prepared respectively.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character appears, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when the image being prepared is displayed, it is displayed at the position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the character itself that appears may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). Further, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a5), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi moves upward and overlaps with the lower left corner portion of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that one notice display overlaps with another notice display. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a6), it is shown that the character CHM of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, the notice display corresponding to the character CMH of Princess Chibi is a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a7), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a8), the display in a mode in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII starts.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a9), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. When the mini-game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the lateral direction starts rotating with the lateral direction as the rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a10), it is suggested that the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol displaying the characters "extreme heat" is derived, and there is a high possibility of a big hit. There is. That is, the fluctuation notice is given by deriving the character "super heat" to the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect of changing the display mode of something, but an effect of giving a big hit notice.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a11), the display in a manner in which the princess character HME vibrates is started. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed so as to overlap the UI unit UI3, the display of the UI unit UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a12), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer advance notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of performing the countdown, when "0:00" is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 407 (a12), "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and then the countdown is started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display becomes "0:00" and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME rises and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1, and notifies that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that the same effect as the above-mentioned display of "Go" shown in FIG. 404 (m) is performed.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (a14), the super reach transition display is performed, and it is shown that the super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to reach the swordsman. Further, although not shown, the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates and overlaps with the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this production example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the jackpot is high. Further, in the tutorial display unit TT1, the countdown by the timer display is completed, so that the display is hidden. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1 to be hidden.

In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of Super Reach, but at least one may be digested after the development of Super Reach. For example, the iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini-game or a timer notice effect to be played may be performed.

FIG. 407 (b1) shows that only the grandfather's region out of the three regions was lit in red in the roulette effect described above in FIG. 407 (a2). That is, of the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the character of Princess Chibi, only the notice display corresponding to the grandfather character may be prepared. It has been notified.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 407 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather's character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. Therefore, in this production example, only a mini game by drum DRM is performed.

FIG. 408 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

The effect shown in FIG. 408 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a3), but "x2" is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left portion of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. When a plurality of effects by the grandfather character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed for one prepared image. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, it can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess character HMEs. On the contrary, one character may display a plurality of images in preparation.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters, the Chibi princess character CHM1, moves upward to the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that they are overlapping. As a result, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a4), it is shown that the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi is animating to throw an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of Princess Chibi is started.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a5), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is started.

Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a6), the character CHM2 of the other Chibi princess of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It is shown that the parts overlap. As a result, it is notified that the second notice display corresponding to the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi will start.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a7), it is shown that the character CHM2 of Princess Chibi is performing an animation of throwing an object toward the variable icon h0. Then, when the object reaches the variable icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the variable icon h0 is made difficult to see. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variable icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH2 of Princess Chibi.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the variable icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display mode of the golden notice, and it is shown that the change notice by the variable icon h0 is ranked up.

408 (b1) to 408 (b4) show another production example following FIG. 408 (a3). Since the effect shown in FIG. 408 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 408 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (b2), after the object thrown by the character CHM1 of Princess Chibi reaches the fluctuation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the entire display screen is darkened. Is performed, the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed glows white, and the display is performed in which the light extends in the horizontal direction from the portion. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are hidden. If another mini-game is started while the display mode of the variable icon h0 is being changed, the mini-game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkening of the display screen. It may be. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some of the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden. You may do so. In this way, the state in which the blackout display BL is displayed may be referred to as the fourth state. Then, in this production example, the relationship between the first state in which the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state in which the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 is the first. The state may change to the fourth state, then the first state may change to the second state, or the first state may change to the second state. There may be a case where the first state is changed to the fourth state and then the second state is changed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (b3), it is shown that the light of the portion where the effect EF7 is displayed is enlarged and displayed.

After that, when the darkening display is completed, as shown in FIG. 408 (b4), the variable icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is restarted. Since the effect shown in FIG. 408 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 408 (a5), the description thereof will be omitted.

408 (c1) to 408 (c3) show another production example following FIG. 407 (a6). Since the effect shown in FIG. 408 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (c2), display in a mode in which the grandfather character GII vibrates is started, and in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed, "Go" is displayed. Characters are displayed to inform that the mini game is about to start. The display of "Go" may start after the grandfather character GII starts vibrating, or the grandfather character GII may start vibrating after the display of "Go" starts. The display of "Go" may be started at the timing when the grandfather character GII starts to vibrate. As a result, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the grandfather's character GII starts.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 408 (c3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the third preparing image RDY3 arranged adjacent to the grandfather character GII was displayed. Has been done. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the area where the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed is enlarged and moved to substantially the center of the display screen, and the production by rotating the drum DRM is started. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the preparing image is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini-game is started after the display of "Go" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini-game is started without the display of "Go". .. Further, the jackpot may be more likely to occur when the mini-game is enlarged and displayed than when the mini-game is not enlarged and displayed. It should be noted that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini-game, the timer advance notice effect, or the like may also be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same area, the display of the third display system is easier to understand because the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different. It may have the effect.

FIG. 409 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left side effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on which the right side effect display is performed may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be displayed on the display device 2.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 409 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 409 (a) displays the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 409 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (b), the multi-chance up notice has been started. When the multi-chance-up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into two left and right, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left notice display area CUL, "Princess Chibi participates in SP reach due to annihilation" is displayed, and the princess Chibi Musou production with the mission of princess annihilating a large number of minions is performed, and the notice on the right side In the display area CUR, "Victory causes the lord to participate in the SP reach" is displayed, and the old man and the lord make a drinking comparison, and the drinking comparison production is performed with the mission that the lord wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production will shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions is achieved, and the reliability will increase when both missions are achieved. Has been done. The Chibihime Musou production may be started after the Chibihime Musou production is started, or the Chibihime Musou production may be started after the drinking comparison production is started, or both productions may be started at the same time. May be done. Further, in this production example, if at least one of the mission in the Chibihime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, a big hit may be made.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (c), it is shown that the mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 during the execution of both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production. There is. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the hit region, and when the arrow hits the hit region, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be called. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and may be plural, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (d), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the characters "chance" are displayed is displayed in the left side notice display area CUL where the Chibihime Musou production is performed. It has been reported that this makes it easier to accomplish the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area where the notice display is performed do not match, which may give the player a sense of discomfort and improve the interest. .. The chance-up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance up in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. The cut-in image WUI may be displayed. The tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden because the mini game is finished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (f), it is shown that the minions have been wiped out and the mission has been achieved in the Chibihime Musou production displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (g), the word "annihilation" was displayed along with the up display of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission in the production of Princess Chibi Musou was achieved. Has been notified. In the right side notice display area CUR, the effect of drinking and comparing continues.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (h), it is shown that the lord won the grandfather in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right side notice display area CUR, and the mission was accomplished.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (i), the word "victory" is displayed together with the up display of the lord in the right side notice display area CUR to notify that the mission in the drinking comparison production has been achieved. Has been done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (j), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. When shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but the variable icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was completed, and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production was completed, so Chibihime appears as an ally of the lord. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is completed and the mission in the Chibihime Musou production fails, it will shift to the swordsman reach, but Chibihime will not appear, the mission in the Chibihime Musou production will be completed, and the drinking comparison production If the mission in is unsuccessful, it will move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this production, the content of the subsequent production differs depending on the success or failure of each of the two missions.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 409 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI in which the characters “chance” and the princess character are displayed is displayed on the background of the horizontal stripes. As a result, the reliability of the jackpot is improved, but it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not the notice display started via the mini game or the timer notice effect started from the preparing image RDY. ing.

FIG. 410 is a diagram stepwise showing another effect example of the effect shown in FIG. 409. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (b) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 409 (a) to 409 (b), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (c), it is shown that both the Chibihime Musou production and the drinking comparison production are performed. In this production example, the display of the image RDY being prepared is continued, and the mini game has not been started yet. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to the super reach. This production continues from FIG. 410 (c) to FIG. (E). In FIG. 410 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 410 (f) to (j) are performed. In the effect shown in FIGS. 410 (f) to (j), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with respect to the effect shown in FIGS. 409 (f) to (j). Since it is the same except that, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (k), the preparing image RDY overlaps with the effect EF5, the display of the preparing image RDY ends, and the notice display corresponding to the preparing image RDY is displayed. It has been notified that it will be started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (l), it is shown that the mini game is started in the area where the preparing image RDY is displayed. When the mini-game starts, the mini-character MC1 and the target TGT of the lord are displayed. The target TGT is composed of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the hit region, and when the arrow hits the hit region, a chance-up notice is given. It has come to be called. The number of hit areas is not limited to one, and may be plural, all areas may be hits, or all areas may be non-hit areas.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (m), it is shown that the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord stuck in the area where the target TGT hits. That is, it shows that the mini-game as a notice display was successful.

Then, the iron plate image TP is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 410 (n). This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed. In this way, in this production example, the mini-game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini-game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

FIG. 411 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the preparatory notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 411 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a2), a "reach if caught" display is performed, and it is shown that the chasing effect with the mission of catching Echigoya is started. There is. When the chase effect is started, a sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

In the first decorative pattern display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a3), it is shown that the lord is closing the distance from the Echigoya. On the other hand, in the sub window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a4), it is shown that the lord caught Echigoya and the mission was accomplished. As a result, it is notified that the reach will be reached. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display the image RDY being prepared to indicate that the reach is being prepared. As a result, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, the player may be able to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display will occur.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (a5), the chasing effect is completed, the main display displayed in the sub window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the reach is reached in "decoration 4". The situation is shown. In this production example, it is shown that the reach was generated by the success of the mission in the chase production. When the main display is displayed in full screen, the sub window WP3 may be enlarged (wipe display), or may be switched. Further, when the main display becomes full screen display, the preparation image RDY may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2) show another example of the effect relating to the display of the sub-window during the execution of the chase effect shown in FIGS. 411 (a1) to (a5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 411 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 411 (b1) displays the first preparing image RDY1. Further, the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed in the upper left portion of the display screen. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 411 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (b2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chase effect is started, a sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this production example, the sub-window WP3 and the preparing image are displayed at positions where they do not overlap, but the preparing image may overlap with the sub-window WP3 and the preparing image may overlap with the sub-window WP3. It may be overlapped.

FIGS. 411 (c1) to (c2) show another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2). Since the effect shown in FIG. 411 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 411 (b1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (c2), the above-mentioned chasing effect has been started. When the chase effect is started, a sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 411 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, of the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image. The RDY1 is displayed only in the sub-window WP3 as the main display is displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the first preparing image RDY1 displayed at the position displayed so far is erased.

FIGS. 411 (d1) to 411 (d2) show a display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is tilted. Since the effect example shown in FIG. 411 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 409 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 411 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees counterclockwise to produce a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt along with the background display.

FIG. 412 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment. Since the effect shown in FIG. 412 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 407 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "A" indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a3), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, in the mini-game display area, "Strike" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a4), the character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward 10 pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission is achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a6), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

FIGS. 412 (b1) to 412 (b8) explain another example of the effect of the step-up notice. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (b1) to 412 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 412 (a1) and 412 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA are lifted. It is shown that it is displayed in this way. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB also has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter "B" indicating that it is the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side, and the right side thereof. A mini-game display area for playing a mini-game as a step-up notice is formed in. In this production example, it is easier to succeed in the mission when the mini-game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is played on the first step-up display unit SUB. Further, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game is successful on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini-game is successful on the first step-up display unit SUB.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b4), it is shown that the mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini-game is started, in the mini-game display area, "Cup in" is displayed, and a display showing how the character of the lord is putting is displayed. That is, this mini-game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a putt.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b5), a state in which the character of the lord puts and the golf ball heads toward the cup is shown.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b6), it is shown that the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, and it is reported that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 412 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward to frame out, and the UI unit. UI3 returns to the default position.

In this production example, an example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game was described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a display indicating that all the pins did not fall is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a display indicating that the cup has not been made may be displayed to notify the mission failure. Further, in this production example, the character of the lord appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when the character of the princess appears, the character of the lord appears. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

FIG. 413 is a diagram illustrating another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. 412. Since the effect shown in FIG. 413 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 412 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. That is, in this production example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which something in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be erased after the first step-up display unit SUA has started to be displayed, or the first step-up display unit SUA may be started to be displayed after the explanation display has been erased. The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA is started to be displayed. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 413 (a3) to 413 (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 413 (a3) to 413 (a5) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 412 (a3) to (a5), and the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed with explanations. Since it is the same except that the variable icon h0 is not displayed, the description thereof will be omitted.

The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a6) continues to show how the mission has been accomplished.

When the bowling chance game is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. The explanation display and the variable icon h0 remain hidden.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (a8), it is shown that the variable icon h0 is redisplayed in the red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. It should be noted that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be passed through a mini game, a timer advance notice effect, or the like.

FIGS. 413 (b1) to 413 (b3) show another display mode of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 413 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 413 (a1), except that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 413 (b2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. There is. At this time, the explanation display and the variable icon h0 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 are deleted. Further, in this production example, the display position of the hold icon h11 is not changed even though the hold icon h11 is moved upward of the UI unit UI3, so that it overlaps with the mini game display area of the first step-up display unit SUA. It is shown that it is. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that even if the UI unit UI3 moves, a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move.

FIG. 413 (b3) The first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps with the mini-game display area, a part of the character display of "strike" is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

FIG. 414 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 414 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 414 (a). The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 414 (a) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (a), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 414 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 414 (b) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to its initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (c), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 414 (d) to 414 (f), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 does not frame out together with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained in a state where the display position is lowered as shown in FIG. 414 (f).

FIG. 414 (g) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (h), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed by lifting the variable icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (i), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (j), it is shown that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all 10 pins collapse to strike, indicating that the mission has been achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 414 (l), the preparation image RDY appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer advance notice effect is started. Will be done. The background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. Further, FIG. 414 (l) shows how the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out. At this time, the prepared image RDY overlaps with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 414 (m), at least one until the frame-out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

FIG. 415 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 415 (a1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 415 (a1) displays the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 415 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a1), a state of shifting to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest accessory 224E rises and rotates, and the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps on the front side of. Therefore, the variable icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) are overlapped by the family crest accessory 224E, which makes it difficult to see. The family crest accessory 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It has been notified that the family crest accessory 224E will shift to super reach due to the ascending / rotating motion. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first preparing image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to the super reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 415 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

In addition, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 415 (a2) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a3), it is shown that the animation (UI unit FO animation) in which the UI unit UI3 is framed out to the lower part of the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 415 (a4) to 415 (a6), the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variable icon h0 and the first prepared image RDY1 are not framed out together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 415 (a6), the variable icon h0 is displayed in a lowered display state. The display state of the first prepared image RDY1 is maintained without changing the display position.

FIG. 415 (a7) shows how the swordsman reach has started.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a8), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA is raised and displayed so as to lift the variable icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but since the variable icon h0 is displayed, it is shown that only the variable icon h0 is moving. Can be done. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed so as to overlap with the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. The first preparing image RDY1 may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. In addition, the first step-up display unit SUA may be raised, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a9), it is shown that the above-mentioned bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, "Strike" is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display showing how the character of the lord throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini-game display area of the first step-up display SUA overlaps with the first preparing image RDY1, and is considered to be more difficult to see than the non-overlapping state. The same applies to the following productions.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a10), it is shown that the character of the lord throws a bowling ball and heads toward the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, all 10 pins collapse and become a strike, and it is shown that the mission is achieved. ..

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini-game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of preparing images are displayed in a certain area and a new preparing image is displayed, the new preparing image is displayed in another area. Can be done. The background color of the third preparing image RDY3 is green, which is the default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 415 (a12) to 415 (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward to frame out.

FIGS. 415 (b1) to 415 (b2) are views showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 415 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 415 (a3). Further, since the effect shown in FIG. 411 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 415 (a4), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 415 (b2), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that the display is maintained in a mode in which the display position is lowered only on the pedestal on which the variable icon h0 is placed. That is, it is shown that a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed even if the UI unit UI3 is framed out.

FIG. 416 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 416 (a1), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 416 (a1) displays the image RDY being prepared. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 416 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a2), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, and "decoration 6" is displayed on the left symbol and "decoration 7" is displayed on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. The middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a3), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol is slowed down, and it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol composed of the symbol of the lord is scrolling in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a4), it is shown that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a5), the pseudo-ream symbol stop animation that directs whether or not to start the pseudo-ream is started. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation, leaving the variable icon h0 and the preparing image RDY. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol may be started. The UI unit FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation is started. Further, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI unit FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, an example in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in a certain state such as when a pseudo-ream effect is performed or when a pseudo-ream is established is shown. When the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol expands in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 416 (a5) to 416 (a7).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded and overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, so that the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to see. ing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 416 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbol is further expanded, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N It is displayed over. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part of them is overlapped by the preparing image RDY. The pseudo-continuous symbol also overlaps with the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It also overlaps with the character of the lord displayed on 208N and the second hold number display. At this time, the family crest accessory 224E started to rise and overlapped a part of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Then, as shown in FIG. 416 (a8), the family crest accessory 224E rotates, a voice "Don" is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that a pseudo-ream is performed.

FIG. 416 (a9) shows how the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been done. The UI part FI animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, the UI part FI animation may be started before the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started. The UI unit FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. The decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state due to shaking fluctuation due to the combination of the decorative symbol of "decoration 6-pseudo-ream pattern-decoration 7", and then the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. To.

FIGS. 416 (b1) to 416 (b3) show an example of the display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. Since the effect shown in FIG. 416 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 416 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 416 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each darken and display, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It is shown that the center shines and the light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light rays are displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this production example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, in this production example, it is also shown that the preparing image RDY is hidden during the blackout display by the Stechen effect. Further, the preparing image RDY may be terminated during the blackout display, and a mini game or a timer advance notice effect may be started.

FIG. 416 (b3) shows how the Stechen production has been completed. In this production example, after the end of the Stechen effect, the same display as before the start of the Stechen effect is performed. In other words, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen production in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

FIG. 417 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of the button notice effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 417 (a), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 has a red display mode, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 417 (a). Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 417 (a) has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (a), it is shown that the swordsman reach is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also displayed. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at both the left and right corners of the display screen. As a result, it may be possible to easily recognize that the "decoration 4" is in the reach state. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is displayed even during the execution of the swordsman reach.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 are erased, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

In addition, the family crest accessory 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (b), the united animation is started, and a pair of translucent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they move toward the center while being close to each other. Is moving. While the combined animation is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (c), a state in which a pair of translucent button images 136q are in close proximity and immediately before the completion of coalescence is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 417 (c), when the pair of translucent button images 136q are close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least a part of the pair of translucent button images 136q, as compared with the non-overlapping state. The semi-transparent button image 136q is difficult to see. Therefore, it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 417 (c) shows how the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. The effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI part UI3 is framed out, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI part UI3 is framed out, or the effect may be displayed at the timing when the UI part UI3 is framed out. EF6 may be displayed.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 417 (d), the combined animation was successful, the deca button image 136aL was materialized, the button notice effect was started, and the remaining time meter MT was also displayed to indicate the operation acceptance status. It is shown that it has started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden at least during the period when the button advance effect is performed by the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

FIG. 418 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of an effect applicable to the present embodiment.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, so that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 418 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed, and the panda character. The relationship between the character and the character of the lord is explained. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 418 (a1), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a loss of "decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6". It is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative patterns. Further, the special figure 1 fourth symbol 284a1 is also lit in a loss display mode. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 416 (a1) has a notice display mode displayed in red.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 409 (a), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In FIG. 418 (a2), the state in which the symbol is still displayed is shown. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable icon h0 is erased.

After that, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a3). , The character of the lord who got on the motorcycle framed in from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 418 (a3) to 418 (a5), it is shown that the character sprints toward the right end. .. That is, in this effect example, in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the notice display mode to the default display mode, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed, and the effect display is performed by the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. , UI unit UI3 may be able to change the display mode naturally. For example, when the display is returned to the original display due to a loss in the super reach effect, the entire display screen may be covered with a wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed by the wipe display unit.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (a6), it is shown that the effect by the character of the lord in the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is completed and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is erased and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. It becomes h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves to the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Den-sama is the 8th Shogun" is displayed, and the explanation display changes before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

In this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be displayed in the state where the preparing image RDY is displayed. If the UI section wipe display section WP4 is displayed while the preparing image RDY is displayed, the preparing image RDY is hidden during that time, and as a result, the preparing image RDY is displayed unknowingly. It may be finished and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

FIGS. 418 (b1) to 418 (b4) show an example of the display in the tutorial display unit TT1.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 418 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed. At the timing shown in FIG. 418 (b1), one variable display of the special figure 1 is held, so that one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 is displayed in gold, which is the display mode of the fluctuation notice, but the hold icon h11 is the default display mode. In addition, the family crest accessory 224E also emits gold light in accordance with the display color of the variable icon h0. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and is hidden in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 418 (b1). Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. The UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 418 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 418 (b1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa, which is one of the effectable movable bodies, is arranged. And the general character 224Fb are arranged.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 418 (b2) to 418 (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, the swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves the line of sight from the crown to the feet. It is shown that the character of the swordsman is scrolled and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 418 (b4), after the feet of the swordsman character are displayed, the swordsman character is scrolled and displayed in a manner in which the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the crown. That is, the continuous scroll display between the crown and the feet of the swordsman character is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this production example, an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling in the tutorial display unit TT1 is shown.

In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not restarted or only the hold icon is hidden (the UI part UI3 is displayed), a certain part of the UI part UI3 is used to display a certain part. It can be said that an example of doing this is shown.

FIG. 419 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 to which the effect example shown in FIG. 419 can be applied can be divided into, for example, a first special figure start port and a second special figure start port for one start port, and a symbol can be assigned in a normal gaming state. Examples thereof include so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 storage order machines) capable of holding 8 variable displays. Here, a MAX8 machine will be described as an example.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the variable icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI unit UI3. It is displayed in a mode, and on the left side of the variable icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which eight hold icons can be displayed and four pedestals are arranged in a staggered arrangement in front and behind. At the timing shown in FIG. 419 (a1), a total of seven variable displays of special figures 1 and 2 are held, and therefore, seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0, and in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 419 (a1), "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed. It has been. In this production example, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 419 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the stage name display unit ST1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display unit ST1 shown in FIG. 419 (a1), "castle town" is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. Further, the reception number display 850 and the stock button image 852 are also displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, on the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second hold number display, at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

Further, a family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative pattern display device 208L. Further, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and the shogun accessory 224Fb, which are one of the effectable movable bodies, are arranged.

FIG. 419 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball wins a prize at the second special figure start port, and the number of reservations of special figure 1 and special figure 2 becomes eight in total. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the variable icon h0 that are already displayed are displayed. It is shown that the display mode of is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the grandfather imitating the face of the grandfather. In addition, the UI unit UI3 has also changed from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a voice "pon" to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, when the hold is full, the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed all at once. In this production example, the number of times of symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the grandfather may be notified.

FIG. 419 (b1) shows how the swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 419 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed, and according to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 419 (b1). It has been notified that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

FIG. 419 (b2) shows that a game ball has won a prize at the second special drawing start port, and the number of reservations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 has become eight in total. Specifically, in the second hold number display on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120 Will output a "pon" voice to notify you that the hold is full.

In FIG. 419 (b3), it is shown that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the player returns to the castle town stage, a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the hold was full during the production of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the variable icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8. Has changed from the default display mode to the grandfather's display mode. In this production example, if the UI section UI3 is hidden by Super Reach and the hold is full, when the UI section UI3 is redisplayed, the UI section UI3, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed. An example of an effect of changing the display mode is shown.

FIGS. 419 (c1) to 419 (c4) are views for explaining another aspect of the production example shown in FIGS. 419 (b1) to (b3). The effects shown in FIGS. 419 (c1) to 419 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 419 (b1) to (b2), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 419 (c3), it is shown that the super reach was lost, the production of the swordsman reach was completed, and the display returned to the castle town stage. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the player returns to the castle town stage, a combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 5-Decoration 4" is displayed and shakes. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Further, in this production example, the hold was full during the execution of the swordsman reach production, but the display mode of the UI part UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 was not changed, and the hold was full. The character "MAX" indicating the above is displayed above the variable icon h0. After that, the symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the display mode of the UI unit UI3, the variable icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8.

After that, when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 419 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold and changes. All of the icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 change from the default display mode to the grandfather display mode. After that, the hold icons h1 to h8 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 419 (c4), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, "Panda is a master of the lord" is displayed and an explanation is displayed.

FIG. 420 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the effect applicable to the present embodiment.

FIGS. 420 (a1) to (a3) and 420 (b1) to (b2) are views for explaining another aspect of the effect example shown in FIG. 132. In the production examples shown in FIGS. 420 (a1) to (a3) and 420 (b1) to (b2), the UI unit UI4 has a variable icon display area, a hold icon display area, a tutorial display unit TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, in the case of super reach, the UI unit is framed out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but even if it becomes super reach, it is displayed without frame out. You may leave it as it is. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 is deleted. Further, in this production example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2.

As shown in FIG. 420 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 420 (a1) has a hold icon display area formed in the center thereof. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. Further, a variable icon display area is formed in the upper center of the UI unit UI 4, and the variable icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit UI 4. At the timing shown in FIG. 420 (a1), since the two variable displays of the special figure 1 are held, the two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The variable icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display unit TT4 as an explanation display unit is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display unit ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, the description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 420 (a1), "By digesting the notice icon ..." is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, "Castle town stage" is displayed. It has been reported that the current stage is a castle town. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is shown that the character of the lord is on the stage, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, at the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is also displayed.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224F and the general accessory are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb and the like are arranged.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a2), it is shown that the explanatory display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The background color of the first preparing image RDY1 is green, which is the default display mode.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (a3), it is shown that the display of the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth preparing image RDY4. The background color of the fourth preparing image RDY4 is green, which is the default display mode. As described above, in this production example, an example of displaying the preparing image in each of the plurality of explanatory display portions is shown.

FIGS. 420 (b1) to 420 (b2) are diagrams showing another production example following FIG. 420 (a1). Since the effect shown in FIG. 420 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 420 (a2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (b2), the fourth preparing image RDY4 is displayed in the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while continuing to display the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. It is shown that the display is shifted upward from the position. That is, it is shown that the image being prepared overlaps a part of the area where the explanatory display is displayed. It is also possible to apply such a display mode to the tutorial display unit TT4.

FIGS. 420 (c1) to 420 (c7) are views showing another aspect of the effect shown in FIG. 140. Here, FIG. 420 (c1) is an effect following FIG. 140 (c). Since the effects shown in FIGS. 420 (c1) to (c4) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 140 (d) to (g), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 420 (c5) shows how the family crest accessory 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, in the ninja character NJ1, the part that does not overlap with the family crest character 224E is enlarged, and it is easy to see. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. This shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display unit TT1.

After that, FIG. 420 (c6) shows how the family crest accessory 224E has returned to the initial position. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1, and the effect EF2 in which a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 explodes is displayed. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to see a part of the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result, the tutorial display unit TT1 may display a notice and give the player a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 420 (c7), the preparation image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini-game or timer advance notice effect is started. .. The background color of this preparing image RDY is green, which is the default display mode. In this effect, the timer advance notice display may be displayed and the timer advance notice effect may be started instead of the preparing image RDY, the mini game may be started, or the notice display may be performed. ..

FIG. 421 is a diagram illustrating another aspect of the effect example shown in FIGS. 154 (b-1) to 154 (b-5).

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the UI unit UI2 in this production example, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side. The hold icon display area is divided by four frames, each of which constitutes a hold display frame, and is configured such that one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), four hold icons are housed in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to the fourth hold icon h14. The hold icon h12 of the above is a display mode of the look-ahead notice (for example, a display mode of lighting in blue), and the other hold icons are the default display modes. Further, a variable icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is housed, and the variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area during the symbol variation display. Here, the area where the variable icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. Further, a tutorial display unit TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT7. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. Neither the variable icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlaps the decorative symbol.

In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display unit ST1, the reception number display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the character of the lord is not displayed. In addition, the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

Further, the above-mentioned family crest accessory 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned Yatsushiro accessory 224Fa and general accessory 224Fb are arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been done. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the family crest accessory 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (a2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually expands. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the hold display frame accommodating the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is housed is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this production example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is outside the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the preparation image RDY displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. , It is separated from the tutorial display unit TT7 and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the prepared image RDY may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. At the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 421 (a3), the emission color of the family crest accessory 224E, which was emitting light in blue, changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foretold to change from blue to green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 421 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. As a result, the player may be able to increase the expectation for the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

After that, as shown in FIG. 421 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces the display area. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed in the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the prepared image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

421 (b1) to 421 (b2) show another form of the production example shown in FIGS. 421 (a1) to 421 (a5). Since the effect shown in FIG. 421 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 421 (a1), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 421 (b2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 421 (a2) as described above. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the preparing image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (b2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 421 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden, but it may be displayed. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to grasp the state of the symbol variation display in the background before a certain effect is executed.

Subsequently, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 422 to 424. Here, FIG. 422 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 423 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 424 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. It is a figure. The display position of the ball removal error warning display (hereinafter referred to as "ball removal error display") is set to a fixed position, but which position can be set as the display position can be appropriately set. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. The ball removal error display is deleted when the ball removal button 130 is operated to eliminate the lower plate full tank state and the ball removal error is resolved. Further, in the production example shown below, a display example of a ball removal error display is shown, but it can also be applied to, for example, a door opening error that occurs when the front frame door 106 is opened. Further, when the ball removal error is displayed, the error sound may be output together or may not be output.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 422 (a1) to 422 (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 391 (c) to 391 (d). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (a1), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed by overlapping a part of the tutorial display unit TT1 which is closed by the shutter image. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, "Please remove the ball" is displayed, and it is urged to produce the game balls stored in the lower plate to eliminate the lower plate full tank state.

Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the preparing image RDY is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. As a result, it may be possible to notice the image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the preparing image RDY may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the preparing image RDY is completed, a trigger for removing the ball may be given.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 393 (c1) to (c2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (b1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the remaining time display meter MT4. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the display of one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 422 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display decreases, the overlapping state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4 is in a state where it is easy to see. As a result, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the remaining time meter MT4 is completed, it may be possible to give an opportunity to remove the ball.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role, but overlaps with the translucent button image 136q related to the coalescence animation. It is shown that there is no such thing. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the semi-transparent button image 136q in the combined animation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 422 (c2), when the translucent button image 139q approaches, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. As a result, it may be possible to notice the merged animation by looking at the ball-out display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by watching the combined animation. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to watch the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the combined animation is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 401 (f) to (g). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. It does not overlap with the UI part UI3 including the TT1.

After that, as shown in FIG. 422 (d2), the preparing image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1 to notify that the second timer advance notice effect is started, but the preparing image RDY is redisplayed. Occasionally, the image RDY being prepared for the first time is displayed in a larger size than when it is displayed. Therefore, the preparation image RDY will be overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped with the tutorial display unit TT1 until now. As a result, it may be possible to notice the enlarged image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball-excluded display. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the image RDY being prepared. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 402 (a5) to (a6). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the swordsman character is drawn, but the character of the lord is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

After that, as shown in FIG. 422 (e2), as a result of the player pressing and holding the effect button 136, the area in which the character of the lord placed above is drawn expands, and then the lord's character A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 will overlap the area where the character is drawn. As a result, it may be possible to notice the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role by looking at the ball-out display. In addition, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the superiority or inferiority between the character of the lord and the character of the swordsman who plays the enemy role. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. Also, see the superiority and inferiority of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy role at the same time, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the superiority or inferiority of the character of the lord and the swordsman of the enemy role is completed. May be possible.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 422 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 404 (e) to (f). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (f1), it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the second preparing image RDY2. On the other hand, it does not overlap with the display area where the characters "Go" are displayed (the display area where the first preparing image RDY is displayed).

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 422 (f2), the characters "Go" are erased together with the display area, the second preparing image RDY2 slides downward, and the position of the tutorial display unit TT1 is obtained. Preparing to move to Image moving animation is being performed. In addition, the advance notice effect (advance start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer advance effect corresponding to the first preparation image RDY1 has started, and it is shown that the ninja character NJ4 is appearing. Has been done. At this time, the overlapping state of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not have to overlap with the ninja character NJ4. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 can be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the second preparing image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 is completed, an opportunity to remove the ball can be given. In some cases.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 407 (a3) to (a4). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right part thereof, and is displayed on the upper left part of the display screen. Is displayed so that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the grandfather character GII, and the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character CHM of Princess Chibi. That is, in this production example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with respect to a part of the plurality of preparing images. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the display of at least one of the plurality of preparing images (including characters). In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at a plurality of preparing images. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the ball removal error display ERR1 and a plurality of preparing images, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the preparing image is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 407 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette board RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the grandfather's character GII is adjacent to it. That is, the grandfather character GII appears at a position corresponding to the grandfather character GII, and the preparing image that appears with the grandfather character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the grandfather character GII. In this case, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 423 (a2), the preparation image (character CHM of Princess Chibi) corresponding to a certain effect is not displayed, so that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in any display. There is no overlap with.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 409 (b) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (c1), in the effect shown in FIG. 409 (b), it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed substantially in the center of the left side notice display area CUL. There is. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 409 (e), a mini game is executed based on the preparing image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of success, it is shown that the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left side notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this chance-up cut-in image WCI. As a result, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI may be viewed at the same time, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is completed, a trigger for ball removal may be given.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (d1) to (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 411 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (d1), in the production example shown in FIG. 411 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (d2), the above-mentioned chasing effect is started. When the chase effect is started, a sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 423 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, of the two preparing images RDY1 and RDY3, only the first prepared image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the subwindow WP3, and the third prepared image RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3. Is not displayed in the subwindow WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the sub window WP3.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (e1) to (e2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 411 (d1) to (d2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (e1), in the production example shown in FIG. 411 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted by about 10 degrees counterclockwise to produce a shake vision effect. It is shown that it is being damaged. In this case, the prepared image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt along with the background display. At this time, the display position of the ball removal error display ERR1 is not changed even when the shake vision effect is being performed, and the display state is maintained without tilting. At this time, the background image is tilted so that the marginal portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with this margin portion. For example, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the margin portion and a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed. It may be difficult to see.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 423 (f1) to (f2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 412 (a1) to 4 (a2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (f1), in the production example shown in FIG. 412 (a1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display unit TT1. .. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 does not overlap with any of the displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 423 (f2), it is shown that the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Has been done. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI unit UI3 is expanded, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by watching the UI part UI3 rise. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424 (a1) to (a2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 414 (d) to (e). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (a1), in the production example shown in FIG. 414 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It is shown. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit UI3 before the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (a2), it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is framed out by the UI unit FO animation. In this production example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 with the UI part UI3 is eliminated while the UI part UI3 is framed out downward by the UI part FO animation.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424 (b1) to (b2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 418 (a3) to (a5). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (b1), in the production example shown in FIG. 418 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. It is shown. At this time, it does not overlap with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle displayed on the UI section wipe display section WP4.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (b2), it is shown that the character of the lord on the motorcycle is moving to the right end of the UI unit wipe display unit WP4. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the character of the lord who got on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. As a result, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, it may be possible to simultaneously view the effect display on the ball removal error display ERR1 and the UI unit wipe display unit WP3, and give an opportunity to remove the ball when the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is completed.

The effect examples shown in FIGS. 424 (c1) to (c2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 421 (b1) to (b2). Has been done. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part of the decorative symbol is overlaid on the decorative symbol. It is shown to be wrapping. It should be noted that there is no overlap with other displays.

After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 424 (c2), it is shown that the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and is overlapped by the preparing image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 424 (c2), the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right portion of the display screen, and relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 424 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is hidden. Further, this sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the sub window WP3, and the other part overlaps with the hold icon display area. The ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub window WP3, and the display position is maintained. As a result, by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to notice the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the enlarged hold icon display area. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by observing the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. Further, by quickly removing the ball and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to enjoy the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display mode in the hold icon display area is completed, a trigger for removing the ball is given. May be possible.

The production examples shown in FIGS. 424 (d1) to 424 (d3) show variations in the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

In the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d1), the display mode of "please remove the ball" is surrounded by a rectangular frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous, and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. In some cases.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d2) has the same mode as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 424 (d2), and the display of "please remove the ball" is shown in white on a black background. It is said to be the mode represented by.

In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been used, but the decorative symbol display device has been described. It goes without saying that even a pachinko machine 100 equipped with only one of the above can be applied. Further, it can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, and can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

425 to 462 are diagrams stepwise showing the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 425 to 462, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 425 to 462, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 425 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 426 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 425 stepwise. , FIG. 427 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 426. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 425 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 425 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 and the display of the number of second holdings in addition to the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 425 (1), three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and all of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the three special figures 1 are displayed. It is displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 1 is a round hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 425 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special drawing 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. I am trying not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 425 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the first timer advance notice display TM11 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying the decimal point of less than 1 second.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (4), "09:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Here, the second timer advance notice display TM12 in the present embodiment is configured to be capable of displaying the decimal point of less than 1 second. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (6), "01:25" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "07:25" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (7), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , "Attention to hold" is displayed to call attention to the hold change, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 can be changed. It is notified that there is sex. The hold change animation may be started after the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", or the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 after the hold change animation starts. May be "00:00", or the hold change animation may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer advance notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The timer display countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 continues, and "06:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 425 (8), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the characters "pending change" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice has been given due to the pending change. The character display of "hold change" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the character display of "hold change" has been performed. Alternatively, the character display of "hold change" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. On the other hand, the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is still continuing, and "05:47" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (8). The second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Here, the second timer notice display TM12 may be deleted after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed after the second timer notice display TM12 has been erased. Alternatively, the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change at the timing when the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started, the timer notice effect is performed and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the change in the display mode) than in the case where it is not performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (9), it is shown that the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is continuing, and at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (9), “05: 11 ”is displayed. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "hold change completed" indicating that the hold change has been performed is displayed together with the panda icon PND. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect is notified by the icon. Further, in the vicinity of the navigator character YM, the character "still exists" is displayed, suggesting that the notice display by the timer notice effect may be further performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (12), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and it is shown that one of the timer notice displays (second timer notice display TM12) functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that the timing at which the timer notice display is started is different for each of the plurality of timer notice effects.

After that, as shown in FIG. 425 (13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Here, after the first timer notice display TM11 is erased, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream may be started, or after the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. The first timer notice display TM11 may be erased, or the second variation display of the decorative symbol may be started by the pseudo-ream at the timing when the first timer notice display TM11 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (14), it is shown that a second variation display of the decorative symbol is performed by the pseudo-ream. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed below the panda icon PND displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 425 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 425 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 425 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, normal reach is performed, and it is shown that the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In addition, the characters "Timer notice due to SP development" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it seems that the mission effect indicating that the timer notice effect will be started by developing to Super Reach has started. Is also shown. In this production example, when the mission is achieved, the timer notice production is started and the reliability of the jackpot is increased. Therefore, by shifting to super reach, it may be possible to expect that the timer advance notice effect will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (19) following FIG. 425 (18), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (20), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the display does not shift to super reach, and the decoration of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is lost. It is notified that the stop display is displayed by the combination of symbols. In addition, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system does not shift to super reach.

Then, as shown in FIG. 426 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are deleted, and the "sorry" character displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted. The panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be erased after the decorative symbol shake fluctuation starts, or the decorative symbol shake fluctuation may occur after the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL are erased. It may be started, or the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the timing when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern starts. Further, the panda icon PND and the replay icon RPL may be deleted at the same time, or may be deleted one by one.

After that, as shown in FIG. 426 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (23), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (24), it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In this production example, the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. The third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14 are both default display modes. On the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the right side of the display screen, "30:00" is displayed as a timer display, and a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests. Further, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. It suggests that. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM13 and TM14 start the countdown at the same time, there is a certain effect both when 10 seconds have passed and when 30 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. Is suggested to be started. Here, some effects that may start after 10 seconds and some effects that may start after 30 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 and the timer display on the fourth timer notice display start counting down (subtraction display), respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (25), the third timer notice display TM13 is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. "29:45" is displayed, and "09:45" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14. That is, it is shown that 0.55 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the characters "Attention to the timer" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (26), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (26), "28:02" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "08:02" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (27), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (27), "27:75" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "06:75" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 426 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (28), "25:23" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "05:23" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (29), it is shown that the normal reach is started and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. In addition, the characters "coming soon" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 may count up and the notice effect may start soon. Has been done. The countdown continues on the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (29), "23:16" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. Then, "03:16" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (30), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed. The countdown is still continuing in the third timer notice display TM13 and the fourth timer notice display TM14, and at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (30), "21:80" is displayed in the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed, and "01:80" is displayed on the fourth timer notice display TM14.

After that, as shown in FIG. 426 (31), when the countdown in the fourth timer notice display TM14 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 crosses a large number of Sabohani characters SBHN. Sabohani group notice will be given. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectations for big hits. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (31), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the fourth timer notice display TM14. In other words, the strong Sabohani group notice can be said to be an example of a certain production. The timer display on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the timer display is set to "00:00", or the timer on the 4th timer notice display TM14 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the fourth timer notice display TM14 becomes "00:00". On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "20:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (31).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (32), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified. At this time, the fourth timer notice display TM14 is erased. On the other hand, in the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and "18:31" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (32).

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (33) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. The icon SBH of the Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been executed. Further, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown is still continuing, and “12:63” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (33).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (34) shows that the swordsman reach is continuing. Then, the character "timer attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the third timer notice display TM13. In the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "11:03" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 426 (34).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 426 (35), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started while the countdown is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and the effect is displayed on the third timer advance notice display TM13. Has been done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 426 (36), the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 is reduced, and "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. As described above, in this effect example, it may be difficult to predict the type of effect executed by the timer advance notice effect by changing the timer display during the countdown display.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 427 (37) following FIG. 426 (36). .. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

As described above, in this effect example, the display periods of the plurality of timer notice effects overlap, and both timer notice displays (third timer notice display TM13, fourth timer notice display TM14) change the symbol during execution. It is shown that it is functioning as a notice regarding the display (the change notice).

After that, as shown in FIG. 427 (38), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. In this production example, an example in which the effect (notice effect) executed as a result of the timer advance effect may not be notified by the icon is shown. Here, the icon may be used to notify that the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a has been executed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 427 (39), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 427 (40), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, the design is higher than when the timer advance notice effect is performed and the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the variable display (the symbol variable display).

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing stepwise an example of a timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 429 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 428 stepwise. is there. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 428 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. In addition, three or more timer notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "16:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 16 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 3 seconds have passed and when 16 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started. Here, some effects that may start when 3 seconds have passed and some effects that may start when 16 seconds have passed may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (4), "14:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 1.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 428 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed, and the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00". The characters "Enter look-ahead mode" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the look-ahead mode is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the look-ahead mode is executed as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect applied to the second timer advance display TM12. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 428 (6), the second timer advance notice display TM12 is erased, and the "look-ahead mode" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the look-ahead mode is displayed. It has been reported that it has rushed into. Further, at this time, the characters "Enter read-ahead mode" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM are erased. On the other hand, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "12:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (7), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "08:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (8), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "07: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (8).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (9), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 428 (10). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (11). The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (12), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 428 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 428 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer notice display TM11 is shown. Further, the character "hold change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed. As described above, in this effect example, in addition to the look-ahead notice in the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect, the look-ahead notice is performed by changing the display mode of the hold icon as a result of another timer notice effect. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, the target of the look-ahead notice in the look-ahead mode performed as a result of a certain timer notice effect and the target of the look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon performed as a result of another timer notice effect vary. An example is shown that is intended for display. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 became "00:00", but the timer on the first timer notice display TM11. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the first timer notice display TM11 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, as shown in FIG. 428 (14), the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 428 (17), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 428 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (19) following FIG. 428 (18), the hold (first hold) of special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is displayed. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. The look-ahead mode continues even after the symbol variation display starts.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 429 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (23), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 429 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (26), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and it is a big hit than when the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with "chance", suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is increasing.

After that, as shown in FIG. 429 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 429 (27), a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the number of holdings of special drawing 1 increases by one, and the number of holdings of special drawing 1 in the second holding number display is increased. The display of the number is "1".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 429 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 429 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, the timer notice display of a plurality of timer notice effects is started at the same time, and both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) function as pre-reading notices. It is shown that it is doing. Further, it is also shown that both timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11, second timer notice display TM12) function as pre-reading notices for the same symbol variation display.

Further, in this production example, the start timing of the hold change animation does not start at the timing when the timer notice display becomes "0:00", but "00:00" when the display mode of the hold icon changes. Therefore, the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect is consistent with the completion of the countdown of the timer notice display, and the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect and the timer notice effect. It may be possible to clarify the relationship with.

In this effect example, the countdown in the timer notice display of the two timer notice effects was started at the same time, but the timing of the start of the countdown of the first timer notice display TM11 is a symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon changes. May be started after the start. That is, the timing of starting the display of the timer notice display of the plurality of timer notice effects is the same, but the timing of starting the countdown may be different. In this case, the countdown may be started in different symbol variation displays.

Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading notice (pre-reading mode, display of the hold icon according to the pre-reading display mode) as a certain effect is started for each of the different symbol variation displays, but each pre-reading is performed in the same symbol variation display. The notice may be started.

FIG. 430 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 431 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 430. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 430 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. In addition, three or more timer notice effects may be started at the same time. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06: 00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In addition, "10:00" is displayed as a timer display on the timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 6 seconds have passed and when 10 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started. Here, some renditions that may start after 6 seconds and some renditions that may start after 10 seconds may be the same or different. May be good.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) in the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed. , "05:75" is displayed, and "09:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (5) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Also, in the center of the display screen, the characters "Item get when the princess appears" are displayed, and when the princess character appears from the treasure box, you can get a notice item (sometimes called a "notice icon"). It is suggested that it can be done. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (5), "05:60" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "09:60" is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display by the timer notice effect is started before the start of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (6), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, the countdown continues on each of the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM11, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (6), "04:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "08:37" is displayed.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (7) displays the characters "decide to the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the character is displayed on the right. It has been notified that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as an open treasure chest. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (7), "03:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "07: 00" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (8), the result production of the mini game is started, the selected right treasure chest image BXR is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is displayed. It will be erased. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Open" are displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box. Further, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (8), "02:50" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "06:50" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (9), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "item get" are displayed, and "Ya" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The word "Taze" is displayed, and it is notified that the mini game was successful and the notice item was acquired. This suggests that in the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is guaranteed that a certain effect will be performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed. In this production example, the appearance of the princess character HME announces the acquisition of a notice item as a certain effect. At this time, the countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (9), "01:50" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. On the second timer notice display TM12, "05:50" is displayed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the countdown by the timer advance notice effect is performed, and the effect may be excited by the mini game until the countdown is completed (until "00:00").

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (10), at the timing when the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes “0:00”, the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed as a super reach notice item. The swordsman character KNG is added to the first timer notice display TM11. By displaying the notice item of super reach in this way, it may be easy to visually understand that super reach is executed. Further, in this production example, it can be said that the result of the mini game is displayed as an icon. Further, in this effect example, an example in which a notice item is displayed as a certain effect as a result of performing the timer notice effect is shown. The swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", or the swordsman character KNG may be displayed after the swordsman character KNG is displayed. The timer display may be "00:00". The countdown continues on the second timer notice display TM12, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (10).

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (11), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is changed from "00:00" to "SP standby", and super reach is started for this display. Continue until the timer. In other words, does the super reach corresponding to the display of "SP waiting" in the first timer notice display TM11 and the display of the swordsman character KNG as a notice item occur in the symbol variation display at this point? It is difficult to determine whether it will occur in the symbol variation display from the next time onward. The countdown continues on the second timer notice display TM12, and "03:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (11).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (12), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "01:80" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 430 (12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 430 (13), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode. Further, the character "hold change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (14), the timer display of the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "hold change", a panda character PND is added, and the hold icon is displayed. It is shown that the display mode has been changed. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display shows that the content of a certain effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect is being notified.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 430 (17), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 430 (18). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (19) following FIG. 430 (18), the hold of special figure 1 (first hold) is digested and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure is displayed. The symbol variation display on the display device 212 is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. The second timer notice display TM12 is erased when the symbol variation display is started, but the first timer notice display TM11 with the swordsman character KNG added and the characters "SP waiting" is displayed is displayed. Is being continued. That is, it can be said that the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 was a pre-reading notice that the super reach will be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is dramatically increased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 431 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, at this time, the first timer notice display TM11 notifies that the digestion animation is started, the swordsman character KNG as a notice item is digested, and the character KNG shifts to super reach. The digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be formed after the digestion animation of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Then, the digestion animation of the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the reach state is formed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (23), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (24), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 431 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (26), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 431 (27), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 431 (28), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 431 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, an example in which a plurality of timer advance notice effects are all executed as pre-reading notices is shown, and some timer advance notice effects are executed as a result of performing at least one timer advance notice effect. An example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether the effect is a notice in the symbol variation display or a look-ahead notice. Moreover, in this effect example, it is found that all timer advance notice effects are pre-reading notices targeting the same symbol variation display when the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is performed, so that the same symbol variation display is displayed. By combining the target look-ahead notices, it may be possible to dramatically increase the expectation of a big hit.

FIG. 432 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 433 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 432 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 432 (1) to (15) are the same as those of FIGS. 430 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the first stop of the decorative symbol is performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 432 (16) performs the second stop, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. To. Then, as shown in FIG. 432 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 432 (18), the digestion animation is started on the first timer notice display TM11, and it is notified that the swordsman character KNG as a notice item is digested and shifts to super reach. Will be done. That is, it can be said that the swordsman character KNG in this production example functions as a notice that the super reach is executed in the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which at least one of the two timer advance notice functions functions as a look-ahead notice. Further, in this effect example, an example is shown in which it is difficult to determine whether a certain effect executed as a result of performing each of a plurality of timer advance notice effects is a pre-reading notice or a notice in the symbol variation display. ing.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (19) following FIG. 432 (18), "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the development becomes super reach. There is. In this production example, the Sabohani group notice is not given.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 433 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the second timer notice display TM12 is quietly erased as it shifts to super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (21), a weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with a “chance”, so that the expectation of a big hit is high. It suggests that it is up.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 433 (22), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 433 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 433 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this effect example, one of the plurality of timer advance notice effects is executed as a look-ahead notice, and the other is a notice in the symbol change display, and the symbol change display targeted for the timer notice effect is different. Therefore, it may be possible to raise the expectation for a big hit in any of the symbol variation displays that are the targets of the timer notice effect.

FIG. 434 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 434 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "06: 00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 6 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. Further, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 start the countdown at the same time, a certain effect is produced both when 2 seconds have passed and when 6 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the timer notice display TM11 and TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 434 (4), "05:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed, and "01:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (5), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 434 (5), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays "05:20" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, "01:20" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 434 (6), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. After that, as shown in FIG. 434 (7), in the second timer advance notice display TM12, "hold + 1 UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed. It has been notified that the display mode of the look-ahead notice has changed. The countdown continues on the first timer notice display TM11, and "03:10" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 434 (7).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (8), the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. To. The countdown continues on the first timer notice display TM11, and "01:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 434 (8).

Then, as shown in FIG. 434 (9), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display of the chief. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of the two timer advance notice effects is performed for the same symbol variation display. In this effect example, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the display mode of the hold icon changed from the default display mode is further changed, but it may not change. There may be. Further, the hold icon that changes the display mode as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the display mode change as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12. The hold icon may be different. After that, as shown in FIG. 434 (10), in the first timer notice display TM11, "hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", which is in phase with the notification in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 434 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 4" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 434 (14). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon was performed for the same symbol variation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 434 (7), FIG. The hold change animation is started for the second hold icon h12 in addition to the first hold icon h11, and the display modes of both the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 may change. May be notified.

Then, as shown in FIG. 434 (9'), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the display mode of the panda to the chief. At the same time as changing to the display mode, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 may change from the default display mode to the panda display mode. That is, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an effect of further changing the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is performed, and further, another hold icon display mode is performed. An example is shown in which a production that changes the timer is performed.

In this effect example, as a result of each of the two timer advance notice effects in the same symbol variation display, the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in two stages, but in each of the different symbol variation displays, the same hold icon is used. The display mode may be changed.

FIG. 435 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 436 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 435 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 435 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "10:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo continuous effect is started as a certain effect. As described above, this effect example suggests the content of a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by adding identification information such as an icon to the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (4), "09:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (5) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "09: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (6), "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "08:75" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (7) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating a "1" roll on the dice and a display "pending change" are displayed. Is performed, and after the mini-game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 435 (7), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays "08:60" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, "03:60" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (8), the variable display of the dice symbol was started, the button image 136a was displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 was started. This is notified and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter MT changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter MT may not be displayed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (8), "08:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol as shown in FIG. 435 (10). In the example shown in FIG. 435 (10), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "1" roll, and the character "success" is displayed, which is the result of the mission achievement in the mini game. Has been notified. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, informing that the mini game was successful. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (10), "06: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (11), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the above is changed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 435 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of the number length. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a highly reliable display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot. It is shown that the display mode has been changed to a higher display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (14). .. At this time, the characters "right timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (15) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. ing. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. In addition, the characters "Get out the princess" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that a notice may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure chest. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (15).

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (16), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (16).

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (17) displays the character "right selection" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the right treasure box. It is informed that the image BXR has been selected as an open treasure chest. In addition, the selected right treasure chest image BXL is moved and displayed in the center, and the unselected left treasure chest image BXL is erased. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is temporarily stopped and remains at "02:50", but the countdown may be continuously performed.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 435 (18), the princess character HME appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the characters "pseudo-renyo" are displayed, and "pseudo-ren yo" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. The word "success" is displayed to inform you that the mini game was successful. That is, based on the result of this mini-game, it is determined that a pseudo continuous effect as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 435 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (19) following FIG. 435 (18), the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, foretelling that the pseudo-ream will start. .. At this time, the decorative design is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (19).

Then, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 436 (20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" -Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6 "decorative symbol combinations are displayed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". As described above, in this production example, for example, when it is confirmed that the pseudo-ream will be performed, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, but the three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time, so that the game is smooth. It may be possible to proceed to. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

After that, as shown in FIG. 436 (21), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, instead of the display of "00:00", a display of "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is performed. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (22), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (23), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 436 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 436 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the normal reach is performed and the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (26), it is shown that the normal reach is continuously performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 436 (27), the middle symbol is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6" during normal reach, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" causes fluctuations in shaking. A temporary stop is being performed. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the character will be lost.

After that, as shown in FIG. 436 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the first timer notice display TM11 that has notified that the pseudo-ream has been performed is also deleted. Since the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is still the display mode of the bancho, the display of "super hot hold" is maintained in the second timer notice display TM12.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice is performed according to the result (success) of the mini game.

FIG. 437 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 438 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 437 step by step. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 437 (1) to (9) are the same as those in FIGS. 435 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol as shown in FIG. 437 (10). In the example shown in FIG. 437 (10), the dice pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "3" roll, and the character "regrettable" is displayed, which does not result in a mission achievement in the mini game. Has been notified. That is, it is notified that the mission has failed. In addition, the character "regrettable" is displayed even in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, depending on the result of this mini-game, the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 is changed, but the mini-game is successful. Will give different results. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (10), "06: 00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "02:00" is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (11), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11. It is notified that the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the above is changed. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (11), "05:88" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:88" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 437 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode. Further, the characters "little heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the first hold icon h11 has changed to a display mode with a slightly higher reliability. That is, it can be said that it is suggested that the reliability is lower than the display mode of the Bancho, but higher than the default display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "05:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (13), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "chance hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is slightly higher in reliability. It is shown that the display mode of the look-ahead notice has been changed to notify the change. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "04:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (14), the countdown of the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 continues, and “04:12” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (14). .. At this time, the characters "right timer attention" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a warning is given to the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side of the display screen.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (15) shows that the mini game is started. It should be noted that the effect example shown in FIGS. 437 (15) to (17) is different from the effect example shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (17) in that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is different. , The second timer notice display is the same except that the display contents of the TM12 are different, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 437 (18), the auntie character BBA appears from the right treasure box image BXR and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, and "Sorry" is also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. Characters are displayed to inform you that the mini-game has failed. That is, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 435, it is shown that the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 was a false advance advance effect due to the failure of the mini game. It is suggested that the pseudo-continuous production as a production is not performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown is restarted, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 437 (18). If the mini-game fails, the reach state may be set and the reach effect may be performed instead of performing the pseudo continuous effect.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 438 (19) following FIG. 437 (18), it is shown that the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "00:78" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 438 (19).

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 438 (20) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" -A combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 328 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "Decoration 5-Decoration 4". -It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of "Decoration 4". The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". In this way, in this production example, for example, when it is confirmed that a pseudo-ream is not performed and a loss occurs, the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed one by one, and three symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time. , The game may be able to proceed smoothly. Even in this case, the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed one by one in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

FIG. 439 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 440 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 439 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 439 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this effect example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "08: 00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 8 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream is started as a certain effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (4), "07:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the character "timer activation" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the countdown of the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 has started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (5), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "04:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the panda icon PND is added to the second timer advance notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "07: 00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (5). In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (6), "03:75" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues even on the first timer notice display TM11, and "06:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (7) shows that the dice mini-game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a display indicating a "1" roll on the dice and a display "pending change" are displayed. Is performed, and after the mini-game is started, the effect button 136 is operated, and as a result, it is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 439 (7), the first timer advance notice display TM11 displays "06:60" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, "03:60" is displayed.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (8) starts the variable display of the dice symbol, displays the button image 136a, notifies that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and plays a game. It encourages the person to operate the effect button 136. In this production example, the button reception time meter MT is not displayed, but it may be displayed. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (8), "06:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the second timer notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "03:12" is displayed.

FIGS. 439 (9) to 439 (10) show that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 in the mini-game of the dice continues. That is, it is shown that the mini-game of the dice has started, but the operation of the effect button 136 has not been performed yet. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (10), "04:35" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice is displayed. On the display TM12, "01:35" is displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (11), it is shown that the dice symbol and the button image 136a being displayed in a variable manner move to the lower left of the display screen. This suggests that other effects will be performed in duplicate with the running dice mini-game. The countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (11), "04:22" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:22" is displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (12), another mini-game (a treasure chest mini-game) starts while the dice mini-game is being executed. When the treasure chest mini-game is started, the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the left and right of the center of the display screen, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. In addition, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box. In addition, the characters "Get out the princess" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that a notice may be displayed when the princess character appears from the treasure chest. The dice mini-game is being played continuously, and the operation of the effect button 136 is also effective. Further, the countdown is still continuing on the two timer advance notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (12), "04:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "01:00" is displayed.

As described above, in this production example, during the period in which one mini-game related to one of the two timer notice effects is being performed, one mini-game related to the other timer advance effects is played. It is played, and as a result, it is shown that there is a period during which multiple mini-games are played at the same time. That is, at least the period during which one mini-game related to one of the plurality of timer advance notice effects is being performed and the period during which one mini-game related to the other timer advance notice effects is being performed. It is shown that some overlap.

After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (13), as shown in FIG. 439 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 439 (14), the design of the dice is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a roll of "1", and it is notified that the result of the mission is achieved in the mini-game of the dice. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game changes the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. In this production example, the result of mission achievement is notified only by the stop display of the dice symbol, but in FIG. 435, the character display of "success" and the navigation character YM "done" are performed as described above. Character display may be performed. On the other hand, the countdown is still continuing on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (14), "03:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. In the notice display TM12, "00:75" is displayed. At this time, the treasure chest mini-game is also being played continuously, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (15), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is interrupted in the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, and at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (15), the first timer notice display TM11 remains at "03:75" and the second timer. In the notice display TM12, it is left as "00:75". Further, even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

After that, the countdown of the timer display on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 439 (16), when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the first The display mode of the hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the number length, resulting in a highly reliable look-ahead display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is continuously performed, and the timing shown in FIG. 439 (16) is "03:00". Further, even at this time, the treasure chest mini-game continues, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 439 (17), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is changed from "00:00" to "super hot hold", and the display mode of the hold icon is the reliability of the jackpot. It is shown that the display mode has been changed to a higher display mode. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown is still continuing, and "02:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 439 (17). Further, at this time, it is shown that the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are moving to the left side as the mini-game of the dice ends. In addition, the treasure chest mini-game is continuing, and the operation of the operation key unit 137 is also effective. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 439 (18) to 440 (26) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 439 (18) to 440 (26) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 435 (16) to 436 (24), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the reach state is formed as shown in FIG. 440 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (27) gives a notice of the strong sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (28), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 440 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (30). Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 440 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won the victory is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 440 (32), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 440 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 441 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 442 shows a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 441 stepwise. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 441 (1) to (9) are the same as those of FIGS. 425 (1) to (9), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (10), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (10). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", which fuels the expectation that the pseudo-ream effect will be performed when the countdown on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (11), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "02:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (11). In addition, the character "No!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, denying that a pseudo-ream is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11. It is suggested that there is.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (12), the timer advance notice change animation (timer advance notice addition animation) is started during the countdown display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the effect is applied to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the characters "Is it a group notice?", And as a certain effect executed as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. It has been suggested that there is a possibility that the Sabohani group will be announced instead of the pseudo-ream. As described above, in this effect example, it is notified that a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be another effect instead of the pseudo-ream. As a result, the player may be able to expect that the effect performed by completing the countdown of the first timer advance notice display TM11 will be an effect with higher reliability of the jackpot than the pseudo-ream.

After that, as shown in FIG. 441 (13), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is added, and "15:03" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. In addition, a question mark is added to both the characters of "group notice" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the Sabohani group notice may be given. As described above, in this effect example, it may be possible to recognize that another effect is performed by adding the timer display while predicting that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a certain effect. is there. Even if the timer notice change animation is performed, the time indicated by the timer display in the timer notice display does not change, and in the end, a pseudo-ream may be performed as a certain effect. Further, in this effect example, the example in which the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 is added has been described, but the timer display in the second timer notice display TM12 may be added. In addition, the timer display may be subtracted as well as added.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (14), the third stop is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In this production example, the pseudo-ream effect that the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and started is different from a certain effect that is executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11. It is said that. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yes!" Are displayed in response to the display of the "group notice" in FIG. 441 (13), and the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. It is announced that a certain effect to be executed as a result of the performance is a Sabohani group notice. In this production example, although a certain production is not a pseudo-continuous production, a pseudo-continuous production is performed, but the pseudo-continuous production may not be performed (it may be a ghost). ), And the pseudo-continuous production may always be performed. Further, a certain effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, and by adding a timer display, another effect (sabohani group notice) may be a certain effect, corresponding to one timer notice effect. There may be a plurality of certain effects to be performed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:60" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (14).

After that, as shown in FIG. 441 (15), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "14:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (15).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (16), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "06:01" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 441 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 441 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:13" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 441 (18).

After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (19) following FIG. 441 (18), when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 is strong. Sabohani group notice will be given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, as a result of the timer notice production by the first timer notice display TM11, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed instead of the pseudo-ream. The timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". Further, as shown in FIG. 442 (19), when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the panda icon PND ends.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (20), the notice of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to develop into super reach. Has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 442 (21), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. In addition, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has occurred.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (22) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, so that the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 442 (24), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 442 (25), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 443 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 443 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, two timer notice displays (first timer notice display TM11 and second timer notice display TM12) are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, and the two timer notice effects start at the same time. Will be done. Both of these two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 are the default display modes. On the first timer notice display TM11 displayed on the right side, "60:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started. ing. In this effect example, by displaying "60:00" on the first timer notice display TM11, the occurrence of super reach is suggested. For example, a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect is a display of a cut-in image. It suggests that. That is, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 is externally pretending to function as a notice regarding the running symbol variation display. Further, "02:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the left side, and a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Suggests. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (4) to (7) are performed. The effect shown in FIGS. 443 (4) to (7) differs from the effect shown in FIGS. 434 (4) to (7) by 54 seconds in the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11. Since it is the same except for, the description is omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (8), the characters “timer attention” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "56:85" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (8).

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (9), the timer advance notice shortening animation is started during the countdown display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and the effect is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. It is shown.

After that, as shown in FIG. 443 (10), the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reduced, and "02:00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, the panda icon PND is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the display mode of the hold icon will change as a certain effect. In this way, in this effect example, by changing the timer display during the countdown display, it is pretended that the timer notice effect is being executed as a look-ahead notice, and in fact, the symbol variation display during execution is displayed. The production is such that it turns out that it was executed as a notice.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 443 (11), it is notified that the hold change animation is further started at the first hold icon h11, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be further changed. To. The countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:20" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 443 (11).

Then, as shown in FIG. 443 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display of the chief. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode that is a step up from the panda display mode. That is, in this effect example, as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the first timer advance notice display TM11, an example in which the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has changed is further changed is shown. Has been done. Further, in this effect example, it is shown that a certain effect executed as a result of the two timer advance notice effects is performed for the same symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the timer advance effect for the first timer advance display TM11 and the timer advance effect for the second timer advance display TM12 are executed as advance notices for different symbol variation displays at the beginning of the effect. After that, a certain effect corresponding to the second timer notice display TM12 and a certain effect corresponding to the first timer notice display TM11 were targeted for the same symbol variation display. Since it turns out to be a thing, it may be possible to give the game a surprise. In other words, the time indicated by the timer display at the time when the first timer notice display TM11 is started suggests that the notice to be performed during the super reach is generated at the beginning of the display, but the timer display is shortened. Moreover, by changing the display mode of the hold icon, the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display as the second timer notice display TM12 is performed, so that the pre-reading notice for the same symbol variation display is combined. Therefore, it may be possible to dramatically improve the degree of expectation for a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 443 (13), in the first timer notice display TM11, "hold + 1UP" is displayed instead of "00:00", which is in phase with the notification in the second timer notice display TM12. In addition, it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed in two stages. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (14) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (14) to (17) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 434 (11) to (14), the description thereof will be omitted.

In this effect example, the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 both function as pre-reading notices for the same symbol variation display. Each of them may function as a notice regarding the display of the symbol change during execution. In either case, since the combined notice is given for the same symbol variation display, the reliability of the jackpot may be further improved.

Further, the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be executed for different symbol variation displays. For example, one timer advance notice effect may be executed. It may function as a look-ahead notice, and the other timer notice effect may function as a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed. In this case, the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the same symbol variation display is combined. May be able to be dispersed. Further, either one of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be a false timer advance notice effect.

FIG. 444 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 444 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 425 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (3), it is shown that the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "60:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started 60 seconds after the countdown is started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 444 (5), "58:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.88 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer notice display TM11, indicating that the bomb effect has started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed to ignite, and the squib is displayed to be shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 444 (7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "what", suggesting that some kind of production will be started as a result of the bomb production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (8), the bomb image BOM explodes, and the effect image is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the first timer notice display TM11. .. In this case as well, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is difficult to see because it is overlapped by the effect images.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 444 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, indicating that the two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, the timer notice display is divided and displayed during the execution of the timer notice effect, and a new timer notice effect is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (10) to (12) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (10) to (12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 443 (4) to (6), the description thereof will be omitted.

After that, for example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (9) to 426 (36), the symbol variation display ends, the next symbol variation display starts, and then the super reach is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in 444 (13), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes “00:00”. Further, the characters "strong cut-in" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain advance notice effect. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (14) to (16) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 444 (14) to (16) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 427 (38) to (40), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 445 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 446 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 445. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 445 (1) to (3) are the same as those in FIGS. 444 (1) to (3), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (4), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 3 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 445 (5), "02:12" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.88 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (6), the bomb image BOM is displayed so as to overlap (overlap) the front side of the first timer advance notice display TM11, indicating that the bomb effect has started. It has been done. At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped by the bomb image BOM. When the bomb effect is started, the squib extending from the upper end of the bomb image BOM is displayed to ignite, and the squib is displayed to be shortened according to the elapsed time from the start of the bomb effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (7) shows that the bomb effect is continuing. At the timing shown in FIG. 445 (7), the state immediately before the fuse reaches the upper end of the bomb image BOM is shown. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "what", suggesting that some kind of production will be started as a result of the bomb production. In the first timer notice display TM11, although it is difficult to see due to the bomb image BOM, the timer display is "00:00".

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (8) shows how the bomb image BOM explodes.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 445 (9), in addition to the first timer notice display TM11, the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed, indicating that the two timer notice effects are started. .. In addition, the characters "timer increase" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that two timer advance notice effects have been started. Here, the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 is reset to "60:00", and the second timer notice display TM12 displays "02:00" as the timer display. Further, the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12 are both default display modes. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11, it is shown that the bomb image BOM explodes as a certain effect and two timer advance effects are newly started. There is.

In this production example, after the bomb image BOM explodes, as shown in FIG. 445 (9'), the characters "SP waiting" are displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, and the super reach notice is given. An effect in which the swordsman character KNG as an item is added and an effect in which a new timer advance notice effect is started on the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be performed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "item get" are displayed, and it is notified that the notice item has been acquired. That is, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, two notice effects are performed as a certain effect, one is an effect in which the notice item is displayed, and the other is a new timer notice effect. May be started.

If a lower plate full tank error occurs after the bomb image BOM explodes and the two timer advance notice effects are started as described above, a new display is made as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″). Even if the ball removal error display "Please pull out the ball" is displayed so that it overlaps (overlaps) the front side of the started first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12. Good. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to see, it may be possible to eliminate the ball removal error in a hurry. The ball removal error display may overlap with the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12.

In addition to the ball removal error display, another error display such as a door open display may be configured to overlap with the timer notice display. This is because the error display is an important notification content for the player, so it may be possible to pay attention to the fact that the error has occurred by deteriorating the visibility of the timer notice display.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (10) following FIG. 445 (9), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "01:50" is displayed. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown of the timer display has not been started, and the display of "60:00" remains. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the countdown of the timer display is started only for one of the two timer advance notice effects. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the second timer notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (11), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "01:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (11). On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 446 (12), at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display. The mode changes to a look-ahead display mode. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12 is shown. In addition, the character "hot" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes to increase the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11. It suggests that it has improved. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 became "00:00", but the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display becomes "00:00", or the second timer notice display TM12 may change after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The timer display in may be "00:00". After that, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. On the other hand, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains "60:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (13), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped and displayed, respectively, and after being temporarily stopped by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". , The state of the confirmed display is shown. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown has not started, and the timer display remains at "60:00".

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 446 (14), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. The second hold icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 446 (15), "59:75" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.25 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

FIG. 447 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 448 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 447 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 447 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 447 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 447 (1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 447 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode consisting of one bomb, and the characters "TIMER" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this production example, the display of the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb indicates that the warning display of the timer notice production is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 447 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the variable icon h0 is the notice display mode of the timer notice effect related to the symbol change. Become.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb erases the display of "TIMER" and shows that the head of the fuse is ignited. In the vicinity of the navigator character YM, "something happens after 7 seconds". The characters "..." are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. Here, the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 447 (10), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "03:29" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 447 (11). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:66" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 447 (12). In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "pseudo-ream", suggesting that a pseudo-ream effect may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (13), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. In addition, the variable icon h0, which is the display mode of the bomb, explodes, and the effect is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream" are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 447 (14), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. At this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the default display mode, and the variable icon h0 indicates the number of times that the second variable display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream. "Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, when the pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance notice effect, the variable icon h0 notifies that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The situation is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (16), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 447 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 447 (18), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (19) following FIG. 447 (18), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , It has been reported that it will develop into super reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 448 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (21), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 448 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 448 (23), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 448 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer notice effect is executed only once for each bomb display, but even if one bomb is displayed, the timer notice effect may be executed a plurality of times. May be good. Further, a plurality of types of bomb display modes (for example, color, shape, etc.) may be prepared, and the number of timer advance notice effects to be executed may be different depending on the display mode. In this case, the timer advance notice effect of the number of times corresponding to the display mode may not be performed. For example, the timer may be executed only once when it is executed up to three times.

FIG. 449 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 450 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 449. It is a figure. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (1), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 449 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 449 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 449 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (3), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (3), a mini game is also started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, a small decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner, and a display indicating the roll of "1" on the dice and a display of "pending change" are performed, and the mini-game is played. It is foretold that the display mode of the hold icon will change when the effect button 136 is operated after the start and as a result, the roll of "1" on the dice is stopped and displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "mini game start" are displayed to notify the start of the mini game. The mini-game may start after the timer advance notice effect starts, the timer advance notice effect may start after the mini-game starts, and the timing when the timer advance notice effect starts and the mini-game start. The timing may be the same.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (4), the variable display of the dice symbol was started, the big button image 136aL was displayed together with the button reception time meter MT, and the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 was started. This is notified, and the character "press" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to encourage the player to operate the effect button 136. Here, when the big button image 136aL is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that when the button image 136a of a normal size is displayed, that is, the jackpot symbol is easily displayed. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (4), the first timer notice display TM11 is displayed with "04: 37 ”is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.63 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (5), as shown in FIG. 449 (6), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the dice symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 449 (6), the dice pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a "1" result, and the character "OK" is displayed, which is the result of the mission achievement in the mini game. Has been notified. That is, it is determined that the result of this mini-game is used to change the display mode of the hold icon as a certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11. The countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "02:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (6).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (7), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. The countdown is still continuing on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "01:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 449 (7).

Then, as shown in FIG. 449 (8), at the timing when the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00", the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display of the bomb. The mode is changed, the character "TIMER" is added above it, the character "Timer is on hold" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the first hold icon h11 is changed to the bomb display mode. It has been notified that it has changed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of performing the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11, the display of the hold icon that changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb that announces the execution of the timer notice effect as a certain effect. It is shown that the mode change effect is being performed. Further, in this effect example, unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 447, the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb is not displayed at the time of starting winning, but the display mode of the bomb is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display after winning. An example of changing the display mode is shown in the hold icon. A replay icon is displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb, and the result of the timer advance notice effect executed in connection with the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the bomb. , It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous production may be performed as a certain production. That is, it can be said that a notice of pseudo-continuous production (pre-reading notice) is being performed. In this production example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changed to correspond to the display of the bomb at the timing when the timer display became "00:00", but the timer display became "00:00". Later, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may be changed to the display mode of the bomb, or the timer display may be changed to "00:00" after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to the display mode of the bomb. May be.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (10), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 449 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 has "decoration 5". It is confirmed and displayed by the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 2". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (12), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the bomb, is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that the variable icon h0 is the notice display mode of the timer notice effect related to the symbol change. Become. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 449 (13) to (17) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 449 (13) to (17) are the effects shown in FIGS. 447 (9) to (13), except that the replay icon is displayed on the variable icon h0. Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted. Here, the timer advance notice effect executed in FIGS. 449 (13) to (17) is the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 449 (18), it is shown that the display mode is changed to the replay display mode after the variable icon h0, which is the bomb display mode, explodes. As described above, in this effect example, when a pseudo-continuous effect as a certain effect is performed as a result of the timer advance effect, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to a specific display mode (replay display mode). By doing so, it is shown that the pseudo-continuous production has been performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (19) following FIG. 449 (18), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (20), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (21), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 450 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (23) gives a notice of the strong Sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area remains displayed together with the variable icon h0. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the variable icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (24), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the replay to the display mode of the bomb displayed in large size. However, the characters "new timer!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. That is, the variable icon h0 indicates that the timer advance notice effect related to the third timer advance notice display TM13 is started. In addition, the characters "hot" are displayed above the variable icon h0 after this change, suggesting that a highly reliable production of a big hit may be executed as a certain production. .. Then, a cut-in icon is displayed on the variable icon h0, and as a result of performing a timer advance notice effect for which execution is announced, a cut-in image may be displayed as a certain effect. Is suggested. Then, in this production example, since the characters "hot" are displayed, it can be said that it is foretold that the strong cut-in image CI1a is likely to be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 450 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (26), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 450 (27), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (28) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this effect example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain advance notice effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 450 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 450 (30), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 450 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 451 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 451 (1) to (12) are the same as those in FIGS. 447 (1) to (12), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 451 (13), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is done, "decoration 6" is displayed as a stop instead of the replay symbol RP in the middle symbol, and the character "unexploded" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. It is shown that the notice production was a fake timer notice production. The timer display may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed, or the middle symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display is "00:00". The middle symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display becomes "00:00".

Then, as shown in FIG. 451 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased. Further, the variable icon h0 has changed from the bomb display mode to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 451 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, but an example in which a fake timer notice effect is performed is shown, but the fake timer notice effect may not be performed. That is, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the bomb, the timer notice effect may be performed without fail.

FIG. 452 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 453 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 452 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 452 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 447 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 452 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the start port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass, and the characters "TIMER x 3" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this production example, it is shown that the notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together. .. The display mode of the bombs is not limited to one or three, and may be displayed in a display mode in which two bombs are in a single block, or in a display mode in which four or more bombs are in a single block. It may be displayed as.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 452 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated is moved to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode, so that three timer notice effects related to the symbol variation are executed. It becomes the variable icon h0 which is the notice display mode of the thing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo-ream is started as a certain effect. In addition, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together, the display of "TIMER x 3" is erased and the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the three bombs is ignited. The situation is shown, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Something will happen after 7 seconds ..." are displayed, and a certain effect can be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed 7 seconds later. It has been suggested that there is sex. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed after the display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the first timer advance notice display TM11 may be started to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (10), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the right side of the variable icon h0 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (11), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the Sabohani icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. Further, the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb arranged on the left side of the three bombs is ignited. The length of the fuse of the bomb placed on the left side also becomes shorter according to the time after the countdown of the timer display starts. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (11). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (12), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (12) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the character of Sabohani. It has been announced that when the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. In addition, the characters "Attention to mini-games" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the mini-games along with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (13) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, the Sabohani character SBHN appears from the inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 452 (13), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "03:51" and the second timer. On the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 452 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. When the display mode is changed to high reliability, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. However, in this production example, the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 452 (14), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "01:37" and the second timer. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (15) and "00:00" is displayed, the right side of the variable icon h0 in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated. Bomb explodes and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and “14:25” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (15).

After that, as shown in FIG. 452 (16), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. The replay icon RPL may be started to be displayed after the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-ream is started, or the second decoration by the pseudo-ream after the replay icon RPL is started to be displayed. The variation display of the symbol may be started, or the display of the replay icon RPL may be started at the timing when the variation display of the second decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, at this time, the display mode of the variable icon h0 is changed to the mode in which the bomb arranged on the right side is erased. As described above, in this effect example, the bombs are displayed in such a manner that the bombs are decremented by one each time the timer advance notice effect is performed once. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (16).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (17), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 452 (17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (18), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 453 (19) following FIG. 452 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. To. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (20), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "00:00", the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which the two bombs are agglomerated is used. The bomb on the left explodes, the effect is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a notice of the strong Sabohani group. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12. The timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the timer display is "00:00", or the timer on the second timer notice display TM12 may be started after the Sabohani group notice is started. The display may be "00:00", or the Sabohani group notice may be started at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00".

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (21), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, the variable icon h0 displayed in the variable icon display area is deleted. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the second timer advance notice display TM12 is deleted, the second timer advance notice display TM12 may be deleted after the variable icon h0 is deleted, or the second timer advance display TM12 may be deleted. The timing at which the timer notice display TM12 is deleted and the timing at which the variable icon h0 is deleted may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 453 (22), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased. Further, in this production example, corresponding to the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb, which is the remaining one of the three, "waiting" with the bomb icon in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and it is notified that the third timer advance notice effect is scheduled to start. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (23), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. At this time, the bomb icon displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen has been erased. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 453 (24), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (25) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a. That is, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 453 (27), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, in this effect example, when the variable icon h0 is redisplayed, the display mode of the bomb is changed to the display mode of the strong cut-in image, and the timer notice effect related to the third timer notice display TM13 is performed. As a result, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a certain effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 453 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In this production example, the timer advance effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed, but it is not the same number of times as the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon. , The number of displayed bombs may be the minimum guaranteed number of times the timer advance notice effect is executed, or may be the maximum number of times that the timer can be executed.

In addition, as a mission, when the timer advance effect of the number of times corresponding to the number of bombs displayed on the hold icon is executed (that is, when the mission is completed), the jackpot symbol is always displayed. It may be configured in.

FIG. 454 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 454 (1) to (10) are the same as those of FIGS. 447 (1) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 becomes "06:36", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (11) shows that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Has been done. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "02:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (12), "01:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that one second has passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "05:36" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (12), the effect of exploding the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the bomb starts even though the timer display in any of the timer notice displays is not "00:00". Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 454 (13), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the bomb display mode to the panda display mode at the timing when the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 becomes “00:00”. However, it becomes a look-ahead display mode. Further, the character "icon change" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed. After that, as shown in FIG. 454 (14), the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. In addition, the character "pending change" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "04:11" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (14).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (15), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “03:29” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (15). In addition, a question mark is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "what", which raises expectations as to which notice display will be performed when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (16), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and “01:66” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 454 (16). In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "pseudo-ream", suggesting that a pseudo-ream effect may be performed when the countdown on the first timer notice display TM11 is completed. doing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 454 (17), the third stop is stopped at the timing when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". This is performed, and the replay symbol RP as a pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-ream is performed. In the present embodiment, the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed, but the middle symbol is displayed after the timer display in the first timer notice display TM11 becomes "00:00". May be stopped and displayed, or the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11 may be "00:00" after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed.

As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that a plurality of timer notice effects are performed by the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb suggesting one timer notice effect.

FIG. 455 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 456 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 455 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 455 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 447 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 455 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "1". Here, the first hold icon h11 is a display mode of a bomb, but is a display mode of a large bomb having a size larger than that shown in FIG. 447 (3). Further, the replay icon, the Sabohani icon, and the bancho icon are displayed on the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of this large bomb, and the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of this large bomb is displayed. As a result of the timer advance notice effect executed in connection with the above, it is suggested that there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous effect, a Sabohani group notice, and a cut-in image are displayed as a certain effect. That is, it can be said that the pseudo-continuous production, the Sabohani group notice, and the cut-in image notice (look-ahead notice) are performed. In addition, the characters "Large timer pending" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, three icons indicating an effect to be executed as a certain effect are displayed on the hold icon in the display mode of one bomb, so that a notice display indicating that the timer notice effect is executed three times. Is shown to be taking place. The number of icons shown in the hold icon (variable icon) in the display mode of the large bomb is not limited to one or three, and may be in a mode in which two icons are displayed, or four. The above icon may be displayed in some cases.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the large bomb, is extremely high. doing.

FIG. 455 (5) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon (second hold icon) h12 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is displayed. It becomes "2". Here, the second hold icon h12 partially overlaps with the first hold icon h11, which is a display mode of the large bomb, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state. There is. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Waiting for demon heat" are displayed, and it is suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely high. Notifies that it is waiting.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (6), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (7), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 455 (8). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (9), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 of the display mode of the large bomb is a notice display that the timer notice effect related to the symbol change is executed three times by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. The variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, which is the mode, is set. In addition, in response to the start of the symbol variation display related to the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the large bomb, the characters "demon heat is changing" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a big hit notice is given. It has been done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (10), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "07: 00" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 7 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the replay icon RPL is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that there is a high possibility that a pseudo continuous effect is started as a certain effect. In addition, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb indicates that the tip of the fuse is ignited, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "something after 7 seconds ..." are displayed. It is suggested that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 7 seconds. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (11), "06:36" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.64 seconds have passed since the countdown started. In addition, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the length of the fuse at the variation icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display on the first timer notice display TM11. At this time, for example, the display mode of the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer advance notice effect corresponding to the replay icon has started. ..

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (12), it is shown that the second timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, by frame-in animation, the second timer advance notice display TM12 is framed in from the left side of the display screen, so that the second timer advance notice effect is started. The display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 is the default display mode. "20:00" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that a certain effect is started 20 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in this effect example, the Sabohani icon SBH is added to the second timer notice display TM12, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be started as a certain effect. Further, in the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "05:75" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (12). In addition, the character "attention" is continuously displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the timer advance notice effect. At this time, for example, the display mode of the Sabohani icon displayed on the variable icon h0 may be changed by blinking display or the like to notify that the timer advance notice corresponding to the Sabohani icon has started. ..

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the second timer notice display TM12 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (13), "19:20" is displayed on the second timer notice display TM12. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.8 seconds have passed since the countdown of the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 started. On the other hand, the timer display countdown continues on the first timer advance notice display TM11, and "04:95" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (13) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and the characters "When a group notice is confirmed" are displayed on the right side of the treasure box image BOX together with the Sabohani character. It has been announced that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure box, a Sabohani group notice will be given. Here, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb partially overlaps with the character display of "when a group notice is confirmed", but the character display may overlap with the variable icon h0. .. In addition, the characters "Attention to mini-games" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to alert the mini-games along with the timer advance notice effect.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (14) shows how the result of the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened, a Sabohani character appears from inside, and the characters "Success!" Are displayed in the vicinity. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "I did it" are displayed, indicating that the mini game was successful. The two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12 continue to count down, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 455 (14), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "03:51" and the second timer. On the notice display TM12, "17:76" is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 455 (15), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display mode of the second timer notice display TM12 changes from the default display mode to the high reliability display mode, and the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. The added Sabohani icon SBH is displayed in a manner of increasing to four, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is executed. When the display mode is changed to high reliability, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. However, in this production example, the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. , Strong Sabohani group notice is always executed. Further, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, since the mini-game was successful and the execution of the Sabohani group notice was confirmed, the “Done” mark is displayed so as to overlap with the Sabohani icon. In addition, the "done" mark may be displayed after the Sabohani group notice is executed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is added together with the "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11, the pseudo-ream effect can be performed as a certain effect. It has been suggested that there is sex. The countdown continues on the two timer notice displays TM11 and TM12, respectively. At the timing shown in FIG. 455 (15), "01:37" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer is displayed. On the notice display TM12, "15:62" is displayed.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (16) and "00:00" is displayed, the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and "decoration 5" -Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6 "decorative symbol combinations are displayed. Although a part of the variable icon h0 in the display mode of the large bomb is overlapped with the replay symbol RP, the replay symbol RP may be overlapped with the variable icon h0. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "pseudo-ream!" Are displayed to notify that the pseudo-ream effect is performed. The decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed after the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00", or the timer on the first timer advance notice display TM11 after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The display may be "00:00", or the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 is "00:00". On the other hand, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:25" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 455 (17), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. Further, in this effect example, since the pseudo-continuous effect was executed as a result of the timer advance effect, it is set to overlap with the replay icon displayed on the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb. Mark is displayed. In the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "14:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (17).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 455 (18), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the second timer notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "05:22" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 455 (18).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (19) following FIG. 455 (18), a second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In the second timer advance notice display TM12, the countdown continues, and "02:12" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (20).

After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (21), when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed and the timer display becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the second timer notice display TM12.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (22), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. At this time, the icon SBH of Sabohani is displayed below the icon of the replay icon RPL, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice has been made. At this time, the second timer notice display TM12 is erased. Further, in this effect example, the effect display is subsequently switched to the super reach display, but when the variable icon h0 is the display mode of the large bomb, the variable icon h0 is not erased, and even if the transition to super reach is performed. The displayed state is maintained, but the variable icon may be erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 456 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (24), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the third timer advance notice display TM13 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the third timer notice display TM13 is the default display mode. "03:00" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13, suggesting that a cut-in image is displayed as a certain effect when 3 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. The replay icon RPL overlaps the front side of the third timer notice display TM13, and is considered to be more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the third timer notice display TM13 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 456 (25), "01:25" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 1.75 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 becomes "00:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (26) displays the strong cut-in image CI1a, and then FIG. 456 (27). As shown in, the third timer notice display TM13 is erased. Further, in this effect example, since the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as a result of the timer advance effect, the icon of the bancho displayed on the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb is overlapped. The "Done" mark is displayed. As described above, in this production example, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a can be said to be an example of a certain production.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (28), since the corresponding effects were performed for all the icons shown in the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the large bomb, the effect of exploding the variable icon h0 started. Has been done. Then, as shown in FIG. 456 (29), the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the large bomb to the display mode of the panda, and the notice display by the variable icon h0 is performed. Here, the variable icon h0 may change to a display mode other than the panda display mode. For example, when the variable icon h0 changes to the display mode of the panda, the jackpot symbol is higher than when the display mode changes to the panda display mode. May be easily displayed. In addition, the display mode may change to the default display mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is deleted together with the variable icon display area, but it may not be deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 456 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 456 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 457 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a hold notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 457 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 447 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 457 (3) shows that a game ball is won at the starting port 230 of the special figure 1 and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode of Yoshimune hold, and is a display mode of the look-ahead notice. When the hold icon is displayed in this Yoshimune hold display mode, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally fixed and stopped than when the hold icon is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the characters "I appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon according to the display mode of Yoshimune hold is displayed. The display of the characters "I appear!" May be started after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. After the start, the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode may be started to be displayed, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is started to be displayed, "I appear! The display of the characters "" may be started. In addition to the Yoshimune hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandfather hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. The reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, is high. It has been suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In addition, the characters displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been erased.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 457 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of Yoshimune hold, becomes the change icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the change icon display area without changing the display mode. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP confirmed!" Are displayed, and it is notified in advance that the system will shift to super reach. In this way, it can be said that the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold functions as a look-ahead notice of a big hit and also as a look-ahead notice of super reach. The display of the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the characters "SP confirmed!" May be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (9), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (10), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 457 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (12), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the weak Sabohani group notice, in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice, is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (13), the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed, and "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, which may lead to super reach. It has been notified.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 457 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (15) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 457 (16), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" is temporarily stopped due to shaking fluctuation. There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. In addition, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 of the Yoshimune hold display mode is also redisplayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 457 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 458 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 459 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 458 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 458 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 447 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 458 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display is “1”. Here, the hold icon (first hold icon) h11 of the special figure 1 is a display mode common to the display mode of Yoshimune hold representing the character of the lord described above, but the character of the lord holding the bomb is displayed. It is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown, and it is the display mode of the look-ahead notice of the timer notice effect. In addition, the character "group" is displayed on the bomb held by the character of the lord, and there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be performed as a certain effect that will be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. It suggests. In addition, the characters "I appeared!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the hold icon is displayed according to the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold. The display of the characters "I appear!" May be started after the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is started, or the characters "I appear!" May be displayed. The first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode may be started to be displayed after the start of, or at the timing when the first hold icon h11 of the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode is started to be displayed, "I The display of the characters "Sama appeared!" May be started. In addition to the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode that represents the character of the lord, for example, the hold icon is displayed in the grandfather bomb hold display mode that represents the grandfather character and the grandmother bomb hold display mode that represents the grandmother character. May be displayed, and the possibility of a true timer advance notice effect may differ depending on the type of character.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "expected next fluctuation" are displayed, and the expectation of a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is high. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "something" is displayed, indicating that the display of a certain message has started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (6), the third stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation. As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character display of "something" is switched to the character display of "I have something", that is, the message "I have something" is displayed from these character displays. It can be said that there is. This message is a message corresponding to the display of the hold icon in the Yoshimune bomb hold display mode, and suggests that the timer notice effect may be started.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol change, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode. In addition, the characters "demon heat" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot for the symbol variation display related to the variation icon h0, which is the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, is extremely high. ing. The display of the characters "demon heat" may be started after the symbol variation display is started, or the display of the characters "demon heat" may be started at the timing when the symbol variation display is started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect has started. In this production example, the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation, and is displayed in the center of the display screen. The first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "12:00" is displayed as a timer display on the first timer notice display TM11, suggesting that a certain effect is started 12 seconds after the countdown is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "attention" is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (10), "11:86" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.14 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (11), the first timer advance notice display TM11 shows that the timer display is switched to the character display of "waiting for group generation". At this time, a Sabohani icon is added to the left side of the character display of "Waiting for group generation", and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice will be executed as a result of the timer notice effect. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the explanation display (tutorial display) is performed in the timer notice display during the execution (subtraction) of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display. After that, as shown in FIG. 458 (12), the character display of "waiting for group generation" is switched to the timer display again. In this production example, the timer display is a switching display in which the timer display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the character display of "waiting for group generation" are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 0.5 seconds). It is performed from the start of the countdown to the reach state described later. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "10:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (12).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (13), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner. In the first timer advance notice display TM11, the countdown continues and the above-mentioned alternate display also continues, and "04:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (13).

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (14), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 458 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (16), the alternate display on the first timer advance notice display TM11 ends, and the timer display is continuously displayed. In the first timer notice display TM11, the countdown continues, and "01:35" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 458 (16).

After that, as shown in FIG. 458 (17), when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed and the timer display becomes "0:00", the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. At this time, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is still displayed, and the variable icon h0 is continuously displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. That is, in this effect example, as a result of the timer advance effect being performed by the first timer advance notice display TM11, it is shown that the Sabohani group advance notice is performed as a certain effect.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (18), it is shown that the Sabohani group notice is continuously performed. Then, the variable icon h0, which was the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, has been changed to the display mode of the Yoshimune hold in which the bomb has been erased. That is, in this production example, the timer notice effect is executed by the variable icon (hold icon) of the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is a combination of the notice of success / failure judgment (pre-reading notice) and the notice of the timer notice effect (pre-reading notice). After the function is fulfilled, an example is shown in which the display mode is changed to the Yoshimune hold display mode, which has only the function of notifying the judgment of success or failure (pre-reading notice). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 458 (18), the first timer notice display TM11 is also erased. The first timer notice display TM11 may be deleted after the display mode of the variable icon h0 has changed, or the display mode of the variable icon h0 may change after the first timer notice display TM11 has been deleted. Alternatively, the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes and the timing at which the first timer advance notice display TM11 is erased may be the same.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 459 (19) following FIG. 458 (18), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. Will be done. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon h0 is erased together with the variable icon display area. The variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, the variable icon h0 may be deleted after the transition to the super reach, or the variable icon h0 may be deleted at the timing of the transition to the super reach. It may be erased.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 459 (20), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the characters “strong cut-in” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the strong cut-in image is displayed. Notifying that CI1a has been displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 459 (21), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 459 (22), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. In addition, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are also redisplayed, and the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the Yoshimune hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 459 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 460 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 461 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 460 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 460 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 460 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 460 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

FIG. 460 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 has a display mode in which three bombs are represented as a mass, and the characters "TIMER x 3" are added above. In addition, the characters "timer is on hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. In this effect example, as described above in FIG. 452, by displaying the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are agglomerated, the notice display that the timer notice effect is executed three times is performed. It is shown that it is.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (4), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (5), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (6), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 460 (7). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 2" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (8), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 452 (9), it is shown that the timer advance notice effect is started. Specifically, for example, the timer advance notice effect is started when the first timer advance notice display TM11 is framed in from the left side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. The display mode of the first timer notice display TM11 is the default display mode. "05:00" is displayed on the first timer advance notice display TM11, which suggests that a certain effect is started when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the countdown. Further, in this effect example, the Sabohani icon SBH is added to the first timer advance notice display TM11, and in this effect example, as will be described later, the result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. , Suggests that the Sabohani character may appear from the treasure chest image BOX in the mini-game. In addition, the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which the three bombs are grouped together shows that the tip of the fuse of the bomb placed in the center of the three bombs is ignited, and the navigator character YM In the vicinity of, the characters "something will happen after 5 seconds ..." are displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed as a result of the timer advance effect being performed after 5 seconds. Further, in this production example, it is shown that the decorative pattern is displayed small in the upper center. Here, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed, or the first hold icon may be started after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. The display mode of h11 may change, or the first timer advance notice display TM11 may start to be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. Further, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started after the display position of the decorative symbol is changed, or the display position of the decorative symbol is changed after the display of the first timer notice display TM11 is started. Alternatively, the display of the first timer notice display TM11 may be started at the timing when the display position of the decorative symbol is changed. In this production example, the character display of "TIMEr x 3" additionally displayed above the first hold icon h11 is continuously displayed.

After that, the countdown (subtraction display) of the timer display (time display) on the first timer notice display TM11 is started, and at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (10), "04:06" is displayed on the first timer notice display TM11. It is displayed. That is, it is shown that 0.94 seconds have passed since the countdown started. Further, the length of the fuse of the bomb arranged in the center of the first hold icon h11 is also shortened according to the time from the start of the countdown of the timer display.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (11) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini-game is started, the treasure box image BOX is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and on the right side of the treasure box image BOX, the characters "Gekiatsu notice when appears" are displayed together with the character of Sabohani. It has been announced that when a Sabohani character appears from the treasure chest, a notice with extremely high reliability of the jackpot will be executed. In addition, the characters "mini game" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the mini game.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer advance notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (12) and "00:00" is displayed, the result of the mini game is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, the treasure box image BOX displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is opened after moving to the center, and the Sabohani character SBHN appears in a large size from the inside, and " The characters "Group notice confirmed" are displayed, and the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that the mini-game has been successful and the Sabohani group notice will be executed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the result of the mini game is derived as a certain effect as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11. Further, it can be said that as a result of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11, it can be said that the pre-reading advance notice that the Sabohani group notice is performed as a certain effect is being performed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (13), the characters "preparing" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the Sabohani icon SBH, and a notice is given that the Sabohani group notice will be performed. There is. Further, at this time, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed to a mode in which the bomb arranged in the center is erased and the two bombs are represented as a lump. Here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change after the display of the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" is started, or the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes. After that, the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" may be started to be displayed, or the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the timing when the Sabohani icon SBH and the character display of "preparing" are started to be displayed. The display mode may change. If the mini-game is successful, the strong Sabohani group notice may be executed without fail, or the weak Sabohani group notice may be executed. However, in this production example, the strong Sabohani group notice is executed. The group notice is always executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (14), after the first stop to the third stop are sequentially performed, a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 5". It is shown how it is being done. After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 2-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (16), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. The variable display starts. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area. Is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11 after the display mode is changed as described above moves to the variable icon display area in the state of the changed display mode, so that the remaining two timer notices regarding the symbol change are announced. The variable icon h0 is a mode for displaying a notice that the effect is executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 460 (17), it is shown that two timer advance notice effects are started at the same time. In this production example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are framed in from the left and right sides of the display screen by frame-in animation, respectively, and the two timer notice effects are started at the same time. The second timer notice display TM12 and the third timer notice display TM13 are both default display modes. A replay icon RPL is added to the second timer notice display TM12 displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a question mark icon is added to the third timer notice display TM13 displayed on the left side of the display screen. QST is added. Then, "07:00" is displayed as a timer display on the second timer notice display TM12, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started 7 seconds after the countdown is started. That is, it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous production may be started 7 seconds after the timer display countdown is started. Further, "08: 00" is displayed as a timer display on the third timer advance notice display TM13, and it is suggested that a certain effect is started 8 seconds after the countdown is started. It is not clear which effect is executed as a result of the timer advance effect on the third timer advance display TM13. In this production example, since the two timer notice displays TM12 and TM13 start the countdown at the same time, a certain production starts both when 7 seconds have passed and when 8 seconds have passed since the countdown was started. It is suggested that it will be done. Further, in the variable icon h0 of the display mode in which the two bombs are grouped together, it is shown that the heads of both fuses of the two bombs are ignited according to the start of the two timer advance notice effects.

After that, the timer display on the second timer notice display TM12 and the timer display on the third timer notice display TM13 start counting down (subtraction display), respectively, and at the timing shown in FIG. 460 (18), the second timer notice display TM12 is displayed. , "04:27" is displayed, and "05:27" is displayed on the third timer notice display TM13. That is, it is shown that 0.73 seconds have passed since the countdown started.

After that, when the countdown in the second timer notice display TM12 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (19) following FIG. 460 (18) and "00:00" is displayed, the two bombs are displayed as one mass. Both bombs at the aspect variation icon h0 explode and the effect is displayed. Then, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Replay symbol RP-Decoration 6" is displayed. On the other hand, in the third timer advance notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "01:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (19).

After that, as shown in FIG. 461 (20), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first timer notice display TM11 is erased and the replay icon RPL is displayed to notify that the pseudo continuous effect has been performed. In the third timer notice display TM13, the countdown continues, and "00:50" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 461 (20).

After that, at the timing when the countdown in the third timer notice display TM13 is completed and becomes "00:00", in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (21), the display mode of the variable icon h0 is a lump of two bombs. The display mode is changed from the above display mode to the panda display mode, and the display mode is a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer notice effect by the third timer notice display TM13 is shown. Further, in this production example, the content of a certain production was not clear due to the question mark icon QST, but the content of a certain production is clarified for the first time when the countdown is completed and a certain production is performed. The situation is shown. Further, in this production example, when the hold icon that has been started to be displayed in the display mode in which three bombs are displayed as a lump is displayed as the hold icon, the timer notice effect is performed as a look-ahead notice and is displayed as a variable icon. After that, it is shown that a timer notice effect is also performed as a notice regarding the symbol variation display. That is, when the hold icon of the display mode notifying that the timer advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times is displayed, the timer advance notice effect is executed in each of the plurality of symbol variation displays. Specifically, it is shown that the Sabohani group notice, which is performed as a result of executing the timer notice effect, the pseudo-continuous effect, and the change effect of the variation icon h0 are performed in different symbol variation displays. Further, in this effect example, the pre-reading advance notice performed as a result of a certain timer advance notice effect and the advance notice regarding the symbol change display performed as a result of another timer advance notice effect are performed for the same symbol variation display. An example is shown. Further, in this effect example, two timer notice effects are started at the same time, but it is shown that the contents of the effects performed as a result of executing each timer notice effect are different.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (22), the third timer notice display TM13 is erased, and the panda icon PND is displayed below the replay icon RPL, and the notice is given by the variable icon h0. It is informed that the notification has been made.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle design and the right design, the decorative design continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (24), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 461 (25), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” at the upper center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. In addition, the Sabohani icon SBH and the "preparing" display displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM have been deleted.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (26), a strong Sabohani group notice is given so as to correspond to the Sabohani icon SBH and the display of "Preparing" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. .. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner. Further, in this effect example, the hold icon display area is erased, but the variable icon display area is maintained in the displayed state. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed. Further, in this production example, one Sabohani character SBHN constituting the strong Sabohani group notice stumbles on the variable icon h0, and a change animation of the display mode of the variable icon h0 is performed. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the variable icon h0 may be affected by the advance notice of the Sabohani group.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (27), the notification of the Sabohani group is continuously performed, and the display mode of the variable icon h0 changes from the display mode of the panda to the display mode of the large displayed Bancho. However, it is shown that the mode of the notice display by the variable icon h0 has been stepped up to a more reliable one.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 461 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach. At this time, the variable icon display area is erased.

After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (29) shows that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 461 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 461 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. It is also shown that the variable icon h0 is also redisplayed in the display mode of the large size Bancho. After that, as shown in FIG. 461 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 462 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the timer advance notice effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 462 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 449 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 462 (3) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special drawing 1 starting port 230 and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by one. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, and the display of the hold number of the special figure 1 in the second hold number display becomes “2”. .. Here, the hold icon h12 of the special figure 1 is set as a button hold display mode, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is started by operating the effect button 136.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (4), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notification for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (5), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (6), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is the button hold display mode. It is shown that the timer display is displayed above the second hold icon h12, which has changed from the display mode to the bomb display mode. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer notice display is displayed on the hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 462 (6), "10:00" is displayed as a timer display, suggesting that a certain effect is started 10 seconds after the countdown is started. There is. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the hold icon is used to identifiable the time (initial value) at the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display. In this production example, the start of the countdown is reserved until the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 starts, but the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is displayed. The countdown may be started in the held state, that is, in the state displayed as the hold icon. In this case, when a timing for starting a certain effect is specified, such as a timing after the symbol variation display corresponding to the second hold icon h12 is started, the timer display is reset and the countdown is restarted. You may try to do it. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM together with the characters "pseudo-ream", and as a result of the timer advance notice effect, there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as a certain effect. Is suggested. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (6), a lower plate full tank error has occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps (overlaps) a part of the second hold icon h12 on the front side. ), The ball removal error display "Please remove the ball" is displayed. According to this, in order to make the timer notice display easy to see, it may be possible to eliminate the ball removal error in a hurry.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7), the game progresses from the timing shown in FIG. (6), and the hold related to the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that is digested and the variable display of the symbol is started. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7), the timer display countdown is started in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0, and at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (7), "07". : 32 "is displayed. That is, it is suggested that a certain effect may be performed after 7.32 seconds. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the timer is displayed by the variable icon h0. It can also be said that the variable icon display area on which the variable icon h0 is displayed also functions as a display area for displaying the timer notice display. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (8) and "00:00" is displayed, "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed. The combination of the decorative symbols of is displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo-continuous production is performed.

Further, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (5), as shown in FIG. 462 (6'), "30:00" may be displayed as a timer display. Has been done. That is, the effect example shown in FIG. 462 (6') suggests that a certain effect is started 30 seconds after the countdown is started. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "group notice", and as a result of the timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the Sabohani group notice will be executed as a certain effect. Is suggested.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 462 (7'), the game proceeds from the timing shown in FIG. (6'), and the second hold icon h12 in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is shown that the hold related to is digested and the variable display of the symbol is started. Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 462 (7'), "30:00", which is the timer display at the start of the countdown, is continuously displayed as the timer display in the timer notice display displayed on the variable icon h0. When the timer display countdown is started, the timer display countdown is performed on the first timer notice display TM11 after the first timer notice display TM11 is framed in from the right side of the display screen by the frame-in animation. Will be. That is, in this effect example, the hold icon (variable icon) is used to display the time (initial value) at the start of the timer display countdown in the timer notice display so that it can be specified, and the timer notice display is displayed separately. In the timer notice display, it is shown that the timer display is being counted down. At the timing shown in FIG. 462 (7'), "27:32" is displayed, suggesting that a certain effect may be performed after 27.32 seconds. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the "attention" character is displayed to call attention to the timer advance notice effect.

After that, when the countdown in the first timer notice display TM11 is completed at the timing shown in FIG. 462 (8') and "00:00" is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 gives a strong Sabohani group notice. It is shown that it is. In this effect example, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are not erased and are displayed. In addition, the characters "group occurrence" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice is being performed.

In this way, the hold icon may be displayed in the button hold display mode first, and then changed to the bomb display mode by operating the effect button 136.

In the effects shown in FIGS. 425 to 462, the types of effects performed as a result of the execution of the timer advance notice effect, the effect contents of the timer advance notice effect, and the contents of the mini game are described in FIGS. It goes without saying that various effects described with reference to the drawings can be applied.

Next, a display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 463. Here, FIG. 463 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the hold icon applicable in the present embodiment.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (A) is a default hold icon in a round, non-patterned and white display mode, and when the target symbol variation display is not pre-read or is pre-read. Even so, it is a display mode of the hold icon displayed when it is decided not to display in the pre-reading notice display mode. Further, it does not have a function as a notice display, that is, it can be said that it is a normal display mode of the hold icon.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (B) is a hold icon in a display mode of chance hold by the panda character, and it is decided that the target symbol variation display is pre-read and displayed in the pre-read notice display mode. This is a display mode of the hold icon that may be displayed in the case of. In this chance hold display mode, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the default hold icon is displayed, but the reliability is lower than the super hot hold display mode and the reserved hold display mode described later.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (C) is a hold icon in a display mode of a super hot hold by the character of the bancho, and it is decided that the target symbol variation display is pre-read and displayed in the pre-read notice display mode. This is a display mode of the hold icon that may be displayed when the icon is displayed. In this display mode of intense hot hold, it may be displayed even when the result of the target symbol variation display is lost, but the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the display mode of chance hold.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (D) is a hold icon in the display mode of the reserved stay (super-super hot hold) by the princess character, and as a result of pre-reading the target symbol change display, the big hit symbol change display. This is a display mode of the hold icon that may be displayed when it is determined that the icon is displayed and the display mode of the look-ahead notice is determined. In this display mode of the secured stay, it may be displayed when the result of the target symbol variation display is a big hit, that is, it is a display mode of the premium look-ahead notice.

The display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 463 (E) to 463 (N) is a display mode that functions as a notice display (the change notice) regarding the running symbol change display.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (E) is a notice display composed of one hold icon, and is a hold icon for suggesting SP reach development in a mode in which the characters "SP" are displayed on the hold icon in the default display mode. Is. This hold icon foretells that super reach (SP reach) may occur in the running symbol variation display. In addition, there may be a case where a pre-reading notice may occur that super reach may occur in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon in the display mode of the SP reach development suggestion.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (F) is a notice display composed of one hold icon, and is an additional mini-game suggestion hold icon in which the characters "mini" are displayed in the hold icon in the default display mode. Is. This hold icon foretells that a mini-game (additional mini-game) may be started in the running symbol variation display. In addition, it may be composed of two hold icons. For example, when the number of holds is 2 or more, the hold icon in the form in which the character "mi" is displayed and the character "d" are displayed. The same function may be performed by displaying the hold icons of the displayed modes side by side. In addition, there may be a case where a pre-reading notice is made that the mini-game may be started in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon of the display mode of the additional mini-game suggestion.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (G) is a notice display composed of one hold icon, and is a hold icon for suggesting a timer notice in a display mode in which the characters "TIMER" are added above the bomb. This hold icon is for notifying that the timer advance notice effect as described above is performed in the symbol variation display during execution. In addition, there may be a case where a pre-reading notice is given that the timer notice effect may be started in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon of the display mode of the timer notice suggestion.

FIG. 463 (H) is a notice display composed of a combination of two hold icons, in which "S" and "P" are displayed on the hold icons of the two default display modes displayed side by side, respectively. It is a hold icon of SP reach development suggestion. The notice by the hold icon has the same function as the hold icon in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (E). That is, an example is shown in which the number of hold icons used as a notice is different, but the suggested contents are the same. Even if the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when it is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (H) than when it is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (E). It is preferable that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when it is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (E) than when it is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (H). Alternatively, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (E) and the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (H). Further, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (H) may be displayed on the condition that the number of holds is 2 or more, and when the number of holds is 1, the hold icon of the display mode of "S" may be displayed. Alternatively, only one of the hold icons in the display mode of "P" may be displayed. Further, when the number of holds is one, it is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (E), and then when the number of holds increases, the display mode is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 463 (H). May be good.

FIG. 463 (I) is a notice display composed of a combination of two hold icons, in which "extreme" and "heat" are displayed on the hold icons of the two default display modes displayed side by side, respectively. It is a hold icon of the intense heat notice of, and it is a notice that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the running symbol fluctuation display. Further, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (I) may be displayed on the condition that the number of holds is 2 or more, and the hold icon of the display mode of "extreme" when the number of holds is 1. Alternatively, only one of the hold icons in the "heat" display mode may be displayed. Further, when the number of holds is one, the hold icon in the default display mode may be displayed in such a manner that the characters "super heat" are displayed. In this case, if the number of reservations is subsequently increased, the display mode may be changed to that shown in FIG. 463 (I). Further, it may be performed by a combination of three hold icons. In this case, for example, when the hold icon of the display mode of "!" Is displayed in addition to the hold icons of "super" and "heat", That is, when the three hold icons are displayed in the display modes of "super", "heat", and "!", The reliability of the jackpot is dramatically high, and in addition to the hold icons of "super" and "heat". , When the hold icon of the question mark display mode is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be lower than that of the case where the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of "extreme", "heat", and "!".

FIG. 463 (J) is a notice display composed of a combination of two hold icons, in which "choi" and "heat" are displayed on the hold icons of the two default display modes displayed side by side, respectively. It is a hold icon of the Choi heat notice, and it is a notice that there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit in the running symbol fluctuation display, but it is a big hit than when the hold icon of the display mode of the intense heat notice is displayed. The reliability of is low. Further, the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (J) may be displayed on the condition that the number of holds is 2 or more, and when the number of holds is 1, the hold icon of the display mode of "choi" is displayed. Alternatively, only one of the hold icons in the "heat" display mode may be displayed. Further, when the number of holds is one, the hold icon in the default display mode may be displayed in such a manner that the characters "choi fever" are displayed. In this case, if the number of reservations is subsequently increased, the display mode may be changed to that shown in FIG. 463 (J). Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the hold icon of the intense heat notice shown in FIG. 463 (I) and the hold icon of the choi heat notice shown in FIG. 463 (J) are predetermined such as when a mini game is hit. It is used as a hold icon that may start displaying in a certain period when the display condition of is satisfied.

The hold icon shown in FIG. 463 (K) is a hold icon for suggesting a group notice of the display mode of Sabohani, and is a notice display performed by one or a combination of two or more. The hold icon of the display mode of the Sabohani foretells that the Sabohani group may occur in the symbol variation display during execution. In addition, there may be a case where a pre-reading notice is given that a Sabohani group may occur in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon of the display mode of this group notice suggestion.

FIG. 463 (L) is a hold icon (a hold icon of the copanda) in the display mode of the character of the copanda, and is a hold icon of the notice display for notifying that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the running symbol variation display. .. The hold icon of this copanda is displayed in a combination of 1 or 2 or more, and the larger the number displayed, the easier it is for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed. That is, it is more likely to be a big hit when two Copanda hold icons are displayed than when only one is displayed, and it is more likely to be a big hit when three are displayed than when two are displayed. It is easier to get a big hit when four are displayed than when three are displayed. When a predetermined number or more of the hold icons of the copanda are displayed, the big hit may be confirmed. For example, when three or more are displayed, the big hit may be confirmed.

FIG. 463 (M) shows a display mode when the number of holds is 3 or more when displaying the hold icon of the intense heat notice shown in FIG. 463 (I). That is, the hold icon of the "heat" display mode is displayed on the first hold icon, the hold icon of the "extreme" display mode is displayed on the second hold icon, and the default display is displayed for the other hold icons. The hold icon for the mode is displayed. As described above, FIG. 463 (M) shows a display example in which the number of hold icons displayed is larger than the number of hold icons used for the notice display. As shown in FIG. 463 (N), the hold icon displayed in the default display mode other than the hold icon constituting the hold icon of the intense heat notice may be displayed by the hold icon of Copanda. In this case, the jackpot reliability may be higher than the notice display of the aspect shown in FIG. 463 (M). By doing so, the player is given an incentive to increase the hold by giving the player a sense of expectation that he / she may be able to see a notice display with a higher expectation of the jackpot due to the increase in the hold. Operation may improve.

In addition, in this embodiment, a hold notice table according to the number of holds is provided, and a mode of notice display by a hold icon according to the number of holds (in the case of displaying a notice by a plurality of hold icons, a combination mode thereof). ) May be determined. Here, even if the number of holds is smaller than the number of hold icons required to display a certain notice, the table configuration may be such that the certain notice display may be performed, or the certain notice display may be displayed. Even if the number of hold icons is larger than the number of hold icons required to perform the above, the table configuration may be such that a certain notice display may be performed. Such a hold notice table is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 (see FIG. 292) of the first sub-control unit 400.

FIGS. 464 to 481 are diagrams that stepwise show the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 464 to 481, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. Although FIGS. 464 to 481 show a pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 includes a plurality of decorative symbol display devices as in the above-described embodiment. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 464 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 465 is a stepwise diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure shown in. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is hidden, for example, a default background image is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. In addition, various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image depending on the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 464 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 464 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed. The hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of holdings of special figure 1 is represented by the number of holding icons of special drawing 1 and the display of the number of second holdings in addition to the number of lighting of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons in Special Figure 2 and the display of the second hold number. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 464 (1), the four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 of these four special figures 1 are displayed. Are all displayed in the default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 464 is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state), it is difficult to open the electric chew and it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. I am trying not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 464 (1), the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, on the contrary, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 The third hold icon h13 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h12 and is displayed as the second hold icon h12, and the fourth hold icon h14 displays the third hold icon h13. It moves to the position and is displayed as the third hold icon h13. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (3) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, it shows that the Amidakuji mini-game has started. At this time, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper left corner and displayed in a reduced size. Then, the icon of Bancho's face appears in the Amida field, showing that it is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting the operator to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon of the Bancho. In addition, the words "Mini game!" Are displayed at the top of the Amida field, and the Bancho's face icon BCHO is also displayed at the upper left of the display screen, indicating that the Amida lottery mini game is being executed. I am informing you. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "chance" are displayed together with a question mark, suggesting that the expectation of a big hit will increase depending on the result of the mini game.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 464 (4), the icon of the face of the chief who was located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. Move to the right of the three options. At this time, the characters "mini game" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify that the mini game is being executed. After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 464 (5), the production of the ghost leg is started as shown in FIG. 464 (6), and the icon of the bancho's face is displayed on the ghost leg. Move on the line according to the rules. At this time, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that attention should be paid to the end of the result of the Amidakuji mini-game. In addition, the results are displayed at the three end points of the Amida field, "○" indicating a hit is displayed at the end point on the left side, and "x" indicating a loss is displayed at the end points on the center and right side. Is displayed. That is, when the icon of the Bancho reaches the hit "○", it is announced that a certain notice effect will be performed, and when it reaches "×", no notice will be given. Be notified. In addition, even if "x" is reached, some kind of notice may be given, but even if the jackpot reliability is lower than when "○" is reached, the one with lower reliability is displayed. Good.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464 (7), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the icon of the face of the Bancho has reached the terminal point on the left side of the three terminal points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the end point on the left side where the icon of the face of the bancho is a hit "○" is displayed. Then, the character "success" is displayed above the Amida field, and the character "done" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice is announced that a certain notice effect will be performed. There is.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (8), the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the hold change and the first hold icon. The hold change animation is started at h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 464 (9), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a chance hold which is a look-ahead notice display mode. That is, in this production example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain advance notice effect due to a hit as a result of the Amidakuji mini-game. In addition, the characters "chance hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice has been given due to the chance hold display. The character display of "chance hold" may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 has changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h11 may be displayed after the character display of "chance hold" has been performed. It may change, or the characters "chance hold" may be displayed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (10), it is shown that the mini-game of Amidakuji is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 464 (14). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character display of "chance pending" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted at this timing. It should be noted that the symbol may be erased before the final display is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and the third hold icon h13 is the second. Moves to the display position of the hold icon h12 of, and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (16) shows that the mini game is started. In this production example, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol is displayed small in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left treasure chest image BXL and the right treasure chest image BXR are displayed on the left and right sides of the center of the display screen. Are displayed side by side, and the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "select with the cross key" are displayed, and the navigation display is performed in which the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL to select the treasure box.

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (17), the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure box image BXL moves to the right treasure box image BXR. , Right treasure chest image It is shown that the BXR is surrounded.

After that, when the operation validity period of the operation key unit 137 in the mini game elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 464 (18) displays the characters "decide to the right" in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and the character is displayed on the right. It has been notified that the treasure chest image BXR has been determined as an open treasure chest.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (19) following FIG. 464 (18), the result production of the mini game is started, and the selected right treasure box image BXR is moved and displayed in the center and selected. The left treasure chest image BXL that did not exist is deleted. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Open" are displayed to alert the user to pay attention to the contents of the treasure box.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (20), the result of the treasure chest mini-game is derived, the auntie character BBA appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the character "Uhihi" is displayed, and a big hit. It is suggested that unreliable results were derived.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (21), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h11 are started. It is notified that the display mode of h12 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 465 (22), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the hold icon of the "heat" display mode constituting the hold icon of the Choi heat notice. It is shown that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from the default display mode to the hold icon of the display mode of "choi", and the advance notice effect in the above-described running symbol variation display is started. In this production example, the appearance of the auntie character BBA in the treasure chest mini-game shows that the hold icon of the Choi fever notice, which is a notice display with low reliability of the big hit, is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (23), it is shown that the mini-game of the treasure box is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (24), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (25), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 465 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (27), "SP development!" Is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display will develop into super reach. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 465 (28), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other is displayed. At this time, the characters "swordsman reach" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (29), a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the characters "game" are arranged in the balloon is displayed together with a close-up image of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a weak cut-in image CI1b in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters of "game" in the balloon, and it is a big hit than when the cut-in image is not displayed. Although the reliability is high, it suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is lower than that when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 465 (30), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 465 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. At this time, the display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, but the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 displayed in the display mode of the Choi heat notice are the defaults. It is displayed in a display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 465 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 displayed in the display mode of the Choi heat notice may be changed to the default display mode at the timing of the final display of the decorative symbol.

As described above, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game being played, the hold icon may change to a look-ahead notice, and may change to a notice regarding the running symbol variation display. ing.

FIG. 466 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 467 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 466. It is a figure which shows step by step. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 466 (1) to (4) are the same as those of FIGS. 464 (1) to (4), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 466 (5), the production of the ghost leg is started as shown in FIG. 464 (6), and the icon of the face of the bancho becomes the rule of the ghost leg. Move along the line. At this time, the character "attention" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, indicating that attention should be paid to the end of the result of the Amidakuji mini-game. In addition, the results are displayed at each of the three end points of the Amida field, "◎" indicating a special hit is displayed at the end point on the left side, and "x" indicating a loss is displayed at the end point in the center. Is displayed, and "○" indicating a hit is displayed at the end point on the right side. That is, when the Bancho icon reaches the special hit "◎", a more advantageous notice effect is performed than when the Bancho icon arrives at "○", and the reliability of the big hit is dramatically increased. It has been suggested that it will increase.

After that, as shown in FIG. 466 (7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the icon of the face of the Bancho has reached the left end point of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the left side where "◎", which is a special hit, is displayed. Then, the characters "Great success" are displayed above the Amida field, and the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and a notice is announced that a certain warning effect will be performed. ing.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (8), the characters "Attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the hold change and the first hold icon. The hold change animation is started at h11, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 466 (9), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the princess character, and the pre-reading notice display mode is the reserved reservation. That is, in this production example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain advance notice effect due to a special hit as a result of the Amidakuji mini-game. In addition, the characters "Premier pending" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the pre-reading notice has been given due to the display of the reserved reservation. As a result, the player may be expected to be a big hit in the symbol variation display corresponding to the secured retention. The display mode of the hold icon h11 may be changed after the display mode of the hold icon h11 is changed, or the character display of the hold icon h11 may be performed after the character display of the hold icon h11 is performed. It may be changed, or the character display of "this secured stay" may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes. In this production example, when the premier hold is displayed, the notice display using the hold icon is not performed, so that it may be possible to prevent the production from becoming redundant. , Even when the premier hold is displayed, the notice display using the hold icon may be performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (10), it is shown that the mini-game of Amidakuji is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (11), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (12), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (13), a third stop is performed, "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 466 (14). As shown, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. In addition, the character display of "premier hold" displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is also deleted at this timing. It should be noted that the symbol may be erased before the final display is performed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (15), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and the third hold icon h13 is the second. Moves to the display position of the hold icon h12 of, and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 466 (16) shows that the Amidakuji mini-game is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 466 (17) to 467 (20) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 466 (16) to 467 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 466 (3) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the mini-game may be played in a state where the variable icon indicating the jackpot confirmation (the variable icon of the display mode of the secured stay) is displayed. The mini-game may not be played while the variable icon indicating the jackpot confirmation is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (21), the hold change animation is started at the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12, respectively, and the hold change animation of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 is started. It is notified that the display mode may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 467 (22), the display modes of the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 change from the default display mode to the hold icon of the group notice suggestion, which is the display mode of Sabohani. In addition, the characters "group notice" are also displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the Sabohani group notice may occur after that. In this production example, since the two hold icons are changed to the hold icons of the group notice suggestion, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the Sabohani group notice will occur.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (23), it is shown that the mini-game of Amidakuji is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged and displayed. At this time, the characters "waiting for group" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the Sabohani group notice will occur after that.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (24), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (25), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 467 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (27), a Sabohani group notice is given in which a large amount of Sabohani characters SBHN cross. This Sabohani group notice is a notice with high expectations for big hits. That is, it can be said that when the Sabohani group notice is given, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the Sabohani group notice is not given. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (27), a strong Sabohani group notice is given. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "SP development!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system will shift to super reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (28) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the main character's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other.

After that, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (29).

After that, as shown in FIG. 467 (30), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 467 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 467 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 change from the display mode of Sabohani to the default display mode at the timing when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. The timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon may be the timing before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the timing after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, or the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be the timing to do.

In this way, in this production example, both the mini-game in which the look-ahead notice is held and changed and the mini-game in which the hold change is performed as the notice display regarding the running symbol change display are both mini-games of the ghost leg. It has been shown to be achieved by a variety of mini-games. As a result, it is difficult to determine which advance notice will be given depending on the type of mini-game, and it is not known until the end whether it is a look-ahead notice or a notice regarding the display of symbol fluctuations being executed, so give a sense of expectation. May be possible.

FIG. 468 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 469 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 468. It is a figure which shows step by step. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 468 (1) to (15) are the same as those in FIGS. 464 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 468 (16) shows that the Amidakuji mini-game is started. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 468 (17) to 469 (20) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 468 (16) to 469 (20) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 464 (3) to (7), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 469 (21), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the hold change, and the first hold icon h11. The hold change animation is started, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 469 (22), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the panda display mode, resulting in a chance hold which is a look-ahead notice display mode. That is, in this production example, an example is shown in which a change in the display mode of the hold icon is performed as a certain advance notice effect due to a hit as a result of the Amidakuji mini-game. Then, in this production example, as a result of the mini-game of Amidakuji, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed, but a pre-reading notice is given instead of a notice display regarding the running symbol change display. It is shown that it is being broken.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 469 (23), it is shown that the mini-game of Amidakuji is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged and displayed. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "chance hold" are displayed, and it is notified that the first hold icon h11 has changed to chance hold.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 469 (24), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 469 (25), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 469 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. After that, as described above, for example, after the normal reach or the super reach is performed, the combination display result of the decorative symbol is derived, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 470 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 470 (1) to (15) are the same as those of FIGS. 466 (1) to (15), the description thereof will be omitted.

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 470 (16) is first stopped, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 470 (17), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, a reach state is formed, and then the reach effect is started. After that, as described above, for example, after the normal reach or the super reach is performed, the combination display result of the decorative symbol is derived, but the description thereof will be omitted here.

As described above, in this effect example, as compared with the effect examples shown in FIGS. 464 to 465, the reserved icon other than the secured icon is a variable icon rather than the symbol variation display executed in which the reserved icon is a variable icon. It is shown that the symbol variation display executed in the above way is more likely to change the display mode of the hold icon as a notice of the symbol variation display being executed.

FIG. 471 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 471 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 471 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 471 (1), one hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and is displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is the decorative symbol display device 208. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center and is displayed as the variable icon h0. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (3) shows that the mini game is started. Specifically, it shows that the Amidakuji mini-game has started. At this time, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper left corner and displayed in a reduced size. Then, the icon of Bancho's face appears in the Amida field, showing that it is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting the operator to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon of the Bancho. In addition, the words "Mini game!" Are displayed at the top of the Amida field, and the Bancho's face icon BCHO is also displayed at the upper left of the display screen, indicating that the Amida lottery mini game is being executed. I am informing you. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "chance" are displayed together with a question mark, suggesting that the expectation of a big hit will increase depending on the result of the mini game. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 471 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 471 (4) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 466 (4) to (7), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (8), although it was a special hit in the Amidakuji mini-game, there is no hold icon, that is, the target for displaying the notice is not displayed. ..

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (9), the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged and displayed, and the characters "Great success stock in stock" are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. .. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Increase hold" are displayed, and if the number of hold is increased in a certain period (for example, 5 seconds: great success stock period), the hold icon is displayed. It is suggested that a notice display using is performed.

After that, when one game ball wins in the first special figure start port 230 during the great success stock period, the first hold icon h11 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (10). At this time, the first hold icon h11 is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed in the display mode of "heat", and is a hold icon in the display mode of "heat" constituting the hold icon of the intense heat notice. Or, it is not possible to know whether it is the hold icon of the display mode of "heat" that constitutes the hold icon of the choi heat notice. That is, it is not possible to know which notice is the hold icon until the first special figure start port 230 is further won by one game ball and the second hold icon h12 is displayed. It has become.

After that, when one more game ball wins in the first special figure start port 230 during the great success stock period, the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (11). At this time, the second hold icon h12 is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed in the "extreme" display mode, and at this time, it becomes clear that the hold icon is the intense heat notice. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the reliability of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display is dramatically high.

After that, when one more game ball wins in the first special figure starting port 230 during the great success stock period, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (12) displays the third hold icon h13. At this time, the third hold icon h13 is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed in the display mode of Copanda, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that in the case where only the hold icon of the intense heat notice is displayed. Is suggested.

After that, for example, after a reach effect (not shown), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 471 (13), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It shows how it is being done. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 471 (14), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are changed from the notice display mode to the default display mode at the timing when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. As shown in FIG. 471 (13'), during the period in which the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5", the display mode of "Geki" is the first. The second hold icon h12 and the first hold icon in the display mode of "heat" are changed to the display mode of "this" and the display mode of "certain", respectively, to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. May be good.

In this way, in this production example, if there is a start prize during the great success stock period that starts as a special hit in the Amidakuji mini game, the hold icon will not be displayed in the default display mode and will be announced. It is shown that it is displayed in the display mode of.

Further, in this production example, for example, after the mini-game starts, the game ball wins a prize at the first special figure start port 230 and the hold icon of the default display mode is displayed, and then the result of the special hit mini-game. When is derived, the default hold icon may be changed to the display mode of "heat" constituting the hold icon of the intense heat notice, for example, when the hold change animation is started. That is, when the hold icon of the default display mode is started to be displayed after the mini game is started and the result of the mini game is derived after that, the hold icon of the default display mode corresponds to the result of the mini game. The display mode may be changed as a notice display.

FIG. 472 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 473 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 472. It is a figure which shows step by step. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 472 (1) to (10) are the same as those of FIGS. 471 (1) to (10), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 472 (11), the first stop is performed during the great success stock period, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner. The first special figure start port 230 did not win a prize, and at the timing shown in FIG. 472 (11), only the first hold icon h11 of the "heat" display mode was displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 472 (12), the second stop is performed during the great success stock period, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 472 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues. Even at the timing shown in FIG. 472 (13), there is no prize in the first special figure start port 230, and only the first hold icon h11 in the "heat" display mode is displayed. In this production example, when the reach production is started, the great success stock period ends, but how long the great success stock period should be can be appropriately set. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 472 (14) to (17) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 472 (14) to (17) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 467 (27) to (30), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 472 (18), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. Further, at this time, the hold icon display area and the variable icon display area are redisplayed, but the first hold icon h11 has changed from the "heat" display mode to the default display mode. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 473 (19) following FIG. 472 (18), the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

As described above, in this production example, in the production in which the result of the mini game becomes a special hit and the notice display by the hold icon is performed by increasing the number of holds, a sufficient number is used to display the notice by the hold icon. An example of the effect to be performed when the number of pending items is not reached is shown.

FIG. 474 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (1), the combination of decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 474 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 474 is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, the hold icon of special figure 1 is displayed.

In FIG. 474 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and both are displayed in the default display mode. On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 2 is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is a decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 Is displayed as. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (3) shows that the Amidakuji mini-game is started. At this time, the decorative pattern is moved to the upper left corner and displayed in a reduced size. Then, the icon of Bancho's face appears in the Amida field, showing that it is located in the middle of the three options. In addition, the character "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting the operator to operate the operation key unit 137 to select one of the three options for the face icon of the Bancho. In addition, the words "Mini game!" Are displayed at the top of the Amida field, and the Bancho's face icon BCHO is also displayed at the upper left of the display screen, indicating that the Amida lottery mini game is being executed. I am informing you. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "chance" are displayed together with a question mark, suggesting that the expectation of a big hit will increase depending on the result of the mini game. After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 474 (4) to (7) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 474 (4) to (7) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 466 (4) to (7), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (8), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the hold change, and the first hold icon h11. The hold change animation is started, and it is notified that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change.

Then, as shown in FIG. 474 (9), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the “heat” display mode. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 474 (9), the second hold icon h12 is not displayed, and it is a hold icon of the display mode of "heat" constituting the hold icon of the intense heat notice, or the choi heat notice. It is not possible to know whether it is a hold icon in the display mode of "heat" that constitutes the hold icon of. Therefore, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is displayed together with the display of "!", Which is arousing a sense of expectation as to which notice display is used. That is, the effect mode when the number of hold icons is smaller than the number of hold icons used as the notice display is shown.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (10), it is shown that the mini-game of Amidakuji is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (11), the characters "increase hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and when the number of hold is increased, a notice using the hold icon is used. It is suggested that the display will be done.

After that, when one game ball wins the first special figure start port 230, the second hold icon h12 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (12). At this time, the second hold icon h12 is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed in the "extreme" display mode, and at this time, it becomes clear that the hold icon is the intense heat notice. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the reliability of the jackpot in the running symbol variation display is dramatically high.

After that, when one more game ball wins in the first special figure start opening 230, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (13) displays the third hold icon h13. At this time, the third hold icon h13 is not displayed in the default display mode, but is displayed in the display mode of Copanda, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher than that in the case where only the hold icon of the intense heat notice is displayed. Is suggested.

After that, for example, after a reach effect (not shown), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 474 (14), a temporary stop due to shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". It shows how it is being done. At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. After that, as shown in FIG. 474 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted. Further, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are changed from the notice display mode to the default display mode at the timing when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 475 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 476 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 475. It is a figure which shows step by step. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 475 (1) to (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 464 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (3), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the hold change, and the first hold icon h11, It is notified that the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13, respectively, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 may change. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 475 (4), it is shown that the character "da" is added to the first hold icon h11 displayed in the default display mode. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of "da". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the characters "what", suggesting that some kind of notice display using the hold icon may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (5), it is shown that the character "mi" is added to the second hold icon h12 displayed in the default display mode. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of "only". Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "!!" is displayed, which continues to suggest that some kind of notice display using the hold icon may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (6), it is shown that the character "A" is added to the third hold icon h13 displayed in the default display mode. That is, it can be said that the display mode of the third hold icon h13 has changed from the default display mode to the display mode of "A". As a result, the characters "Amida" are formed by the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13, and the characters "Amidakuji" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM. , Foretells that the Amidakuji mini-game will start in the running symbol variation display.

Then, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (7), the characters "Amidakuji stock" are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen together with the icon of the face of the chief, and later, the mini game of Amidakuji is started. It has been announced in advance.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (8), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (9), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 475 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (11), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "SP development!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system will shift to super reach. In addition, on the right side of the reach pattern, the enlarged display of the Bancho's face icon BCHO is displayed instead of the display of "Amidakuji Stock" with the Bancho's face icon, and the Amidakuji mini-game continues. Is announced in advance.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (12) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed to notify the content of the reach effect being executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (13), a freeze effect is performed in which the super reach effect is interrupted and the CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display is dimmed as if the power was turned off. The situation is shown. When the freeze effect is started, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed.

When the freeze effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (14) shows that the mini-game of Amidakuji is being explained. Specifically, the characters "Amidakuji Chance" are displayed along with the icon BCHO of the Bancho's face, and it is notified that a mini game by Amidakuji will be started. Also, in the center of the display screen, the Amida field is displayed, and it is also shown that the icon of the face of the Bancho is placed in the middle of the three options in this Amida field. Also, below the Amida field, when you reach the triangle mark, "normal cut-in" is displayed, when you reach the circle mark, "strong cut-in" is displayed, and when you reach the double circle mark, "premier cut-in" is displayed. It is notified that it will be displayed.

Subsequently, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 475 (15) shows that the Amidakuji mini-game is started. At this time, the word "Choose" is displayed below the Amida field, prompting you to operate the operation key unit 137 and select one of the three options for the face icon of the Bancho. ..

After that, when the right button of the operation key unit 137 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 475 (16), the icon of the face of the chief who was located in the middle of the three options in the Amida field is displayed. Move to the right of the three options. After that, when the operation valid period of the operation key unit 137 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 475 (17), the production of the ghost leg is started as shown in FIG. 475 (18), and the icon of the bancho's face is displayed on the ghost leg. Move on the line according to the rules. At this time, the results are displayed at each of the three end points of the Amida field, a circle (“○”) is displayed at the end point on the left side, and a triangle mark is displayed at the end point in the center. , A double circle (“◎”) is displayed at the end point on the right side.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 476 (19) following FIG. 475 (18), it is shown that the icon of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the left side of the three end points. That is, it is shown that the result of the mini game by Amidakuji was derived. In this production example, it is shown that the icon of the face of the Bancho has reached the end point on the left side where "○" is displayed. Then, the characters "strong cut-in confirmed!" Are displayed below the Amida field, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is notified in advance.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 476 (20), it is shown that the production of the super reach (swordsman reach) is resumed.

After that, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 476 (21). That is, it is shown that the result of the Amidakuji mini-game is reflected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 476 (22), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the screen in which the hero's lord defeated the swordsman who played the enemy role and won is displayed, and in the substantially center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the middle The "decoration 5" to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the symbol, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5" is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 476 (23), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 5-Decoration 5". At this time, the characters "Yatte" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a big hit will occur. At this time, the hold icon display area and the variable icon display area are redisplayed, but the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are all displayed by default from the display mode of "Amida". It has changed to a mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 476 (24), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 5-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing stepwise another pattern of the effect following FIG. 465 (25). In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. The effects shown in FIGS. 477 (26) to (30) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 465 (26) to (30), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 477 (31), it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5". At this time, the character "sorry" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the display result of the loss is obtained. Further, at this time, the display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, but in this production example, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon displayed in the display mode of the Choi heat notice are displayed. The display of h12 is resumed in the display mode of the Choi heat notice instead of the default display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 477 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 477 (33), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Here, in this production example, the first hold icon h11 of the "heat" display mode constituting the notice display of the choi heat notice changes after being changed to the chance hold display mode which is the display mode of the panda. The icon display area is moved, and the second hold icon h12 in the "choi" display mode is changed to the default display mode, and then moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11. The display mode of the hold icon (variable icon) may be changed after the hold icon movement animation is completed, or the display mode of the hold icon (variable icon) may be changed during the execution of the hold icon movement animation. May be done. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

The timing at which the display mode of the hold icon is changed is not limited to that described above, and for example, as shown in FIG. 477 (31'), the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5" is used. When the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is started and the display of the fluctuation icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, the first hold icon h11 is changed from the "heat" display mode to the chance hold display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 477 (32'), it may be confirmed and displayed by the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 5-Decoration 6-Decoration 5".

As described above, in this production example, after the notice display using the hold icon is performed, the hold icon on which the notice display is performed is changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice.

FIG. 478 is a diagram stepwise showing another example of the notice display effect using the hold icon executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 479 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 478. 480 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 479 in a stepwise manner, and FIG. 481 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 480 stepwise. Is. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses. Since FIGS. 478 (1) to (2) are the same as those in FIGS. 464 (1) to (2), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (3), the characters "attention to hold" are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM to call attention to the hold change, and the first hold icon h11, It is notified that the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12 and the third hold icon h13, respectively, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 may change. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 478 (4), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 changes from the default display mode to the bowling pin display mode, and then the bowling mini. Foretelling that the game may start. In addition, a question mark is added in the vicinity of the navigation character YM along with the characters "what", suggesting that some kind of advance notice will be produced. In this production example, it is suggested that at least the number of bowling mini-games corresponding to the number of changes in the bowling pins is played. That is, in this production example, since the three hold icons have changed from the default display mode to the bowling pin display mode, it is suggested that at least three bowling mini-games are performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (5), a bowling icon BOWL in which a plurality of bowling pins are arranged in a pyramid shape is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the bowling mini-game starts. It is announced that it will be done.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (6), it is shown that the decorative symbol is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (7), a bowling mini-game is started. Specifically, when the bowling mini-game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the ball rolls on the lane toward ten bowling pins arranged in a pyramid shape. Depending on whether or not a strike is obtained, it is notified whether the result of the mini-game is a winning result or a losing result.

After that, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (8), all 10 bowling pins fell down and the characters "Strike!" Were displayed, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Yeah!" Is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the mini game is a winning result. Then, the replay icon RPL is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and it is also notified that the advance notice effect performed by the result of the bowling mini-game is a pseudo-ream effect. The replay icon RPL may be displayed after the mini-game result is derived, the mini-game result may be derived after the replay icon RPL is displayed, or the mini-game. The replay icon RPL may be displayed at the timing when the result of is derived.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (9), it is shown that the bowling mini-game is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged. The bowling icon BOWL is still displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (10), since one bowling mini-game has ended, it is shown that the hold change animation is started at the third hold icon h13.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (11), when the hold change animation ends, it is shown that the third hold icon h13 changes from the bowling pin display mode to the default display mode.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (12), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, and the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-replay symbol RP-decoration 6" is displayed, and is pseudo. It is informed that a continuous production will be performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 478 (13), the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "x2" indicating the number of times that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is started by the pseudo-ream is displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (14), the decorative symbol is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size, and then, as shown in FIG. 478 (15), the second bowling mini-game is started. To. Even in this bowling mini-game, if a strike is obtained and a winning result is obtained, a pseudo-continuous production is performed. In addition, when a strike is acquired in this bowling mini-game and the result is a hit, it may be notified that a notice effect other than the pseudo continuous effect is performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (16), a state in which the nine bowling pins have fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one bowling pin remains without falling, and the word "sorry" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, indicating that the result of the mini game is a result of loss. It has been notified.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (17), it is shown that the bowling mini-game is finished and the decorative symbol is moved to the center and enlarged. The bowling icon BOWL is still displayed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 478 (18), since the second bowling mini-game has ended, it is shown that the hold change animation is started at the second hold icon h12.

As shown in FIG. 479 (19) following FIG. 478 (18), when the hold change animation ends, in this production example, the second hold icon h12 has a chance to change from the bowling pin display mode to the panda display mode. It is shown that the display mode of the hold is changed. As described above, in this effect example, it is shown that the hold icon displayed as the notice display regarding the symbol variation display during execution may be changed to the display mode of the look-ahead notice. In this production example, the hold icon after the change displays a big hit notice in the corresponding symbol variation display (chance hold display mode), but it may be executed in the corresponding symbol variation display, for example. It may be something that announces the content of a certain effect (for example, the type of reach to be executed, the type of mini-game, the advance item, etc.). In this case, when the fluctuation time in the symbol variation display started before the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode has changed is a predetermined variation time (for example, the variation corresponding to the loss without reach). The display mode of the look-ahead notice may be changed only when the time or the fluctuation time corresponding to the normal reach loss is used. In addition, by changing the display mode from the bowling pin to the one that displays the start of another mini-game as a notice, it is possible to display the notice that another mini-game will be started in the running symbol variation display. Alternatively, a notice may be displayed indicating that another notice effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a timer advance effect, etc.) will be started.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (20), after "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, "reach" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and the reach state is displayed. You will be notified that it has become. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (21), it is shown that the weak Sabohani group notice, in which the number of Sabohani SBHNs is smaller than that of the above-mentioned strong Sabohani group notice, is performed. This weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than when the Sabohani group notice is not given, but is less reliable than when the strong Sabohani group notice is given. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "SP development!" Are displayed, and it is notified that the transition to super reach is performed. At this time, the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are deleted.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (22) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the hero's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed to notify the content of the reach effect being executed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (23), it is shown that the super reach effect is interrupted and the freeze effect is performed. In addition, a balloon showing a suspicious appearance is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, suggesting that the advance notice effect may be started.

When the freeze effect is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (24) shows that the third bowling mini-game is started. In this bowling mini-game, if a strike is obtained and a hit result is obtained, a strong cut-in image CI1a or a premier cut-in image will be displayed in the super reach effect. In addition, when the result is a hit, a notice display other than the display of the cut-in image may be performed.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (25), a state in which the nine bowling pins have fallen is shown. That is, it is shown that one bowling pin remains without falling, and the word "sorry" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen, and in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, "sorry! "Is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the mini game is the result of a loss.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (26), it is shown that the production of the super reach (swordsman reach) is resumed.

Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (27), the bowling mini-game was played a number of times (three times) corresponding to the number of bowling pins (three) indicated by the hold icon. , The bowling icon BOWL is erased, the icon erase animation is started, and then the bowling icon BOWL is erased as shown in FIG. 479 (28).

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (29) shows that the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed in response to the fact that the result of the loss was derived in the third bowling mini-game.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (30), the screen in which the main character's lord is defeated by the swordsman who plays the enemy role is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. The scheduled "decoration 6" is displayed, and it is notified that the scheduled display will be stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5".

After that, as shown in FIG. 479 (31), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is shown that the temporary stop due to the shaking fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". There is. Further, at this time, the display of the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area is resumed, but the first hold icon h11 displayed in the bowling pin display mode has changed to the default display mode. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 479 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (33), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, is displayed as the first hold icon h11, and the third hold icon h13 is the second. Moves to the display position of the hold icon h12 of, and is displayed as the second hold icon h12. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (34), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 6" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (35), the second stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. In addition, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 479 (36), a third stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, a temporary stop is performed due to shaking fluctuation, and then in FIG. 479 (36). As shown in FIG. 480 (37) that follows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 6-Decoration 5-Decoration 5" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 480 (38), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h12 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h11, and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the first hold icon h11, which is the display mode of the look-ahead notice, becomes the variable icon h0, which is the notice display mode related to the symbol variation, by moving to the variable icon display area without changing the display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 480 (39), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 480 (40), the second stop is performed, "decoration 5" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and a reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 480 (41), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "reach" in the lower center of the display screen, and notifies that the reach state has been reached. On the other hand, in the middle design, the variable display of the decorative design continues.

After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 480 (42), it is shown that the strong Sabohani group notice is being performed. At this time, the reach symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner, and the variable icon display area and the hold icon display area are erased. In addition, the characters "SP development!" Are displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the system will shift to super reach. At this time, the enlarged display of the Bancho's face icon BCHO is displayed on the right side of the reach pattern to notify that the Amidakuji mini-game will start. In this production example, a pattern is shown in which the notice display of the mini game using the hold icon is not performed during the execution of the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed to the one that displays the notice. Even in this case, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed to display the notice of the mini game.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 480 (43) develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the main character's lord and the swordsman who plays the enemy face each other. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the characters "Swordsman Reach" are displayed to notify the content of the reach effect being executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 480 (44), after the freeze effect is performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 480 (45) to 481 (55) are performed. Since the effects shown in FIGS. 480 (44) to 481 (55) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 475 (13) to 476 (24), the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in this production example, it is shown that the display mode of the hold icon is foretelling that one of a plurality of types of mini-games will be started. More specifically, when one or more hold icons change to the bowling pin display mode, the bowling mini-game is announced to start in the running symbol variation display, and a predetermined number ( In this production example, it is shown that "A", "Mi", and "Da" are displayed side by side by the three) hold icons, foretelling that the Amidakuji mini-game will start. There is. By changing the display mode of the hold icon, it may be announced that another mini-game (for example, a treasure chest mini-game) will be started.

Further, in this production example, when the start notice of the bowling mini-game due to the change in the display mode of the hold icon is given, the bowling mini-game is performed the number of times corresponding to the number of the hold icons changed in the bowling display mode. It is shown. Needless to say, it can also be applied to other mini games. In addition, the display mode of a plurality of (for example, three) hold icons is changed (changed to "a", "mi", and "da") to give a notice of the start of one mini-game (Amidakuji mini-game). Is also shown.

It is also shown that after changing the display mode of the hold icon to give a notice of the start of the mini-game, a notice is displayed to change the display mode of at least a part of the hold icon to perform another notice effect. (For example, the display mode of the bowling pin is changed to the display mode of chance hold (look-ahead notice), etc.). In addition, the notice display may be a notice regarding the symbol change display being executed, or may be a look-ahead notice.

In addition, after changing the display mode of the hold icon to give a notice of the start of the mini-game and ending the corresponding mini-game, the display mode of the hold icon becomes the default display mode in the running symbol variation display. It has also been shown to change.

In this production example, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed when the Amidakuji mini-game is executed and the result is lost, rather than when the boring mini-game is executed and the result is lost. It is easier to display, and the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the boring mini-game is executed and the result is a hit than when the Amidakuji mini-game is executed and the result is a loss. The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the Amidakuji mini-game is executed and the result is a hit than when the mini-game is executed and the result is a hit. The reliability of the jackpot can be set as appropriate without limitation.

Further, in this production example, the start of the mini-game is notified by changing the display mode of the hold icon in some of the symbol variation displays that are lost in addition to the symbol variation display that is a big hit. However, it may be executed only in the symbol variation display which is a big hit. In addition, a part of the display modes of the plurality of types of hold icons for displaying the notice that the notice effect will be performed may be displayed only when a big hit occurs.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example of executing a treasure chest mini-game, a boring mini-game, and an Amidakuji mini-game as mini-games has been described, but other mini-games described so far may be executed. Needless to say.

<< Fifth Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, other game consoles applicable to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 482 to 490. In the description of FIGS. 482 to 490, the same reference numerals as those in the above-described embodiment will be used for the same functional configuration, and detailed description will be omitted.

FIG. 482 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the fifth embodiment as viewed from the front. The game board 200 can be applied to any of the first to fourth embodiments described so far. For convenience of explanation, for the pachinko machine 100 to which the game board shown in FIG. 482 is attached, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289 will be referred to. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate directions in a state where the pachinko machine 100 is fixed at the installation location. The arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-rear direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side may be referred to as the front or the front, and the back side may be referred to as the back or the rear. The arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand may be referred to as the right in front view. The arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the vertical direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher one may be referred to as upper and the lower one may be referred to as lower.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Various structures can be adopted for the mounting structure of the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, the front left side portion 200a of the game board 200 is inserted into the front view left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the main body 104, and here. It is possible to adopt a structure in which the game board 200 is rotated around the center of rotation and the right side portion 200b of the game board 200 is pressed against the main body 104 to be set. Such a structure can improve workability. In some cases.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is made of resin, for example, and its surface (front surface) constitutes a decorative surface on which a character or the like of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by pasting a sheet on which a character of the pachinko machine 100 or the like is printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is arranged at the lower right of the main body 201. When it is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, notification by an image or sound, game stop that makes it impossible to continue the game, etc.) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may be another fraud detection sensor such as a magnetic sensor. Further, in the present embodiment, a status indicator STDP is attached to the lower right front surface of the main body 201 in a manner visible to the player. The status display STDP is a modularized display in which 4-digit 7-segment LEDs are arranged one above the other, and whether or not the accessory ratio (YH) and continuous accessory ratio (RY) are equal to or less than a predetermined ratio. It is an indicator to notify. The status indicator STDP is composed of, for example, a single-color LED of red, but may be capable of emitting light in three colors of red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. The state indicator STDP may not be provided at a position visible to the player, but may be provided at another position, for example, mounted on the main board 156. The detailed configuration of the status indicator STDP will be described later.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A part of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached to and detached from the main body 104. Of the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a for guiding the launched game ball.

Areas other than the game area 124 of the game board 200 may be referred to as non-game areas. The gaming area 124 and the non-gaming area can be distinguished from each other with the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Further, the area inside the area through which the game ball passes with the firing intensity of the game ball maximized can be called at least the game area 124. The game area 124 may include an area through which the game ball does not pass due to the presence of the effect device or the like in the game area 124. The game area 124 may be called a flow-down area at the point where the game ball flows down during the game, and the non-game area may be called the non-flow-down area at the point where the game ball does not flow down during the game except for maintenance and accidents. The entire area of the game area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but an area in which the game ball does not flow down due to the presence of the effect device or the like may be referred to as a non-flow-down area.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. Below the game area 124, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the like. Are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative symbol and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games held, and in this embodiment, holding up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of special figure changing games. It is possible. Further, the second special symbol holding lamp 220 is a lamp for indicating the number of special figure changing games being held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure changing games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible.

If it is possible to set a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur, a high-probability middle lamp may be provided as the game state. This lamp is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high-probability state. It may be turned on when it is turned on, and turned off when it is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, general winning openings 226a and 226b, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232A, A 232B and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged.

One or a plurality of general winning openings 226a and 226b are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 124, respectively. Here, the general winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening arranged on the right side of the game area 124 is referred to as a general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters the general winning openings 226a and 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and assuming that the general winning openings 226a and 226b have won a prize, the payout device 152 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, 10). Is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a prize ball. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226a and the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 226b are detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, it may be detected by different ball detection sensors. Further, when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the game area 124, even if the ball passages for guiding the entered game balls are merged and detected by one common ball detection sensor. Alternatively, it may be detected by different ball detection sensors. The balls that have entered the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200. One is arranged in. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the first special figure starting port 230, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting to the right. Further, in the present embodiment, the second special figure start port 232A and the ball entry port, which will be described later, are common, and the game ball that has entered the common ball entry port by a distribution device (not shown) is the first special figure. The starting port 230 and the second special drawing starting port 232A are configured to be alternately distributed. Then, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232A or 232B is used, the winning or failing judgment is performed according to the order of winning, and the special drawing 1 and the special figure 1 and the special figure are determined according to the result of the hit / fail judgment. It is said that the specifications are such that the fluctuation display of FIG. 2 is performed and the winning order is changed (a pachinko machine having such specifications may be referred to as an "8-holding order machine" or an "8 chance machine"). In the case of such specifications, in the normal game state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), the number of pending symbol fluctuation displays is substantially eight, so the risk of being stopped is reduced and the operation is increased. In some cases.

In the present embodiment, the second special figure starting ports 232A and 232B are provided at two places, and one of them is the second one in which the above-mentioned first special figure starting port 230 and the ball entry port are common. The special figure start port 232A, and the other is the second special figure start port 232B composed of an electric tulip (electric chew). The second special figure start port 232B is arranged below the common ball entry port of the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 230A, and is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. It is impossible for the ball to enter while the member 232a is closed, and when the player wins the game of changing the normal figure and the normal figure display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol, the blade member 232a has a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232A of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. Further, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the second special figure start port 232B, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper plate 126. At the same time as discharging, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. Although the two second special figure start ports 232A and 232B are configured to be detected by different ball detection sensors, they may be configured to be detected by the same ball detection sensor. The balls that have entered the second special figure starting ports 232A and 232B are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the case of the present embodiment, due to the arrangement of the normal drawing start port 228 (by a game nail (not shown)), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the normal drawing start port 228 when hitting left. .. Therefore, in principle, the player does not win the game of changing the normal figure during left-handed hitting, and therefore, in principle, the blade member 232a does not open or close. On the other hand, in the case of hitting to the right, since it is expected that the game ball enters the normal drawing start port 228, the blade member 232a may open and close by winning the normal drawing variable game. That is, while hitting left, there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232A, and there is almost no possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232B, but while hitting right, there is a possibility of winning the second special figure. Although the possibility of winning the starting port 232A is small, it can be said that there is a possibility of winning the second special figure starting port 232B.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. The special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In the present embodiment, the variable winning opening 234, the general winning opening 226b, and other winning openings described later are integrally configured in the winning ball unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with opening / closing mechanisms SH1 and SH2 for opening and closing the ball passage, and a V region RV. A game ball that has passed through the opening / closing mechanisms SH1 and SH2 can enter the V region RV.

Further, in the game area 124, a disk-shaped ball striking direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting opening is provided. There is also an out port 240 for guiding the ball that did not win a prize to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch rod and the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 by passing through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the launching mallet. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 flows downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and starts at the winning openings (general winning openings 226a, 226b, variable winning openings 234). Win a prize at the opening (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232A, 232B), without winning any winning port or start port, or just pass through the normal figure start port 228. Reach the out port 240. Further, in the present embodiment, a discharge ball receiving port (not shown) for receiving all the game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed so as to open upward at the lower side of the space 114 of the main body 104. An out-ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of the game ball received at the discharge ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out-ball detection sensor SWout may be provided on the game board 200 side. All the game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including the game balls discharged from the out port 240 and the game balls winning in various winning openings) are accepted by the discharge ball receiving port and pass through a predetermined discharge passage. It is configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the pachinko machine 100.

Further, the effect device 2 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 124, the effect device 3 is arranged in the lower part, and the effect device 4 is arranged on the left side and the right side, respectively. Behind each effect device 4, an effect device 5 described later is arranged. In the case of this embodiment, these are supported by the main body 104.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 483. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 is a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (two in this circuit). (It is assumed that a counter is built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame opening sensor. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including the lower plate full tank sensor and the above-mentioned out-ball detection sensor SWout, and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the normal symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 for display control and various status display units 328 (for example, clock holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, status indicator) A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of STDP, etc.) and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 and a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the value storage register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure starting ports 232A and 232B, similarly, the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting ports 232A and 232B The value at the timing is latched, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start ports 232A and 232B of the second special figure. The counter corresponding to the start ports 232A and 232B of the second special figure and the built-in counter value storage register are commonly used.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, the game state and the security signal described later) is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Here, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 commands the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600, etc. However, the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, or the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various production data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 of the above is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, in the basic circuit 402, the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the effect button 136) are controlled. The drive circuit 420, the button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of various buttons (details will be described later) of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137, and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the button sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402. , VDP434 (video display processor) that reads out the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. ) And are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400, and this voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment) to the basic circuit 402.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit; not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 404 uses this start signal. When the start signal is input from the output circuit, the game control is started (the first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of various effect devices 224 including the effect devices 2 to 5, a movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the various effect devices 224, and a movable body sensor. A game for controlling a sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal from the 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp 542. The underframe lamp drive circuit 540, the game board lamp drive circuit 530, and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 are connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

Next, the flow of the out-ball detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 484. Here, FIG. 484 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the out-ball detection process. The out-ball detection process is, for example, a process executed as a subroutine in step S215 of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 295.

When the out-ball detection process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the passage of the game ball is detected by the out-ball detection sensor SWout (step S1101). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been ejected from the game board 200. When a game ball wins in each winning opening, counters provided for each winning opening (for example, special figure 1 counter, special figure 2A counter, special figure 2B counter, general left counter, general right counter, which will be described later). , Attacker counter, Fuzu gate counter, etc.). When a plurality of general winning openings 226a are provided, the winnings are counted by the common general left counter regardless of which general winning opening 226a is provided, and when a plurality of general winning openings 226b are provided. No matter which general winning opening 226b is won, the winning is counted by the common general right counter. That is, the total number of winnings of the plurality of general winning openings 226a is represented by the value of the general left counter, and the total number of winnings of the plurality of general winning openings 226b is represented by the value of the general right counter.

When it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected by the out ball detection sensor SWout (step S1101: Yes), the value of the counter 3 stored in the RAM 308 is incremented (+1) (step S1103). The counter 3 is, for example, a counter composed of 4 bytes (32 bits) of data and indicating the number of game balls that have passed through the out ball detection sensor SWout. The value of the counter 3 is a value used for calculating the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the out ball detection sensor SWout has detected the passage of the game ball, that is, if the game ball has not passed through the out ball detection sensor SWout (step S1101: No), the following processing is performed. The out-ball detection process is terminated without performing the process.

Subsequently, the value of the counter 3 is read out, and it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 3 is "60,000" or more (step S1105). This means that in order to properly calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, at least substantially 10 hours (the number of balls that can be fired in 1 minute (100 shots) x 1 hour (60 minutes) x 10 hours = It is premised that more than 60,000 games have been played, but this value can be set as appropriate.

If it is determined that the value of the counter 3 is 60,000 or more (step S1105: Yes), the display monitor switching process is executed (step S1107). The display monitor switching process will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the counter 3 is not 60,000 or more (step S1105: No), the process proceeds to step S1109 without performing the process of step S1107.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in non-electric support (step S1109). Regarding the determination of whether or not the player is in non-electric support, for example, the gaming state flag may be confirmed and the determination may be made based on the low probability state of the normal figure, or the gaming state in which right-handed strike is encouraged. It may be confirmed that the right-handed signal output in the case of is output, and the determination may be made based on the fact that the right-handed signal is not output.

When it is determined that the current gaming state is in non-electric support (step S1109: Yes), the value of the counter 1 stored in the RAM 308 is incremented (+1) (step S1111). The counter 1 is composed of, for example, 4 bytes (32 bits) of data, and counts game balls that have passed through the out-ball detection sensor SWout and are in non-electric support.

Subsequently, as a result of incrementing the value of the counter 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1113). That is, it is determined whether or not the game has been played for substantially 10 minutes during the non-electric support.

If it is determined that the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1113: Yes), the error determination process is executed (step S1119), and then the out ball detection process is terminated. The error determination process will be described later. At this time, the value of the counter 1 may be reset. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1113: No), the out-ball detection process is terminated without executing the error determination process.

Further, in step S1109, if it is not determined that the current gaming state is in non-electric support, that is, if it is determined that it is in electric support (step S1109: No), the counter stored in the RAM 308. The value of 2 is incremented (+1) (step S1115). The counter 2 is composed of, for example, 4 bytes (32 bits) of data, and counts the game balls that have passed through the out ball detection sensor SWout and are in the electric support.

Subsequently, as a result of incrementing the value of the counter 2, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 2 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1117). That is, it is determined whether or not the game has been substantially played for 10 minutes during the electric support.

If it is determined that the value of the counter 2 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1117: Yes), the error determination process is executed (step S1119), and then the out ball detection process is terminated. At this time, the value of the counter 2 may be reset. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the value of the counter 2 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1117), the out-ball detection process is terminated without executing the error determination process.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the non-electric support state to the electric support state, the means for counting the out balls is switched from the counter 1 to the counter 2, but at this time, the value of the counter 1 is not reset. It is configured, and when the means for counting out balls by shifting from the electric support state to the non-electric support state is switched from the counter 2 to the counter 1, the count of the counter 1 is counted from the value before the transition to the electric support state. It will be resumed. The value of the counter 1 may be reset when the gaming state shifts from the non-electric support state to the electric support state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the electric support state to the non-electric support state, the means for counting the out balls is switched from the counter 2 to the counter 1, but at this time, the value of the counter 2 is reset. It is configured as follows. It should be noted that the value of the counter 2 may not be reset when the gaming state shifts from the electric support state to the non-electric support state.

In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the gaming state has changed (for example, ON / OFF of the right-handed signal is detected), the counter 1 and the counter 2 are reset to perform non-electric support or electric support. The error determination process may be performed when it is detected that 1000 out balls have been detected in succession.

Next, the display monitor switching process executed in step S1107 of the out-ball detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 485. Here, FIG. 485 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the display monitor switching process, and FIG. 485 (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the state display STDP in a normal state, which is the same as FIG. FIG. C) is a diagram showing a display mode of the state indicator STDP in an error state, and FIG. 3D is a diagram showing another example of the display mode of the state indicator STDP in the error state. E) is a diagram showing an example of displaying the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the status indicator STDP, and FIG. 5F shows another example of the display mode of the status indicator STDP in the error state. It is a figure.

First, the flow of the display monitor switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 485 (A). As shown in FIG. 485 (B), the status indicator STDP at the time of power-on is the upper limit of the normal value in the 10-hour test firing of the continuous accessory ratio (RY) in the upper 4-digit 7-segment LED. "RY60" indicating 60% is displayed, and "YH70" indicating 70%, which is the upper limit of the normal value in the 10-hour test firing of the accessory ratio (YH), is displayed on the lower 4-digit 7-segment LED. Is also lit in red.

When the display monitor switching process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the value of the counter 3 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1201). That is, after the game has been played for 10 hours or more, the state determination is performed every time the game is played for 10 minutes. Here, if the value of the counter 3 is not a multiple of 1000 (step S1201: No), the display monitor switching process is terminated without executing the following process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the counter 3 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1201: Yes), the continuous accessory ratio (RY) is calculated (step S1203). Here, the continuous winning combination ratio is due to the operation of the winning combination when the winning combination is continuously operated out of the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired (that is, variable winning during the big hit game). It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by opening the mouth 234 and winning a prize. In addition, it may be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning a prize in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls.

As a result of calculating the continuous bonus ratio, it is determined whether or not the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60% (step S1205). When it is determined that the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60% (step S1205: Yes), for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (C), among the four-digit 7-segment LEDs in the upper row of the status indicator STDP. The lower two-digit number portion is blinked and displayed (step S1207), and then a security signal (RY) is output (step S1209), and the process proceeds to step S1211. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal output when the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. As a result, it may be possible to smoothly carry out the type application test of the game machine. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the continuous bonus ratio exceeds 60%, that is, if the continuous bonus ratio is 60% or less (step S1205: No), the processes of steps S1207 and S1209 are executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S1211.

Subsequently, the accessory ratio (YH) is calculated (step S1211). Here, the accessory ratio is the number of game balls (that is, safe balls) to be acquired due to the operation of the accessory (that is, the second special figure start opening 232B and the variable winning opening 234 are opened to win a prize. It refers to the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by doing so. It should be noted that it is the ratio of the number of game balls obtained by winning the variable winning openings 234, the first special drawing starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting openings 232A and 232B, and the general winning openings 226a and 226b to the number of out balls. You may.

As a result of calculating the accessory ratio, it is determined whether or not the accessory ratio exceeds 70% (step S1213). When it is determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70% (step S1213: Yes), the lower two-digit number part of the lower four-digit 7-segment LED of the status display STDP is blinked (step). S1215), after that, a security signal (YH) is output (step S1217), and the display monitor switching process is completed. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal output when the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may be output from the above-mentioned test terminal. On the other hand, when it is not determined that the accessory ratio exceeds 70%, that is, when the accessory ratio is 70% or less (step S1213: No), the processes of steps S1215 and S1217 are not executed. The display monitor switching process ends.

In the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, the predetermined 7-segment LED of the status indicator STDP is blinked. For example, FIG. 485 ( As shown in D), the emission color may be changed.

Further, regardless of whether the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (E), the lower two digits of the upper four-digit 7-segment LED. The continuous accessory ratio calculated by the number part of the above may be displayed, and the accessory ratio calculated by the lower two digit number part of the lower four-digit 7-segment LED may be displayed. In this case, when any of the ratios exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, as shown in FIG. 485 (E), the predetermined 7-segment LED may be blinked, or the emission color may be changed. You may let it.

Further, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, for example, as shown in FIG. 485 (F), all the segments in the status indicator STDP may be turned on. In this case, In, for example, the display mode of the 7-segment LED corresponding to the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeding the upper limit of the normal value is changed to suggest that the corresponding security signal is output. You may. In the state display STDP shown in FIG. 485 (F), it is shown that the display color of the lower 4-digit 7-segment LED is changed because the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, an error is displayed on the status display STDP and the corresponding security signal is output. Even if the lower limit of the normal value of the object ratio and the accessory ratio is set and one of the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio falls below the lower limit of the normal value, an error occurs in the status indicator STDP as described above. It may be displayed and the corresponding security signal may be output. At this time, the lower two-digit number part of the 4-digit 7-segment LED corresponding to the continuous accessory ratio and the accessory ratio below the lower limit of the normal value is displayed as "88" (that is, all lights are lit). , You may be able to recognize that fact. The error display in the status display STDP is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be any display mode as long as it can be recognized that an error has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, the security signal (RY) and the security signal (YH) are output as separate signals, but the same signal may be output. Further, it may be the same as the security signal output when an abnormality in the number of winnings, which will be described later, is determined.

Next, the error determination process executed in step S1119 of the out-ball detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 486. Here, FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the error determination process. In this error determination process, the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) is appropriately referred to, and error determination is performed depending on whether or not the number of winnings in the target winning opening exceeds the comparison value. The error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) includes a non-electric support medium table and an electric support medium table, and the number of out-balls detected, the comparison value of the special figure 1 start port, and the special figure 2 start port, respectively. The comparison value, the left general winning opening comparison value, and the right general winning opening comparison value are stored. The numbers in parentheses in the table indicate the number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won in the winning opening.

When the error determination process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the error determination process is executed with the value of the counter 1 being a multiple of 1000 (step S1301). When it is determined that this error determination process is executed when the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1301: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 counter stored in the RAM 306 (first). The value indicating the number of winnings to the special figure start port 230) is read out, and the special figure 1 start port comparison value in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) (here, since it is in non-electric support, the comparison value is It is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 counter is within the range of the special figure 1 starting port comparison value (that is, “120” or less) with reference to “120” (step S1303).

When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 counter is within the range of the special figure 1 start port comparison value (step S1303: Yes), the value of the special figure 2A counter stored in the RAM 306 (second special figure start port). The value indicating the number of winnings to 232A) is read out, and the special figure 2 starting port comparison value in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) (here, since it is in non-electric support, the comparison value is "120". It is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2A counter is within the range of the special figure 2 starting port comparison value (that is, “120” or less) with reference to (step S1305). In the present embodiment, when hitting left, the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232A are alternately won, and since this is an eight-chance machine, the special figure 1 start port comparison value and the special figure 2 The value is the same as the starting port comparison value.

When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2A counter is within the range of the special figure 2 starting port comparison value (step S1305: Yes), the value of the general left counter stored in the RAM 306 (arranged on the left side of the game area 124). The value indicating the number of winnings to the general winning opening 226a) is read out, and the left general winning opening comparison value in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) (here, since it is in non-electric support, the comparison value is “30”) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the value of the general left counter is within the range of the left general winning opening comparison value (that is, “30” or less) (step S1307).

When it is determined that the value of the general left counter is within the range of the left general winning opening comparison value (step S1307: Yes), after resetting each value of the special figure 1 counter, the special figure 2A counter, and the general left counter (step S1307: Yes). Step S1309), the error determination process is terminated. In addition to these counters, the values of the special figure 2B counter and the general right counter may also be reset. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the inconvenience that the value in the previous right-handed game is added at the start of the right-handed game and the number of winnings cannot be accurately determined.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1303 that the value of the special figure 1 counter exceeds the range of the special figure 1 start port comparison value (step S1303: No), the value of the special figure 2A counter is the special figure 2 start in step S1305. When it is determined that the range of the mouth comparison value is exceeded (step S1305: No), and when it is determined in step S1307 that the value of the general left counter exceeds the range of the left general winning mouth comparison value (step S1307: No). If any of the above is applicable, a security signal is output (step S1311), an error display command is output to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1313), and then the error determination process is terminated. This security signal is a signal different from the above-mentioned security signal (RY) and security signal (YH), and is a signal for notifying that there is an abnormality in the number of winnings to each winning opening, and is information. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the output circuit 336. In this embodiment, the same security signal is output regardless of the winning number abnormality for any winning opening. For example, when the value of the counter 1 becomes a multiple of 1000 and the error determination process is executed. Then, another security signal may be output depending on whether the value of the counter 2 is a multiple of 1000 and the error determination process is executed, or a security signal is set for each winning opening and the number of winnings is set. It may be set so that the security signal corresponding to the winning opening having an error is output. Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error display command, for example, an error display indicating that there is a winning number error may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, it may be possible for the player or the clerk of the game store to recognize that the number of winnings is abnormal.

Further, in step S1301, when it is not determined that this error determination process is executed with the value of the counter 1 being a multiple of 1000, that is, this error determination process is a multiple of 1000 of the value of the counter 2. When it is determined that the error has been executed (step S1301: No), the value of the special figure 2B counter stored in the RAM 306 (value indicating the number of winnings to the second special figure start port 230B). 2B in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) with reference to the special figure 2 starting port comparison value (here, the comparison value is “250” because the electric support is in progress). It is determined whether or not the value of the counter is within the range of the comparison value of the starting port of FIG. 2 (that is, “250” or less) (step S1315).

When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2B counter is within the range of the special figure 2 start port comparison value (step S1315: Yes), the value of the general right counter stored in the RAM 306 (arranged on the right side of the game area 124). The value indicating the number of winnings to the general winning opening 226b) is read out, and the comparison value of the right general winning opening in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A) (here, since the electric support is in progress, the comparison value is ". 25 ”), and it is determined whether or not the value of the general right counter is within the range of the right general winning opening comparison value (that is,“ 25 ”or less) (step S1317). In this embodiment, since there is a difference in the winning rate to the general winning openings 226a and 226b between the left-handed hit and the right-handed hit, a difference is provided between the left general winning opening comparison value and the right general winning opening comparison value. However, they may be the same.

If it is determined that the value of the general right counter is within the range of the right general winning opening comparison value (step S1317: Yes), after resetting each value of the special figure 2B counter and the general right counter (step S1319), an error occurs. The judgment process ends.

On the other hand, in step S1315, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2B counter exceeds the range of the special figure 2 starting port comparison value (step S1315: No), and in step S1317, the value of the general right counter is the right general prize. If it is determined that the range of the mouth comparison value has been exceeded (step S1317: No), the process of step S1311 and step S1313 is executed, and then the error determination process is terminated.

Next, a modification of the error determination table applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 487 (B) to (D). Needless to say, the numerical values set in each table, including the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A), may be set to appropriate numerical values according to factors such as game characteristics and gauge configuration. ..

In the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A), when hitting left, the general winning opening 226b arranged on the right side of the game area 124 hardly wins, and when hitting right, the first special figure starting opening 230 and Since there is almost no winning in the general winning opening 226a arranged on the left side of the game area 124, comparison values have not been set for these, but the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (B) shows instructions. A comparison value may be set for these winning openings in consideration of the case where the game ball is launched contrary to the hitting method. Specifically, "5" is set for the right general winning opening comparison value during non-electric support, and "10" is set for the special figure 1 starting opening comparison value during electric support. , Left general winning opening comparison value is set to "5".

Further, in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (A), the number of winnings is determined by applying the electric support middle table even while the variable winning opening 234 is open (that is, during the big hit game). Like the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (B), a big hit game in-game table applied during the big hit game may be provided. In this case, for example, in addition to the counters 1 to 3 described above, a counter 4 for counting out balls during the big hit game is provided, and when the value of the counter 4 is determined to be a multiple of 800, the counter 4 is used during the big hit game. The table may be referred to, and an error determination may be made for the value of the special figure 2B counter and the value of the general right counter.

Further, in the error judgment table shown in FIG. 487 (A), only the upper limit value is set as the comparison value, but as in the error judgment table shown in FIG. 487 (C), the lower limit value is set in addition to the upper limit value as the comparison value. You may try to do it. For example, in the case of non-electric support, the lower limit of the special figure 1 starting port comparison value is set to "30", the lower limit value of the special figure 2 starting port comparison value is set to "30", and the left general winning opening comparison value is set to "30". 3 ”, when the number of prizes in the first special figure start port 230 is less than 30, or when the number of prizes in the second special figure start port 232A is less than 30 for the launch of 1000 game balls. Alternatively, if the number of winnings in the general winning opening 226a is less than 3, an error is determined, and if the electric support is in progress, the lower limit of the special figure 2 starting opening comparison value is set to "70", and the right general winning opening is set to "70". When the lower limit of the comparison value is set to "5" and the number of winnings to the second special figure starting port 232B is less than 70 for the launch of 1000 game balls, Aui wins the general winning opening 226b. Even if the number is less than 5, it may be determined as an error. In the error judgment table shown in FIG. 487 (C), the lower limit of the comparison value is set only in the necessary places, and when the game is played in the instructed way of hitting, the prize is hardly won. Although the lower limit value is not set for the comparison value corresponding to the mouth, the lower limit value may be set for these comparison values as well.

Further, in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (C), every time the out sphere becomes a multiple of 1000 (that is, the value of counter 1 or counter 2 is a multiple of 1000) regardless of whether it is in non-electric support or electric support. However, the error judgment process shown in FIG. 487 (D) was used, and the out ball was a multiple of 500 (that is, the value of the counter 2 was a multiple of 500) in the electric support. The error determination process may be executed each time. In this case, it may be possible to appropriately perform error determination by setting each comparison value of the electric support middle table to a value approximately half of the value shown in the error determination table shown in FIG. 487 (C). Generally, in an advantageous state such as during electric support, it is difficult for a game store clerk to notice that there is an abnormality in the number of prizes, but when the error judgment table shown in FIG. 487 (D) is used, it is difficult to notice during electric support. Since the error judgment is performed at an earlier interval than during non-electric support, it may be easier to notice an abnormality in the number of prizes.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the presence or absence of an abnormality in the number of winnings is determined every time a certain number of game balls are launched. Therefore, for example, when it is not in an advantageous state such as during non-electric support, a goto or the like is used. It may be possible to prevent the damage from being carried out due to fraud.

In the present embodiment, when the upper limit of the comparison value is exceeded, the winning number is determined to be abnormal, but when the lower limit of the comparison value is exceeded, the winning number is determined to be abnormal. The upper limit value and the lower limit value of the comparison value may be set, and if the range of the upper limit value and the lower limit value is exceeded, the winning number may be determined to be abnormal.

Further, in the present embodiment, the error determination table described above is used to determine the abnormality in the number of winnings, but for example, a predetermined number (for example, 8) is continuously connected to the first special figure starting port 230 when hitting left. If a predetermined number (for example, 8) are continuously won in the 2nd special figure start port 232A, it is judged that the sorting device has a problem and the start port unit error is determined, and the signal output or An error display to that effect may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the ball detection sensor 320 provided in each winning opening, when the ON state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) or more, a ball having a size exceeding the specified size (11 mm) (for example, 500 ms) or more. It is possible to determine that a deca-ball goto-type error has been performed on the assumption that fraud using a so-called deca-ball) has been performed, and display an error to that effect on the signal output or the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, it is also possible to detect the occurrence of so-called grape goto that causes a large number of game balls to stay in a string of beads in a specific place in the game area, and display an error to that effect on the signal output or the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In addition, in a gaming state where left-handed game is recommended, such as during non-electric support, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start port 228, a notification is given to instruct left-handed, and right-handed, such as during electric support. When a game ball wins a prize in the first special figure start port 230 in the game state in which the game is recommended, a notification instructing a right-handed hit may be given to warn the player. In addition, when there is an excessive prize for the variable winning opening 234 (for example, when 10 game balls win in one round, the door member 234a closes, but when there are 20 prizes, or when there is a door member 234a. An attacker winning excess error has occurred when the passage of 10 game balls is detected during the valid period of the sensor that enables the detection of the ball detection sensor 320 that detects the winning of the variable winning opening 234 after closing. After making a determination, an error display to that effect may be displayed on the signal output or the decorative symbol display device 208.

Next, a modified example of the out-sphere detection process described with reference to FIG. 484 will be described with reference to FIG. 488. Here, FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the flow of the out-ball detection process. In the out-ball detection process shown in FIG. 488, steps S1101 to S1107 in the out-ball detection process shown in FIG. 484 are performed between the time when the out-ball detection process is started and the time when the process in step S1401 is performed. The process is executed, but since the content of the process is the same, the illustration and description will be omitted.

As described above, after the processes of steps S1101 to S1107 are performed, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in non-electric support (step S1401).

When it is determined that the current gaming state is in non-electric support (step S1401: Yes), the value of the counter 1 stored in the RAM 308 is incremented (+1) (step S1403).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error flag 1 stored in the RAM 308 is ON (step S1405). This error flag 1 is a flag that is established when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal in the error determination process described above in FIG. 486, and after the flag is turned on, the state remains until the power is cut off. Be maintained. In addition, it may be updated from ON to OFF when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the flag is turned ON when a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed since it is no longer determined that the number of winnings is abnormal. It may be updated from to OFF. Further, the error flag 1 may not be provided, and it may be determined whether or not a predetermined error condition is satisfied (for example, during output of a security signal).

Then, when it is determined that the error flag 1 is ON (step S1405: Yes), as a result of incrementing the value of the counter 1, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 500 (step S1407). .. That is, if it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal even once, the interval for executing the error determination process is halved thereafter. As a result, the accuracy of determining the abnormal number of winnings may be improved. If it is determined that the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 500 (step S1407: Yes), the error determination process is executed (step S1411), and then the out ball detection process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 500 (step S1407: No), the out-ball detection process is terminated without executing the error determination process. In this embodiment, in the error determination process executed when the value of the counter 1 is determined to be a multiple of 500, the comparison value of each winning opening in the referenced error determination table is halved, and each winning is performed. The value of the counter corresponding to the mouth is compared with the comparison value which is halved, and the winning number abnormality is determined.

Further, in step S1405, when it is not determined that the error flag 1 is ON, that is, when the error flag 1 is OFF (step S1405: No), the value of the counter 1 is incremented, and as a result, the counter 1 It is determined whether the value is a multiple of 1000 (step S1409). Then, when it is determined that the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1409: Yes), the error determination process is executed (step S1411), and then the out ball detection process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the value of the counter 1 is a multiple of 1000 (step S1409: No), the out-ball detection process is terminated without executing the error determination process.

If it is not determined in step S1401 that the current gaming state is in non-electric support, that is, if it is determined that it is in electric support (step S1401: No), the counter stored in the RAM 308. The value of 2 is incremented (+1) (step S1403). After that, the same processing as in steps S1405 to S1411 is performed. In these processes, the contents of the processes are the same as those in steps S1405 to S1411, except that the process related to the counter 1 is replaced with the process related to the counter 2. Therefore, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a specific example of the effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIGS. 489 to 490 are diagrams that stepwise show the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. In FIGS. 489 to 490, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the normal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the normal figure hold lamp 220. The lamp 216 is not shown. In addition, in FIGS. 489 to 490, the pachinko machine 100 configured to include one decorative symbol display device 208 is shown, but as in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 provided with a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. It may be. Further, the above-mentioned transparent light guide plate IL or POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 489 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of an operation when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 490 is a diagram stepwise showing a continuation of an example of the operation shown in FIG. 489. It is a figure which shows. In the figure below, the production progresses in the order of the numbers in parentheses.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (1) shows the state before the jackpot game is completed and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the decoration of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is shown. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. As the background here, for example, a background image during probabilistic change is displayed. Further, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the fourth symbol or the second decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is displayed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 489 (1), the variable icon h0 is not displayed because the symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (1), the character "probability changing" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen, and it is notified that the game state is the probabilistic state. In addition, the characters "right-handed" are displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and a display instructing right-handed is performed.

Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 489 is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the game state is the electric support state. Therefore, the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed on the lower left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon display area of the special figure 1 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the electric support state.

In the hold icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon representing the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed. The number of holds in special figure 2 is represented by the number of hold icons in special figure 2 and the display of the number of second hold, in addition to the number of lights of the hold lamp 220 in special figure 2. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side has the older hold icon.

In FIG. 489 (1), the four hold icons h21, h22, h23, and h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icons h21, h22, h23, h24 of these four special figures 2 are displayed. Are all displayed in the default display mode (square, non-patterned and blue display mode). That is, the default hold icon of the special figure 2 is a square hold icon.

On the other hand, none of the hold icons in Special Figure 1 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (gaming state) shown in FIG. 489 is the electric support state (probability change state), the electric chew is easy to open and the second special figure start port is more than the first special figure start port 230. This is because it is easy to win a prize in 232B.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (gaming state), the hold icon of the special figure that is easier to win in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. I am trying not to display it. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, as shown in FIG. 489 (1), the hold icon of special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of special figure 1 is not displayed. The hold icon of special figure 2 may be displayed in the non-electric support state, or the hold icon of special figure 1 may be displayed in the electric support state.

In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display of the special symbol is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → start or erase of the movement animation of the hold icon → variation start of the decorative symbol, but the order is different. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, since it is in the electric support state, the counter 3 is incremented and the counter 2 is also incremented each time the out sphere is detected by the out sphere detection sensor SWout.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the symbol variation display in the second special symbol display device 214 is started. Is started. Further, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (the hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is the decorative symbol display device. It moves to the variable icon display area formed in the lower center of 208 and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, and the first hold icon h21 The third hold icon h23 moves to the display position of the second hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, and the fourth hold icon h24 displays the third hold icon h23. It moves to the position and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol. The display mode of the variable icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h21, but may be different.

After that, when the second special figure start port 232B is opened and the game ball wins a prize, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (3) displays the fourth hold icon h24. At this time, the fourth hold icon h24 is in the default display mode.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (4), the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped at the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and provisional due to shaking fluctuation is displayed. The stop is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 489 (5), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 6". At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (6), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the symbol variation display in the second special symbol display device 214 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second. Moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23, and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. Is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, after the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is repeatedly performed in the same manner as described above, the value of the counter 2 becomes a multiple of 1000 at the timing shown in FIG. 489 (7), and the winning number is abnormal in the error determination process described above. Is determined, a security signal is output at the timing shown in FIG. 489 (8). In the present embodiment, if it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal again within one hour after it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal, an error is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, FIG. 489 (8) ), Since it is not determined that the number of winnings is abnormal again within 1 hour after it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal (that is, because the number of winnings is abnormal for the first time), the error display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Not done. Further, in the present embodiment, even if it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal, the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed without interruption. The security signal whose output has been started may be continuously output until the error release switch SW100 is operated, or may be continuously output until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. You may do so.

After that, the second special symbol start port 232B is opened, the game ball wins a prize, and after the fourth hold icon h24 is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (9) has the left symbol and the middle symbol. And the right symbol are stopped at the same time, the combination of the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed, and a temporary stop is performed due to the shaking fluctuation. After that, as shown in FIG. 489 (10), the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 208, the combination of the lost decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon h0 is also deleted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (11), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 2 is digested and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the symbol variation display in the second special symbol display device 214 is started. Is started. In addition, the movement animation of the hold icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 is performed, and the hold icon (hold icon that is the target of the symbol change this time) at the display position of the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the change icon display area. It moves and is displayed as the variable icon h0, the second hold icon h22 moves to the display position of the first hold icon h21, is displayed as the first hold icon h21, and the third hold icon h23 is the second. Moves to the display position of the hold icon h22 and is displayed as the second hold icon h22, the fourth hold icon h24 moves to the display position of the third hold icon h23, and is displayed as the third hold icon h23. Is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 has also started variable display of the decorative symbol.

After that, after the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is repeatedly performed in the same manner as described above, the value of the counter 2 becomes a multiple of 1000 at the timing shown in FIG. 489 (12), and the winning number is abnormal in the error determination process described above. Is determined, a security signal is output at the timing shown in FIG. 489 (13). Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 489 (13), since it was determined that the winning number was abnormal again within 1 hour after the winning number was determined to be abnormal, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 489 (13) displayed the winning number error. ERROR is displayed. Winning number error display ERROR is an error display in which the characters "winning number error" and "call a staff member" are displayed together with the auntie character, and tells the player and the clerk of the game store that there was an abnormal winning number. It is for notifying. The winning number error display ERROR is configured so as not to be erased until, for example, the error release switch SW100 provided on the main board 156 is operated. It should be noted that the variation display of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is continuously performed without interruption even after the winning number error display ERROR is displayed.

After that, when the main body 104 is opened by the clerk of the game store and the error release switch SW100 mounted on the main board 156 and exposed from the back side of the main board case 158 is operated as shown in FIG. 489 (14). , As shown in FIG. 489 (15), the winning number error display ERROR is deleted.

After that, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is repeatedly performed in the same manner as described above, and after one hour or more has passed without determining an abnormality in the number of winnings, it is shown in FIG. 490 (16) following FIG. 489 (15). When the value of the counter 2 becomes a multiple of 1000 at the timing and an abnormality in the number of winnings is determined in the above-mentioned error determination processing, a security signal is output at the timing shown in FIG. 490 (17). At the timing shown in FIG. 490 (17), since it is not determined that the number of winnings is abnormal again within 1 hour after it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal, the winning number error display ERROR is not displayed and the security signal is displayed. Only output is done.

In the present embodiment, the time after the winning number abnormality is determined is managed by the count number in the counter 3 (or the counter 2), that is, the counter 3 counts 6000 after the winning number abnormality is determined. Then, assuming that one hour has passed, a time lapse command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 determines that the number of winnings is abnormal by receiving this command. However, it is controlled so that the winning number error display ERROR is not displayed. It should be noted that the time management after the abnormality in the number of winnings is determined may be realized by counting the timer in the first sub-control unit 400.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number abnormality is determined, the winning number error display ERRin shown in FIG. 489 (13) is displayed so as to easily recognize that the winning number is abnormal. For example, as shown in FIG. 490 (13'), "XXX" ("XXX" is identification information composed of alphanumeric characters instead of the character of "winning number error", and the display differs depending on the type of error. The error code ERRinA such as ()) may be displayed so that at least the content of the error cannot be easily recognized by the player. In this way, by displaying the error code, it is possible to notify the degree to which some judgment has been made without treating the cautionary error that there is a possibility of fraud as an error. .. Then, the error code ERRinA shown in FIG. 490 (13') may be deleted as shown in FIG. 490 (14') after 33 seconds have passed by the timer management in the first sub-control unit 400. When displaying the winning number error display ERRin shown in FIG. 489 (13), it may be deleted when 33 seconds have elapsed by timer management. For example, every time an out ball is detected by the out ball detection sensor SWout, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 counts the number of times the command is received. Time management may be performed. Further, the timer management using the timer in the first sub-control unit 400 and the timer management based on the counting result of the out sphere may be used together.

Further, when the lower plate full tank error occurs while the error code ERRinA is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 490 (13 ″), the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 is superimposed on the error code ERRinA. May be displayed, or the lower plate full tank error display ERR1 may be displayed so as to overlap the back side of the error code ERRinA.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing of determining the winning number abnormality is determined by counting the number of out balls, and when it is first determined that the winning number abnormality is determined, an error display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. No, only the security signal is output, and when the number of out balls is counted and the next winning number abnormality is determined, if the winning number abnormality is determined, an error display is displayed together with the security signal output. It is shown how it will be done. In addition, when it is determined that the number of prizes is abnormal, it is determined whether or not it is within 1 hour since the previous determination of the number of prizes is abnormal, and if it is within 1 hour, an error is displayed and 1 hour or more. It is also shown that the error is not displayed when the time has passed.

The display of the winning number error display ERRin as described above is performed based on the error display processing executed by the first sub-control unit 400. Here, FIG. 490 (A) is a flowchart showing the flow of error display processing. This error display processing is executed, for example, as a subroutine in the command processing executed in step S407 of the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 300A.

When the error display process is executed, it is first determined whether or not an error display command has been received from the main control unit 300 (step S1501). When it is determined that the error display command has been received (step S1501: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is within one hour from the previous error (that is, the winning number abnormality) (step S1503). If it is determined that the error is within one hour from the previous error (step S1503: Yes), the display is controlled so that the winning number error display ERROR is displayed (step S1505), and then the error display process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the error display command has been received (step S1501: No), or if it is determined that one hour has passed since the previous error even if the error display command is received (step S1503:). No), the error display process is terminated without performing the process of step S1505.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal, an error display to that effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the user, but the device is notified by means other than the display. For example, it may be notified by the light emission of a lamp (LED), it may be notified by the sound output from the speaker 120, or it may be notified by using a movable body such as various production devices. May be good. Further, the notification may be performed even when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio exceeds the normal value. Further, the game may be stopped when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal, or the game may be stopped when the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio exceeds the normal value.

In addition, the error display displayed when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal is deleted by operating the error release switch SW100 or after a certain period of time, but it is displayed continuously until the power is turned off. Alternatively, it may be displayed even if the power is turned on again unless the RAM is cleared.

Further, in the present embodiment, the error notification when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal is realized by the error display on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the part on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 cannot be visually recognized by the player (for example, the main board 156). Or the first sub-board 160 or the back side of the main body 104, etc.) may be provided with an LED for monitoring, thereby performing notification. Further, when it is determined that the number of winnings is abnormal, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies the error, but it is difficult to specify the type. However, the notification means provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 allows the clerk of the game store to notify the error. The content of the error may be notified in a recognizable manner. With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the fraud deterrent effect in the amusement store by using it in combination with the security signal.

Further, when the winning opening arranged on the right side of the game area 124 is used as the first winning means and the winning opening arranged on the left side of the game area 124 is used as the second winning means, in the present embodiment, the second special feature is used. The starting port 232B and the general winning opening 226b are used as the first winning means, and the first special drawing starting port 230, the second special drawing starting port 232A, and the general winning opening 226a are used as the second winning means. Which winning mouth belongs to the first winning means and which winning opening belongs to the second winning means is a game property (normal game property, 8-chance machine, or 1 type 2 type mixer). Is there, etc.). For example, in the pachinko machine 100, which is not an 8-chance machine but a normal game, the general winning opening 226b and the second special drawing starting port 232 belong to the first winning means, and the general winning opening 226a and the first special drawing starting port 230 will belong to the second winning means.

In addition, it is equipped with a production ball passage detection switch used for production, and is placed at a position where a right-handed game ball always passes. During electric support, a game ball that has passed through this production ball passage detection switch. The number of out balls may be specified by counting the number of out balls.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to detect various errors in the game by counting the passage of the game ball of a ball detection sensor such as the out ball detection sensor SWout, but some errors may be detected. For example, an error determination may be made without using the out-ball detection sensor SWout. For example, for an error of excessive winning for the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232A, 232B, the out-ball detection sensor may be used. The error determination may be performed without using SWout. Further, the number of out-ball counts per minute is determined, and for example, if the number of counts exceeding the upper limit (100 shots / minute) is determined, an error is notified as if an error has been made. Good.

In the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. A game table equipped with a display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice effect in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 310 (1)].
The first display is a certain effect [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 308 (11) to (12), or a notice display due to a change in the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 309 (a5). Decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device, such as lever effect shown in FIG. 309 (c2) and notice by stop display of pine symbol CC as chance symbol shown in FIG. 311 (9fa'). 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the effect display using the mini display device 208P] is a display that notifies the timing of performing.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5)].
The second display is a display for notifying that the timing at which the certain effect is started changes [for example, the navigation in the timer addition effect shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5). "Addition" and "+10 seconds" displayed in the balloon of the character YM],
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5), the timer notice effect on the timer notice display TM1 is performed. When it is broken, a timer is added to the effect, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, even if the first display notifies the time until a certain effect is started, the second display foretells that the time notified will change. Don't just wait for the time to start a certain production, but also enjoy the first display with the expectation that the time may change. You may be able to.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. .. Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

Further, the first display may notify only the timing at which a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing at which a certain effect is performed. Further, the first display may always notify the timing when a certain effect is performed, or may not notify the timing when a certain effect is performed.

In addition, the second display may only foretell that the timing at which a certain effect is started changes, and also foretells other than the change in the timing at which a certain effect is started. It may be one. In addition, the second display may always give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change, or may not give a notice that the timing at which a certain effect is started will change. It may be one.

Further, only the second display may be displayed during the display of the first display, or a display other than the second display may be displayed during the first display. Good. Further, the second display may always be displayed during the display of the first display, or the second display may not be displayed during the display of the first display.

The start of the timer notice display may be the start of the display of the first display or the start of the display of the countdown display (for example, when a number is displayed). (Start, etc.), and the countdown of the countdown display may have started. Further, the end of the timer notice display may mean that the first display is hidden, or the countdown display is hidden (for example, the number is erased and "attention" is displayed. It may be (including the displayed state), it may be that the countdown by the countdown display is completed (for example, 0 is displayed), and the display displayed on the first display after the countdown is completed. (For example, the character display of "attention") may be hidden.

Further, "It is configured so that the display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 310 (2) to (5). After the timer addition effect is performed, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is updated, the time is added on the timer display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the first display.

Here, the display mode of the first display may be changed only after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may be changed after the second display is displayed. The display mode of the display other than the above may be configured to change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be configured to change after the second display is displayed, or the display mode of the first display may change after the second display is displayed. It may be configured so that it may not change.

Even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change, and the display mode of the first display changes only when the second display is displayed. It may change.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
The first display is a display displayed on the first display means.
The second display is a display displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player's line of sight may be concentrated on the first display means until the first display is completed, but by displaying the second display on the second display means as well. , It may be possible to focus on both of the two display means without focusing the line of sight only on the first display means.

Here, the display means may be composed of only the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured to include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. .. Further, the display means may be configured to always include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means. May be good.

Further, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or may be displayed on other than the first display means. Further, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the second display may be displayed only on the second display means, or may be displayed on other than the second display means. Further, the second display may be always displayed on the second display means, or may not be displayed on the second display means.

Further, "The second display means is arranged on the front side of the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (A1), the sub display device 208S is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Located on the side, etc.],
The first display means may overlap with the second display means on which the second display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 314 (A2) to (A3). , The decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps with the sub display device 208S on which the timer is added.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the second display means may overlap with the first display means while displaying the second display, so that the second display is noticed and a certain effect is started. It may be possible to make it easier to recognize that the time to reach may change.

Here, depending on the second display means on which the second display is displayed, only the first display means may overlap, or the second display on which the second display is displayed may overlap. Depending on the display means, display means other than the first display means may also overlap. Further, the first display means may be overlapped by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display means on which the second display is displayed may cause the first display means to overlap. One display means may not overlap.

Further, the first display means may be overlapped only by the second display means on which the second display is displayed, or the second display on which the second display is displayed may overlap. The first display means may be overlapped by the display means other than the means.

Further, "the first position [for example, the initial position of the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B1)] and the second position [for example, the sub display device 208S shown in FIG. 314 (B3) is a decorative symbol display device]. The second display means is configured to be movable between positions that overlap with the front side in the substantially center of 208].
The second display means is a display means that overlaps with the first display means at the second position [for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (B3), the sub display device 208S is a decorative symbol display device. At the position where it overlaps the front side in the substantially center of 208, the sub display device 208S overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, only the second display means may be configured to be movable between the first position and the second position, or other than the second display means between the first position and the second position. The display means of the above may also be configured to be movable. Further, the second display means may be configured to always move between the first position and the second position, or the second display means may move between the first position and the second position. It may be configured so that it may not move.

Further, the second display means may be configured to be movable only between the first position and the second position, and the second display means may be configured to be movable other than between the first position and the second position. May be configured to be movable.

Further, the second display means may be capable of overlapping the first display means only at the second position, or may overlap with the first display means at positions other than the second position. It may be anything. Further, the second display means may always overlap the first display means at the second position, or may not overlap the first display means at the second position. May be good.

Further, "the first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIGS. 308 (2) to (7)].
The countdown display is a display in which the timing until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (2) to (7), the timer of the timer advance notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be such that only the timing until a certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown, or the timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed may be performed by the countdown. .. Further, the countdown display may be such that the timing until a certain effect is performed is always performed by the countdown, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be performed by the countdown. Good.

In addition, "Even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, even when the second display is displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown other than the countdown by the countdown display is continued. There may be something. Further, even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued, and even when the second display is displayed, the countdown by the countdown display may not continue. May be good.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only in the state where the second display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display is continued even in the state other than the state where the second display is displayed. May be good.

In addition, "During the display of the second display, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, during the display of the second display, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or during the display of the second display, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the second display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the second display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the second display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the second display is not being displayed.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 308 (8)".
The third display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When the first display indicates 0, the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (7) to (8), the timer in the timer notice display TM1. When the display becomes 0, the word "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the countdown by the first display may further enhance the expectation for the third display.

Here, when the first display shows 0, only the third display may be displayed, and when the first display shows 0, the third display may be displayed. Display other than may be displayed. Further, when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display may be displayed without fail, and when the first display is a display indicating 0, the third display is displayed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first display indicates 0, and the third display may be displayed except when the first display indicates 0. The display of three may be displayed.

In addition, "when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation by displaying the second display.

In addition, when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when the second display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIGS. 308 (9) to (12)].
The certain effect is an effect including the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain effect may include only the fourth display, or may include a display other than the fourth display. Further, a certain effect may always include the fourth display, or may not include the fourth display.

In addition, "a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryo box accessory 224H, first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is the first movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 309 (d3)].
The certain effect is an effect including the first operation.
The first operation is a directing operation.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of actions. In addition, the effectable means may always execute a plurality of types of actions, or may not execute a plurality of types of actions.

Further, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only the first operation, or may be capable of executing an operation other than the first operation. Further, the effect movable means may be one that always executes the first operation, or may not execute the first operation.

Further, a certain effect may include only the first operation, or may include an operation other than the first operation. Further, a certain effect may always include the first operation, or may not include the first operation.

In addition, "when the certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the certain effect is not performed [for example, FIGS. 308 (11) to 308 (11). When the pseudo-ream shown in 12) is started, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the pseudo-ream is not started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation that a certain effect will be performed.

In addition, when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when a certain effect is performed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally confirmed and displayed. May be good.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 304 (9) to (14) and the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 304 (9) to (14), and FIGS. Pseudo-continuous production shown in Fig. 317 (4) and notice display of chance up shown in Fig. 317 (4) and Fig. (13)].
In the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the display of the fifth display may be started.
The fifth display is a notice display, and is
When the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 304 (9) to (14)). When the conversation notice shown in is given, it is more likely to be a big hit than when the conversation notice is not given],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the fifth display will be displayed in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display. is there.

Here, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, only the fifth display may be started, or the first display may be displayed. In the period from the start of the display to the start of the display, the display other than the fifth display may also be started. Further, in the period from the start of the display of the first display to the start of the display of the second display, the fifth display may always be started, or after the first display is started to be displayed. In the period until the second display is started, the fifth display may not be started.

In addition, the fifth display may be started only in the period from the start of the first display to the start of the second display, or the first display may be displayed. The fifth display may be started in a period other than the period from the start to the start of the display of the second display.

In addition, when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the fifth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is not finally confirmed and displayed. There may be.

In addition, "The game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. A game table equipped with a display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a period display [for example, a display of the chance-up meter CMT shown in FIG. 321 (A1)].
The period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 317, the chance up meter CMT is lined by the swordsman reach. May be displayed during the period],
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP3 at which the advance notice by the lever effect is started, which is shown in FIG. 317 (18)].
The first timing is a timing at which the display of the first effect display may be started.
The period display may be erased after the display of the period display is started and before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2), a check is performed. If the cut-in shown in FIG. 321 (A2) is displayed before the timing shown by the point CP3, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, since the first timing of the period display is known during the display of the period display, there is a possibility that the display means will not be seen until the first timing is near. Here, the period display may be hidden before the first timing is reached. Even at the timing before the first timing comes, the line of sight can be directed to the display means to see the period display. In some cases.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to draw in the game from the time when the period display is displayed until the first timing is reached.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, a plurality of types of displays may be always displayed, or a plurality of types of displays may not be displayed.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the period display and the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the period display and the first effect display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the period display and the first effect display, or may not display the period display and the first display.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other timings than the first timing. Further, the period display may always notify the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the period is before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started. The display may not be erased.

In addition, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

The period during which the period display is displayed may be during the symbol variation display, the jackpot game, the demo display, the symbol stop display, etc., regardless of the reach.

Further, the period display may be displayed during the execution of all reach, or may be displayed only during the execution of a specific reach, and may not be displayed during the execution of other reach effects. Good. For example, the period display may not be displayed at the time of long reach and may be displayed at the time of SP reach. Further, it may not be displayed in the first half of the SP reach, but may be displayed in the latter half of the SP reach. Further, it may be displayed in the first half of the SP reach and not displayed in the latter half of the SP reach.

Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed, and the end of the period display is, for example, the timing when the display of the chance up meter is finished. Good. Further, the start of the period display is, for example, the timing at which an effect such as a reach effect in which the period is displayed is started, and the end of the period display is the timing at which the effect is ended. It does not matter whether the chance up meter is actually displayed or not. Further, the start of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is started, and the end of the period display is the time when the progress by the character or the marker on the chance up meter is finished. There may be. Further, when the chance up meter is configured to be displayed / hidden by the operating means, the start of the period display is the timing when the chance up meter is started to be displayed by the operating means, and the period display is started. The end may be a timing at which the display of the chance up meter is ended by the operating means.

Further, the start of the period display means from the start of the period display effect (for example, a display suggesting that the chance up meter can be displayed) to the end of the period display effect (for example, the chance up meter). It may be until the display suggesting that can be displayed is hidden, or until the chance up meter is hidden).

Further, the period display includes not only the one displayed until the first timing is reached, but also the one that is erased before reaching the first timing.

Further, a certain period may be two or more during the period in which the reach effect display is performed. At this time, the period display may be started and ended at certain periods, or the period display may be continuously displayed over two certain periods. In this case, in the first certain period, after the first period display starts and ends, the period display itself is continuously displayed, and when the second certain period starts, a new period is started. The second period display as a display may start and end.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second effect display [for example, display of a cut-in of an old man shown in FIG. 321 (A2), display of an effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b), etc.] And
The second effect display is different from the first effect display.
The second effect display may be displayed before the first timing is reached [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to 321 (A2) and 321 (A2b), a chance up meter. In the production by CMT, the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 321 (A2) and the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) may be displayed before the character SBH of Sabohani reaches the third checkpoint CP3. Yes, etc.],
The period display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the display of the second effect display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), there is a chance. In the production by the upmeter CMT, the display timing of the grandfather's cut-in shown in FIG. 321 (A2) and the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) are not notified, etc.],
During the display of the second effect display, the period display is erased [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A1) to (A2) and (A2b), FIG. 321 (A2) is shown. When the cut-in of the grandfather is displayed or the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b) is displayed, the chance up meter CMT is erased, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display that is not notified by the period display is displayed, the second effect display may be displayed even before the first timing is reached, so before the first timing comes. May also have expectations.

Here, only the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing, or the effect display other than the second effect display may be displayed before the first timing. There may be cases. Further, the second effect display may always be displayed before the first timing, or the second effect display may not be displayed before the first timing.

In addition, the second effect display may be displayed only before the first timing, or when the second effect display is displayed other than before the first timing. There may be.

Further, the period display may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may not notify only the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. You may. Further, the period display may not always notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started, or may notify the timing when the display of the second effect display is started. Good.

Further, only the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display, or the display other than the period display may be deleted during the display of the second effect display. Further, the period display may be always erased during the display of the second effect display, or the period display may not be erased during the display of the second effect display.

Further, the period display may be deleted only while the second effect display is being displayed, and the period display may be deleted other than while the second effect display is being displayed.

In addition, instead of the effect display, it may be a notification other than an error such as an error notification such as a ball removal error, a notification indicating a firing position, or a notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card. Further, as the mode of the effect display, the display may be displayed by light emission by the LED, operation by the effect movable means, or light emission by the light guide plate.

Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the second effect display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

Further, "the second effect display is a second notice display [for example, a notice display by displaying the cut-in of the grandfather shown in FIG. 321 (A2) or displaying an effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b)]. is there,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display of the second effect display is displayed before the first timing, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of a big hit without waiting for the first timing. In some cases, the player can be expected even during the period until the first timing comes.

In addition, "when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed than when the second effect display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and even when the second effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

In addition, "a production movable means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements [for example, family crest accessory 224E, Senryo box accessory 224H, first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd, second decorative symbol display device 208M" , Third decorative symbol display device 208N, sub display device 208S, POV display 224I, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of movements is a second movement [for example, the movement of the first large board behavior accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior accessory 224Gd shown in FIG. 321 (A3b)].
The second operation is a production operation,
The second operation may be performed during the display of the second effect display [for example, the display of the effect image shown in FIG. 321 (A2b)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to perform a dynamic effect using the effect movable means, and it may be possible to further improve the effect.

Here, the effect movable means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of actions, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of actions. Further, the effect movable means may be one that always executes a plurality of types of operations, or may not execute a plurality of types of operations.

Further, during the display of the second effect display, only the second operation may be performed, or during the display of the second effect display, an operation other than the second operation may be performed. You may. Further, the second operation may always be performed during the display of the second effect display, or the second operation may not be performed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation [for example, the operation of the family crest accessory 224E shown in FIGS. 303 (E1) to (E2) and the operation shown in FIG. 303 (F1). The operation of the Senryo box accessory 224H, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "after the period display is erased, the period display is configured to be displayed again [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A2a) to (A3a), of the princess character. After the chance up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display, the chance up meter CMT is displayed again when the animation display of the duel scene is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have expectations about the redisplay of the period display.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be displayed again, or after the period display is deleted, the display other than the period display is displayed again. It may be configured. In addition, the period display may be configured to be displayed again after the period display is deleted, or the period display may not be displayed again after the period display is deleted. You may.

Further, the period display may be configured to be displayed again only after the period display is deleted, or the period display may be displayed again even after the period display is deleted. May be good.

In addition, "after the period display is erased, the period display is not displayed until the certain period elapses [for example, as shown in FIGS. 321 (A2) to (A5). In addition, after the chance-up meter CMT is erased by the cut-in display of the old character, the chance-up meter CMT is not displayed in the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, after the period display is deleted, only the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, until a certain period elapses. It may be configured so that a display other than the period display is not displayed. Further, after the period display is deleted, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses, or after the period display is deleted, the period until a certain period elapses. The display may be configured to be displayed.

Further, the period display may be configured not to be displayed until a certain period elapses only after the period display is erased, or a certain period elapses even after the period display is erased. The period display may be configured not to be displayed until.

In addition, when there are a plurality of certain periods in the period in which the reach effect display is performed, after the period display is deleted in the first certain period, the period display is displayed in the first certain period. Although not displayed, the period display may be visible when a second period after the first period is started. Further, after the period display is erased in the first certain period, the period display may not be displayed in the second certain period after the first certain period, or the symbol may be displayed. The period display may not be displayed until the variable display ends.

Also, "The certain period is the period during which Super Reach is being executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of displays is a third effect display [for example, a notice of champ-up by displaying the boy character BOY shown in FIG. 317 (4), the lord shown in FIG. 317 (13). Notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.]
The third effect display is different from the first effect display.
The period display is the second timing [for example, the timing shown at the checkpoint CP1 at which the notice of the champ-up by the display of the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 317 (4) is started, and the lord shown in FIG. 317 (13). The timing indicated by the checkpoint CP2, which starts the notice of chance up by displaying the cut-in image CI3, etc.] may also be notified.
The second timing is a timing at which the display of the third effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be one that may notify only the second timing, or may be one that may notify timings other than the second timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the second timing, or may not notify the second timing.

Further, the second timing may be such that only the display of the third effect display may be started, or the display other than the display of the third effect display may be started. It may be one. Further, the second timing may be such that the display of the third effect display is always started, or the display of the third effect display may not be started.

The timing displayed by the period display may be 3 or more.

In addition, the place where the effect display is performed corresponding to the reach may be fixed, such that when a certain reach occurs, the effect display is always performed three times, and when another reach occurs, the effect display is always performed twice. Even if the reach is the same, the effect display may be changed three times, and the effect display may be displayed only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying too much", and conversely, it may be more likely to come off. In addition, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. In addition, the larger the number of times the effect display is performed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, the second timing may be the timing after the first timing, the second timing may be the timing before the first timing, and the first timing and the second timing may be used. The two timings may be the same.

Further, "The first effect display is the first notice display [for example, the notice by the lever effect shown in FIG. 317 (18)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
"When at least a part of the first display becomes difficult to see" means "when at least a part of the first display is overlapped by the third display".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means is the first display means, and is
The first display means is a means that may display the period display.
The second display means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the display means may be composed of only a plurality of display means, or may be composed of other than the plurality of display means. Further, the display means may be always composed of a plurality of display means, or may not be composed of a plurality of display means.

Further, the first display means may display only the period display, or may display a display other than the period display. Further, the first display means may be one that always displays the period display, or may not display the period display.

Further, the second display means may be one that may perform only the effect operation, or may be one that may perform an operation other than the effect operation. In addition, the second display means may be one that always performs the effect operation, or may not perform the effect operation.

Further, the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display, or the second display means may overlap at least a part of the period display. There may be. In addition, at least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second display means, and at least a part of the period display may not be overlapped by the second display means. May be good.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. A game table equipped with a display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the effect by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 326 (A1) to (A9)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 326 (A4) to (A9)].
The first display and the second display are different displays.
At least a part of the display mode of the first display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT1 displayed in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A1)] is the first speed [for example, 10 It may change depending on the speed at which the gauge disappears in seconds, etc.]
At least a part of the display mode of the second display [for example, the display mode of the remaining time display meter MT2 in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 326 (A4)] has a second speed [for example, a gauge at 5 seconds]. It may change depending on the speed at which it disappears, etc.
The first speed and the second speed are different speeds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

In recent years, many displays have been displayed on the display means, and there has been a problem that a player who is unfamiliar with the game or a player who plays the model for the first time does not know where to pay attention. In this game table, by making the first speed and the second speed different, the player naturally guides the line of sight to the fast (slow) display in which the display mode changes, and the player having the above problem. May also be able to entertain the production.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the period display may be displayed only in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may be displayed in a period other than the above period. Further, the period display may be always displayed in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed, or in a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is performed. It may not be displayed.

Further, the period display may notify only the first timing, or may notify other timings than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

In addition, only the period display may be deleted before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. Previously, the display other than the period display may be deleted. In addition, the period display may be deleted without fail before the first timing is reached after the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the period display is started. Previously, the period display may not be erased.

In addition, the period display may be deleted only before the first timing is reached after the display of the period display is started, or the first timing is set after the display of the period display is started. In addition to the previous period display, the period display may be deleted.

Further, "the first display is a display including a time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT1 shown in FIG. 326 (A1)].
The second display is a display including the time display [for example, a gauge display on the remaining time display meter MT2 shown in FIG. 326 (A4)].
The time display is a display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time in a certain period [for example, the operation valid period] [for example, the remaining time display meters MT1 and FIG. 326 shown in FIG. 326 (A1). The gauge of the remaining time meter MT2 shown in A4) decreases according to the time from the start of the operation validity period],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the speed of change of the display mode may be easily recognized.

Here, the first display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the first display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the second display may include only the time display or may include other than the time display. Further, the second display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, the time display may change the display mode only according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may change according to other than the passage of time in a certain period. You may. Further, the time display may always change the display mode according to the passage of time in a certain period, or the display mode may not change according to the passage of time in a certain period. There may be.

Further, "In some cases, both the first display and the second display are displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 326 (A4) to (A7), a button is displayed on the balloon of the navigation character YM. Both the effect display on which the image 136a1 and the remaining time display meter MT1 are displayed and the operation promotion notification image displayed on the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather in the conversation notice are displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the production lively by displaying both the first display and the second display.

Here, only the first display and the second display may be displayed, or the display may be other than both the first display and the second display. May be good. Further, both the first display and the second display may always be displayed, or both the first display and the second display may not be displayed.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of" intense heat "in the balloon of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 326 (A9)".
One of the plurality of types of displays is a fourth display [for example, a character display of "It's intense heat" in the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather shown in FIG. 326 (A9)].
The third display and the fourth display are different displays.
The first display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time [for example, 10 seconds, etc.] elapses.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time [for example, 5 seconds, etc.] elapses.
When the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may be displayed.
When the second time elapses from the start of the display of the second display, the fourth display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display may be such that only a part of the display mode can be changed until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode may be changed until the first time elapses. Other display modes may also be changeable. Further, the first display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the first time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the first time elapses. It may not be the case.

Further, the second display may be such that at least a part of the display mode can be changed until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode is not changed until the second time elapses. The display mode of is also changeable. Further, the second display may always change at least a part of the display mode until the second time elapses, or at least a part of the display mode changes until the second time elapses. It may not be the case.

Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, only the third display may be displayed, or the first display may be displayed after the first display starts to be displayed. As time passes, displays other than the third display may be displayed. Further, when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed, the third display may always be displayed, or when the first time elapses after the first display starts to be displayed. , The third display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, only the fourth display may be displayed, or the second display may be displayed after the second display starts to be displayed. Over time, displays other than the fourth display may be displayed. Further, when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed, the fourth display may always be displayed, or when the second time elapses after the second display starts to be displayed. , The fourth display may not be displayed.

The third display and the fourth display may have the same display mode or different display modes.

Further, in the third display and the fourth display, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher or lower in the fourth display. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be the same in the third display and the fourth display.

Further, "the first display is a countdown display [for example, a countdown display in the timer display of the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328 (A1)].
The second display is the countdown display [for example, the countdown display in the timer display of the second timer notice display TM2 shown in FIG. 328 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect [for example, display of a pseudo-continuous effect] is performed [for example, the first timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 328 (A1)]. And the second timer notice display TM2 notifies the time until the pseudo-ream occurs by a countdown display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may notify only the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may notify a timing other than the timing until a certain effect is performed. Further, the timing until a certain effect is performed may be notified without fail, or the timing until a certain effect is performed may not be notified.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
The first display is an operation validity period display.
The second display is the operation valid period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may be one that has an aunt who is not operated by the player.

Further, the operation valid period display may indicate only the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may indicate a period other than the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid. The operation valid period display may always indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid, or may not indicate the period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.

Further, "The first display is a period display [for example, the first chance up meter CMTa shown in FIG. 323 (A1)].
The second display is the period display [for example, the second chance up meter CMTb shown in FIG. 323 (A1)].
The period display is a display for notifying the first timing [for example, the timing at which the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in FIG. 323 (A2) is started].
The first timing is a certain effect in the first period [for example, the period during which the duel scene is animated in the swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 323 (A1) to (A2)] [for example, FIG. 323]. It is the timing at which there is a possibility that the notice of chance up by the Boy character BOY shown in (A2)] will be performed.
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the period display may be one that notifies only the first timing, or may be one that notifies other than the first timing. Further, the period display may be one that always notifies the first timing, or may not notify the first timing.

Further, the first timing may be such that only the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period, or the display other than the sixth display may be started to be displayed in the first period. It may be something that can be done. Further, the first timing may be such that the sixth display is always started to be displayed in the first period, or the sixth display may not be started to be displayed in the first period. You may.

Further, only the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period, and the first period may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. Other than the timing may be notified. Further, the first timing may be notified without fail between the start and the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified between the start and the end of the first period. The timing may not be notified.

Further, the first timing may be notified only during the period from the start to the end of the first period, and the first timing may be notified other than the period from the start to the end of the first period. One timing may be notified.

In addition, "with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change only at the first speed, or with the passage of time, the display mode of the second display may change. At least a part of the display mode may change at a speed other than the first speed. Further, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may always change at the first speed according to the passage of time, and at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. The display mode may not change at the first speed.

Also, with the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display may change at the first speed, or at least a part of the second display may change with the passage of time. Other than some display modes, it may change at the first speed.

In addition, "when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed than when at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the first speed. Is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

When at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, or at least a part of the second display may be displayed. Even if the mode changes at the second speed, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is an effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM shown in FIGS. 326 (A1) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the second display is an effect display [for example, display of the old man's conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice shown in FIGS. 326 (A4) to (A9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 208S, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, mini. A game table equipped with a display device 208P, POV display 224I, etc.
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1)].
The first display is a display including a countdown display [for example, a countdown display of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1)].
The countdown display is a display that notifies the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A1) to (A7), a timer notice display. The countdown in the timer display of TM1 informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display is changed from the first display mode [for example, the small size display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A1)] to the second display. It may change to a mode [for example, a large-sized display mode of the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A3)].
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, since the variation of the effect is increased by changing the display mode of the countdown display, it may be possible to entertain the player until a certain effect is performed.

Further, according to this game table, the countdown display itself may be attracting attention by changing the display mode of the countdown display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may include only the countdown display, or may include a display other than the countdown display. Further, the first display may always include the countdown display, or may not include the countdown display. Further, the first display may be a countdown display, and the first display may not be a countdown display.

Further, the countdown display may be notified only by counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed, or may be notified by other than counting down the timing until a certain effect is performed. It may be something to do. Further, the countdown display may always notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown, or may not notify the timing until a certain effect is performed by performing a countdown. There may be one.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change only from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the first display mode may be changed during the display of the countdown display. The display mode of the display may change from the first display mode to a display mode other than the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display, or the display of the first display during the display of the countdown display. The mode may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and other than during the display of the countdown display, the first display mode may be changed. The display mode of one display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

The countdown display may be a timer display.

Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the display of the first display is ended. You may. Further, the start of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown is started after the first display is started, and the end of the countdown display is, for example, the timing at which the countdown ends. Good.

Further, "The countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display is terminated by the end of the symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 308 (1) to (7). , Timer notice display The countdown display in the timer display of TM1 is started during the execution of the symbol variation display and ends during the symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the countdown display for notifying the timing until a certain effect is performed is completed during the execution of one symbol variation display, so that the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and only the countdown display may be terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Display other than the countdown display may be completed by the time the symbol variation display is completed. In addition, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be always terminated by the end of the symbol variation display, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may not end by the time the variable display ends.

Further, the countdown display may be started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the countdown display may be terminated only until the symbol variation display is completed, or the countdown display is started during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the symbol is concerned. The countdown display may end other than until the variable display ends.

Further, "The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size [for example, small size].
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in a second display size [for example, a large size].
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by increasing the display size of the countdown display, it may be possible to change the degree of expectation for the countdown display (attention is paid to the countdown display with the increased display size).

Here, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the first display size, or the first display may be a display size other than the first display size. It may be the display mode that is displayed. Further, the first display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the first display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the first display size. There may be a display mode.

Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is displayed only in the second display size, or the first display may be displayed in a display size other than the second display size. It may be the display mode shown. Further, the second display mode may be a display mode in which the first display is always displayed in the second display size, or when the first display is not displayed in the second display size. There may be a display mode.

The size of the display size may be the same. For example, the display size may be the same, but the color and shape of the frame, characters, and the like may be different.

Further, the first display size may be larger than the second display size.

Further, "when the display of the countdown display is started [for example, when the display of the countdown in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 308 (3)", the first The display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first display. It may be displayed in a display mode other than one display mode. Further, when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display may always be displayed in the first display mode, and when the display of the countdown display is started, the first display is the first. There may be cases where it is not displayed in the display mode of.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the countdown display is started, and the first display may be displayed other than when the display of the countdown display is started. It may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "when the display of the first display is started [for example, when the frame-in of the timer notice display TM1 is started as shown in FIG. 308 (2)", the first display is displayed. Displayed in the first display mode,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed only in the first display mode, or when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. May be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. Further, when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be always displayed in the first display mode, and when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. The display may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display may be displayed in the first display mode only when the display of the first display is started, and other than when the display of the first display is started, the first display may be displayed. One display may be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, "During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A3). As described above, when the timer display of the timer notice display TM1 becomes "03:00" indicating that the remaining 3 seconds are displayed during the display of the countdown display in the timer display of the timer notice display TM1, the timer notice display TM1 Is changing from small size to large size, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect that the display mode will change during the countdown display.

Here, while the countdown display is being displayed, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode, and while the countdown display is being displayed, the first display is the first. The display mode of the above may be changed to a display mode other than the second display mode without fail. Further, during the display of the countdown display, the first display may not change from the first display mode to the second display mode.

Further, the first display may always change from the first display mode to the second display mode only during the display of the countdown display, and the first display may be the first display other than the display of the countdown display. You may always change from one display mode to the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. If you do, the jackpot symbol will be displayed more easily in the end.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give an expectation that the first display will change to the second display mode.

When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may be finally fixedly displayed, and the first display is the first display mode. Even when the display mode is changed from the above to the second display mode, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

Further, "The first display is a display in which the display position may change. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol display device. The display position has changed from approximately the center on the right side of the display screen of 208 to approximately the center],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by changing the display position of the first display, a visual change may be given and the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the display position may change, or one in which something other than the display position may change. Further, the first display may be one in which the display position always changes, or one in which the display position may not change.

Further, "When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes [for example, FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A3). ), When the display size of the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the display position changes from the substantially right center to the substantially center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the display mode of the first display changes and the display position also changes, so that the first display may be more noticeable.

Here, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, only the display position of the first display may change, or the first display changes from the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, other than the display position of the first display may also change. Further, when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may always change, and the first display changes from the first display mode to the first display mode. When changing to the second display mode, the display position of the first display may not change.

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the first display is the first display mode. The display position of the first display may be changed in cases other than the case where the display mode is changed from the first to the second display mode.

In addition, "the first display is a display in which a movement display [for example, an animation display of an enlarged display of the timer notice display TM1] may be performed.
When the movement display is performed, the display position of the first display changes [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A3), the timer notice display TM1 is animated by an enlarged display. Enlarged display, display position changes, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a visual change can be given by the moving display of the first display, so that the effect of the effect may be improved.

Here, the first display may be one in which only the movement display is performed, or may be a display other than the movement display. Further, the first display may be one in which the movement display is always performed, or may not be the movement display.

Further, the movement display may change only the display position of the first display, or the movement display may change the display position of something other than the display position of the first display. May be good. Further, the display position of the first display may always change due to the movement display, or the display position of the first display may not change due to the movement display. ..

Further, the display position of the first display may change only when the movement display is performed, or the display position of the first display may change due to something other than the movement display. Good.

In addition, "While the movement display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display proceeds.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be continued, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be continued. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may always be continued even while the movement display is being displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be continued even while the movement display is being displayed.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be continued only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be continued other than while the movement display is being displayed.

In addition, "While the movement display is being displayed, the countdown by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, while the movement display is being displayed, only the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted, or while the movement display is being displayed, something other than the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted. Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted without fail during the display of the movement display, or the countdown by the countdown display may not be interrupted during the display of the movement display.

Further, the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted only while the movement display is displayed, or the countdown by the countdown display may be interrupted even when the movement display is not displayed.

Further, "The countdown display is a display that counts down the time until the certain effect is performed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A2) to (A7), the timer of the timer notice display TM1. The countdown on the display informs the timing of the pseudo-ream, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the countdown display may only count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may perform a countdown other than the time until a certain effect is performed. Further, the countdown display may always count down the time until a certain effect is performed, or may not count down the time until a certain effect is performed.

In addition, "By displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it is notified that it is time to perform the certain effect [for example, FIGS. 329 (A7) to (A8) show. As described above, when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the character "attention" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified only that it is the timing when a certain effect is performed, or by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. , It may be notified that it is not the timing when a certain effect is performed. Further, by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be surely notified that it is time to perform a certain effect, and by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, it may be notified. It may not be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

Further, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect only by displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display, and other than displaying the display indicating 0 in the countdown display. By doing so, it may be notified that it is time to perform a certain effect.

In addition, "the countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 329 (A7) to (A11). After the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 is deleted, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the production may not be redundant by deleting the countdown display when the countdown is completed.

Here, it may be configured so that only the countdown display is deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, other than the countdown display. The display of may also be configured to be erased. Further, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be deleted after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the countdown display may be displayed other than after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. May be configured to be erased.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, display of the character" attention "in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 329 (A8)".
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is erased after the second display is displayed [for example, FIGS. 329 (A7) to the same). As shown in FIG. (A11), after the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes 0, the timer notice display TM1 displays the character "attention" instead of the timer display, and then the timer notice display TM1 is erased. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when the countdown display is erased, the second display is displayed, so that the effect of the effect on the erasure of the countdown display may be improved.

Here, the second display may not be included only in a certain effect, or may not be included in an effect other than a certain effect. Further, the second display may not always be included in a certain effect, or may be included in a certain effect. Further, the second display may be included in a certain effect.

Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, only the countdown display may be deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. Is displayed, after the second display is displayed, the display other than the countdown display may be deleted. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be always deleted after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display may not be cleared after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

Further, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted after the second display is displayed only when the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, or the display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. The countdown display may be configured to disappear after the second display is displayed, other than when is displayed. Further, when a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display may be configured to be deleted only after the second display is displayed, or a display indicating 0 in the countdown display may be displayed. May be configured so that the countdown display is cleared even after the second display is displayed when is displayed.

In addition, "The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, sub-display device 208S or the like].
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.].
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 330 (A1), small. The size timer notice display TM1 is displayed on the sub display device 208S, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be displayed only on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When is displayed, the first display may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. Further, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display may be always displayed on the first display means, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. When it is displayed, the first display may not be displayed on the first display means.

Further, the first display may be displayed on the first display means only when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, or the first display of the first display mode may be displayed. The first display may be displayed on the first display means in cases other than the above.

In addition, "when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display. It may be displayed on the means [For example, as shown in FIGS. 330 (A2) to (A3), when the timer notice display TM1 changes from a small size to a large size, the timer notice display TM1 is a decorative symbol. Displayed on display device 208, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since the display means to be displayed when the display mode of the first display changes is changed, it may be visually interesting and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Here, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is displayed only on the second display means. In some cases, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display changes to the second display means. It may be displayed on a display means other than the above. Further, when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display is always displayed on the second display means. When the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode, the first display becomes the second display means. It may not be displayed.

Further, when the first display is displayed on the second display means only when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means changes to the second display mode. The first display is the second display even when the first display of the first display mode displayed on the first display means is not changed to the second display mode. It may be displayed on the display means of.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "The game console is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000 or the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The countdown display described so far may be a display performed only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be performed as a look-ahead notice. That is, it can be said that the countdown display also functions as a notice of the symbol variation display and may also function as a look-ahead notice. Here, it may be performed only as a look-ahead notice.

Further, when the countdown display is performed as a look-ahead notice, the countdown display may be displayed in the period between the symbol variation display and the next symbol variation display. In that case, the time notification by the countdown display may be stopped / interrupted / stopped during the symbol stop display (for example, the time of the timing of the final stop of the symbol is also displayed during the symbol stop display (however, the countdown). (Not done) or the time notation may be stopped. The time notification by the countdown display may be continued even during the symbol stop display. Also, the countdown may be performed internally even during the symbol stop display. However, the countdown may be stopped internally while the symbol stop is displayed.

In addition, when displaying the countdown display as a look-ahead notice, if there is a hold whose fluctuation time changes depending on the number of holds (for example, a hold with an indefinite fluctuation time), the countdown display is not performed. May be good. This is because if the symbol fluctuation display time is indefinite, it may not be possible to know when the countdown will reach 0, so for example, it is necessary to match the occurrence timing (pseudo-ream or reach). In the case of development, etc.), it is preferable to perform only with the symbol variation display.

On the other hand, the countdown display may be performed even when the hold with an indefinite fluctuation time is in the hold. In this case, for example, an effect that does not cause a problem even if it occurs suddenly (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, an effect such as a round promotion during a big hit, a telop display such as "super hot approaching", etc. It can be applied in cases where it is sufficient if the timer countdown is completed by the time the subject's hold is completed. In addition, a timing that is also when an effect that requires timing adjustment occurs (for example, the start of a pending symbol variation display that is a look-ahead target) n The effect is such that the time is forcibly adjusted. May be good.

In addition, the countdown display may be displayed during the jackpot. In this case, the display may be continued across the interval between rounds. Here, since the period of one round is indefinite during the jackpot game, it is preferable to set the countdown time appropriately. For example, the countdown display may not occur in the final round, or during the jackpot end interval (final). When the jackpot end display period ends after the round ends, and the timer is set to 0 at the next timer interrupt (for example, 4ms), or when a certain round is reached, the book is forcibly booked. The combined time (for example, "00:00" may be forcibly displayed even if it is not 0 in the countdown display to generate an effect) may be displayed.

In addition, the time until the simultaneous production or the production by the RTC starts may be notified by a countdown display.

Further, the display device may be composed of a transmissive liquid crystal, and further, an effect means such as an effect movable means and a decorative member, and other display devices such as a drum and an LCD are arranged on the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal. They may be configured to be visible via. At this time, the transmissive liquid crystal may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the back side can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to see by the liquid crystal shutter.

Further, the operation mode of the effect movable means such as the accessory may be changed or the light emission mode of the lamp may be changed according to the notification of the time by the countdown display.

In addition, a display foretelling that the countdown display itself may be affected (for example, timer addition / subtraction, interruption, fast forward / rewind, enlargement / reduction of the countdown display, change in color or shape, etc.). (For example, an effect that incites that something may occur due to the mini character, etc.) may be performed. For example, when a mini character appears, something may happen to the countdown display (when nothing is actually done or when something is done), and when another character appears, something is always done. Or you may perform an effect that always does something when another character appears. At this time, for example, the larger the number of characters appearing, the easier it is to win a big hit.

Further, when the number of countdown displays is large, it may be easy to finally become a big hit, or when a notice of chance up is given, it may be easy to finally become a big hit.

In addition, even if a part or all of the chance-up meter is enlarged / reduced or a promotion effect (for example, the color or shape changes, the character or marker indicating the current position changes, etc.) is performed. Good.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a timer display [for example, the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 339 (3)].
The timer display is a display including a time display [for example, a timer display in the timer notice display TM1 shown in FIG. 330 (3)].
After the display of the timer display is started, a certain effect [for example, the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 330 (9), the notice of the strong Sabohani group shown in FIG. 343 (9), and the revival effect shown in FIG. 347 (30). Or, the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35), the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 346 (6) to (7), etc.] may be started. Is composed of
It is configured so that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 341 (5) to (6), the timer The notice display TM1 is displayed, but the timer notice display TM1 is erased before it becomes "0:00", and a certain effect is not performed, etc.],
When the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time becomes a certain time [for example, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is "00:00" or the like], the certain effect is started. It is configured so that there are cases [for example, as shown in FIG. 339 (9), when the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00", the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is displayed. To be started, etc.],
The jackpot symbol is confirmed in the symbol variation display when the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed. Easy to be
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

Conventionally, display effects by display means have tended to be diverse. However, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic display means.

Further, according to this game console, it may be possible to expect the start of a certain effect by starting the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, the timer display may include only the display of the time, or may include a display other than the display of the time. Further, the timer display may always include the time display, or may not include the time display.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may not be started after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect may be started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that other effects may not be started. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is not always started even after the display of the timer display is started, or a certain effect is started even after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that it may be.

Further, the display of the timer display may be started so that only a certain effect may be started depending on the time when the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may be started depending on the display of the time being performed at a certain time. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the time when the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started even if the display of is reached a certain time.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the display of the timer display is started and the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started in response to something other than the display of the time being made to a certain time.

Further, when the display of the timer display is started and a certain effect is executed, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, "the certain effect may be started when the display of the time reaches the certain time after the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIGS. 339 (3) to 3). As shown in FIG. 9 (9), when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 becomes "00:00" after the timer notice effect is started, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started. etc],
If the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started [for example, FIG. 342. (3) As shown in FIG. 6 (6), if the timer display on the timer notice display TM1 is erased before the timer display becomes "0:00" after the fake timer notice effect is started, the pseudo-ream causes. The second variation display of the decorative pattern is not started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to notice that the timer display reaches a certain time.

Here, after the timer display is started, when the time display reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may be started, or the timer display display is started. After that, when the time display reaches a certain time, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, after the timer display is started and the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be always started, or after the timer display is started. When the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may not be started.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after the display of the timer display is started and the time display reaches a certain time, or the display of the timer display is started. A certain effect may be started later than the case where the display of the time reaches a certain time.

Further, if the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, only a certain effect may not be started, and the timer may not be started. If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, the effect other than the certain effect may not be started. Further, if the display of the timer display ends after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect does not necessarily have to be started, and the timer does not have to be started. If the display of the timer display ends after the display of the display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be started.

Further, it is not necessary to start a certain effect only when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, and the timer display does not have to be started. It is not necessary to start a certain effect except when the display of the timer display is finished after the display of is started and before the display of the time reaches a certain time.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying the display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 353 (3) to (9)].
When the first result [for example, the result of the appearance of the princess character HME from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 353 (9)] is derived as a result of the display of the mini game, the time is displayed. It is configured so that when the time is reached, the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 353 (9), when the princess character HME appears from the treasure box image, it is shown in FIG. 353 (17). As shown, the replay symbol RP is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where the trend of timer notice can be excited by a mini game.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the display of the mini game, or may be one that can display a display other than the display of the mini game. Further, the display means may always display the display of the mini game, or may not display the display of the mini game.

Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or the display of the mini game may be started. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and the effects other than the certain effects may be started. Further, when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started, or the display of the mini game. As a result, when the first result is derived, the time display may reach a certain time and a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started only when the first result is derived as the display result of the mini game, or the display of the mini game may be started. As a result, even when the first result is not derived, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item [for example, the princess character HME displayed at the lower left of the display screen shown in FIG. 353 (10)].
It is configured so that the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game [For example, in the mini game shown in FIGS. 353 (5) to (9), the treasure chest image of the princess When the character HME appears, as shown in FIG. 353 (10), the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item at the lower left of the display screen],
The notice item includes a display suggesting that the certain effect is executed [for example, when the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, a notice is given that a pseudo-ream will be performed, etc.] ,
After the notice item is started to be displayed, the display of the time reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 353 (10). , After the princess character HME is displayed as a notice item, the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream starts at the timing when the timer display on the timer notice display TM1A becomes "0:00", etc.] ,
When the notice item is not displayed, the display of the time is configured so that the certain time is reached and the certain effect is not started [for example, FIGS. 354 (5) to (9)). When the auntie character BBA (10) appears from the treasure chest image in the mini-game shown, the notice item is not displayed as shown in FIG. 354 (10), and the pseudo-ream is not performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to draw attention to the display of the notice item.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to recognize that a certain effect by the timer display is started by the notice icon as a result display while paying attention to the mini game.

Further, according to this game table, the effect may be excited during the period until the timer display reaches (or does not reach) a certain time.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice item, or may be one that can display items other than the notice item. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the notice item, or may not display the notice item.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game, or items other than the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. It may be configured to be. Further, the notice item may be configured to be always displayed according to the display result of the mini game, or the notice item may not be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game. Good.

Further, the notice item may include only a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may include a display other than a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed. In addition, the notice item may always include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed, or may not include a display suggesting that a certain effect is executed.

Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and only a certain effect is started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed. The display of time may be configured so that when a certain time is reached, an effect other than a certain effect is started. Further, after the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is always started, or after the notice item is started to be displayed. The display of time may be configured so that a certain time may be reached and a certain effect may not be started.

Further, the time display may be configured to reach a certain time and a certain effect is started only after the notice item is started to be displayed, or other than after the notice item is started to be displayed. Also, the display of time may be configured so that a certain time is reached and a certain effect is started.

Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured so that only a certain effect is not started when a certain time is reached, and when the notice item is not displayed, the time is displayed. It may be configured so that when a certain time is reached, an effect other than a certain effect is not started. Further, when the notice item is not displayed, the time display may be configured so that a certain time is reached and a certain effect is not always started, and when the notice item is not displayed, the time is displayed. It may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when a certain time is reached.

In addition, "after the display of the timer display is started, the result of the display of the mini game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change [for example, FIG. 353 (3). ), As shown in FIG. 353 (14), after the timer notice display TM1 is displayed, and before the timer display countdown in the timer notice display TM1 starts, as shown in FIG. 353 (14). , The result of the mini game display is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate on the result of the display of the mini game.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to impress the relationship between the timer display and the mini game.

Here, after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini game may be derived, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, other than the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time display starts to change. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini game is always derived after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the result of the display of the mini-game may not be derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. After that, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived other than before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini game may be derived only after the display of the timer display is started and before the display of the time display starts to change, or the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived before the display of the time display starts to change.

Further, "It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches the certain time [for example, the figure. As shown in 349 (4), after the timer display countdown on the timer notice display TM1L is started, the timer display on the timer notice display TM1L becomes "0:00" at the timing shown in FIG. 349 (12) and counts down. As shown in FIG. 349 (9), the result of the display of the mini-game is derived, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, since the timer display has not reached a certain time, it may be possible to concentrate on the result of voting in the mini game.

Here, after the display of the time display starts to change, only the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time may be derived. After the display starts to change, other than the result of the mini-game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time. In addition, the display of the time display may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is always derived after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time. May be configured such that the result of the mini-game display may not be derived before the time display reaches a certain time after the start of change.

Further, the result of the display of the mini-game may be derived only after the display of the time display starts to change and before the display of the time reaches a certain time, or the display of the time display may be derived. May be configured to derive the result of the mini-game display after the start of change and before the time display reaches a certain time.

Also, the display of the time display may be configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived only after the display of the time display starts to change before the display of the time reaches a certain time. The result of the mini-game display may be derived before the time display reaches a certain time, other than after the start of change.

In addition, "the display of the mini-game may be started before the display of the timer display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 355 (3) to (4), the timer notice effect is produced. The mini-game was started before the start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, at the time when the display of the mini game is started, it is not known whether or not the timer display is started, so that it may be possible to pay attention to the trend of the mini game.

Here, only the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started, or other than the display of the mini game before the display of the timer display is started. The display may also be started. In addition, the display of the mini game may always start before the display of the timer display starts, or the display of the mini game may not start before the display of the timer display starts. May be good.

In addition, the display of the mini game may be started only before the display of the timer display is started, and the display of the mini game may be started before the display of the timer display is started. It may be started.

In addition, the display of the mini game may be started before only the display of the timer display is started, or the display of the mini game may be started before the display other than the display of the timer display is started. May be started.

In addition, "a second result [for example, a result in which the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box image shown in FIG. 355 (8)] may be derived as a result of the display of the mini game.
The second result is a result not related to the certain effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 355 (8), when the result that the icon BCF of the face of the bancho appears from the treasure box image is derived, The strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 356 (25) is displayed, which is not related to the timer advance notice effect shown in FIG. 355 (4)],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to draw attention to whether or not the result of the display of the mini game is related to a certain effect.

Here, only the second result may be derived as a result of displaying the mini game, or a result other than the second result may be derived as a result of displaying the mini game. Good. Further, the second result may always be derived as a result of displaying the mini game, or the second result may not be derived as a result of displaying the mini game.

Further, the second result may be not related only to a certain effect, or may not be related to an effect other than a certain effect. In addition, the second result may not always be related to a certain effect, or may be related to a certain effect.

In addition, "the first notice [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 346 (6) to (7)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect that a timer display is displayed and a look-ahead notice is given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the first notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the first notice may be executed. Further, the first notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the first notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the second notice [for example, the pseudo-ream shown in FIG. 330 (9)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display is displayed and the execution time of the symbol variation display becomes long, so that a feeling of expectation for a big hit may be given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the second notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the second notice may be executed. Further, the second notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the second notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, the second notice may be that only the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed. The time other than the execution time of the symbol variation display may be longer. In addition, the execution time of the symbol variation display may always be longer when the second notice is executed than when it is not executed, and when it is executed than when it is not executed. The execution time of the symbol variation display may not be long.

In addition, "a third notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 350 (35)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The third notice is a notice that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that a timer display is displayed and a big hit notice is given.

Here, as a certain effect, only the third notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the third notice may be executed. Further, the third notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the third notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

In addition, the third notice may be easier to confirm and display only the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. May be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. In addition, the third notice may be that the jackpot symbol is always displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, or when it is executed than when it is not executed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the third notice is executed, the jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, and when executed, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display. There may be.

In addition, "a fourth notice [for example, a resurrection effect shown in FIG. 347 (30)] may be executed as the above-mentioned effect.
The fourth notice is a notice that it will be a big hit.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the timer display is displayed and it becomes a big hit.

Here, as a certain effect, only the fourth notice may be executed, or as a certain effect, a notice other than the fourth notice may be executed. Further, the fourth notice may always be executed as a certain effect, or the fourth notice may not be executed as a certain effect.

Further, the fourth notice may be for notifying only that it will be a big hit, or may be for notifying other than being a big hit. Further, the fourth notice may always notify that a big hit will occur, or may not notify that a big hit will occur.

In addition, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, lower plate full tank error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 389 (1)].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, a lower plate full tank error state, etc.].
The timer display is configured to overlap the ball removal error display [for example, as shown in FIG. 389 (3), the timer notice display TM1 overlaps the lower plate full tank error display ERR1. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to motivate the player to quickly release the dish full tank error state in order to see the effect of the timer display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display means may always display the ball removal error display, or may not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, the timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured to overlap with a display other than the ball removal error display. You may. Further, the timer display may be configured so as to always overlap with the ball removal error display, or the timer display may be configured so as not to overlap with the ball removal error display.

Further, "The timer display is a display displayed in any one of a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. 348 (3)].
One of the plurality of types of modes is the second mode [for example, the high reliability display mode shown in FIG. 346 (3)].
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
It is configured so that the certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the timer display is displayed in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to have an expectation that a certain effect is started depending on the mode of the timer display.

Further, according to this game console, when a mini game is played, the possibility of success of the mini game may be expected depending on the mode of the timer display. That is, first of all, it is expected that a certain effect is executed by the player expecting the success of the mini game, but the mode of the timer display that is started in the middle is indirectly started first. In some cases, you can expect the results of the game display. That is, there are cases where the effect (timer display) started later functions as a notice of the effect (mini game, etc.) started earlier, and the player can be given an interest.

Here, the timer display may be displayed only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. Good. Further, the timer display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode.

In addition, the first aspect and the second aspect may be partially different aspects or all may be different aspects.

Further, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured so that the effect other than a certain effect can be started more easily when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the display is displayed in the first aspect. Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode than when the timer display is displayed in the first mode. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the display is displayed in the first aspect.

Further, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display is displayed in the second mode, or a certain effect is displayed when the timer display is displayed in the second mode. May not be configured so that may not start.

The timer display may be changed to the second mode after being displayed in the first mode, or may be changed to the first mode after the timer display is started to be displayed in the second mode. Good. Further, when the timer display is started in the first mode, it may be configured so as not to change to the second mode, or when the timer display is started in the second mode, the display may be started. It may be configured so as not to change to the first aspect.

Further, "One of the plurality of types is the third aspect [for example, the timer display of" 7:77 "shown in FIG. 390 (a) and" 99:99 "shown in FIG. 390 (b). , The rainbow display mode shown in FIG. 390 (g), etc.]
The third aspect is different from the first aspect.
The third aspect is different from the second aspect.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to give expectations to the player at the start of displaying the timer display.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation that the display is performed in the third mode.

Here, the third aspect may be partially different from the first aspect, or may be completely different from the first aspect.

Further, the third aspect may be partially different from the second aspect, or may be completely different from the second aspect.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured so that only the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. , In the symbol variation display, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may also be fixedly displayed. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol may be configured to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. , The jackpot symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, except when the timer display is displayed in the third mode. In the case of, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, "when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it is different from the big hit game performed in response to the definite display of the big hit symbol and is advantageous to the player (hereinafter, It is configured to be given a "first state"),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may be able to raise the expectation for the third aspect.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, it may be configured so that only the first state is given, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be given. It may be configured so that a state other than one state is also given. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be always given, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the first state may be given. It may be configured so that the state of is not given.

Further, the first state may be given only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, or when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode. May be configured to give the first state.

In addition, "The first state is a probabilistic state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The probabilistic state may or may not be provided with the electric support state. Further, the probabilistic state may be a probabilistic state in which the state is maintained until the next big hit, or a probabilistic state (ST) in which the state ends when the symbol variation is displayed a certain number of times. Good.

Further, the electric support state (special figure low probability normal figure high probability state) may be used instead of the probability change state.

In addition, "The first state is a reserved villa.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The reserved villa may be a reserved villa in which a probable change jackpot is fixed, or a reserved villa in which a jackpot that is not a probable change jackpot is fixed.

Further, "When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the display of the time in the symbol variation display. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the timer display does not reach a certain time, the player may be expected to expect it.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, only the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the display other than the timer display is also deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be always erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display may not be erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is configured to be erased only before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted even before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured.

In addition, only when the timer display is displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. Alternatively, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third display, the timer display is deleted before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display in the symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that the timer display may be configured to be erased before the time display changes and reaches a certain time.

Further, "When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the jackpot symbol is determined without starting the certain effect even when the time display reaches the certain time. It is configured to be displayed,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect an advantageous development even when a certain effect is not started.

Here, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and only the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured, and when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and a symbol other than the jackpot symbol is also displayed. It may be configured to be fixedly displayed. Further, when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is always displayed in a definite manner. If the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is not confirmed and displayed. It may be configured to have.

Further, only when the timer display is displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. May be done. Further, even when the timer display is not displayed in the third mode, even if the time display reaches a certain time, a certain effect is not started and the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that the time display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when a certain time is reached and a certain effect is started.

Further, "The first aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the first time [for example, the timer display of" 5:00 "etc.].
The second aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the second time [for example, the timer display of "20:00" or the like].
The third aspect is an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is the third time [for example, the timer display of "7:77" or the like].
Of the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is the time displayed only when the first state is granted.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to pay attention to the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started.

Here, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is only the first time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the first. The mode may be a time other than the time of. Further, the first aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the first time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the first. It may be a mode in which the time may not be reached.

Further, in the second aspect, the time displayed first on the timer display may be displayed only on the second time, or the time displayed first on the timer display may be displayed on the second time. It may be a mode other than the time. Further, the second aspect may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the second time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the second. It may be a mode that may not be time.

Further, the third aspect may be an aspect in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is only the third time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the third. It may be a mode other than the time. Further, the third aspect may be a mode in which the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is always the third time, or the display of the time first displayed on the timer display is the third. It may be a mode that may not be time.

Further, in the first time and the second time, the second time may always be a longer time, and the second time may not be a longer time.

Further, the third time may be a time different from only the first time, or may be a time different from the time other than the first time. Further, the third time may always be different from the first time, or may be the same time as the first time.

Further, the third time may be a time different from only the second time, or may be a time different from the time other than the second time. Further, the third time may always be different from the second time, or may be the same time as the second time.

Further, the third time may be a time displayed in cases other than the case where the first state is given, and is a time that is always given when the first state is given. It may be a time when the first state is given and may not be given.

Further, "The time displayed first in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds, and the display after the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice display shown in FIG. 339 (3)]. In the timer display in TM1, it is possible to display after the decimal point, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, the time displayed first in the timer display may be a display of the number of seconds and may be configured to display only the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display may be configured to display the number of seconds and display other than the display after the decimal point. Further, the display of the time displayed first in the timer display may be configured to display the number of seconds and always display the display after the decimal point, or the time displayed first in the timer display. The display of may be configured so that the display of the number of seconds is displayed and the display after the decimal point may not be displayed.

Further, "The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the player may be able to recognize at a glance that it is a premier timer.

Here, "The display of the time that is first displayed in the timer display is configured so that the display of the number of seconds and the display after the decimal point can also be displayed [for example, the timer notice shown in FIG. 339 (3)]. In the timer display on the display TM1, it is possible to display after the decimal point, etc.],
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point becomes 0.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of the time when the display after the decimal point is other than 0.
The display of the first time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the third time as the display of the time first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display for which the timer display gives a notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, it is provided with an effect display means [for example, the 7-segment display device SEG shown in FIG. 384] capable of executing the effect display.
The effect display means is a means provided separately from the display means.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
When displaying the timer display on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "in the first case [for example, one of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the 7-segment display device SEG]" When the timer notice is displayed only in, etc.] ”), it is configured to be.
When the timer display is displayed by both the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, "the second case [for example, as shown in FIGS. 384 (3) to (12), the decorative symbol display device 208". When both the timer advance notice effect and the timer advance notice display on the 7-segment display device SEG are performed, etc.] ”).
In the first case, the effect may not be started.
In the second case, the effect is configured to start.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start of a certain effect may be expected depending on the number of timer displays for one certain effect.

Here, the effect display means may be capable of executing only the effect display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the effect display. Further, the effect display means may be one that always executes the effect display, or may not execute the effect display.

Further, the effect display means may be capable of displaying only the timer display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the timer display. Further, the effect display means may always display the timer display, or may not display the timer display.

Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect may not be started, and in the first case, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect may not be started. May be good. Further, in the first case, it may be configured so that a certain effect is not always started, or it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started.

Further, in the second case, it may be configured so that only a certain effect is started, and in the second case, it may be configured so that an effect other than a certain effect is also started. Further, in the second case, it may be configured so that a certain effect is always started, or it may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started.

It should be noted that the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means, rather than the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed in the end. In addition, the case where the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means is finally a big hit than the case where the timer display is displayed only by the effect display means and the display means. The symbol may be configured so that it can be easily displayed.

Further, when the timer display is displayed by both the effect display means and the display means, the timer display of either the effect display means or the display means may end in the middle.

Further, the effect display means and the display means display different times, and when a certain time is reached in the timer display of one of the effect display means and the display means, a certain effect is started. May be done.

Further, "The timer display is a display in which the display of the time is counted down. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 339 (3) to (9), the timer notice display TM1 counts down the timer display. Etc.],
The certain time is 0 [for example, the timer display of "00:00" shown in FIG. 339 (9)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to recognize that a certain time has been reached.

It should be noted that the certain time may include 0 including the decimal point, for example, may be displayed as "0.00" or "00.00", or may be displayed as "0:00" or "0:00". The display may be "00:00".

In the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is the first display [for example, a change effect display (hold change) of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to 391 (g). Pre-production display), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second display [for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 391 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 391 (d)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to 391 (p)] is waiting for the start of display.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to 391 (h), the ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the pre-effect display has been performed.],
The third display may be started in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), preparations are being made in a state where the UI unit UI3 for displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed. Image RDY display has started, etc.],
The display started in the first state, and the display may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (d) to 391 (n), the UI The image RDY in preparation, which started to be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, has finished displaying when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIGS. 391 (n) to 391 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q)] may be started [for example, FIGS. 391 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q) is a notice display for notifying that the jackpot is confirmed].
The second state may occur after the first state [for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (l) to (m), it was displayed when shifting to the swordsman reach. UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice not relating to the symbol variation display being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, the hold icon is held. Icon is not displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display [for example, FIG. 391 (for example, FIG. As shown in d), the image RDY being prepared is overlaid on the tutorial display unit TT1 in the UI unit UI3, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 391 (d). The display position of the image RDY being prepared and the display position of the image RDY being prepared as shown in FIG. 391 (m) are the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying a third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by making the user aware that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of the above may be configured so as to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a)].
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect [for example, the golden display aspect shown in FIG. 391 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore , The jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a)].
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect [for example, the golden display aspect shown in FIG. 391 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to be started [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is attached to the UI part UI3. Overlapping, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps the display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to do so. Also, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. It may be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap [for example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI unit UI3. No etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, focusing on the sixth display, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that this is not the case.

Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured so that "a certain reach effect [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q)] can be executed.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to 391 (q). ) Before the start],
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is executed [for example, a state in which the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to 391 (q) is executed]. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. In addition, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to 391 (p)].
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q)].
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect will be started [for example, in the mini-games shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to 391 (p), the arrow shot by the mini character MC1 of the lord. Foretells the display of the iron plate image TP by sticking in the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, a certain notice display may give a notice only that a certain effect is started, or may give a notice other than the start of a certain effect. Further, a certain notice display may always give a notice that a certain effect will be started, or may not give a notice that a certain effect will be started.

Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

Further, as a certain effect, only the fifth display may be displayed, or as a certain effect, a display other than the fifth display may be displayed. Further, the fifth display may always be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 391 (for example, FIG. i) As shown in Fig. (J), the image RDY in preparation is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across multiple fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, "the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIGS. 391 (f) to 391 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display may be erased in a certain symbol variation display. The started first display may be erased other than before the next started symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or the display is started in a certain symbol variation display. The first display may not be erased before the next symbol variation display is started.

In addition, "the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), the characters" intense heat "in the tutorial display unit TT1". A notice display consisting of [may be displayed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. In some cases. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. In some cases.

In addition, it is provided with "operation means [for example, effect button 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [for example, the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the deca button image 136aL is prepared. The display is started after the medium image RDY is started to be displayed],
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6) is displayed, the iron plate Image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared. Is displayed before the deca button image 136aL is started, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. In addition, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may always start after the third display is started, or may not start after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is being displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may be such that the display always ends before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 401 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the third displays may be displayed [for example, two images RDY1 and RDY2 being prepared may be displayed as shown in FIG. 404 (a)],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the preparing image RDY is enlarged and displayed. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 401 (g), the enlarged prepared image RDY overlaps with the variable icon h0. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. Good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display [for example, in FIGS. 401 (b) to (k). As shown, the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

Further, "The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is displayed as the tenth display [for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a)." Explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
A game table provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a character related to the first display [change effect display of display mode of hold icon (hold change advance effect display), for example, FIGS. 391 (f) to 391 (g). ) Shown in the ninja character NJ4, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of displays is the second display [hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode, for example, the hold icon in the red display mode shown in FIG. 391 (h)].
One of the plurality of types of displays is a third display [preparing display, for example, the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d)].
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a certain notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to 391 (p) and the display of the mini game and FIGS. 393 (b3) to (b4). It is a display indicating that the display of [Timer notice effect, etc. shown in] is waiting to start.
It is configured so that the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [Hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (f) to 391 (h), the first hold icon after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.],
It is configured so that the third display may be started in the first state [the display of the preparing display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (d)). As shown in, the display of the preparing image RDY is started while the UI part UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed],
The display is started in the first state. The third display is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The preparation display ends when the hold icon is hidden, for example, the display starts when the UI unit UI3 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 391 (d) to 391 (n). The image RDY being prepared is displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [the hold icon is not. After the display of the preparation display is completed in the display state, the mini game or timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (n) to 391 (o), the display of the preparation image RDY is displayed. After the end, the display of the mini game is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 393 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started with the UI part UI3 hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (c4), etc.] Is configured to start [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started, for example, in FIGS. 391 (o) to (q). As shown, when the display result of the mini game becomes a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 394 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button notice production by big button 136aL will start],
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state [the state in which the hold icon can be displayed may shift to the state in which the hold icon is not displayed, for example, FIG. 391. As shown in (l) to (m) of the same figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI section UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon shifts from the displayable state to the non-displayable state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed].
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI part UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

There was room for improvement in the display means of the conventional game table, but according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the display means.

In addition, according to this game console, it becomes easier to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays displayed in advance rather than the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and the fluctuation is concentrated. It may be entertaining.

In addition, according to this game table, for beginners, the preparatory notice can be used to excite and entertain whether it is the notice or pre-reading notice, and for some experienced people, the preparatory notice is the notice. It may be easier to understand if it is a display about, and it may be possible to clarify the point of expectation.

Further, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is given depending on the timing of the end of the preparation display.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

Further, the first display may be a display of a character related only to the second display, or may be a display of a character related to a display other than the second display. Further, the first display may be a display of a character that is always related to the second display, or may be a display of a character that may not be related to the second display.

Further, in the first state, only the third display may be started, or in the first state, a display other than the third display may be started. Further, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

In addition, the third display that started the display in the first state may end the display only in the second state, or the third display that started the display in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. Further, the third display whose display is started in the first state may always end the display in the second state, and the third display whose display is started in the first state is the second. The display may not end in the state of.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of the display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be always started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In the second state, the display of a certain notice display may not be started after the end of.

Further, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state may be started. In addition to after the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state.

Further, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state, or the third in the second state. After the display of the display of is finished, the display of a certain notice display may be started even in a state other than the second state.

Further, after a certain notice display is displayed, only a certain effect may be started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also started. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may always be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be started after a certain notice display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice not relating to the symbol variation display being executed.

Further, the second state may be reached only after the first state, or the second state may be reached even after a state other than the first state. Further, the second state may always be reached after the first state, or the second state may not be reached after the first state.

Further, the first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon can be displayed. .. Further, the first state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.

Further, the second state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states in which the display other than the hold icon is not displayed. Further, the second state may be one of the states in which the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.

Here, the first display may be a display of a character related to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in proofreading a character (navigation character) that is always displayed. ..

Further, the second display may be a display in which the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice display mode.

Further, the third display may be a character display being prepared, a character display, a notice item display, or a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display. It may be a running display.

Further, a certain notice display may be a display during execution of a countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, "The third state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The fourth state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
The third state is different from the first state,
The fourth state is different from the second state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which is started in the first state, may end in the first state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which is started in the first state, may end in the third state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

In addition, "the third display, which started in the first state, may end in the fourth state.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

Further, the first state may include a state in which the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

In addition, "It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the certain notice display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
It may be.

It should be noted that the certain notice display is not limited to the true notice display, and may be a fake notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display showing the result of the mini game.

Further, the character is not limited to a person, and may be a display of a mini item such as a notice item.

Further, "the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started", but "the second display is started after the display of the first display is started". The display of the display of the above is started. The display may be made. " Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. Further, the second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

In addition, "it is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state" means "the second state may occur following the first state". It may be "structured as such".

In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state without going through another state (for example, the fourth state). In addition, there may be a case where the first state is followed by another state (for example, a third state or a third state) and then the second state is entered. In addition, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state in the state where one symbol variation display is made.

Further, a certain effect may be faded in while a certain notice display is faded out.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display [display of an image including the hold icon display area, for example, UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (a)].
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon is configured to be displayable while the sixth display is displayed. [The hold icon is set to be displayable while an image including the hold icon display area is displayed, for example. The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed, etc.],
The hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [The hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (m). ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI part UI3 is hidden],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to make the hold icon stand out.

Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back surface of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be at least the display of an image that is always displayed on the back of the hold icon, or at least the display of an image that is not displayed on the back of the hold icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. You may be. In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be always displayed while the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed while the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured in.

Further, the hold icon may be configured to be displayable only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayable even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. You may be.

In addition, it may be configured so that only the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or display other than the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not always be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured in.

In addition, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

The sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the changing decorative pattern.

Further, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display overlaps with a part of the third display, the display of a part different from the part of the third display overlaps with the decorative symbol. You may.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the hold icon.

In addition, the sixth display may include the display of the pedestal of the variable icon.

Further, the sixth display may be different from the display of the background image.

Further, "In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display. [The hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed overlapping with the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI section UI3. It is overlaid on the display unit TT1, etc.],
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [Display of the preparation display in the state where the hold icon is displayed. The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same, for example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 391 (d) and the preparation image shown in FIG. 391 (m). The display position of RDY is the same, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by displaying a third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it strongly impresses that the third display is not a look-ahead notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, it may be possible to prevent oversight by making the user aware that a notice other than the change in the display mode of the hold icon has been made.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped and displayed only with the third display in the first state, or the display in the first state may be overlapped. It may be configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with a display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with the third display in the first state, or the sixth display may be displayed in the first state. At least a part of the display may be configured so as to overlap the third display and not be displayed.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed, or in the first state, the sixth display may be overlapped. Display other than at least a part of the display of the above may be configured so as to be overlapped with the third display.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 391 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is configured to be easy to start [The hold icon display is more than the case where the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, the hold icon of the look-ahead notice display mode is more likely to be displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) When displayed in the golden display mode, the hold icon in the red display mode is likely to be displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be more likely to be initiated, and the sixth display may be from the first aspect to the second aspect than if the sixth display did not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. When it changes to, it may be easier to start the display display other than the second display. Further, the case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is more than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may always be started, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of change, the display of the second display may not start.

Further, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display may start from the first mode to the second mode. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the display of the second display is more likely to be started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One of the plurality of types of modes is the first mode [default display mode, for example, the default display mode displayed in blue shown in FIG. 391 (a)].
One of the plurality of types is the second aspect [display mode of notice or look-ahead notice, for example, gold display mode shown in FIG. 391 (e)].
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display [Hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the look-ahead notice display mode, it is more likely to be a big hit. For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 391 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode. The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of pre-reading],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the sixth display may be displayable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be displayed in a mode other than the first mode and the second mode. You may. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first and second aspects, or may not be displayed in the first and second aspects. Good.

Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, only the jackpot symbol may be easily displayed in a definite manner, and the sixth display is from the first mode to the second mode as compared with the case where the sixth display does not change from the first mode to the second mode. When the mode is changed, it may be easier to confirm and display symbols other than the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol variation display is more when the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In, the jackpot symbol may always be definitely displayed, and the sixth display is from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to, the jackpot symbol may not be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, and the sixth display is the first mode. The jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed from the second aspect to the second aspect.

In addition, "when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. Is configured to facilitate the definite display of the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display. ”“ In a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when it does not change. It may be that there is.

In addition, "at least a part of the image including the hold icon display area is configured so that at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the first display. It overlaps with the character related to the change effect display of the display mode of the hold icon (hold change advance effect display). For example, as shown in FIG. 391 (f), a part of the UI unit UI3 overlaps with the ninja character NJ4. Wrapped, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, various information can be obtained by paying attention to the sixth display, and the game may be easy to understand.

Here, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to be overlapped with only the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured so that the display other than the first display may be overlapped and displayed. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed in the sixth display. It may be configured so that it may be overlapped with one display and may not be displayed.

Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the first display, or a display other than at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed. The display may also be configured to overlap the first display.

Further, a part of the display of the sixth display may be configured to overlap the display of the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be displayed as the first display. It may be configured so that it may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display overlaps with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Also, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. It may be configured in.

Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap the sixth display. ..

Further, "In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. In the state where both the image including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display (hold change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. The character related to the change effect display (hold change advance effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon is not overlapped. For example, as shown in FIG. 406 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4. Not etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, focusing on the sixth display, at first glance, the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it may be found that this is not the case.

Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed only with the first display without overlapping. Alternatively, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with a display other than the first display. It may be configured in. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without overlapping with the first display.

Further, even if both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. Also, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. May be done. Further, even if the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. Also, in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the first display. It may be configured.

Further, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the displays other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. .. Further, the first display and the sixth display may be configured so as not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap with each other. ..

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute "a certain reach effect [a specific super reach effect, for example, the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q)"].
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [the state before the specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIGS. 391 (m) to the same. The state before the start of super reach (swordsman reach) shown in Fig. (Q)].
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman) shown in FIGS. 391 (m) to (q). Reach) is being executed, etc.]
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, it may be configured so that a certain reach effect is always executed, or it may be configured so that a certain reach effect may not be executed.

Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect is started, or before the execution of the reach effect other than the certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states of. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

Further, the second state may be a state in which only a certain reach effect is executed, or a state in which a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is executed. In addition, the second state may be a state in which a certain reach effect is always executed, or a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.

The first state may be a reach state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and the second state may be a state in which SP reach is being executed in the certain fluctuation.

Further, the first state is a state before developing into SP reach in a certain fluctuation, and further, a certain state before reaching a reach state, and the second state is a state before reaching SP reach in a certain fluctuation. It may be in the state where reach is being executed.

That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, "The certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, a display of a timer notice effect shown in FIGS. 394 (b3) to (b5)].
A game table that features that. 』\
Was also explained.

The timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, it may be a certain type of timer notice display.

Further, "The certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIGS. 391 (o) to (q)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini games, it may be a certain type of mini games.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6), etc.].
It is configured so that the fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the fourth display is always displayed as a certain effect, or it may be configured so that the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 391 (q), etc.].
It is configured so that the fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. You may. Further, it may be configured so that the fifth display is always displayed as a certain effect, or it may be configured so that the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, and it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be confirmed and displayed than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed.

Further, when the fifth display appears only under special conditions, when at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is displayed only in a certain mode. There may be.

In addition, "the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [The preparatory display whose display has started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 391 (i) to 391 (j). In addition, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across multiple symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it is possible to give a sense of expectation across multiple fluctuations by the third display, and since the goal is easy to understand, the period for giving a sense of expectation may be clarified.

Here, the third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display is started, or The third display, which is started to be displayed in the symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed after the next start symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. The third display from which the display has been started may not be continuously displayed even after the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, "the first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be erased before the next symbol variation display is started [a certain symbol]. The character related to the change effect display (hold change pre-effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display has started in the variation display is deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, for example, FIG. 391 (f). ) ~ As shown in the figure (h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased only before the next start symbol variation display is started. The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be configured to be erased other than before the next start symbol variation display is started. Further, the first display which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started, or a certain symbol variation may be made. In the display, the first display whose display has been started may not be erased before the next start symbol variation display is started.

It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

Further, "In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed. [The notice is executed in the area where the preparation display is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 397 (a4), a notice display consisting of the characters "extreme heat" may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in the area where the third display is displayed, only a certain effect may be executed, or in the area where the third display is displayed, an effect other than the certain effect is also executed. In some cases. Further, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in the area other than the area where the third display is displayed. In some cases.

In addition, it is equipped with "operation means [buttons and levers, for example, effect buttons 136, etc.] that can be operated by the player.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a seventh display [display of an image of a button or lever, for example, a deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6)].
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started. [The display of the image of the button or the lever is started after the preparation display is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to 394 (b6), the deca button image 136aL is started to be displayed after the preparing image RDY is started to be displayed, etc.],
When the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, the certain effect is started [when the button (or lever) is operated while the display of the image of the button or lever is displayed, the notice is given. When the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. 394 (b6) is being displayed, the iron plate image TP is displayed, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display starts [The in-preparation display ends before the image of the button or lever starts to be displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b1) to 394 (b6), the display of the preparing image RDY is terminated before the display of the deca button image 136aL is started],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the operating means may be one that can be operated only by the player, or one that can be operated by a person other than the player. Further, the operating means may be one that is always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operating means, or may also prompt other than the operation of the operating means. In addition, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operating means, or may not prompt the operation of the operating means.

Further, the seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or may be started even after the third display is started. There may be. Further, the seventh display may always start after the third display is started, or may not start after the third display is started. May be good.

Further, a certain effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect is not started when the operating means is operated while the seventh display is displayed. There may be cases. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated only while the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated other than while the seventh display is being displayed. It may be started. Further, a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while only the seventh display is displayed, and a certain effect may be started when the operating means is operated while the display other than the seventh display is also displayed. May be started.

Further, the third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display ends other than before the display of the seventh display is started. It may be something to do. Further, the third display may be such that the display always ends before the display of the seventh display starts, or when the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be one.

The seventh display may be a deca button image of a normal button image and a deca button image. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the big button image is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the big button image is displayed.

Further, the seventh display may be a button image of a special color among the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, even if the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the special color button image is displayed. Good.

Further, the seventh display may be an image of the normal button image and an image of another operating means among the images of the operating means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the button. Here, when the normal button image is displayed and when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the jackpot symbol is displayed when the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed. It may be easy to confirm and display.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b5)].
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display will be started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 394 (b4) to (b6), a button notice effect is produced by a combined animation. Foretelling the start of, that is, foretelling the display of the big button image 136aL, etc.],
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eighth display may be a notice only that the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice other than the start of the display of the seventh display. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give a notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

Further, the third display may end only during the display of the eighth display, or may end during the display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during the display of the eighth display, or may not end during the display of the eighth display.

Further, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display [for example, the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 401 (a)].
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the third displays may be displayed [two preparing displays may be displayed, for example, two preparing images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed as shown in FIG. 404 (a). May be done, etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes [After the display of one of the two preparing displays is completed, the other is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, the image RDY in preparation is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. 401 (g)],.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [The preparing display whose display mode has changed overlaps the variable icon, for example, enlarged as shown in FIG. 401 (g). The displayed image RDY in preparation overlaps with the variable icon h0, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be easier to notice that two third displays are displayed.

Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, or only one third display may be displayed. It may be done.

Further, only the display mode of the other may change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The display mode other than the display mode of is also changed. Further, the display mode of the other may always change after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or the other after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. There may be cases where the display mode of is not changed.

Further, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is completed, or other than after the display of one of the two third displays is completed. The other display mode may change.

Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with a display other than the ninth display. Good. Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may always overlap with the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap with the ninth display. ..

Further, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap with the ninth display, and the display other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap with the ninth display. ..

In addition, "when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is terminated in one symbol variation display. [Two preparation displays are displayed. If so, they are all digested in the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 401 (b) to (k), the two preparing images RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. May end the display of all the displays other than the third display in the one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may always end in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may not be completed.

In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, and when two third displays are displayed, the display may end. , In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be completed. Further, only when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, except when two third displays are displayed. Also in the case of, the display of all the third displays may be completed in the one symbol variation display.

In addition, "the display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display [explanatory display, for example," Panda is a master of the lord "displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 391 (a)." Displayed explanation display, etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [Explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example. , As shown in FIG. 391 (a), the explanatory display is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 etc.],
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [The preparing display is displayed in a specific display area where the explanatory display is displayed, for example, FIG. 391 (d). ), The image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the explanation display is displayed],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed, or may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when it is displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. Further, when it is displayed, it may be always displayed in the first display area of the display means, and when it is displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. May be good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

Further, the "display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to be started" means "character display in preparation [for example," in preparation "in the preparing image RDY shown in FIG. Character display, etc.] "
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of displays is the eleventh display [ball removal display, for example, ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 422 (a1)].
The eleventh display is a display for urging the game ball to be ejected [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display of "please remove the ball" is used to encourage the ball to be removed, etc.],
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps with the ball removal display, for example, as shown in FIG. 422 (a2). In addition, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to discharge the game ball, or a display prompting other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the discharge of the game ball, or may be a display that may not prompt the discharge of the game ball.

Further, the eleventh display may be a display urging only the game ball to be discharged, or a display urging the discharge of something other than the game ball.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping only with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped and displayed in addition to the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed so as to always overlap with the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the third display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the third display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

Further, "In a state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the certain notice display is displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. [In a state where both the mini-game or timer notice and the ball-out display are displayed, at least a part of the mini-game or timer notice is overlapped with the ball-out display, for example, the figure. As shown in 422 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 overlaps with the ball removal error display ERR1],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to be overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is displayed without overlapping with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be the case.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. In a state other than the state in which both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display overlaps with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the display of the certain notice display is configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, all the displays of the certain notice display are configured to be displayed overlapping with the eleventh display. You may.

In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [ball game machine, for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "The game console is a slot machine [rotary game machine].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The hold icon may be used to indicate that the start of a certain effect on the slot machine is being held, but according to this game console, this can be realized.

In addition, in the above description,
"A production means capable of executing a timer effect [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] and
Display means [for example, decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons, and
It is a game table equipped with
The timer effect is configured so that the effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain effect") is started when the timer display becomes a display indicating a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 447 (9) to (13), when the timer display becomes "00:00" after the first timer notice display TM11 is started to be displayed, a pseudo continuous effect is produced. Is started, etc.],
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of the bomb shown in FIG. 447 (3)].
The second hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 447 (3) to (9)). As shown, the hold icon of the display mode of the bomb suggests that the timer notice effect will be started in the symbol variation display that is started next], etc.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game console, the content of the effect (timer effect is performed) may be known from the hold icon.

Here, the effect means may be one that can execute only the timer effect, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the timer effect. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes the timer effect, or may not execute the timer effect.

Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that only a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that when the timer display reaches a certain time after the timer display is started, an effect other than a certain effect may be started. Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect is always started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. It may be configured so that a certain effect may not be started when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time only after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started when the timer display reaches a certain time other than after the display of the timer display is started.

Further, the timer effect may be configured so that a certain effect may be started only when the timer display reaches a certain time after the display of the timer display is started. However, it may be configured so that a certain effect may be started even when the timer display is not displayed at a certain time after the timer display is started.

Further, the second hold icon may only suggest that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also suggest something other than the fact that the production may be started. Further, the second hold icon may always indicate that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the timer may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not suggest that the production may be started.

Hereinafter, the term "at least suggestion" includes not only implicit suggestion but also explicit notification.

Further, when the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may always start. For example, even if the second hold icon is displayed, the timer effect may not start. For example, a fake second hold icon that does not start the timer effect may be displayed, or a big hit occurs after the second hold icon is displayed and before the timer effect starts. After the jackpot game related to is completed, it may become a hold icon in the default display mode, and the timer effect may not be performed.

Further, "The second hold icon is a hold icon suggesting the content of the certain effect. [For example, the hold icon in the display mode of the bomb is as a certain effect, as shown in FIG. 449 (8). It suggests that there is a possibility of pseudo-continuous production],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to be interested in the effect content executed in the symbol variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice.

Here, the second hold icon may be something that can suggest only the content of a certain effect, or may be something that can suggest other than the content of a certain effect. In addition, the second hold icon may always suggest the content of a certain effect, or may not suggest the content of a certain effect.

Further, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a display mode in which three bombs are agglomerated as shown in FIG. 452 (3)]. ,
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 452 (3) to 453 (23). As shown in, the hold icon in the display mode in which the three bombs are in a lump suggests that the timer notice effect will be started three times in the symbol variation display to be started next.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the display of one hold icon may give a feeling of expectation that the timer effect will be performed a plurality of times.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the second display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the second display mode.

Further, the second display mode may only suggest that a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a plurality of display modes during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may also suggest something other than the start of the timer effect of the times. Further, the second display mode may always suggest that a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may not suggest that the timer effect of the times is started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that only a plurality of timer effects are started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of times during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may suggest that an effect other than the timer effect of the times is also started.

Further, the second display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. May also suggest that the timer effect is started a plurality of times.

In addition, "the second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in the first display mode [for example, the display mode consisting of one bomb shown in FIG. 447 (3)].
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that at least one timer effect is started before the end of the certain symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 447 (3) to 3). As shown in Fig. (9), the hold icon in the display mode consisting of one bomb suggests that one timer notice effect will be started in the next symbol variation display, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the hold icon may be used to give an expectation to the number of timer effects.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the first display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. You may. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the first display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started before the end of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be displayed. It may also suggest something other than the start of one timer effect before the end. Further, the first display mode may always suggest that one timer effect is started before the end of a certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be displayed. It may not suggest that one timer effect is started before the end.

Further, the first display mode may suggest that only one timer effect is started before the end of the certain symbol variation display, or the certain symbol variation display may be started. It may be suggested that an effect other than one timer effect is started before the end.

It should be noted that the second display mode may be configured so that the number of times the timer effect is executed is larger than that of the first display mode.

Further, as the display of the second hold icon, there are a plurality of display patterns (for example, pattern 1, pattern 2, etc.) suggesting one timer effect, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in pattern 2 rather than pattern 1. It may be configured for ease of use. Here, the pattern may be a color pattern, a size pattern, a shape pattern, or the like.

Further, even in the first display mode, the timer effect may be started a plurality of times.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold shown in FIG. 457 (3)].
The third hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon and the third hold icon are different hold icons.
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a certain character [for example, a character of a lord] is displayed.
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, shown in FIG. 457 (3). As described above, the hold icon in the display mode of Yoshimune hold is a look-ahead notice of the jackpot (super reach) and does not suggest that the timer notice effect will be started, etc.],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in the third display mode [for example, the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold shown in FIG. 458 (3)].
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character [for example, FIGS. 458 (3) to the same. As shown in Fig. (9), the hold icon in the display mode of the Yoshimune bomb hold, which is composed of the character of the lord, suggests that the timer notice effect will be started in the next symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the reliability of the look-ahead notice.

Here, the third hold icon may be one in which only a certain character is displayed, or one in which a character other than a certain character is also displayed. Further, the third hold icon may be one in which a certain character is always displayed, or may be one in which a certain character is not displayed.

Further, the third hold icon may not include only a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display other than a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution. Further, the third hold icon may not always include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting only that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting other than that the timer effect may be started during execution.

Further, the third hold icon may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or may be a display of a certain symbol variation display. It may not include a display suggesting that the timer effect may be started other than during execution.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only in the third display mode, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the third display mode. May be good. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed in the third display mode, or may not be displayed in the third display mode.

Further, the third display mode may only suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may also suggest something other than the timer effect being started during the execution of the symbol variation display. Further, the third display mode may always suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may not suggest that the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, the third display mode may indicate that only the timer effect is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that an effect other than the timer effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

Further, the third display mode may suggest that the timer effect is started only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display including a certain character, or may include a certain character. It may be suggested that the timer effect is started other than during the execution of the symbol variation display.

It should be noted that the timer effect may be started in the symbol variation display before the start of a certain symbol variation display. For example, the timer effect that the second hold icon suggests execution may be performed in another symbol variation display that precedes one symbol variation display. According to this, it may be possible to draw attention to the game while expecting that the timer effects are collectively performed in one symbol variation display.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to execute the notification related to the certain effect performed by the timer effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 452 (16), the replay icon RPL indicating that the pseudo-continuous effect was performed. Is notified by the display of],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the player can grasp the type of a certain effect, and after that, he / she may be able to see the timer effect while imagining the content of the certain effect.

Here, it may be configured so that only the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect can be executed, or the notification other than the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect can be executed. It may be a timer. Further, it may be configured to always execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect, or may not execute the notification regarding a certain effect performed by the timer effect. It may be the one that has been done.

Further, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon [for example, variable icon h0, etc.].
The second hold icon, which has been displayed as a hold icon, may be started to be displayed as a change icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first change icon") in connection with the start of the certain symbol change display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 452 (7) to (8), the first hold icon h11 in the display mode in which three bombs are grouped together has the following symbol variation display. When started, it will be displayed as a variable icon h0 in the same display mode],
A display in which the display mode of the first variation icon changes in connection with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display (hereinafter, "first display [eg, FIG. As shown in 452 (9) to FIG. 16 (16), the display mode of the variable icon h0 that changes from the display mode in which three bombs are in a single block to the display mode in which two bombs are in a single block, etc.] ". [For example, as shown in FIGS. 452 (8) to (16), a display mode in which three bombs are grouped together when one timer advance notice effect is executed. The variable icon h0 of is changed to a display mode in which two bombs are grouped together],
The first variation icon after the display mode is changed by the first display is a variation icon that can suggest the remaining number of times of the timer effect that can be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, , As shown in FIG. 452 (16), the variable icon h0 changed to the display mode in which the two bombs are agglomerated suggests that the timer advance notice effect is executed two more times, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the variable icon may function as a means for notifying the number of times of timer production.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the variable icon, or may be a display means other than the variable icon. Further, the display means may always display the variable icon, or may not display the variable icon.

Also, the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying only as the first variable icon, or the second hold that was displayed as the hold icon. The icon may be configured to start displaying as something other than the first variable icon. Further, the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured to always start to be displayed as the first variable icon, or the second hold icon displayed as the hold icon may be configured. It may be configured so that it may not be displayed as the first variable icon.

Also, only the second hold icon that was displayed as the hold icon may be configured to start displaying as the first variable icon, or the second hold that was displayed as the hold icon. Other than the icon, it may be configured so that it may be started to be displayed as the first variable icon.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first display is displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Display other than the first display may be displayed in connection with the execution of one timer effect. Further, it may be configured so that the first display is always displayed in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the first display may not be displayed in connection with the execution of one timer effect.

Further, the first display may be displayed only in relation to the execution of one timer effect during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or the execution of a certain symbol variation display. The first display may be displayed in relation to something other than the execution of one timer effect.

Further, the first variable icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may be capable of suggesting only the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. , It may be possible to suggest something other than the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. Further, the first variable icon after the display mode is changed by the first display may always indicate the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variable display. It may not suggest the remaining number of timer effects that can be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, "The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started [for example, FIG. 462 (6). A timer display is displayed above the hold icon of the bomb display mode shown in.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to imagine the content of a certain effect executed by the suggestion of the initial value display of time in the timer display.

Here, the second hold icon may be displayed only in a mode in which the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or the display of the timer display may be displayed. The time displayed when it is started may be displayed in a mode other than the suggestable mode. Further, the second hold icon may always be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started, or when the display of the timer display is started. The time displayed in may not be displayed in a suggestive manner.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed in a mode in which only the time displayed when the display of the timer display is started can be suggested, or the display of the timer display is started. A time other than the time displayed when the time is displayed may also be displayed in a suggestable manner.

Further, "a plurality of the timer effects (hereinafter, referred to as" a plurality of timer effects ") may be started at the same time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIG. 460 (17). Two timer notice effects have started at the same time, etc.],
One of the plurality of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIG. 460 (17)].
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the third timer advance display TM13 shown in FIG. 460 (17)].
Displayed when the display of the timer display in the first timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display [for example, second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 460 (17)") is started. Time to be set [for example, 7 seconds ("07: 00"), etc.] and the timer display in the second timer effect (hereinafter, "second timer display [for example, the third shown in FIG. 460 (17)). The time [for example, 8 seconds (“ 08:00 ”), etc.] displayed when the display of the timer notice display TM13, etc. is started is a different time.
When the first timer display reaches the certain time, the first effect [for example, the pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 461 (19)] may be performed as the certain effect.
When the second timer display reaches the certain time, the second effect [for example, the change effect of the display mode of the variable icon h0 shown in FIG. 461 (21)] is performed as the certain effect. There is
The first effect and the second effect are different effects.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be expected that a plurality of certain effects (notices) will be performed by combining timer effects.

Here, a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time only during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases. Further, a plurality of timer effects may always be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, or a plurality of timer effects may not be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.

Further, only a plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display, and effects other than the plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of a certain symbol variation display. There may be cases.

It should be noted that the start times of the plurality of timer effects may be different, and at least a part of the execution periods of the respective timer effects may overlap.

Further, the time displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may always be different times. It may be the same time.

Further, when the first timer display reaches a certain time, only the first effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the first timer display reaches a certain time, the first effect may be performed. As a certain effect, an effect other than the first effect may be performed. Further, the first effect may always be performed as a certain effect when the first timer display reaches a certain time, or a certain effect when the first timer display reaches a certain time. As a result, the first production may not be performed.

Further, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the first timer display reaches a certain time, and other than the case where the first timer display reaches a certain time. In some cases, the first effect may be performed as a certain effect.

Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, only the second effect may be performed as a certain effect, or when the second timer display reaches a certain time. As a certain effect, an effect other than the second effect may be performed. Further, when the second timer display reaches a certain time, the second effect may always be performed as a certain effect, and when the second timer display reaches a certain time, a certain effect may be performed. As a result, the second production may not be performed.

Further, the second effect may be performed as a certain effect only when the second timer display reaches a certain time, and other than the case where the second timer display reaches a certain time. A second effect may be performed as a certain effect.

Further, the first effect and the second effect may always be different or may be the same.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a ball removal error display [for example, a ball removal error display shown in FIG. 445 (9")].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display is displayed, etc.],
It is configured so that one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may overlap with the other display [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), the ball removal The error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may speed up the ball removal operation.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the ball removal error display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the ball removal error display, or may not display the ball removal error display.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to overlap only with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be displayed. May be configured so that may overlap with displays other than the other display. Further, one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be configured to always overlap with the other display, or one of the timer display and the ball removal error display may be the other display. It may be configured so that it may not overlap the display.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"A game table equipped with an effect means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of timer effects.
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a first timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 425 (3) to (12)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect [for example, a timer advance effect related to the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 425 (5) to (7)]. ,
In the first timer effect, the first timer display is the first after the display of the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 425 (3)] is started. The first effect [for example, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 425 (13)] may be started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a structured production,
In the second timer effect, the second timer display is the second after the display of the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 and the like shown in FIG. 425 (5)] is started. A second effect [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 425 (8)] is started in response to the display indicating the time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a production that is configured to be in some cases,
During the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, the period during which the first timer display is displayed [for example, the period shown in FIGS. 425 (3) to (12)] and the second timer display are displayed. The period in which the displayed periods [for example, the period shown in FIG. 425 (5) to FIG. (7)] overlap (hereinafter, in the first period [for example, in FIG. The period shown, etc.] ”) may occur,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means.

Further, according to this game table, it may be possible to excite a certain decorative symbol variation display effect by performing the timer effect in an overlapping manner.

Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of timer effects, or may be capable of executing an effect other than the plurality of types of timer effects. Further, the effect means may always execute a plurality of types of timer effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of timer effects.

Further, in the first timer effect, only the first effect may be started in response to the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured as such, or other than the first effect depending on the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production may also be started. In addition, the first timer effect is such that the first effect is always started when the first timer display becomes the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured, or the first effect may not be started in response to the first timer display being set to the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only when the first timer display becomes the first time after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be the first, depending on anything other than the first timer display being the first time after the first timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production of may be started.

Further, in the first timer effect, the first effect may be started only after the display of the first timer display is started, in response to the first timer display becoming the first time. It may be configured as such, or the first effect is given according to the first timer display becoming the first time even after the display of the first timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

Further, in the second timer effect, only the second effect may be started in response to the second timer display becoming the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured as such, or other than the second effect depending on the second timer display being set to the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured so that the production may also be started. In addition, the second timer effect is such that the second effect is always started when the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured, or the second effect may not be started in response to the second timer display becoming the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only when the second timer display becomes the second time after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be, or it may be second depending on anything other than that the second timer display has reached the second time after the display of the second timer display has started. It may be configured so that the production of may be started.

Further, in the second timer effect, the second effect may be started only after the display of the second timer display is started, in response to the second timer display becoming the second time. It may be configured as such, or a second effect may be produced according to the second timer display being set to the second time even after the display of the second timer display is started. It may be configured to be started.

Further, it may be configured so that only the first period may occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, a period other than the first period. May also occur. Further, it may be configured so that the first period always occurs during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may not occur during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

Further, the first period may be configured so that the first period may occur only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first period may occur even when a certain decorative symbol variation display is not displayed. It may be configured to occur.

Further, "at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice [[. For example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (5) to (8), of the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12, the second timer advance notice display TM12 The timer advance notice effect related to is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon to the look-ahead notice display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by using the timer effect as a look-ahead notice, it may be possible to excite the effect of a certain decorative symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a look-ahead notice. However, it is configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice. May be good. Further, at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice without fail. It may be configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed during the period of is not executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, it may be configured so that only at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice. , An effect other than the timer effect of at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may also be executed as a look-ahead notice. ..

Further, the timer effect of either the first timer effect or the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect that are being executed during the period may be configured to be executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, "one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed as a look-ahead notice. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (3) to (13), of the timer notice effect related to the first timer notice display TM11 and the timer notice effect related to the second timer notice display TM12, the first 1 The timer notice effect on the timer notice display TM11 is an effect for executing a pseudo-continuous effect which is a notice of the symbol variation display, and the timer notice effect on the second timer notice display TM12 is a display mode of the hold icon. It is a production to execute the change production of
Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 426 (24). ) ~ As shown in FIG. 427 (37), of the timer advance notice effect on the third timer advance notice display TM13 and the timer advance notice effect on the fourth timer advance notice display TM14, the timer advance notice effect on the third timer advance notice display TM13 is , It is an effect for executing the display of the strong cut-in image CI1a as a notice effect, and the timer advance effect related to the fourth timer advance notice display TM14 is an effect for executing the Sabohani group notice as a notice effect, etc. ],
There is a case where both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period are executed as pre-reading notices (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") [for example, As shown in FIGS. 428 (3) to 428 (13), of the timer advance notice effect on the first timer advance notice display TM11 and the timer advance notice effect on the second timer advance notice display TM12, the first timer advance notice display TM11 is displayed. The timer advance notice effect is an effect for executing a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, and the timer advance notice effect related to the second timer advance notice display TM12 is an effect executed to start the look-ahead mode. ],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect that the effect started later targets the same decorative symbol variation display as the object of the effect started earlier.

Here, when one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period is executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other is executed only as a look-ahead notice. There may be, or one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as something other than a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be read ahead. It may be executed as something other than a notice. Further, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be always executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may be always executed as a look-ahead notice. However, one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the other may not be executed as a look-ahead notice. May be good.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first one. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the period may be executed as other than the notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or may be executed in the first period. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect of the above may not be executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display.

Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed only as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed. Both the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice. Further, both the first timer effect and the second timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed as a look-ahead notice, or the first timer effect being executed in the first period may be executed. And both of the second timer effect may not be executed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, "in the first case, the first effect [for example, the look-ahead mode shown in FIG. 428 (6)] may be started during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. Has been
In the first case, the decorative symbol started after the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display executed in the period shown in FIGS. 428 (2) to (10)]. The first decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative symbol variation display [for example, decorative symbol variation display executed during the period shown in FIGS. 428 (11) to 18]") is displayed. It is configured so that the second effect [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 428 (13)] may be started.
In the first case, the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12 shown in FIGS. 428 (3) to (5)] and the second timer effect [ For example, the timer advance notice effect related to the first timer advance notice display TM11 shown in FIGS. 428 (3) to 428 (13)] is the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display [ For example, it is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice for [decorative symbol variation display, etc. executed during the period shown in FIGS. 429 (19) to 429 (29)].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the first decorative symbol variation display as a look-ahead notice while enlivening a certain decorative symbol variation display by a timer effect.

Here, in the first case, it may be configured so that only the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, a certain decorative symbol may be started. It may be configured so that an effect other than the first effect may be started during the display of the variable display. Further, in the first case, the first effect may be configured so as to always start during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the first effect may not be started during the process.

Further, in the first case, the first effect may be started only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in the first case, a certain decorative symbol variation may be started. It may be configured so that the first effect may be started other than during the display of the display. Further, only in the first case, the first effect may be started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or in a case other than the first case, or The first effect may be started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, only the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decoration may be started. It may be configured so that an effect other than the second effect may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, in the first case, the second effect may be always started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decorative symbol variation display may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may not be started during the display of.

Further, in the first case, the second effect may be started only during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in the first case, the first decoration may be started. It may be configured so that the second effect may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Further, only in the first case, the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display, and in cases other than the first case, It may be configured so that the second effect may be started during the display of the first decorative symbol variation display.

Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed only as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be one, or it may be executed as something other than the look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display. Further, in the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect are always executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display that is started after the first decorative symbol variation display. It may be a thing, or it may not be executed as a look-ahead notice for the same decorative symbol variation display started after the first decorative symbol variation display.

Further, "In the first case, at least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes [for example, FIGS. 428 (3) to 428 (3) to FIG. A certain effect executed as a result of the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIG. (13) is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of the panda, etc.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, since one of the effects is a pending change, it may be expected that the other effect will be performed on the decorative symbol variation display that is the target of the pending change.

Here, in the first case, one of the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, and in the first case, the first effect. The effect of both the first effect and the second effect may be an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.

It should be noted that a look-ahead notice other than the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon may be given.

In addition, "the first effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 434 (9)].
The second effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon [for example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon shown in FIG. 434 (6)].
The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect [for example, as shown in FIG. 434 (9). 1 Timer notice display As a result of the timer notice effect related to TM11, as a certain effect, an effect of changing the hold icon of the panda display mode to the display mode of the panda is performed, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to boost the rank-up of the hold icon in multiple stages by a timer effect.

Here, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be further changed only by the other effect, or the first and second effects may be further changed. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the effects may be further changed by an effect other than the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first and second effects may be changed by the other effect, and the first and second effects may be changed. The hold icon whose display mode has changed due to one effect may not change due to the other effect.

Further, only the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by one of the first effect and the second effect may be further changed by the other effect, and of the first effect and the second effect. Other than the hold icon whose display mode is changed by one effect, the display mode may be further changed by the other effect. Further, the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by only one of the first and second effects may be further changed by the other effect, and of the first and second effects. The hold icon whose display mode has been changed by an effect other than one effect may be further changed by the other effect.

In addition, "the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started, and the timing related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period. It is configured so that the timing at which the second effect is started may be different [for example, as shown in FIGS. 425 (5) to 13), the timer notice effect on the first timer notice display TM11. The timing at which the pseudo-continuous effect executed by is started and the timing at which the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon executed by the timer advance effect on the second timer advance notice TM12 is started are different, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, there may be variations in the start timing of the effect related to the timer effect.

Here, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. It may be configured so that only the timing to be performed may be different, or the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the timing at which the first effect is executed are executed in the first period. The timing other than the timing at which the second effect related to the second timer effect is started may be different. In addition, the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect related to the second timer effect being executed in the first period are started. The timing may be configured to be different, and the timing at which the first effect related to the first timer effect being executed in the first period is started and the second effect being executed in the first period are started. It may be configured so that the timing at which the second effect related to the timer effect of the above is started may be the same.

Further, "as the first effect, the first notice icon [for example, the swordsman character KNG shown in FIG. 430 (10)] may be displayed [for example, FIG. 430 (3). )-As shown in FIG. (10) (FIGS. 432 (3) to (10)), as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11, the swordsman character KNG is used as a certain effect. Is displayed, etc.],
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect related to the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 432 (3) to (10)] is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display. Is after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 432 (2) to 433 (24)]. Then, during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 433 (20) to (22)] is performed. It is configured to get started and
When the first timer effect [for example, the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11 shown in FIGS. 430 (3) to (10)] is executed as a look-ahead advance, the certain decorative symbol is executed. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the variable display [for example, the decorative symbol variable display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 430 (2) to 18]], the certain decorative symbol is displayed. In response to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 431 (19) to (29)] that is started after the variation display. The effect [for example, the effect of the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIGS. 431 (25) to 27]] is configured to start.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to pay attention to whether the notice icon displayed as the first effect is performed as a notice or a look-ahead notice.

Also, if the second effect is started first, the advance notice effect according to the first notice icon is the same as the second effect, depending on whether the second effect is a notice or a look-ahead notice. In some cases, it can be expected to start with a decorative symbol variation display.

Here, it may be configured so that only the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect, or something other than the first notice icon may be displayed as the first effect. It may be configured as follows. Further, it may be configured so that the first notice icon is always displayed as the first effect, or it may be configured so that the first notice icon may not be displayed as the first effect.

Further, the first notice icon may be displayed only as the first effect, or the first notice icon may be displayed as an effect other than the first effect. It may be configured as follows.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is performed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, an effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. May be done. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is performed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be configured to always start during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon may not be started while a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. You may.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol variation is performed after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, or After the first notice icon is displayed while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started in addition to the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. You may. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display, a certain decorative symbol is displayed only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started during the display of the variable display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variable display, or In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. You may.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after a certain decorative symbol variation display. A decoration may be configured so that only the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is used. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect other than the effect corresponding to the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. The production may also be configured to start. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be always started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration After the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon starts during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it is started after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display and after a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started only during the display of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration may be started. After the first notice icon is displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, the effect according to the first notice icon other than during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display. May be configured to start. Further, when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, it starts after a certain decorative symbol variation display only after the first notice icon is displayed during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The effect corresponding to the first notice icon may be started while the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or when the first timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, a certain decoration is performed. In addition to after the first notice icon is displayed while the symbol variation display is displayed, the effect corresponding to the first notice icon during the display of the decorative symbol variation display that is started after a certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed. May be configured to start.

In addition, "It is configured so that a second notice icon may be displayed as the second effect.
When the second timer effect is executed as a notice regarding the certain decorative symbol variation display, the certain decorative symbol variation display is displayed after the second notice icon is displayed. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started while the decorative pattern variation display is displayed.
When the second timer effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, after the second notice icon is displayed during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display, and after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the second notice icon is started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display to be started.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

Further, when either the first effect or the second effect is a notice regarding a certain decorative symbol variation display and the other is a look-ahead notice, the notice icon displayed as the first effect and the second effect The notice icon displayed as an effect may be the same notice icon.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of mini games,
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game [for example, the treasure chest mini-game shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (18)].
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, a dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (10)].
In the first mini-game, the first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 435 (3)] becomes the first time [for example, "00:00" etc.]. It is a mini-game from which the result is derived before [For example, in the mini-game of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (18), the timer display of the first timer notice display TM11 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
In the second mini-game, the second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 or the like shown in FIG. 435 (5)] becomes the second time [for example, "00:00" or the like]. It is a mini-game from which the result is derived before [For example, in the mini-game of the dice shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (10), the timer display of the second timer notice display TM12 is "00:00". Results have been derived before],
The first effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini-game [for example, the result of the treasure box mini-game shown in FIGS. 435 (15) to (18) is successful. In the case of the result of, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (21) is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11],
The second effect is configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini-game [for example, the result of the dice mini-game shown in FIGS. 435 (7) to (10) is successful. In the case of the result of, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. 435 (12) to the display mode of the bancho is executed as a certain effect performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the second timer advance display TM12. Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible not only to wait for the timer display time, but also to pay attention to the result of the mini game during that time.

Here, it may be configured so that only a plurality of types of mini-games can be executed, or it may be configured so that a game other than the plurality of types of mini-games can be executed. Further, it may be configured to always execute a plurality of types of mini-games, or may be configured to not execute a plurality of types of mini-games.

Further, in the first mini-game, only the result may be derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, in the first mini-game, the result may be always derived before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, in the first mini-game, the result may be derived only before the first timer display reaches the first time, or before the first timer display reaches the first time. In addition to this, the result may be derived.

Further, in the second mini-game, only the result may be derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. Other than the result may be derived. Further, in the second mini-game, the result may be always derived before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. The result may not be derived in some cases.

Further, in the second mini-game, the result may be derived only before the second timer display reaches the second time, or before the second timer display reaches the second time. In addition to this, the result may be derived.

Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect according to only the result of the first mini-game, or the first effect may be an effect according to a result other than the result of the first mini-game. It may be configured to be. Further, the first effect may be configured to be an effect according to the result of the first mini-game, or the first effect may not be an effect according to the result of the first mini-game. It may be configured to be.

Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according only to the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may be an effect according to a result other than the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured to be. Further, the second effect may be configured to be an effect according to the result of the second mini-game, or the second effect may not be an effect according to the result of the second mini-game. It may be configured to be.

The type of the mini-game may be the same for the first timer effect and the second timer effect, or may be different. Further, it may be configured so that the start order and the type of the mini game are associated with each other.

Further, it may be configured to suggest the first effect or the second effect during the execution of the mini-game. For example, when the mini-game is successful, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. It may be possible to perform an effect such as suggesting.

Further, "When the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect is performed in the first mode [for example, FIGS. 435 (15) to 435 (FIG.) to FIG. If the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in (18) is a successful result, the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 436 (21) is performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11. It is executed as a production, etc.],
When the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the third aspect [for example, FIGS. 437 (15) to (18). If the result of the treasure chest mini-game shown in (1) is a failure result, the loss effect shown in FIG. 438 (20) is performed as a result of the timer advance effect on the first timer advance display TM11. Will be executed, etc.],
When the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second aspect [for example, FIGS. 435 (7) to (10)). When the result of the mini-game of the dice shown in FIG. 435 (12) is a successful result, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. Performed as a resulting production, etc.],
When the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth aspect [for example, FIGS. 437 (7) to (10)). When the result of the mini-game of the dice shown in FIG. 437 is a result of failure, the effect of changing the hold icon shown in FIG. Performed as a resulting production, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, there are cases where the variation of the production by the combination of the mini game and the timer production is increased and the interest can be enhanced.

Here, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. The first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the first aspect when one result is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect may be configured so as to be performed in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game is the first. The first effect may not be performed in the first aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the first result, only the first effect may be performed in the first aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the first. When the result is the above, the production other than the first production may be configured to be performed in the first mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the first mode only when the result of the first mini game is the first result, or the result of the first mini game is the first. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the first aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed only in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the third aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect without fail, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. The first effect may not be performed in the third aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the first mini-game is the third result, only the first effect may be performed in the third aspect, or the result of the first mini-game may be the third. When the result is the above, the production other than the first production may be configured to be performed in the third mode. Further, the first effect may be configured to be performed in the third mode only when the result of the first mini game is the third result, or the result of the first mini game is the third. The first effect may be configured to be performed in the third aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the second aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may be configured to be performed in a mode other than the second mode when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode without fail, and the result of the second mini-game may be the second. The second effect may not be performed in the second aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the second result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the second. If the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the second mode only when the result of the second mini game is the second result, or the result of the second mini game is the second. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the second aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed only in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. The second effect may be configured to be performed in an aspect other than the fourth aspect when the result of the above is obtained. Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect without fail, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. The second effect may not be performed in the fourth aspect when the result of the above is obtained.

Further, when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, only the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth result. If the result of the above is obtained, an effect other than the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect. Further, the second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect only when the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, or the result of the second mini-game may be the fourth. The second effect may be configured to be performed in the fourth aspect even in cases other than the case where the result of the above is obtained.

In addition, "One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a third mini-game.
When the result of the third mini-game is the fifth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the fifth mode.
When the result of the third mini-game is the sixth result, the third effect is configured to be performed in the sixth aspect.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
May be.

Further, the time display [for example, "10:00" etc.] of the "first timer display [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 or the like shown in FIG. 441 (3)] is the first time. It is a display showing the time until [for example, 10 seconds, etc.].
The time display of the first timer display is configured to be changed before the first time is reached [for example, the th-order displayed as "10:00" in FIG. 441 (3). 1 As shown in FIGS. 441 (12) to 441 (13), the timer display TM11 has the time shown in the timer display added before it reaches “0:00”],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there is a case where the player can have expectations by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the first timer effect.

Here, the time display of the first timer display may indicate only the time until the first time is reached, or may indicate the time other than the time until the first time is reached. You may. Further, the time display of the first timer display may always indicate the time until the first time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the first time is reached. You may.

Further, the time display of the first timer display may be changed only before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display becomes the first time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the first timer display may be configured to be changed before the first time, or the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, only the time display of the first timer display may be changed before the first time, and the time display other than the time display of the first timer display is also the first. It may be configured to be changed before the time of.

Further, "The time display of the second timer display is a display indicating the time until the second time is reached.
The time display of the second timer display is configured to be changed before the second time.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make the player have expectations by functioning as an effect of changing the mode of the second timer effect.

Here, the time display of the second timer display may indicate only the time until the second time is reached, or may indicate the time other than the time until the second time is reached. You may. Further, the time display of the second timer display may always indicate the time until the second time is reached, or may not indicate the time until the second time is reached. You may.

Further, the time display of the second timer display may be changed only before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display becomes the second time. It may be configured so that it may be changed other than before. Further, the time display of the second timer display may be configured to be changed before the second time, or the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time. It may be configured so that it may not be done.

Further, only the time display of the second timer display may be changed before the second time, and the time display other than the time display of the second timer display is also the second. It may be configured to be changed before the time of.

Further, during the display of "the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display performed during the period shown in FIGS. 425 (2) to 426 (22)], the first timer display [for example, FIG. The first timer notice display TM11 and the like shown in 425 (3)] may be set to the first time [for example, the first timer notice display TM11 shown in FIG. 425 (3) is the same. "00:00" is displayed at the timing shown in Fig. (12)],
The second timer display [for example, the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 425 (5)] may be set to the second time during the display of the certain decorative symbol variation display. [For example, in the second timer notice display TM12 shown in FIG. 425 (5), "0:00" is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (7), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Here, it may be configured so that only the first timer display may be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. Display other than the timer display of is also configured to be the first time. Further, the first timer display may be configured to always be the first time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be the first time.

Further, the first timer display may be set to the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the first timer display may be set to the first time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. One timer display may be configured to be the first time.

Further, it may be configured so that only the second timer display may be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second time may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The display other than the timer display may be configured to be the second time. Further, the second timer display may be configured to always be the second time during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, or the second timer display may be set during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it may not be the second time.

Further, the second timer display may be configured to be the second time only during the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display, and the second timer display may be set to a second time other than the display of a certain decorative symbol variation display. The second timer display may be configured to be the second time.

Further, "The timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may be different. [For example, the first timer notice display TM11 is shown in FIG. 425 (3). ), And the second timer notice display TM12 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 425 (5), etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the start timing of the timer display is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may differ, or the display of the first timer display is started. The timing may be different from the timing other than the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started. Further, the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the timing at which the display of the second timer display is started may always be different, and the timing at which the display of the first timer display is started and the second The timing at which the display of the timer display of is started may be the same.

Further, "The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started may be different from the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started [for example, the time display may be different. As shown in FIG. 425 (3), the first timer notice display TM11 displays "10:00" when the display is started, and the second timer notice display TM12 is shown in FIG. 425 (5). As shown, "03:00" is displayed when the display is started],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the time displayed when the timer display is started is diversified, so that it may be possible to enhance the interest.

Here, only the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. , The time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display other than the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be different. .. Further, the time display displayed when the display of the first timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may always be different, and the first time display may be different. The time display displayed when the display of the timer display is started and the time display displayed when the display of the second timer display is started may be the same.

In addition, "the first time and the second time are the same time [for example," 00:00 "and the like].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start timing of the production may be easily recognized.

The first time and the second time may be different times.

Also, "The first time is 0,
The second time is 0,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the start timing of the production may be more easily grasped.

The first time may be other than 0. Moreover, the second time may be other than 0.

In addition, it is configured to be able to display "ball removal error display [for example, ball removal error display shown in FIG. 445 (9")].
The ball removal error display is a display that may be displayed in a plate full tank error state [for example, as shown in FIG. 445 (9 ″), when a lower plate full tank error occurs, a ball removal error occurs. Display is displayed, etc.],
The display of at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display is configured to overlap with the ball removal error display [for example, FIG. 445 (9 ″). As shown in, the ball removal error display overlaps the front side of the first timer notice display TM11 and the second timer notice display TM12, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the timer display may speed up the ball removal operation.

Here, only the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayable, or a display other than the ball removal error display may be displayable. Further, the ball removal error display may be configured to be displayed without fail, or the ball removal error display may not be displayed.

Further, the ball removal error display may be displayed only in the dish full tank error state, or may be displayed in a state other than the dish full tank error state. Further, the ball removal error display may be always displayed in the dish full tank error state, or may not be displayed in the dish full tank error state.

Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap only with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped with each other. The display of at least one of the two timer displays may be configured to overlap with a display other than the ball removal error display. Further, at least one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to always overlap with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. The display may be configured so that at least one of the displays may not overlap the ball removal error display.

Further, only one of the first timer display and the second timer display may be configured to overlap with the ball removal error display, or the first timer display and the second timer display may be overlapped. Both displays of the timer display may be configured to overlap the ball removal error display.

In addition, "The effect means is a display means.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In the above description,
"A game console equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of hold icons.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon [for example, the hold icons h11, h12 of the choi heat notice shown in FIG. 465 (22), and the group notice suggestion shown in FIG. 467 (22). Hold icons h11, h12, hold icons h11, h12, h13 in the display modes of "a", "mi", and "da" shown in FIG. 475 (6), hold icons h11, h12 for bowling pins shown in FIG. 478 (4). , H13, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, hold icon h11 of the chance hold display mode shown in FIG. 464 (9)].
The first hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed as a notice regarding the display of the symbol change during execution (hereinafter, referred to as “the change notice”) [for example, the choice shown in FIG. 465 (22). The hold icons h11 and h12 of the heat notice are big hit notices related to the symbol variation display during execution, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of the group notice suggestion shown in FIG. 467 (22) are the Sabohani group in the symbol change display during execution. The notice is a notice, and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the display modes of "a", "mi", and "da" shown in FIG. Yes, the holding icons h11, h12, and h13 of the boring pin shown in FIG. 478 (4) indicate the start of the boring mini-game in the running symbol variation display, etc.],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice [for example, the hold icon h11 in the chance hold display mode shown in FIG. 464 (9) is a look-ahead notice hold icon, etc. ],
The second hold icon is a hold icon that is not displayed as the change notice.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the display means.

Further, according to this game table, the change notice may be given by using the hold icon.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

In addition, the first hold icon may be displayed only as the change notice, or may be displayed as other than the change notice. Further, the first hold icon may be always displayed as the change notice, or may not be displayed as the change notice.

Further, the second hold icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice, or may be displayed as a non-look-ahead notice. Further, the second hold icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice.

In addition, the second hold icon may not be displayed only as the change notice, or may not be displayed other than the change notice. In addition, the second hold icon may not always be displayed as the change notice, or may be displayed as the change notice.

In addition, "The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of variable icons.
One of the plurality of types of variable icons is the first variable icon [for example, the variable icon h0 of the default display mode shown in FIG. 464 (2)].
One of the plurality of types of variable icons is a second variable icon [for example, the variable icon h0 of the display mode of the princess character (this secured stay) shown in FIG. 466 (15)].
The first variation icon is a variation icon that may be displayed when the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit.
The first variation icon is a variation icon that may be displayed even when the result of the symbol variation display being executed is out of order.
The second variation icon is a variation icon that may be displayed when the result of the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit.
The second variation icon is a variation icon that is not displayed when the result of the symbol variation display being executed is out of order.
The first hold icon is a hold icon that is more likely to be displayed when the first change icon is displayed than when the second change icon is displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to raise expectations for a big hit in the running symbol variation display.

Further, according to this game table, when the correct variation icon is displayed, the player can see the symbol variation display with peace of mind, so that it may be easy to pay attention to other effects.

Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of variable icons, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of variable icons. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of variable icons, or may not display a plurality of types of variable icons.

Further, the first variation icon may be displayed only when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a big hit, or the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a jackpot. It may be displayed in cases other than the case. Further, the first variation icon may be displayed whenever the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a big hit, or is displayed when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a jackpot. It may not be done.

Further, the first variation icon may be displayed only when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is out of order, or the result of the symbol variation display in progress is out of order. It may be displayed in cases other than the case. In addition, the first variation icon may be displayed whenever the result of the symbol variation display being executed is out of order, or is displayed when the result of the symbol variation display in progress is out of order. It may not be done.

Further, the second variation icon may be displayed only when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a big hit, or the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a jackpot. It may be displayed in cases other than the case. Further, the second variation icon may be displayed whenever the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a big hit, or is displayed when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is a jackpot. It may not be done.

In addition, the second variation icon may not be displayed only when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is out of order, or the result of the symbol variation display during execution is lost. It may not be displayed even in cases other than the case. In addition, the second variation icon may not always be displayed when the result of the symbol variation display during execution is out of order, or the result of the symbol variation display in progress is out of order. It may be displayed in some cases.

Further, the first hold icon may be easier to be displayed when the first variable icon is displayed than when the second variable icon is displayed. It may be more difficult to display when the first variable icon is displayed than when the variable icon of is displayed.

Further, the first hold icon may be always displayed when the first variable icon is displayed, or may not be displayed when the second variable icon is displayed. There may be.

Further, the first hold icon may be less likely to be displayed when the second variable icon is displayed than when the first variable icon is displayed.

In addition, "mini games [for example, the mini game of Amidakuji shown in FIGS. 464 (3) to (9), the mini game of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 464 (16) to 467 (22), and 478 (7) to FIG. A production means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, etc.] capable of executing the [boring mini-game, etc.] shown in FIG.
The first hold icon is a hold icon that is not displayed as a look-ahead notice.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the default display mode shown in FIG. 464 (1)].
The third hold icon is the default hold icon and
At least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon being displayed may be changed to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game [for example, the figure. As shown in 465 (22), the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon of the Choi fever notice according to the result of the treasure chest mini-game, as shown in FIG. 467 (22). Depending on the result of the mini-game, it has changed to a hold icon that suggests a group notice, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to liven up the notice by changing the hold icon in the mini game.

Here, the directing means may be one that can execute only the mini-game, or may be one that can execute other than the mini-game. Further, the directing means may be one that always executes the mini-game, or may not execute the mini-game.

Further, the first hold icon may not be displayed only as a look-ahead notice, or may not be displayed other than as a look-ahead notice. Further, the first hold icon may not always be displayed as a look-ahead notice, or may be displayed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to change to only the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. At least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon in the middle may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game. Further, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to always change to the first hold icon according to the result of the mini game, or the displayed third hold icon may be changed. At least a part of the hold icons among the three hold icons may be configured so that they may not change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game.

Further, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to change to the first hold icon only depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. At least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon in the game may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result other than the result of the mini game.

Further, only a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon being displayed may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. Hold icons other than at least some of the hold icons in the third hold icon may also be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini-game.

In addition, some of the hold icons of the third hold icon being displayed may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. All the hold icons of the third hold icon may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini-game.

It should be noted that at least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon being displayed may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. At least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon of the above may be changed to a part of the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game to announce the start of the mini game.

Further, the mini game may be executed as a notice of the notice.

In addition, the mini-game may be started in a state where the hold icon is not displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state") [for example, as shown in FIG. 471 (3), the number of holds is Amidakuji mini-game is started when it is 0],
When the third hold icon is increased and displayed in the period from the start of the mini-game in the first state until the result of the mini-game is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). .) There is
The third hold icon, which is increased and displayed in the first case, may be changed to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game.
When the mini-game is started in the first state and the hold icon is increased and displayed after the result of the mini-game is displayed (hereinafter, "the second case [for example, FIG. 473 (3) to the same"). As shown in FIG. (10), the Amidakuji mini-game is started in a state where the number of holds is 0, and the hold icon (first hold icon h11) is increased and displayed after the result of the mini-game is displayed. , Etc.] ”),
The increased hold icon displayed in the second case may be displayed by the first hold icon instead of being displayed by the third hold icon, depending on the result of the mini game. [For example, as shown in FIG. 473 (10), the first hold icon h11 displayed after the result of the Amidakuji mini-game is displayed constitutes the hold icon of the intense heat notice. It is displayed in the display mode of "heat", etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to make a pending change promptly according to the result of the mini game.

Also, according to this game console, it may be possible to prevent the result from being known first during the mini-game.

Here, the mini-game may be started only in the first state, or the mini-game may be started in a state other than the first state. Further, the mini game may always be started in the first state, or the mini game may not be started in the first state.

Further, after the mini-game is started in the first state, only the third hold icon may be increased and displayed in the period until the result of the mini-game is displayed, or the first state may be displayed. In some cases, the number of hold icons other than the third hold icon may be increased in the period from the start of the mini game to the display of the result of the mini game. Further, after the mini-game is started in the first state, the third hold icon may be displayed in an increased manner during the period until the result of the mini-game is displayed, or the mini-game may be displayed in the first state. The third hold icon may not be increased and displayed during the period from the start to the display of the result of the mini game.

Further, after the mini-game is started in the first state, the third hold icon may be increased and displayed only during the period until the result of the mini-game is displayed, or the first state may be displayed. In some cases, the third hold icon may be increased and displayed even in a period other than the period from the start of the mini-game to the display of the result of the mini-game.

Further, the third hold icon increased and displayed in the first case may be configured to change only to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be configured in the first case. The third hold icon that is increased and displayed in the above may be configured to change to a hold icon other than the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game. Further, the third hold icon that is increased and displayed in the first case may be configured to always change to the first hold icon according to the result of the mini game, or may be increased and displayed in the first case. The third hold icon may be configured so that it may not change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini-game.

Further, the third hold icon that is increased and displayed in the first case may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending only on the result of the mini game, or may be configured in the first case. The third hold icon that is increased and displayed in the above may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on a result other than the result of the mini game.

Further, only the third hold icon that is increased and displayed in the first case may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or in the first case. The hold icons other than the third hold icon that are increased and displayed in the above may also be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game.

Further, the third hold icon that is increased and displayed only in the first case may be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be configured in the first case. In other cases, the increased display of the third hold icon may also be configured to change to the first hold icon depending on the result of the mini game.

Further, the mini-game may be started in the first state, and only the hold icon may be increased and displayed after the result of the mini-game is displayed, or the mini-game is started in the first state. After the result of the mini-game is displayed, items other than the hold icon may be displayed in an increased manner. Further, the mini-game may be started in the first state and the hold icon may be displayed in an increased manner after the result of the mini-game is displayed, or the mini-game is started in the first state and the result of the mini-game. May not be displayed in an increasing number after the hold icon is displayed.

In addition, the mini-game may be started in the first state, and the hold icon may be increased and displayed only after the result of the mini-game is displayed, or the mini-game is started in the first state. The hold icon may be increased even after the result of the mini game is displayed.

Further, the hold icon that is increased and displayed in the second case may be displayed only by the first hold icon without being displayed by the third hold icon, depending on the result of the mini game. In the second case, the increased hold icon is displayed as a hold icon other than the first hold icon instead of being displayed as the third hold icon, depending on the result of the mini game. It may be configured so that it may be. Further, even if the hold icon that is increased and displayed in the second case is configured to be always displayed by the first hold icon instead of being displayed by the third hold icon, depending on the result of the mini game. It is configured so that the increased hold icon in the second case may not be displayed in the first hold icon without being displayed in the third hold icon depending on the result of the mini game. You may.

In addition, the hold icon that is increased and displayed in the second case may be displayed by the first hold icon instead of being displayed by the third hold icon only according to the result of the mini game. The increased hold icon in the second case may be displayed in the first hold icon instead of being displayed in the third hold icon, depending on the result other than the result of the mini game. It may be configured to be the case.

Also, in the second case, only the increased hold icon may be displayed as the first hold icon instead of being displayed as the third hold icon, depending on the result of the mini game. The hold icon other than the increased hold icon in the second case may be displayed as the first hold icon instead of being displayed as the third hold icon, depending on the result of the mini game. It may be configured so that it may be.

In addition, "the display of a plurality of the first hold icons may give a notice that one of the mini-games will be started as the change notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 475 (6)," A. Amidakuji mini-game is started by the third hold icon h13 in the display mode of "", the second hold icon h12 in the display mode of "mi", and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of "da". Etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, by notifying the start of the mini-game by displaying the first hold icon, it may be possible to notify that the result of the mini-game is not a look-ahead notice but a change notice.

Here, the display of the plurality of first hold icons may only notify that one mini-game will be started as the fluctuation notice, or the display of the plurality of first hold icons may be used to notify one. In some cases, a notice other than the start of the mini-game as the change notice may be given. In addition, the display of the plurality of first hold icons may be used to foretell that one mini-game will be started as the change notice, and the display of the plurality of first hold icons may be used to notify the one mini-game. It may not be announced that it will start as a fluctuation notice.

In addition, there may be a case where one mini-game is started as the fluctuation notice only by displaying a plurality of first hold icons, or by a display other than the display of the plurality of first hold icons. There may be a case where one mini-game is announced to be started as the change notice.

In addition, there may be a case where one mini-game is started as the fluctuation notice only by displaying a plurality of first hold icons, or display of hold icons other than the plurality of first hold icons. It may be announced that one mini-game will be started as the change notice.

It should be noted that there is only one hold icon that gives a notice that the mini-game will start rough, and a notice corresponding to the hold corresponding to this hold icon may be given.

In addition, "the first hold icon may change from the first hold icon to the third hold icon after the change notice is given by the first hold icon [for example, FIG. As shown in 467 (26) to FIG. (32), the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the group notice suggestion, and after the corresponding Sabohani group notice is given, the group is confirmed at the timing when the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. The hold icon that was displayed in the notice suggestion display mode has changed to the default display mode, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, according to this game table, it may be easy to recognize that the change notice has been given and the game has ended.

Here, after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, it may be configured so that only the first hold icon may change to the third hold icon, or the first hold may be changed. After the change notice is given by the icon, it may be configured so that the hold icon may change from the first hold icon to a hold icon other than the third hold icon. Further, the change may be configured so as to always change from the first hold icon to the third hold icon after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, or the change by the first hold icon. It may be configured so that the first hold icon may not change to the third hold icon after the notice has been given.

Further, it may be configured so that the first hold icon may change to the third hold icon only after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, or the first hold icon may be changed. It may be configured so that the first hold icon may change to the third hold icon even after the change notice has been given.

It should be noted that the change may be changed from the first hold icon to the third hold icon before the change notice is given by the first hold icon, or the change is made by the first hold icon. It may be configured so that the first hold icon may change to the third hold icon while the change notice is being given.

Further, "It is configured so that after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, the change may change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon [for example, FIG. As shown in 477 (31'), the hold icon of the "heat" display mode constituting the display mode of the Choi heat notice has changed to the chance hold display mode which is the look-ahead notice display mode.] ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have expectations for the hold icon after the change notice has been made.

Here, after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, it may be configured so that only the first hold icon may change to the second hold icon, or the first hold icon may be changed. After the change notice is given by the icon, it may be configured so that the hold icon may change from the first hold icon to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. Further, the change may be configured so as to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, or the change by the first hold icon. It may be configured so that the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon after the notice has been given.

Further, it may be configured so that the first hold icon may change to the second hold icon only after the change notice is given by the first hold icon, or the first hold icon may be changed. It may be configured so that the first hold icon may change to the second hold icon even after the change notice has been given.

It should be noted that the change may be changed from the first hold icon to the second hold icon before the change notice is given by the first hold icon, or the change is made by the first hold icon. It may be configured so that the first hold icon may change to the second hold icon while the fluctuation notice is being given.

Further, "the display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, the icon BCHO of the face of the chief shown in FIG. 475 (11), the bowling icon BOWL shown in FIG. 478 (5), and the like].
The notice icon may announce the start of the mini-game [for example, the chief's face icon BCHO shown in FIG. 475 (11) announces the start of the Amidakuji mini-game and is shown in FIG. 478 (5). The bowling icon BOWL has announced the start of a bowling mini-game, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the start of the mini-game can be announced by the notice icon, so that the chance of expecting the start of the mini-game may increase.

Here, the display means may be one that can display only the notice icon, or may be one that can display a display other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the notice icon, or may not display the notice icon.

Further, the notice icon may give notice only the start of the mini game, or the notice icon may give notice other than the start of the mini game. Further, the notice icon may always give notice of the start of the mini game, or the notice icon may not give notice of the start of the mini game.

Further, "The first hold icon is a hold icon that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.
The type of the mini-game to be started is configured to be predictable by the display mode of the first hold icon [for example, as shown in FIG. 475 (6), the third display mode of "A". The hold icon h13, the second hold icon h12 in the display mode of "mi", and the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of "da" have announced that the mini game of Amidakuji will be started. The hold icons h11 to h13 of the bowling pin display mode shown in (4) foretell that the bowling mini-game will start, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to expect which mini-game will be started by the first hold icon.

Here, the first hold icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. Further, the first hold icon may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

Further, depending on the display mode of the first hold icon, only the type of the mini-game to be started may be foretold, or the display mode of the first hold icon other than the type of the mini-game to be started. Things may also be configured to be noticeable. Further, the display mode of the first hold icon may be configured to always give notice of the type of mini-game to be started, or the display mode of the first hold icon may be used to determine the type of mini-game to be started. It may be configured so that it may not be announced.

Further, the type of the mini-game to be started may be configured to be able to be announced only by the display mode of the first hold icon, or the type of the mini-game to be started by other than the display mode of the first hold icon. May be configured to be noticeable.

Further, "at least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon being displayed may be changed to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game [". For example, as shown in FIGS. 464 (7) to (9), the first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is changed to the chance hold display mode],.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the result of the mini game.

Here, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to change to only the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game. At least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to change in addition to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game. Further, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to always change to the second hold icon according to the result of the mini game, or the displayed third hold icon may be changed. At least a part of the hold icons among the three hold icons may be configured so that they may not change to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game.

Further, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending only on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. At least a part of the hold icons of the third hold icon in the middle may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending on the result other than the result of the mini game.

Further, at least a part of the hold icons of the displayed third hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. The hold icon other than at least a part of the hold icons in the third hold icon may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game.

In addition, some of the hold icons of the third hold icon being displayed may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini game, or may be displayed. All of the third hold icons may be configured to change to the second hold icon depending on the result of the mini-game.

In addition, the "holding icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice" is a "holding icon that gives a notice regarding the symbol change display that is the target of the displayed hold icon".
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, "one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a fourth hold icon [for example, hold icon h11 in the display mode of the secured reservation shown in FIG. 466 (9)].
The fourth hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice.
The second hold icon and the fourth hold icon are different hold icons.
The fourth hold icon is a hold icon in which the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed when it is displayed.
When the fourth hold icon is displayed, the first hold icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to have expectations for the display of the fourth hold icon.

Further, according to this game table, since the appropriate hold icon is displayed, the first hold icon may not be displayed, so that the effect may not be redundant.

Here, the fourth hold icon may be displayed only as a look-ahead notice, or may be displayed as something other than as a look-ahead notice. Further, the fourth hold icon may be always displayed as a look-ahead notice, or may not be displayed as a look-ahead notice.

Further, the second hold icon and the fourth hold icon may be partially different or all may be different.

Further, when the fourth hold icon is displayed, only the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when it is displayed, the symbol other than the jackpot symbol is finally displayed. May also be confirmed and displayed. Further, when the fourth hold icon is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally confirmed and displayed, and when it is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. It may not be done.

Further, when the fourth hold icon is displayed, only the first hold icon may be not displayed, or when the fourth hold icon is displayed, the first hold may be displayed. It may be configured so that the hold icon other than the icon is not displayed. Further, when the fourth hold icon is displayed, the first hold icon may not be displayed without fail, and when the fourth hold icon is displayed, the first hold icon may be displayed. It may be configured so that an icon may be displayed.

Further, the first hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the fourth hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon may not be displayed even when the fourth hold icon is not displayed. It may be configured so that the hold icon of is not displayed.

The mini game may be played while the fourth hold icon is displayed.

Further, "a storage means [for example, RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400] in which a plurality of types of notice tables are stored] is provided.
It is configured so that the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "hold number") is displayed.
It is configured so that the combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed is determined by using the notice table corresponding to the number of holds from the plurality of types of notice tables.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, it may be possible to display a first hold icon according to the number of holds.

Here, as the storage means, only a plurality of types of notice tables may be stored, or a storage means other than the plurality of types of notice tables may be stored. Further, the storage means may be one in which a plurality of types of notice tables are always stored, or may be one in which a plurality of types of notice tables are not stored.

Further, only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds may be displayed, or other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds may be displayed. Further, it may be configured so that the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds is always displayed, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds may not be displayed.

Further, it may be configured so that only the combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed is determined by using the notice table corresponding to the number of holds from a plurality of types of notice tables, or from a plurality of types of notice tables. A display mode other than the combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed may be determined by using the notice table corresponding to the number of holds. Further, it may be configured so that the combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed is always determined by using the notice table corresponding to the number of holds from a plurality of types of notice tables, or from a plurality of types of notice tables. It may be configured so that the combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed may not be determined by using the notice table corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, it may be configured so that the combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed is determined by using only the notice table corresponding to the number of holds from the plurality of types of notice tables, or from the plurality of types of notice tables. A combination display mode of the first hold icon to be displayed may be determined by using a table other than the notice table corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, "the first hold icon is displayed in the first combination display mode [for example, the display mode of the choi heat notice by the hold icon of the" choi "display mode and the hold icon of the" heat "display mode]. May be
When the first hold icon is displayed in the second combination display mode [for example, the display mode of the heat notice by the hold icon of the "super" display mode and the hold icon of the "heat" display mode]. There is
The first combination display mode is a combination display mode with a plurality of hold icons.
The second combination display mode is a combination display mode with a plurality of hold icons.
The first combination display mode and the second combination display mode are partially different combination display modes [for example, in the display mode of the choi heat notice and the display mode of the intense heat notice, the display mode of "choi". The display mode is different between the hold icon of and the hold icon of the "super" display mode],
The first combination display mode and the second combination display mode are partly the same combination display mode [for example, in the display mode of the Choi heat notice and the display mode of the intense heat notice, "heat" The hold icon of the display mode is common, etc.],
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, when only a part of the hold icon is displayed, it is possible to have an expectation as to which combination display mode is used, and it may be possible to increase the motivation to increase the hold. ..

Here, the first notice icon may be displayed only in the first combination display mode, or the first notice icon may be displayed in a display mode other than the first combination display mode. There may be cases. Further, the first notice icon may always be displayed in the first combination display mode, or the first notice icon may not be displayed in the first combination display mode.

Further, the first notice icon may be displayed only in the second combination display mode, or the first notice icon may be displayed in a display mode other than the second combination display mode. There may be. Further, the first notice icon may always be displayed in the second combination display mode, or the first notice icon may not be displayed in the second combination display mode.

Further, "one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a fifth hold icon [for example, a hold icon in the display mode of the timer notice suggestion shown in FIG. 463].
The fifth hold icon is a hold icon that announces that a certain notice [for example, timer notice effect, etc.] will be performed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to expect the start of a certain notice by displaying the fifth hold icon.

Here, the fifth hold icon may foretell only that a certain notice will be given, or may give a notice for something other than a certain notice. In addition, the fifth hold icon may always give notice that a certain notice will be given, or may not give notice that a certain notice will be given.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

In addition, in the above description,
"Game area [for example, game area 124, etc.]
A plurality of winning means provided in the game area [for example, first special drawing starting port 230, second special drawing starting port 232A, 232B, general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234, etc.]
A plurality of game ball detection means [for example, a ball detection sensor included in various sensors 320, an out ball detection sensor SWout, etc.] and
A counting means capable of counting the number of game balls [for example, CPU 304 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] and
A determination means that can execute error determination [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232A, 232B, a general winning opening 226a, 226b, etc.].
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is to the first game ball detecting means [for example, a ball detecting sensor for detecting the entry of a ball into the first special figure starting port 230, to the second special figure starting port 232A. A ball detection sensor that detects the entry of a ball, a ball detection sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the general winning opening 226a, etc.]
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a third game ball detecting means [for example, an out ball detecting sensor SWout or the like].
The first game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "first game ball") that has won a prize in the first winning means.
The third game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (hereinafter, referred to as "third game ball").
The counting means is referred to as the number of the first game balls (hereinafter, "first number [for example, special figure 1 counter, special figure 2A counter, special figure 2B counter, general left counter, general right counter, etc.]". It is a means that can count.)
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the third game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "third number [for example, counter 1, counter 2, etc.]").
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the first number when the third number becomes a certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

In the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the determination means, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the determination means.

Here, the counting means may be capable of counting only the number of game balls, or may be capable of counting a number other than the number of game balls. Further, the counting means may be one that always counts the number of game balls, or may not count the number of game balls.

Further, the determination means may be one that can execute only the error determination, or may be capable of executing determination other than the error determination. Further, the determination means may be one that always executes the error determination, or may not execute the error determination.

Further, the first game ball detecting means may be capable of detecting only the first game ball, or may be capable of detecting game balls other than the first game ball. Further, the first game ball detecting means may be one that always detects the first game ball, or may not detect the first game ball.

Further, the third game ball detecting means may be capable of detecting only the third game ball, or may be capable of detecting a game ball other than the third game ball. Further, the third game ball detecting means may always detect the third game ball, or may not detect the third game ball.

Further, the counting means may be one that can count only the first number, or may be one that can count other than the first number. Further, the counting means may be one that always counts the first number, or may not count the first number.

Further, the counting means may be one that can count only the third number, or may be one that can count other than the third number. Further, the counting means may be one that always counts the third number, or may not count the third number.

The determination means may be capable of executing only error determination by determining the first number when the third number reaches a certain value, or the third number may have a certain value. It may be possible to execute a determination other than the error determination by determining the first number when becomes. Further, the determination means may always execute the error determination by determining the first number when the third number reaches a certain value, or the third number may be present. When the value is reached, the error determination may not be executed by determining the first number.

In addition, "It is configured to be able to take one of multiple gaming states.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state [for example, non-electric support state, etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, an electric support state, etc.].
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is more advantageous to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area than to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which it is more advantageous to launch the game ball toward the right side of the game area than to launch the game ball toward the left side of the game area.
The first winning means is a winning means in which a game ball fired toward the left side of the game area is easier to win than a game ball fired toward the right side of the game area.
The counting means is a means capable of counting the third number for each gaming state [for example, switching counter 1 and counter 2 according to the gaming state to count out balls, etc.].
The determination means is the first when the third number in the first gaming state becomes the certain value [for example, when the counter 1 becomes a multiple of 1000 in the non-electric support state]. It is a means to execute error judgment by judging the number of
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform highly accurate error determination by performing error determination in consideration of the gaming state.

Here, it may be configured so that only one of a plurality of gaming states can be taken, or it is possible to take a gaming state other than one of a plurality of gaming states. May be done. Further, it may be configured to always take one of a plurality of gaming states, or it may be configured to not take one of a plurality of gaming states.

Further, the first gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state when the gaming ball is launched toward the left side of the gaming area, or is disadvantageous when the gaming ball is launched toward the right side of the gaming area. It may be in a gaming state.

Further, the second gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state when the gaming ball is launched toward the right side of the gaming area, or is disadvantageous when the gaming ball is launched toward the left side of the gaming area. It may be in a gaming state.

Further, the first winning means may be one in which only a game ball fired toward the left side of the game area can win a prize, or a game ball other than the game ball fired toward the left side of the game area. May also be a prize-winning one. Further, as the first winning means, the game ball launched toward the left side of the game area may always win a prize, or the game ball launched toward the left side of the game area may not win a prize. There may be.

In addition, the first winning means may be one in which a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area can win a prize, or a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area does not always win a prize. It may be.

Further, the counting means may be capable of counting only a third number for each gaming state, or may be capable of counting a number other than the third number for each gaming state. Further, the counting means may always count the third number for each gaming state, or may not count the third number for each gaming state.

Further, the determination means may execute only the error determination by determining the first number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in one gaming state reaches a certain value, the first number may be determined to execute other than the error determination. Further, the determination means may always execute the error determination by determining the first number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in one gaming state reaches a certain value, the error determination may not be executed by determining the first number.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination only by determining the first number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. The error determination may be executed by other than determining the first number when the third number in one gaming state reaches a certain value.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination by determining only the first number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in one gaming state reaches a certain value, the error determination may be executed by determining a number other than the first number.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination by determining the first number only when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. The error determination may be executed by determining the first number even when the third number in one gaming state is not a certain value.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination by determining the first number when only the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. Even when a value other than the third number in one gaming state is reached, the error determination may be executed by determining the first number.

Further, "In the determination means, the third number [for example, counter 2 etc.] in the second gaming state [for example, electric support state etc.] becomes the certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000]. In this case, it is a means for executing error determination by determining the first number [for example, special figure 2B counter, general right counter, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to determine whether or not the hitting method is different from the recommended hitting method.

Here, the determination means may execute only the error determination by determining the first number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value, the first number may be determined to execute a determination other than the error determination. Further, the determination means may always execute the error determination by determining the first number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value, the error determination may not be executed by determining the first number.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination only by determining the first number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. The error determination may be executed by other than determining the first number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination by determining only the first number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value, an error determination may be executed by determining a number other than the first number.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination by determining the first number only when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. The error determination may be executed by determining the first number even when the third number in the second gaming state is not a certain value.

Further, the determination means may execute the error determination by determining the first number when only the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. Even when a number other than the third number in the second gaming state becomes a certain value, the error determination may be executed by determining the first number.

The determination value of the first number determined to be an error in the first gaming state and the determination value of the first number determined to be an error in the second gaming state may be the same or different. Good. Further, the determination value of the first number determined to be an error in the second gaming state may be smaller than the determination value of the first number determining an error in the first gaming state.

Further, a certain value in the first gaming state and a certain value in the second gaming state may be the same or different. Further, a certain value in the second gaming state may be larger than a certain value in the first gaming state, and a certain value in the first gaming state is larger than a certain value in the second gaming state. It may be large. In addition, a certain value may be changed depending on the length of stay in the gaming state, and the time when the second gaming state (the gaming state in which the number of gaming balls is likely to increase) in which right-handed hitting is recommended is frequently determined. Some values may be reduced as much as possible.

Further, "In the counting means, the third number [for example, counter 1 etc.] in the first gaming state [for example, non-electric support state etc.] is set to the certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000]. It is a means for resetting the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when the situation becomes
The counting means is when the third number [for example, counter 2 etc.] in the second gaming state [for example, electric support state etc.] becomes the certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000 etc.]. A means of resetting the third number corresponding to the second gaming state.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number in the first gaming state, and before the third number corresponding to the first gaming state reaches the certain value. Even when the gaming state changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the third gaming state corresponding to the first gaming state. It ’s a way to not reset the number,
When the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case, the counting means counts the third number corresponding to the first gaming state. A way to resume,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even when the game changes from the first game state to the second game state, the third number corresponding to the first game state is not reset, so that many error judgment samples can be taken. In some cases.

Here, the counting means may reset only the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value, the number other than the third number corresponding to the first gaming state may also be reset. Further, the counting means may be one that always resets the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in one gaming state reaches a certain value, the third number corresponding to the first gaming state may not be reset.

Further, the counting means may reset the third number corresponding to the first gaming state only when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value. The third number corresponding to the first gaming state may be reset even when the third number in one gaming state does not reach a certain value.

Further, the counting means may reset only the third number corresponding to the second gaming state when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. When the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value, the number other than the third number corresponding to the second gaming state may also be reset. Further, the counting means may be such that when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value, the third number corresponding to the second gaming state is always reset, or the third number may be reset. When the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value, the third number corresponding to the second gaming state may not be reset.

Further, the counting means may reset the third number corresponding to the second gaming state only when the third number in the second gaming state reaches a certain value. The third number corresponding to the second gaming state may be reset even when the third number in the second gaming state does not reach a certain value.

Further, the counting means may be the one that does not reset only the third number corresponding to the first gaming state even in the first case, and even in the first case, the first Other than the third number corresponding to the gaming state of, may not be reset. Further, the counting means may not always reset the third number corresponding to the first gaming state even in the first case, and even in the first case, the first It may be the one that may reset the third number corresponding to the gaming state of.

Further, the counting means restarts only the counting of the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case. If the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case, it may be something other than the count of the third number corresponding to the first gaming state. It may be the one that resumes. Further, the counting means always restarts the counting of the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case. If the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case, the count of the third number corresponding to the first gaming state is not restarted. There may be one.

In addition, "The second gaming state is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number [for example, counter 2 or the like] in the second gaming state, and the third number corresponding to the second gaming state is the third number. The third corresponding to the second gaming state even when the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state before reaching a certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000]. A way to reset numbers,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the second game state (electric support state) is an advantageous state, and there are cases where an error determination can be performed for each block of the advantageous state. In addition, when it is determined that an error occurs, it may be easy to understand from which game state the error (possibility of goto action) occurred.

Here, the counting means is a state in which the third number is counted in the second gaming state, and the gaming state is set before the third number corresponding to the second gaming state reaches a certain value. Even when the state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, only the third number corresponding to the second gaming state may be reset, or the third in the second gaming state. When the number is being counted and the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state before the third number corresponding to the second gaming state reaches a certain value. May also reset anything other than the third number corresponding to the second gaming state. Further, the counting means is a state in which the third number is counted in the second gaming state, and the gaming state is the first before the third number corresponding to the second gaming state reaches a certain value. Even when the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state, the third number corresponding to the second gaming state may be reset without fail, or the third number in the second gaming state may be reset. Even when the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state before the third number corresponding to the second gaming state reaches a certain value. It may not reset the third number corresponding to the second gaming state.

Further, the counting means is a state in which the third number is counted in the second gaming state, and the gaming state is the first before the third number corresponding to the second gaming state reaches a certain value. The third number corresponding to the second gaming state may be reset only when the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state, or the third number may be reset in the second gaming state. Cases other than the case where the game state is changed from the second game state to the first game state before the third number corresponding to the second game state reaches a certain value in the counting state. It may also reset the third number corresponding to the second gaming state.

The third number may not be reset.

In addition, "the game console is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, in the above description,
"Game area [for example, game area 124 shown in FIG. 482] and
A plurality of winning means provided in the game area [for example, first special drawing starting port 230, second special drawing starting port 232A, 232B, general winning opening 226a, 226b, variable winning opening 234, etc.]
A plurality of game ball detection means [for example, a ball detection sensor included in various sensors 320, an out ball detection sensor SWout, etc.] and
A counting means capable of counting the number of game balls [for example, CPU 304 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300] and
A determination means capable of executing error determination [for example, CPU 304 of the main control unit 300] and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is a first winning means [for example, a first special drawing starting port 230, a second special drawing starting port 232A, a general winning opening 226a, etc.].
The first winning means is a winning means that is easy to win when the game ball is launched toward the left side of the game area.
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is to the first game ball detecting means [for example, a ball detecting sensor for detecting the entry of a ball into the first special figure starting port 230, to the second special figure starting port 232A. A ball detection sensor that detects the entry of a ball, a ball detection sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the general winning opening 226a, etc.]
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a third game ball detecting means [for example, an out ball detecting sensor SWout or the like].
The first game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "first game ball") that has won a prize in the first winning means.
The third game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (hereinafter, referred to as "third game ball").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the first game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "first number [for example, special figure 1 counter, special figure 2A counter, general left counter, etc.]"). ,
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the third game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "third number [for example, counter 1, counter 2, etc.]").
It is possible to take one of multiple gaming states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state [for example, non-electric support state, etc.].
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state [for example, an electric support state, etc.].
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball toward the left side of the gaming area.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area.
The counting means is a means capable of counting the third number for each game state [for example, switching counter 1 and counter 2 according to the game state to count out balls, etc.].
When the third number in the first gaming state becomes a certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000] [for example, the counter 1 becomes a multiple of 1000 in the non-electric support state]. Cases, etc.] is a means for determining an error by determining the first number.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.
Further, "In the determination means, the third number [for example, counter 2 etc.] in the second gaming state [for example, electric support state etc.] becomes the certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000]. In this case, it is a means for executing error determination by determining the first number [for example, special figure 2B counter, general right counter, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
Further, "In the counting means, the third number in the first gaming state [for example, non-electric support state or the like] is the certain value [for example, the counter 1 or the like]. It is a means for resetting the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when it becomes a multiple of 1000, etc.].
The counting means is when the third number [for example, counter 2 etc.] in the second gaming state [for example, electric support state etc.] becomes the certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000 etc.]. A means of resetting the third number corresponding to the second gaming state.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number in the first gaming state, and before the third number corresponding to the first gaming state reaches the certain value. Even when the gaming state changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the third gaming state corresponding to the first gaming state. It ’s a way to not reset the number,
When the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case, the counting means counts the third number corresponding to the first gaming state. A way to resume,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "The second gaming state is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number [for example, counter 2 or the like] in the second gaming state, and the third number corresponding to the second gaming state is the third number. Even if the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state before reaching a certain value [for example, a multiple of 1000, etc.], the third gaming state corresponding to the second gaming state. A way to reset numbers,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.
In addition, "the game table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100, etc.].
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Below, I will add what I have explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means and
A symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A notice means that can execute multiple types of notices,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area in the image display means.
The hold display is a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is held (hereinafter, referred to as "holding number").
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or more notice icons can be displayed.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
In the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the first notice icon among the plurality of types of notice icons is larger than the first number when the first number is digested. It is configured so that it is easier to get a big hit when it is digested by two numbers,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same mode as the notice.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the fake notice is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 3.
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number and the third number during the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
The game console described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
A hold display means capable of displaying according to the number of holds is provided.
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
The game console described in Appendix 5,
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 6.
Equipped with a look-ahead notice means that can execute look-ahead notice
The look-ahead notice means is a means capable of executing the look-ahead notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game console described in Appendix 7.
During the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be read ahead is being executed, the notice icon may be digested by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 8.
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
The game console described in Appendix 9.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third symbol variation display") executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation is executed. The notice icon that is digested during the period when the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 10.
The hold display area is an area in which the hold display can be displayed up to a seventh number.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 11.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice is a notice that the first effect is executed.
The second notice is a notice that the second effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 12.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 13.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
While the first symbol variation display is being displayed, the display of the first notice icon may be started as the notice icon.
The first notice icon that was started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display that was not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The game console described in Appendix 15.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game console according to Appendix 15 or 16.
As a pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 17.
During the display of one symbol variation display, the case where the first number of the first notice icons are digested is larger than the case where the second number of the first notice icons are digested. Easy to become
The second number is larger than the first number.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 18.
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the digested symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 19.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The game console described in Appendix 20
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fake notice indication.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display.
The display mode of the first false notice display is the same display mode as the display mode of the first notice display.
It is configured so that the symbol variation display on which the first false notice display is displayed is out of alignment.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 21.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a look-ahead effect display.
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the look-ahead effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 22.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 23.
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative pattern variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 24.
The first notice icon, which is started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display, is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 25.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the display means.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 26.
Equipped with production control means
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game console described in Appendix 27.
Main control means and
A symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 15 to 28.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
The first display means that can execute the symbol variation display,
The second display means,
It is a game table equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of pending operation of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "pending number") in the reserved display area.
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is exhausted.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area.
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested.
During the period in which the symbol variation display is executed once, the case where the notice icon is digested by the second number larger than the first number is a big hit than the case where the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become
The second display means is displayed in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as “second symbol change display”), which is the target of pre-reading, is started. A display means capable of displaying the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The game console described in Appendix 30
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game console according to Appendix 30 or 31.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same mode as the notice display mode.
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means
After the fake notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be out of order.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 32.
The second display means is a display means composed of a plurality of display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
The game console described in Appendix 33.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is an image display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is a hold display means.
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area.
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
The game table, characterized in that the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
The game console described in Appendix 34.
The hold display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 32.
The second display means is an image display means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern.
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 36.
During the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be exhausted by the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol variation display") executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period during which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 36.
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be surely digested by the end of the symbol variation display to be read ahead.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 38.
The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console described in Appendix 39.
The notice icon that is digested during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is executed during the period during which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start to appear,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 40.
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying up to a seventh number according to the number of holds.
The notice icon display area is an area in which the notice icon can be displayed up to the eighth number.
The seventh number is different from the eighth number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 41.
Equipped with production means that can execute multiple types of production
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is the first notice display.
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a second notice display.
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display.
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display is displayed.
When the second notice icon is digested, the second notice display is displayed.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is different from the second effect.
The first notice display is a notice display for notifying that the first effect is executed.
The game table is characterized in that the second notice display is a notice display for notifying that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 30 to 42.
Main control means and
Production control means and
With
The main control means is a means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means.
The main control means is a means capable of executing control of the first display means.
The effect control means is a means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 30 to 43.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is an effect display.
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the first notice icon.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is the second notice icon.
By digesting the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "first number notice icons") in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Is configured to
The first number of notice icons are notice icons including the first notice icon.
The game console characterized in that the first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the second notice icon.

According to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having a characteristic display.

Also, according to this game console, there is a possibility that the first effect display will be displayed from the time when one of the first number icons is displayed until the first number icon is digested. It may be possible to continue to have a sense of expectation for something.

In addition, according to this game table, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation for a big hit by making the number of notice icons appear to be a symbol change before the hold to be read ahead.

Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or three or more notice icons.

Further, when the first notice icon is digested, the effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, or when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding effect display B may be performed, or when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested, the effect display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be done.

Also, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, and only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. It may be displayed in.

(Appendix 46)
The game console described in Appendix 45.
Even if the second number of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "second number notice icons") is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons including one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the first notice icon and the other notice icon of the second notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, and the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon in one symbol variation display is displayed. However, since the first effect display is not displayed, the player who can see the first effect display may be given a sense of superiority.

Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

In addition, there may be an effect display displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

Further, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may change according to the number of the digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be configured to be digested without fail.

Further, even if the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured so that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game console according to Appendix 45 or 46.
The notice icon of one of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon.
By digesting the third notice icon, the third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the production effect.

The third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

Further, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 47.
When the lost symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is displayed after the third symbol variation display is started. The multiple notice icons may be digested before the end,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

Depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

In addition, depending on whether the result of the pre-reading target symbol variation display is a big hit or a loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the pre-reading target symbol variation display. The minimum number of warning icons may be the same or different.

In addition, once the symbol variation display to be read ahead is performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) in the state where the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The maximum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, once the symbol variation display to be read ahead is performed before the symbol variation display to be read ahead (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) in the state where the symbol variation display to be read ahead is held. The minimum number of notice icons that can be digested in the variable display (for example, the first symbol variable display, the third symbol variable display) is when the result of the symbol variable display to be read ahead is a big hit or a loss. It may be the same or different.

In addition, the maximum number of notice icons that can be digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading while the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display to be read ahead may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

In addition, the minimum number of notice icons that are digested by the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) that is the target of pre-reading in the state where the symbol variation display that is the target of pre-reading is suspended is , The result of the symbol variation display to be read ahead may be the same or different depending on whether the result is a big hit or a loss.

(Appendix 49)
The game console described in Appendix 48.
When the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. In some cases,
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, even if the notice icon is displayed, it does not necessarily become a lower jackpot, so it may be possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be read ahead is completed.

(Appendix 50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 49.
Equipped with a hold display means
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds for starting the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "hold number").
A game table characterized by that.

The hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The game console described in Appendix 50.
Depending on the number of times the notice icon is displayed, the number of held items is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game table, it may be possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of reservations.

(Appendix 52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 51.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 45 to 51.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A game console with multiple display means
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or a light guide plate may be lens-cut and a pattern may appear by irradiating the light guide plate with a light source from the side. , It may be configured by a light emitting means such as an LED, or it may be configured by a 7-segment display.

Further, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the stock of the notice icon, a display related to the digestion of the notice icon, or a notice of stock of the notice icon. It may be a display, or it may be an effect display executed when the notice icon is digested.

Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The game console described in Appendix 54.
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, one notice icon may be newly displayed.

In addition, the notice icon may be digested by the second display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game console according to Appendix 54 or 55.
In the first display means, a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, "display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed" may be performed in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 54 to 56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 54 to 56.
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area.
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area.
The effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means and
Movable means and
It is a game table equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as "notice icon digestion effect") is performed.
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "first movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, although the effect by the movable means may be performed only by the first movable means effect, a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means on which the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The game console described in Appendix 59.
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means production may not be performed, and when the 21st notice icon is digested, the first movable means is always produced. Means may be directed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect having a different operation) may be performed.

Further, when the 21st notice icon is digested, an effect by a movable means different from the 1st movable means may be performed, or the 21st notice icon is digested. And, the effect by the first movable means may be always performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game console according to Appendix 59 or 60.
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game table characterized by that.

Even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed, and when the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) is performed. May be done.

(Appendix 62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 59 to 61.
Equipped with operating means
The movable means is the operating means, and is
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the mode of the operating means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, "change" has a meaning including deformation, displacement, movement, and movement.

(Appendix 63)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 59 to 62.
Equipped with a second means of movement,
The movable means is the first movable means, and is
As the notice icon digestion effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter, referred to as "second movable means effect") may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display"), which is the target of pre-reading, is suspended, the second symbol variation display is displayed after the first symbol variation display is started. Before the end, the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested.
When the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
The display of one of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon may not be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, or the notice icon may be displayed whenever the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only once in the symbol change display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only in one symbol change display without fail.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The game console described in Appendix 64.
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game table characterized by that.

The change in which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that the notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The game console according to Appendix 64 or 65.
An icon of one of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon is increased by one.

Further, the notice icon displayed on the notice icon increase suggestion display does not have to increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of the ghost that the notice icon does not increase.

Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons are increased. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is 3, only 2 may be increased.

In addition, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game console according to Appendix 64 or 65.
A game characterized in that the twelfth number of the notice icons among the eleven number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon. The stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means and
Hold display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "second hold display") of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the first A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "plural notice icons") may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
When the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The game console described in Appendix 68.
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a look-ahead display mode.
In the symbol variation display on which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the look-ahead display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game console according to Appendix 68 or 69.
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth hold display") of the lost symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol change display") which is the target of pre-reading is displayed, the third The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.
The second display is a display displayed in the second display area when it is displayed.
When displayed, the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

The first display may be an explanatory display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanatory display.

Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of a selectable effect mode effect mode name. Here, the effect mode includes, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change in the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and a mode for changing the frequency of occurrence of the one-shot notification effect. There is a mode for making it.

Further, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearance animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, and the notice may be made closer to the display position of the animation in the middle. The display position of the icon may be closer to the second display area.

Further, here, the "notice icon" may be only one notice icon, may be only a part of the notice icons among the plurality of notice icons, or may be all of the plurality of notice icons. It may be a notice icon of. Further, the "notice icon" may be only the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons, or a part including the notice icon displayed first among the plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may be completely the same, or a part of the display period of the first display may overlap with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the first display. In addition, the notice icon may or may not be displayed during the display period of the second display.

Further, the second display and the notice icon do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time.

Further, the frequency of display may differ between the first display and the second display. For example, if the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. Further, the size of the first display area and the second display area may be different, or the roles of the first display area and the second display area may be different. For example, the notice display may not be performed in the first display area, but the notice display may also be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The game console described in Appendix 71.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game console according to Appendix 71 or 72.
The first display is a variable icon display.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping with at least a part of the second display (hereinafter, referred to as "first part").
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first part is eliminated.
A game table characterized by that.

According to this game console, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the relevant and after the next symbol change display is given, rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give new expectations to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the look-ahead notice display is digested.

It should be noted that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first part.

Further, during the period in which the variable icon is displayed, the variable icon may at least suggest a feeling of expectation for a big hit in the symbol variable display.

Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display, or may be digested in a symbol variation display that is a target of look-ahead.

Further, the notice icon may be always digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display which is the target of pre-reading.

Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayable only by a single number, or may be configured to be displayable by a plurality of notice icons. Here, when displaying a plurality of notice icons, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icons can be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
While the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 73.
A game table characterized in that the second display is not started when the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 75.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a notice display and is
A game table characterized in that when the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 76.
The second display area is a line-delimited area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 77.
The phrase "the notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed" is described in Appendix 71. Is displayed in the second display area when it is displayed. "
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 71 to 78.
The number of the notice icons that are digested is larger in the big hit symbol variation display than in the lost symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the explanation display of the notice icon.
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the first explanatory display.
The first explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The jackpot fluctuation has more digested notice icons than the loss fluctuation,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The game console described in Appendix 80.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "first display area") in which the first explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game console described in Appendix 81.
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanatory display is not displayed in the first explanatory display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 80 to 82.
The explanatory display of one of the plurality of types of explanatory displays is the second explanatory display.
The second explanatory display is a display showing the current production stage.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area (hereinafter, referred to as "second display area") in which the second explanatory display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game console described in Appendix 83.
Even when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the effect stage changes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 80 to 84.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of notice icons") as the notice icons.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is the first notice icon.
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon.
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first effect.
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is an explanatory display.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means.
The game table is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when it is displayed.

(Appendix 87)
The game console described in Appendix 86.
When the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The game console described in Appendix 87.
When the notice icon is exhausted, the display of the first display may resume.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 88.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanatory display is an explanatory display relating to the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 89.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means.
The first display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The second display means is a means capable of displaying the effect display.
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display that matches the display of the second display means.
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 86 to 90.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is an explanatory display.
The third display is a display displayed in the second display area of the display means.
The game console is characterized in that the notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The game console described in Appendix 91.
When the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability variation expectation degree.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the reach jackpot expectation level.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the jackpot expectation of the character.

Further, the first tutorial display may be a display configured so as not to be displayed at the same time as the first notice display.

(Appendix 93)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice display.
The display area in which the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area in which the hold icon is displayed.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice icon").
The second display is a display including a display showing the first notice icon in a large size.
After the second display is made, the first display may be made,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The game console described in Appendix 93.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The third display is a variable display of the decorative pattern.
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is in stock.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game console according to Appendix 93 or 94.
The third display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The third display is a display that may overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 95.
The first display is a display displayed in the hold display frame.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 93 to 96.
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Appendix 98)
The game console described in Appendix 97.
The second display is a display that is also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game console according to Appendix 97 or 98.
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already acquired notice icons is enlarged and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is the display of the hold display frame.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is extended.
The third display is a display of a decorative pattern.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
The game console described in Appendix 100.
The display of the position among the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
In the portion of the second display that is extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended part"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
The game console described in Appendix 101.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
The game console according to Appendix 101 or Appendix 102.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the sixth indication.
The sixth display is a notice display and is
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable.
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 100 to 103.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the fifth indication,
The fifth display is a line notice display, and is
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The fifth display is a display that may overlap with the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is a display including an icon display frame.
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to a symbol variation display.
The second display is a display in which at least a part of the first display is extended.
The third display is a decorative pattern variation display.
The first display is a display that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game console described in Appendix 105.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
In the portion of the second display that is extended from the first display (hereinafter, referred to as "extended part"), the fourth display is configured to be displayable so as to overlap.
The extended portion is a portion that does not overlap with the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game console described in Appendix 106.
The effect display is a look-ahead notice display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game console according to Appendix 106 or Appendix 107.
The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 106 to Supplementary note 108.
The third display is a display that may overlap the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 106 to Supplementary note 109.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is a line display, and is
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap with the first display.
The fifth display is a display that may overlap the extended portion.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 106 to Supplementary note 110.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is a notice display and is
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to overlap and display.
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 105 to Supplementary note 111.
The icon is a hold icon,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
The game console described in Appendix 112.
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of times the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note 105 to Supplementary note 114.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Operation means and
The first area and
It is a game table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter.
The number of times the operation of the operation means is accepted in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as "the number of times of acceptance") can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
The game console described in Appendix a1.
Equipped with display means
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is 1 or more, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "second display").
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
When the operating means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed.
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
The game console described in Appendix a3.
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The game console according to Appendix a3 or a4.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display") in the first button effect.
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display") in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a5.
When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may decrease.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a6.
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a7.
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a8.
With a second area,
The second region is a region through which the game ball can pass.
A game ball that has passed through the second region may enter the first region.
When the game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
The first area and
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The first area is an area where a game ball can enter.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
When the game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed.
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative pattern,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
The game console described in Appendix b1.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "second display").
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a wipe display.
The wipe display does not overlap with the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The game console described in Appendix b2.
The wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b3.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "third display").
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
The first display is displayed as a display that changes the display mode of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The game console described in Appendix b4.
The third display is a hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b5.
The first display is not started while the stop display of the decorative symbol is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b6.
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b7.
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b8.
With a second area,
The second region is a region through which the game ball can pass.
A game ball that has passed through the second region may enter the first region.
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second symbol variation display") after the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first symbol variation display"). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first variation icon") can be displayed.
The icon displayed as the first variable icon is configured to be displayable as a notice icon in the second symbol variable display.
The area where the notice icon is displayed is a different area from the area where the first variable icon is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c2)
The game console described in Appendix c1.
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second variation icon") can be displayed.
Both the second variable icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayable.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c3)
The game console described in Appendix c1 or c2.
The icon that was displayed as a hold icon can be displayed as a variable icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c4)
The game console described in Appendix c3.
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c5)
The game console described in Appendix c3 or c4.
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c5.
The display mode of the notice icon is different from the display mode of the variable icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c6.
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c7.
The display means is configured to include an image display device.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c8.
The icon displayed as the first variable icon in the non-electric support state is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variable display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is different from the first display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that urges the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The first display is a display that can be started when the operating means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operating means is pressed and held.
The second display is a display in which the operation means is more likely to be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is long-pressed.
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d2)
The game console described in Appendix d1.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
The light emitting means is a means for being lit in the first state.
The light emitting means is a means for turning off the light in the second state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d3)
The game console described in Appendix d1.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the first light emitting mode.
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that emits light in the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The third display is a display that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d4.
The second display is a display that is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d5.
When the operating means is long-pressed, the first display can be started as if the operating means were repeatedly hit.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d6.
The long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display").
The second display is different from the first display.
The first display is a display that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
In the second display, the operation means performs a second number of operations in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a display that is easier to start when
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
The second number is more than one.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The third display mode is a display mode that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d9)
The game console described in Appendix d8.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a light emitting state in the first state.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a non-light emitting state in the second state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d10)
The game console described in Appendix d8.
Equipped with light emitting means
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode.
In the second state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the second light emitting mode.
The second light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d11)
The game console according to Appendix d9 or d10.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d11.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a symbol variation display.
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d12.
The second display is a display that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d14)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d13.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d15)
The game console described in Appendix d14.
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. Is configured to start displaying
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d15.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d17)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d8 to d16.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A production means that can execute multiple types of production,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The second effect is different from the first effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
In the second effect, the operation means performs a second number of operations in the first operation mode, as compared with the case where the operation means performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start when
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d19)
The game console described in Appendix d18.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
One of the plurality of types of effects is the third effect.
The third effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d20)
The game console according to Appendix d18 or d19.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d21)
The game console described in Appendix d20.
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect is assumed that the operating means is simulated the first number of times in the first operating mode. It is configured to be startable and
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d18 to d21.
The second effect is an effect that is not started only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d18 to d22.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The light emitting means is a means in a second state in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The second state is different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d24)
The game console described in Appendix d23.
The first state is a light emitting state.
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d25)
The game console described in Appendix d23.
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which light is emitted in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d26)
The game console described in Appendix d25.
The first aspect is the first color,
The second aspect is the second color,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d23 to d26.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d28)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d18 to d27.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display").
The fourth display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The first display is a display that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display.
The fourth display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operating means.
The image of one of the plurality of types of images is the first image.
The first image shows the operating means in the first operating mode rather than one operation performed by the operating means in the second operating mode during the execution of the fourth display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d30)
The game console described in Appendix d29.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is different from the first display, and is different from the first display.
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d31)
The game console according to the appendix d29 or d30.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The third display mode is a display mode that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The third display is a display displayed in a state in which the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d32)
The game console described in Appendix d31.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that becomes a light emitting state in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d33)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d32.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a symbol variation display.
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d33.
The first image is an image that is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d34.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d36)
In the game table described in Appendix d35
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. One display is configured to start
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d37)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d36.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d29 to d36.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d39)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A production means that can execute multiple types of production,
A display means that can execute multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation continues for a longer period of time than the first operation mode.
The first number of times is more than one.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first selection display.
The first selection display is a display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means.
The image of one of the plurality of types of images is the first image.
The first image shows the operation in the first operation mode rather than one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second operation is performed by means.
The second number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d40)
The game console described in Appendix d39.
One of the plurality of types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is different from the first effect.
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d41)
The game console according to Appendix d39 or d40.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display
One of the plurality of types of effects is the third effect.
The third effect is an effect that can be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.
The third effect is an effect that encourages the operation means to be continuously operated in the first operation mode.
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the operation means performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d42)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d41.
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d43)
The game console described in Appendix d42.
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, the first effect is assumed that the operating means is simulated the first number of times in the first operating mode. It is configured to be startable and
The second time is a time equal to or greater than the first time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d44)
The game console described in Appendix d42 or d43.
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the first time or more, it is assumed that one operation is performed by the operating means. Is configured to be
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d45)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d44.
The first image is an image that is not selected only by performing one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d45.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second selection display.
The second selection display is a selection display in which one of a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation means.
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display.
The image of one of the plurality of types of images is the second image.
The second image is an image that can be selected when the operation means performs a third number of operations in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display.
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the second selection display.
The third number is more than one.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d47)
The game console described in Appendix d46.
One of the plurality of types of production is the fifth production,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d48)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d47.
Equipped with light emitting means
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The light emitting means is a means that is in the second state during the execution of the first selection display.
The second state is different from the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d49)
The game console described in Appendix d48.
The first state is a light emitting state.
The second state is a state in which light is not emitted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d50)
The game console described in Appendix d48.
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect.
The second state is a state in which light is emitted in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d51)
The game console described in Appendix d50.
The first aspect is the first color,
The second aspect is the second color,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d52)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d51.
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d53)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d39 to d51.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d54)
A symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Display means that can display multiple types of display,
It is a game table equipped with
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "first display").
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a display in the second display mode (hereinafter, referred to as "second display").
The second display is different from the first display.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second display is a display in which the display may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that urges the player to repeatedly hit the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "third display").
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started.
The first display is a display in which the display may be started even when the operation means is long-pressed after the display of the third display is started.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display that urges the player to operate the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth display").
The fourth display is different from the third display, and is different from the third display.
The second display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started.
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d55)
The game console described in Appendix d54.
Equipped with a light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light emitting states
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operating means.
The light emitting state of one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the first light emitting state.
The light emitting means is a means that becomes the first light emitting state in a state of accepting the operation of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d56)
The game console described in Appendix d55.
The light emitting state of one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the second light emitting state.
The first light emitting state is a lighting state.
The second light emitting state is the extinguished state.
When the light emitting means is set to the lighting state, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is accepted.
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation of the operating means is not accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d57)
The game console described in Appendix d55.
The light emitting state of one of the plurality of types of light emitting states is the second light emitting state.
The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emitting mode.
The second light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d57.
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d58.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display instructing the selection of one option from the plurality of options (hereinafter, referred to as "selection display").
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display displayed when the first option among the plurality of options is selected (hereinafter, referred to as "fifth display").
The fifth display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started.
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d60)
The game console described in Appendix d59.
The fifth display is a display in which the display is started when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number after the display of the selection display is started.
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d60.
When the operating means is long-pressed after the display of the third display is started, the display of the first display may be started as if the operating means was repeatedly hit. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d62)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d61.
The long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d63)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d62.
One of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operating means is the first state.
The state of one of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operating means is the second state.
The second state is different from the first state.
The third display is a display displayed in the first state.
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d64)
The game console described in Appendix d63.
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting the display of the first display is accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d65)
The game console according to the appendix d63 or d64.
The second state is a state in which an operation for starting the display of the second display is accepted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d63 to d65.
The first state is a state in which a predetermined time elapses after the first state is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d63 to d66.
The second state is a state in which a predetermined time elapses after the second state is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d67.
The second display is a display in which the display is started when the number of operations of the operating means is the second number after the display of the fourth display is started.
The second number is two or more.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d68.
The third display is a display including the first image.
The first image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d70)
The game console described in Appendix d69.
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images.
The second image is an image including an image showing the appearance of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d71)
The game console described in Appendix d70.
The second image is an image whose display mode is different from that of the first image.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d72)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d54 to d71.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d73)
The first means of operation and
The second production means and
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second effect is not started.
The second directing means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect performed by the second effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d74)
The game console described in Appendix d73.
The "effect executed by the second effect means" described in the appendix d73 means "the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emitting mode".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d75)
The game console according to the appendix d73 or d74.
Equipped with the first production means
The first effect means is an image display means.
The first effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d76)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d73 to d75.
Equipped with a third production means
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d77)
The game console described in Appendix d76.
The third effect means is an image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d78)
The game console according to the appendix d73 to d77.
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
It is a game table equipped with the first operating means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second effect is not started.
The second effect is an effect performed by the second effect means.
The second effect means is a light emitting means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
The game console described in Appendix d79.
The "effect executed by the second effect means" described in the appendix d79 means "the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emitting mode".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
The game console described in Appendix d81.
The second effect means is a means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode.
The first light emitting mode is a light emitting mode different from the second light emitting mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d81.
Equipped with the first production means
The first effect means is the first image display means,
The first effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d82.
Equipped with a third production means
The third effect means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game console described in Appendix d83.
Equipped with a fourth production means
The fourth effect means is a second image display means, and is
The fourth effect means is a means provided in the third effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 79 to 84.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can display a symbol variation display
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d85.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started as if the first operating means was operated in the first operating mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d86.
The "operation in the first operation mode" described in the appendix d79 means "multiple operations".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d87.
The "operation in the second operation mode" described in the appendix d79 means a "long press operation".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d89)
The game console described in Appendix d88.
The long-press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
It is a game table equipped with the first operating means,
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first operation mode.
The effect mode of the second effect is different from the effect mode of the first effect.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second effect is not started.
The second effect is a back button effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
The game console described in Appendix d79.
Equipped with the first production means
The first effect means is an image display means.
The first effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
The game console described in Appendix d80.
The "effect executed by the first effect means" described in the appendix d80 means "the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the first display".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d81.
The second effect is an effect performed by the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game console described in Appendix 82.
The "effect executed by the first effect means" described in Appendix 82 means "the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the second display".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d79 to d81.
Equipped with a second production means
The second directing means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect performed by the second effect means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d85)
The game console described in Appendix d84.
The "effect executed by the second effect means" described in the appendix d84 means "the effect executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emitting mode".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The first means of operation and
The second operating means,
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of display,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The first display is a display that may be displayed depending on that the first operating means is operated in the first operating mode.
The second display is a display that may be displayed depending on that the second operating means is operated in the first operating mode.
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display.
When the first operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the first display may be started.
When the second operating means is operated in the second operating mode, the second display is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
The game console described in Appendix d86.
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
The game console according to the appendix d86 or d87.
The second display is a display displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display mini games,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first effect display") includes a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation promotion display"). And
The effect display related to the mini-game (hereinafter referred to as "second effect display") is a display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation promotion display"). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed during the first period.
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in the second period.
The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part of them overlap (hereinafter, referred to as "third period").
The result of the first effect display is given as a notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice").
The result of the second effect display is performed as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as "second notice").
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e2)
The game console described in Appendix e1
If the operating means is operated during the third period, the first notice is given in response to the second notice after the second notice is given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e3)
The game console described in Appendix e1
When the operation means is operated during the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is given.
After the second notice is given, the first notice may change according to the second notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e3.
In the third period, the first effect display overlaps with the second effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e4.
The second effect display is a display including a display of the validity period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e5.
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is performed in the second aspect than when it is performed in the first aspect.
When the mini-game is started, the first notice is more likely to be performed in the second aspect than in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e7)
The game console described in Appendix e6.
The second notice is a feasible notice in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
The second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth aspect when the first notice is executed in the second aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e8)
The game console described in Appendix e6.
The second notice is a feasible notice in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed in the fourth aspect than when it is executed in the third aspect.
The first case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the second case.
The second case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the third case.
The third case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily than the fourth case.
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e9)
The game console described in Appendix e6.
The second notice is a feasible notice in a plurality of aspects.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the fourth aspect.
The second notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally more likely to be confirmed and displayed when it is executed in the fourth aspect than when it is executed in the third aspect.
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the first case, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed. Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the second case, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed is the same, or in the third case, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e9.
The number of times the operating means required to perform the result of the first effect display is operated, and the number of times the operating means required to perform the result of the second effect display is operated. Is different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e10.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed when the mini-game is played and the first notice is given than when the mini-game is played and the first notice is given. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e12)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying decorative symbol variation.
The game table is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game.
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game.
The first mini-game is a mini-game that is displayed using a certain display area.
The second mini-game is a mini-game displayed using the certain display area.
The first mini-game and the second mini-game are different mini-games.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e13)
The game console described in Appendix e12.
Equipped with a notice means that can execute multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result suggesting that the second notice will be given (hereinafter referred to as "second result").
One of the results of the second mini-game is the second result.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e14)
The game console according to Appendix e12 or e13.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during execution of the decorative symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
One of the plurality of types of production is the second production.
When the first mini-game is played, the first effect is easier to perform than the second effect.
When the second mini-game is played, the second effect is easier to perform than the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e14.
The appearance rates of the multiple types of mini-games differ between the non-electric support state and the electric support state.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e15.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character appears.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character appears.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e17)
The game console described in Appendix e13.
The first mini-game is a game in which the first character may appear and is played.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the first character may appear and is played.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which a third character may appear and is played.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which a fourth character may appear and is played.
In the first mini-game, the second result is more likely to be derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears.
In the second mini-game, the second result is more likely to be derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e17.
In the certain display area, when the mini game is not displayed, another effect display (hereinafter referred to as "third effect display") is performed.
When the mini-game is started, the third effect display is deleted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e19)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e18.
The display area is divided by a frame.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e20)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e19.
The certain display area is a preset display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e20.
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a preset display area in connection with the start of the mini game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e21.
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e12 to e21.
A display means different from the display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second display means") is provided.
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e24)
A notice means that can execute multiple notices,
Display means that can display mini games,
It is a game table equipped with
The game console is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
It is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed more easily when the second notice is given than when the first notice is given.
The mini-game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared.
One of the plurality of results is the first result,
One of the plurality of results is the second result,
The notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini game.
The second notice is more likely to be given when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e25)
The game console described in Appendix e24.
It is suggested that the second notice is likely to be given because the result of the mini-game becomes the second result before the result of the mini-game is derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e26)
The game console according to Appendix e24 or e25.
Equipped with a production means that can execute the first production,
The effect means is a display means,
The first effect is an effect performed in connection with the decorative symbol variation display.
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared.
One of the plurality of production results is the first production result,
One of the plurality of production results is the second production result.
It is suggested that the result of the first effect becomes the result of the second effect before the result of the first effect is derived, which is an advantageous development.
The second effect result is more likely to give the player a privilege than the second result.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e27)
The game console described in Appendix e26.
When the second effect result is derived, a big hit is given.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e28)
The game console according to Appendix e26 or e27.
The mini-game is a game that can be executed in the first period.
The first effect is an effect that can be performed during the second period.
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e26 to e28.
In one decorative symbol variation display, the mini-game is started earlier than the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e29.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
When the operating means is operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is derived.
If the operating means is not operated in the mini-game, the result of the mini-game is not derived.
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is more likely to be given than the second notice.
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more likely to be given than the first notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e31)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e30.
Even if the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e32)
The game console described in Appendix e31.
Equipped with a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon.
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed.
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed.
The mini-game is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon.
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e33)
The game console described in Appendix e31.
Equipped with a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon.
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed.
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed.
The mini-game is started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state where the first hold icon is displayed.
In the first case, when the result of the mini-game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon during the execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol The first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display that is started after the change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e29.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
In the mini-game, the same result is derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e35)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e24 to e34.
The mini-game starts before reach,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e36)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a mini game.
The result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operating means.
The result of the mini-game changes depending on the operation status of the operation means.
The result of the mini-game may include a result (hereinafter referred to as "first result") that is not related to the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e37)
The game console described in Appendix e36.
The mini-game is a game aimed at achieving a certain task.
Whether or not the certain task is achieved depends on the operation status of the operating means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e38)
The game console according to Appendix e36 or e37.
Equipped with a decorative pattern display means that can execute decorative pattern variable display,
The mini-game is a game that may be started in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended.
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e39)
The game console described in Appendix e38.
The automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable.
In the mini-game in the first case, the automatic operation is configured to be infeasible.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e40)
The game console according to Appendix e38 or e39.
The mini-game may start in the second period (hereinafter referred to as "second case").
The second period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game.
In the first case, the first result is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than in the second case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e41)
The game console described in Appendix e40.
The second period is a period that does not include the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e42)
The game console according to the appendix e40 or e41.
In the second case, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second result") is more likely to be derived as a result of the mini-game than in the first case. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e43)
The game console described in Appendix e42.
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a look-ahead notice.
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a look-ahead notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e40 to e43.
The types of mini games differ between the first case and the second case.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e45)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e40 to e44.
In the mini-game in the first case, the validity period display of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first validity period display") is displayed.
In the mini-game in the second case, the validity period display of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second validity period display") is displayed.
The first validity period display is a meter display.
The second validity period display is a meter display.
The rate at which the meter decreases differs between the first validity period display and the second validity period display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e40 to e45.
In the mini-game in the first case, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation promotion display") is displayed.
In the mini-game in the second case, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation promotion display") is displayed.
The first operation promotion display includes the first number of display patterns.
The second operation promotion display includes a second number display pattern.
Of the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e38 to e46.
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini-game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e48)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display multiple types of production display,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first effect display.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative pattern variation display.
The second effect display is a mini game effect display.
The first effect display is an effect display in which a big hit notice (hereinafter referred to as "first notice") may be executed.
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, referred to as "second notice") may be derived.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e49)
The game console described in Appendix e48.
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-continuous display.
The pseudo-continuous display is a display in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display.
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous display will increase.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e50)
The game console described in Appendix e48.
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-continuous display.
The pseudo-continuous display is a display in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display.
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo-continuous display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e51)
The game console described in Appendix e48.
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-continuous display.
The pseudo-continuous display is a display in which the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed a plurality of times in one decorative symbol variation display.
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
The first means of operation and
The second operating means,
It is a game table equipped with
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of effects,
One of the plurality of types of production is the first production,
It is configured so that the first effect can be started in response to the operation of the first operating means.
The second operating means is configured to vibrate in at least a part of the states in which the first effect is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
A game table characterized by that.

The first effect may be a notice effect. Further, the second operating means may be a larger operating means than the first operating means, or may be a smaller operating means.

(Appendix f2)
The game console described in Appendix f1.
The first state is a state during the entire period in which the first effect is executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f3)
The game console described in Appendix f1 or f2.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
When the second operating means is operated within the second period, the second effect is started, and when the second operating means is operated, the second effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the second period.
A game table characterized by that.

The second operating means may be an operating means that vibrates whenever the second operating means is operated within the second period.

(Appendix f4)
The game console described in Appendix f3.
The second operating means is configured to vibrate even in at least a part of the states in which the second effect is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "second state").
The first state is a state in which the second effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f4.
When the first operating means is operated within the first period, the first effect is started, and when the first operating means is operated, the first effect is not started. Is configured to be
The second operating means is an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated within the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

That is, even when the first effect is not executed, the second operating means may be configured to vibrate, or may be configured to vibrate without fail.

(Appendix f6)
The game console described in Appendix f5.
It is configured to be able to execute multiple types of notifications.
One of the plurality of types of notifications is the first notification, and is
The first notification is a notification that prompts the operation of the first operating means.
The first notification is configured to be performed within the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

That is, the second operating means may be an operating means that may vibrate when the second operating means is operated while the first notification is being executed, and the second operating means always vibrates. It may be an operating means to perform.

(Appendix f7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f6.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the third effect.
It is configured so that one of the first effect and the third effect can be started in response to the operation of the first operation means.
In the state where the third effect is executed, the second operating means is configured so as not to vibrate.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f7.
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when the first operating means is not operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f8.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f8.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display multiple displays and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication,
One of the plurality of indications is a second indication,
The first display is a display including a display related to the operation validity period of the operating means.
The second display is a display including a display related to the operation validity period of the operation means.
The second display is configured so that a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice display") is started in response to the operation of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g2)
The game console described in Appendix g1
The first notice display is a display including a display including a display related to the operation validity period of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g3)
The game console described in Appendix g1 or g2.
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g4)
The game console described in Appendix g3.
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period.
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "third notice display").
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g5)
The game console described in Appendix g4.
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period.
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g5.
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated.
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second notice display") is performed even before the operation means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g7)
The game console described in Appendix g6.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode.
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the second display mode.
The second notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fourth display mode.
The case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode is more in the case where the second notice display is displayed in the fourth display mode than in the case where the second notice display is displayed in the second display mode. It is configured so that the first notice display is easy to display.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g6.
One of the plurality of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed in the sixth display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode.
When the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode than when the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode, the first notice by the third display mode is used. The display is configured to be easy to display,
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g8.
The first notice display is a display displayed for at least a part of the remaining period of the operation valid period.
The period during which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the first period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the third period.
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the second period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g10)
The game console described in Appendix g9.
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g11)
An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
Display means that can display the first display,
It is a game table equipped with
The first display is a display including a display relating to an operation validity period of the operating means.
The first display is configured so that a notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice display") is started in response to the operation of the operation means.
The first notice display is a display including a display relating to an operation validity period of the operation means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g12)
The game console described in Appendix g11.
The first notice display is a display that may be displayed during the execution of a certain effect.
The certain effect is configured to develop after the first notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g13)
The game console described in Appendix g12.
One of the plurality of indications is a third indication,
The third display is a display that may be displayed when the operating means is operated during the operation valid period.
The third display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as "third notice display").
The certain effect is configured to develop after the third notice display is started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g14)
The game console described in Appendix g13.
The third notice display is a display that may be displayed even if the operation means is not operated during the operation validity period.
The first notice display is a display that is not displayed when the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g15)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g11 to g14.
The first display is a display in which the first notice display is performed after the operation means is operated.
The first display is a display in which another notice display (hereinafter, referred to as "second display") is performed even before the operation means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g16)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g11 to g15.
One of the plurality of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an operation promotion display of the operation means.
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the fifth display mode.
The operation promotion display is a notice display that may be displayed in the sixth display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in the first display mode.
The first notice display is a notice display that may be displayed in a third display mode.
When the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode, the operation promotion display is displayed in the sixth display mode as compared with the case where the operation promotion display is displayed in the fifth display mode. It is configured so that the notice display of
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the first notice display is displayed in the third display mode than when the first notice display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g17)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g11 to g16.
The first notice display is a display displayed for at least a part of the remaining period of the operation valid period.
The period during which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the first period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the third period.
The period in which the first notice display is displayed when the operating means is operated after the second period has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period is the fourth period.
The second period is longer than the first period,
The fourth period is shorter than the third period,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g18)
The game console described in Appendix g17.
The total length of the first period and the third period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
The total length of the second period and the fourth period is the same as the operation valid period or shorter than the operation valid period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g19)
It is a game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple displays.
The game table is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of indications is the first indication,
One of the plurality of indications is a second indication,
The first display is a display related to a certain effect.
The second display is a display related to the certain effect.
The first display is a display that may be temporarily displayed as a display that constitutes at least a part of a combination of decorative symbols during execution of the decorative symbol variation display.
The second display is a display that does not constitute a combination of the decorative symbols.
The first display and the second display are at least partially different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g20)
The game console described in Appendix g19.
The certain effect is an effect that is started after the first display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g21)
The game console according to the appendix g19 or g20.
The first display is a display provided with the number of patterns of the first number.
The second display is a display provided with a second number of patterns.
The second number is larger than the first number,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g22)
The game console described in Appendix g21.
The first number is one,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g22.
The combination of the decorative patterns is three.
The certain effect is an effect that is started once the first display of the three is displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the display modes of the first display of the third may be the same, or some or all of them may be different from each other.

(Appendix g24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g22.
The combination of the decorative patterns is three.
The combination of the decorative symbols is configured to be displayed once in sequence.
The certain effect is an effect that is started when the first display is displayed as the decorative symbol that is once displayed at the end of the combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g25)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g24.
The display means is a means for displaying a notice display for notifying that the first display may be once displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display.
The first display is easier to be displayed when the notice display is displayed than when the notice display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g26)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g25.
The decorative symbol variation display is configured so that the combination of decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed according to the result of the pass / fail judgment after the variation of the decorative symbol is started.
The first display is a display that is not fixedly displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g27)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g26.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
The certain effect is an effect using the operation means.
The first display is a display including a display imitating the operating means.
The second display is a display including a display imitating the operating means.
The first display is a display that does not include a display relating to the operation validity period of the operating means.
The second display is a display including a display relating to an operation validity period of the operation means in the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g28)
The game console described in Appendix g27.
The first display is a display displayed before the operation validity period of the operation means in the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g19 to g26.
Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
The operating means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states.
One of the plurality of states is the first state,
One of the plurality of states is a second state.
The first state and the second state are different states.
The first display is a display provided with a display pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first display pattern") corresponding to the operation means in the first state.
The second display is a display pattern according to the operating means in the second state (hereinafter,
It is called "second display pattern". ) Is displayed,
The second display is a display including the first display pattern.
The second display is a display including the second display pattern.
After the first display is displayed in the first display pattern, the second display is displayed in the second display pattern in the certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first case". )
The operating means in the first case is configured to be more likely to be in the second state than in the first state.
A game table characterized by that.

Below, I will add what I have explained so far.

(Appendix h1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The first display is a display that notifies the time until a certain effect is performed.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The second display is a display that may foretell that the time until the certain effect is started will change.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect movable means (including image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa writer, and a light guide plate).

(Appendix h2)
The game console described in Appendix h1
When the second display is displayed, the display mode of the first display is configured to change after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, even if the second display is not displayed, the display mode of the first display may change. Further, the display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

(Appendix h3)
The game console described in Appendix h1 or h2.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The second image display means is configured to be in front of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h4)
The game console described in Appendix h3.
In the second image display means, the second display may be displayed.
The second image display means on which the second display is displayed may overlap the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h4.
Even if the second display is displayed, the time notified by the first display is advanced.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h5.
After the timer reaches 0, a display different from the second display is displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h6.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the second display is displayed than when it is not displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h7.
The display of one of the multiple types of display is the third display,
The certain effect is the third display displayed by the image display means.
The display of the substitute sign is an effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h7.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means capable of executing a plurality of types of movements.
One type of movement among the plurality of types of movements is a directing movement.
The certain effect is an effect operation by the effect movable means.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and examples of the operation other than the effect operation include an operation at power-on, an initial position return operation, and an evacuation operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, the one provided on the frame (front door).

(Appendix h10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h9.
It is easier to hit the jackpot when the above-mentioned certain effect occurs than when it does not occur.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h10.
A hot effect display may be displayed between the time when the first display is displayed and the time when the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h11.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h11.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h14)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing") at which the first effect display may be displayed.
The period display may be erased before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the period in which the period display is displayed is not limited to the reach, but may be fluctuating or a big hit. Further, even during reach, it may be displayed in the first reach but not in the second reach.

(Appendix h15)
The game console described in Appendix h14.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third effect display.
The period display may not notify the timing at which the third effect display is displayed.
During the display of the third effect display, the period display is hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, error notification such as a ball removal error, notification indicating the firing position, notification other than an error such as notification for preventing forgetting to remove the prepaid card, light emission by the LED, and production operation by the accessory. May be done. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed does not have to be notified by the period display.

(Appendix h16)
The game console described in Appendix h15.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit symbol variation") in which the result of the hit / fail determination is a jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h17)
The game console described in Appendix h16.
The third effect display is an effect display that may be displayed due to a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as “missing symbol variation”) in which the result of the hit / fail determination is incorrect.
The jackpot symbol variation is configured so that the third effect display is displayed more frequently than the lost symbol variation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h18)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h15 to h17.
Equipped with directing movable means
The effect movable means is a means that may perform an effect operation.
During the display of the third effect display, the power output movable means may perform the effect operation.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h19)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h18.
After the period display is hidden, the period display becomes easily visible.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h20)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h19.
The period display is hidden until the end of a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h21)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h19.
The period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h22)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h21.
The period display is a display that notifies the timing of displaying the second effect display (hereinafter, referred to as "second timing").
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, the location for notifying the chance up may be fixed in response to the reach, such that when a certain reach occurs, the chance up is notified three times, and when another reach occurs, the chance up is notified twice. If this is the case, the notification may be made three times, and at other times, the notification may be made only once. In that case, the case of "notifying a lot of timings" may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of "not notifying much", or may be more likely to come off. In addition, the likelihood of a big hit does not have to change depending on the number of notified timings. Further, the larger the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the easier it is to win a big hit.

(Appendix h23)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h22.
The image display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The first image display means is an image display means that may display the period display.
The second image display means is an image display means that may perform an effect operation.
At least a part of the period display may be overlapped by the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h24)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h14 to h23.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h25)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The period display is a display displayed during a certain period during reach, and is a display.
The period display is a display for notifying the timing (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing") at which the first effect display may be displayed.
Before the first timing is reached, the third display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h26)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the first display changes at the first speed,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second display.
With the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the second display changes at the second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are different,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h27)
The game console described in Appendix h26.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a time display, and is
The time display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes according to the passage of time within a certain period.
The display of one of the time displays is the first display.
The display of one of the time displays is the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h28)
The game console according to Appendix h26 or h27.
The second display may be displayed during the display of the first display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h29)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h26 to h28.
The first display is a display in which the display mode changes until the first time elapses.
The second display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses.
When the first time elapses, the third display is displayed.
When the second time elapses, the fourth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may be more reliable than the fourth display, and the fourth display may be more reliable than the third display.

(Appendix h30)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h26 to h29.
One type of display among the plurality of types of displays is the first type of display.
The first type of display includes the first display and the second display.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

(Appendix h31)
The game console described in Appendix h30.
The first type of display is a timer notice display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first effect display.
The timer notice display is a display that notifies the time until the first effect display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h32)
The game console described in Appendix h30.
Equipped with operating means
The first type of display is an operation validity period display.
The operation valid period display is a display indicating a period during which the operation of the operating means is valid.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h33)
The game console described in Appendix h30.
The first type of display is a period display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second effect display.
The period display is a display that may notify the timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as "first timing").
The first timing is notified between the start and the end of the first period.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h34)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h26 to h33.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h35)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display.
The countdown display is an effect in which notification of the time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as "time notification") may be executed.
When the time notification is executed by the countdown display, the display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode.
When the time notification is executed by the count gown display, the countdown display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h36)
The game console described in Appendix h35.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in the second display size.
The second display size is larger than the first display size,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h37)
The game console according to Appendix h35 or h36.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h38)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h37.
When the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 35 to 37.
It is easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally confirmed and displayed when the display mode is changed to the second display mode than when the display mode is changed to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 35 to 39.
The countdown display is started and ended within the period of one symbol change display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h41)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h40.
When the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h42)
The game console described in Appendix h41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h43)
The game console described in Appendix h41.
While the countdown display is moving, the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h44)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h43.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the countdown display notifies that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is 0 by the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h45)
The game console described in Appendix h44.
When the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the specific display is displayed and then hidden.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h46)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h45.
It may not change to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h47)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h46.
The display means is composed of a plurality of display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
The display means of one of the plurality of display means is the second display means.
The countdown display of the first display mode may be displayed by the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h48)
The game console described in Appendix h47.
The countdown display of the second display means may be displayed by the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h49)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h48.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h50)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h35 to h48.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h51)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a period display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a notice display,
The first display is a display that notifies the first timing.
The first timing is a timing at which the second display may start to be displayed.
The first display may be erased after the first display is started and before the first timing is reached.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h52)
The game console described in Appendix h51.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a third indication,
The third display is an effect display, and is
The third display is different from the second display.
The third display may be displayed before the first timing is reached.
The first display is a display that does not notify the timing at which the third display is started.
During the display of the third display, the first display is erased.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h53)
The game console described in Appendix h52.
The third display is a notice display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h54)
The game console described in Appendix h53.
When the third display is displayed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the third display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h55)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h52 to h54.
Equipped with a directing movable means that can execute multiple types of movements
One of the plurality of types of operations is the first operation,
The first operation is a production operation,
The first operation may be performed during the display of the third display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h56)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be displayed again.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h57)
The game console according to the appendix h51 to h55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured not to be displayed until a certain period of time has elapsed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h58)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h55.
After the first display is erased, the first display is configured to be re-displayed by the time when the certain period elapses.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h59)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h58.
The certain period is the period during which the super reach is in progress.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h60)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h59.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a fourth indication,
The fourth display is an effect display, and is
The fourth display is different from the second display.
The first display is a display that may also notify the second timing.
The second timing is a timing at which the fourth display may start to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h61)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h51 to h60.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h62)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of indications is the first indication.
The first display is a display including a countdown display.
The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and is a display.
The timing notification is a notification performed by updating the display of the countdown display at the timing when a certain effect is performed.
During the display of the countdown display, the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h63)
The game console described in Appendix h62.
The first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h64)
The game console described in Appendix h63.
The first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the first display size.
The second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed in the second display size.
Of the first display size and the second display size, the second display size is larger.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h65)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 62 to 64.
When the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h66)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h65.
During the display of the countdown display, the first display always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h67)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h65.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, rather than when the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. It is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h68)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h67.
The display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h69)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h68.
The first display is a display in which the display position may change.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h70)
The game console described in Appendix h69.
When the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the display position of the first display changes.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at the first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at the second position. It may be a game table to play.

(Appendix h71)
The game console described in Appendix h69 or h70.
The first display is a display that may be moved and displayed.
The display position of the first display changes due to the movement display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h72)
The game console described in Appendix h71.
Even while the movement display is being displayed, the update display of the countdown display is continued.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h73)
The game console described in Appendix h71.
During the display of the movement display, the update display of the countdown display is interrupted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h74)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h73.
The countdown display is a time countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h75)
The game console described in Appendix h74.
The timing notification is a notification that the timing for performing the certain effect is reached by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h76)
The game console according to the appendix h74 or h75.
The countdown display is configured to be erased after the display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h77)
The game console described in Appendix h76.
One of the plurality of types of indications is a second indication,
The second display is a display that is not included in the certain effect.
When a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display, the countdown display is deleted after the second display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h78)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h77.
The display means is a means composed of a plurality of display means.
One of the plurality of display means is the first display means.
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means.
When the first display of the first display mode is displayed, the first display is displayed on the first display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h79)
The game console described in Appendix h78.
The first display of the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h80)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h79.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h81)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h62 to h79.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h82)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a timer display.
The timer display is a display including a time display.
It is configured so that a certain effect may be started after the display of the timer display is started.
It is configured so that the certain effect may not be started even after the display of the timer display is started.
It is configured so that the certain effect may be started in response to the start of the display of the timer display and the time display of the time.
The jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the timer display is started and the certain effect is executed than when the timer display is started and the certain effect is not executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h83)
The game console described in Appendix h82.
If the time display reaches the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is started.
If the time display does not reach the certain time after the timer display is started, the certain effect is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h84)
The game console described in Appendix h82 or h83.
The certain effect is at least one kind of notice among a plurality of kinds of notices.
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is a third notice,
One of the plurality of types of notices is the fourth notice,
The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
The second notice is a notice that the execution time of the symbol variation display is longer when it is executed than when it is not executed.
The third notice is a notice that the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when it is executed than when it is not executed, and the fourth notice is a notice that can notify that it will be a big hit. Is,
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the first notice may be a hold change notice, a look-ahead mode, or a continuous notice.

Further, the second notice may be a pseudo-ream or a notice effect by inserting a movie.

Further, the third notice may be a cut-in notice or a next notice.

Further, the fourth notice may be a big hit notification.

(Appendix h85)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h84.
One of the plurality of types of displays is a mini game display.
Depending on the result of the display of the mini game, the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h86)
The game console described in Appendix h85.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice item, and is
It is configured so that the notice item may be displayed depending on the display result of the mini game.
The notice item includes a display suggesting that the timer display is started to be displayed.
After the notice item is started to be displayed, the time display reaches the certain time and the certain effect is started.
If the notice item is not displayed, the time display does not reach the certain time and the certain effect is not started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h87)
The game console according to the appendix h85 or h86.
It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived before the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h88)
The game console according to the appendix h85 or h86.
It is configured so that the result of the display of the mini-game is derived after the change of the time display is started and before the time display reaches the certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h89)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h85 to h88.
The result of the display of the mini-game may be derived as a result not related to the certain effect.
It is configured so that the display of the mini game is started before the timer display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h90)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h89.
The timer display when the certain effect is not started is configured so that the time display is erased without displaying the certain time.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h91)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h90.
The timer display is a display that is started to be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect.
One of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect.
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
It is configured so that the certain effect is more likely to be started when the timer display is displayed in the second aspect than when the timer display is displayed in the first aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h92)
The game console described in Appendix h91.
One of the plurality of aspects is the third aspect.
The third aspect is different from the first aspect.
The third aspect is different from the second aspect.
When the timer display is displayed in the third mode, the jackpot symbol is fixedly displayed.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, a state advantageous to the player is given, which is different from the big hit game performed in response to the final display of the big hit symbol. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h93)
The game console described in Appendix h92.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, the timer display is erased before the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed without changing the time display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h94)
The game console described in Appendix h92.
When the timer display is displayed in the third aspect, even if the time display reaches the certain time, the certain effect is not started and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h95)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h92 to h94.
The first aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the first time.
The second aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the second time.
The third aspect is an aspect in which the time display first displayed in the timer display is the third time.
Of the first time and the second time, the second time is a longer time.
The third time is a time different from the first time,
The third time is a time different from the second time,
The third time is the time displayed only if the advantageous condition is granted.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h96)
The game console described in Appendix h95.
The time display that is first displayed in the timer display is a display of the number of seconds and is configured to be able to display the display after the decimal point.
The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is 0.
The display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is 0.
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a time display in which the decimal point is other than 0.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h97)
The game console described in Appendix h95 or h96.
The display of the first time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the second time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
The display of the third time as the time display first displayed in the timer display is a display of a time longer than the execution time of the symbol variation display in which the timer display gives a notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h98)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h97.
Equipped with an effect display means that can execute the effect display
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying the timer display.
It is configured so that the timer display may be displayed on either one of the display means and the effect display means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
Both the display means and the effect display means are configured to display the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
In the first case, the effect may not be started.
In the case of the above, the certain effect is configured to be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h99)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h82 to h98.
The timer display is a display in which the time display is displayed by the source.
The certain time is 0,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h100)
It is a game table equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The first display is one of the notices related to the notice.
The second display is a look-ahead notice display performed by displaying the hold icon in a certain manner.
The third display is one of the displays for notifying the start of the execution of the effect (display indicating that the effect is waiting to be executed).
The fourth display is a notice display of one of the notice displays different from the second display.
The display of the first display may start before the display of the second display starts.
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state.
It is configured so that the second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon may be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon may not be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h101)
The game console described in Appendix h100.
The third display, which started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may end in the next symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h102)
The game console according to the appendix h100 or h102.
The display of the position among the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The fifth display is the display of the background in the hold icon.
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed.
It is configured so that the fifth display is not displayed in the second state.
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.
The second state is a state in which a certain reach effect is being executed.
At least a part of the area where the third display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h103)
The game console described in Appendix h102.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display performed by displaying the fifth display in a certain aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h104)
The game console according to the appendix h102 or h103.
At least a part of the area where the first display is displayed is configured to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h105)
The game console according to the appendix h102 or h103.
The area where the first display is displayed is configured so as not to overlap the area where the fifth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h106)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h100 to h105.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may not be continuously displayed in the next symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h107)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h100 to h105.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the display of the fourth display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h108)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The first display is a display that at least suggests that the second display may be started.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display for notifying that the execution of a certain effect is started.
The fourth display is a notice display regarding a symbol change display being executed.
The fifth display is a display indicating that the area is at least the area where the hold icon is displayed.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
In the first state, the display of the third display may be started,
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the fourth display is started in the second state.
The second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is a state in which a certain reach effect is not executed.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
In the first state, the fifth display can be displayed together with the hold icon.
In the second state, the fifth display is not displayed together with the hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h109)
The game console described in Appendix h108.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h110)
The game console according to the appendix h108 or h109.
At least a part of the third display is configured to overlap the fifth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h111)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h110.
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h112)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h110.
The fifth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the fifth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the fifth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h113)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h112.
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the fifth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h114)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h112.
The first display and the fifth display are configured so as not to overlap.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h115)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h114.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h116)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h115.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the fourth display is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h117)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h115.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The sixth display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the sixth display, the display of the fourth display is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the sixth display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h118)
The game console described in Appendix h117.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display foretelling that the display of the sixth display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the seventh display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h119)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h118.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a variable icon display.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h120)
The game console described in Appendix 119.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h121)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h108 to h120.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is an explanatory display and is an explanatory display.
The ninth display, when displayed, is a display displayed in the first display area of the display means.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h122)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 108 to h121.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h123)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to start.
The fourth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
The third display may be started in the first state, and the third display may be started.
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state.
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
The second state may occur after the first state.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed.
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed.
The first state is one of the states in which the sixth display can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the sixth display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h124)
The game console described in Appendix h123,
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect will be started.
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h125)
The game console according to Appendix h123 or h124.
It is configured to be able to perform a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h126)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h125.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h127)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h126.
At least a part of the third display is configured to overlap the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h128)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h127.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h129)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h127.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h130)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h129.
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h131)
The game console according to any one of the appendices 123 to h130.
The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h132)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h131.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h133)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h132.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h134)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h133.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h135)
The game console described in Appendix h134.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a display foretelling that the display of the seventh display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h136)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h135.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h137)
The game console described in Appendix h136.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h138)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h137.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display.
The tenth display is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h139)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h123 to h138.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h140)
A game table equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the first display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the second display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the third display.
The first display is a display of characters related to the second display.
The second display is the display of the hold icon in the display mode of the look-ahead notice.
The third display is a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting to start.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started.
The third display may be started in the first state, and the third display may be started.
The third display, which started in the first state, may end in the second state.
After the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state.
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be started.
The above-mentioned certain effect is a notice regarding the display of the symbol variation during execution.
The second state may occur after the first state.
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed.
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h141)
The game console described in Appendix h140.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the sixth display.
The sixth display is at least a display of an image displayed behind the hold icon.
The hold icon can be displayed while the sixth display is displayed.
It is configured so that the hold icon is not displayed when the sixth display is not displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h142)
The game console described in Appendix h141.
In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping with the third display.
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h143)
The game console according to Appendix h141 or h142.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , It is easy to confirm the jackpot symbol in the symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h144)
The game console according to Appendix h141 or h142.
The sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types of modes.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the first aspect.
One aspect of the plurality of types is the second aspect.
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect is better than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. , The display of the second display is likely to start,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h145)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h141 to h144.
At least a portion of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h146)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h141 to h144.
The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h147)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h146.
It is configured to be able to perform a certain reach effect,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h148)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h147.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fourth display.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the fifth display.
The certain notice display is a display for notifying that the certain effect will be started.
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display.
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h149)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h148.
The third display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h150)
The game console according to any one of Supplementary note h140 to Supplementary note h149.
The first display, which is started to be displayed in a certain symbol variation display, is erased before the next symbol variation display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h151)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h150.
In the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h152)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h151.
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the seventh display.
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operating means.
The seventh display is a display in which the display is started after the third display is started.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started.
The third display is a display in which the display ends before the display of the seventh display is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h153)
The game console described in Appendix h152.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the eighth display.
The eighth display is a display foretelling that the display of the seventh display will start.
The third display is a display in which the display ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h154)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h153.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the ninth display.
The ninth display is a display of a variable icon.
Two of the above third indications may be displayed,
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other changes.
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h155)
The game console described in Appendix h154.
When two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h156)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h155.
The display of one of the plurality of types of displays is the tenth display.
The tenth display is an explanatory display.
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed.
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h157)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h140 to h156.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h158)
A production means that can execute timer production,
A display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
It is a game table equipped with
The timer effect is configured so that a certain effect can be started when the timer display is started and the timer display reaches a certain time.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon.
The second hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests that the timer effect may be started during the execution of a certain symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h159)
The game console described in Appendix h158.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that suggests the content of the certain effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h160)
The game console according to the appendix h158 or h159.
The second hold icon is configured to be displayable in a plurality of display modes.
One of the plurality of display modes is the second display mode.
The second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started a plurality of times during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h161)
The game console described in Appendix h160,
One of the plurality of display modes is the first display mode.
The first display mode is a display mode that suggests that one timer effect is started before the end of the certain symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h162)
The game console according to the appendix h160 or h161.

One of the plurality of hold icons is a third hold icon.
The third hold icon is a look-ahead notice hold icon.
The third hold icon is a hold icon on which a character is displayed.
The third hold icon is a hold icon that does not include a display suggesting that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of display modes is the third display mode.
The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the timer effect is started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display including the certain character.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h163)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h158 to h162.
It is configured to be able to execute the notification regarding the certain effect performed by the timer effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h164)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h158 to h163.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variable icon.
The second hold icon may be displayed as the variable icon in connection with the start of the certain symbol variation display.
The mode of the variation icon is changed (hereinafter, referred to as "first change") in connection with the execution of the timer effect once during the execution of the certain symbol variation display. Ori
The variation icon displayed by the first change is an icon that can suggest the remaining number of times that the timer effect can be started during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h165)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h158 to h164.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed in a manner that can suggest the time initially displayed as the timer display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h166)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h158 to h165.
A plurality of timer effects may be started at the same time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
One of the plurality of timer effects is the first timer effect.
One of the plurality of timer effects is a second timer effect.
The time initially displayed as the timer display (hereinafter, referred to as "first timer display") in the first timer effect and the timer display (hereinafter, "second timer display") in the second timer effect. The first time displayed as) is a different time,
The effect performed when the first timer display reaches the certain time and the effect performed when the second timer display reaches the certain time are different effects. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h167)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h158 to h166.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting a ball removal operation (hereinafter, referred to as "ball removal display").
The display of one of the timer display and the ball removal display may overlap with the other display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h168)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h158 to h167.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h169)
It is a game table equipped with a production means capable of executing multiple types of timer effects.
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is the first timer effect.
One of the plurality of types of timer effects is a second timer effect.
The first timer effect is an effect in which the first effect is started in response to the start of the first timer display and the first time of the first timer display.
The second timer effect is an effect in which the second effect is started in response to the start of the second timer display and the second timer display.
When the period in which the first timer display is displayed and the period in which the second timer display is displayed overlap during the execution of a certain decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first case". ) Is configured to be
It is configured so that at least one of the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h170)
The game console described in Appendix h169.
In the first case, the first timer effect may be executed as a notice and the second timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice (hereinafter, referred to as "second case").
In the first case, there is a case where the first timer effect and the second timer effect are executed as a notice (hereinafter, referred to as "third case").
In the first case, the first timer effect and the second timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case").
It is configured so that the time when the first effect is started and the time when the second effect is started may be different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h171)
The game console according to the appendix h169 or h170.
It is configured so that the first notice item may be displayed as the first effect.
When the first effect is executed as a notice, the notice corresponding to the first notice item is started during the execution of the certain decorative symbol variation display.
When the first effect is executed as a look-ahead notice, the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative symbol variation display") started after the certain decorative symbol variation display is being executed. It is configured so that the look-ahead notice corresponding to the first notice item is started.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h172)
It is a game table described in Appendix h170,
In the fourth case, the first effect may be started during the execution of the certain decorative symbol variation display.
In the fourth case, the second effect is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "first decorative symbol variation display") that is started after the certain decorative symbol variation display. It is configured to be

The first effect is a look-ahead notice effect for the first decorative symbol variation display.
The first effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes.
The second effect is a look-ahead notice effect for the first decorative symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h173)
The game console described in Appendix h172.
The second effect is an effect that further changes the display mode of the hold icon whose display mode has been changed by the first effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h174)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h173.
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is the first mini-game.
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game.
The first mini-game is a mini-game in which the result is derived before the first timer display reaches the first time.
The second mini-game is a mini-game in which the result is derived before the second timer display reaches the second time.
It is configured so that the first effect is performed according to the result of the first mini-game.
The second effect is configured to be performed according to the result of the second mini-game.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h175)
The game console described in Appendix h174.
When the result of the first mini-game is the first result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the first aspect.
When the result of the first mini-game is the third result, the first effect is configured to be performed in the third mode.
When the result of the second mini-game is the second result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the second mode.
When the result of the second mini-game is the fourth result, the second effect is configured to be performed in the fourth aspect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h176)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h175.
The timer display changes with time on the way to become a timer display having another effect.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h177)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h176.
It is configured so that the first timer display may be the first time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
It is configured so that the second timer display may be the second time during the execution of the certain symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h178)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h177.
The start time of the first timer display and the second timer display are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h179)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h178.
The time displayed as the initial display of the first timer display and the time displayed as the initial display of the second timer display are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h180)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h179.
The first time and the second time are the same time,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h181)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h180.
Equipped with display means
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display prompting a ball removal operation (hereinafter, referred to as "ball removal display").
The display of one of the first timer display and the ball removal display may overlap with the other display.
The display of one of the second timer display and the ball removal display may overlap with the other display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h182)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h180.
Equipped with display means
The effect means is the display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h183)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h169 to h182.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h184)
A game console equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of hold icons.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is the first hold icon.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon.
The first hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed as a notice.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice.
The second hold icon is a hold icon that is not displayed as a notice.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h185)
The game console described in Appendix h184.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of variable icons.
One of the plurality of types of variable icons is the first variable icon.
One of the plurality of types of variable icons is a second variable icon.
The first variable icon is a variable icon that may be displayed when a big hit occurs.
The first variable icon is a variable icon that may be displayed when it is out of alignment.
The second variable icon is a variable icon that may be displayed when a big hit occurs.
The second variable icon is a variable icon that is not displayed when it is out of alignment.
The first hold icon is a hold icon that is more likely to be displayed when the first change icon is displayed than when the second change icon is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h186)
The game console according to the appendix h184 or h185.
Equipped with directing means that can execute mini games
The first hold icon is a hold icon that is not displayed as a look-ahead notice.
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon.
The third hold icon is the default hold icon and
Depending on the result of the mini-game, at least a part of the hold icons are configured to be displayed in a different manner after the third hold icon is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h187)
The game console described in Appendix h186.
The mini-game is configured so that the mini-game may be started in a state where the hold icon is not displayed (hereinafter, referred to as "first state").
In the first state, the first hold icon is displayed according to the result of the mini game.
The hold icon that is increased and displayed from the start of the mini-game until the result of the mini-game is derived changes to the hold icon of Daiichi after being displayed by the third hold icon. Is configured to be displayed
The hold icon that is increased and displayed after the result of the mini game is derived is configured to be displayed by the first hold icon instead of being displayed by the third hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h188)
The game console described in Appendix h186.
The notice by the first hold icon is configured so that one notice is given by a plurality of the first hold icons.
A part of the hold icon displayed before the mini-game starts announces that the mini-game will start.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h189)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h184 to h188.
It is configured so that the first hold icon may change to the third hold icon after the symbol variation display for which the notice has been given by the first hold icon is completed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h190)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h184 to h188.
After the symbol variation display for which the notice by the first hold icon has been performed is completed, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h191)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h184 to h190.
The "hold icon that may be displayed as a notice" described in the appendix h184 is a hold icon that gives a notice regarding the display of the symbol change during execution.
The "hold icon that may be displayed as a look-ahead notice" described in the appendix h184 is a hold icon that gives a notice regarding the symbol variation display that is the target of the displayed hold icon.
A game table that eavesdrops on things.

(Appendix h192)
The game area and
A plurality of winning means provided in the game area and
With multiple game ball detection means,
A counting means that can count the number of game balls,
Judgment means that can judge errors and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is the first winning means,
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is the first game ball detecting means.
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a third game ball detecting means.
The first game ball detecting means is a means capable of detecting a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "first game ball") that has won a prize in the first winning means.
The third game ball detecting means is a means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (hereinafter, referred to as "third game ball").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the first game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "first number").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the third game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "third number").
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the first number when the third number reaches a certain value.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h193)
The game console described in Appendix h192.
It is configured to be able to take the game state of one of multiple game consoles.
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which left-handed hitting is recommended.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which right-handed striking is recommended.
The first winning means is a winning means in which a game ball fired by left-handed is easier to win than a game ball fired by right-handed.
The counting means is a means configured to be able to count the third number for each gaming state.
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the first number when the third number fired in the first gaming state reaches the certain value.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h194)
The game console described in Appendix h193.
The determination means is a means for executing an error determination by determining the first number when the third number fired in the second gaming state reaches the certain value.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h195)
The game console described in Appendix h193 or h194.
The counting means is configured to reset the third number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches the certain value.
The counting means is configured to reset the third number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches the certain value.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number in the first gaming state, and the third number is counted from the first gaming state before the third number reaches a certain value. Even when the gaming state changes to the second gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the third number is not reset.
The counting means continues the third number in the first gaming state after the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case. It is configured to count,
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h196)
The game console described in Appendix h195.
The second gaming state is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number in the second gaming state, and the third number is counted from the second gaming state before the third number reaches a certain value. It is configured to reset the third number even if the first gaming state changes.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h197)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h193 to h196.
The first winning means is a winning means composed of a plurality of general winning openings (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of first general winning openings").
The counting means is a means for counting the same first number regardless of which of the plurality of first general winning openings is won.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h198)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h192 to h197.
One of the plurality of winning means is a second winning means,
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a second game ball detecting means.
The second game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as a "second game ball") that has won a prize in the second winning means.
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the second game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "second number").
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the second number when the third number reaches a certain value.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h199)
The game console described in Appendix h198.
The judgment value of the first number judged to be an error and the judgment value of the second number judged to be an error are different.
A game table characterized by that.

Here, the determination value of the first number determined to be an error and the determination value of the second number determined to be an error may be the same.

(Appendix h200)
The game console according to Appendix h198 or h199.
The second winning means is a winning means in which a game ball fired toward the right side of the game area is easier to win than a game ball fired toward the left side of the game area.
The second winning means is a winning means composed of a plurality of general winning openings (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of second general winning openings").
The counting means is a means for counting the same second number regardless of which of the plurality of second general winning openings is won.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h201)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h198 to h200.
The determination means is a means for determining an error when the second number is larger than the second determination value when the third number reaches the certain value.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h202)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h192 to h201.
The determination means is a means for determining an error when the first number is larger than the first determination value when the third number reaches the certain value.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h203)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h192 to h202.
It is configured to output a security signal when an error is determined by the determination means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h204)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h192 to h203.
Equipped with display means
An error display may be displayed when an error is determined by the determination means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h205)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h192 to h204.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

FIG. 491 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 491, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 into the gaming area 902 is discharged from the gaming area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is arranged below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 1 are not provided.

It should be noted that the above-described display means 903 may be further provided on the upper plate 126 of the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 289, and further, the display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display means 903 can function as an operating means. Then, the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, the continuous hit operation, or the long press operation by the touch panel, or when the long press auto continuous hit function is in the effective state, the touch panel. May be configured to perform a pseudo-continuous hitting operation on the touch panel while the touch panel is continuously touched. Further, it may be configured so as not to enable the long press auto continuous striking function. Further, in some productions, the long press auto continuous striking function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press auto-striking function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to be activated more or less. .. Further, there are a plurality of effects by the continuous hitting operation on the touch panel, and when the touch panel is used, the long press auto continuous hitting function may be configured so as not to be effective in many cases, or may be configured to be small in number. ..

As described above, the pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 491 is used by enclosing a ball and circulating the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine, and using the enclosed ball as a launching ball and paying out the ball. May be executed by credit.

Next, a slot machine (rotary barrel game machine) as a game table applicable to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 492. Here, FIG. 492 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 492 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 492), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged are stored on the outer peripheral surface of the slot machine 1000. It is configured to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 1010 to 1012 functions as a display means for variably displaying a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 1014. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If 3 medals are valid and 3 medals are bet, 5 lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, the down winning line and the upper right winning line, may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, a valid winning line may be referred to as a valid line.

The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for directing.

The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, a maximum of three medals are inserted each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and 3 when the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or the actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion port 1041, and the insertion means that both are included. Is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion port 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of the operating means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel subject to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, the reel subject to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel subject to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 1034 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 is provided as an example of the operating means. The chance button 1100 can be operated in relation to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012, or can be operated in relation to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states like the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. In this embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operating means.

A title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided at the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, and the title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout outlet 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided at the lower part of the title panel 1062.

The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 1060 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 composed of two right shutters 1063a and a left shutter 1063b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) arranged behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game). It has a structure that appears on the person's side).

In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the periphery of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 493 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 2002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 2008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 2010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in the figure (b) has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, as the recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Even if the constituent requirements are included only in the above-described embodiments, modifications, and appendices, the constituent requirements may be applied to other embodiments, modifications, and appendices.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Direction button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 1st special figure display device 214 2nd special figure display device 224 Production movable body 246 Cloaking device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 1st sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Game board lamp 542 Game underframe lamp

Claims (5)

The game area and
A plurality of winning means provided in the game area and
With multiple game ball detection means,
A counting means that can count the number of game balls,
Judgment means that can execute error judgment,
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of winning means is the first winning means,
The first winning means is a winning means that is easy to win when the game ball is launched toward the left side of the game area.
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is the first game ball detecting means.
One of the plurality of game ball detecting means is a third game ball detecting means.
The first game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting a game ball (hereinafter, referred to as "first game ball") that has won a prize in the first winning means.
The third game ball detecting means is a game ball detecting means capable of detecting all the game balls discharged from the game area (hereinafter, referred to as "third game ball").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the first game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "first number").
The counting means is a means capable of counting the number of the third game balls (hereinafter, referred to as "third number").
It is possible to take one of multiple gaming states,
One of the plurality of gaming states is the first gaming state,
One of the plurality of gaming states is a second gaming state.
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball toward the left side of the gaming area.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which it is recommended to launch a gaming ball toward the right side of the gaming area.
The counting means is a means capable of counting the third number for each gaming state.
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the first number when the third number in the first gaming state reaches a certain value.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The determination means is a means for determining an error by determining the first number when the third number in the second gaming state reaches the certain value.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1 or 2.
The counting means is a means for resetting the third number corresponding to the first gaming state when the third number in the first gaming state reaches the certain value.
The counting means is a means for resetting the third number corresponding to the second gaming state when the third number in the second gaming state reaches the certain value.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number in the first gaming state, and before the third number corresponding to the first gaming state reaches the certain value. Even when the gaming state changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), the third gaming state corresponding to the first gaming state. It ’s a way to not reset the number,
When the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state after the first case, the counting means counts the third number corresponding to the first gaming state. A way to resume,
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 3.
The second gaming state is more advantageous than the first gaming state.
The counting means is in a state of counting the third number in the second gaming state, and before the third number corresponding to the second gaming state reaches the certain value. It is a means for resetting the third number corresponding to the second gaming state even when the gaming state changes from the second gaming state to the first gaming state.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.